1 . $Cambridge: exim/doc/doc-docbook/spec.xfpt,v 1.3 2006/04/27 15:19:27 ph10 Exp $
3 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4 . This is the primary source of the Exim Manual. It is an xfpt document that is
5 . converted into DocBook XML for subsequent conversion into printing and online
6 . formats. The markup used herein is "standard" xfpt markup, with some extras.
7 . The markup is summarized in a file called Markup.txt.
8 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16 . These definitions set some parameters and save some typing. Remember that
17 . the <bookinfo> element must also be updated for each new edition.
18 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20 .set ACL "access control lists (ACLs)"
21 .set previousversion "4.61"
25 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26 . Additional xfpt markup used by this document, over and above the default
27 . provided in the xfpt library.
28 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30 . --- Override the &$ flag to automatically insert a $ with the variable name
32 .flag &$ $& "<varname>$" "</varname>"
34 . --- Short flags for daggers in option headings. They will always be inside
35 . --- an italic string, but we want the daggers to be roman.
37 .flag &!! "</emphasis>†<emphasis>"
38 .flag &!? "</emphasis>‡<emphasis>"
40 . --- A macro for an Exim option definition heading, generating a one-line
41 . --- table with four columns.
45 .itable all 0 0 4 8* left 5* center 5* center 6* right
46 .row "&%$1%&" "Use: &'$2'&" "Type: &'$3'&" "Default: &'$4'&"
50 . --- A macro for the common 2-column tables. The width of the first column
51 . --- is suitable for the many tables at the start of the main options chapter;
52 . --- the small number of other 2-column tables override it.
54 .macro table2 190pt 260pt
55 .itable none 0 0 2 $1 left $2 left
58 . --- Macros for the concept and option index entries. For a "range" style of
59 . --- entry, use .scindex for the start and .ecindex for the end. The first
60 . --- argument of .scindex and the only argument of .ecindex must be the ID
61 . --- that ties them together.
64 &<indexterm role="concept">&
65 &<primary>&$1&</primary>&
67 &<secondary>&$2&</secondary>&
73 &<indexterm role="concept" id="$1" class="startofrange">&
74 &<primary>&$2&</primary>&
76 &<secondary>&$3&</secondary>&
82 &<indexterm role="concept" startref="$1" class="endofrange"/>&
86 &<indexterm role="option">&
87 &<primary>&$1&</primary>&
89 &<secondary>&$2&</secondary>&
95 .echo "** Don't use .index; use .cindex or .oindex"
97 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
100 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
101 . The <bookinfo> element is removed from the XML before processing for Ascii
103 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
107 <title>Specification of the Exim Mail Transfer Agent</title>
108 <titleabbrev>The Exim MTA</titleabbrev>
109 <date>27 April 2006</date>
110 <author><firstname>Philip</firstname><surname>Hazel</surname></author>
111 <authorinitials>PH</authorinitials>
112 <affiliation><orgname>University of Cambridge Computing Service</orgname></affiliation>
113 <address>New Museums Site, Pembroke Street, Cambridge CB2 3QH, England</address>
114 <revhistory><revision>
115 <revnumber>4.62</revnumber>
116 <date>27 April 2006</date>
117 <authorinitials>PH</authorinitials>
118 </revision></revhistory>
119 <copyright><year>2006</year><holder>University of Cambridge</holder></copyright>
124 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
125 . This chunk of literal XML implements index entries of the form "x, see y" and
126 . "x, see also y". However, the DocBook DTD doesn't allow <indexterm> entries
127 . at the top level, so we have to put the .chapter directive first.
128 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
130 .chapter "Introduction"
133 <indexterm role="concept">
134 <primary>$1, $2, etc.</primary>
135 <see><emphasis>numerical variables</emphasis></see>
137 <indexterm role="concept">
138 <primary>address</primary>
139 <secondary>rewriting</secondary>
140 <see><emphasis>rewriting</emphasis></see>
142 <indexterm role="concept">
143 <primary>Bounce Address Tag Validation</primary>
144 <see><emphasis>BATV</emphasis></see>
146 <indexterm role="concept">
147 <primary>Client SMTP Authorization</primary>
148 <see><emphasis>CSA</emphasis></see>
150 <indexterm role="concept">
151 <primary>CR character</primary>
152 <see><emphasis>carriage return</emphasis></see>
154 <indexterm role="concept">
155 <primary>CRL</primary>
156 <see><emphasis>certificate revocation list</emphasis></see>
158 <indexterm role="concept">
159 <primary>delivery</primary>
160 <secondary>failure report</secondary>
161 <see><emphasis>bounce message</emphasis></see>
163 <indexterm role="concept">
164 <primary>dialup</primary>
165 <see><emphasis>intermittently connected hosts</emphasis></see>
167 <indexterm role="concept">
168 <primary>exiscan</primary>
169 <see><emphasis>content scanning</emphasis></see>
171 <indexterm role="concept">
172 <primary>failover</primary>
173 <see><emphasis>fallback</emphasis></see>
175 <indexterm role="concept">
176 <primary>fallover</primary>
177 <see><emphasis>fallback</emphasis></see>
179 <indexterm role="concept">
180 <primary>filter</primary>
181 <secondary>Sieve</secondary>
182 <see><emphasis>Sieve filter</emphasis></see>
184 <indexterm role="concept">
185 <primary>ident</primary>
186 <see><emphasis>RFC 1413</emphasis></see>
188 <indexterm role="concept">
189 <primary>LF character</primary>
190 <see><emphasis>linefeed</emphasis></see>
192 <indexterm role="concept">
193 <primary>maximum</primary>
194 <see><emphasis>limit</emphasis></see>
196 <indexterm role="concept">
197 <primary>monitor</primary>
198 <see><emphasis>Exim monitor</emphasis></see>
200 <indexterm role="concept">
201 <primary>no_<emphasis>xxx</emphasis></primary>
202 <see>entry for xxx</see>
204 <indexterm role="concept">
205 <primary>NUL</primary>
206 <see><emphasis>binary zero</emphasis></see>
208 <indexterm role="concept">
209 <primary>passwd file</primary>
210 <see><emphasis>/etc/passwd</emphasis></see>
212 <indexterm role="concept">
213 <primary>process id</primary>
214 <see><emphasis>pid</emphasis></see>
216 <indexterm role="concept">
217 <primary>RBL</primary>
218 <see><emphasis>DNS list</emphasis></see>
220 <indexterm role="concept">
221 <primary>redirection</primary>
222 <see><emphasis>address redirection</emphasis></see>
224 <indexterm role="concept">
225 <primary>return path</primary>
226 <seealso><emphasis>envelope sender</emphasis></seealso>
228 <indexterm role="concept">
229 <primary>scanning</primary>
230 <see><emphasis>content scanning</emphasis></see>
232 <indexterm role="concept">
233 <primary>SSL</primary>
234 <see><emphasis>TLS</emphasis></see>
236 <indexterm role="concept">
237 <primary>string</primary>
238 <secondary>expansion</secondary>
239 <see><emphasis>expansion</emphasis></see>
241 <indexterm role="concept">
242 <primary>top bit</primary>
243 <see><emphasis>8-bit characters</emphasis></see>
245 <indexterm role="concept">
246 <primary>variables</primary>
247 <see><emphasis>expansion, variables</emphasis></see>
249 <indexterm role="concept">
250 <primary>zero, binary</primary>
251 <see><emphasis>binary zero</emphasis></see>
257 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
258 . This is the real start of the first chapter. See the comment above as to why
259 . we can't have the .chapter line here.
260 . chapter "Introduction"
261 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
263 Exim is a mail transfer agent (MTA) for hosts that are running Unix or
264 Unix-like operating systems. It was designed on the assumption that it would be
265 run on hosts that are permanently connected to the Internet. However, it can be
266 used on intermittently connected hosts with suitable configuration adjustments.
268 Configuration files currently exist for the following operating systems: AIX,
269 BSD/OS (aka BSDI), Darwin (Mac OS X), DGUX, Dragonfly, FreeBSD, GNU/Hurd,
270 GNU/Linux, HI-OSF (Hitachi), HI-UX, HP-UX, IRIX, MIPS RISCOS, NetBSD, OpenBSD,
271 OpenUNIX, QNX, SCO, SCO SVR4.2 (aka UNIX-SV), Solaris (aka SunOS5), SunOS4,
272 Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX, formerly DEC-OSF1), Ultrix, and Unixware.
273 Some of these operating systems are no longer current and cannot easily be
274 tested, so the configuration files may no longer work in practice.
276 There are also configuration files for compiling Exim in the Cygwin environment
277 that can be installed on systems running Windows. However, this document does
278 not contain any information about running Exim in the Cygwin environment.
280 The terms and conditions for the use and distribution of Exim are contained in
281 the file &_NOTICE_&. Exim is distributed under the terms of the GNU General
282 Public Licence, a copy of which may be found in the file &_LICENCE_&.
284 The use, supply or promotion of Exim for the purpose of sending bulk,
285 unsolicited electronic mail is incompatible with the basic aims of the program,
286 which revolve around the free provision of a service that enhances the quality
287 of personal communications. The author of Exim regards indiscriminate
288 mass-mailing as an antisocial, irresponsible abuse of the Internet.
290 Exim owes a great deal to Smail 3 and its author, Ron Karr. Without the
291 experience of running and working on the Smail 3 code, I could never have
292 contemplated starting to write a new MTA. Many of the ideas and user interfaces
293 were originally taken from Smail 3, though the actual code of Exim is entirely
294 new, and has developed far beyond the initial concept.
296 Many people, both in Cambridge and around the world, have contributed to the
297 development and the testing of Exim, and to porting it to various operating
298 systems. I am grateful to them all. The distribution now contains a file called
299 &_ACKNOWLEDGMENTS_&, in which I have started recording the names of
303 .section "Exim documentation"
305 .cindex "documentation"
306 This edition of the Exim specification applies to version &version; of Exim.
307 Substantive changes from the &previousversion; edition are marked in some
308 renditions of the document; this paragraph is so marked if the rendition is
309 capable of showing a change indicator.
312 This document is very much a reference manual; it is not a tutorial. The reader
313 is expected to have some familiarity with the SMTP mail transfer protocol and
314 with general Unix system administration. Although there are some discussions
315 and examples in places, the information is mostly organized in a way that makes
316 it easy to look up, rather than in a natural order for sequential reading.
317 Furthermore, the manual aims to cover every aspect of Exim in detail, including
318 a number of rarely-used, special-purpose features that are unlikely to be of
321 .cindex "books about Exim"
322 An &"easier"& discussion of Exim which provides more in-depth explanatory,
323 introductory, and tutorial material can be found in a book entitled &'The Exim
324 SMTP Mail Server'&, published by UIT Cambridge
325 (&url(http://www.uit.co.uk/exim-book/)).
327 This book also contains a chapter that gives a general introduction to SMTP and
328 Internet mail. Inevitably, however, the book is unlikely to be fully up-to-date
329 with the latest release of Exim. (Note that the earlier book about Exim,
330 published by O'Reilly, covers Exim 3, and many things have changed in Exim 4.)
332 .cindex "Debian" "information sources"
333 If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you will find information about
334 Debian-specific features in the file
336 &_/usr/share/doc/exim4-base/README.Debian_&
338 The command &(man update-exim.conf)& is another source of Debian-specific
341 .cindex "&_doc/NewStuff_&"
342 .cindex "&_doc/ChangeLog_&"
344 As the program develops, there may be features in newer versions that have not
345 yet made it into this document, which is updated only when the most significant
346 digit of the fractional part of the version number changes. Specifications of
347 new features that are not yet in this manual are placed in the file
348 &_doc/NewStuff_& in the Exim distribution.
350 Some features may be classified as &"experimental"&. These may change
351 incompatibly while they are developing, or even be withdrawn. For this reason,
352 they are not documented in this manual. Information about experimental features
353 can be found in the file &_doc/experimental.txt_&.
355 All changes to the program (whether new features, bug fixes, or other kinds of
356 change) are noted briefly in the file called &_doc/ChangeLog_&.
358 .cindex "&_doc/spec.txt_&"
359 This specification itself is available as an ASCII file in &_doc/spec.txt_& so
360 that it can easily be searched with a text editor. Other files in the &_doc_&
364 .row &_OptionLists.txt_& "list of all options in alphabetical order"
365 .row &_dbm.discuss.txt_& "discussion about DBM libraries"
366 .row &_exim.8_& "a man page of Exim's command line options"
367 .row &_experimental.txt_& "documentation of experimental features"
368 .row &_filter.txt_& "specification of the filter language"
369 .row &_pcrepattern.txt_& "specification of PCRE regular expressions"
370 .row &_pcretest.txt_& "specification of the PCRE testing program"
371 .row &_Exim3.upgrade_& "upgrade notes from release 2 to release 3"
372 .row &_Exim4.upgrade_& "upgrade notes from release 3 to release 4"
375 The main specification and the specification of the filtering language are also
376 available in other formats (HTML, PostScript, PDF, and Texinfo). Section
377 &<<SECTavail>>& below tells you how to get hold of these.
381 .section "FTP and web sites"
384 The primary site for Exim source distributions is currently the University of
385 Cambridge's FTP site, whose contents are described in &'Where to find the Exim
386 distribution'& below. In addition, there is a web site and an FTP site at
387 &%exim.org%&. These are now also hosted at the University of Cambridge. The
388 &%exim.org%& site was previously hosted for a number of years by Energis
389 Squared, formerly Planet Online Ltd, whose support I gratefully acknowledge.
393 As well as Exim distribution tar files, the Exim web site contains a number of
394 differently formatted versions of the documentation, including the FAQ in both
395 text and HTML formats. The HTML version comes with a keyword-in-context index.
396 A recent addition to the online information is the Exim wiki
397 (&url(http://www.exim.org/eximwiki/)). We hope that this will make it easier
398 for Exim users to contribute examples, tips, and know-how for the benefit of
403 .section "Mailing lists"
404 .cindex "mailing lists" "for Exim users"
405 The following are the three main Exim mailing lists:
408 .row &'exim-users@exim.org'& "general discussion list"
409 .row &'exim-dev@exim.org'& "discussion of bugs, enhancements, etc."
410 .row &'exim-announce@exim.org'& "moderated, low volume announcements list"
413 You can subscribe to these lists, change your existing subscriptions, and view
414 or search the archives via the mailing lists link on the Exim home page.
415 .cindex "Debian" "mailing list for"
416 If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you may wish to subscribe to
417 the Debian-specific mailing list &'pkg-exim4-users@lists.alioth.debian.org'&.
419 .section "Exim training"
420 .cindex "training courses"
421 From time to time (approximately annually at the time of writing), training
422 courses are run by the author of Exim in Cambridge, UK. Details of any
423 forthcoming courses can be found on the web site
424 &url(http://www-tus.csx.cam.ac.uk/courses/exim/).
427 .section "Bug reports"
428 .cindex "bug reports"
429 .cindex "reporting bugs"
430 Reports of obvious bugs should be emailed to &'bugs@exim.org'&. However, if you
431 are unsure whether some behaviour is a bug or not, the best thing to do is to
432 post a message to the &'exim-dev'& mailing list and have it discussed.
436 .section "Where to find the Exim distribution" "SECTavail"
438 .cindex "distribution" "ftp site"
439 The master ftp site for the Exim distribution is
441 &*ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/email/exim*&
445 &*ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim*&
447 The file references that follow are relative to the &_exim_& directories at
448 these sites. There are now quite a number of independent mirror sites around
449 the world. Those that I know about are listed in the file called &_Mirrors_&.
451 Within the &_exim_& directory there are subdirectories called &_exim3_& (for
452 previous Exim 3 distributions), &_exim4_& (for the latest Exim 4
453 distributions), and &_Testing_& for testing versions. In the &_exim4_&
454 subdirectory, the current release can always be found in files called
457 &_exim-n.nn.tar.bz2_&
459 where &'n.nn'& is the highest such version number in the directory. The two
460 files contain identical data; the only difference is the type of compression.
461 The &_.bz2_& file is usually a lot smaller than the &_.gz_& file.
463 .cindex "distribution" "signing details"
464 .cindex "distribution" "public key"
465 .cindex "public key for signed distribution"
466 The distributions are currently signed with Philip Hazel's GPG key. The
467 corresponding public key is available from a number of keyservers, and there is
468 also a copy in the file &_Public-Key_&. The signatures for the tar bundles are
471 &_exim-n.nn.tar.gz.sig_&
472 &_exim-n.nn.tar.bz2.sig_&
474 For each released version, the log of changes is made separately available in a
475 separate file in the directory &_ChangeLogs_& so that it is possible to
476 find out what has changed without having to download the entire distribution.
478 .cindex "documentation" "available formats"
479 The main distribution contains ASCII versions of this specification and other
480 documentation; other formats of the documents are available in separate files
481 inside the &_exim4_& directory of the FTP site:
483 &_exim-html-n.nn.tar.gz_&
484 &_exim-pdf-n.nn.tar.gz_&
485 &_exim-postscript-n.nn.tar.gz_&
486 &_exim-texinfo-n.nn.tar.gz_&
488 These tar files contain only the &_doc_& directory, not the complete
489 distribution, and are also available in &_.bz2_& as well as &_.gz_& forms.
491 The FAQ is available for downloading in two different formats in these files:
494 &_exim4/FAQ.html.tar.gz_&
496 The first of these is a single ASCII file that can be searched with a text
497 editor. The second is a directory of HTML files, normally accessed by starting
498 at &_index.html_&. The HTML version of the FAQ (which is also included in the
499 HTML documentation tarbundle) includes a keyword-in-context index, which is
500 often the most convenient way of finding your way around.
505 A wish list is maintained, containing ideas for new features that have been
506 submitted. From time to time the file is exported to the ftp site into the file
507 &_exim4/WishList_&. Items are removed from the list if they get implemented.
511 .section "Contributed material"
512 .cindex "contributed material"
513 At the ftp site, there is a directory called &_Contrib_& that contains
514 miscellaneous files contributed to the Exim community by Exim users. There is
515 also a collection of contributed configuration examples in
516 &_exim4/config.samples.tar.gz_&. These samples are referenced from the FAQ.
520 .section "Limitations"
522 .cindex "limitations of Exim"
523 .cindex "bang paths" "not handled by Exim"
524 Exim is designed for use as an Internet MTA, and therefore handles addresses in
525 RFC 2822 domain format only. It cannot handle UUCP &"bang paths"&, though
526 simple two-component bang paths can be converted by a straightforward rewriting
527 configuration. This restriction does not prevent Exim from being interfaced to
528 UUCP as a transport mechanism, provided that domain addresses are used.
530 .cindex "domainless addresses"
531 .cindex "address" "without domain"
532 Exim insists that every address it handles has a domain attached. For incoming
533 local messages, domainless addresses are automatically qualified with a
534 configured domain value. Configuration options specify from which remote
535 systems unqualified addresses are acceptable. These are then qualified on
538 .cindex "transport" "external"
539 .cindex "external transports"
540 The only external transport mechanisms that are currently implemented are SMTP
541 and LMTP over a TCP/IP network (including support for IPv6). However, a pipe
542 transport is available, and there are facilities for writing messages to files
543 and pipes, optionally in &'batched SMTP'& format; these facilities can be used
544 to send messages to other transport mechanisms such as UUCP, provided they can
545 handle domain-style addresses. Batched SMTP input is also catered for.
547 Exim is not designed for storing mail for dial-in hosts. When the volumes of
548 such mail are large, it is better to get the messages &"delivered"& into files
549 (that is, off Exim's queue) and subsequently passed on to the dial-in hosts by
552 Although Exim does have basic facilities for scanning incoming messages, these
553 are not comprehensive enough to do full virus or spam scanning. Such operations
554 are best carried out using additional specialized software packages. If you
555 compile Exim with the content-scanning extension, straightforward interfaces to
556 a number of common scanners are provided.
560 .section "Run time configuration"
561 Exim's run time configuration is held in a single text file that is divided
562 into a number of sections. The entries in this file consist of keywords and
563 values, in the style of Smail 3 configuration files. A default configuration
564 file which is suitable for simple online installations is provided in the
565 distribution, and is described in chapter &<<CHAPdefconfil>>& below.
568 .section "Calling interface"
569 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "command line interface"
570 Like many MTAs, Exim has adopted the Sendmail command line interface so that it
571 can be a straight replacement for &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& or
572 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& when sending mail, but you do not need to know anything
573 about Sendmail in order to run Exim. For actions other than sending messages,
574 Sendmail-compatible options also exist, but those that produce output (for
575 example, &%-bp%&, which lists the messages on the queue) do so in Exim's own
576 format. There are also some additional options that are compatible with Smail
577 3, and some further options that are new to Exim. Chapter &<<CHAPcommandline>>&
578 documents all Exim's command line options. This information is automatically
579 made into the man page that forms part of the Exim distribution.
581 Control of messages on the queue can be done via certain privileged command
582 line options. There is also an optional monitor program called &'eximon'&,
583 which displays current information in an X window, and which contains a menu
584 interface to Exim's command line administration options.
588 .section "Terminology"
589 .cindex "terminology definitions"
590 .cindex "body of message" "definition of"
591 The &'body'& of a message is the actual data that the sender wants to transmit.
592 It is the last part of a message, and is separated from the &'header'& (see
593 below) by a blank line.
595 .cindex "bounce message" "definition of"
596 When a message cannot be delivered, it is normally returned to the sender in a
597 delivery failure message or a &"non-delivery report"& (NDR). The term
598 &'bounce'& is commonly used for this action, and the error reports are often
599 called &'bounce messages'&. This is a convenient shorthand for &"delivery
600 failure error report"&. Such messages have an empty sender address in the
601 message's &'envelope'& (see below) to ensure that they cannot themselves give
602 rise to further bounce messages.
604 The term &'default'& appears frequently in this manual. It is used to qualify a
605 value which is used in the absence of any setting in the configuration. It may
606 also qualify an action which is taken unless a configuration setting specifies
609 The term &'defer'& is used when the delivery of a message to a specific
610 destination cannot immediately take place for some reason (a remote host may be
611 down, or a user's local mailbox may be full). Such deliveries are &'deferred'&
614 The word &'domain'& is sometimes used to mean all but the first component of a
615 host's name. It is &'not'& used in that sense here, where it normally refers to
616 the part of an email address following the @ sign.
618 .cindex "envelope" "definition of"
619 .cindex "sender" "definition of"
620 A message in transit has an associated &'envelope'&, as well as a header and a
621 body. The envelope contains a sender address (to which bounce messages should
622 be delivered), and any number of recipient addresses. References to the
623 sender or the recipients of a message usually mean the addresses in the
624 envelope. An MTA uses these addresses for delivery, and for returning bounce
625 messages, not the addresses that appear in the header lines.
627 .cindex "message header" "definition of"
628 .cindex "header section" "definition of"
629 The &'header'& of a message is the first part of a message's text, consisting
630 of a number of lines, each of which has a name such as &'From:'&, &'To:'&,
631 &'Subject:'&, etc. Long header lines can be split over several text lines by
632 indenting the continuations. The header is separated from the body by a blank
635 .cindex "local part" "definition of"
636 .cindex "domain" "definition of"
637 The term &'local part'&, which is taken from RFC 2822, is used to refer to that
638 part of an email address that precedes the @ sign. The part that follows the
639 @ sign is called the &'domain'& or &'mail domain'&.
641 .cindex "local delivery" "definition of"
642 .cindex "remote delivery" "definition of"
643 The terms &'local delivery'& and &'remote delivery'& are used to distinguish
644 delivery to a file or a pipe on the local host from delivery by SMTP over
645 TCP/IP to another host. As far as Exim is concerned, all hosts other than the
646 host it is running on are &'remote'&.
648 .cindex "return path" "definition of"
649 &'Return path'& is another name that is used for the sender address in a
652 .cindex "queue" "definition of"
653 The term &'queue'& is used to refer to the set of messages awaiting delivery,
654 because this term is in widespread use in the context of MTAs. However, in
655 Exim's case the reality is more like a pool than a queue, because there is
656 normally no ordering of waiting messages.
658 .cindex "queue runner" "definition of"
659 The term &'queue runner'& is used to describe a process that scans the queue
660 and attempts to deliver those messages whose retry times have come. This term
661 is used by other MTAs, and also relates to the command &%runq%&, but in Exim
662 the waiting messages are normally processed in an unpredictable order.
664 .cindex "spool directory" "definition of"
665 The term &'spool directory'& is used for a directory in which Exim keeps the
666 messages on its queue &-- that is, those that it is in the process of
667 delivering. This should not be confused with the directory in which local
668 mailboxes are stored, which is called a &"spool directory"& by some people. In
669 the Exim documentation, &"spool"& is always used in the first sense.
676 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
677 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
679 .chapter "Incorporated code"
680 .cindex "incorporated code"
681 .cindex "regular expressions" "library"
683 A number of pieces of external code are included in the Exim distribution.
686 Regular expressions are supported in the main Exim program and in the Exim
687 monitor using the freely-distributable PCRE library, copyright ©
688 University of Cambridge. The source is distributed in the directory
689 &_src/pcre_&. However, this is a cut-down version of PCRE. If you want to use
690 the PCRE library in other programs, you should obtain and install the full
691 version from &url(ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/programming/pcre).
693 .cindex "cdb" "acknowledgement"
694 Support for the cdb (Constant DataBase) lookup method is provided by code
695 contributed by Nigel Metheringham of (at the time he contributed it) Planet
696 Online Ltd. The implementation is completely contained within the code of Exim.
697 It does not link against an external cdb library. The code contains the
698 following statements:
701 Copyright © 1998 Nigel Metheringham, Planet Online Ltd
703 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
704 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
705 Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
708 This code implements Dan Bernstein's Constant DataBase (cdb) spec. Information,
709 the spec and sample code for cdb can be obtained from
710 &url(http://www.pobox.com/~djb/cdb.html). This implementation borrows some
711 code from Dan Bernstein's implementation (which has no license restrictions
715 .cindex "SPA authentication"
716 .cindex "Samba project"
717 .cindex "Microsoft Secure Password Authentication"
718 Client support for Microsoft's &'Secure Password Authentication'& is provided
719 by code contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux. Server support was contributed by
720 Tom Kistner. This includes code taken from the Samba project, which is released
724 .cindex "&'pwcheck'& daemon"
725 .cindex "&'pwauthd'& daemon"
726 Support for calling the Cyrus &'pwcheck'& and &'saslauthd'& daemons is provided
727 by code taken from the Cyrus-SASL library and adapted by Alexander S.
728 Sabourenkov. The permission notice appears below, in accordance with the
729 conditions expressed therein.
732 Copyright © 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
734 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
735 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
739 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
740 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
742 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
743 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
744 the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
747 The name &"Carnegie Mellon University"& must not be used to
748 endorse or promote products derived from this software without
749 prior written permission. For permission or any other legal
750 details, please contact
752 Office of Technology Transfer
753 Carnegie Mellon University
755 Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
756 (412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
757 tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
760 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
763 &"This product includes software developed by Computing Services
764 at Carnegie Mellon University (&url(http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."&
766 CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
767 THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
768 AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE
769 FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
770 WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
771 AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
772 OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
777 .cindex "Exim monitor" "acknowledgement"
780 The Exim Monitor program, which is an X-Window application, includes
781 modified versions of the Athena StripChart and TextPop widgets.
782 This code is copyright by DEC and MIT, and their permission notice appears
783 below, in accordance with the conditions expressed therein.
786 Copyright 1987, 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts,
787 and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
791 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
792 documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
793 provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
794 both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
795 supporting documentation, and that the names of Digital or MIT not be
796 used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
797 software without specific, written prior permission.
799 DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
800 ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
801 DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
802 ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
803 WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
804 ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
809 Many people have contributed code fragments, some large, some small, that were
810 not covered by any specific licence requirements. It is assumed that the
811 contributors are happy to see their code incoporated into Exim under the GPL.
818 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
819 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
821 .chapter "How Exim receives and delivers mail" "" &&&
822 "Receiving and delivering mail"
825 .section "Overall philosophy"
826 .cindex "design philosophy"
827 Exim is designed to work efficiently on systems that are permanently connected
828 to the Internet and are handling a general mix of mail. In such circumstances,
829 most messages can be delivered immediately. Consequently, Exim does not
830 maintain independent queues of messages for specific domains or hosts, though
831 it does try to send several messages in a single SMTP connection after a host
832 has been down, and it also maintains per-host retry information.
835 .section "Policy control"
836 .cindex "policy control" "overview"
837 Policy controls are now an important feature of MTAs that are connected to the
838 Internet. Perhaps their most important job is to stop MTAs being abused as
839 &"open relays"& by misguided individuals who send out vast amounts of
840 unsolicited junk, and want to disguise its source. Exim provides flexible
841 facilities for specifying policy controls on incoming mail:
844 .cindex "&ACL;" "introduction"
845 Exim 4 (unlike previous versions of Exim) implements policy controls on
846 incoming mail by means of &'Access Control Lists'& (ACLs). Each list is a
847 series of statements that may either grant or deny access. ACLs can be used at
848 several places in the SMTP dialogue while receiving a message from a remote
849 host. However, the most common places are after each RCPT command, and at the
850 very end of the message. The sysadmin can specify conditions for accepting or
851 rejecting individual recipients or the entire message, respectively, at these
852 two points (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). Denial of access results in an SMTP
855 An ACL is also available for locally generated, non-SMTP messages. In this
856 case, the only available actions are to accept or deny the entire message.
858 When Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension, facilities are
859 provided in the ACL mechanism for passing the message to external virus and/or
860 spam scanning software. The result of such a scan is passed back to the ACL,
861 which can then use it to decide what to do with the message.
863 When a message has been received, either from a remote host or from the local
864 host, but before the final acknowledgement has been sent, a locally supplied C
865 function called &[local_scan()]& can be run to inspect the message and decide
866 whether to accept it or not (see chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&). If the message
867 is accepted, the list of recipients can be modified by the function.
869 Using the &[local_scan()]& mechanism is another way of calling external scanner
870 software. The &%SA-Exim%& add-on package works this way. It does not require
871 Exim to be compiled with the content-scanning extension.
873 After a message has been accepted, a further checking mechanism is available in
874 the form of the &'system filter'& (see chapter &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>&). This
875 runs at the start of every delivery process.
880 .section "User filters"
881 .cindex "filter" "introduction"
882 .cindex "Sieve filter"
883 In a conventional Exim configuration, users are able to run private filters by
884 setting up appropriate &_.forward_& files in their home directories. See
885 chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>& (about the &(redirect)& router) for the
886 configuration needed to support this, and the separate document entitled
887 &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'& for user details. Two different kinds
888 of filtering are available:
891 Sieve filters are written in the standard filtering language that is defined
894 Exim filters are written in a syntax that is unique to Exim, but which is more
895 powerful than Sieve, which it pre-dates.
898 User filters are run as part of the routing process, described below.
902 .section "Message identification" "SECTmessiden"
903 .cindex "message ids" "details of format"
904 .cindex "format" "of message id"
905 .cindex "id of message"
910 Every message handled by Exim is given a &'message id'& which is sixteen
911 characters long. It is divided into three parts, separated by hyphens, for
912 example &`16VDhn-0001bo-D3`&. Each part is a sequence of letters and digits,
913 normally encoding numbers in base 62. However, in the Darwin operating
914 system (Mac OS X) and when Exim is compiled to run under Cygwin, base 36
915 (avoiding the use of lower case letters) is used instead, because the message
916 id is used to construct file names, and the names of files in those systems are
917 not always case-sensitive.
919 .cindex "pid (process id)" "re-use of"
920 The detail of the contents of the message id have changed as Exim has evolved.
921 Earlier versions relied on the operating system not re-using a process id (pid)
922 within one second. On modern operating systems, this assumption can no longer
923 be made, so the algorithm had to be changed. To retain backward compatibility,
924 the format of the message id was retained, which is why the following rules are
928 The first six characters of the message id are the time at which the message
929 started to be received, to a granularity of one second. That is, this field
930 contains the number of seconds since the start of the epoch (the normal Unix
931 way of representing the date and time of day).
933 After the first hyphen, the next six characters are the id of the process that
934 received the message.
936 There are two different possibilities for the final two characters:
938 .cindex "&%localhost_number%&"
939 If &%localhost_number%& is not set, this value is the fractional part of the
940 time of reception, normally in units of 1/2000 of a second, but for systems
941 that must use base 36 instead of base 62 (because of case-insensitive file
942 systems), the units are 1/1000 of a second.
944 If &%localhost_number%& is set, it is multiplied by 200 (100) and added to
945 the fractional part of the time, which in this case is in units of 1/200
950 After a message has been received, Exim waits for the clock to tick at the
951 appropriate resolution before proceeding, so that if another message is
952 received by the same process, or by another process with the same (re-used)
953 pid, it is guaranteed that the time will be different. In most cases, the clock
954 will already have ticked while the message was being received.
957 .section "Receiving mail"
958 .cindex "receiving mail"
959 .cindex "message" "reception"
960 The only way Exim can receive mail from another host is using SMTP over
961 TCP/IP, in which case the sender and recipient addresses are transferred using
962 SMTP commands. However, from a locally running process (such as a user's MUA),
963 there are several possibilities:
966 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bm%& option, the message is read
967 non-interactively (usually via a pipe), with the recipients taken from the
968 command line, or from the body of the message if &%-t%& is also used.
970 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bS%& option, the message is also read
971 non-interactively, but in this case the recipients are listed at the start of
972 the message in a series of SMTP RCPT commands, terminated by a DATA
973 command. This is so-called &"batch SMTP"& format,
974 but it isn't really SMTP. The SMTP commands are just another way of passing
975 envelope addresses in a non-interactive submission.
977 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bs%& option, the message is read
978 interactively, using the SMTP protocol. A two-way pipe is normally used for
979 passing data between the local process and the Exim process.
980 This is &"real"& SMTP and is handled in the same way as SMTP over TCP/IP. For
981 example, the ACLs for SMTP commands are used for this form of submission.
983 A local process may also make a TCP/IP call to the host's loopback address
984 (127.0.0.1) or any other of its IP addresses. When receiving messages, Exim
985 does not treat the loopback address specially. It treats all such connections
986 in the same way as connections from other hosts.
990 .cindex "message sender" "constructed by Exim"
991 .cindex "sender" "constructed by Exim"
992 In the three cases that do not involve TCP/IP, the sender address is
993 constructed from the login name of the user that called Exim and a default
994 qualification domain (which can be set by the &%qualify_domain%& configuration
995 option). For local or batch SMTP, a sender address that is passed using the
996 SMTP MAIL command is ignored. However, the system administrator may allow
997 certain users (&"trusted users"&) to specify a different sender address
998 unconditionally, or all users to specify certain forms of different sender
999 address. The &%-f%& option or the SMTP MAIL command is used to specify these
1000 different addresses. See section &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for details of trusted
1001 users, and the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option for a way of allowing untrusted
1002 users to change sender addresses.
1004 Messages received by either of the non-interactive mechanisms are subject to
1005 checking by the non-SMTP ACL, if one is defined. Messages received using SMTP
1006 (either over TCP/IP, or interacting with a local process) can be checked by a
1007 number of ACLs that operate at different times during the SMTP session. Either
1008 individual recipients, or the entire message, can be rejected if local policy
1009 requirements are not met. The &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter
1010 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&) is run for all incoming messages.
1012 Exim can be configured not to start a delivery process when a message is
1013 received; this can be unconditional, or depend on the number of incoming SMTP
1014 connections or the system load. In these situations, new messages wait on the
1015 queue until a queue runner process picks them up. However, in standard
1016 configurations under normal conditions, delivery is started as soon as a
1017 message is received.
1023 .section "Handling an incoming message"
1024 .cindex "spool directory" "files that hold a message"
1025 .cindex "file" "how a message is held"
1026 When Exim accepts a message, it writes two files in its spool directory. The
1027 first contains the envelope information, the current status of the message, and
1028 the header lines, and the second contains the body of the message. The names of
1029 the two spool files consist of the message id, followed by &`-H`& for the
1030 file containing the envelope and header, and &`-D`& for the data file.
1032 .cindex "spool directory" "&_input_& sub-directory"
1033 By default all these message files are held in a single directory called
1034 &_input_& inside the general Exim spool directory. Some operating systems do
1035 not perform very well if the number of files in a directory gets large; to
1036 improve performance in such cases, the &%split_spool_directory%& option can be
1037 used. This causes Exim to split up the input files into 62 sub-directories
1038 whose names are single letters or digits. &new("When this is done, the queue is
1039 processed one sub-directory at a time instead of all at once, which can improve
1040 overall performance even when there are not enough files in each directory to
1041 affect file system performance.")
1043 The envelope information consists of the address of the message's sender and
1044 the addresses of the recipients. This information is entirely separate from
1045 any addresses contained in the header lines. The status of the message includes
1046 a list of recipients who have already received the message. The format of the
1047 first spool file is described in chapter &<<CHAPspool>>&.
1049 .cindex "rewriting" "addresses"
1050 Address rewriting that is specified in the rewrite section of the configuration
1051 (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&) is done once and for all on incoming addresses,
1052 both in the header lines and the envelope, at the time the message is accepted.
1053 If during the course of delivery additional addresses are generated (for
1054 example, via aliasing), these new addresses are rewritten as soon as they are
1055 generated. At the time a message is actually delivered (transported) further
1056 rewriting can take place; because this is a transport option, it can be
1057 different for different forms of delivery. It is also possible to specify the
1058 addition or removal of certain header lines at the time the message is
1059 delivered (see chapters &<<CHAProutergeneric>>& and
1060 &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
1064 .section "Life of a message"
1065 .cindex "message" "life of"
1066 .cindex "message" "frozen"
1067 A message remains in the spool directory until it is completely delivered to
1068 its recipients or to an error address, or until it is deleted by an
1069 administrator or by the user who originally created it. In cases when delivery
1070 cannot proceed &-- for example, when a message can neither be delivered to its
1071 recipients nor returned to its sender, the message is marked &"frozen"& on the
1072 spool, and no more deliveries are attempted.
1074 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
1075 .cindex "message" "thawing frozen"
1076 An administrator can &"thaw"& such messages when the problem has been
1077 corrected, and can also freeze individual messages by hand if necessary. In
1078 addition, an administrator can force a delivery error, causing a bounce message
1081 .cindex "&%timeout_frozen_after%&"
1082 .cindex "&%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&"
1083 There are options called &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%& and
1084 &%timeout_frozen_after%&, which discard frozen messages after a certain time.
1085 The first applies only to frozen bounces, the second to any frozen messages.
1087 .cindex "message" "log file for"
1088 .cindex "log" "file for each message"
1089 While Exim is working on a message, it writes information about each delivery
1090 attempt to its main log file. This includes successful, unsuccessful, and
1091 delayed deliveries for each recipient (see chapter &<<CHAPlog>>&). The log
1092 lines are also written to a separate &'message log'& file for each message.
1093 These logs are solely for the benefit of the administrator, and are normally
1094 deleted along with the spool files when processing of a message is complete.
1095 The use of individual message logs can be disabled by setting
1096 &%no_message_logs%&; this might give an improvement in performance on very busy
1099 .cindex "journal file"
1100 .cindex "file" "journal"
1101 All the information Exim itself needs to set up a delivery is kept in the first
1102 spool file, along with the header lines. When a successful delivery occurs, the
1103 address is immediately written at the end of a journal file, whose name is the
1104 message id followed by &`-J`&. At the end of a delivery run, if there are some
1105 addresses left to be tried again later, the first spool file (the &`-H`& file)
1106 is updated to indicate which these are, and the journal file is then deleted.
1107 Updating the spool file is done by writing a new file and renaming it, to
1108 minimize the possibility of data loss.
1110 Should the system or the program crash after a successful delivery but before
1111 the spool file has been updated, the journal is left lying around. The next
1112 time Exim attempts to deliver the message, it reads the journal file and
1113 updates the spool file before proceeding. This minimizes the chances of double
1114 deliveries caused by crashes.
1118 .section "Processing an address for delivery" "SECTprocaddress"
1119 .cindex "drivers" "definition of"
1120 .cindex "router" "definition of"
1121 .cindex "transport" "definition of"
1122 The main delivery processing elements of Exim are called &'routers'& and
1123 &'transports'&, and collectively these are known as &'drivers'&. Code for a
1124 number of them is provided in the source distribution, and compile-time options
1125 specify which ones are included in the binary. Run time options specify which
1126 ones are actually used for delivering messages.
1128 .cindex "drivers" "instance definition"
1129 Each driver that is specified in the run time configuration is an &'instance'&
1130 of that particular driver type. Multiple instances are allowed; for example,
1131 you can set up several different &(smtp)& transports, each with different
1132 option values that might specify different ports or different timeouts. Each
1133 instance has its own identifying name. In what follows we will normally use the
1134 instance name when discussing one particular instance (that is, one specific
1135 configuration of the driver), and the generic driver name when discussing
1136 the driver's features in general.
1138 A &'router'& is a driver that operates on an address, either determining how
1139 its delivery should happen, by assigning it to a specific transport, or
1140 converting the address into one or more new addresses (for example, via an
1141 alias file). A router may also explicitly choose to fail an address, causing it
1144 A &'transport'& is a driver that transmits a copy of the message from Exim's
1145 spool to some destination. There are two kinds of transport: for a &'local'&
1146 transport, the destination is a file or a pipe on the local host, whereas for a
1147 &'remote'& transport the destination is some other host. A message is passed
1148 to a specific transport as a result of successful routing. If a message has
1149 several recipients, it may be passed to a number of different transports.
1151 .cindex "preconditions" "definition of"
1152 An address is processed by passing it to each configured router instance in
1153 turn, subject to certain preconditions, until a router accepts the address or
1154 specifies that it should be bounced. We will describe this process in more
1155 detail shortly. First, as a simple example, we consider how each recipient
1156 address in a message is processed in a small configuration of three routers.
1158 To make this a more concrete example, it is described in terms of some actual
1159 routers, but remember, this is only an example. You can configure Exim's
1160 routers in many different ways, and there may be any number of routers in a
1163 The first router that is specified in a configuration is often one that handles
1164 addresses in domains that are not recognized specially by the local host. These
1165 are typically addresses for arbitrary domains on the Internet. A precondition
1166 is set up which looks for the special domains known to the host (for example,
1167 its own domain name), and the router is run for addresses that do &'not'&
1168 match. Typically, this is a router that looks up domains in the DNS in order to
1169 find the hosts to which this address routes. If it succeeds, the address is
1170 assigned to a suitable SMTP transport; if it does not succeed, the router is
1171 configured to fail the address.
1173 The second router is reached only when the domain is recognized as one that
1174 &"belongs"& to the local host. This router does redirection &-- also known as
1175 aliasing and forwarding. When it generates one or more new addresses from the
1176 original, each of them is routed independently from the start. Otherwise, the
1177 router may cause an address to fail, or it may simply decline to handle the
1178 address, in which case the address is passed to the next router.
1180 The final router in many configurations is one that checks to see if the
1181 address belongs to a local mailbox. The precondition may involve a check to
1182 see if the local part is the name of a login account, or it may look up the
1183 local part in a file or a database. If its preconditions are not met, or if
1184 the router declines, we have reached the end of the routers. When this happens,
1185 the address is bounced.
1189 .section "Processing an address for verification"
1190 .cindex "router" "for verification"
1191 .cindex "verifying address" "overview"
1192 As well as being used to decide how to deliver to an address, Exim's routers
1193 are also used for &'address verification'&. Verification can be requested as
1194 one of the checks to be performed in an ACL for incoming messages, on both
1195 sender and recipient addresses, and it can be tested using the &%-bv%& and
1196 &%-bvs%& command line options.
1198 When an address is being verified, the routers are run in &"verify mode"&. This
1199 does not affect the way the routers work, but it is a state that can be
1200 detected. By this means, a router can be skipped or made to behave differently
1201 when verifying. A common example is a configuration in which the first router
1202 sends all messages to a message-scanning program, unless they have been
1203 previously scanned. Thus, the first router accepts all addresses without any
1204 checking, making it useless for verifying. Normally, the &%no_verify%& option
1205 would be set for such a router, causing it to be skipped in verify mode.
1210 .section "Running an individual router" "SECTrunindrou"
1211 .cindex "router" "running details"
1212 .cindex "preconditions" "checking"
1213 .cindex "router" "result of running"
1214 As explained in the example above, a number of preconditions are checked before
1215 running a router. If any are not met, the router is skipped, and the address is
1216 passed to the next router. When all the preconditions on a router &'are'& met,
1217 the router is run. What happens next depends on the outcome, which is one of
1221 &'accept'&: The router accepts the address, and either assigns it to a
1222 transport, or generates one or more &"child"& addresses. Processing the
1223 original address ceases,
1224 .cindex "&%unseen%& option"
1225 unless the &%unseen%& option is set on the router. This option
1226 can be used to set up multiple deliveries with different routing (for example,
1227 for keeping archive copies of messages). When &%unseen%& is set, the address is
1228 passed to the next router. Normally, however, an &'accept'& return marks the
1231 Any child addresses generated by the router are processed independently,
1232 starting with the first router by default. It is possible to change this by
1233 setting the &%redirect_router%& option to specify which router to start at for
1234 child addresses. Unlike &%pass_router%& (see below) the router specified by
1235 &%redirect_router%& may be anywhere in the router configuration.
1237 &'pass'&: The router recognizes the address, but cannot handle it itself. It
1238 requests that the address be passed to another router. By default the address
1239 is passed to the next router, but this can be changed by setting the
1240 &%pass_router%& option. However, (unlike &%redirect_router%&) the named router
1241 must be below the current router (to avoid loops).
1243 &'decline'&: The router declines to accept the address because it does not
1244 recognize it at all. By default, the address is passed to the next router, but
1245 this can be prevented by setting the &%no_more%& option. When &%no_more%& is
1246 set, all the remaining routers are skipped. In effect, &%no_more%& converts
1247 &'decline'& into &'fail'&.
1249 &'fail'&: The router determines that the address should fail, and queues it for
1250 the generation of a bounce message. There is no further processing of the
1251 original address unless &%unseen%& is set on the router.
1253 &'defer'&: The router cannot handle the address at the present time. (A
1254 database may be offline, or a DNS lookup may have timed out.) No further
1255 processing of the address happens in this delivery attempt. It is tried again
1256 next time the message is considered for delivery.
1258 &'error'&: There is some error in the router (for example, a syntax error in
1259 its configuration). The action is as for defer.
1262 If an address reaches the end of the routers without having been accepted by
1263 any of them, it is bounced as unrouteable. The default error message in this
1264 situation is &"unrouteable address"&, but you can set your own message by
1265 making use of the &%cannot_route_message%& option. This can be set for any
1266 router; the value from the last router that &"saw"& the address is used.
1268 Sometimes while routing you want to fail a delivery when some conditions are
1269 met but others are not, instead of passing the address on for further routing.
1270 You can do this by having a second router that explicitly fails the delivery
1271 when the relevant conditions are met. The &(redirect)& router has a &"fail"&
1272 facility for this purpose.
1275 .section "Duplicate addresses"
1276 .cindex "case of local parts"
1277 .cindex "address duplicate" "discarding"
1278 Once routing is complete, Exim scans the addresses that are assigned to local
1279 and remote transports, and discards any duplicates that it finds. During this
1280 check, local parts are treated as case-sensitive.
1283 .section "Router preconditions" "SECTrouprecon"
1284 .cindex "router preconditions" "order of processing"
1285 .cindex "preconditions" "order of processing"
1286 The preconditions that are tested for each router are listed below, in the
1287 order in which they are tested. The individual configuration options are
1288 described in more detail in chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&.
1291 The &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& options can specify that
1292 the local parts handled by the router may or must have certain prefixes and/or
1293 suffixes. If a mandatory affix (prefix or suffix) is not present, the router is
1294 skipped. These conditions are tested first. When an affix is present, it is
1295 removed from the local part before further processing, including the evaluation
1296 of any other conditions.
1298 Routers can be designated for use only when not verifying an address, that is,
1299 only when routing it for delivery (or testing its delivery routing). If the
1300 &%verify%& option is set false, the router is skipped when Exim is verifying an
1302 Setting the &%verify%& option actually sets two options, &%verify_sender%& and
1303 &%verify_recipient%&, which independently control the use of the router for
1304 sender and recipient verification. You can set these options directly if
1305 you want a router to be used for only one type of verification.
1307 If the &%address_test%& option is set false, the router is skipped when Exim is
1308 run with the &%-bt%& option to test an address routing. This can be helpful
1309 when the first router sends all new messages to a scanner of some sort; it
1310 makes it possible to use &%-bt%& to test subsequent delivery routing without
1311 having to simulate the effect of the scanner.
1313 Routers can be designated for use only when verifying an address, as
1314 opposed to routing it for delivery. The &%verify_only%& option controls this.
1316 Individual routers can be explicitly skipped when running the routers to
1317 check an address given in the SMTP EXPN command (see the &%expn%& option).
1319 If the &%domains%& option is set, the domain of the address must be in the set
1320 of domains that it defines.
1322 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
1323 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
1324 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
1325 If the &%local_parts%& option is set, the local part of the address must be in
1326 the set of local parts that it defines. If &%local_part_prefix%& or
1327 &%local_part_suffix%& is in use, the prefix or suffix is removed from the local
1328 part before this check. If you want to do precondition tests on local parts
1329 that include affixes, you can do so by using a &%condition%& option (see below)
1330 that uses the variables &$local_part$&, &$local_part_prefix$&, and
1331 &$local_part_suffix$& as necessary.
1333 .cindex "&$local_user_uid$&"
1334 .cindex "&$local_user_gid$&"
1336 If the &%check_local_user%& option is set, the local part must be the name of
1337 an account on the local host. If this check succeeds, the uid and gid of the
1338 local user are placed in &$local_user_uid$& and &$local_user_gid$& and the
1339 user's home directory is placed in &$home$&; these values can be used in the
1340 remaining preconditions.
1342 If the &%router_home_directory%& option is set, it is expanded at this point,
1343 because it overrides the value of &$home$&. If this expansion were left till
1344 later, the value of &$home$& as set by &%check_local_user%& would be used in
1345 subsequent tests. Having two different values of &$home$& in the same router
1346 could lead to confusion.
1348 If the &%senders%& option is set, the envelope sender address must be in the
1349 set of addresses that it defines.
1351 If the &%require_files%& option is set, the existence or non-existence of
1352 specified files is tested.
1354 .cindex "customizing" "precondition"
1355 If the &%condition%& option is set, it is evaluated and tested. This option
1356 uses an expanded string to allow you to set up your own custom preconditions.
1357 Expanded strings are described in chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&.
1361 Note that &%require_files%& comes near the end of the list, so you cannot use
1362 it to check for the existence of a file in which to lookup up a domain, local
1363 part, or sender. However, as these options are all expanded, you can use the
1364 &%exists%& expansion condition to make such tests within each condition. The
1365 &%require_files%& option is intended for checking files that the router may be
1366 going to use internally, or which are needed by a specific transport (for
1367 example, &_.procmailrc_&).
1371 .section "Delivery in detail"
1372 .cindex "delivery" "in detail"
1373 When a message is to be delivered, the sequence of events is as follows:
1376 If a system-wide filter file is specified, the message is passed to it. The
1377 filter may add recipients to the message, replace the recipients, discard the
1378 message, cause a new message to be generated, or cause the message delivery to
1379 fail. The format of the system filter file is the same as for Exim user filter
1380 files, described in the separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail
1382 .cindex "Sieve filter" "not available for system filter"
1383 (&*Note*&: Sieve cannot be used for system filter files.)
1385 Some additional features are available in system filters &-- see chapter
1386 &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>& for details. Note that a message is passed to the system
1387 filter only once per delivery attempt, however many recipients it has. However,
1388 if there are several delivery attempts because one or more addresses could not
1389 be immediately delivered, the system filter is run each time. The filter
1390 condition &%first_delivery%& can be used to detect the first run of the system
1393 Each recipient address is offered to each configured router in turn, subject to
1394 its preconditions, until one is able to handle it. If no router can handle the
1395 address, that is, if they all decline, the address is failed. Because routers
1396 can be targeted at particular domains, several locally handled domains can be
1397 processed entirely independently of each other.
1399 .cindex "routing" "loops in"
1400 .cindex "loop" "while routing"
1401 A router that accepts an address may assign it to a local or a remote
1402 transport. However, the transport is not run at this time. Instead, the address
1403 is placed on a list for the particular transport, which will be run later.
1404 Alternatively, the router may generate one or more new addresses (typically
1405 from alias, forward, or filter files). New addresses are fed back into this
1406 process from the top, but in order to avoid loops, a router ignores any address
1407 which has an identically-named ancestor that was processed by itself.
1409 When all the routing has been done, addresses that have been successfully
1410 handled are passed to their assigned transports. When local transports are
1411 doing real local deliveries, they handle only one address at a time, but if a
1412 local transport is being used as a pseudo-remote transport (for example, to
1413 collect batched SMTP messages for transmission by some other means) multiple
1414 addresses can be handled. Remote transports can always handle more than one
1415 address at a time, but can be configured not to do so, or to restrict multiple
1416 addresses to the same domain.
1418 Each local delivery to a file or a pipe runs in a separate process under a
1419 non-privileged uid, and these deliveries are run one at a time. Remote
1420 deliveries also run in separate processes, normally under a uid that is private
1421 to Exim (&"the Exim user"&), but in this case, several remote deliveries can be
1422 run in parallel. The maximum number of simultaneous remote deliveries for any
1423 one message is set by the &%remote_max_parallel%& option.
1424 The order in which deliveries are done is not defined, except that all local
1425 deliveries happen before any remote deliveries.
1427 .cindex "queue runner"
1428 When it encounters a local delivery during a queue run, Exim checks its retry
1429 database to see if there has been a previous temporary delivery failure for the
1430 address before running the local transport. If there was a previous failure,
1431 Exim does not attempt a new delivery until the retry time for the address is
1432 reached. However, this happens only for delivery attempts that are part of a
1433 queue run. Local deliveries are always attempted when delivery immediately
1434 follows message reception, even if retry times are set for them. This makes for
1435 better behaviour if one particular message is causing problems (for example,
1436 causing quota overflow, or provoking an error in a filter file).
1438 .cindex "delivery" "retry in remote transports"
1439 Remote transports do their own retry handling, since an address may be
1440 deliverable to one of a number of hosts, each of which may have a different
1441 retry time. If there have been previous temporary failures and no host has
1442 reached its retry time, no delivery is attempted, whether in a queue run or
1443 not. See chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& for details of retry strategies.
1445 If there were any permanent errors, a bounce message is returned to an
1446 appropriate address (the sender in the common case), with details of the error
1447 for each failing address. Exim can be configured to send copies of bounce
1448 messages to other addresses.
1450 .cindex "delivery" "deferral"
1451 If one or more addresses suffered a temporary failure, the message is left on
1452 the queue, to be tried again later. Delivery of these addresses is said to be
1455 When all the recipient addresses have either been delivered or bounced,
1456 handling of the message is complete. The spool files and message log are
1457 deleted, though the message log can optionally be preserved if required.
1463 .section "Retry mechanism"
1464 .cindex "delivery" "retry mechanism"
1465 .cindex "retry" "description of mechanism"
1466 .cindex "queue runner"
1467 Exim's mechanism for retrying messages that fail to get delivered at the first
1468 attempt is the queue runner process. You must either run an Exim daemon that
1469 uses the &%-q%& option with a time interval to start queue runners at regular
1470 intervals, or use some other means (such as &'cron'&) to start them. If you do
1471 not arrange for queue runners to be run, messages that fail temporarily at the
1472 first attempt will remain on your queue for ever. A queue runner process works
1473 its way through the queue, one message at a time, trying each delivery that has
1474 passed its retry time.
1475 You can run several queue runners at once.
1477 Exim uses a set of configured rules to determine when next to retry the failing
1478 address (see chapter &<<CHAPretry>>&). These rules also specify when Exim
1479 should give up trying to deliver to the address, at which point it generates a
1480 bounce message. If no retry rules are set for a particular host, address, and
1481 error combination, no retries are attempted, and temporary errors are treated
1486 .section "Temporary delivery failure"
1487 .cindex "delivery" "temporary failure"
1488 There are many reasons why a message may not be immediately deliverable to a
1489 particular address. Failure to connect to a remote machine (because it, or the
1490 connection to it, is down) is one of the most common. Temporary failures may be
1491 detected during routing as well as during the transport stage of delivery.
1492 Local deliveries may be delayed if NFS files are unavailable, or if a mailbox
1493 is on a file system where the user is over quota. Exim can be configured to
1494 impose its own quotas on local mailboxes; where system quotas are set they will
1497 If a host is unreachable for a period of time, a number of messages may be
1498 waiting for it by the time it recovers, and sending them in a single SMTP
1499 connection is clearly beneficial. Whenever a delivery to a remote host is
1502 .cindex "hints database"
1503 Exim makes a note in its hints database, and whenever a successful
1504 SMTP delivery has happened, it looks to see if any other messages are waiting
1505 for the same host. If any are found, they are sent over the same SMTP
1506 connection, subject to a configuration limit as to the maximum number in any
1512 .section "Permanent delivery failure"
1513 .cindex "delivery" "permanent failure"
1514 .cindex "bounce message" "when generated"
1515 When a message cannot be delivered to some or all of its intended recipients, a
1516 bounce message is generated. Temporary delivery failures turn into permanent
1517 errors when their timeout expires. All the addresses that fail in a given
1518 delivery attempt are listed in a single message. If the original message has
1519 many recipients, it is possible for some addresses to fail in one delivery
1520 attempt and others to fail subsequently, giving rise to more than one bounce
1521 message. The wording of bounce messages can be customized by the administrator.
1522 See chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>& for details.
1524 .cindex "&'X-Failed-Recipients:'& header line"
1525 Bounce messages contain an &'X-Failed-Recipients:'& header line that lists the
1526 failed addresses, for the benefit of programs that try to analyse such messages
1529 .cindex "bounce message" "recipient of"
1530 A bounce message is normally sent to the sender of the original message, as
1531 obtained from the message's envelope. For incoming SMTP messages, this is the
1532 address given in the MAIL command. However, when an address is expanded via a
1533 forward or alias file, an alternative address can be specified for delivery
1534 failures of the generated addresses. For a mailing list expansion (see section
1535 &<<SECTmailinglists>>&) it is common to direct bounce messages to the manager
1540 .section "Failures to deliver bounce messages"
1541 .cindex "bounce message" "failure to deliver"
1542 If a bounce message (either locally generated or received from a remote host)
1543 itself suffers a permanent delivery failure, the message is left on the queue,
1544 but it is frozen, awaiting the attention of an administrator. There are options
1545 that can be used to make Exim discard such failed messages, or to keep them
1546 for only a short time (see &%timeout_frozen_after%& and
1547 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&).
1553 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
1554 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
1556 .chapter "Building and installing Exim"
1557 .scindex IIDbuex "building Exim"
1559 .section "Unpacking"
1560 Exim is distributed as a gzipped or bzipped tar file which, when upacked,
1561 creates a directory with the name of the current release (for example,
1562 &_exim-&version;_&) into which the following files are placed:
1565 .row &_ACKNOWLEDGMENTS_& "contains some acknowledgments"
1566 .row &_CHANGES_& "contains a reference to where changes are documented"
1567 .row &_LICENCE_& "the GNU General Public Licence"
1568 .row &_Makefile_& "top-level make file"
1569 .row &_NOTICE_& "conditions for the use of Exim"
1570 .row &_README_& "list of files, directories and simple build &&&
1574 Other files whose names begin with &_README_& may also be present. The
1575 following subdirectories are created:
1578 .row &_Local_& "an empty directory for local configuration files"
1579 .row &_OS_& "OS-specific files"
1580 .row &_doc_& "documentation files"
1581 .row &_exim_monitor_& "source files for the Exim monitor"
1582 .row &_scripts_& "scripts used in the build process"
1583 .row &_src_& "remaining source files"
1584 .row &_util_& "independent utilities"
1587 The main utility programs are contained in the &_src_& directory, and are built
1588 with the Exim binary. The &_util_& directory contains a few optional scripts
1589 that may be useful to some sites.
1592 .section "Multiple machine architectures and operating systems"
1593 .cindex "building Exim" "multiple OS/architectures"
1594 The building process for Exim is arranged to make it easy to build binaries for
1595 a number of different architectures and operating systems from the same set of
1596 source files. Compilation does not take place in the &_src_& directory.
1597 Instead, a &'build directory'& is created for each architecture and operating
1599 .cindex "symbolic link" "to build directory"
1600 Symbolic links to the sources are installed in this directory, which is where
1601 the actual building takes place. In most cases, Exim can discover the machine
1602 architecture and operating system for itself, but the defaults can be
1603 overridden if necessary.
1606 .section "DBM libraries" "SECTdb"
1607 .cindex "DBM libraries" "discussion of"
1608 .cindex "hints database" "DBM files used for"
1609 Even if you do not use any DBM files in your configuration, Exim still needs a
1610 DBM library in order to operate, because it uses indexed files for its hints
1611 databases. Unfortunately, there are a number of DBM libraries in existence, and
1612 different operating systems often have different ones installed.
1614 .cindex "Solaris" "DBM library for"
1615 .cindex "IRIX" "DBM library for"
1616 .cindex "BSD" "DBM library for"
1617 .cindex "Linux" "DBM library for"
1618 If you are using Solaris, IRIX, one of the modern BSD systems, or a modern
1619 Linux distribution, the DBM configuration should happen automatically, and you
1620 may be able to ignore this section. Otherwise, you may have to learn more than
1621 you would like about DBM libraries from what follows.
1623 .cindex "&'ndbm'& DBM library"
1624 Licensed versions of Unix normally contain a library of DBM functions operating
1625 via the &'ndbm'& interface, and this is what Exim expects by default. Free
1626 versions of Unix seem to vary in what they contain as standard. In particular,
1627 some early versions of Linux have no default DBM library, and different
1628 distributors have chosen to bundle different libraries with their packaged
1629 versions. However, the more recent releases seem to have standardised on the
1630 Berkeley DB library.
1632 Different DBM libraries have different conventions for naming the files they
1633 use. When a program opens a file called &_dbmfile_&, there are several
1637 A traditional &'ndbm'& implementation, such as that supplied as part of
1638 Solaris, operates on two files called &_dbmfile.dir_& and &_dbmfile.pag_&.
1640 .cindex "&'gdbm'& DBM library"
1641 The GNU library, &'gdbm'&, operates on a single file. If used via its &'ndbm'&
1642 compatibility interface it makes two different hard links to it with names
1643 &_dbmfile.dir_& and &_dbmfile.pag_&, but if used via its native interface, the
1644 file name is used unmodified.
1646 .cindex "Berkeley DB library"
1647 The Berkeley DB package, if called via its &'ndbm'& compatibility interface,
1648 operates on a single file called &_dbmfile.db_&, but otherwise looks to the
1649 programmer exactly the same as the traditional &'ndbm'& implementation.
1651 If the Berkeley package is used in its native mode, it operates on a single
1652 file called &_dbmfile_&; the programmer's interface is somewhat different to
1653 the traditional &'ndbm'& interface.
1655 To complicate things further, there are several very different versions of the
1656 Berkeley DB package. Version 1.85 was stable for a very long time, releases
1657 2.&'x'& and 3.&'x'& were current for a while, but the latest versions are now
1658 numbered 4.&'x'&. Maintenance of some of the earlier releases has ceased. All
1659 versions of Berkeley DB can be obtained from
1660 &url(http://www.sleepycat.com/).
1662 .cindex "&'tdb'& DBM library"
1663 Yet another DBM library, called &'tdb'&, is available from
1664 &url(http://download.sourceforge.net/tdb). It has its own interface, and also
1665 operates on a single file.
1669 .cindex "DBM libraries" "configuration for building"
1670 Exim and its utilities can be compiled to use any of these interfaces. In order
1671 to use any version of the Berkeley DB package in native mode, you must set
1672 USE_DB in an appropriate configuration file (typically
1673 &_Local/Makefile_&). For example:
1677 Similarly, for gdbm you set USE_GDBM, and for tdb you set USE_TDB. An
1678 error is diagnosed if you set more than one of these.
1680 At the lowest level, the build-time configuration sets none of these options,
1681 thereby assuming an interface of type (1). However, some operating system
1682 configuration files (for example, those for the BSD operating systems and
1683 Linux) assume type (4) by setting USE_DB as their default, and the
1684 configuration files for Cygwin set USE_GDBM. Anything you set in
1685 &_Local/Makefile_&, however, overrides these system defaults.
1687 As well as setting USE_DB, USE_GDBM, or USE_TDB, it may also be
1688 necessary to set DBMLIB, to cause inclusion of the appropriate library, as
1689 in one of these lines:
1694 Settings like that will work if the DBM library is installed in the standard
1695 place. Sometimes it is not, and the library's header file may also not be in
1696 the default path. You may need to set INCLUDE to specify where the header
1697 file is, and to specify the path to the library more fully in DBMLIB, as in
1700 INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/include/db-4.1
1701 DBMLIB=/usr/local/lib/db-4.1/libdb.a
1703 There is further detailed discussion about the various DBM libraries in the
1704 file &_doc/dbm.discuss.txt_& in the Exim distribution.
1708 .section "Pre-building configuration"
1709 .cindex "building Exim" "pre-building configuration"
1710 .cindex "configuration for building Exim"
1711 .cindex "&_Local/Makefile_&"
1712 .cindex "&_src/EDITME_&"
1713 Before building Exim, a local configuration file that specifies options
1714 independent of any operating system has to be created with the name
1715 &_Local/Makefile_&. A template for this file is supplied as the file
1716 &_src/EDITME_&, and it contains full descriptions of all the option settings
1717 therein. These descriptions are therefore not repeated here. If you are
1718 building Exim for the first time, the simplest thing to do is to copy
1719 &_src/EDITME_& to &_Local/Makefile_&, then read it and edit it appropriately.
1721 There are three settings that you must supply, because Exim will not build
1722 without them. They are the location of the run time configuration file
1723 (CONFIGURE_FILE), the directory in which Exim binaries will be installed
1724 (BIN_DIRECTORY), and the identity of the Exim user (EXIM_USER and
1725 maybe EXIM_GROUP as well). The value of CONFIGURE_FILE can in fact be
1726 a colon-separated list of file names; Exim uses the first of them that exists.
1728 There are a few other parameters that can be specified either at build time or
1729 at run time, to enable the same binary to be used on a number of different
1730 machines. However, if the locations of Exim's spool directory and log file
1731 directory (if not within the spool directory) are fixed, it is recommended that
1732 you specify them in &_Local/Makefile_& instead of at run time, so that errors
1733 detected early in Exim's execution (such as a malformed configuration file) can
1736 .cindex "content scanning" "specifying at build time"
1737 Exim's interfaces for calling virus and spam scanning software directly from
1738 access control lists are not compiled by default. If you want to include these
1739 facilities, you need to set
1741 WITH_CONTENT_SCAN=yes
1743 in your &_Local/Makefile_&. For details of the facilities themselves, see
1744 chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
1747 .cindex "&_Local/eximon.conf_&"
1748 .cindex "_exim_monitor/EDITME_"
1749 If you are going to build the Exim monitor, a similar configuration process is
1750 required. The file &_exim_monitor/EDITME_& must be edited appropriately for
1751 your installation and saved under the name &_Local/eximon.conf_&. If you are
1752 happy with the default settings described in &_exim_monitor/EDITME_&,
1753 &_Local/eximon.conf_& can be empty, but it must exist.
1755 This is all the configuration that is needed in straightforward cases for known
1756 operating systems. However, the building process is set up so that it is easy
1757 to override options that are set by default or by operating-system-specific
1758 configuration files, for example to change the name of the C compiler, which
1759 defaults to &%gcc%&. See section &<<SECToverride>>& below for details of how to
1764 .section "Support for iconv()"
1765 .cindex "&[iconv()]& support"
1767 The contents of header lines in messages may be encoded according to the rules
1768 described RFC 2047. This makes it possible to transmit characters that are not
1769 in the ASCII character set, and to label them as being in a particular
1770 character set. When Exim is inspecting header lines by means of the &%$h_%&
1771 mechanism, it decodes them, and translates them into a specified character set
1772 (default ISO-8859-1). The translation is possible only if the operating system
1773 supports the &[iconv()]& function.
1775 However, some of the operating systems that supply &[iconv()]& do not support
1776 very many conversions. The GNU &%libiconv%& library (available from
1777 &url(http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/)) can be installed on such
1778 systems to remedy this deficiency, as well as on systems that do not supply
1779 &[iconv()]& at all. After installing &%libiconv%&, you should add
1783 to your &_Local/Makefile_& and rebuild Exim.
1787 .section "Including TLS/SSL encryption support" "SECTinctlsssl"
1788 .cindex "TLS" "including support for TLS"
1789 .cindex "encryption" "including support for"
1790 .cindex "SUPPORT_TLS"
1791 .cindex "OpenSSL" "building Exim with"
1792 .cindex "GnuTLS" "building Exim with"
1793 Exim can be built to support encrypted SMTP connections, using the STARTTLS
1794 command as per RFC 2487. It can also support legacy clients that expect to
1795 start a TLS session immediately on connection to a non-standard port (see the
1796 &%tls_on_connect_ports%& runtime option and the &%-tls-on-connect%& command
1799 If you want to build Exim with TLS support, you must first install either the
1800 OpenSSL or GnuTLS library. There is no cryptographic code in Exim itself for
1803 If OpenSSL is installed, you should set
1806 TLS_LIBS=-lssl -lcrypto
1808 in &_Local/Makefile_&. You may also need to specify the locations of the
1809 OpenSSL library and include files. For example:
1812 TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/local/openssl/lib -lssl -lcrypto
1813 TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/openssl/include/
1815 .cindex "USE_GNUTLS"
1816 If GnuTLS is installed, you should set
1820 TLS_LIBS=-lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt
1822 in &_Local/Makefile_&, and again you may need to specify the locations of the
1823 library and include files. For example:
1827 TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/gnu/lib -lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt
1828 TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/gnu/include
1830 You do not need to set TLS_INCLUDE if the relevant directory is already
1831 specified in INCLUDE. Details of how to configure Exim to make use of TLS are
1832 given in chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&.
1837 .section "Use of tcpwrappers"
1838 .cindex "tcpwrappers" "building Exim to support"
1839 .cindex "USE_TCP_WRAPPERS"
1840 Exim can be linked with the &'tcpwrappers'& library in order to check incoming
1841 SMTP calls using the &'tcpwrappers'& control files. This may be a convenient
1842 alternative to Exim's own checking facilities for installations that are
1843 already making use of &'tcpwrappers'& for other purposes. To do this, you
1844 should set USE_TCP_WRAPPERS in &_Local/Makefile_&, arrange for the file
1845 &_tcpd.h_& to be available at compile time, and also ensure that the library
1846 &_libwrap.a_& is available at link time, typically by including &%-lwrap%& in
1847 EXTRALIBS_EXIM. For example, if &'tcpwrappers'& is installed in &_/usr/local_&,
1850 USE_TCP_WRAPPERS=yes
1851 CFLAGS=-O -I/usr/local/include
1852 EXTRALIBS_EXIM=-L/usr/local/lib -lwrap
1854 in &_Local/Makefile_&. The name to use in the &'tcpwrappers'& control files is
1855 &"exim"&. For example, the line
1857 exim : LOCAL 192.168.1. .friendly.domain.example
1859 in your &_/etc/hosts.allow_& file allows connections from the local host, from
1860 the subnet 192.168.1.0/24, and from all hosts in &'friendly.domain.example'&.
1861 All other connections are denied. Consult the &'tcpwrappers'& documentation for
1866 .section "Including support for IPv6"
1867 .cindex "IPv6" "including support for"
1868 Exim contains code for use on systems that have IPv6 support. Setting
1869 &`HAVE_IPV6=YES`& in &_Local/Makefile_& causes the IPv6 code to be included;
1870 it may also be necessary to set IPV6_INCLUDE and IPV6_LIBS on systems
1871 where the IPv6 support is not fully integrated into the normal include and
1874 Two different types of DNS record for handling IPv6 addresses have been
1875 defined. AAAA records (analagous to A records for IPv4) are in use, and are
1876 currently seen as the mainstream. Another record type called A6 was proposed
1877 as better than AAAA because it had more flexibility. However, it was felt to be
1878 over-complex, and its status was reduced to &"experimental"&. It is not known
1879 if anyone is actually using A6 records. Exim has support for A6 records, but
1880 this is included only if you set &`SUPPORT_A6=YES`& in &_Local/Makefile_&. The
1881 support has not been tested for some time.
1885 .section "The building process"
1886 .cindex "build directory"
1887 Once &_Local/Makefile_& (and &_Local/eximon.conf_&, if required) have been
1888 created, run &'make'& at the top level. It determines the architecture and
1889 operating system types, and creates a build directory if one does not exist.
1890 For example, on a Sun system running Solaris 8, the directory
1891 &_build-SunOS5-5.8-sparc_& is created.
1892 .cindex "symbolic link" "to source files"
1893 Symbolic links to relevant source files are installed in the build directory.
1895 &*Warning*&: The &%-j%& (parallel) flag must not be used with &'make'&; the
1896 building process fails if it is set.
1898 If this is the first time &'make'& has been run, it calls a script that builds
1899 a make file inside the build directory, using the configuration files from the
1900 &_Local_& directory. The new make file is then passed to another instance of
1901 &'make'&. This does the real work, building a number of utility scripts, and
1902 then compiling and linking the binaries for the Exim monitor (if configured), a
1903 number of utility programs, and finally Exim itself. The command &`make
1904 makefile`& can be used to force a rebuild of the make file in the build
1905 directory, should this ever be necessary.
1907 If you have problems building Exim, check for any comments there may be in the
1908 &_README_& file concerning your operating system, and also take a look at the
1909 FAQ, where some common problems are covered.
1913 .section 'Output from &"make"&'
1914 The output produced by the &'make'& process for compile lines is often very
1915 unreadable, because these lines can be very long. For this reason, the normal
1916 output is suppressed by default, and instead output similar to that which
1917 appears when compiling the 2.6 Linux kernel is generated: just a short line for
1918 each module that is being compiled or linked. However, it is still possible to
1919 get the full output, by calling &'make'& like this:
1923 The value of FULLECHO defaults to &"@"&, the flag character that suppresses
1924 command reflection in &'make'&. When you ask for the full output, it is
1925 given in addition to the the short output.
1929 .section "Overriding build-time options for Exim" "SECToverride"
1930 .cindex "build-time options" "overriding"
1931 The main make file that is created at the beginning of the building process
1932 consists of the concatenation of a number of files which set configuration
1933 values, followed by a fixed set of &'make'& instructions. If a value is set
1934 more than once, the last setting overrides any previous ones. This provides a
1935 convenient way of overriding defaults. The files that are concatenated are, in
1938 &_OS/Makefile-Default_&
1939 &_OS/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>
1941 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>
1942 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'archtype'&>
1943 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>-<&'archtype'&>
1944 &_OS/Makefile-Base_&
1946 .cindex "&_Local/Makefile_&"
1947 .cindex "building Exim" "operating system type"
1948 .cindex "building Exim" "architecture type"
1949 where <&'ostype'&> is the operating system type and <&'archtype'&> is the
1950 architecture type. &_Local/Makefile_& is required to exist, and the building
1951 process fails if it is absent. The other three &_Local_& files are optional,
1952 and are often not needed.
1954 The values used for <&'ostype'&> and <&'archtype'&> are obtained from scripts
1955 called &_scripts/os-type_& and &_scripts/arch-type_& respectively. If either of
1956 the environment variables EXIM_OSTYPE or EXIM_ARCHTYPE is set, their
1957 values are used, thereby providing a means of forcing particular settings.
1958 Otherwise, the scripts try to get values from the &%uname%& command. If this
1959 fails, the shell variables OSTYPE and ARCHTYPE are inspected. A number
1960 of &'ad hoc'& transformations are then applied, to produce the standard names
1961 that Exim expects. You can run these scripts directly from the shell in order
1962 to find out what values are being used on your system.
1965 &_OS/Makefile-Default_& contains comments about the variables that are set
1966 therein. Some (but not all) are mentioned below. If there is something that
1967 needs changing, review the contents of this file and the contents of the make
1968 file for your operating system (&_OS/Makefile-<ostype>_&) to see what the
1972 .cindex "building Exim" "overriding default settings"
1973 If you need to change any of the values that are set in &_OS/Makefile-Default_&
1974 or in &_OS/Makefile-<ostype>_&, or to add any new definitions, you do not
1975 need to change the original files. Instead, you should make the changes by
1976 putting the new values in an appropriate &_Local_& file. For example,
1977 .cindex "Tru64-Unix build-time settings"
1978 when building Exim in many releases of the Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX,
1979 formerly DEC-OSF1) operating system, it is necessary to specify that the C
1980 compiler is called &'cc'& rather than &'gcc'&. Also, the compiler must be
1981 called with the option &%-std1%&, to make it recognize some of the features of
1982 Standard C that Exim uses. (Most other compilers recognize Standard C by
1983 default.) To do this, you should create a file called &_Local/Makefile-OSF1_&
1984 containing the lines
1989 If you are compiling for just one operating system, it may be easier to put
1990 these lines directly into &_Local/Makefile_&.
1992 Keeping all your local configuration settings separate from the distributed
1993 files makes it easy to transfer them to new versions of Exim simply by copying
1994 the contents of the &_Local_& directory.
1997 .cindex "NIS lookup type" "including support for"
1998 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type" "including support for"
1999 .cindex "LDAP" "including support for"
2000 .cindex "lookup" "inclusion in binary"
2001 Exim contains support for doing LDAP, NIS, NIS+, and other kinds of file
2002 lookup, but not all systems have these components installed, so the default is
2003 not to include the relevant code in the binary. All the different kinds of file
2004 and database lookup that Exim supports are implemented as separate code modules
2005 which are included only if the relevant compile-time options are set. In the
2006 case of LDAP, NIS, and NIS+, the settings for &_Local/Makefile_& are:
2012 and similar settings apply to the other lookup types. They are all listed in
2013 &_src/EDITME_&. In many cases the relevant include files and interface
2014 libraries need to be installed before compiling Exim.
2015 .cindex "cdb" "including support for"
2016 However, there are some optional lookup types (such as cdb) for which
2017 the code is entirely contained within Exim, and no external include
2018 files or libraries are required. When a lookup type is not included in the
2019 binary, attempts to configure Exim to use it cause run time configuration
2022 .cindex "Perl" "including support for"
2023 Exim can be linked with an embedded Perl interpreter, allowing Perl
2024 subroutines to be called during string expansion. To enable this facility,
2028 must be defined in &_Local/Makefile_&. Details of this facility are given in
2029 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&.
2031 .cindex "X11 libraries" "location of"
2032 The location of the X11 libraries is something that varies a lot between
2033 operating systems, and there may be different versions of X11 to cope
2034 with. Exim itself makes no use of X11, but if you are compiling the Exim
2035 monitor, the X11 libraries must be available.
2036 The following three variables are set in &_OS/Makefile-Default_&:
2039 XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
2040 XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib
2042 These are overridden in some of the operating-system configuration files. For
2043 example, in &_OS/Makefile-SunOS5_& there is
2046 XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
2047 XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib -R$(X11)/lib
2049 If you need to override the default setting for your operating system, place a
2050 definition of all three of these variables into your
2051 &_Local/Makefile-<ostype>_& file.
2054 If you need to add any extra libraries to the link steps, these can be put in a
2055 variable called EXTRALIBS, which appears in all the link commands, but by
2056 default is not defined. In contrast, EXTRALIBS_EXIM is used only on the
2057 command for linking the main Exim binary, and not for any associated utilities.
2059 .cindex "DBM libraries" "configuration for building"
2060 There is also DBMLIB, which appears in the link commands for binaries that
2061 use DBM functions (see also section &<<SECTdb>>&). Finally, there is
2062 EXTRALIBS_EXIMON, which appears only in the link step for the Exim monitor
2063 binary, and which can be used, for example, to include additional X11
2066 .cindex "configuration file" "editing"
2067 The make file copes with rebuilding Exim correctly if any of the configuration
2068 files are edited. However, if an optional configuration file is deleted, it is
2069 necessary to touch the associated non-optional file (that is,
2070 &_Local/Makefile_& or &_Local/eximon.conf_&) before rebuilding.
2073 .section "OS-specific header files"
2075 .cindex "building Exim" "OS-specific C header files"
2076 The &_OS_& directory contains a number of files with names of the form
2077 &_os.h-<ostype>_&. These are system-specific C header files that should not
2078 normally need to be changed. There is a list of macro settings that are
2079 recognized in the file &_OS/os.configuring_&, which should be consulted if you
2080 are porting Exim to a new operating system.
2084 .section "Overriding build-time options for the monitor"
2085 .cindex "building Eximon" "overriding default options"
2086 A similar process is used for overriding things when building the Exim monitor,
2087 where the files that are involved are
2089 &_OS/eximon.conf-Default_&
2090 &_OS/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>
2091 &_Local/eximon.conf_&
2092 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>
2093 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'archtype'&>
2094 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>-<&'archtype'&>
2096 .cindex "&_Local/eximon.conf_&"
2097 As with Exim itself, the final three files need not exist, and in this case the
2098 &_OS/eximon.conf-<ostype>_& file is also optional. The default values in
2099 &_OS/eximon.conf-Default_& can be overridden dynamically by setting environment
2100 variables of the same name, preceded by EXIMON_. For example, setting
2101 EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH in the environment overrides the value of
2102 LOG_DEPTH at run time.
2106 .section "Installing Exim binaries and scripts"
2107 .cindex "installing Exim"
2108 .cindex "BIN_DIRECTORY"
2109 The command &`make install`& runs the &(exim_install)& script with no
2110 arguments. The script copies binaries and utility scripts into the directory
2111 whose name is specified by the BIN_DIRECTORY setting in &_Local/Makefile_&.
2112 .cindex "setuid" "installing Exim with"
2113 The install script copies files only if they are newer than the files they are
2114 going to replace. The Exim binary is required to be owned by root and have the
2115 &'setuid'& bit set, for normal configurations. Therefore, you must run &`make
2116 install`& as root so that it can set up the Exim binary in this way. However, in
2117 some special situations (for example, if a host is doing no local deliveries)
2118 it may be possible to run Exim without making the binary setuid root (see
2119 chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for details).
2121 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
2122 Exim's run time configuration file is named by the CONFIGURE_FILE setting
2123 in &_Local/Makefile_&. If this names a single file, and the file does not
2124 exist, the default configuration file &_src/configure.default_& is copied there
2125 by the installation script. If a run time configuration file already exists, it
2126 is left alone. If CONFIGURE_FILE is a colon-separated list, naming several
2127 alternative files, no default is installed.
2129 .cindex "system aliases file"
2130 .cindex "&_/etc/aliases_&"
2131 One change is made to the default configuration file when it is installed: the
2132 default configuration contains a router that references a system aliases file.
2133 The path to this file is set to the value specified by
2134 SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_& (&_/etc/aliases_& by default).
2135 If the system aliases file does not exist, the installation script creates it,
2136 and outputs a comment to the user.
2138 The created file contains no aliases, but it does contain comments about the
2139 aliases a site should normally have. Mail aliases have traditionally been
2140 kept in &_/etc/aliases_&. However, some operating systems are now using
2141 &_/etc/mail/aliases_&. You should check if yours is one of these, and change
2142 Exim's configuration if necessary.
2144 The default configuration uses the local host's name as the only local domain,
2145 and is set up to do local deliveries into the shared directory &_/var/mail_&,
2146 running as the local user. System aliases and &_.forward_& files in users' home
2147 directories are supported, but no NIS or NIS+ support is configured. Domains
2148 other than the name of the local host are routed using the DNS, with delivery
2151 It is possible to install Exim for special purposes (such as building a binary
2152 distribution) in a private part of the file system. You can do this by a
2155 make DESTDIR=/some/directory/ install
2157 This has the effect of pre-pending the specified directory to all the file
2158 paths, except the name of the system aliases file that appears in the default
2159 configuration. (If a default alias file is created, its name &'is'& modified.)
2160 For backwards compatibility, ROOT is used if DESTDIR is not set,
2161 but this usage is deprecated.
2163 .cindex "installing Exim" "what is not installed"
2164 Running &'make install'& does not copy the Exim 4 conversion script
2165 &'convert4r4'&, or the &'pcretest'& test program. You will probably run the
2166 first of these only once (if you are upgrading from Exim 3), and the second
2167 isn't really part of Exim. None of the documentation files in the &_doc_&
2168 directory are copied, except for the info files when you have set
2169 INFO_DIRECTORY, as described in section &<<SECTinsinfdoc>>& below.
2171 For the utility programs, old versions are renamed by adding the suffix &_.O_&
2172 to their names. The Exim binary itself, however, is handled differently. It is
2173 installed under a name that includes the version number and the compile number,
2174 for example &_exim-&version;-1_&. The script then arranges for a symbolic link
2175 called &_exim_& to point to the binary. If you are updating a previous version
2176 of Exim, the script takes care to ensure that the name &_exim_& is never absent
2177 from the directory (as seen by other processes).
2179 .cindex "installing Exim" "testing the script"
2180 If you want to see what the &'make install'& will do before running it for
2181 real, you can pass the &%-n%& option to the installation script by this
2184 make INSTALL_ARG=-n install
2186 The contents of the variable INSTALL_ARG are passed to the installation
2187 script. You do not need to be root to run this test. Alternatively, you can run
2188 the installation script directly, but this must be from within the build
2189 directory. For example, from the top-level Exim directory you could use this
2192 (cd build-SunOS5-5.5.1-sparc; ../scripts/exim_install -n)
2194 .cindex "installing Exim" "install script options"
2195 There are two other options that can be supplied to the installation script.
2198 &%-no_chown%& bypasses the call to change the owner of the installed binary
2199 to root, and the call to make it a setuid binary.
2201 &%-no_symlink%& bypasses the setting up of the symbolic link &_exim_& to the
2205 INSTALL_ARG can be used to pass these options to the script. For example:
2207 make INSTALL_ARG=-no_symlink install
2209 The installation script can also be given arguments specifying which files are
2210 to be copied. For example, to install just the Exim binary, and nothing else,
2211 without creating the symbolic link, you could use:
2213 make INSTALL_ARG='-no_symlink exim' install
2218 .section "Installing info documentation" "SECTinsinfdoc"
2219 .cindex "installing Exim" "&'info'& documentation"
2220 Not all systems use the GNU &'info'& system for documentation, and for this
2221 reason, the Texinfo source of Exim's documentation is not included in the main
2222 distribution. Instead it is available separately from the ftp site (see section
2225 If you have defined INFO_DIRECTORY in &_Local/Makefile_& and the Texinfo
2226 source of the documentation is found in the source tree, running &`make
2227 install`& automatically builds the info files and installs them.
2231 .section "Setting up the spool directory"
2232 .cindex "spool directory" "creating"
2233 When it starts up, Exim tries to create its spool directory if it does not
2234 exist. The Exim uid and gid are used for the owner and group of the spool
2235 directory. Sub-directories are automatically created in the spool directory as
2242 .cindex "testing" "installation"
2243 Having installed Exim, you can check that the run time configuration file is
2244 syntactically valid by running the following command, which assumes that the
2245 Exim binary directory is within your PATH environment variable:
2249 If there are any errors in the configuration file, Exim outputs error messages.
2250 Otherwise it outputs the version number and build date,
2251 the DBM library that is being used, and information about which drivers and
2252 other optional code modules are included in the binary.
2253 Some simple routing tests can be done by using the address testing option. For
2256 &`exim -bt`& <&'local username'&>
2258 should verify that it recognizes a local mailbox, and
2260 &`exim -bt`& <&'remote address'&>
2262 a remote one. Then try getting it to deliver mail, both locally and remotely.
2263 This can be done by passing messages directly to Exim, without going through a
2264 user agent. For example:
2266 exim -v postmaster@your.domain.example
2267 From: user@your.domain.example
2268 To: postmaster@your.domain.example
2269 Subject: Testing Exim
2271 This is a test message.
2274 The &%-v%& option causes Exim to output some verification of what it is doing.
2275 In this case you should see copies of three log lines, one for the message's
2276 arrival, one for its delivery, and one containing &"Completed"&.
2278 .cindex "delivery" "problems with"
2279 If you encounter problems, look at Exim's log files (&'mainlog'& and
2280 &'paniclog'&) to see if there is any relevant information there. Another source
2281 of information is running Exim with debugging turned on, by specifying the
2282 &%-d%& option. If a message is stuck on Exim's spool, you can force a delivery
2283 with debugging turned on by a command of the form
2285 &`exim -d -M`& <&'exim-message-id'&>
2287 You must be root or an &"admin user"& in order to do this. The &%-d%& option
2288 produces rather a lot of output, but you can cut this down to specific areas.
2289 For example, if you use &%-d-all+route%& only the debugging information
2290 relevant to routing is included. (See the &%-d%& option in chapter
2291 &<<CHAPcommandline>>& for more details.)
2293 .cindex '&"sticky"& bit'
2294 .cindex "lock files"
2295 One specific problem that has shown up on some sites is the inability to do
2296 local deliveries into a shared mailbox directory, because it does not have the
2297 &"sticky bit"& set on it. By default, Exim tries to create a lock file before
2298 writing to a mailbox file, and if it cannot create the lock file, the delivery
2299 is deferred. You can get round this either by setting the &"sticky bit"& on the
2300 directory, or by setting a specific group for local deliveries and allowing
2301 that group to create files in the directory (see the comments above the
2302 &(local_delivery)& transport in the default configuration file). Another
2303 approach is to configure Exim not to use lock files, but just to rely on
2304 &[fcntl()]& locking instead. However, you should do this only if all user
2305 agents also use &[fcntl()]& locking. For further discussion of locking issues,
2306 see chapter &<<CHAPappendfile>>&.
2308 One thing that cannot be tested on a system that is already running an MTA is
2309 the receipt of incoming SMTP mail on the standard SMTP port. However, the
2310 &%-oX%& option can be used to run an Exim daemon that listens on some other
2311 port, or &'inetd'& can be used to do this. The &%-bh%& option and the
2312 &'exim_checkaccess'& utility can be used to check out policy controls on
2315 Testing a new version on a system that is already running Exim can most easily
2316 be done by building a binary with a different CONFIGURE_FILE setting. From
2317 within the run time configuration, all other file and directory names
2318 that Exim uses can be altered, in order to keep it entirely clear of the
2322 .section "Replacing another MTA with Exim"
2323 .cindex "replacing another MTA"
2324 Building and installing Exim for the first time does not of itself put it in
2325 general use. The name by which the system's MTA is called by mail user agents
2326 is either &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&, or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& (depending on the
2327 operating system), and it is necessary to make this name point to the &'exim'&
2328 binary in order to get the user agents to pass messages to Exim. This is
2329 normally done by renaming any existing file and making &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&
2330 or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_&
2331 .cindex "symbolic link" "to &'exim'& binary"
2332 a symbolic link to the &'exim'& binary. It is a good idea to remove any setuid
2333 privilege and executable status from the old MTA. It is then necessary to stop
2334 and restart the mailer daemon, if one is running.
2336 .cindex "FreeBSD" "MTA indirection"
2337 .cindex "&_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_&"
2338 Some operating systems have introduced alternative ways of switching MTAs. For
2339 example, if you are running FreeBSD, you need to edit the file
2340 &_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_& instead of setting up a symbolic link as just
2341 described. A typical example of the contents of this file for running Exim is
2344 sendmail /usr/exim/bin/exim
2345 send-mail /usr/exim/bin/exim
2346 mailq /usr/exim/bin/exim -bp
2347 newaliases /usr/bin/true
2349 Once you have set up the symbolic link, or edited &_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_&,
2350 your Exim installation is &"live"&. Check it by sending a message from your
2351 favourite user agent.
2353 You should consider what to tell your users about the change of MTA. Exim may
2354 have different capabilities to what was previously running, and there are
2355 various operational differences such as the text of messages produced by
2356 command line options and in bounce messages. If you allow your users to make
2357 use of Exim's filtering capabilities, you should make the document entitled
2358 &'Exim's interface to mail filtering'& available to them.
2362 .section "Upgrading Exim"
2363 .cindex "upgrading Exim"
2364 If you are already running Exim on your host, building and installing a new
2365 version automatically makes it available to MUAs, or any other programs that
2366 call the MTA directly. However, if you are running an Exim daemon, you do need
2367 to send it a HUP signal, to make it re-execute itself, and thereby pick up the
2368 new binary. You do not need to stop processing mail in order to install a new
2369 version of Exim. The install script does not modify an existing runtime
2375 .section "Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris"
2376 .cindex "Solaris" "stopping Exim on"
2377 The standard command for stopping the mailer daemon on Solaris is
2379 /etc/init.d/sendmail stop
2381 If &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& has been turned into a symbolic link, this script
2382 fails to stop Exim because it uses the command &'ps -e'& and greps the output
2383 for the text &"sendmail"&; this is not present because the actual program name
2384 (that is, &"exim"&) is given by the &'ps'& command with these options. A
2385 solution is to replace the line that finds the process id with something like
2387 pid=`cat /var/spool/exim/exim-daemon.pid`
2389 to obtain the daemon's pid directly from the file that Exim saves it in.
2391 Note, however, that stopping the daemon does not &"stop Exim"&. Messages can
2392 still be received from local processes, and if automatic delivery is configured
2393 (the normal case), deliveries will still occur.
2398 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2399 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2401 .chapter "The Exim command line" "CHAPcommandline"
2402 .scindex IIDclo1 "command line" "options"
2403 .scindex IIDclo2 "options" "command line"
2404 Exim's command line takes the standard Unix form of a sequence of options,
2405 each starting with a hyphen character, followed by a number of arguments. The
2406 options are compatible with the main options of Sendmail, and there are also
2407 some additional options, some of which are compatible with Smail 3. Certain
2408 combinations of options do not make sense, and provoke an error if used.
2409 The form of the arguments depends on which options are set.
2412 .section "Setting options by program name"
2414 If Exim is called under the name &'mailq'&, it behaves as if the option &%-bp%&
2415 were present before any other options.
2416 The &%-bp%& option requests a listing of the contents of the mail queue on the
2418 This feature is for compatibility with some systems that contain a command of
2419 that name in one of the standard libraries, symbolically linked to
2420 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_&.
2423 If Exim is called under the name &'rsmtp'& it behaves as if the option &%-bS%&
2424 were present before any other options, for compatibility with Smail. The
2425 &%-bS%& option is used for reading in a number of messages in batched SMTP
2429 If Exim is called under the name &'rmail'& it behaves as if the &%-i%& and
2430 &%-oee%& options were present before any other options, for compatibility with
2431 Smail. The name &'rmail'& is used as an interface by some UUCP systems.
2434 .cindex "queue runner"
2435 If Exim is called under the name &'runq'& it behaves as if the option &%-q%&
2436 were present before any other options, for compatibility with Smail. The &%-q%&
2437 option causes a single queue runner process to be started.
2439 .cindex "&'newaliases'&"
2440 .cindex "alias file" "building"
2441 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "calling Exim as &'newaliases'&"
2442 If Exim is called under the name &'newaliases'& it behaves as if the option
2443 &%-bi%& were present before any other options, for compatibility with Sendmail.
2444 This option is used for rebuilding Sendmail's alias file. Exim does not have
2445 the concept of a single alias file, but can be configured to run a given
2446 command if called with the &%-bi%& option.
2449 .section "Trusted and admin users" "SECTtrustedadmin"
2450 Some Exim options are available only to &'trusted users'& and others are
2451 available only to &'admin users'&. In the description below, the phrases &"Exim
2452 user"& and &"Exim group"& mean the user and group defined by EXIM_USER and
2453 EXIM_GROUP in &_Local/Makefile_& or set by the &%exim_user%& and
2454 &%exim_group%& options. These do not necessarily have to use the name &"exim"&.
2457 .cindex "trusted user" "definition of"
2458 .cindex "user" "trusted definition of"
2459 The trusted users are root, the Exim user, any user listed in the
2460 &%trusted_users%& configuration option, and any user whose current group or any
2461 supplementary group is one of those listed in the &%trusted_groups%&
2462 configuration option. Note that the Exim group is not automatically trusted.
2464 .cindex '&"From"& line'
2465 .cindex "envelope sender"
2466 Trusted users are always permitted to use the &%-f%& option or a leading
2467 &"From&~"& line to specify the envelope sender of a message that is passed to
2468 Exim through the local interface (see the &%-bm%& and &%-f%& options below).
2469 See the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option for a way of permitting non-trusted
2470 users to set envelope senders.
2472 .cindex "&'From:'& header line"
2473 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line"
2474 For a trusted user, there is never any check on the contents of the &'From:'&
2475 header line, and a &'Sender:'& line is never added. Furthermore, any existing
2476 &'Sender:'& line in incoming local (non-TCP/IP) messages is not removed.
2478 Trusted users may also specify a host name, host address, interface address,
2479 protocol name, ident value, and authentication data when submitting a message
2480 locally. Thus, they are able to insert messages into Exim's queue locally that
2481 have the characteristics of messages received from a remote host. Untrusted
2482 users may in some circumstances use &%-f%&, but can never set the other values
2483 that are available to trusted users.
2485 .cindex "user" "admin definition of"
2486 .cindex "admin user" "definition of"
2487 The admin users are root, the Exim user, and any user that is a member of the
2488 Exim group or of any group listed in the &%admin_groups%& configuration option.
2489 The current group does not have to be one of these groups.
2491 Admin users are permitted to list the queue, and to carry out certain
2492 operations on messages, for example, to force delivery failures. It is also
2493 necessary to be an admin user in order to see the full information provided by
2494 the Exim monitor, and full debugging output.
2496 By default, the use of the &%-M%&, &%-q%&, &%-R%&, and &%-S%& options to cause
2497 Exim to attempt delivery of messages on its queue is restricted to admin users.
2498 However, this restriction can be relaxed by setting the &%prod_requires_admin%&
2499 option false (that is, specifying &%no_prod_requires_admin%&).
2501 Similarly, the use of the &%-bp%& option to list all the messages in the queue
2502 is restricted to admin users unless &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set
2507 &*Warning*&: If you configure your system so that admin users are able to
2508 edit Exim's configuration file, you are giving those users an easy way of
2509 getting root. There is further discussion of this issue at the start of chapter
2515 .section "Command line options"
2516 The command options are described in alphabetical order below.
2518 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2519 . Insert a stylized XML comment here, to identify the start of the command line
2520 . options. This is for the benefit of the Perl script that automatically
2521 . creates a man page for the options.
2522 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2525 <!-- === Start of command line options === -->
2532 .cindex "options" "command line; terminating"
2533 This is a pseudo-option whose only purpose is to terminate the options and
2534 therefore to cause subsequent command line items to be treated as arguments
2535 rather than options, even if they begin with hyphens.
2538 .oindex "&%--help%&"
2539 This option causes Exim to output a few sentences stating what it is.
2540 The same output is generated if the Exim binary is called with no options and
2543 .vitem &%-B%&<&'type'&>
2545 .cindex "8-bit characters"
2546 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "8-bit characters"
2547 This is a Sendmail option for selecting 7 or 8 bit processing. Exim is 8-bit
2548 clean; it ignores this option.
2553 .cindex "SMTP listener"
2554 .cindex "queue runner"
2555 This option runs Exim as a daemon, awaiting incoming SMTP connections. Usually
2556 the &%-bd%& option is combined with the &%-q%&<&'time'&> option, to specify
2557 that the daemon should also initiate periodic queue runs.
2559 The &%-bd%& option can be used only by an admin user. If either of the &%-d%&
2560 (debugging) or &%-v%& (verifying) options are set, the daemon does not
2561 disconnect from the controlling terminal. When running this way, it can be
2562 stopped by pressing ctrl-C.
2564 By default, Exim listens for incoming connections to the standard SMTP port on
2565 all the host's running interfaces. However, it is possible to listen on other
2566 ports, on multiple ports, and only on specific interfaces. Chapter
2567 &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& contains a description of the options that control this.
2569 When a listening daemon
2570 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
2571 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
2572 is started without the use of &%-oX%& (that is, without overriding the normal
2573 configuration), it writes its process id to a file called &_exim-daemon.pid_&
2574 in Exim's spool directory. This location can be overridden by setting
2575 PID_FILE_PATH in &_Local/Makefile_&. The file is written while Exim is still
2578 When &%-oX%& is used on the command line to start a listening daemon, the
2579 process id is not written to the normal pid file path. However, &%-oP%& can be
2580 used to specify a path on the command line if a pid file is required.
2584 can be used to cause the daemon to re-exec itself. This should be done whenever
2585 Exim's configuration file, or any file that is incorporated into it by means of
2586 the &%.include%& facility, is changed, and also whenever a new version of Exim
2587 is installed. It is not necessary to do this when other files that are
2588 referenced from the configuration (for example, alias files) are changed,
2589 because these are reread each time they are used.
2593 This option has the same effect as &%-bd%& except that it never disconnects
2594 from the controlling terminal, even when no debugging is specified.
2598 .cindex "testing" "string expansion"
2599 .cindex "expansion" "testing"
2600 Run Exim in expansion testing mode. Exim discards its root privilege, to
2601 prevent ordinary users from using this mode to read otherwise inaccessible
2602 files. If no arguments are given, Exim runs interactively, prompting for lines
2603 of data. Otherwise, it processes each argument in turn.
2605 If Exim was built with USE_READLINE=yes in &_Local/Makefile_&, it tries
2606 to load the &%libreadline%& library dynamically whenever the &%-be%& option is
2607 used without command line arguments. If successful, it uses the &[readline()]&
2608 function, which provides extensive line-editing facilities, for reading the
2609 test data. A line history is supported.
2611 Long expansion expressions can be split over several lines by using backslash
2612 continuations. As in Exim's run time configuration, white space at the start of
2613 continuation lines is ignored. Each argument or data line is passed through the
2614 string expansion mechanism, and the result is output. Variable values from the
2615 configuration file (for example, &$qualify_domain$&) are available, but no
2616 message-specific values (such as &$domain$&) are set, because no message is
2619 &*Note*&: If you use this mechanism to test lookups, and you change the data
2620 files or databases you are using, you must exit and restart Exim before trying
2621 the same lookup again. Otherwise, because each Exim process caches the results
2622 of lookups, you will just get the same result as before.
2624 .vitem &%-bF%&&~<&'filename'&>
2626 .cindex "system filter" "testing"
2627 .cindex "testing" "system filter"
2628 This option is the same as &%-bf%& except that it assumes that the filter being
2629 tested is a system filter. The additional commands that are available only in
2630 system filters are recognized.
2632 .vitem &%-bf%&&~<&'filename'&>
2634 .cindex "filter" "testing"
2635 .cindex "testing" "filter file"
2636 .cindex "forward file" "testing"
2637 .cindex "testing" "forward file"
2638 .cindex "Sieve filter" "testing"
2639 This option runs Exim in user filter testing mode; the file is the filter file
2640 to be tested, and a test message must be supplied on the standard input. If
2641 there are no message-dependent tests in the filter, an empty file can be
2644 If you want to test a system filter file, use &%-bF%& instead of &%-bf%&. You
2645 can use both &%-bF%& and &%-bf%& on the same command, in order to test a system
2646 filter and a user filter in the same run. For example:
2648 exim -bF /system/filter -bf /user/filter </test/message
2650 This is helpful when the system filter adds header lines or sets filter
2651 variables that are used by the user filter.
2653 If the test filter file does not begin with one of the special lines
2658 it is taken to be a normal &_.forward_& file, and is tested for validity under
2659 that interpretation. See sections &<<SECTitenonfilred>>& to
2660 &<<SECTspecitredli>>& for a description of the possible contents of non-filter
2663 The result of an Exim command that uses &%-bf%&, provided no errors are
2664 detected, is a list of the actions that Exim would try to take if presented
2665 with the message for real. More details of filter testing are given in the
2666 separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&.
2668 When testing a filter file,
2669 .cindex "&""From""& line"
2670 .cindex "envelope sender"
2671 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "for filter testing"
2672 the envelope sender can be set by the &%-f%& option,
2673 or by a &"From&~"& line at the start of the test message. Various parameters
2674 that would normally be taken from the envelope recipient address of the message
2675 can be set by means of additional command line options (see the next four
2678 .vitem &%-bfd%&&~<&'domain'&>
2680 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
2681 This sets the domain of the recipient address when a filter file is being
2682 tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is the value of
2685 .vitem &%-bfl%&&~<&'local&~part'&>
2687 This sets the local part of the recipient address when a filter file is being
2688 tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is the username of the
2689 process that calls Exim. A local part should be specified with any prefix or
2690 suffix stripped, because that is how it appears to the filter when a message is
2691 actually being delivered.
2693 .vitem &%-bfp%&&~<&'prefix'&>
2695 This sets the prefix of the local part of the recipient address when a filter
2696 file is being tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is an empty
2699 .vitem &%-bfs%&&~<&'suffix'&>
2701 This sets the suffix of the local part of the recipient address when a filter
2702 file is being tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is an empty
2705 .vitem &%-bh%&&~<&'IP&~address'&>
2707 .cindex "testing" "incoming SMTP"
2708 .cindex "SMTP" "testing incoming"
2709 .cindex "testing" "relay control"
2710 .cindex "relaying" "testing configuration"
2711 .cindex "policy control" "testing"
2712 .cindex "debugging" "&%-bh%& option"
2713 This option runs a fake SMTP session as if from the given IP address, using the
2714 standard input and output. The IP address may include a port number at the end,
2715 after a full stop. For example:
2717 exim -bh 10.9.8.7.1234
2718 exim -bh fe80::a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678
2720 When an IPv6 address is given, it is converted into canonical form. In the case
2721 of the second example above, the value of &$sender_host_address$& after
2722 conversion to the canonical form is
2723 &`fe80:0000:0000:0a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678`&.
2725 Comments as to what is going on are written to the standard error file. These
2726 include lines beginning with &"LOG"& for anything that would have been logged.
2727 This facility is provided for testing configuration options for incoming
2728 messages, to make sure they implement the required policy. For example, you can
2729 test your relay controls using &%-bh%&.
2733 You cannot test features of the configuration that rely on
2734 ident (RFC 1413) callouts. These cannot be done when testing using
2735 &%-bh%& because there is no incoming SMTP connection.
2737 &*Warning 2*&: Address verification callouts (see section &<<SECTcallver>>&)
2738 are also skipped when testing using &%-bh%&. If you want these callouts to
2739 occur, use &%-bhc%& instead.
2741 Messages supplied during the testing session are discarded, and nothing is
2742 written to any of the real log files. There may be pauses when DNS (and other)
2743 lookups are taking place, and of course these may time out. The &%-oMi%& option
2744 can be used to specify a specific IP interface and port if this is important.
2746 The &'exim_checkaccess'& utility is a &"packaged"& version of &%-bh%& whose
2747 output just states whether a given recipient address from a given host is
2748 acceptable or not. See section &<<SECTcheckaccess>>&.
2750 .vitem &%-bhc%&&~<&'IP&~address'&>
2752 This option operates in the same way as &%-bh%&, except that address
2753 verification callouts are performed if required. This includes consulting and
2754 updating the callout cache database.
2758 .cindex "alias file" "building"
2759 .cindex "building alias file"
2760 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-bi%& option"
2761 Sendmail interprets the &%-bi%& option as a request to rebuild its alias file.
2762 Exim does not have the concept of a single alias file, and so it cannot mimic
2763 this behaviour. However, calls to &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& with the &%-bi%& option
2764 tend to appear in various scripts such as NIS make files, so the option must be
2767 If &%-bi%& is encountered, the command specified by the &%bi_command%&
2768 configuration option is run, under the uid and gid of the caller of Exim. If
2769 the &%-oA%& option is used, its value is passed to the command as an argument.
2770 The command set by &%bi_command%& may not contain arguments. The command can
2771 use the &'exim_dbmbuild'& utility, or some other means, to rebuild alias files
2772 if this is required. If the &%bi_command%& option is not set, calling Exim with
2777 .cindex "local message reception"
2778 This option runs an Exim receiving process that accepts an incoming,
2779 locally-generated message on the current input. The recipients are given as the
2780 command arguments (except when &%-t%& is also present &-- see below). Each
2781 argument can be a comma-separated list of RFC 2822 addresses. This is the
2782 default option for selecting the overall action of an Exim call; it is assumed
2783 if no other conflicting option is present.
2785 If any addresses in the message are unqualified (have no domain), they are
2786 qualified by the values of the &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%&
2787 options, as appropriate. The &%-bnq%& option (see below) provides a way of
2788 suppressing this for special cases.
2790 Policy checks on the contents of local messages can be enforced by means of
2791 the non-SMTP ACL. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details.
2793 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bm%&"
2794 The return code is zero if the message is successfully accepted. Otherwise, the
2795 action is controlled by the &%-oe%&&'x'& option setting &-- see below.
2798 .cindex "message" "format"
2799 .cindex "format" "message"
2800 .cindex "&""From""& line"
2801 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
2802 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
2803 of the message must be as defined in RFC 2822, except that, for
2804 compatibility with Sendmail and Smail, a line in one of the forms
2806 From sender Fri Jan 5 12:55 GMT 1997
2807 From sender Fri, 5 Jan 97 12:55:01
2809 (with the weekday optional, and possibly with additional text after the date)
2810 is permitted to appear at the start of the message. There appears to be no
2811 authoritative specification of the format of this line. Exim recognizes it by
2812 matching against the regular expression defined by the &%uucp_from_pattern%&
2813 option, which can be changed if necessary.
2816 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "overriding &""From""& line"
2817 specified sender is treated as if it were given as the argument to the
2818 &%-f%& option, but if a &%-f%& option is also present, its argument is used in
2819 preference to the address taken from the message. The caller of Exim must be a
2820 trusted user for the sender of a message to be set in this way.
2824 .cindex "address qualification" "suppressing"
2825 By default, Exim automatically qualifies unqualified addresses (those
2826 without domains) that appear in messages that are submitted locally (that
2827 is, not over TCP/IP). This qualification applies both to addresses in
2828 envelopes, and addresses in header lines. Sender addresses are qualified using
2829 &%qualify_domain%&, and recipient addresses using &%qualify_recipient%& (which
2830 defaults to the value of &%qualify_domain%&).
2832 Sometimes, qualification is not wanted. For example, if &%-bS%& (batch SMTP) is
2833 being used to re-submit messages that originally came from remote hosts after
2834 content scanning, you probably do not want to qualify unqualified addresses in
2835 header lines. (Such lines will be present only if you have not enabled a header
2836 syntax check in the appropriate ACL.)
2838 The &%-bnq%& option suppresses all qualification of unqualified addresses in
2839 messages that originate on the local host. When this is used, unqualified
2840 addresses in the envelope provoke errors (causing message rejection) and
2841 unqualified addresses in header lines are left alone.
2846 .cindex "configuration options" "extracting"
2847 .cindex "options" "configuration &-- extracting"
2848 If this option is given with no arguments, it causes the values of all Exim's
2849 main configuration options to be written to the standard output. The values
2850 of one or more specific options can be requested by giving their names as
2851 arguments, for example:
2853 exim -bP qualify_domain hold_domains
2855 However, any option setting that is preceded by the word &"hide"& in the
2856 configuration file is not shown in full, except to an admin user. For other
2857 users, the output is as in this example:
2859 mysql_servers = <value not displayable>
2861 If &%configure_file%& is given as an argument, the name of the run time
2862 configuration file is output.
2863 If a list of configuration files was supplied, the value that is output here
2864 is the name of the file that was actually used.
2866 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
2867 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
2868 If &%log_file_path%& or &%pid_file_path%& are given, the names of the
2869 directories where log files and daemon pid files are written are output,
2870 respectively. If these values are unset, log files are written in a
2871 sub-directory of the spool directory called &%log%&, and the pid file is
2872 written directly into the spool directory.
2874 If &%-bP%& is followed by a name preceded by &`+`&, for example,
2876 exim -bP +local_domains
2878 it searches for a matching named list of any type (domain, host, address, or
2879 local part) and outputs what it finds.
2881 .cindex "options" "router &-- extracting"
2882 .cindex "options" "transport &-- extracting"
2883 If one of the words &%router%&, &%transport%&, or &%authenticator%& is given,
2884 followed by the name of an appropriate driver instance, the option settings for
2885 that driver are output. For example:
2887 exim -bP transport local_delivery
2889 The generic driver options are output first, followed by the driver's private
2890 options. A list of the names of drivers of a particular type can be obtained by
2891 using one of the words &%router_list%&, &%transport_list%&, or
2892 &%authenticator_list%&, and a complete list of all drivers with their option
2893 settings can be obtained by using &%routers%&, &%transports%&, or
2899 .cindex "queue" "listing messages on"
2900 .cindex "listing" "messages on the queue"
2901 This option requests a listing of the contents of the mail queue on the
2902 standard output. If the &%-bp%& option is followed by a list of message ids,
2903 just those messages are listed. By default, this option can be used only by an
2904 admin user. However, the &%queue_list_requires_admin%& option can be set false
2905 to allow any user to see the queue.
2907 Each message on the queue is displayed as in the following example:
2909 25m 2.9K 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 <alice@wonderland.fict.example>
2910 red.king@looking-glass.fict.example
2913 .cindex "message" "size in queue listing"
2914 .cindex "size" "of message"
2915 The first line contains the length of time the message has been on the queue
2916 (in this case 25 minutes), the size of the message (2.9K), the unique local
2917 identifier for the message, and the message sender, as contained in the
2918 envelope. For bounce messages, the sender address is empty, and appears as
2919 &"<>"&. If the message was submitted locally by an untrusted user who overrode
2920 the default sender address, the user's login name is shown in parentheses
2921 before the sender address.
2923 .cindex "frozen messages" "in queue listing"
2924 If the message is frozen (attempts to deliver it are suspended) then the text
2925 &"*** frozen ***"& is displayed at the end of this line.
2927 The recipients of the message (taken from the envelope, not the headers) are
2928 displayed on subsequent lines. Those addresses to which the message has already
2929 been delivered are marked with the letter D. If an original address gets
2930 expanded into several addresses via an alias or forward file, the original is
2931 displayed with a D only when deliveries for all of its child addresses are
2937 This option operates like &%-bp%&, but in addition it shows delivered addresses
2938 that were generated from the original top level address(es) in each message by
2939 alias or forwarding operations. These addresses are flagged with &"+D"& instead
2945 .cindex "queue" "count of messages on"
2946 This option counts the number of messages on the queue, and writes the total
2947 to the standard output. It is restricted to admin users, unless
2948 &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set false.
2953 This option operates like &%-bp%&, but the output is not sorted into
2954 chronological order of message arrival. This can speed it up when there are
2955 lots of messages on the queue, and is particularly useful if the output is
2956 going to be post-processed in a way that doesn't need the sorting.
2960 This option is a combination of &%-bpr%& and &%-bpa%&.
2964 This option is a combination of &%-bpr%& and &%-bpu%&.
2969 This option operates like &%-bp%& but shows only undelivered top-level
2970 addresses for each message displayed. Addresses generated by aliasing or
2971 forwarding are not shown, unless the message was deferred after processing by a
2972 router with the &%one_time%& option set.
2977 .cindex "testing" "retry configuration"
2978 .cindex "retry" "configuration testing"
2979 This option is for testing retry rules, and it must be followed by up to three
2980 arguments. It causes Exim to look for a retry rule that matches the values
2981 and to write it to the standard output. For example:
2983 exim -brt bach.comp.mus.example
2984 Retry rule: *.comp.mus.example F,2h,15m; F,4d,30m;
2986 See chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& for a description of Exim's retry rules. The first
2987 argument, which is required, can be a complete address in the form
2988 &'local_part@domain'&, or it can be just a domain name. If the second argument
2989 contains a dot, it is interpreted as an optional second domain name; if no
2990 retry rule is found for the first argument, the second is tried. This ties in
2991 with Exim's behaviour when looking for retry rules for remote hosts &-- if no
2992 rule is found that matches the host, one that matches the mail domain is
2993 sought. Finally, an argument that is the name of a specific delivery error, as
2994 used in setting up retry rules, can be given. For example:
2996 exim -brt haydn.comp.mus.example quota_3d
2997 Retry rule: *@haydn.comp.mus.example quota_3d F,1h,15m
3002 .cindex "testing" "rewriting"
3003 .cindex "rewriting" "testing"
3004 This option is for testing address rewriting rules, and it must be followed by
3005 a single argument, consisting of either a local part without a domain, or a
3006 complete address with a fully qualified domain. Exim outputs how this address
3007 would be rewritten for each possible place it might appear. See chapter
3008 &<<CHAPrewrite>>& for further details.
3012 .cindex "SMTP" "batched incoming"
3013 .cindex "batched SMTP input"
3014 This option is used for batched SMTP input, which is an alternative interface
3015 for non-interactive local message submission. A number of messages can be
3016 submitted in a single run. However, despite its name, this is not really SMTP
3017 input. Exim reads each message's envelope from SMTP commands on the standard
3018 input, but generates no responses. If the caller is trusted, or
3019 &%untrusted_set_sender%& is set, the senders in the SMTP MAIL commands are
3020 believed; otherwise the sender is always the caller of Exim.
3022 The message itself is read from the standard input, in SMTP format (leading
3023 dots doubled), terminated by a line containing just a single dot. An error is
3024 provoked if the terminating dot is missing. A further message may then follow.
3026 As for other local message submissions, the contents of incoming batch SMTP
3027 messages can be checked using the non-SMTP ACL (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&).
3028 Unqualified addresses are automatically qualified using &%qualify_domain%& and
3029 &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate, unless the &%-bnq%& option is used.
3031 Some other SMTP commands are recognized in the input. HELO and EHLO act
3032 as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN, and HELP act as NOOP;
3033 QUIT quits, ignoring the rest of the standard input.
3035 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bS%&"
3036 If any error is encountered, reports are written to the standard output and
3037 error streams, and Exim gives up immediately. The return code is 0 if no error
3038 was detected; it is 1 if one or more messages were accepted before the error
3039 was detected; otherwise it is 2.
3041 More details of input using batched SMTP are given in section
3042 &<<SECTincomingbatchedSMTP>>&.
3046 .cindex "SMTP" "local input"
3047 .cindex "local SMTP input"
3048 This option causes Exim to accept one or more messages by reading SMTP commands
3049 on the standard input, and producing SMTP replies on the standard output. SMTP
3050 policy controls, as defined in ACLs (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&) are applied.
3051 Some user agents use this interface as a way of passing locally-generated
3052 messages to the MTA.
3055 .cindex "sender" "source of"
3056 this usage, if the caller of Exim is trusted, or &%untrusted_set_sender%& is
3057 set, the senders of messages are taken from the SMTP MAIL commands.
3058 Otherwise the content of these commands is ignored and the sender is set up as
3059 the calling user. Unqualified addresses are automatically qualified using
3060 &%qualify_domain%& and &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate, unless the
3061 &%-bnq%& option is used.
3065 &%-bs%& option is also used to run Exim from &'inetd'&, as an alternative to
3066 using a listening daemon. Exim can distinguish the two cases by checking
3067 whether the standard input is a TCP/IP socket. When Exim is called from
3068 &'inetd'&, the source of the mail is assumed to be remote, and the comments
3069 above concerning senders and qualification do not apply. In this situation,
3070 Exim behaves in exactly the same way as it does when receiving a message via
3071 the listening daemon.
3075 .cindex "testing" "addresses"
3076 .cindex "address" "testing"
3077 This option runs Exim in address testing mode, in which each argument is taken
3078 as an address to be tested for deliverability. The results are written to the
3079 standard output. If a test fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no
3080 details of the failure are output, because these might contain sensitive
3081 information such as usernames and passwords for database lookups.
3083 If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner, prompting with a
3084 right angle bracket for addresses to be tested.
3086 Unlike the &%-be%& test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use the
3087 &[readline()]& function, because it is running as &'root'& and there are
3090 Each address is handled as if it were the recipient address of a message
3091 (compare the &%-bv%& option). It is passed to the routers and the result is
3092 written to the standard output. However, any router that has
3093 &%no_address_test%& set is bypassed. This can make &%-bt%& easier to use for
3094 genuine routing tests if your first router passes everything to a scanner
3098 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bt%&"
3099 return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no address
3100 failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for some reason. Return
3101 code 0 is given only when all addresses succeed.
3103 &*Warning*&: &%-bt%& can only do relatively simple testing. If any of the
3104 routers in the configuration makes any tests on the sender address of a
3106 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "for address testing"
3107 you can use the &%-f%& option to set an appropriate sender when running
3108 &%-bt%& tests. Without it, the sender is assumed to be the calling user at the
3109 default qualifying domain. However, if you have set up (for example) routers
3110 whose behaviour depends on the contents of an incoming message, you cannot test
3111 those conditions using &%-bt%&. The &%-N%& option provides a possible way of
3116 .cindex "version number of Exim" "verifying"
3117 This option causes Exim to write the current version number, compilation
3118 number, and compilation date of the &'exim'& binary to the standard output.
3119 It also lists the DBM library this is being used, the optional modules (such as
3120 specific lookup types), the drivers that are included in the binary, and the
3121 name of the run time configuration file that is in use.
3123 As part of its operation, &%-bV%& causes Exim to read and syntax check its
3124 configuration file. However, this is a static check only. It cannot check
3125 values that are to be expanded. For example, although a misspelt ACL verb is
3126 detected, an error in the verb's arguments is not. You cannot rely on &%-bV%&
3127 alone to discover (for example) all the typos in the configuration; some
3128 realistic testing is needed. The &%-bh%& and &%-N%& options provide more
3129 dynamic testing facilities.
3133 .cindex "verifying address" "using &%-bv%&"
3134 .cindex "address" "verification"
3135 This option runs Exim in address verification mode, in which each argument is
3136 taken as an address to be verified. During normal operation, verification
3137 happens mostly as a consequence processing a &%verify%& condition in an ACL
3138 (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). If you want to test an entire ACL, see the &%-bh%&
3141 If verification fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no details of the
3142 failure are output, because these might contain sensitive information such as
3143 usernames and passwords for database lookups.
3145 If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner, prompting with a
3146 right angle bracket for addresses to be verified.
3148 Unlike the &%-be%& test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use the
3149 &[readline()]& function, because it is running as &'exim'& and there are
3152 Verification differs from address testing (the &%-bt%& option) in that routers
3153 that have &%no_verify%& set are skipped, and if the address is accepted by a
3154 router that has &%fail_verify%& set, verification fails. The address is
3155 verified as a recipient if &%-bv%& is used; to test verification for a sender
3156 address, &%-bvs%& should be used.
3158 If the &%-v%& option is not set, the output consists of a single line for each
3159 address, stating whether it was verified or not, and giving a reason in the
3160 latter case. Otherwise, more details are given of how the address has been
3161 handled, and in the case of address redirection, all the generated addresses
3162 are also considered. Without &%-v%&, generating more than one address by
3163 redirection causes verification to end successfully.
3166 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bv%&"
3167 return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no address
3168 failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for some reason. Return
3169 code 0 is given only when all addresses succeed.
3171 If any of the routers in the configuration makes any tests on the sender
3172 address of a message, you should use the &%-f%& option to set an appropriate
3173 sender when running &%-bv%& tests. Without it, the sender is assumed to be the
3174 calling user at the default qualifying domain.
3178 This option acts like &%-bv%&, but verifies the address as a sender rather
3179 than a recipient address. This affects any rewriting and qualification that
3182 .vitem &%-C%&&~<&'filelist'&>
3184 .cindex "configuration file" "alternate"
3185 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
3186 .cindex "alternate configuration file"
3187 This option causes Exim to find the run time configuration file from the given
3188 list instead of from the list specified by the CONFIGURE_FILE
3189 compile-time setting. Usually, the list will consist of just a single file
3190 name, but it can be a colon-separated list of names. In this case, the first
3191 file that exists is used. Failure to open an existing file stops Exim from
3192 proceeding any further along the list, and an error is generated.
3194 When this option is used by a caller other than root or the Exim user, and the
3195 list is different from the compiled-in list, Exim gives up its root privilege
3196 immediately, and runs with the real and effective uid and gid set to those of
3197 the caller. However, if ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined in
3198 &_Local/Makefile_&, root privilege is retained for &%-C%& only if the caller of
3201 That is, the Exim user is no longer privileged in this regard. This build-time
3202 option is not set by default in the Exim source distribution tarbundle.
3203 However, if you are using a &"packaged"& version of Exim (source or binary),
3204 the packagers might have enabled it.
3206 Setting ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY locks out the possibility of testing a
3207 configuration using &%-C%& right through message reception and delivery, even
3208 if the caller is root. The reception works, but by that time, Exim is running
3209 as the Exim user, so when it re-executes to regain privilege for the delivery,
3210 the use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost. However, root can test reception
3211 and delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message on the queue,
3212 using &%-odq%&, and another to do the delivery, using &%-M%&).
3214 If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined &_in Local/Makefile_&, it specifies a
3215 prefix string with which any file named in a &%-C%& command line option
3216 must start. In addition, the file name must not contain the sequence &`/../`&.
3217 However, if the value of the &%-C%& option is identical to the value of
3218 CONFIGURE_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim ignores &%-C%& and proceeds as
3219 usual. There is no default setting for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is
3220 unset, any file name can be used with &%-C%&.
3222 ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be used to confine alternative configuration files
3223 to a directory to which only root has access. This prevents someone who has
3224 broken into the Exim account from running a privileged Exim with an arbitrary
3227 The &%-C%& facility is useful for ensuring that configuration files are
3228 syntactically correct, but cannot be used for test deliveries, unless the
3229 caller is privileged, or unless it is an exotic configuration that does not
3230 require privilege. No check is made on the owner or group of the files
3231 specified by this option.
3233 .vitem &%-D%&<&'macro'&>=<&'value'&>
3235 .cindex "macro" "setting on command line"
3236 This option can be used to override macro definitions in the configuration file
3237 (see section &<<SECTmacrodefs>>&). However, like &%-C%&, if it is used by an
3238 unprivileged caller, it causes Exim to give up its root privilege.
3239 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, the use of &%-D%& is
3240 completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error exit.
3242 The entire option (including equals sign if present) must all be within one
3243 command line item. &%-D%& can be used to set the value of a macro to the empty
3244 string, in which case the equals sign is optional. These two commands are
3250 To include spaces in a macro definition item, quotes must be used. If you use
3251 quotes, spaces are permitted around the macro name and the equals sign. For
3254 exim '-D ABC = something' ...
3256 &%-D%& may be repeated up to 10 times on a command line.
3258 .vitem &%-d%&<&'debug&~options'&>
3260 .cindex "debugging" "list of selectors"
3261 .cindex "debugging" "&%-d%& option"
3262 This option causes debugging information to be written to the standard
3263 error stream. It is restricted to admin users because debugging output may show
3264 database queries that contain password information. Also, the details of users'
3265 filter files should be protected. When &%-d%& is used, &%-v%& is assumed. If
3266 &%-d%& is given on its own, a lot of standard debugging data is output. This
3267 can be reduced, or increased to include some more rarely needed information, by
3268 directly following &%-d%& with a string made up of names preceded by plus or
3269 minus characters. These add or remove sets of debugging data, respectively. For
3270 example, &%-d+filter%& adds filter debugging, whereas &%-d-all+filter%& selects
3271 only filter debugging. Note that no spaces are allowed in the debug setting.
3272 The available debugging categories are:
3274 &`acl `& ACL interpretation
3275 &`auth `& authenticators
3276 &`deliver `& general delivery logic
3277 &`dns `& DNS lookups (see also resolver)
3278 &`dnsbl `& DNS black list (aka RBL) code
3279 &`exec `& arguments for &[execv()]& calls
3280 &`expand `& detailed debugging for string expansions
3281 &`filter `& filter handling
3282 &`hints_lookup `& hints data lookups
3283 &`host_lookup `& all types of name-to-IP address handling
3284 &`ident `& ident lookup
3285 &`interface `& lists of local interfaces
3286 &`lists `& matching things in lists
3287 &`load `& system load checks
3288 &`local_scan `& can be used by &[local_scan()]& (see chapter &&&
3289 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&)
3290 &`lookup `& general lookup code and all lookups
3291 &`memory `& memory handling
3292 &`pid `& add pid to debug output lines
3293 &`process_info `& setting info for the process log
3294 &`queue_run `& queue runs
3295 &`receive `& general message reception logic
3296 &`resolver `& turn on the DNS resolver's debugging output
3297 &`retry `& retry handling
3298 &`rewrite `& address rewriting
3299 &`route `& address routing
3300 &`timestamp `& add timestamp to debug output lines
3302 &`transport `& transports
3303 &`uid `& changes of uid/gid and looking up uid/gid
3304 &`verify `& address verification logic
3305 &`all `& almost all of the above (see below), and also &%-v%&
3307 The &`all`& option excludes &`memory`& when used as &`+all`&, but includes it
3308 for &`-all`&. The reason for this is that &`+all`& is something that people
3309 tend to use when generating debug output for Exim maintainers. If &`+memory`&
3310 is included, an awful lot of output that is very rarely of interest is
3311 generated, so it now has to be explicitly requested. However, &`-all`& does
3312 turn everything off.
3314 .cindex "resolver" "debugging output"
3315 .cindex "DNS resolver" "debugging output"
3316 The &`resolver`& option produces output only if the DNS resolver was compiled
3317 with DEBUG enabled. This is not the case in some operating systems. Also,
3318 unfortunately, debugging output from the DNS resolver is written to stdout
3321 The default (&%-d%& with no argument) omits &`expand`&, &`filter`&,
3322 &`interface`&, &`load`&, &`memory`&, &`pid`&, &`resolver`&, and &`timestamp`&.
3323 However, the &`pid`& selector is forced when debugging is turned on for a
3324 daemon, which then passes it on to any re-executed Exims. Exim also
3325 automatically adds the pid to debug lines when several remote deliveries are
3328 The &`timestamp`& selector causes the current time to be inserted at the start
3329 of all debug output lines. This can be useful when trying to track down delays
3332 If the &%debug_print%& option is set in any driver, it produces output whenever
3333 any debugging is selected, or if &%-v%& is used.
3335 .vitem &%-dd%&<&'debug&~options'&>
3337 This option behaves exactly like &%-d%& except when used on a command that
3338 starts a daemon process. In that case, debugging is turned off for the
3339 subprocesses that the daemon creates. Thus, it is useful for monitoring the
3340 behaviour of the daemon without creating as much output as full debugging does.
3343 .oindex "&%-dropcr%&"
3344 This is an obsolete option that is now a no-op. It used to affect the way Exim
3345 handled CR and LF characters in incoming messages. What happens now is
3346 described in section &<<SECTlineendings>>&.
3350 .cindex "bounce message" "generating"
3351 This option specifies that an incoming message is a locally-generated delivery
3352 failure report. It is used internally by Exim when handling delivery failures
3353 and is not intended for external use. Its only effect is to stop Exim
3354 generating certain messages to the postmaster, as otherwise message cascades
3355 could occur in some situations. As part of the same option, a message id may
3356 follow the characters &%-E%&. If it does, the log entry for the receipt of the
3357 new message contains the id, following &"R="&, as a cross-reference.
3360 .oindex "&%-e%&&'x'&"
3361 There are a number of Sendmail options starting with &%-oe%& which seem to be
3362 called by various programs without the leading &%o%& in the option. For
3363 example, the &%vacation%& program uses &%-eq%&. Exim treats all options of the
3364 form &%-e%&&'x'& as synonymous with the corresponding &%-oe%&&'x'& options.
3366 .vitem &%-F%&&~<&'string'&>
3368 .cindex "sender" "name"
3369 .cindex "name" "of sender"
3370 This option sets the sender's full name for use when a locally-generated
3371 message is being accepted. In the absence of this option, the user's &'gecos'&
3372 entry from the password data is used. As users are generally permitted to alter
3373 their &'gecos'& entries, no security considerations are involved. White space
3374 between &%-F%& and the <&'string'&> is optional.
3376 .vitem &%-f%&&~<&'address'&>
3378 .cindex "sender" "address"
3379 .cindex "address" "sender"
3380 .cindex "trusted user"
3381 .cindex "envelope sender"
3382 .cindex "user" "trusted"
3383 This option sets the address of the envelope sender of a locally-generated
3384 message (also known as the return path). The option can normally be used only
3385 by a trusted user, but &%untrusted_set_sender%& can be set to allow untrusted
3388 Processes running as root or the Exim user are always trusted. Other
3389 trusted users are defined by the &%trusted_users%& or &%trusted_groups%&
3390 options. In the absence of &%-f%&, or if the caller is not trusted, the sender
3391 of a local message is set to the caller's login name at the default qualify
3394 There is one exception to the restriction on the use of &%-f%&: an empty sender
3395 can be specified by any user, trusted or not, to create a message that can
3396 never provoke a bounce. An empty sender can be specified either as an empty
3397 string, or as a pair of angle brackets with nothing between them, as in these
3398 examples of shell commands:
3400 exim -f '<>' user@domain
3401 exim -f "" user@domain
3403 In addition, the use of &%-f%& is not restricted when testing a filter file
3404 with &%-bf%& or when testing or verifying addresses using the &%-bt%& or
3407 Allowing untrusted users to change the sender address does not of itself make
3408 it possible to send anonymous mail. Exim still checks that the &'From:'& header
3409 refers to the local user, and if it does not, it adds a &'Sender:'& header,
3410 though this can be overridden by setting &%no_local_from_check%&.
3413 .cindex "&""From""& line"
3414 space between &%-f%& and the <&'address'&> is optional (that is, they can be
3415 given as two arguments or one combined argument). The sender of a
3416 locally-generated message can also be set (when permitted) by an initial
3417 &"From&~"& line in the message &-- see the description of &%-bm%& above &-- but
3418 if &%-f%& is also present, it overrides &"From&~"&.
3422 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-G%& option ignored"
3423 This is a Sendmail option which is ignored by Exim.
3425 .vitem &%-h%&&~<&'number'&>
3427 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-h%& option ignored"
3428 This option is accepted for compatibility with Sendmail, but has no effect. (In
3429 Sendmail it overrides the &"hop count"& obtained by counting &'Received:'&
3434 .cindex "Solaris" "&'mail'& command"
3435 .cindex "dot in incoming" "non-SMTP message"
3436 This option, which has the same effect as &%-oi%&, specifies that a dot on a
3437 line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP message. I can find
3438 no documentation for this option in Solaris 2.4 Sendmail, but the &'mailx'&
3439 command in Solaris 2.4 uses it. See also &%-ti%&.
3441 .vitem &%-M%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3443 .cindex "forcing delivery"
3444 .cindex "delivery" "forcing attempt"
3445 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
3446 This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each message in turn. If
3447 any of the messages are frozen, they are automatically thawed before the
3448 delivery attempt. The settings of &%queue_domains%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&,
3449 and &%hold_domains%& are ignored.
3452 .cindex "hints database" "overriding retry hints"
3453 hints for any of the addresses are overridden &-- Exim tries to deliver even if
3454 the normal retry time has not yet been reached. This option requires the caller
3455 to be an admin user. However, there is an option called &%prod_requires_admin%&
3456 which can be set false to relax this restriction (and also the same requirement
3457 for the &%-q%&, &%-R%&, and &%-S%& options).
3459 The deliveries happen synchronously, that is, the original Exim process does
3460 not terminate until all the delivery attempts have finished. No output is
3461 produced unless there is a serious error. If you want to see what is happening,
3462 use the &%-v%& option as well, or inspect Exim's main log.
3464 .vitem &%-Mar%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>&~<&'address'&>&~...
3466 .cindex "message" "adding recipients"
3467 .cindex "recipient" "adding"
3468 This option requests Exim to add the addresses to the list of recipients of the
3469 message (&"ar"& for &"add recipients"&). The first argument must be a message
3470 id, and the remaining ones must be email addresses. However, if the message is
3471 active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), it is not altered. This option
3472 can be used only by an admin user.
3474 .vitem "&%-MC%&&~<&'transport'&>&~<&'hostname'&>&~<&'sequence&~number'&>&&&
3475 &~<&'message&~id'&>"
3477 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
3478 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
3479 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
3480 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3481 by Exim to invoke another instance of itself to deliver a waiting message using
3482 an existing SMTP connection, which is passed as the standard input. Details are
3483 given in chapter &<<CHAPSMTP>>&. This must be the final option, and the caller
3484 must be root or the Exim user in order to use it.
3488 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3489 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option. It signifies that the
3490 connection to the remote host has been authenticated.
3494 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3495 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option. It signifies that the server to
3496 which Exim is connected supports pipelining.
3498 .vitem &%-MCQ%&&~<&'process&~id'&>&~<&'pipe&~fd'&>
3500 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3501 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option when the original delivery was
3502 started by a queue runner. It passes on the process id of the queue runner,
3503 together with the file descriptor number of an open pipe. Closure of the pipe
3504 signals the final completion of the sequence of processes that are passing
3505 messages through the same SMTP connection.
3509 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3510 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option, and passes on the fact that the
3511 SMTP SIZE option should be used on messages delivered down the existing
3516 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3517 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option, and passes on the fact that the
3518 host to which Exim is connected supports TLS encryption.
3520 .vitem &%-Mc%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3522 .cindex "hints database" "not overridden by &%-Mc%&"
3523 .cindex "delivery" "manually started &-- not forced"
3524 This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each message in turn,
3525 but unlike the &%-M%& option, it does check for retry hints, and respects any
3526 that are found. This option is not very useful to external callers. It is
3527 provided mainly for internal use by Exim when it needs to re-invoke itself in
3528 order to regain root privilege for a delivery (see chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>&).
3529 However, &%-Mc%& can be useful when testing, in order to run a delivery that
3530 respects retry times and other options such as &%hold_domains%& that are
3531 overridden when &%-M%& is used. Such a delivery does not count as a queue run.
3532 If you want to run a specific delivery as if in a queue run, you should use
3533 &%-q%& with a message id argument. A distinction between queue run deliveries
3534 and other deliveries is made in one or two places.
3536 .vitem &%-Mes%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>
3538 .cindex "message" "changing sender"
3539 .cindex "sender" "changing"
3540 This option requests Exim to change the sender address in the message to the
3541 given address, which must be a fully qualified address or &"<>"& (&"es"& for
3542 &"edit sender"&). There must be exactly two arguments. The first argument must
3543 be a message id, and the second one an email address. However, if the message
3544 is active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not altered.
3545 This option can be used only by an admin user.
3547 .vitem &%-Mf%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3549 .cindex "freezing messages"
3550 .cindex "message" "manually freezing"
3551 This option requests Exim to mark each listed message as &"frozen"&. This
3552 prevents any delivery attempts taking place until the message is &"thawed"&,
3553 either manually or as a result of the &%auto_thaw%& configuration option.
3554 However, if any of the messages are active (in the middle of a delivery
3555 attempt), their status is not altered. This option can be used only by an admin
3558 .vitem &%-Mg%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3560 .cindex "giving up on messages"
3561 .cindex "message" "abandoning delivery attempts"
3562 .cindex "delivery" "abandoning further attempts"
3563 This option requests Exim to give up trying to deliver the listed messages,
3564 including any that are frozen. However, if any of the messages are active,
3565 their status is not altered. For non-bounce messages, a delivery error message
3566 is sent to the sender, containing the text &"cancelled by administrator"&.
3567 Bounce messages are just discarded. This option can be used only by an admin
3570 .vitem &%-Mmad%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3572 .cindex "delivery" "cancelling all"
3573 This option requests Exim to mark all the recipient addresses in the messages
3574 as already delivered (&"mad"& for &"mark all delivered"&). However, if any
3575 message is active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not
3576 altered. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3578 .vitem &%-Mmd%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>&~<&'address'&>&~...
3580 .cindex "delivery" "cancelling by address"
3581 .cindex "recipient" "removing"
3582 .cindex "removing recipients"
3583 This option requests Exim to mark the given addresses as already delivered
3584 (&"md"& for &"mark delivered"&). The first argument must be a message id, and
3585 the remaining ones must be email addresses. These are matched to recipient
3586 addresses in the message in a case-sensitive manner. If the message is active
3587 (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not altered. This option
3588 can be used only by an admin user.
3590 .vitem &%-Mrm%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3592 .cindex "removing messages"
3593 .cindex "abandoning mail"
3594 .cindex "message" "manually discarding"
3595 This option requests Exim to remove the given messages from the queue. No
3596 bounce messages are sent; each message is simply forgotten. However, if any of
3597 the messages are active, their status is not altered. This option can be used
3598 only by an admin user or by the user who originally caused the message to be
3599 placed on the queue.
3601 .vitem &%-Mt%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3603 .cindex "thawing messages"
3604 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
3605 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
3606 .cindex "message" "thawing frozen"
3607 This option requests Exim to &"thaw"& any of the listed messages that are
3608 &"frozen"&, so that delivery attempts can resume. However, if any of the
3609 messages are active, their status is not altered. This option can be used only
3612 .vitem &%-Mvb%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3614 .cindex "listing" "message body"
3615 .cindex "message" "listing body of"
3616 This option causes the contents of the message body (-D) spool file to be
3617 written to the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3619 .vitem &%-Mvh%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3621 .cindex "listing" "message headers"
3622 .cindex "header lines" "listing"
3623 .cindex "message" "listing header lines"
3624 This option causes the contents of the message headers (-H) spool file to be
3625 written to the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3627 .vitem &%-Mvl%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3629 .cindex "listing" "message log"
3630 .cindex "message" "listing message log"
3631 This option causes the contents of the message log spool file to be written to
3632 the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3636 This is apparently a synonym for &%-om%& that is accepted by Sendmail, so Exim
3637 treats it that way too.
3641 .cindex "debugging" "&%-N%& option"
3642 .cindex "debugging" "suppressing delivery"
3643 This is a debugging option that inhibits delivery of a message at the transport
3644 level. It implies &%-v%&. Exim goes through many of the motions of delivery &--
3645 it just doesn't actually transport the message, but instead behaves as if it
3646 had successfully done so. However, it does not make any updates to the retry
3647 database, and the log entries for deliveries are flagged with &"*>"& rather
3650 Because &%-N%& discards any message to which it applies, only root or the Exim
3651 user are allowed to use it with &%-bd%&, &%-q%&, &%-R%& or &%-M%&. In other
3652 words, an ordinary user can use it only when supplying an incoming message to
3653 which it will apply. Although transportation never fails when &%-N%& is set, an
3654 address may be deferred because of a configuration problem on a transport, or a
3655 routing problem. Once &%-N%& has been used for a delivery attempt, it sticks to
3656 the message, and applies to any subsequent delivery attempts that may happen
3661 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-n%& option ignored"
3662 This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean &"no aliasing"&. It is ignored
3665 .vitem &%-O%&&~<&'data'&>
3667 This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean &`set option`&. It is ignored by
3670 .vitem &%-oA%&&~<&'file&~name'&>
3672 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-oA%& option"
3673 This option is used by Sendmail in conjunction with &%-bi%& to specify an
3674 alternative alias file name. Exim handles &%-bi%& differently; see the
3677 .vitem &%-oB%&&~<&'n'&>
3679 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
3680 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
3681 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
3682 This is a debugging option which limits the maximum number of messages that can
3683 be delivered down one SMTP connection, overriding the value set in any &(smtp)&
3684 transport. If <&'n'&> is omitted, the limit is set to 1.
3688 .cindex "background delivery"
3689 .cindex "delivery" "in the background"
3690 This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming messages,
3691 including the listening daemon. It requests &"background"& delivery of such
3692 messages, which means that the accepting process automatically starts a
3693 delivery process for each message received, but does not wait for the delivery
3694 processes to finish.
3696 When all the messages have been received, the reception process exits,
3697 leaving the delivery processes to finish in their own time. The standard output
3698 and error streams are closed at the start of each delivery process.
3699 This is the default action if none of the &%-od%& options are present.
3701 If one of the queueing options in the configuration file
3702 (&%queue_only%& or &%queue_only_file%&, for example) is in effect, &%-odb%&
3703 overrides it if &%queue_only_override%& is set true, which is the default
3704 setting. If &%queue_only_override%& is set false, &%-odb%& has no effect.
3708 .cindex "foreground delivery"
3709 .cindex "delivery" "in the foreground"
3710 This option requests &"foreground"& (synchronous) delivery when Exim has
3711 accepted a locally-generated message. (For the daemon it is exactly the same as
3712 &%-odb%&.) A delivery process is automatically started to deliver the message,
3713 and Exim waits for it to complete before proceeding.
3715 The original Exim reception process does not finish until the delivery
3716 process for the final message has ended. The standard error stream is left open
3719 However, like &%-odb%&, this option has no effect if &%queue_only_override%& is
3720 false and one of the queueing options in the configuration file is in effect.
3722 If there is a temporary delivery error during foreground delivery, the
3723 message is left on the queue for later delivery, and the original reception
3724 process exits. See chapter &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>& for a way of setting up a
3725 restricted configuration that never queues messages.
3730 This option is synonymous with &%-odf%&. It is provided for compatibility with
3735 .cindex "non-immediate delivery"
3736 .cindex "delivery" "suppressing immediate"
3737 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
3738 This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming messages,
3739 including the listening daemon. It specifies that the accepting process should
3740 not automatically start a delivery process for each message received. Messages
3741 are placed on the queue, and remain there until a subsequent queue runner
3742 process encounters them. There are several configuration options (such as
3743 &%queue_only%&) that can be used to queue incoming messages under certain
3744 conditions. This option overrides all of them and also &%-odqs%&. It always
3749 .cindex "SMTP" "delaying delivery"
3750 This option is a hybrid between &%-odb%&/&%-odi%& and &%-odq%&.
3751 However, like &%-odb%& and &%-odi%&, this option has no effect if
3752 &%queue_only_override%& is false and one of the queueing options in the
3753 configuration file is in effect.
3755 When &%-odqs%& does operate, a delivery process is started for each incoming
3756 message, in the background by default, but in the foreground if &%-odi%& is
3757 also present. The recipient addresses are routed, and local deliveries are done
3758 in the normal way. However, if any SMTP deliveries are required, they are not
3759 done at this time, so the message remains on the queue until a subsequent queue
3760 runner process encounters it. Because routing was done, Exim knows which
3761 messages are waiting for which hosts, and so a number of messages for the same
3762 host can be sent in a single SMTP connection. The &%queue_smtp_domains%&
3763 configuration option has the same effect for specific domains. See also the
3768 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3769 If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received (for
3770 example, a malformed address), the error is reported to the sender in a mail
3773 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oee%&"
3775 this error message is successfully sent, the Exim receiving process
3776 exits with a return code of zero. If not, the return code is 2 if the problem
3777 is that the original message has no recipients, or 1 any other error. This is
3778 the default &%-oe%&&'x'& option if Exim is called as &'rmail'&.
3782 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3783 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oem%&"
3784 This is the same as &%-oee%&, except that Exim always exits with a non-zero
3785 return code, whether or not the error message was successfully sent.
3786 This is the default &%-oe%&&'x'& option, unless Exim is called as &'rmail'&.
3790 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3791 If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received, the
3792 error is reported by writing a message to the standard error file (stderr).
3793 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oep%&"
3794 The return code is 1 for all errors.
3798 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3799 This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has the same
3804 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3805 This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has the same
3810 .cindex "dot in incoming" "non-SMTP message"
3811 This option, which has the same effect as &%-i%&, specifies that a dot on a
3812 line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP message. Otherwise, a
3813 single dot does terminate, though Exim does no special processing for other
3814 lines that start with a dot. This option is set by default if Exim is called as
3815 &'rmail'&. See also &%-ti%&.
3818 .oindex "&%-oitrue%&"
3819 This option is treated as synonymous with &%-oi%&.
3821 .vitem &%-oMa%&&~<&'host&~address'&>
3823 .cindex "sender host address" "specifying for local message"
3824 A number of options starting with &%-oM%& can be used to set values associated
3825 with remote hosts on locally-submitted messages (that is, messages not received
3826 over TCP/IP). These options can be used by any caller in conjunction with the
3827 &%-bh%&, &%-be%&, &%-bf%&, &%-bF%&, &%-bt%&, or &%-bv%& testing options. In
3828 other circumstances, they are ignored unless the caller is trusted.
3830 The &%-oMa%& option sets the sender host address. This may include a port
3831 number at the end, after a full stop (period). For example:
3833 exim -bs -oMa 10.9.8.7.1234
3835 An alternative syntax is to enclose the IP address in square brackets,
3836 followed by a colon and the port number:
3838 exim -bs -oMa [10.9.8.7]:1234
3840 The IP address is placed in the &$sender_host_address$& variable, and the
3841 port, if present, in &$sender_host_port$&.
3843 .vitem &%-oMaa%&&~<&'name'&>
3845 .cindex "authentication name" "specifying for local message"
3846 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMaa%&
3847 option sets the value of &$sender_host_authenticated$& (the authenticator
3848 name). See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of SMTP authentication.
3850 .vitem &%-oMai%&&~<&'string'&>
3852 .cindex "authentication id" "specifying for local message"
3853 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMai%&
3854 option sets the value of &$authenticated_id$& (the id that was authenticated).
3855 This overrides the default value (the caller's login id) for messages from
3856 local sources. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of authenticated
3859 .vitem &%-oMas%&&~<&'address'&>
3861 .cindex "authentication sender" "specifying for local message"
3862 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMas%&
3863 option sets the authenticated sender value in &$authenticated_sender$&. It
3864 overrides the sender address that is created from the caller's login id for
3865 messages from local sources. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of
3866 authenticated senders.
3868 .vitem &%-oMi%&&~<&'interface&~address'&>
3870 .cindex "interface address" "specifying for local message"
3871 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMi%&
3872 option sets the IP interface address value. A port number may be included,
3873 using the same syntax as for &%-oMa%&. The interface address is placed in
3874 &$interface_address$& and the port number, if present, in &$interface_port$&.
3876 .vitem &%-oMr%&&~<&'protocol&~name'&>
3878 .cindex "protocol" "incoming &-- specifying for local message"
3879 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
3880 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMr%&
3881 option sets the received protocol value that is stored in
3882 &$received_protocol$&. However, this applies only when &%-bs%& is not used. For
3883 interactive SMTP input (&%-bs%&), the protocol is always &"local-"& followed by
3884 one of the standard SMTP protocol names (see the description of
3885 &$received_protocol$& in section &<<SECTexpvar>>&). For &%-bS%& (batch SMTP)
3886 however, the protocol can be set by &%-oMr%&.
3888 .vitem &%-oMs%&&~<&'host&~name'&>
3890 .cindex "sender host name" "specifying for local message"
3891 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMs%&
3892 option sets the sender host name in &$sender_host_name$&. When this option is
3893 present, Exim does not attempt to look up a host name from an IP address; it
3894 uses the name it is given.
3896 .vitem &%-oMt%&&~<&'ident&~string'&>
3898 .cindex "sender ident string" "specifying for local message"
3899 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMt%&
3900 option sets the sender ident value in &$sender_ident$&. The default setting for
3901 local callers is the login id of the calling process.
3905 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-om%& option ignored"
3906 In Sendmail, this option means &"me too"&, indicating that the sender of a
3907 message should receive a copy of the message if the sender appears in an alias
3908 expansion. Exim always does this, so the option does nothing.
3912 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-oo%& option ignored"
3913 This option is ignored. In Sendmail it specifies &"old style headers"&,
3914 whatever that means.
3916 .vitem &%-oP%&&~<&'path'&>
3918 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
3919 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
3920 This option is useful only in conjunction with &%-bd%& or &%-q%& with a time
3921 value. The option specifies the file to which the process id of the daemon is
3922 written. When &%-oX%& is used with &%-bd%&, or when &%-q%& with a time is used
3923 without &%-bd%&, this is the only way of causing Exim to write a pid file,
3924 because in those cases, the normal pid file is not used.
3926 .vitem &%-or%&&~<&'time'&>
3928 .cindex "timeout" "for non-SMTP input"
3929 This option sets a timeout value for incoming non-SMTP messages. If it is not
3930 set, Exim will wait forever for the standard input. The value can also be set
3931 by the &%receive_timeout%& option. The format used for specifying times is
3932 described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&.
3934 .vitem &%-os%&&~<&'time'&>
3936 .cindex "timeout" "for SMTP input"
3937 .cindex "SMTP timeout" "input"
3938 This option sets a timeout value for incoming SMTP messages. The timeout
3939 applies to each SMTP command and block of data. The value can also be set by
3940 the &%smtp_receive_timeout%& option; it defaults to 5 minutes. The format used
3941 for specifying times is described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&.
3945 This option has exactly the same effect as &%-v%&.
3947 .vitem &%-oX%&&~<&'number&~or&~string'&>
3949 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
3950 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening interfaces"
3951 .cindex "port" "receiving TCP/IP"
3952 This option is relevant only when the &%-bd%& (start listening daemon) option
3953 is also given. It controls which ports and interfaces the daemon uses. Details
3954 of the syntax, and how it interacts with configuration file options, are given
3955 in chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>&. When &%-oX%& is used to start a daemon, no pid
3956 file is written unless &%-oP%& is also present to specify a pid file name.
3960 .cindex "Perl" "starting the interpreter"
3961 This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked with Exim (see
3962 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&). It overrides the setting of the &%perl_at_start%&
3963 option, forcing the starting of the interpreter to be delayed until it is
3968 .cindex "Perl" "starting the interpreter"
3969 This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked with Exim (see
3970 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&). It overrides the setting of the &%perl_at_start%&
3971 option, forcing the starting of the interpreter to occur as soon as Exim is
3974 .vitem &%-p%&<&'rval'&>:<&'sval'&>
3976 For compatibility with Sendmail, this option is equivalent to
3978 &`-oMr`& <&'rval'&> &`-oMs`& <&'sval'&>
3980 It sets the incoming protocol and host name (for trusted callers). The
3981 host name and its colon can be omitted when only the protocol is to be set.
3982 Note the Exim already has two private options, &%-pd%& and &%-ps%&, that refer
3983 to embedded Perl. It is therefore impossible to set a protocol value of &`p`&
3984 or &`s`& using this option (but that does not seem a real limitation).
3988 .cindex "queue runner" "starting manually"
3989 This option is normally restricted to admin users. However, there is a
3990 configuration option called &%prod_requires_admin%& which can be set false to
3991 relax this restriction (and also the same requirement for the &%-M%&, &%-R%&,
3992 and &%-S%& options).
3994 .cindex "queue runner" "description of operation"
3995 The &%-q%& option starts one queue runner process. This scans the queue of
3996 waiting messages, and runs a delivery process for each one in turn. It waits
3997 for each delivery process to finish before starting the next one. A delivery
3998 process may not actually do any deliveries if the retry times for the addresses
3999 have not been reached. Use &%-qf%& (see below) if you want to override this.
4002 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
4003 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
4004 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
4005 the delivery process spawns other processes to deliver other messages down
4006 passed SMTP connections, the queue runner waits for these to finish before
4009 When all the queued messages have been considered, the original queue runner
4010 process terminates. In other words, a single pass is made over the waiting
4011 mail, one message at a time. Use &%-q%& with a time (see below) if you want
4012 this to be repeated periodically.
4014 Exim processes the waiting messages in an unpredictable order. It isn't very
4015 random, but it is likely to be different each time, which is all that matters.
4016 If one particular message screws up a remote MTA, other messages to the same
4017 MTA have a chance of getting through if they get tried first.
4019 It is possible to cause the messages to be processed in lexical message id
4020 order, which is essentially the order in which they arrived, by setting the
4021 &%queue_run_in_order%& option, but this is not recommended for normal use.
4023 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&>
4024 The &%-q%& option may be followed by one or more flag letters that change its
4025 behaviour. They are all optional, but if more than one is present, they must
4026 appear in the correct order. Each flag is described in a separate item below.
4030 .cindex "queue" "double scanning"
4031 .cindex "queue" "routing"
4032 .cindex "routing" "whole queue before delivery"
4033 An option starting with &%-qq%& requests a two-stage queue run. In the first
4034 stage, the queue is scanned as if the &%queue_smtp_domains%& option matched
4035 every domain. Addresses are routed, local deliveries happen, but no remote
4038 .cindex "hints database" "remembering routing"
4039 The hints database that remembers which messages are waiting for specific hosts
4040 is updated, as if delivery to those hosts had been deferred. After this is
4041 complete, a second, normal queue scan happens, with routing and delivery taking
4042 place as normal. Messages that are routed to the same host should mostly be
4043 delivered down a single SMTP
4044 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
4045 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
4046 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
4047 connection because of the hints that were set up during the first queue scan.
4048 This option may be useful for hosts that are connected to the Internet
4051 .vitem &%-q[q]i...%&
4053 .cindex "queue" "initial delivery"
4054 If the &'i'& flag is present, the queue runner runs delivery processes only for
4055 those messages that haven't previously been tried. (&'i'& stands for &"initial
4056 delivery"&.) This can be helpful if you are putting messages on the queue using
4057 &%-odq%& and want a queue runner just to process the new messages.
4059 .vitem &%-q[q][i]f...%&
4061 .cindex "queue" "forcing delivery"
4062 .cindex "delivery" "forcing in queue run"
4063 If one &'f'& flag is present, a delivery attempt is forced for each non-frozen
4064 message, whereas without &'f'& only those non-frozen addresses that have passed
4065 their retry times are tried.
4067 .vitem &%-q[q][i]ff...%&
4069 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
4070 If &'ff'& is present, a delivery attempt is forced for every message, whether
4073 .vitem &%-q[q][i][f[f]]l%&
4075 .cindex "queue" "local deliveries only"
4076 The &'l'& (the letter &"ell"&) flag specifies that only local deliveries are to
4077 be done. If a message requires any remote deliveries, it remains on the queue
4080 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&>&~<&'start&~id'&>&~<&'end&~id'&>
4081 .cindex "queue" "delivering specific messages"
4082 When scanning the queue, Exim can be made to skip over messages whose ids are
4083 lexically less than a given value by following the &%-q%& option with a
4084 starting message id. For example:
4086 exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00
4088 Messages that arrived earlier than &`0t5C6f-0000c8-00`& are not inspected. If a
4089 second message id is given, messages whose ids are lexically greater than it
4090 are also skipped. If the same id is given twice, for example,
4092 exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 0t5C6f-0000c8-00
4094 just one delivery process is started, for that message. This differs from
4095 &%-M%& in that retry data is respected, and it also differs from &%-Mc%& in
4096 that it counts as a delivery from a queue run. Note that the selection
4097 mechanism does not affect the order in which the messages are scanned. There
4098 are also other ways of selecting specific sets of messages for delivery in a
4099 queue run &-- see &%-R%& and &%-S%&.
4101 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&><&'time'&>
4102 .cindex "queue runner" "starting periodically"
4103 .cindex "periodic queue running"
4104 When a time value is present, the &%-q%& option causes Exim to run as a daemon,
4105 starting a queue runner process at intervals specified by the given time value
4106 (whose format is described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&). This form of the
4107 &%-q%& option is commonly combined with the &%-bd%& option, in which case a
4108 single daemon process handles both functions. A common way of starting up a
4109 combined daemon at system boot time is to use a command such as
4111 /usr/exim/bin/exim -bd -q30m
4113 Such a daemon listens for incoming SMTP calls, and also starts a queue runner
4114 process every 30 minutes.
4116 When a daemon is started by &%-q%& with a time value, but without &%-bd%&, no
4117 pid file is written unless one is explicitly requested by the &%-oP%& option.
4119 .vitem &%-qR%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4121 This option is synonymous with &%-R%&. It is provided for Sendmail
4124 .vitem &%-qS%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4126 This option is synonymous with &%-S%&.
4128 .vitem &%-R%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4130 .cindex "queue runner" "for specific recipients"
4131 .cindex "delivery" "to given domain"
4132 .cindex "domain" "delivery to"
4133 The <&'rsflags'&> may be empty, in which case the white space before the string
4134 is optional, unless the string is &'f'&, &'ff'&, &'r'&, &'rf'&, or &'rff'&,
4135 which are the possible values for <&'rsflags'&>. White space is required if
4136 <&'rsflags'&> is not empty.
4138 This option is similar to &%-q%& with no time value, that is, it causes Exim to
4139 perform a single queue run, except that, when scanning the messages on the
4140 queue, Exim processes only those that have at least one undelivered recipient
4141 address containing the given string, which is checked in a case-independent
4142 way. If the <&'rsflags'&> start with &'r'&, <&'string'&> is interpreted as a
4143 regular expression; otherwise it is a literal string.
4145 Once a message is selected, all its addresses are processed. For the first
4146 selected message, Exim overrides any retry information and forces a delivery
4147 attempt for each undelivered address. This means that if delivery of any
4148 address in the first message is successful, any existing retry information is
4149 deleted, and so delivery attempts for that address in subsequently selected
4150 messages (which are processed without forcing) will run. However, if delivery
4151 of any address does not succeed, the retry information is updated, and in
4152 subsequently selected messages, the failing address will be skipped.
4154 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
4155 If the <&'rsflags'&> contain &'f'& or &'ff'&, the delivery forcing applies to
4156 all selected messages, not just the first; frozen messages are included when
4159 The &%-R%& option makes it straightforward to initiate delivery of all messages
4160 to a given domain after a host has been down for some time. When the SMTP
4161 command ETRN is accepted by its ACL (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), its default
4162 effect is to run Exim with the &%-R%& option, but it can be configured to run
4163 an arbitrary command instead.
4167 This is a documented (for Sendmail) obsolete alternative name for &%-f%&.
4169 .vitem &%-S%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4171 .cindex "delivery" "from given sender"
4172 .cindex "queue runner" "for specific senders"
4173 This option acts like &%-R%& except that it checks the string against each
4174 message's sender instead of against the recipients. If &%-R%& is also set, both
4175 conditions must be met for a message to be selected. If either of the options
4176 has &'f'& or &'ff'& in its flags, the associated action is taken.
4178 .vitem &%-Tqt%&&~<&'times'&>
4180 This an option that is exclusively for use by the Exim testing suite. It is not
4181 recognized when Exim is run normally. It allows for the setting up of explicit
4182 &"queue times"& so that various warning/retry features can be tested.
4186 .cindex "recipient" "extracting from header lines"
4187 .cindex "&'Bcc:'& header line"
4188 .cindex "&'Cc:'& header line"
4189 .cindex "&'To:'& header line"
4190 When Exim is receiving a locally-generated, non-SMTP message on its standard
4191 input, the &%-t%& option causes the recipients of the message to be obtained
4192 from the &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and &'Bcc:'& header lines in the message instead of
4193 from the command arguments. The addresses are extracted before any rewriting
4194 takes place and the &'Bcc:'& header line, if present, is then removed.
4196 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-t%& option"
4197 If the command has any arguments, they specify addresses to which the message
4198 is &'not'& to be delivered. That is, the argument addresses are removed from
4199 the recipients list obtained from the headers. This is compatible with Smail 3
4200 and in accordance with the documented behaviour of several versions of
4201 Sendmail, as described in man pages on a number of operating systems (e.g.
4202 Solaris 8, IRIX 6.5, HP-UX 11). However, some versions of Sendmail &'add'&
4203 argument addresses to those obtained from the headers, and the O'Reilly
4204 Sendmail book documents it that way. Exim can be made to add argument addresses
4205 instead of subtracting them by setting the option
4206 &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& false.
4208 .cindex "&%Resent-%& header lines" "with &%-t%&"
4209 If there are any &%Resent-%& header lines in the message, Exim extracts
4210 recipients from all &'Resent-To:'&, &'Resent-Cc:'&, and &'Resent-Bcc:'& header
4211 lines instead of from &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and &'Bcc:'&. This is for compatibility
4212 with Sendmail and other MTAs. (Prior to release 4.20, Exim gave an error if
4213 &%-t%& was used in conjunction with &%Resent-%& header lines.)
4215 RFC 2822 talks about different sets of &%Resent-%& header lines (for when a
4216 message is resent several times). The RFC also specifies that they should be
4217 added at the front of the message, and separated by &'Received:'& lines. It is
4218 not at all clear how &%-t%& should operate in the present of multiple sets,
4219 nor indeed exactly what constitutes a &"set"&.
4220 In practice, it seems that MUAs do not follow the RFC. The &%Resent-%& lines
4221 are often added at the end of the header, and if a message is resent more than
4222 once, it is common for the original set of &%Resent-%& headers to be renamed as
4223 &%X-Resent-%& when a new set is added. This removes any possible ambiguity.
4227 This option is exactly equivalent to &%-t%& &%-i%&. It is provided for
4228 compatibility with Sendmail.
4230 .vitem &%-tls-on-connect%&
4231 .oindex "&%-tls-on-connect%&"
4232 .cindex "TLS" "use without STARTTLS"
4233 .cindex "TLS" "automatic start"
4234 This option is available when Exim is compiled with TLS support. It forces all
4235 incoming SMTP connections to behave as if the incoming port is listed in the
4236 &%tls_on_connect_ports%& option. See section &<<SECTsupobssmt>>& and chapter
4237 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
4242 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-U%& option ignored"
4243 Sendmail uses this option for &"initial message submission"&, and its
4244 documentation states that in future releases, it may complain about
4245 syntactically invalid messages rather than fixing them when this flag is not
4246 set. Exim ignores this option.
4250 This option causes Exim to write information to the standard error stream,
4251 describing what it is doing. In particular, it shows the log lines for
4252 receiving and delivering a message, and if an SMTP connection is made, the SMTP
4253 dialogue is shown. Some of the log lines shown may not actually be written to
4254 the log if the setting of &%log_selector%& discards them. Any relevant
4255 selectors are shown with each log line. If none are shown, the logging is
4260 AIX uses &%-x%& for a private purpose (&"mail from a local mail program has
4261 National Language Support extended characters in the body of the mail item"&).
4262 It sets &%-x%& when calling the MTA from its &%mail%& command. Exim ignores
4270 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4271 . Insert a stylized DocBook comment here, to identify the end of the command
4272 . line options. This is for the benefit of the Perl script that automatically
4273 . creates a man page for the options.
4274 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4277 <!-- === End of command line options === -->
4284 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4285 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4288 .chapter "The Exim run time configuration file" "CHAPconf" &&&
4289 "The runtime configuration file"
4291 .cindex "run time configuration"
4292 .cindex "configuration file" "general description"
4293 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
4294 .cindex "configuration file" "errors in"
4295 .cindex "error" "in configuration file"
4296 .cindex "return code" "for bad configuration"
4297 Exim uses a single run time configuration file that is read whenever an Exim
4298 binary is executed. Note that in normal operation, this happens frequently,
4299 because Exim is designed to operate in a distributed manner, without central
4302 If a syntax error is detected while reading the configuration file, Exim
4303 writes a message on the standard error, and exits with a non-zero return code.
4304 The message is also written to the panic log. &*Note*&: Only simple syntax
4305 errors can be detected at this time. The values of any expanded options are
4306 not checked until the expansion happens, even when the expansion does not
4307 actually alter the string.
4309 The name of the configuration file is compiled into the binary for security
4310 reasons, and is specified by the CONFIGURE_FILE compilation option. In
4311 most configurations, this specifies a single file. However, it is permitted to
4312 give a colon-separated list of file names, in which case Exim uses the first
4313 existing file in the list.
4316 .cindex "EXIM_GROUP"
4317 .cindex "CONFIGURE_OWNER"
4318 .cindex "CONFIGURE_GROUP"
4319 .cindex "configuration file" "ownership"
4320 .cindex "ownership" "configuration file"
4321 The run time configuration file must be owned by root or by the user that is
4322 specified at compile time by the EXIM_USER option, or by the user that is
4323 specified at compile time by the CONFIGURE_OWNER option (if set). The
4324 configuration file must not be world-writeable or group-writeable, unless its
4325 group is the one specified at compile time by the EXIM_GROUP option or by the
4326 CONFIGURE_GROUP option.
4328 &*Warning*&: In a conventional configuration, where the Exim binary is setuid
4329 to root, anybody who is able to edit the run time configuration file has an
4330 easy way to run commands as root. If you make your mail administrators members
4331 of the Exim group, but do not trust them with root, make sure that the run time
4332 configuration is not group writeable.
4334 A default configuration file, which will work correctly in simple situations,
4335 is provided in the file &_src/configure.default_&. If CONFIGURE_FILE
4336 defines just one file name, the installation process copies the default
4337 configuration to a new file of that name if it did not previously exist. If
4338 CONFIGURE_FILE is a list, no default is automatically installed. Chapter
4339 &<<CHAPdefconfil>>& is a &"walk-through"& discussion of the default
4344 .section "Using a different configuration file"
4345 .cindex "configuration file" "alternate"
4346 A one-off alternate configuration can be specified by the &%-C%& command line
4347 option, which may specify a single file or a list of files. However, when
4348 &%-C%& is used, Exim gives up its root privilege, unless called by root or the
4349 Exim user (or unless the argument for &%-C%& is identical to the built-in value
4350 from CONFIGURE_FILE). &%-C%& is useful mainly for checking the syntax of
4351 configuration files before installing them. No owner or group checks are done
4352 on a configuration file specified by &%-C%&.
4354 The privileged use of &%-C%& by the Exim user can be locked out by setting
4355 ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim. However,
4356 if you do this, you also lock out the possibility of testing a
4357 configuration using &%-C%& right through message reception and delivery, even
4358 if the caller is root. The reception works, but by that time, Exim is running
4359 as the Exim user, so when it re-execs to regain privilege for the delivery, the
4360 use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost. However, root can test reception and
4361 delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message on the queue, using
4362 &%-odq%&, and another to do the delivery, using &%-M%&).
4364 If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined &_in Local/Makefile_&, it specifies a
4365 prefix string with which any file named in a &%-C%& command line option must
4366 start. In addition, the file name must not contain the sequence &"&`/../`&"&.
4367 There is no default setting for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is unset, any file
4368 name can be used with &%-C%&.
4370 One-off changes to a configuration can be specified by the &%-D%& command line
4371 option, which defines and overrides values for macros used inside the
4372 configuration file. However, like &%-C%&, the use of this option by a
4373 non-privileged user causes Exim to discard its root privilege.
4374 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, the use of &%-D%& is
4375 completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error exit.
4377 Some sites may wish to use the same Exim binary on different machines that
4378 share a file system, but to use different configuration files on each machine.
4379 If CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_NODE is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim first
4380 looks for a file whose name is the configuration file name followed by a dot
4381 and the machine's node name, as obtained from the &[uname()]& function. If this
4382 file does not exist, the standard name is tried. This processing occurs for
4383 each file name in the list given by CONFIGURE_FILE or &%-C%&.
4385 In some esoteric situations different versions of Exim may be run under
4386 different effective uids and the CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_EUID is defined to
4387 help with this. See the comments in &_src/EDITME_& for details.
4391 .section "Configuration file format" "SECTconffilfor"
4392 .cindex "configuration file" "format of"
4393 .cindex "format" "configuration file"
4394 Exim's configuration file is divided into a number of different parts. General
4395 option settings must always appear at the start of the file. The other parts
4396 are all optional, and may appear in any order. Each part other than the first
4397 is introduced by the word &"begin"& followed by the name of the part. The
4401 &'ACL'&: Access control lists for controlling incoming SMTP mail.
4403 .cindex "AUTH" "configuration"
4404 &'authenticators'&: Configuration settings for the authenticator drivers. These
4405 are concerned with the SMTP AUTH command (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&).
4407 &'routers'&: Configuration settings for the router drivers. Routers process
4408 addresses and determine how the message is to be delivered.
4410 &'transports'&: Configuration settings for the transport drivers. Transports
4411 define mechanisms for copying messages to destinations.
4413 &'retry'&: Retry rules, for use when a message cannot be immediately delivered.
4415 &'rewrite'&: Global address rewriting rules, for use when a message arrives and
4416 when new addresses are generated during delivery.
4418 &'local_scan'&: Private options for the &[local_scan()]& function. If you
4419 want to use this feature, you must set
4421 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
4423 in &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim. Full details of the
4424 &[local_scan()]& facility are given in chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&.
4427 .cindex "configuration file" "leading white space in"
4428 .cindex "configuration file" "trailing white space in"
4429 .cindex "white space" "in configuration file"
4430 Leading and trailing white space in configuration lines is always ignored.
4432 Blank lines in the file, and lines starting with a # character (ignoring
4433 leading white space) are treated as comments and are ignored. &*Note*&: A
4434 # character other than at the beginning of a line is not treated specially,
4435 and does not introduce a comment.
4437 Any non-comment line can be continued by ending it with a backslash. Note that
4438 the general rule for white space means that trailing white space after the
4439 backslash and leading white space at the start of continuation
4440 lines is ignored. Comment lines beginning with # (but not empty lines) may
4441 appear in the middle of a sequence of continuation lines.
4443 A convenient way to create a configuration file is to start from the
4444 default, which is supplied in &_src/configure.default_&, and add, delete, or
4445 change settings as required.
4447 The ACLs, retry rules, and rewriting rules have their own syntax which is
4448 described in chapters &<<CHAPACL>>&, &<<CHAPretry>>&, and &<<CHAPrewrite>>&,
4449 respectively. The other parts of the configuration file have some syntactic
4450 items in common, and these are described below, from section &<<SECTcos>>&
4451 onwards. Before that, the inclusion, macro, and conditional facilities are
4456 .section "File inclusions in the configuration file"
4457 .cindex "inclusions in configuration file"
4458 .cindex "configuration file" "including other files"
4459 .cindex ".include in configuration file"
4460 .cindex ".include_if_exists in configuration file"
4461 You can include other files inside Exim's run time configuration file by
4464 &`.include`& <&'file name'&>
4465 &`.include_if_exists`& <&'file name'&>
4467 on a line by itself. Double quotes round the file name are optional. If you use
4468 the first form, a configuration error occurs if the file does not exist; the
4469 second form does nothing for non-existent files. In all cases, an absolute file
4472 Includes may be nested to any depth, but remember that Exim reads its
4473 configuration file often, so it is a good idea to keep them to a minimum.
4474 If you change the contents of an included file, you must HUP the daemon,
4475 because an included file is read only when the configuration itself is read.
4477 The processing of inclusions happens early, at a physical line level, so, like
4478 comment lines, an inclusion can be used in the middle of an option setting,
4481 hosts_lookup = a.b.c \
4484 Include processing happens after macro processing (see below). Its effect is to
4485 process the lines of the included file as if they occurred inline where the
4490 .section "Macros in the configuration file" "SECTmacrodefs"
4491 .cindex "macro" "description of"
4492 .cindex "configuration file" "macros"
4493 If a line in the main part of the configuration (that is, before the first
4494 &"begin"& line) begins with an upper case letter, it is taken as a macro
4495 definition, and must be of the form
4497 <&'name'&> = <&'rest of line'&>
4499 The name must consist of letters, digits, and underscores, and need not all be
4500 in upper case, though that is recommended. The rest of the line, including any
4501 continuations, is the replacement text, and has leading and trailing white
4502 space removed. Quotes are not removed. The replacement text can never end with
4503 a backslash character, but this doesn't seem to be a serious limitation.
4505 Macros may also be defined between router, transport, authenticator, or ACL
4506 definitions. They may not, however, be defined within an individual driver or
4507 ACL, or in the &%local_scan%&, retry, or rewrite sections of the configuration.
4509 .section "Macro substitution"
4510 Once a macro is defined, all subsequent lines in the file (and any included
4511 files) are scanned for the macro name; if there are several macros, the line is
4512 scanned for each in turn, in the order in which the macros are defined. The
4513 replacement text is not re-scanned for the current macro, though it is scanned
4514 for subsequently defined macros. For this reason, a macro name may not contain
4515 the name of a previously defined macro as a substring. You could, for example,
4518 &`ABCD_XYZ = `&<&'something'&>
4519 &`ABCD = `&<&'something else'&>
4521 but putting the definitions in the opposite order would provoke a configuration
4522 error. Macro expansion is applied to individual physical lines from the file,
4523 before checking for line continuation or file inclusion (see above). If a line
4524 consists solely of a macro name, and the expansion of the macro is empty, the
4525 line is ignored. A macro at the start of a line may turn the line into a
4526 comment line or a &`.include`& line.
4529 .section "Redefining macros"
4530 Once defined, the value of a macro can be redefined later in the configuration
4531 (or in an included file). Redefinition is specified by using &'=='& instead of
4536 MAC == updated value
4538 Redefinition does not alter the order in which the macros are applied to the
4539 subsequent lines of the configuration file. It is still the same order in which
4540 the macros were originally defined. All that changes is the macro's value.
4541 Redefinition makes it possible to accumulate values. For example:
4545 MAC == MAC and something added
4547 This can be helpful in situations where the configuration file is built
4548 from a number of other files.
4550 .section "Overriding macro values"
4551 The values set for macros in the configuration file can be overridden by the
4552 &%-D%& command line option, but Exim gives up its root privilege when &%-D%& is
4553 used, unless called by root or the Exim user. A definition on the command line
4554 using the &%-D%& option causes all definitions and redefinitions within the
4559 .section "Example of macro usage"
4560 As an example of macro usage, consider a configuration where aliases are looked
4561 up in a MySQL database. It helps to keep the file less cluttered if long
4562 strings such as SQL statements are defined separately as macros, for example:
4564 ALIAS_QUERY = select mailbox from user where \
4565 login=${quote_mysql:$local_part};
4567 This can then be used in a &(redirect)& router setting like this:
4569 data = ${lookup mysql{ALIAS_QUERY}}
4571 In earlier versions of Exim macros were sometimes used for domain, host, or
4572 address lists. In Exim 4 these are handled better by named lists &-- see
4573 section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&.
4576 .section "Conditional skips in the configuration file"
4577 .cindex "configuration file" "conditional skips"
4579 You can use the directives &`.ifdef`&, &`.ifndef`&, &`.elifdef`&,
4580 &`.elifndef`&, &`.else`&, and &`.endif`& to dynamically include or exclude
4581 portions of the configuration file. The processing happens whenever the file is
4582 read (that is, when an Exim binary starts to run).
4584 The implementation is very simple. Instances of the first four directives must
4585 be followed by text that includes the names of one or macros. The condition
4586 that is tested is whether or not any macro substitution has taken place in the
4590 message_size_limit = 50M
4592 message_size_limit = 100M
4595 sets a message size limit of 50M if the macro &`AAA`& is defined, and 100M
4596 otherwise. If there is more than one macro named on the line, the condition
4597 is true if any of them are defined. That is, it is an &"or"& condition. To
4598 obtain an &"and"& condition, you need to use nested &`.ifdef`&s.
4600 Although you can use a macro expansion to generate one of these directives,
4601 it is not very useful, because the condition &"there was a macro substitution
4602 in this line"& will always be true.
4604 Text following &`.else`& and &`.endif`& is ignored, and can be used as comment
4605 to clarify complicated nestings.
4609 .section "Common option syntax" "SECTcos"
4610 .cindex "common option syntax"
4611 .cindex "syntax of common options"
4612 .cindex "configuration file" "common option syntax"
4613 For the main set of options, driver options, and &[local_scan()]& options,
4614 each setting is on a line by itself, and starts with a name consisting of
4615 lower-case letters and underscores. Many options require a data value, and in
4616 these cases the name must be followed by an equals sign (with optional white
4617 space) and then the value. For example:
4619 qualify_domain = mydomain.example.com
4621 Some option settings may contain sensitive data, for example, passwords for
4622 accessing databases. To stop non-admin users from using the &%-bP%& command
4623 line option to read these values, you can precede the option settings with the
4624 word &"hide"&. For example:
4626 hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/admin/secret-password
4628 For non-admin users, such options are displayed like this:
4630 mysql_servers = <value not displayable>
4632 If &"hide"& is used on a driver option, it hides the value of that option on
4633 all instances of the same driver.
4635 The following sections describe the syntax used for the different data types
4636 that are found in option settings.
4639 .section "Boolean options"
4640 .cindex "format" "boolean"
4641 .cindex "boolean configuration values"
4642 .oindex "&%no_%&&'xxx'&"
4643 .oindex "&%not_%&&'xxx'&"
4644 Options whose type is given as boolean are on/off switches. There are two
4645 different ways of specifying such options: with and without a data value. If
4646 the option name is specified on its own without data, the switch is turned on;
4647 if it is preceded by &"no_"& or &"not_"& the switch is turned off. However,
4648 boolean options may be followed by an equals sign and one of the words
4649 &"true"&, &"false"&, &"yes"&, or &"no"&, as an alternative syntax. For example,
4650 the following two settings have exactly the same effect:
4655 The following two lines also have the same (opposite) effect:
4660 You can use whichever syntax you prefer.
4665 .section "Integer values"
4666 .cindex "integer configuration values"
4667 .cindex "format" "integer"
4668 If an integer data item starts with the characters &"0x"&, the remainder of it
4669 is interpreted as a hexadecimal number. Otherwise, it is treated as octal if it
4670 starts with the digit 0, and decimal if not. If an integer value is followed by
4671 the letter K, it is multiplied by 1024; if it is followed by the letter M, it
4672 is multiplied by 1024x1024.
4674 When the values of integer option settings are output, values which are an
4675 exact multiple of 1024 or 1024x1024 are
4676 sometimes, but not always,
4677 printed using the letters K and M. The printing style is independent of the
4678 actual input format that was used.
4681 .section "Octal integer values"
4682 .cindex "integer format"
4683 .cindex "format" "octal integer"
4684 The value of an option specified as an octal integer is always interpreted in
4685 octal, whether or not it starts with the digit zero. Such options are always
4690 .section "Fixed point number values"
4691 .cindex "fixed point configuration values"
4692 .cindex "format" "fixed point"
4693 A fixed point number consists of a decimal integer, optionally followed by a
4694 decimal point and up to three further digits.
4698 .section "Time interval values" "SECTtimeformat"
4699 .cindex "time interval" "specifying in configuration"
4700 .cindex "format" "time interval"
4701 A time interval is specified as a sequence of numbers, each followed by one of
4702 the following letters, with no intervening white space:
4705 .row &~&%s%& seconds
4706 .row &~&%m%& minutes
4712 For example, &"3h50m"& specifies 3 hours and 50 minutes. The values of time
4713 intervals are output in the same format. Exim does not restrict the values; it
4714 is perfectly acceptable, for example, to specify &"90m"& instead of &"1h30m"&.
4718 .section "String values" "SECTstrings"
4719 .cindex "string" "format of configuration values"
4720 .cindex "format" "string"
4721 If a string data item does not start with a double-quote character, it is taken
4722 as consisting of the remainder of the line plus any continuation lines,
4723 starting at the first character after any leading white space, with trailing
4724 white space removed, and with no interpretation of the characters in the
4725 string. Because Exim removes comment lines (those beginning with #) at an early
4726 stage, they can appear in the middle of a multi-line string. The following
4727 settings are therefore equivalent:
4729 trusted_users = uucp:mail
4731 trusted_users = uucp:\
4732 # This comment line is ignored
4735 .cindex "string" "quoted"
4736 .cindex "escape characters in quoted strings"
4737 If a string does start with a double-quote, it must end with a closing
4738 double-quote, and any backslash characters other than those used for line
4739 continuation are interpreted as escape characters, as follows:
4742 .row &~&`\\`& "single backslash"
4743 .row &~&`\n`& "newline"
4744 .row &~&`\r`& "carriage return"
4746 .row "&~&`\`&<&'octal digits'&>" "up to 3 octal digits specify one character"
4747 .row "&~&`\x`&<&'hex digits'&>" "up to 2 hexadecimal digits specify one &&&
4751 If a backslash is followed by some other character, including a double-quote
4752 character, that character replaces the pair.
4754 Quoting is necessary only if you want to make use of the backslash escapes to
4755 insert special characters, or if you need to specify a value with leading or
4756 trailing spaces. These cases are rare, so quoting is almost never needed in
4757 current versions of Exim. In versions of Exim before 3.14, quoting was required
4758 in order to continue lines, so you may come across older configuration files
4759 and examples that apparently quote unnecessarily.
4762 .section "Expanded strings"
4763 .cindex "string expansion" "definition of"
4764 .cindex "expansion" "definition of"
4765 Some strings in the configuration file are subjected to &'string expansion'&,
4766 by which means various parts of the string may be changed according to the
4767 circumstances (see chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&). The input syntax for such strings
4768 is as just described; in particular, the handling of backslashes in quoted
4769 strings is done as part of the input process, before expansion takes place.
4770 However, backslash is also an escape character for the expander, so any
4771 backslashes that are required for that reason must be doubled if they are
4772 within a quoted configuration string.
4775 .section "User and group names"
4776 .cindex "user name" "format of"
4777 .cindex "format" "user name"
4778 .cindex "group" "name format"
4779 .cindex "format" "group name"
4780 User and group names are specified as strings, using the syntax described
4781 above, but the strings are interpreted specially. A user or group name must
4782 either consist entirely of digits, or be a name that can be looked up using the
4783 &[getpwnam()]& or &[getgrnam()]& function, as appropriate.
4786 .section "List construction" "SECTlistconstruct"
4787 .cindex "list" "syntax of in configuration"
4788 .cindex "format" "list item in configuration"
4789 .cindex "string list" "definition"
4790 The data for some configuration options is a list of items, with colon as the
4791 default separator. Many of these options are shown with type &"string list"& in
4792 the descriptions later in this document. Others are listed as &"domain list"&,
4793 &"host list"&, &"address list"&, or &"local part list"&. Syntactically, they
4794 are all the same; however, those other than &"string list"& are subject to
4795 particular kinds of interpretation, as described in chapter
4796 &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>&.
4798 In all these cases, the entire list is treated as a single string as far as the
4799 input syntax is concerned. The &%trusted_users%& setting in section
4800 &<<SECTstrings>>& above is an example. If a colon is actually needed in an item
4801 in a list, it must be entered as two colons. Leading and trailing white space
4802 on each item in a list is ignored. This makes it possible to include items that
4803 start with a colon, and in particular, certain forms of IPv6 address. For
4806 local_interfaces = 127.0.0.1 : ::::1
4808 contains two IP addresses, the IPv4 address 127.0.0.1 and the IPv6 address ::1.
4810 &*Note*&: Although leading and trailing white space is ignored in individual
4811 list items, it is not ignored when parsing the list. The space after the first
4812 colon in the example above is necessary. If it were not there, the list would
4813 be interpreted as the two items 127.0.0.1:: and 1.
4815 .cindex "list separator" "changing"
4816 .cindex "IPv6" "addresses in lists"
4817 Doubling colons in IPv6 addresses is an unwelcome chore, so a mechanism was
4818 introduced to allow the separator character to be changed. If a list begins
4819 with a left angle bracket, followed by any punctuation character, that
4820 character is used instead of colon as the list separator. For example, the list
4821 above can be rewritten to use a semicolon separator like this:
4823 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1
4825 This facility applies to all lists, with the exception of the list in
4826 &%log_file_path%&. It is recommended that the use of non-colon separators be
4827 confined to circumstances where they really are needed.
4831 .section "Empty items in lists" "SECTempitelis"
4832 .cindex "list" "empty item in"
4833 An empty item at the end of a list is always ignored. In other words, trailing
4834 separator characters are ignored. Thus, the list in
4836 senders = user@domain :
4838 contains only a single item. If you want to include an empty string as one item
4839 in a list, it must not be the last item. For example, this list contains three
4840 items, the second of which is empty:
4842 senders = user1@domain : : user2@domain
4844 &*Note*&: There must be white space between the two colons, as otherwise they
4845 are interpreted as representing a single colon data character (and the list
4846 would then contain just one item). If you want to specify a list that contains
4847 just one, empty item, you can do it as in this example:
4851 In this case, the first item is empty, and the second is discarded because it
4852 is at the end of the list.
4857 .section "Format of driver configurations" "SECTfordricon"
4858 .cindex "drivers" "configuration format"
4859 There are separate parts in the configuration for defining routers, transports,
4860 and authenticators. In each part, you are defining a number of driver
4861 instances, each with its own set of options. Each driver instance is defined by
4862 a sequence of lines like this:
4864 <&'instance name'&>:
4869 In the following example, the instance name is &(localuser)&, and it is
4870 followed by three options settings:
4875 transport = local_delivery
4877 For each driver instance, you specify which Exim code module it uses &-- by the
4878 setting of the &%driver%& option &-- and (optionally) some configuration
4879 settings. For example, in the case of transports, if you want a transport to
4880 deliver with SMTP you would use the &(smtp)& driver; if you want to deliver to
4881 a local file you would use the &(appendfile)& driver. Each of the drivers is
4882 described in detail in its own separate chapter later in this manual.
4884 You can have several routers, transports, or authenticators that are based on
4885 the same underlying driver (each must have a different instance name).
4887 The order in which routers are defined is important, because addresses are
4888 passed to individual routers one by one, in order. The order in which
4889 transports are defined does not matter at all. The order in which
4890 authenticators are defined is used only when Exim, as a client, is searching
4891 them to find one that matches an authentication mechanism offered by the
4894 .cindex "generic options"
4895 .cindex "options" "generic &-- definition of"
4896 Within a driver instance definition, there are two kinds of option: &'generic'&
4897 and &'private'&. The generic options are those that apply to all drivers of the
4898 same type (that is, all routers, all transports or all authenticators). The
4899 &%driver%& option is a generic option that must appear in every definition.
4900 .cindex "private options"
4901 The private options are special for each driver, and none need appear, because
4902 they all have default values.
4904 The options may appear in any order, except that the &%driver%& option must
4905 precede any private options, since these depend on the particular driver. For
4906 this reason, it is recommended that &%driver%& always be the first option.
4908 Driver instance names, which are used for reference in log entries and
4909 elsewhere, can be any sequence of letters, digits, and underscores (starting
4910 with a letter) and must be unique among drivers of the same type. A router and
4911 a transport (for example) can each have the same name, but no two router
4912 instances can have the same name. The name of a driver instance should not be
4913 confused with the name of the underlying driver module. For example, the
4914 configuration lines:
4919 create an instance of the &(smtp)& transport driver whose name is
4920 &(remote_smtp)&. The same driver code can be used more than once, with
4921 different instance names and different option settings each time. A second
4922 instance of the &(smtp)& transport, with different options, might be defined
4928 command_timeout = 10s
4930 The names &(remote_smtp)& and &(special_smtp)& would be used to reference
4931 these transport instances from routers, and these names would appear in log
4934 Comment lines may be present in the middle of driver specifications. The full
4935 list of option settings for any particular driver instance, including all the
4936 defaulted values, can be extracted by making use of the &%-bP%& command line
4944 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4945 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4947 .chapter "The default configuration file" "CHAPdefconfil"
4948 .scindex IIDconfiwal "configuration file" "default &""walk through""&"
4949 .cindex "default" "configuration file &""walk through""&"
4950 The default configuration file supplied with Exim as &_src/configure.default_&
4951 is sufficient for a host with simple mail requirements. As an introduction to
4952 the way Exim is configured, this chapter &"walks through"& the default
4953 configuration, giving brief explanations of the settings. Detailed descriptions
4954 of the options are given in subsequent chapters. The default configuration file
4955 itself contains extensive comments about ways you might want to modify the
4956 initial settings. However, note that there are many options that are not
4957 mentioned at all in the default configuration.
4961 .section "Main configuration settings"
4962 The main (global) configuration option settings must always come first in the
4963 file. The first thing you'll see in the file, after some initial comments, is
4966 # primary_hostname =
4968 This is a commented-out setting of the &%primary_hostname%& option. Exim needs
4969 to know the official, fully qualified name of your host, and this is where you
4970 can specify it. However, in most cases you do not need to set this option. When
4971 it is unset, Exim uses the &[uname()]& system function to obtain the host name.
4973 The first three non-comment configuration lines are as follows:
4975 domainlist local_domains = @
4976 domainlist relay_to_domains =
4977 hostlist relay_from_hosts = 127.0.0.1
4979 These are not, in fact, option settings. They are definitions of two named
4980 domain lists and one named host list. Exim allows you to give names to lists of
4981 domains, hosts, and email addresses, in order to make it easier to manage the
4982 configuration file (see section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&).
4984 The first line defines a domain list called &'local_domains'&; this is used
4985 later in the configuration to identify domains that are to be delivered
4988 .cindex "@ in a domain list"
4989 There is just one item in this list, the string &"@"&. This is a special form
4990 of entry which means &"the name of the local host"&. Thus, if the local host is
4991 called &'a.host.example'&, mail to &'any.user@a.host.example'& is expected to
4992 be delivered locally. Because the local host's name is referenced indirectly,
4993 the same configuration file can be used on different hosts.
4995 The second line defines a domain list called &'relay_to_domains'&, but the
4996 list itself is empty. Later in the configuration we will come to the part that
4997 controls mail relaying through the local host; it allows relaying to any
4998 domains in this list. By default, therefore, no relaying on the basis of a mail
4999 domain is permitted.
5001 The third line defines a host list called &'relay_from_hosts'&. This list is
5002 used later in the configuration to permit relaying from any host or IP address
5003 that matches the list. The default contains just the IP address of the IPv4
5004 loopback interface, which means that processes on the local host are able to
5005 submit mail for relaying by sending it over TCP/IP to that interface. No other
5006 hosts are permitted to submit messages for relaying.
5008 Just to be sure there's no misunderstanding: at this point in the configuration
5009 we aren't actually setting up any controls. We are just defining some domains
5010 and hosts that will be used in the controls that are specified later.
5012 The next two configuration lines are genuine option settings:
5014 acl_smtp_rcpt = acl_check_rcpt
5015 acl_smtp_data = acl_check_data
5017 These options specify &'Access Control Lists'& (ACLs) that are to be used
5018 during an incoming SMTP session for every recipient of a message (every RCPT
5019 command), and after the contents of the message have been received,
5020 respectively. The names of the lists are &'acl_check_rcpt'& and
5021 &'acl_check_data'&, and we will come to their definitions below, in the ACL
5022 section of the configuration. The RCPT ACL controls which recipients are
5023 accepted for an incoming message &-- if a configuration does not provide an ACL
5024 to check recipients, no SMTP mail can be accepted. The DATA ACL allows the
5025 contents of a message to be checked.
5027 Two commented-out option settings are next:
5029 # av_scanner = clamd:/tmp/clamd
5030 # spamd_address = 127.0.0.1 783
5032 These are example settings that can be used when Exim is compiled with the
5033 content-scanning extension. The first specifies the interface to the virus
5034 scanner, and the second specifies the interface to SpamAssassin. Further
5035 details are given in chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
5037 Two more commented-out options settings follow:
5040 # qualify_recipient =
5042 The first of these specifies a domain that Exim uses when it constructs a
5043 complete email address from a local login name. This is often needed when Exim
5044 receives a message from a local process. If you do not set &%qualify_domain%&,
5045 the value of &%primary_hostname%& is used. If you set both of these options,
5046 you can have different qualification domains for sender and recipient
5047 addresses. If you set only the first one, its value is used in both cases.
5049 .cindex "domain literal" "recognizing format"
5050 The following line must be uncommented if you want Exim to recognize
5051 addresses of the form &'user@[10.11.12.13]'& that is, with a &"domain literal"&
5052 (an IP address within square brackets) instead of a named domain.
5054 # allow_domain_literals
5056 The RFCs still require this form, but many people think that in the modern
5057 Internet it makes little sense to permit mail to be sent to specific hosts by
5058 quoting their IP addresses. This ancient format has been used by people who
5059 try to abuse hosts by using them for unwanted relaying. However, some
5060 people believe there are circumstances (for example, messages addressed to
5061 &'postmaster'&) where domain literals are still useful.
5063 The next configuration line is a kind of trigger guard:
5067 It specifies that no delivery must ever be run as the root user. The normal
5068 convention is to set up &'root'& as an alias for the system administrator. This
5069 setting is a guard against slips in the configuration.
5070 The list of users specified by &%never_users%& is not, however, the complete
5071 list; the build-time configuration in &_Local/Makefile_& has an option called
5072 FIXED_NEVER_USERS specifying a list that cannot be overridden. The
5073 contents of &%never_users%& are added to this list. By default
5074 FIXED_NEVER_USERS also specifies root.
5076 When a remote host connects to Exim in order to send mail, the only information
5077 Exim has about the host's identity is its IP address. The next configuration
5082 specifies that Exim should do a reverse DNS lookup on all incoming connections,
5083 in order to get a host name. This improves the quality of the logging
5084 information, but if you feel it is too expensive, you can remove it entirely,
5085 or restrict the lookup to hosts on &"nearby"& networks.
5086 Note that it is not always possible to find a host name from an IP address,
5087 because not all DNS reverse zones are maintained, and sometimes DNS servers are
5090 The next two lines are concerned with &'ident'& callbacks, as defined by RFC
5091 1413 (hence their names):
5095 rfc1413_query_timeout = 5s
5098 These settings cause Exim to make ident callbacks for all incoming SMTP calls.
5099 You can limit the hosts to which these calls are made, or change the timeout
5100 that is used. If you set the timeout to zero, all ident calls are disabled.
5101 Although they are cheap and can provide useful information for tracing problem
5102 messages, some hosts and firewalls have problems with ident calls. This can
5103 result in a timeout instead of an immediate refused connection, leading to
5104 delays on starting up an incoming SMTP session.
5106 When Exim receives messages over SMTP connections, it expects all addresses to
5107 be fully qualified with a domain, as required by the SMTP definition. However,
5108 if you are running a server to which simple clients submit messages, you may
5109 find that they send unqualified addresses. The two commented-out options:
5111 # sender_unqualified_hosts =
5112 # recipient_unqualified_hosts =
5114 show how you can specify hosts that are permitted to send unqualified sender
5115 and recipient addresses, respectively.
5117 The &%percent_hack_domains%& option is also commented out:
5119 # percent_hack_domains =
5121 It provides a list of domains for which the &"percent hack"& is to operate.
5122 This is an almost obsolete form of explicit email routing. If you do not know
5123 anything about it, you can safely ignore this topic.
5125 The last two settings in the main part of the default configuration are
5126 concerned with messages that have been &"frozen"& on Exim's queue. When a
5127 message is frozen, Exim no longer continues to try to deliver it. Freezing
5128 occurs when a bounce message encounters a permanent failure because the sender
5129 address of the original message that caused the bounce is invalid, so the
5130 bounce cannot be delivered. This is probably the most common case, but there
5131 are also other conditions that cause freezing, and frozen messages are not
5132 always bounce messages.
5134 ignore_bounce_errors_after = 2d
5135 timeout_frozen_after = 7d
5137 The first of these options specifies that failing bounce messages are to be
5138 discarded after 2 days on the queue. The second specifies that any frozen
5139 message (whether a bounce message or not) is to be timed out (and discarded)
5140 after a week. In this configuration, the first setting ensures that no failing
5141 bounce message ever lasts a week.
5145 .section "ACL configuration"
5146 .cindex "default" "ACLs"
5147 .cindex "&ACL;" "default configuration"
5148 In the default configuration, the ACL section follows the main configuration.
5149 It starts with the line
5153 and it contains the definitions of two ACLs, called &'acl_check_rcpt'& and
5154 &'acl_check_data'&, that were referenced in the settings of &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&
5155 and &%acl_smtp_data%& above.
5157 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
5158 The first ACL is used for every RCPT command in an incoming SMTP message. Each
5159 RCPT command specifies one of the message's recipients. The ACL statements
5160 are considered in order, until the recipient address is either accepted or
5161 rejected. The RCPT command is then accepted or rejected, according to the
5162 result of the ACL processing.
5166 This line, consisting of a name terminated by a colon, marks the start of the
5171 This ACL statement accepts the recipient if the sending host matches the list.
5172 But what does that strange list mean? It doesn't actually contain any host
5173 names or IP addresses. The presence of the colon puts an empty item in the
5174 list; Exim matches this only if the incoming message did not come from a remote
5175 host, because in that case, the remote hostname is empty. The colon is
5176 important. Without it, the list itself is empty, and can never match anything.
5178 What this statement is doing is to accept unconditionally all recipients in
5179 messages that are submitted by SMTP from local processes using the standard
5180 input and output (that is, not using TCP/IP). A number of MUAs operate in this
5183 deny message = Restricted characters in address
5184 domains = +local_domains
5185 local_parts = ^[.] : ^.*[@%!/|]
5187 deny message = Restricted characters in address
5188 domains = !+local_domains
5189 local_parts = ^[./|] : ^.*[@%!] : ^.*/\\.\\./
5191 These statements are concerned with local parts that contain any of the
5192 characters &"@"&, &"%"&, &"!"&, &"/"&, &"|"&, or dots in unusual places.
5193 Although these characters are entirely legal in local parts (in the case of
5194 &"@"& and leading dots, only if correctly quoted), they do not commonly occur
5195 in Internet mail addresses.
5197 The first three have in the past been associated with explicitly routed
5198 addresses (percent is still sometimes used &-- see the &%percent_hack_domains%&
5199 option). Addresses containing these characters are regularly tried by spammers
5200 in an attempt to bypass relaying restrictions, and also by open relay testing
5201 programs. Unless you really need them it is safest to reject these characters
5202 at this early stage. This configuration is heavy-handed in rejecting these
5203 characters for all messages it accepts from remote hosts. This is a deliberate
5204 policy of being as safe as possible.
5206 The first rule above is stricter, and is applied to messages that are addressed
5207 to one of the local domains handled by this host. This is implemented by the
5208 first condition, which restricts it to domains that are listed in the
5209 &'local_domains'& domain list. The &"+"& character is used to indicate a
5210 reference to a named list. In this configuration, there is just one domain in
5211 &'local_domains'&, but in general there may be many.
5213 The second condition on the first statement uses two regular expressions to
5214 block local parts that begin with a dot or contain &"@"&, &"%"&, &"!"&, &"/"&,
5215 or &"|"&. If you have local accounts that include these characters, you will
5216 have to modify this rule.
5218 Empty components (two dots in a row) are not valid in RFC 2822, but Exim
5219 allows them because they have been encountered in practice. (Consider the
5220 common convention of local parts constructed as
5221 &"&'first-initial.second-initial.family-name'&"& when applied to someone like
5222 the author of Exim, who has no second initial.) However, a local part starting
5223 with a dot or containing &"/../"& can cause trouble if it is used as part of a
5224 file name (for example, for a mailing list). This is also true for local parts
5225 that contain slashes. A pipe symbol can also be troublesome if the local part
5226 is incorporated unthinkingly into a shell command line.
5228 The second rule above applies to all other domains, and is less strict. This
5229 allows your own users to send outgoing messages to sites that use slashes
5230 and vertical bars in their local parts. It blocks local parts that begin
5231 with a dot, slash, or vertical bar, but allows these characters within the
5232 local part. However, the sequence &"/../"& is barred. The use of &"@"&, &"%"&,
5233 and &"!"& is blocked, as before. The motivation here is to prevent your users
5234 (or your users' viruses) from mounting certain kinds of attack on remote sites.
5236 accept local_parts = postmaster
5237 domains = +local_domains
5239 This statement, which has two conditions, accepts an incoming address if the
5240 local part is &'postmaster'& and the domain is one of those listed in the
5241 &'local_domains'& domain list. The &"+"& character is used to indicate a
5242 reference to a named list. In this configuration, there is just one domain in
5243 &'local_domains'&, but in general there may be many.
5245 The presence of this statement means that mail to postmaster is never blocked
5246 by any of the subsequent tests. This can be helpful while sorting out problems
5247 in cases where the subsequent tests are incorrectly denying access.
5249 require verify = sender
5251 This statement requires the sender address to be verified before any subsequent
5252 ACL statement can be used. If verification fails, the incoming recipient
5253 address is refused. Verification consists of trying to route the address, to
5254 see if a bounce message could be delivered to it. In the case of remote
5255 addresses, basic verification checks only the domain, but &'callouts'& can be
5256 used for more verification if required. Section &<<SECTaddressverification>>&
5257 discusses the details of address verification.
5259 accept hosts = +relay_from_hosts
5260 control = submission
5262 This statement accepts the address if the message is coming from one of the
5263 hosts that are defined as being allowed to relay through this host. Recipient
5264 verification is omitted here, because in many cases the clients are dumb MUAs
5265 that do not cope well with SMTP error responses. For the same reason, the
5266 second line specifies &"submission mode"& for messages that are accepted. This
5267 is described in detail in section &<<SECTsubmodnon>>&; it causes Exim to fix
5268 messages that are deficient in some way, for example, because they lack a
5269 &'Date:'& header line. If you are actually relaying out from MTAs, you should
5270 probably add recipient verification here, and disable submission mode.
5272 accept authenticated = *
5273 control = submission
5275 This statement accepts the address if the client host has authenticated itself.
5276 Submission mode is again specified, on the grounds that such messages are most
5277 likely to come from MUAs. The default configuration does not define any
5278 authenticators, which means that no client can in fact authenticate. You will
5279 need to add authenticator definitions if you want to make use of this ACL
5282 # deny message = rejected because $sender_host_address \
5283 # is in a black list at $dnslist_domain\n\
5285 # dnslists = black.list.example
5287 # warn message = X-Warning: $sender_host_address is \
5288 # in a black list at $dnslist_domain
5289 # log_message = found in $dnslist_domain
5290 # dnslists = black.list.example
5292 These commented-out lines are examples of how you could configure Exim to check
5293 sending hosts against a DNS black list. The first statement rejects messages
5294 from blacklisted hosts, whereas the second merely inserts a warning header
5297 accept domains = +local_domains
5301 This statement accepts the incoming recipient address if its domain is one of
5302 the local domains, but only if the address can be verified. Verification of
5303 local addresses normally checks both the local part and the domain. The
5304 &%endpass%& line needs some explanation: if the condition above &%endpass%&
5305 fails, that is, if the address is not in a local domain, control is passed to
5306 the next ACL statement. However, if the condition below &%endpass%& fails, that
5307 is, if a recipient in a local domain cannot be verified, access is denied and
5308 the recipient is rejected.
5310 accept domains = +relay_to_domains
5314 This statement accepts the incoming recipient address if its domain is one of
5315 the domains for which this host is a relay, but again, only if the address can
5318 deny message = relay not permitted
5320 The final statement denies access, giving a specific error message. Reaching
5321 the end of the ACL also causes access to be denied, but with the generic
5322 message &"administrative prohibition"&.
5326 This line marks the start of the second ACL, and names it. Most of the contents
5327 of this ACL are commented out:
5330 # message = This message contains a virus \
5333 These lines are examples of how to arrange for messages to be scanned for
5334 viruses when Exim has been compiled with the content-scanning extension, and a
5335 suitable virus scanner is installed. If the message is found to contain a
5336 virus, it is rejected with the given custom error message.
5338 # warn spam = nobody
5339 # message = X-Spam_score: $spam_score\n\
5340 # X-Spam_score_int: $spam_score_int\n\
5341 # X-Spam_bar: $spam_bar\n\
5342 # X-Spam_report: $spam_report
5344 These lines are an example of how to arrange for messages to be scanned by
5345 SpamAssassin when Exim has been compiled with the content-scanning extension,
5346 and SpamAssassin has been installed. The SpamAssassin check is run with
5347 &`nobody`& as its user parameter, and the results are added to the message as a
5348 series of extra header line. In this case, the message is not rejected,
5349 whatever the spam score.
5353 This final line in the DATA ACL accepts the message unconditionally.
5356 .section "Router configuration"
5357 .cindex "default" "routers"
5358 .cindex "routers" "default"
5359 The router configuration comes next in the default configuration, introduced
5364 Routers are the modules in Exim that make decisions about where to send
5365 messages. An address is passed to each router in turn, until it is either
5366 accepted, or failed. This means that the order in which you define the routers
5367 matters. Each router is fully described in its own chapter later in this
5368 manual. Here we give only brief overviews.
5371 # driver = ipliteral
5372 # domains = !+local_domains
5373 # transport = remote_smtp
5375 .cindex "domain literal" "default router"
5376 This router is commented out because the majority of sites do not want to
5377 support domain literal addresses (those of the form &'user@[10.9.8.7]'&). If
5378 you uncomment this router, you also need to uncomment the setting of
5379 &%allow_domain_literals%& in the main part of the configuration.
5383 domains = ! +local_domains
5384 transport = remote_smtp
5385 ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.0/8
5388 The first uncommented router handles addresses that do not involve any local
5389 domains. This is specified by the line
5391 domains = ! +local_domains
5393 The &%domains%& option lists the domains to which this router applies, but the
5394 exclamation mark is a negation sign, so the router is used only for domains
5395 that are not in the domain list called &'local_domains'& (which was defined at
5396 the start of the configuration). The plus sign before &'local_domains'&
5397 indicates that it is referring to a named list. Addresses in other domains are
5398 passed on to the following routers.
5400 The name of the router driver is &(dnslookup)&,
5401 and is specified by the &%driver%& option. Do not be confused by the fact that
5402 the name of this router instance is the same as the name of the driver. The
5403 instance name is arbitrary, but the name set in the &%driver%& option must be
5404 one of the driver modules that is in the Exim binary.
5406 The &(dnslookup)& router routes addresses by looking up their domains in the
5407 DNS in order to obtain a list of hosts to which the address is routed. If the
5408 router succeeds, the address is queued for the &(remote_smtp)& transport, as
5409 specified by the &%transport%& option. If the router does not find the domain
5410 in the DNS, no further routers are tried because of the &%no_more%& setting, so
5411 the address fails and is bounced.
5413 The &%ignore_target_hosts%& option specifies a list of IP addresses that are to
5414 be entirely ignored. This option is present because a number of cases have been
5415 encountered where MX records in the DNS point to host names
5416 whose IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 or are in the 127 subnet (typically 127.0.0.1).
5417 Completely ignoring these IP addresses causes Exim to fail to route the
5418 email address, so it bounces. Otherwise, Exim would log a routing problem, and
5419 continue to try to deliver the message periodically until the address timed
5426 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}
5428 file_transport = address_file
5429 pipe_transport = address_pipe
5431 Control reaches this and subsequent routers only for addresses in the local
5432 domains. This router checks to see whether the local part is defined as an
5433 alias in the &_/etc/aliases_& file, and if so, redirects it according to the
5434 data that it looks up from that file. If no data is found for the local part,
5435 the value of the &%data%& option is empty, causing the address to be passed to
5438 &_/etc/aliases_& is a conventional name for the system aliases file that is
5439 often used. That is why it is referenced by from the default configuration
5440 file. However, you can change this by setting SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in
5441 &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim.
5446 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5447 # local_part_suffix_optional
5448 file = $home/.forward
5453 file_transport = address_file
5454 pipe_transport = address_pipe
5455 reply_transport = address_reply
5457 This is the most complicated router in the default configuration. It is another
5458 redirection router, but this time it is looking for forwarding data set up by
5459 individual users. The &%check_local_user%& setting specifies a check that the
5460 local part of the address is the login name of a local user. If it is not, the
5461 router is skipped. The two commented options that follow &%check_local_user%&,
5464 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5465 # local_part_suffix_optional
5467 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
5468 show how you can specify the recognition of local part suffixes. If the first
5469 is uncommented, a suffix beginning with either a plus or a minus sign, followed
5470 by any sequence of characters, is removed from the local part and placed in the
5471 variable &$local_part_suffix$&. The second suffix option specifies that the
5472 presence of a suffix in the local part is optional. When a suffix is present,
5473 the check for a local login uses the local part with the suffix removed.
5475 When a local user account is found, the file called &_.forward_& in the user's
5476 home directory is consulted. If it does not exist, or is empty, the router
5477 declines. Otherwise, the contents of &_.forward_& are interpreted as
5478 redirection data (see chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>& for more details).
5480 .cindex "Sieve filter" "enabling in default router"
5481 Traditional &_.forward_& files contain just a list of addresses, pipes, or
5482 files. Exim supports this by default. However, if &%allow_filter%& is set (it
5483 is commented out by default), the contents of the file are interpreted as a set
5484 of Exim or Sieve filtering instructions, provided the file begins with &"#Exim
5485 filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"&, respectively. User filtering is discussed in the
5486 separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&.
5488 The &%no_verify%& and &%no_expn%& options mean that this router is skipped when
5489 verifying addresses, or when running as a consequence of an SMTP EXPN command.
5490 There are two reasons for doing this:
5493 Whether or not a local user has a &_.forward_& file is not really relevant when
5494 checking an address for validity; it makes sense not to waste resources doing
5497 More importantly, when Exim is verifying addresses or handling an EXPN
5498 command during an SMTP session, it is running as the Exim user, not as root.
5499 The group is the Exim group, and no additional groups are set up.
5500 It may therefore not be possible for Exim to read users' &_.forward_& files at
5504 The setting of &%check_ancestor%& prevents the router from generating a new
5505 address that is the same as any previous address that was redirected. (This
5506 works round a problem concerning a bad interaction between aliasing and
5507 forwarding &-- see section &<<SECTredlocmai>>&).
5509 The final three option settings specify the transports that are to be used when
5510 forwarding generates a direct delivery to a file, or to a pipe, or sets up an
5511 auto-reply, respectively. For example, if a &_.forward_& file contains
5513 a.nother@elsewhere.example, /home/spqr/archive
5515 the delivery to &_/home/spqr/archive_& is done by running the &%address_file%&
5521 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5522 # local_part_suffix_optional
5523 transport = local_delivery
5525 The final router sets up delivery into local mailboxes, provided that the local
5526 part is the name of a local login, by accepting the address and assigning it to
5527 the &(local_delivery)& transport. Otherwise, we have reached the end of the
5528 routers, so the address is bounced. The commented suffix settings fulfil the
5529 same purpose as they do for the &(userforward)& router.
5532 .section "Transport configuration"
5533 .cindex "default" "transports"
5534 .cindex "transports" "default"
5535 Transports define mechanisms for actually delivering messages. They operate
5536 only when referenced from routers, so the order in which they are defined does
5537 not matter. The transports section of the configuration starts with
5541 One remote transport and four local transports are defined.
5546 This transport is used for delivering messages over SMTP connections. All its
5547 options are defaulted. The list of remote hosts comes from the router.
5551 file = /var/mail/$local_part
5558 This &(appendfile)& transport is used for local delivery to user mailboxes in
5559 traditional BSD mailbox format. By default it runs under the uid and gid of the
5560 local user, which requires the sticky bit to be set on the &_/var/mail_&
5561 directory. Some systems use the alternative approach of running mail deliveries
5562 under a particular group instead of using the sticky bit. The commented options
5563 show how this can be done.
5565 Exim adds three headers to the message as it delivers it: &'Delivery-date:'&,
5566 &'Envelope-to:'& and &'Return-path:'&. This action is requested by the three
5567 similarly-named options above.
5573 This transport is used for handling deliveries to pipes that are generated by
5574 redirection (aliasing or users' &_.forward_& files). The &%return_output%&
5575 option specifies that any output generated by the pipe is to be returned to the
5584 This transport is used for handling deliveries to files that are generated by
5585 redirection. The name of the file is not specified in this instance of
5586 &(appendfile)&, because it comes from the &(redirect)& router.
5591 This transport is used for handling automatic replies generated by users'
5596 .section "Default retry rule"
5597 .cindex "retry" "default rule"
5598 .cindex "default" "retry rule"
5599 The retry section of the configuration file contains rules which affect the way
5600 Exim retries deliveries that cannot be completed at the first attempt. It is
5601 introduced by the line
5605 In the default configuration, there is just one rule, which applies to all
5608 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h
5610 This causes any temporarily failing address to be retried every 15 minutes for
5611 2 hours, then at intervals starting at one hour and increasing by a factor of
5612 1.5 until 16 hours have passed, then every 6 hours up to 4 days. If an address
5613 is not delivered after 4 days of temporary failure, it is bounced.
5617 .section "Rewriting configuration"
5618 The rewriting section of the configuration, introduced by
5622 contains rules for rewriting addresses in messages as they arrive. There are no
5623 rewriting rules in the default configuration file.
5627 .section "Authenticators configuration"
5628 .cindex "AUTH" "configuration"
5629 The authenticators section of the configuration, introduced by
5631 begin authenticators
5633 defines mechanisms for the use of the SMTP AUTH command. No authenticators
5634 are specified in the default configuration file.
5635 .ecindex IIDconfiwal
5639 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5640 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5642 .chapter "Regular expressions" "CHAPregexp"
5644 .cindex "regular expressions" "library"
5646 Exim supports the use of regular expressions in many of its options. It
5647 uses the PCRE regular expression library; this provides regular expression
5648 matching that is compatible with Perl 5. The syntax and semantics of
5649 regular expressions is discussed in many Perl reference books, and also in
5650 Jeffrey Friedl's &'Mastering Regular Expressions'&, which is published by
5651 O'Reilly (see &url(http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/regex2/)).
5653 The documentation for the syntax and semantics of the regular expressions that
5654 are supported by PCRE is included in plain text in the file
5655 &_doc/pcrepattern.txt_& in the Exim distribution, and also in the HTML
5656 tarbundle of Exim documentation. It describes in detail the features of the
5657 regular expressions that PCRE supports, so no further description is included
5658 here. The PCRE functions are called from Exim using the default option settings
5659 (that is, with no PCRE options set), except that the PCRE_CASELESS option is
5660 set when the matching is required to be case-insensitive.
5662 In most cases, when a regular expression is required in an Exim configuration,
5663 it has to start with a circumflex, in order to distinguish it from plain text
5664 or an &"ends with"& wildcard. In this example of a configuration setting, the
5665 second item in the colon-separated list is a regular expression.
5667 domains = a.b.c : ^\\d{3} : *.y.z : ...
5669 The doubling of the backslash is required because of string expansion that
5670 precedes interpretation &-- see section &<<SECTlittext>>& for more discussion
5671 of this issue, and a way of avoiding the need for doubling backslashes. The
5672 regular expression that is eventually used in this example contains just one
5673 backslash. The circumflex is included in the regular expression, and has the
5674 normal effect of &"anchoring"& it to the start of the string that is being
5677 There are, however, two cases where a circumflex is not required for the
5678 recognition of a regular expression: these are the &%match%& condition in a
5679 string expansion, and the &%matches%& condition in an Exim filter file. In
5680 these cases, the relevant string is always treated as a regular expression; if
5681 it does not start with a circumflex, the expression is not anchored, and can
5682 match anywhere in the subject string.
5684 In all cases, if you want a regular expression to match at the end of a string,
5685 you must code the $ metacharacter to indicate this. For example:
5687 domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example
5689 matches the domain &'123.example'&, but it also matches &'123.example.com'&.
5692 domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example\$
5694 if you want &'example'& to be the top-level domain. The backslash before the
5695 $ is needed because string expansion also interprets dollar characters.
5699 .section "Testing regular expressions"
5700 .cindex "testing" "regular expressions"
5701 .cindex "regular expressions" "testing"
5702 .cindex "&'pcretest'&"
5703 A program called &'pcretest'& forms part of the PCRE distribution and is built
5704 with PCRE during the process of building Exim. It is primarily intended for
5705 testing PCRE itself, but it can also be used for experimenting with regular
5706 expressions. After building Exim, the binary can be found in the build
5707 directory (it is not installed anywhere automatically). There is documentation
5708 of various options in &_doc/pcretest.txt_&, but for simple testing, none are
5709 needed. This is the output of a sample run of &'pcretest'&:
5711 &` re> `&&*&`/^([@]+)@.+\.(ac|edu)\.(?!kr)[a-z]{2}$/`&*&
5712 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.ac.uk`&*&
5716 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.ac.kr`&*&
5718 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.edu.com`&*&
5720 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.edu.co`&*&
5725 Input typed by the user is shown in bold face. After the &"re>"& prompt, a
5726 regular expression enclosed in delimiters is expected. If this compiles without
5727 error, &"data>"& prompts are given for strings against which the expression is
5728 matched. An empty data line causes a new regular expression to be read. If the
5729 match is successful, the captured substring values (that is, what would be in
5730 the variables &$0$&, &$1$&, &$2$&, etc.) are shown. The above example tests for
5731 an email address whose domain ends with either &"ac"& or &"edu"& followed by a
5732 two-character top-level domain that is not &"kr"&. The local part is captured
5733 in &$1$& and the &"ac"& or &"edu"& in &$2$&.
5740 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5741 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5743 .chapter "File and database lookups" "CHAPfdlookup"
5744 .scindex IIDfidalo1 "file" "lookups"
5745 .scindex IIDfidalo2 "database lookups"
5746 .cindex "lookup" "description of"
5747 Exim can be configured to look up data in files or databases as it processes
5748 messages. Two different kinds of syntax are used:
5751 A string that is to be expanded may contain explicit lookup requests. These
5752 cause parts of the string to be replaced by data that is obtained from the
5753 lookup. Lookups of this type are conditional expansion items. Different results
5754 can be defined for the cases of lookup success and failure. See chapter
5755 &<<CHAPexpand>>&, where string expansions are described in detail.
5757 Lists of domains, hosts, and email addresses can contain lookup requests as a
5758 way of avoiding excessively long linear lists. In this case, the data that is
5759 returned by the lookup is often (but not always) discarded; whether the lookup
5760 succeeds or fails is what really counts. These kinds of list are described in
5761 chapter &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>&.
5764 String expansions, lists, and lookups interact with each other in such a way
5765 that there is no order in which to describe any one of them that does not
5766 involve references to the others. Each of these three chapters makes more sense
5767 if you have read the other two first. If you are reading this for the first
5768 time, be aware that some of it will make a lot more sense after you have read
5769 chapters &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>& and &<<CHAPexpand>>&.
5771 .section "Examples of different lookup syntax"
5772 It is easy to confuse the two different kinds of lookup, especially as the
5773 lists that may contain the second kind are always expanded before being
5774 processed as lists. Therefore, they may also contain lookups of the first kind.
5775 Be careful to distinguish between the following two examples:
5777 domains = ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch{/some/file}}
5778 domains = lsearch;/some/file
5780 The first uses a string expansion, the result of which must be a domain list.
5781 No strings have been specified for a successful or a failing lookup; the
5782 defaults in this case are the looked-up data and an empty string, respectively.
5783 The expansion takes place before the string is processed as a list, and the
5784 file that is searched could contain lines like this:
5786 192.168.3.4: domain1:domain2:...
5787 192.168.1.9: domain3:domain4:...
5789 When the lookup succeeds, the result of the expansion is a list of domains (and
5790 possibly other types of item that are allowed in domain lists).
5792 In the second example, the lookup is a single item in a domain list. It causes
5793 Exim to use a lookup to see if the domain that is being processed can be found
5794 in the file. The file could contains lines like this:
5799 Any data that follows the keys is not relevant when checking that the domain
5800 matches the list item.
5802 It is possible, though no doubt confusing, to use both kinds of lookup at once.
5803 Consider a file containing lines like this:
5805 192.168.5.6: lsearch;/another/file
5807 If the value of &$sender_host_address$& is 192.168.5.6, expansion of the
5808 first &%domains%& setting above generates the second setting, which therefore
5809 causes a second lookup to occur.
5811 The rest of this chapter describes the different lookup types that are
5812 available. Any of them can be used in any part of the configuration where a
5813 lookup is permitted.
5816 .section "Lookup types"
5817 .cindex "lookup" "types of"
5818 .cindex "single-key lookup" "definition of"
5819 Two different types of data lookup are implemented:
5822 The &'single-key'& type requires the specification of a file in which to look,
5823 and a single key to search for. The key must be a non-empty string for the
5824 lookup to succeed. The lookup type determines how the file is searched.
5826 .cindex "query-style lookup" "definition of"
5827 The &'query-style'& type accepts a generalized database query. No particular
5828 key value is assumed by Exim for query-style lookups. You can use whichever
5829 Exim variables you need to construct the database query.
5832 The code for each lookup type is in a separate source file that is included in
5833 the binary of Exim only if the corresponding compile-time option is set. The
5834 default settings in &_src/EDITME_& are:
5839 which means that only linear searching and DBM lookups are included by default.
5840 For some types of lookup (e.g. SQL databases), you need to install appropriate
5841 libraries and header files before building Exim.
5846 .section "Single-key lookup types" "SECTsinglekeylookups"
5847 .cindex "lookup" "single-key types"
5848 .cindex "single-key lookup" "list of types"
5849 The following single-key lookup types are implemented:
5852 .cindex "cdb" "description of"
5853 .cindex "lookup" "cdb"
5854 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5855 &(cdb)&: The given file is searched as a Constant DataBase file, using the key
5856 string without a terminating binary zero. The cdb format is designed for
5857 indexed files that are read frequently and never updated, except by total
5858 re-creation. As such, it is particulary suitable for large files containing
5859 aliases or other indexed data referenced by an MTA. Information about cdb can
5860 be found in several places:
5862 &url(http://www.pobox.com/~djb/cdb.html)
5863 &url(ftp://ftp.corpit.ru/pub/tinycdb/)
5864 &url(http://packages.debian.org/stable/utils/freecdb.html)
5866 A cdb distribution is not needed in order to build Exim with cdb support,
5867 because the code for reading cdb files is included directly in Exim itself.
5868 However, no means of building or testing cdb files is provided with Exim, so
5869 you need to obtain a cdb distribution in order to do this.
5871 .cindex "DBM" "lookup type"
5872 .cindex "lookup" "dbm"
5873 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5874 &(dbm)&: Calls to DBM library functions are used to extract data from the given
5875 DBM file by looking up the record with the given key. A terminating binary
5876 zero is included in the key that is passed to the DBM library. See section
5877 &<<SECTdb>>& for a discussion of DBM libraries.
5879 .cindex "Berkeley DB library" "file format"
5880 For all versions of Berkeley DB, Exim uses the DB_HASH style of database
5881 when building DBM files using the &%exim_dbmbuild%& utility. However, when
5882 using Berkeley DB versions 3 or 4, it opens existing databases for reading with
5883 the DB_UNKNOWN option. This enables it to handle any of the types of database
5884 that the library supports, and can be useful for accessing DBM files created by
5885 other applications. (For earlier DB versions, DB_HASH is always used.)
5887 .cindex "lookup" "dbmnz"
5888 .cindex "lookup" "dbm &-- terminating zero"
5889 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5891 .cindex "&_/etc/userdbshadow.dat_&"
5892 .cindex "dmbnz lookup type"
5893 &(dbmnz)&: This is the same as &(dbm)&, except that a terminating binary zero
5894 is not included in the key that is passed to the DBM library. You may need this
5895 if you want to look up data in files that are created by or shared with some
5896 other application that does not use terminating zeros. For example, you need to
5897 use &(dbmnz)& rather than &(dbm)& if you want to authenticate incoming SMTP
5898 calls using the passwords from Courier's &_/etc/userdbshadow.dat_& file. Exim's
5899 utility program for creating DBM files (&'exim_dbmbuild'&) includes the zeros
5900 by default, but has an option to omit them (see section &<<SECTdbmbuild>>&).
5902 .cindex "lookup" "dsearch"
5903 .cindex "dsearch lookup type"
5904 &(dsearch)&: The given file must be a directory; this is searched for a file
5905 whose name is the key. The key may not contain any forward slash characters.
5906 The result of a successful lookup is the name of the file. An example of how
5907 this lookup can be used to support virtual domains is given in section
5908 &<<SECTvirtualdomains>>&.
5910 .cindex "lookup" "iplsearch"
5911 .cindex "iplsearch lookup type"
5912 &(iplsearch)&: The given file is a text file containing keys and data. A key is
5913 terminated by a colon or white space or the end of the line. The keys in the
5914 file must be IP addresses, or IP addresses with CIDR masks. Keys that involve
5915 IPv6 addresses must be enclosed in quotes to prevent the first internal colon
5916 being interpreted as a key terminator. For example:
5918 1.2.3.4: data for 1.2.3.4
5919 192.168.0.0/16 data for 192.168.0.0/16
5920 "abcd::cdab": data for abcd::cdab
5921 "abcd:abcd::/32" data for abcd:abcd::/32
5923 The key for an &(iplsearch)& lookup must be an IP address (without a mask). The
5924 file is searched linearly, using the CIDR masks where present, until a matching
5925 key is found. The first key that matches is used; there is no attempt to find a
5926 &"best"& match. Apart from the way the keys are matched, the processing for
5927 &(iplsearch)& is the same as for &(lsearch)&.
5929 &*Warning 1*&: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of data for
5930 &(iplsearch)& can &'not'& be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because those
5931 lookup types support only literal keys.
5933 &*Warning 2*&: In a host list, you must always use &(net-iplsearch)& so that
5934 the implicit key is the host's IP address rather than its name (see section
5935 &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&).
5938 .cindex "linear search"
5939 .cindex "lookup" "lsearch"
5940 .cindex "lsearch lookup type"
5941 &(lsearch)&: The given file is a text file that is searched linearly for a
5942 line beginning with the search key, terminated by a colon or white space or the
5943 end of the line. The first occurrence that is found in the file is used. White
5944 space between the key and the colon is permitted. The remainder of the line,
5945 with leading and trailing white space removed, is the data. This can be
5946 continued onto subsequent lines by starting them with any amount of white
5947 space, but only a single space character is included in the data at such a
5948 junction. If the data begins with a colon, the key must be terminated by a
5953 Empty lines and lines beginning with # are ignored, even if they occur in the
5954 middle of an item. This is the traditional textual format of alias files. Note
5955 that the keys in an &(lsearch)& file are literal strings. There is no
5956 wildcarding of any kind.
5958 .cindex "lookup" "lsearch &-- colons in keys"
5959 .cindex "white space" "in lsearch key"
5960 In most &(lsearch)& files, keys are not required to contain colons or #
5961 characters, or white space. However, if you need this feature, it is available.
5962 If a key begins with a doublequote character, it is terminated only by a
5963 matching quote (or end of line), and the normal escaping rules apply to its
5964 contents (see section &<<SECTstrings>>&). An optional colon is permitted after
5965 quoted keys (exactly as for unquoted keys). There is no special handling of
5966 quotes for the data part of an &(lsearch)& line.
5969 .cindex "NIS lookup type"
5970 .cindex "lookup" "NIS"
5971 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5972 &(nis)&: The given file is the name of a NIS map, and a NIS lookup is done with
5973 the given key, without a terminating binary zero. There is a variant called
5974 &(nis0)& which does include the terminating binary zero in the key. This is
5975 reportedly needed for Sun-style alias files. Exim does not recognize NIS
5976 aliases; the full map names must be used.
5979 .cindex "wildlsearch lookup type"
5980 .cindex "lookup" "wildlsearch"
5981 .cindex "nwildlsearch lookup type"
5982 .cindex "lookup" "nwildlsearch"
5983 &(wildlsearch)& or &(nwildlsearch)&: These search a file linearly, like
5984 &(lsearch)&, but instead of being interpreted as a literal string, each key in
5985 the file may be wildcarded. The difference between these two lookup types is
5986 that for &(wildlsearch)&, each key in the file is string-expanded before being
5987 used, whereas for &(nwildlsearch)&, no expansion takes place.
5989 Like &(lsearch)&, the testing is done case-insensitively. The following forms
5990 of wildcard are recognized:
5992 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
5993 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
5996 The string may begin with an asterisk to mean &"ends with"&. For example:
5998 *.a.b.c data for anything.a.b.c
5999 *fish data for anythingfish
6002 The string may begin with a circumflex to indicate a regular expression. For
6003 example, for &(wildlsearch)&:
6005 ^\N\d+\.a\.b\N data for <digits>.a.b
6007 Note the use of &`\N`& to disable expansion of the contents of the regular
6008 expression. If you are using &(nwildlsearch)&, where the keys are not
6009 string-expanded, the equivalent entry is:
6011 ^\d+\.a\.b data for <digits>.a.b
6013 If the regular expression contains white space or colon characters, you must
6014 either quote it (see &(lsearch)& above), or represent these characters in other
6015 ways. For example, &`\s`& can be used for white space and &`\x3A`& for a
6016 colon. This may be easier than quoting, because if you quote, you have to
6017 escape all the backslashes inside the quotes.
6019 &*Note*&: It is not possible to capture substrings in a regular expression
6020 match for later use, because the results of all lookups are cached. If a lookup
6021 is repeated, the result is taken from the cache, and no actual pattern matching
6022 takes place. The values of all the numeric variables are unset after a
6023 &((n)wildlsearch)& match.
6026 Although I cannot see it being of much use, the general matching function that
6027 is used to implement &((n)wildlsearch)& means that the string may begin with a
6028 lookup name terminated by a semicolon, and followed by lookup data. For
6031 cdb;/some/file data for keys that match the file
6033 The data that is obtained from the nested lookup is discarded.
6036 Keys that do not match any of these patterns are interpreted literally. The
6037 continuation rules for the data are the same as for &(lsearch)&, and keys may
6038 be followed by optional colons.
6040 &*Warning*&: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of data for
6041 &((n)wildlsearch)& can &'not'& be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because those
6042 lookup types support only literal keys.
6046 .section "Query-style lookup types"
6047 .cindex "lookup" "query-style types"
6048 .cindex "query-style lookup" "list of types"
6049 The supported query-style lookup types are listed below. Further details about
6050 many of them are given in later sections.
6053 .cindex "DNS" "as a lookup type"
6054 .cindex "lookup" "DNS"
6055 &(dnsdb)&: This does a DNS search for one or more records whose domain names
6056 are given in the supplied query. The resulting data is the contents of the
6057 records. See section &<<SECTdnsdb>>&.
6059 .cindex "Interbase lookup type"
6060 .cindex "lookup" "Interbase"
6061 &(ibase)&: This does a lookup in an Interbase database.
6063 .cindex "LDAP" "lookup type"
6064 .cindex "lookup" "LDAP"
6065 &(ldap)&: This does an LDAP lookup using a query in the form of a URL, and
6066 returns attributes from a single entry. There is a variant called &(ldapm)&
6067 that permits values from multiple entries to be returned. A third variant
6068 called &(ldapdn)& returns the Distinguished Name of a single entry instead of
6069 any attribute values. See section &<<SECTldap>>&.
6071 .cindex "MySQL" "lookup type"
6072 .cindex "lookup" "MySQL"
6073 &(mysql)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a
6074 MySQL database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6076 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type"
6077 .cindex "lookup" "NIS+"
6078 &(nisplus)&: This does a NIS+ lookup using a query that can specify the name of
6079 the field to be returned. See section &<<SECTnisplus>>&.
6081 .cindex "Oracle" "lookup type"
6082 .cindex "lookup" "Oracle"
6083 &(oracle)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to an
6084 Oracle database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6086 .cindex "lookup" "passwd"
6087 .cindex "passwd lookup type"
6088 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&"
6089 &(passwd)& is a query-style lookup with queries that are just user names. The
6090 lookup calls &[getpwnam()]& to interrogate the system password data, and on
6091 success, the result string is the same as you would get from an &(lsearch)&
6092 lookup on a traditional &_/etc/passwd file_&, though with &`*`& for the
6093 password value. For example:
6095 *:42:42:King Rat:/home/kr:/bin/bash
6098 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type"
6099 .cindex "lookup" "PostgreSQL"
6100 &(pgsql)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a
6101 PostgreSQL database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6104 .cindex "sqlite lookup type"
6105 .cindex "lookup" "sqlite"
6106 &(sqlite)&: The format of the query is a file name followed by an SQL statement
6107 that is passed to an SQLite database. See section &<<SECTsqlite>>&.
6110 &(testdb)&: This is a lookup type that is used for testing Exim. It is
6111 not likely to be useful in normal operation.
6113 .cindex "whoson lookup type"
6114 .cindex "lookup" "whoson"
6115 &(whoson)&: &'Whoson'& (&url(http://whoson.sourceforge.net)) is a proposed
6116 Internet protocol that allows Internet server programs to check whether a
6117 particular (dynamically allocated) IP address is currently allocated to a known
6118 (trusted) user and, optionally, to obtain the identity of the said user. In
6119 Exim, this can be used to implement &"POP before SMTP"& checking using ACL
6122 require condition = \
6123 ${lookup whoson {$sender_host_address}{yes}{no}}
6125 The query consists of a single IP address. The value returned is the name of
6126 the authenticated user, which is stored in the variable &$value$&. However, in
6127 this example, the data in &$value$& is not used; the result of the lookup is
6128 one of the fixed strings &"yes"& or &"no"&.
6133 .section "Temporary errors in lookups"
6134 .cindex "lookup" "temporary error in"
6135 Lookup functions can return temporary error codes if the lookup cannot be
6136 completed. For example, an SQL or LDAP database might be unavailable. For this
6137 reason, it is not advisable to use a lookup that might do this for critical
6138 options such as a list of local domains.
6140 When a lookup cannot be completed in a router or transport, delivery
6141 of the message (to the relevant address) is deferred, as for any other
6142 temporary error. In other circumstances Exim may assume the lookup has failed,
6143 or may give up altogether.
6147 .section "Default values in single-key lookups" "SECTdefaultvaluelookups"
6148 .cindex "wildcard lookups"
6149 .cindex "lookup" "default values"
6150 .cindex "lookup" "wildcard"
6151 .cindex "lookup" "* added to type"
6152 .cindex "default" "in single-key lookups"
6153 In this context, a &"default value"& is a value specified by the administrator
6154 that is to be used if a lookup fails.
6156 If &"*"& is added to a single-key lookup type (for example, &%lsearch*%&)
6157 and the initial lookup fails, the key &"*"& is looked up in the file to
6158 provide a default value. See also the section on partial matching below.
6160 .cindex "*@ with single-key lookup"
6161 .cindex "lookup" "*@ added to type"
6162 .cindex "alias file" "per-domain default"
6163 Alternatively, if &"*@"& is added to a single-key lookup type (for example
6164 &%dbm*@%&) then, if the initial lookup fails and the key contains an @
6165 character, a second lookup is done with everything before the last @ replaced
6166 by *. This makes it possible to provide per-domain defaults in alias files
6167 that include the domains in the keys. If the second lookup fails (or doesn't
6168 take place because there is no @ in the key), &"*"& is looked up.
6169 For example, a &(redirect)& router might contain:
6171 data = ${lookup{$local_part@$domain}lsearch*@{/etc/mix-aliases}}
6173 Suppose the address that is being processed is &'jane@eyre.example'&. Exim
6174 looks up these keys, in this order:
6180 The data is taken from whichever key it finds first. &*Note*&: In an
6181 &(lsearch)& file, this does not mean the first of these keys in the file. A
6182 complete scan is done for each key, and only if it is not found at all does
6183 Exim move on to try the next key.
6187 .section "Partial matching in single-key lookups" "SECTpartiallookup"
6188 .cindex "partial matching"
6189 .cindex "wildcard lookups"
6190 .cindex "lookup" "partial matching"
6191 .cindex "lookup" "wildcard"
6192 .cindex "asterisk" "in search type"
6193 The normal operation of a single-key lookup is to search the file for an exact
6194 match with the given key. However, in a number of situations where domains are
6195 being looked up, it is useful to be able to do partial matching. In this case,
6196 information in the file that has a key starting with &"*."& is matched by any
6197 domain that ends with the components that follow the full stop. For example, if
6198 a key in a DBM file is
6200 *.dates.fict.example
6202 then when partial matching is enabled this is matched by (amongst others)
6203 &'2001.dates.fict.example'& and &'1984.dates.fict.example'&. It is also matched
6204 by &'dates.fict.example'&, if that does not appear as a separate key in the
6207 &*Note*&: Partial matching is not available for query-style lookups. It is
6208 also not available for any lookup items in address lists (see section
6209 &<<SECTaddresslist>>&).
6211 Partial matching is implemented by doing a series of separate lookups using
6212 keys constructed by modifying the original subject key. This means that it can
6213 be used with any of the single-key lookup types, provided that
6214 partial matching keys
6215 beginning with a special prefix (default &"*."&) are included in the data file.
6216 Keys in the file that do not begin with the prefix are matched only by
6217 unmodified subject keys when partial matching is in use.
6219 Partial matching is requested by adding the string &"partial-"& to the front of
6220 the name of a single-key lookup type, for example, &%partial-dbm%&. When this
6221 is done, the subject key is first looked up unmodified; if that fails, &"*."&
6222 is added at the start of the subject key, and it is looked up again. If that
6223 fails, further lookups are tried with dot-separated components removed from the
6224 start of the subject key, one-by-one, and &"*."& added on the front of what
6227 A minimum number of two non-* components are required. This can be adjusted
6228 by including a number before the hyphen in the search type. For example,
6229 &%partial3-lsearch%& specifies a minimum of three non-* components in the
6230 modified keys. Omitting the number is equivalent to &"partial2-"&. If the
6231 subject key is &'2250.dates.fict.example'& then the following keys are looked
6232 up when the minimum number of non-* components is two:
6234 2250.dates.fict.example
6235 *.2250.dates.fict.example
6236 *.dates.fict.example
6239 As soon as one key in the sequence is successfully looked up, the lookup
6242 .cindex "lookup" "partial matching &-- changing prefix"
6243 .cindex "prefix" "for partial matching"
6244 The use of &"*."& as the partial matching prefix is a default that can be
6245 changed. The motivation for this feature is to allow Exim to operate with file
6246 formats that are used by other MTAs. A different prefix can be supplied in
6247 parentheses instead of the hyphen after &"partial"&. For example:
6249 domains = partial(.)lsearch;/some/file
6251 In this example, if the domain is &'a.b.c'&, the sequence of lookups is
6252 &`a.b.c`&, &`.a.b.c`&, and &`.b.c`& (the default minimum of 2 non-wild
6253 components is unchanged). The prefix may consist of any punctuation characters
6254 other than a closing parenthesis. It may be empty, for example:
6256 domains = partial1()cdb;/some/file
6258 For this example, if the domain is &'a.b.c'&, the sequence of lookups is
6259 &`a.b.c`&, &`b.c`&, and &`c`&.
6261 If &"partial0"& is specified, what happens at the end (when the lookup with
6262 just one non-wild component has failed, and the original key is shortened right
6263 down to the null string) depends on the prefix:
6266 If the prefix has zero length, the whole lookup fails.
6268 If the prefix has length 1, a lookup for just the prefix is done. For
6269 example, the final lookup for &"partial0(.)"& is for &`.`& alone.
6271 Otherwise, if the prefix ends in a dot, the dot is removed, and the
6272 remainder is looked up. With the default prefix, therefore, the final lookup is
6273 for &"*"& on its own.
6275 Otherwise, the whole prefix is looked up.
6279 If the search type ends in &"*"& or &"*@"& (see section
6280 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>& above), the search for an ultimate default that
6281 this implies happens after all partial lookups have failed. If &"partial0"& is
6282 specified, adding &"*"& to the search type has no effect with the default
6283 prefix, because the &"*"& key is already included in the sequence of partial
6284 lookups. However, there might be a use for lookup types such as
6285 &"partial0(.)lsearch*"&.
6287 The use of &"*"& in lookup partial matching differs from its use as a wildcard
6288 in domain lists and the like. Partial matching works only in terms of
6289 dot-separated components; a key such as &`*fict.example`&
6290 in a database file is useless, because the asterisk in a partial matching
6291 subject key is always followed by a dot.
6296 .section "Lookup caching"
6297 .cindex "lookup" "caching"
6298 .cindex "caching" "lookup data"
6299 Exim caches all lookup results in order to avoid needless repetition of
6300 lookups. However, because (apart from the daemon) Exim operates as a collection
6301 of independent, short-lived processes, this caching applies only within a
6302 single Exim process. There is no inter-process lookup caching facility.
6304 For single-key lookups, Exim keeps the relevant files open in case there is
6305 another lookup that needs them. In some types of configuration this can lead to
6306 many files being kept open for messages with many recipients. To avoid hitting
6307 the operating system limit on the number of simultaneously open files, Exim
6308 closes the least recently used file when it needs to open more files than its
6309 own internal limit, which can be changed via the &%lookup_open_max%& option.
6311 The single-key lookup files are closed and the lookup caches are flushed at
6312 strategic points during delivery &-- for example, after all routing is
6318 .section "Quoting lookup data"
6319 .cindex "lookup" "quoting"
6320 .cindex "quoting" "in lookups"
6321 When data from an incoming message is included in a query-style lookup, there
6322 is the possibility of special characters in the data messing up the syntax of
6323 the query. For example, a NIS+ query that contains
6327 will be broken if the local part happens to contain a closing square bracket.
6328 For NIS+, data can be enclosed in double quotes like this:
6330 [name="$local_part"]
6332 but this still leaves the problem of a double quote in the data. The rule for
6333 NIS+ is that double quotes must be doubled. Other lookup types have different
6334 rules, and to cope with the differing requirements, an expansion operator
6335 of the following form is provided:
6337 ${quote_<lookup-type>:<string>}
6339 For example, the safest way to write the NIS+ query is
6341 [name="${quote_nisplus:$local_part}"]
6343 See chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>& for full coverage of string expansions. The quote
6344 operator can be used for all lookup types, but has no effect for single-key
6345 lookups, since no quoting is ever needed in their key strings.
6350 .section "More about dnsdb" "SECTdnsdb"
6351 .cindex "dnsdb lookup"
6352 .cindex "lookup" "dnsdb"
6353 .cindex "DNS" "as a lookup type"
6354 The &(dnsdb)& lookup type uses the DNS as its database. A simple query consists
6355 of a record type and a domain name, separated by an equals sign. For example,
6356 an expansion string could contain:
6358 ${lookup dnsdb{mx=a.b.example}{$value}fail}
6360 If the lookup succeeds, the result is placed in &$value$&, which in this case
6361 is used on its own as the result. If the lookup succeeds, the &`fail`& keyword
6362 causes a &'forced expansion failure'& &-- see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>& for
6363 an explanation of what this means.
6365 The supported DNS record types are A, CNAME, MX, NS, PTR, SRV, and TXT, and,
6366 when Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, AAAA (and A6 if that is also
6367 configured). If no type is given, TXT is assumed. When the type is PTR,
6368 the data can be an IP address, written as normal; inversion and the addition of
6369 &%in-addr.arpa%& or &%ip6.arpa%& happens automatically. For example:
6371 ${lookup dnsdb{ptr=192.168.4.5}{$value}fail}
6373 If the data for a PTR record is not a syntactically valid IP address, it is not
6374 altered and nothing is added.
6376 .cindex "MX record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6377 .cindex "SRV record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6378 For an MX lookup, both the preference value and the host name are returned for
6379 each record, separated by a space. For an SRV lookup, the priority, weight,
6380 port, and host name are returned for each record, separated by spaces.
6382 For any record type, if multiple records are found (or, for A6 lookups, if a
6383 single record leads to multiple addresses), the data is returned as a
6384 concatenation, with newline as the default separator. The order, of course,
6385 depends on the DNS resolver. You can specify a different separator character
6386 between multiple records by putting a right angle-bracket followed immediately
6387 by the new separator at the start of the query. For example:
6389 ${lookup dnsdb{>: a=host1.example}}
6391 It is permitted to specify a space as the separator character. Further
6392 white space is ignored.
6394 .section "Pseudo dnsdb record types"
6395 .cindex "MX record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6396 By default, both the preference value and the host name are returned for
6397 each MX record, separated by a space. If you want only host names, you can use
6398 the pseudo-type MXH:
6400 ${lookup dnsdb{mxh=a.b.example}}
6402 In this case, the preference values are omitted, and just the host names are
6405 .cindex "name server" "for enclosing domain"
6406 Another pseudo-type is ZNS (for &"zone NS"&). It performs a lookup for NS
6407 records on the given domain, but if none are found, it removes the first
6408 component of the domain name, and tries again. This process continues until NS
6409 records are found or there are no more components left (or there is a DNS
6410 error). In other words, it may return the name servers for a top-level domain,
6411 but it never returns the root name servers. If there are no NS records for the
6412 top-level domain, the lookup fails. Consider these examples:
6414 ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.quercite.com}}
6415 ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.edu}}
6417 Assuming that in each case there are no NS records for the full domain name,
6418 the first returns the name servers for &%quercite.com%&, and the second returns
6419 the name servers for &%edu%&.
6421 You should be careful about how you use this lookup because, unless the
6422 top-level domain does not exist, the lookup always returns some host names. The
6423 sort of use to which this might be put is for seeing if the name servers for a
6424 given domain are on a blacklist. You can probably assume that the name servers
6425 for the high-level domains such as &%com%& or &%co.uk%& are not going to be on
6428 .cindex "CSA" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6429 A third pseudo-type is CSA (Client SMTP Authorization). This looks up SRV
6430 records according to the CSA rules, which are described in section
6431 &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&. Although &(dnsdb)& supports SRV lookups directly, this is
6432 not sufficient because of the extra parent domain search behaviour of CSA. The
6433 result of a successful lookup such as:
6435 ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}
6437 has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target host name.
6438 The authorization code can be &"Y"& for yes, &"N"& for no, &"X"& for explicit
6439 authorization required but absent, or &"?"& for unknown.
6442 .section "Multiple dnsdb lookups"
6443 In the previous sections, &(dnsdb)& lookups for a single domain are described.
6444 However, you can specify a list of domains or IP addresses in a single
6445 &(dnsdb)& lookup. The list is specified in the normal Exim way, with colon as
6446 the default separator, but with the ability to change this. For example:
6448 ${lookup dnsdb{one.domain.com:two.domain.com}}
6449 ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6450 ${lookup dnsdb{ptr = <; 1.2.3.4 ; 4.5.6.8}}
6452 In order to retain backwards compatibility, there is one special case: if
6453 the lookup type is PTR and no change of separator is specified, Exim looks
6454 to see if the rest of the string is precisely one IPv6 address. In this
6455 case, it does not treat it as a list.
6457 The data from each lookup is concatenated, with newline separators by default,
6458 in the same way that multiple DNS records for a single item are handled. A
6459 different separator can be specified, as described above.
6461 The &(dnsdb)& lookup fails only if all the DNS lookups fail. If there is a
6462 temporary DNS error for any of them, the behaviour is controlled by
6463 an optional keyword followed by a comma that may appear before the record
6464 type. The possible keywords are &"defer_strict"&, &"defer_never"&, and
6465 &"defer_lax"&. With &"strict"& behaviour, any temporary DNS error causes the
6466 whole lookup to defer. With &"never"& behaviour, a temporary DNS error is
6467 ignored, and the behaviour is as if the DNS lookup failed to find anything.
6468 With &"lax"& behaviour, all the queries are attempted, but a temporary DNS
6469 error causes the whole lookup to defer only if none of the other lookups
6470 succeed. The default is &"lax"&, so the following lookups are equivalent:
6472 ${lookup dnsdb{defer_lax,a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6473 ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6475 Thus, in the default case, as long as at least one of the DNS lookups
6476 yields some data, the lookup succeeds.
6481 .section "More about LDAP" "SECTldap"
6482 .cindex "LDAP lookup"
6483 .cindex "lookup" "LDAP"
6484 .cindex "Solaris" "LDAP"
6485 The original LDAP implementation came from the University of Michigan; this has
6486 become &"Open LDAP"&, and there are now two different releases. Another
6487 implementation comes from Netscape, and Solaris 7 and subsequent releases
6488 contain inbuilt LDAP support. Unfortunately, though these are all compatible at
6489 the lookup function level, their error handling is different. For this reason
6490 it is necessary to set a compile-time variable when building Exim with LDAP, to
6491 indicate which LDAP library is in use. One of the following should appear in
6492 your &_Local/Makefile_&:
6494 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=UMICHIGAN
6495 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP1
6496 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP2
6497 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=NETSCAPE
6498 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=SOLARIS
6500 If LDAP_LIB_TYPE is not set, Exim assumes &`OPENLDAP1`&, which has the
6501 same interface as the University of Michigan version.
6503 There are three LDAP lookup types in Exim. These behave slightly differently in
6504 the way they handle the results of a query:
6507 &(ldap)& requires the result to contain just one entry; if there are more, it
6510 &(ldapdn)& also requires the result to contain just one entry, but it is the
6511 Distinguished Name that is returned rather than any attribute values.
6513 &(ldapm)& permits the result to contain more than one entry; the attributes
6514 from all of them are returned.
6518 For &(ldap)& and &(ldapm)&, if a query finds only entries with no attributes,
6519 Exim behaves as if the entry did not exist, and the lookup fails. The format of
6520 the data returned by a successful lookup is described in the next section.
6521 First we explain how LDAP queries are coded.
6524 .section "Format of LDAP queries" "SECTforldaque"
6525 .cindex "LDAP" "query format"
6526 An LDAP query takes the form of a URL as defined in RFC 2255. For example, in
6527 the configuration of a &(redirect)& router one might have this setting:
6529 data = ${lookup ldap \
6530 {ldap:///cn=$local_part,o=University%20of%20Cambridge,\
6531 c=UK?mailbox?base?}}
6533 .cindex "LDAP" "with TLS"
6534 The URL may begin with &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`& if your LDAP library supports
6535 secure (encrypted) LDAP connections. The second of these ensures that an
6536 encrypted TLS connection is used.
6539 .section "LDAP quoting"
6540 .cindex "LDAP" "quoting"
6541 Two levels of quoting are required in LDAP queries, the first for LDAP itself
6542 and the second because the LDAP query is represented as a URL. Furthermore,
6543 within an LDAP query, two different kinds of quoting are required. For this
6544 reason, there are two different LDAP-specific quoting operators.
6546 The &%quote_ldap%& operator is designed for use on strings that are part of
6547 filter specifications. Conceptually, it first does the following conversions on
6555 in accordance with RFC 2254. The resulting string is then quoted according
6556 to the rules for URLs, that is, all non-alphanumeric characters except
6560 are converted to their hex values, preceded by a percent sign. For example:
6562 ${quote_ldap: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }
6566 %20a%5C28bc%5C29%5C2A%2C%20a%3Cyz%3E%3B%20
6568 Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a leading and a trailing space):
6570 a\28bc\29\2A, a<yz>;
6572 The &%quote_ldap_dn%& operator is designed for use on strings that are part of
6573 base DN specifications in queries. Conceptually, it first converts the string
6574 by inserting a backslash in front of any of the following characters:
6578 It also inserts a backslash before any leading spaces or # characters, and
6579 before any trailing spaces. (These rules are in RFC 2253.) The resulting string
6580 is then quoted according to the rules for URLs. For example:
6582 ${quote_ldap_dn: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }
6586 %5C%20a(bc)*%5C%2C%20a%5C%3Cyz%5C%3E%5C%3B%5C%20
6588 Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a trailing space):
6590 \ a(bc)*\, a\<yz\>\;\
6592 There are some further comments about quoting in the section on LDAP
6593 authentication below.
6596 .section "LDAP connections"
6597 .cindex "LDAP" "connections"
6598 The connection to an LDAP server may either be over TCP/IP, or, when OpenLDAP
6599 is in use, via a Unix domain socket. The example given above does not specify
6600 an LDAP server. A server that is reached by TCP/IP can be specified in a query
6603 ldap://<hostname>:<port>/...
6605 If the port (and preceding colon) are omitted, the standard LDAP port (389) is
6606 used. When no server is specified in a query, a list of default servers is
6607 taken from the &%ldap_default_servers%& configuration option. This supplies a
6608 colon-separated list of servers which are tried in turn until one successfully
6609 handles a query, or there is a serious error. Successful handling either
6610 returns the requested data, or indicates that it does not exist. Serious errors
6611 are syntactical, or multiple values when only a single value is expected.
6612 Errors which cause the next server to be tried are connection failures, bind
6613 failures, and timeouts.
6615 For each server name in the list, a port number can be given. The standard way
6616 of specifing a host and port is to use a colon separator (RFC 1738). Because
6617 &%ldap_default_servers%& is a colon-separated list, such colons have to be
6618 doubled. For example
6620 ldap_default_servers = ldap1.example.com::145:ldap2.example.com
6622 If &%ldap_default_servers%& is unset, a URL with no server name is passed
6623 to the LDAP library with no server name, and the library's default (normally
6624 the local host) is used.
6626 If you are using the OpenLDAP library, you can connect to an LDAP server using
6627 a Unix domain socket instead of a TCP/IP connection. This is specified by using
6628 &`ldapi`& instead of &`ldap`& in LDAP queries. What follows here applies only
6629 to OpenLDAP. If Exim is compiled with a different LDAP library, this feature is
6632 For this type of connection, instead of a host name for the server, a pathname
6633 for the socket is required, and the port number is not relevant. The pathname
6634 can be specified either as an item in &%ldap_default_servers%&, or inline in
6635 the query. In the former case, you can have settings such as
6637 ldap_default_servers = /tmp/ldap.sock : backup.ldap.your.domain
6639 When the pathname is given in the query, you have to escape the slashes as
6640 &`%2F`& to fit in with the LDAP URL syntax. For example:
6642 ${lookup ldap {ldapi://%2Ftmp%2Fldap.sock/o=...
6644 When Exim processes an LDAP lookup and finds that the &"hostname"& is really
6645 a pathname, it uses the Unix domain socket code, even if the query actually
6646 specifies &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`&. In particular, no encryption is used for a
6647 socket connection. This behaviour means that you can use a setting of
6648 &%ldap_default_servers%& such as in the example above with traditional &`ldap`&
6649 or &`ldaps`& queries, and it will work. First, Exim tries a connection via
6650 the Unix domain socket; if that fails, it tries a TCP/IP connection to the
6653 If an explicit &`ldapi`& type is given in a query when a host name is
6654 specified, an error is diagnosed. However, if there are more items in
6655 &%ldap_default_servers%&, they are tried. In other words:
6658 Using a pathname with &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`& forces the use of the Unix domain
6661 Using &`ldapi`& with a host name causes an error.
6665 Using &`ldapi`& with no host or path in the query, and no setting of
6666 &%ldap_default_servers%&, does whatever the library does by default.
6670 .section "LDAP authentication and control information"
6671 .cindex "LDAP" "authentication"
6672 The LDAP URL syntax provides no way of passing authentication and other control
6673 information to the server. To make this possible, the URL in an LDAP query may
6674 be preceded by any number of <&'name'&>=<&'value'&> settings, separated by
6675 spaces. If a value contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes, and
6676 when double quotes are used, backslash is interpreted in the usual way inside
6677 them. The following names are recognized:
6679 &`DEREFERENCE`& set the dereferencing parameter
6680 &`NETTIME `& set a timeout for a network operation
6681 &`USER `& set the DN, for authenticating the LDAP bind
6682 &`PASS `& set the password, likewise
6683 &`SIZE `& set the limit for the number of entries returned
6684 &`TIME `& set the maximum waiting time for a query
6686 The value of the DEREFERENCE parameter must be one of the words &"never"&,
6687 &"searching"&, &"finding"&, or &"always"&.
6689 The name CONNECT is an obsolete name for NETTIME, retained for
6690 backwards compatibility. This timeout (specified as a number of seconds) is
6691 enforced from the client end for operations that can be carried out over a
6692 network. Specifically, it applies to network connections and calls to the
6693 &'ldap_result()'& function. If the value is greater than zero, it is used if
6694 LDAP_OPT_NETWORK_TIMEOUT is defined in the LDAP headers (OpenLDAP), or
6695 if LDAP_X_OPT_CONNECT_TIMEOUT is defined in the LDAP headers (Netscape
6696 SDK 4.1). A value of zero forces an explicit setting of &"no timeout"& for
6697 Netscape SDK; for OpenLDAP no action is taken.
6699 The TIME parameter (also a number of seconds) is passed to the server to
6700 set a server-side limit on the time taken to complete a search.
6703 Here is an example of an LDAP query in an Exim lookup that uses some of these
6704 values. This is a single line, folded to fit on the page:
6707 {user="cn=manager,o=University of Cambridge,c=UK" pass=secret
6708 ldap:///o=University%20of%20Cambridge,c=UK?sn?sub?(cn=foo)}
6711 The encoding of spaces as &`%20`& is a URL thing which should not be done for
6712 any of the auxiliary data. Exim configuration settings that include lookups
6713 which contain password information should be preceded by &"hide"& to prevent
6714 non-admin users from using the &%-bP%& option to see their values.
6716 The auxiliary data items may be given in any order. The default is no
6717 connection timeout (the system timeout is used), no user or password, no limit
6718 on the number of entries returned, and no time limit on queries.
6720 When a DN is quoted in the USER= setting for LDAP authentication, Exim
6721 removes any URL quoting that it may contain before passing it LDAP. Apparently
6722 some libraries do this for themselves, but some do not. Removing the URL
6723 quoting has two advantages:
6726 It makes it possible to use the same &%quote_ldap_dn%& expansion for USER=
6727 DNs as with DNs inside actual queries.
6729 It permits spaces inside USER= DNs.
6732 For example, a setting such as
6734 USER=cn=${quote_ldap_dn:$1}
6736 should work even if &$1$& contains spaces.
6738 Expanded data for the PASS= value should be quoted using the &%quote%&
6739 expansion operator, rather than the LDAP quote operators. The only reason this
6740 field needs quoting is to ensure that it conforms to the Exim syntax, which
6741 does not allow unquoted spaces. For example:
6745 The LDAP authentication mechanism can be used to check passwords as part of
6746 SMTP authentication. See the &%ldapauth%& expansion string condition in chapter
6751 .section "Format of data returned by LDAP"
6752 .cindex "LDAP" "returned data formats"
6753 The &(ldapdn)& lookup type returns the Distinguished Name from a single entry
6754 as a sequence of values, for example
6756 cn=manager, o=University of Cambridge, c=UK
6758 The &(ldap)& lookup type generates an error if more than one entry matches the
6759 search filter, whereas &(ldapm)& permits this case, and inserts a newline in
6760 the result between the data from different entries. It is possible for multiple
6761 values to be returned for both &(ldap)& and &(ldapm)&, but in the former case
6762 you know that whatever values are returned all came from a single entry in the
6765 In the common case where you specify a single attribute in your LDAP query, the
6766 result is not quoted, and does not contain the attribute name. If the attribute
6767 has multiple values, they are separated by commas.
6769 If you specify multiple attributes, the result contains space-separated, quoted
6770 strings, each preceded by the attribute name and an equals sign. Within the
6771 quotes, the quote character, backslash, and newline are escaped with
6772 backslashes, and commas are used to separate multiple values for the attribute.
6773 Apart from the escaping, the string within quotes takes the same form as the
6774 output when a single attribute is requested. Specifying no attributes is the
6775 same as specifying all of an entry's attributes.
6777 Here are some examples of the output format. The first line of each pair is an
6778 LDAP query, and the second is the data that is returned. The attribute called
6779 &%attr1%& has two values, whereas &%attr2%& has only one value:
6781 ldap:///o=base?attr1?sub?(uid=fred)
6784 ldap:///o=base?attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
6787 ldap:///o=base?attr1,attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
6788 attr1="value1.1, value1.2" attr2="value two"
6790 ldap:///o=base??sub?(uid=fred)
6791 objectClass="top" attr1="value1.1, value1.2" attr2="value two"
6793 The &%extract%& operator in string expansions can be used to pick out
6794 individual fields from data that consists of &'key'&=&'value'& pairs. You can
6795 make use of Exim's &%-be%& option to run expansion tests and thereby check the
6796 results of LDAP lookups.
6801 .section "More about NIS+" "SECTnisplus"
6802 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type"
6803 .cindex "lookup" "NIS+"
6804 NIS+ queries consist of a NIS+ &'indexed name'& followed by an optional colon
6805 and field name. If this is given, the result of a successful query is the
6806 contents of the named field; otherwise the result consists of a concatenation
6807 of &'field-name=field-value'& pairs, separated by spaces. Empty values and
6808 values containing spaces are quoted. For example, the query
6810 [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir
6812 might return the string
6814 name=mg1456 passwd="" uid=999 gid=999 gcos="Martin Guerre"
6815 home=/home/mg1456 shell=/bin/bash shadow=""
6817 (split over two lines here to fit on the page), whereas
6819 [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir:gcos
6825 with no quotes. A NIS+ lookup fails if NIS+ returns more than one table entry
6826 for the given indexed key. The effect of the &%quote_nisplus%& expansion
6827 operator is to double any quote characters within the text.
6831 .section "SQL lookups" "SECTsql"
6832 .cindex "SQL lookup types"
6833 Exim can support lookups in Interbase, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, and SQLite
6834 databases. Queries for these databases contain SQL statements, so an example
6837 ${lookup mysql{select mailbox from users where id='userx'}\
6840 If the result of the query contains more than one field, the data for each
6841 field in the row is returned, preceded by its name, so the result of
6843 ${lookup pgsql{select home,name from users where id='userx'}\
6848 home=/home/userx name="Mister X"
6850 Empty values and values containing spaces are double quoted, with embedded
6851 quotes escaped by a backslash. If the result of the query contains just one
6852 field, the value is passed back verbatim, without a field name, for example:
6856 If the result of the query yields more than one row, it is all concatenated,
6857 with a newline between the data for each row.
6860 .section "More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Interbase"
6861 .cindex "MySQL" "lookup type"
6862 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type"
6863 .cindex "lookup" "MySQL"
6864 .cindex "lookup" "PostgreSQL"
6865 .cindex "Oracle" "lookup type"
6866 .cindex "lookup" "Oracle"
6867 .cindex "Interbase lookup type"
6868 .cindex "lookup" "Interbase"
6869 If any MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, or Interbase lookups are used, the
6870 &%mysql_servers%&, &%pgsql_servers%&, &%oracle_servers%&, or &%ibase_servers%&
6871 option (as appropriate) must be set to a colon-separated list of server
6872 information. Each item in the list is a slash-separated list of four items:
6873 host name, database name, user name, and password. In the case of Oracle, the
6874 host name field is used for the &"service name"&, and the database name field
6875 is not used and should be empty. For example:
6877 hide oracle_servers = oracle.plc.example//userx/abcdwxyz
6879 Because password data is sensitive, you should always precede the setting with
6880 &"hide"&, to prevent non-admin users from obtaining the setting via the &%-bP%&
6881 option. Here is an example where two MySQL servers are listed:
6883 hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/root/secret:\
6884 otherhost/users/root/othersecret
6886 For MySQL and PostgreSQL, a host may be specified as <&'name'&>:<&'port'&> but
6887 because this is a colon-separated list, the colon has to be doubled. For each
6888 query, these parameter groups are tried in order until a connection and a query
6891 The &%quote_mysql%&, &%quote_pgsql%&, and &%quote_oracle%& expansion operators
6892 convert newline, tab, carriage return, and backspace to \n, \t, \r, and \b
6893 respectively, and the characters single-quote, double-quote, and backslash
6894 itself are escaped with backslashes. The &%quote_pgsql%& expansion operator, in
6895 addition, escapes the percent and underscore characters. This cannot be done
6896 for MySQL because these escapes are not recognized in contexts where these
6897 characters are not special.
6900 .section "Special MySQL features"
6901 For MySQL, an empty host name or the use of &"localhost"& in &%mysql_servers%&
6902 causes a connection to the server on the local host by means of a Unix domain
6903 socket. An alternate socket can be specified in parentheses. The full syntax of
6904 each item in &%mysql_servers%& is:
6906 <&'hostname'&>::<&'port'&>(<&'socket name'&>)/<&'database'&>/&&&
6907 <&'user'&>/<&'password'&>
6909 Any of the three sub-parts of the first field can be omitted. For normal use on
6910 the local host it can be left blank or set to just &"localhost"&.
6912 No database need be supplied &-- but if it is absent here, it must be given in
6915 If a MySQL query is issued that does not request any data (an insert, update,
6916 or delete command), the result of the lookup is the number of rows affected.
6918 &*Warning*&: This can be misleading. If an update does not actually change
6919 anything (for example, setting a field to the value it already has), the result
6920 is zero because no rows are affected.
6923 .section "Special PostgreSQL features"
6924 PostgreSQL lookups can also use Unix domain socket connections to the database.
6925 This is usually faster and costs less CPU time than a TCP/IP connection.
6926 However it can be used only if the mail server runs on the same machine as the
6927 database server. A configuration line for PostgreSQL via Unix domain sockets
6930 hide pgsql_servers = (/tmp/.s.PGSQL.5432)/db/user/password : ...
6932 In other words, instead of supplying a host name, a path to the socket is
6933 given. The path name is enclosed in parentheses so that its slashes aren't
6934 visually confused with the delimiters for the other server parameters.
6936 If a PostgreSQL query is issued that does not request any data (an insert,
6937 update, or delete command), the result of the lookup is the number of rows
6940 .section "More about SQLite" "SECTsqlite"
6941 .cindex "lookup" "SQLite"
6942 .cindex "SQLite lookup type"
6943 SQLite is different to the other SQL lookups because a file name is required in
6944 addition to the SQL query. An SQLite database is a single file, and there is no
6945 daemon as in the other SQL databases. The interface to Exim requires the name
6946 of the file, as an absolute path, to be given at the start of the query. It is
6947 separated from the query by white space. This means that the path name cannot
6948 contain white space. Here is a lookup expansion example:
6950 ${lookup sqlite {/some/thing/sqlitedb \
6951 select name from aliases where id='userx';}}
6953 In a list, the syntax is similar. For example:
6955 domainlist relay_domains = sqlite;/some/thing/sqlitedb \
6956 select * from relays where ip='$sender_host_address';
6958 The only character affected by the &%quote_sqlite%& operator is a single
6959 quote, which it doubles.
6961 The SQLite library handles multiple simultaneous accesses to the database
6962 internally. Multiple readers are permitted, but only one process can
6963 update at once. Attempts to access the database while it is being updated
6964 are rejected after a timeout period, during which the SQLite library
6965 waits for the lock to be released. In Exim, the default timeout is set
6966 to 5 seconds, but it can be changed by means of the &%sqlite_lock_timeout%&
6972 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
6973 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
6975 .chapter "Domain, host, address, and local part lists" &&&
6976 "CHAPdomhosaddlists" &&&
6977 "Domain, host, and address lists"
6978 .scindex IIDdohoadli "lists of domains; hosts; etc."
6979 A number of Exim configuration options contain lists of domains, hosts,
6980 email addresses, or local parts. For example, the &%hold_domains%& option
6981 contains a list of domains whose delivery is currently suspended. These lists
6982 are also used as data in ACL statements (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), and as
6983 arguments to expansion conditions such as &%match_domain%&.
6985 Each item in one of these lists is a pattern to be matched against a domain,
6986 host, email address, or local part, respectively. In the sections below, the
6987 different types of pattern for each case are described, but first we cover some
6988 general facilities that apply to all four kinds of list.
6992 .section "Expansion of lists"
6993 .cindex "expansion" "of lists"
6994 Each list is expanded as a single string before it is used. The result of
6995 expansion must be a list, possibly containing empty items, which is split up
6996 into separate items for matching. By default, colon is the separator character,
6997 but this can be varied if necessary. See sections &<<SECTlistconstruct>>& and
6998 &<<SECTempitelis>>& for details of the list syntax; the second of these
6999 discusses the way to specify empty list items.
7002 If the string expansion is forced to fail, Exim behaves as if the item it is
7003 testing (domain, host, address, or local part) is not in the list. Other
7004 expansion failures cause temporary errors.
7006 If an item in a list is a regular expression, backslashes, dollars and possibly
7007 other special characters in the expression must be protected against
7008 misinterpretation by the string expander. The easiest way to do this is to use
7009 the &`\N`& expansion feature to indicate that the contents of the regular
7010 expression should not be expanded. For example, in an ACL you might have:
7012 deny senders = \N^\d{8}\w@.*\.baddomain\.example$\N : \
7013 ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/badsenders/bydomain}}
7015 The first item is a regular expression that is protected from expansion by
7016 &`\N`&, whereas the second uses the expansion to obtain a list of unwanted
7017 senders based on the receiving domain.
7022 .section "Negated items in lists"
7023 .cindex "list" "negation"
7024 .cindex "negation" "in lists"
7025 Items in a list may be positive or negative. Negative items are indicated by a
7026 leading exclamation mark, which may be followed by optional white space. A list
7027 defines a set of items (domains, etc). When Exim processes one of these lists,
7028 it is trying to find out whether a domain, host, address, or local part
7029 (respectively) is in the set that is defined by the list. It works like this:
7031 The list is scanned from left to right. If a positive item is matched, the
7032 subject that is being checked is in the set; if a negative item is matched, the
7033 subject is not in the set. If the end of the list is reached without the
7034 subject having matched any of the patterns, it is in the set if the last item
7035 was a negative one, but not if it was a positive one. For example, the list in
7037 domainlist relay_domains = !a.b.c : *.b.c
7039 matches any domain ending in &'.b.c'& except for &'a.b.c'&. Domains that match
7040 neither &'a.b.c'& nor &'*.b.c'& do not match, because the last item in the
7041 list is positive. However, if the setting were
7043 domainlist relay_domains = !a.b.c
7045 then all domains other than &'a.b.c'& would match because the last item in the
7046 list is negative. In other words, a list that ends with a negative item behaves
7047 as if it had an extra item &`:*`& on the end.
7049 Another way of thinking about positive and negative items in lists is to read
7050 the connector as &"or"& after a positive item and as &"and"& after a negative
7055 .section "File names in lists" "SECTfilnamlis"
7056 .cindex "list" "file name in"
7057 If an item in a domain, host, address, or local part list is an absolute file
7058 name (beginning with a slash character), each line of the file is read and
7059 processed as if it were an independent item in the list, except that further
7060 file names are not allowed,
7061 and no expansion of the data from the file takes place.
7062 Empty lines in the file are ignored, and the file may also contain comment
7066 For domain and host lists, if a # character appears anywhere in a line of the
7067 file, it and all following characters are ignored.
7069 Because local parts may legitimately contain # characters, a comment in an
7070 address list or local part list file is recognized only if # is preceded by
7071 white space or the start of the line. For example:
7073 not#comment@x.y.z # but this is a comment
7077 Putting a file name in a list has the same effect as inserting each line of the
7078 file as an item in the list (blank lines and comments excepted). However, there
7079 is one important difference: the file is read each time the list is processed,
7080 so if its contents vary over time, Exim's behaviour changes.
7082 If a file name is preceded by an exclamation mark, the sense of any match
7083 within the file is inverted. For example, if
7085 hold_domains = !/etc/nohold-domains
7087 and the file contains the lines
7092 then &'a.b.c'& is in the set of domains defined by &%hold_domains%&, whereas
7093 any domain matching &`*.b.c`& is not.
7097 .section "An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list"
7098 As will be described in the sections that follow, lookups can be used in lists
7099 to provide indexed methods of checking list membership. There has been some
7100 confusion about the way &(lsearch)& lookups work in lists. Because
7101 an &(lsearch)& file contains plain text and is scanned sequentially, it is
7102 sometimes thought that it is allowed to contain wild cards and other kinds of
7103 non-constant pattern. This is not the case. The keys in an &(lsearch)& file are
7104 always fixed strings, just as for any other single-key lookup type.
7106 If you want to use a file to contain wild-card patterns that form part of a
7107 list, just give the file name on its own, without a search type, as described
7108 in the previous section.
7113 .section "Named lists" "SECTnamedlists"
7114 .cindex "named lists"
7115 .cindex "list" "named"
7116 A list of domains, hosts, email addresses, or local parts can be given a name
7117 which is then used to refer to the list elsewhere in the configuration. This is
7118 particularly convenient if the same list is required in several different
7119 places. It also allows lists to be given meaningful names, which can improve
7120 the readability of the configuration. For example, it is conventional to define
7121 a domain list called &'local_domains'& for all the domains that are handled
7122 locally on a host, using a configuration line such as
7124 domainlist local_domains = localhost:my.dom.example
7126 Named lists are referenced by giving their name preceded by a plus sign, so,
7127 for example, a router that is intended to handle local domains would be
7128 configured with the line
7130 domains = +local_domains
7132 The first router in a configuration is often one that handles all domains
7133 except the local ones, using a configuration with a negated item like this:
7137 domains = ! +local_domains
7138 transport = remote_smtp
7141 The four kinds of named list are created by configuration lines starting with
7142 the words &%domainlist%&, &%hostlist%&, &%addresslist%&, or &%localpartlist%&,
7143 respectively. Then there follows the name that you are defining, followed by an
7144 equals sign and the list itself. For example:
7146 hostlist relay_hosts = 192.168.23.0/24 : my.friend.example
7147 addresslist bad_senders = cdb;/etc/badsenders
7149 A named list may refer to other named lists:
7151 domainlist dom1 = first.example : second.example
7152 domainlist dom2 = +dom1 : third.example
7153 domainlist dom3 = fourth.example : +dom2 : fifth.example
7155 &*Warning*&: If the last item in a referenced list is a negative one, the
7156 effect may not be what you intended, because the negation does not propagate
7157 out to the higher level. For example, consider:
7159 domainlist dom1 = !a.b
7160 domainlist dom2 = +dom1 : *.b
7162 The second list specifies &"either in the &%dom1%& list or &'*.b'&"&. The first
7163 list specifies just &"not &'a.b'&"&, so the domain &'x.y'& matches it. That
7164 means it matches the second list as well. The effect is not the same as
7166 domainlist dom2 = !a.b : *.b
7168 where &'x.y'& does not match. It's best to avoid negation altogether in
7169 referenced lists if you can.
7171 Named lists may have a performance advantage. When Exim is routing an
7172 address or checking an incoming message, it caches the result of tests on named
7173 lists. So, if you have a setting such as
7175 domains = +local_domains
7177 on several of your routers
7178 or in several ACL statements,
7179 the actual test is done only for the first one. However, the caching works only
7180 if there are no expansions within the list itself or any sublists that it
7181 references. In other words, caching happens only for lists that are known to be
7182 the same each time they are referenced.
7184 By default, there may be up to 16 named lists of each type. This limit can be
7185 extended by changing a compile-time variable. The use of domain and host lists
7186 is recommended for concepts such as local domains, relay domains, and relay
7187 hosts. The default configuration is set up like this.
7191 .section "Named lists compared with macros"
7192 .cindex "list" "named compared with macro"
7193 .cindex "macro" "compared with named list"
7194 At first sight, named lists might seem to be no different from macros in the
7195 configuration file. However, macros are just textual substitutions. If you
7198 ALIST = host1 : host2
7199 auth_advertise_hosts = !ALIST
7201 it probably won't do what you want, because that is exactly the same as
7203 auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : host2
7205 Notice that the second host name is not negated. However, if you use a host
7208 hostlist alist = host1 : host2
7209 auth_advertise_hosts = ! +alist
7211 the negation applies to the whole list, and so that is equivalent to
7213 auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : !host2
7217 .section "Named list caching"
7218 .cindex "list" "caching of named"
7219 .cindex "caching" "named lists"
7220 While processing a message, Exim caches the result of checking a named list if
7221 it is sure that the list is the same each time. In practice, this means that
7222 the cache operates only if the list contains no $ characters, which guarantees
7223 that it will not change when it is expanded. Sometimes, however, you may have
7224 an expanded list that you know will be the same each time within a given
7225 message. For example:
7227 domainlist special_domains = \
7228 ${lookup{$sender_host_address}cdb{/some/file}}
7230 This provides a list of domains that depends only on the sending host's IP
7231 address. If this domain list is referenced a number of times (for example,
7232 in several ACL lines, or in several routers) the result of the check is not
7233 cached by default, because Exim does not know that it is going to be the
7234 same list each time.
7236 By appending &`_cache`& to &`domainlist`& you can tell Exim to go ahead and
7237 cache the result anyway. For example:
7239 domainlist_cache special_domains = ${lookup{...
7241 If you do this, you should be absolutely sure that caching is going to do
7242 the right thing in all cases. When in doubt, leave it out.
7246 .section "Domain lists" "SECTdomainlist"
7247 .cindex "domain list" "patterns for"
7248 .cindex "list" "domain list"
7249 Domain lists contain patterns that are to be matched against a mail domain.
7250 The following types of item may appear in domain lists:
7253 .cindex "primary host name"
7254 .cindex "host name" "matched in domain list"
7255 .cindex "&%primary_hostname%&"
7256 .cindex "domain list" "matching primary host name"
7257 .cindex "@ in a domain list"
7258 If a pattern consists of a single @ character, it matches the local host name,
7259 as set by the &%primary_hostname%& option (or defaulted). This makes it
7260 possible to use the same configuration file on several different hosts that
7261 differ only in their names.
7263 .cindex "@[] in a domain list"
7264 .cindex "domain list" "matching local IP interfaces"
7265 .cindex "domain literal"
7266 If a pattern consists of the string &`@[]`& it matches any local IP interface
7267 address, enclosed in square brackets, as in an email address that contains a
7269 In today's Internet, the use of domain literals is controversial.
7272 .cindex "@mx_primary"
7273 .cindex "@mx_secondary"
7274 .cindex "domain list" "matching MX pointers to local host"
7275 If a pattern consists of the string &`@mx_any`& it matches any domain that
7276 has an MX record pointing to the local host or to any host that is listed in
7277 .cindex "&%hosts_treat_as_local%&"
7278 &%hosts_treat_as_local%&. The items &`@mx_primary`& and &`@mx_secondary`&
7279 are similar, except that the first matches only when a primary MX target is the
7280 local host, and the second only when no primary MX target is the local host,
7281 but a secondary MX target is. &"Primary"& means an MX record with the lowest
7282 preference value &-- there may of course be more than one of them.
7284 The MX lookup that takes place when matching a pattern of this type is
7285 performed with the resolver options for widening names turned off. Thus, for
7286 example, a single-component domain will &'not'& be expanded by adding the
7287 resolver's default domain. See the &%qualify_single%& and &%search_parents%&
7288 options of the &(dnslookup)& router for a discussion of domain widening.
7290 Sometimes you may want to ignore certain IP addresses when using one of these
7291 patterns. You can specify this by following the pattern with &`/ignore=`&<&'ip
7292 list'&>, where <&'ip list'&> is a list of IP addresses. These addresses are
7293 ignored when processing the pattern (compare the &%ignore_target_hosts%& option
7294 on a router). For example:
7296 domains = @mx_any/ignore=127.0.0.1
7298 This example matches any domain that has an MX record pointing to one of
7299 the local host's IP addresses other than 127.0.0.1.
7301 The list of IP addresses is in fact processed by the same code that processes
7302 host lists, so it may contain CIDR-coded network specifications and it may also
7303 contain negative items.
7305 Because the list of IP addresses is a sublist within a domain list, you have to
7306 be careful about delimiters if there is more than one address. Like any other
7307 list, the default delimiter can be changed. Thus, you might have:
7309 domains = @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;0.0.0.0 : \
7310 an.other.domain : ...
7312 so that the sublist uses semicolons for delimiters. When IPv6 addresses are
7313 involved, it is easiest to change the delimiter for the main list as well:
7315 domains = <? @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;::1 ? \
7316 an.other.domain ? ...
7319 .cindex "asterisk" "in domain list"
7320 .cindex "domain list" "asterisk in"
7321 .cindex "domain list" "matching &""ends with""&"
7322 If a pattern starts with an asterisk, the remaining characters of the pattern
7323 are compared with the terminating characters of the domain. The use of &"*"& in
7324 domain lists differs from its use in partial matching lookups. In a domain
7325 list, the character following the asterisk need not be a dot, whereas partial
7326 matching works only in terms of dot-separated components. For example, a domain
7327 list item such as &`*key.ex`& matches &'donkey.ex'& as well as
7331 .cindex "regular expressions" "in domain list"
7332 .cindex "domain list" "matching regular expression"
7333 If a pattern starts with a circumflex character, it is treated as a regular
7334 expression, and matched against the domain using a regular expression matching
7335 function. The circumflex is treated as part of the regular expression.
7336 References to descriptions of the syntax of regular expressions are given in
7337 chapter &<<CHAPregexp>>&.
7339 &*Warning*&: Because domain lists are expanded before being processed, you
7340 must escape any backslash and dollar characters in the regular expression, or
7341 use the special &`\N`& sequence (see chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&) to specify that
7342 it is not to be expanded (unless you really do want to build a regular
7343 expression by expansion, of course).
7345 .cindex "lookup" "in domain list"
7346 .cindex "domain list" "matching by lookup"
7347 If a pattern starts with the name of a single-key lookup type followed by a
7348 semicolon (for example, &"dbm;"& or &"lsearch;"&), the remainder of the pattern
7349 must be a file name in a suitable format for the lookup type. For example, for
7350 &"cdb;"& it must be an absolute path:
7352 domains = cdb;/etc/mail/local_domains.cdb
7354 The appropriate type of lookup is done on the file using the domain name as the
7355 key. In most cases, the data that is looked up is not used; Exim is interested
7356 only in whether or not the key is present in the file. However, when a lookup
7357 is used for the &%domains%& option on a router
7358 or a &%domains%& condition in an ACL statement, the data is preserved in the
7359 &$domain_data$& variable and can be referred to in other router options or
7360 other statements in the same ACL.
7363 Any of the single-key lookup type names may be preceded by
7364 &`partial`&<&'n'&>&`-`&, where the <&'n'&> is optional, for example,
7366 domains = partial-dbm;/partial/domains
7368 This causes partial matching logic to be invoked; a description of how this
7369 works is given in section &<<SECTpartiallookup>>&.
7372 .cindex "asterisk" "in lookup type"
7373 Any of the single-key lookup types may be followed by an asterisk. This causes
7374 a default lookup for a key consisting of a single asterisk to be done if the
7375 original lookup fails. This is not a useful feature when using a domain list to
7376 select particular domains (because any domain would match), but it might have
7377 value if the result of the lookup is being used via the &$domain_data$&
7380 If the pattern starts with the name of a query-style lookup type followed by a
7381 semicolon (for example, &"nisplus;"& or &"ldap;"&), the remainder of the
7382 pattern must be an appropriate query for the lookup type, as described in
7383 chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. For example:
7385 hold_domains = mysql;select domain from holdlist \
7386 where domain = '$domain';
7388 In most cases, the data that is looked up is not used (so for an SQL query, for
7389 example, it doesn't matter what field you select). Exim is interested only in
7390 whether or not the query succeeds. However, when a lookup is used for the
7391 &%domains%& option on a router, the data is preserved in the &$domain_data$&
7392 variable and can be referred to in other options.
7394 .cindex "domain list" "matching literal domain name"
7395 If none of the above cases apply, a caseless textual comparison is made
7396 between the pattern and the domain.
7399 Here is an example that uses several different kinds of pattern:
7401 domainlist funny_domains = \
7404 *.foundation.fict.example : \
7405 \N^[1-2]\d{3}\.fict\.example$\N : \
7406 partial-dbm;/opt/data/penguin/book : \
7407 nis;domains.byname : \
7408 nisplus;[name=$domain,status=local],domains.org_dir
7410 There are obvious processing trade-offs among the various matching modes. Using
7411 an asterisk is faster than a regular expression, and listing a few names
7412 explicitly probably is too. The use of a file or database lookup is expensive,
7413 but may be the only option if hundreds of names are required. Because the
7414 patterns are tested in order, it makes sense to put the most commonly matched
7419 .section "Host lists" "SECThostlist"
7420 .cindex "host list" "patterns in"
7421 .cindex "list" "host list"
7422 Host lists are used to control what remote hosts are allowed to do. For
7423 example, some hosts may be allowed to use the local host as a relay, and some
7424 may be permitted to use the SMTP ETRN command. Hosts can be identified in
7425 two different ways, by name or by IP address. In a host list, some types of
7426 pattern are matched to a host name, and some are matched to an IP address.
7427 You need to be particularly careful with this when single-key lookups are
7428 involved, to ensure that the right value is being used as the key.
7431 .section "Special host list patterns"
7432 .cindex "empty item in hosts list"
7433 .cindex "host list" "empty string in"
7434 If a host list item is the empty string, it matches only when no remote host is
7435 involved. This is the case when a message is being received from a local
7436 process using SMTP on the standard input, that is, when a TCP/IP connection is
7439 .cindex "asterisk" "in host list"
7440 The special pattern &"*"& in a host list matches any host or no host. Neither
7441 the IP address nor the name is actually inspected.
7445 .section "Host list patterns that match by IP address" "SECThoslispatip"
7446 .cindex "host list" "matching IP addresses"
7447 If an IPv4 host calls an IPv6 host and the call is accepted on an IPv6 socket,
7448 the incoming address actually appears in the IPv6 host as
7449 &`::ffff:`&<&'v4address'&>. When such an address is tested against a host
7450 list, it is converted into a traditional IPv4 address first. (Not all operating
7451 systems accept IPv4 calls on IPv6 sockets, as there have been some security
7454 The following types of pattern in a host list check the remote host by
7455 inspecting its IP address:
7458 If the pattern is a plain domain name (not a regular expression, not starting
7459 with *, not a lookup of any kind), Exim calls the operating system function
7460 to find the associated IP address(es). Exim uses the newer
7461 &[getipnodebyname()]& function when available, otherwise &[gethostbyname()]&.
7462 This typically causes a forward DNS lookup of the name. The result is compared
7463 with the IP address of the subject host.
7465 If there is a temporary problem (such as a DNS timeout) with the host name
7466 lookup, a temporary error occurs. For example, if the list is being used in an
7467 ACL condition, the ACL gives a &"defer"& response, usually leading to a
7468 temporary SMTP error code. If no IP address can be found for the host name,
7469 what happens is described in section &<<SECTbehipnot>>& below.
7472 .cindex "@ in a host list"
7473 If the pattern is &"@"&, the primary host name is substituted and used as a
7474 domain name, as just described.
7477 If the pattern is an IP address, it is matched against the IP address of the
7478 subject host. IPv4 addresses are given in the normal &"dotted-quad"& notation.
7479 IPv6 addresses can be given in colon-separated format, but the colons have to
7480 be doubled so as not to be taken as item separators when the default list
7481 separator is used. IPv6 addresses are recognized even when Exim is compiled
7482 without IPv6 support. This means that if they appear in a host list on an
7483 IPv4-only host, Exim will not treat them as host names. They are just addresses
7484 that can never match a client host.
7487 .cindex "@[] in a host list"
7488 If the pattern is &"@[]"&, it matches the IP address of any IP interface on
7489 the local host. For example, if the local host is an IPv4 host with one
7490 interface address 10.45.23.56, these two ACL statements have the same effect:
7492 accept hosts = 127.0.0.1 : 10.45.23.56
7496 .cindex "CIDR notation"
7497 If the pattern is an IP address followed by a slash and a mask length (for
7498 example 10.11.42.0/24), it is matched against the IP address of the subject
7499 host under the given mask. This allows, an entire network of hosts to be
7500 included (or excluded) by a single item. The mask uses CIDR notation; it
7501 specifies the number of address bits that must match, starting from the most
7502 significant end of the address.
7504 &*Note*&: The mask is &'not'& a count of addresses, nor is it the high number
7505 of a range of addresses. It is the number of bits in the network portion of the
7506 address. The above example specifies a 24-bit netmask, so it matches all 256
7507 addresses in the 10.11.42.0 network. An item such as
7511 matches just two addresses, 192.168.23.236 and 192.168.23.237. A mask value of
7512 32 for an IPv4 address is the same as no mask at all; just a single address
7515 Here is another example which shows an IPv4 and an IPv6 network:
7517 recipient_unqualified_hosts = 192.168.0.0/16: \
7518 3ffe::ffff::836f::::/48
7520 The doubling of list separator characters applies only when these items
7521 appear inline in a host list. It is not required when indirecting via a file.
7524 recipient_unqualified_hosts = /opt/exim/unqualnets
7526 could make use of a file containing
7531 to have exactly the same effect as the previous example. When listing IPv6
7532 addresses inline, it is usually more convenient to use the facility for
7533 changing separator characters. This list contains the same two networks:
7535 recipient_unqualified_hosts = <; 172.16.0.0/12; \
7538 The separator is changed to semicolon by the leading &"<;"& at the start of the
7544 .section "Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address" &&&
7545 "SECThoslispatsikey"
7546 .cindex "host list" "lookup of IP address"
7547 When a host is to be identified by a single-key lookup of its complete IP
7548 address, the pattern takes this form:
7550 &`net-<`&&'single-key-search-type'&&`>;<`&&'search-data'&&`>`&
7554 hosts_lookup = net-cdb;/hosts-by-ip.db
7556 The text form of the IP address of the subject host is used as the lookup key.
7557 IPv6 addresses are converted to an unabbreviated form, using lower case
7558 letters, with dots as separators because colon is the key terminator in
7559 &(lsearch)& files. [Colons can in fact be used in keys in &(lsearch)& files by
7560 quoting the keys, but this is a facility that was added later.] The data
7561 returned by the lookup is not used.
7563 .cindex "IP address" "masking"
7564 .cindex "host list" "masked IP address"
7565 Single-key lookups can also be performed using masked IP addresses, using
7566 patterns of this form:
7568 &`net<`&&'number'&&`>-<`&&'single-key-search-type'&&`>;<`&&'search-data'&&`>`&
7572 net24-dbm;/networks.db
7574 The IP address of the subject host is masked using <&'number'&> as the mask
7575 length. A textual string is constructed from the masked value, followed by the
7576 mask, and this is used as the lookup key. For example, if the host's IP address
7577 is 192.168.34.6, the key that is looked up for the above example is
7578 &"192.168.34.0/24"&. IPv6 addresses are converted to a text value using lower
7579 case letters and dots as separators instead of the more usual colon, because
7580 colon is the key terminator in &(lsearch)& files. Full, unabbreviated IPv6
7581 addresses are always used.
7583 &*Warning*&: Specifing &%net32-%& (for an IPv4 address) or &%net128-%& (for an
7584 IPv6 address) is not the same as specifing just &%net-%& without a number. In
7585 the former case the key strings include the mask value, whereas in the latter
7586 case the IP address is used on its own.
7590 .section "Host list patterns that match by host name" "SECThoslispatnam"
7591 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7592 .cindex "unknown host name"
7593 .cindex "host list" "matching host name"
7594 There are several types of pattern that require Exim to know the name of the
7595 remote host. These are either wildcard patterns or lookups by name. (If a
7596 complete hostname is given without any wildcarding, it is used to find an IP
7597 address to match against, as described in the section &<<SECThoslispatip>>&
7600 If the remote host name is not already known when Exim encounters one of these
7601 patterns, it has to be found from the IP address.
7602 Although many sites on the Internet are conscientious about maintaining reverse
7603 DNS data for their hosts, there are also many that do not do this.
7604 Consequently, a name cannot always be found, and this may lead to unwanted
7605 effects. Take care when configuring host lists with wildcarded name patterns.
7606 Consider what will happen if a name cannot be found.
7608 Because of the problems of determining host names from IP addresses, matching
7609 against host names is not as common as matching against IP addresses.
7611 By default, in order to find a host name, Exim first does a reverse DNS lookup;
7612 if no name is found in the DNS, the system function (&[gethostbyaddr()]& or
7613 &[getipnodebyaddr()]& if available) is tried. The order in which these lookups
7614 are done can be changed by setting the &%host_lookup_order%& option.
7616 There are some options that control what happens if a host name cannot be
7617 found. These are described in section &<<SECTbehipnot>>& below.
7619 .cindex "host" "alias for"
7620 .cindex "alias for host"
7621 As a result of aliasing, hosts may have more than one name. When processing any
7622 of the following types of pattern, all the host's names are checked:
7625 .cindex "asterisk" "in host list"
7626 If a pattern starts with &"*"& the remainder of the item must match the end of
7627 the host name. For example, &`*.b.c`& matches all hosts whose names end in
7628 &'.b.c'&. This special simple form is provided because this is a very common
7629 requirement. Other kinds of wildcarding require the use of a regular
7632 .cindex "regular expressions" "in host list"
7633 .cindex "host list" "regular expression in"
7634 If the item starts with &"^"& it is taken to be a regular expression which is
7635 matched against the host name. For example,
7639 is a regular expression that matches either of the two hosts &'a.c.d'& or
7640 &'b.c.d'&. When a regular expression is used in a host list, you must take care
7641 that backslash and dollar characters are not misinterpreted as part of the
7642 string expansion. The simplest way to do this is to use &`\N`& to mark that
7643 part of the string as non-expandable. For example:
7645 sender_unqualified_hosts = \N^(a|b)\.c\.d$\N : ....
7647 &*Warning*&: If you want to match a complete host name, you must include the
7648 &`$`& terminating metacharacter in the regular expression, as in the above
7649 example. Without it, a match at the start of the host name is all that is
7656 .section "Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found" "SECTbehipnot"
7657 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7658 While processing a host list, Exim may need to look up an IP address from a
7659 name (see section &<<SECThoslispatip>>&), or it may need to look up a host name
7660 from an IP address (see section &<<SECThoslispatnam>>&). In either case, the
7661 behaviour when it fails to find the information it is seeking is the same.
7663 .cindex "&`+include_unknown`&"
7664 .cindex "&`+ignore_unknown`&"
7665 By default, Exim behaves as if the host does not match the list. This may not
7666 always be what you want to happen. To change Exim's behaviour, the special
7667 items &`+include_unknown`& or &`+ignore_unknown`& may appear in the list (at
7668 top level &-- they are not recognized in an indirected file).
7671 If any item that follows &`+include_unknown`& requires information that
7672 cannot found, Exim behaves as if the host does match the list. For example,
7674 host_reject_connection = +include_unknown:*.enemy.ex
7676 rejects connections from any host whose name matches &`*.enemy.ex`&, and also
7677 any hosts whose name it cannot find.
7680 If any item that follows &`+ignore_unknown`& requires information that cannot
7681 be found, Exim ignores that item and proceeds to the rest of the list. For
7684 accept hosts = +ignore_unknown : friend.example : \
7687 accepts from any host whose name is &'friend.example'& and from 192.168.4.5,
7688 whether or not its host name can be found. Without &`+ignore_unknown`&, if no
7689 name can be found for 192.168.4.5, it is rejected.
7692 Both &`+include_unknown`& and &`+ignore_unknown`& may appear in the same
7693 list. The effect of each one lasts until the next, or until the end of the
7696 &*Note*&: This section applies to permanent lookup failures. It does &'not'&
7697 apply to temporary DNS errors. They always cause a defer action (except when
7698 &%dns_again_means_nonexist%& converts them into permanent errors).
7702 .section "Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name" &&&
7703 "SECThoslispatnamsk"
7704 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7705 .cindex "unknown host name"
7706 .cindex "host list" "matching host name"
7707 If a pattern is of the form
7709 <&'single-key-search-type'&>;<&'search-data'&>
7713 dbm;/host/accept/list
7715 a single-key lookup is performend, using the host name as its key. If the
7716 lookup succeeds, the host matches the item. The actual data that is looked up
7719 &*Reminder*&: With this kind of pattern, you must have host &'names'& as
7720 keys in the file, not IP addresses. If you want to do lookups based on IP
7721 addresses, you must precede the search type with &"net-"& (see section
7722 &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&). There is, however, no reason why you could not use
7723 two items in the same list, one doing an address lookup and one doing a name
7724 lookup, both using the same file.
7728 .section "Host list patterns for query-style lookups"
7729 If a pattern is of the form
7731 <&'query-style-search-type'&>;<&'query'&>
7733 the query is obeyed, and if it succeeds, the host matches the item. The actual
7734 data that is looked up is not used. The variables &$sender_host_address$& and
7735 &$sender_host_name$& can be used in the query. For example:
7737 hosts_lookup = pgsql;\
7738 select ip from hostlist where ip='$sender_host_address'
7740 The value of &$sender_host_address$& for an IPv6 address contains colons. You
7741 can use the &%sg%& expansion item to change this if you need to. If you want to
7742 use masked IP addresses in database queries, you can use the &%mask%& expansion
7745 If the query contains a reference to &$sender_host_name$&, Exim automatically
7746 looks up the host name if has not already done so. (See section
7747 &<<SECThoslispatnam>>& for comments on finding host names.)
7749 Historical note: prior to release 4.30, Exim would always attempt to find a
7750 host name before running the query, unless the search type was preceded by
7751 &`net-`&. This is no longer the case. For backwards compatibility, &`net-`& is
7752 still recognized for query-style lookups, but its presence or absence has no
7753 effect. (Of course, for single-key lookups, &`net-`& &'is'& important.
7754 See section &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&.)
7758 .section "Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists" &&&
7760 .cindex "host list" "mixing names and addresses in"
7761 If you have name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses in the same
7762 host list, you should normally put the IP addresses first. For example, in an
7765 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : *.friend.example
7767 The reason for this lies in the left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.
7768 It can test IP addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
7769 item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host name to
7770 compare with the pattern. If the above list is given in the opposite order, the
7771 &%accept%& statement fails for a host whose name cannot be found, even if its
7772 IP address is 10.9.8.7.
7774 If you really do want to do the name check first, and still recognize the IP
7775 address, you can rewrite the ACL like this:
7777 accept hosts = *.friend.example
7778 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7
7780 If the first &%accept%& fails, Exim goes on to try the second one. See chapter
7781 &<<CHAPACL>>& for details of ACLs.
7787 .section "Address lists" "SECTaddresslist"
7788 .cindex "list" "address list"
7789 .cindex "address list" "empty item"
7790 .cindex "address list" "patterns"
7791 Address lists contain patterns that are matched against mail addresses. There
7792 is one special case to be considered: the sender address of a bounce message is
7793 always empty. You can test for this by providing an empty item in an address
7794 list. For example, you can set up a router to process bounce messages by
7795 using this option setting:
7799 The presence of the colon creates an empty item. If you do not provide any
7800 data, the list is empty and matches nothing. The empty sender can also be
7801 detected by a regular expression that matches an empty string,
7802 and by a query-style lookup that succeeds when &$sender_address$& is empty.
7804 Non-empty items in an address list can be straightforward email addresses. For
7807 senders = jbc@askone.example : hs@anacreon.example
7809 A certain amount of wildcarding is permitted. If a pattern contains an @
7810 character, but is not a regular expression and does not begin with a
7811 semicolon-terminated lookup type (described below), the local part of the
7812 subject address is compared with the local part of the pattern, which may start
7813 with an asterisk. If the local parts match, the domain is checked in exactly
7814 the same way as for a pattern in a domain list. For example, the domain can be
7815 wildcarded, refer to a named list, or be a lookup:
7817 deny senders = *@*.spamming.site:\
7818 *@+hostile_domains:\
7819 bozo@partial-lsearch;/list/of/dodgy/sites:\
7820 *@dbm;/bad/domains.db
7822 .cindex "local part" "starting with !"
7823 .cindex "address list" "local part starting with !"
7824 If a local part that begins with an exclamation mark is required, it has to be
7825 specified using a regular expression, because otherwise the exclamation mark is
7826 treated as a sign of negation, as is standard in lists.
7828 If a non-empty pattern that is not a regular expression or a lookup does not
7829 contain an @ character, it is matched against the domain part of the subject
7830 address. The only two formats that are recognized this way are a literal
7831 domain, or a domain pattern that starts with *. In both these cases, the effect
7832 is the same as if &`*@`& preceded the pattern. For example:
7834 deny senders = enemy.domain : *.enemy.domain
7837 The following kinds of more complicated address list pattern can match any
7838 address, including the empty address that is characteristic of bounce message
7842 .cindex "regular expressions" "in address list"
7843 .cindex "address list" "regular expression in"
7844 If (after expansion) a pattern starts with &"^"&, a regular expression match is
7845 done against the complete address, with the pattern as the regular expression.
7846 You must take care that backslash and dollar characters are not misinterpreted
7847 as part of the string expansion. The simplest way to do this is to use &`\N`&
7848 to mark that part of the string as non-expandable. For example:
7850 deny senders = \N^.*this.*@example\.com$\N : \
7851 \N^\d{8}.+@spamhaus.example$\N : ...
7853 The &`\N`& sequences are removed by the expansion, so these items do indeed
7854 start with &"^"& by the time they are being interpreted as address patterns.
7857 .cindex "address list" "lookup for complete address"
7858 Complete addresses can be looked up by using a pattern that starts with a
7859 lookup type terminated by a semicolon, followed by the data for the lookup. For
7862 deny senders = cdb;/etc/blocked.senders : \
7863 mysql;select address from blocked where \
7864 address='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'
7866 Both query-style and single-key lookup types can be used. For a single-key
7867 lookup type, Exim uses the complete address as the key. However, empty keys are
7868 not supported for single-key lookups, so a match against the empty address
7869 always fails. This restriction does not apply to query-style lookups.
7871 Partial matching for single-key lookups (section &<<SECTpartiallookup>>&)
7872 cannot be used, and is ignored if specified, with an entry being written to the
7874 .cindex "*@ with single-key lookup"
7875 However, you can configure lookup defaults, as described in section
7876 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>&, but this is useful only for the &"*@"& type of
7877 default. For example, with this lookup:
7879 accept senders = lsearch*@;/some/file
7881 the file could contains lines like this:
7883 user1@domain1.example
7886 and for the sender address &'nimrod@jaeger.example'&, the sequence of keys
7889 nimrod@jaeger.example
7893 &*Warning 1*&: Do not include a line keyed by &"*"& in the file, because that
7894 would mean that every address matches, thus rendering the test useless.
7896 &*Warning 2*&: Do not confuse these two kinds of item:
7898 deny recipients = dbm*@;/some/file
7899 deny recipients = *@dbm;/some/file
7901 The first does a whole address lookup, with defaulting, as just described,
7902 because it starts with a lookup type. The second matches the local part and
7903 domain independently, as described in a bullet point below.
7907 The following kinds of address list pattern can match only non-empty addresses.
7908 If the subject address is empty, a match against any of these pattern types
7913 .cindex "@@ with single-key lookup"
7914 .cindex "address list" "@@ lookup type"
7915 .cindex "address list" "split local part and domain"
7916 If a pattern starts with &"@@"& followed by a single-key lookup item
7917 (for example, &`@@lsearch;/some/file`&), the address that is being checked is
7918 split into a local part and a domain. The domain is looked up in the file. If
7919 it is not found, there is no match. If it is found, the data that is looked up
7920 from the file is treated as a colon-separated list of local part patterns, each
7921 of which is matched against the subject local part in turn.
7923 .cindex "asterisk" "in address list"
7924 The lookup may be a partial one, and/or one involving a search for a default
7925 keyed by &"*"& (see section &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>&). The local part
7926 patterns that are looked up can be regular expressions or begin with &"*"&, or
7927 even be further lookups. They may also be independently negated. For example,
7930 deny senders = @@dbm;/etc/reject-by-domain
7932 the data from which the DBM file is built could contain lines like
7934 baddomain.com: !postmaster : *
7936 to reject all senders except &%postmaster%& from that domain.
7938 .cindex "local part" "starting with !"
7939 If a local part that actually begins with an exclamation mark is required, it
7940 has to be specified using a regular expression. In &(lsearch)& files, an entry
7941 may be split over several lines by indenting the second and subsequent lines,
7942 but the separating colon must still be included at line breaks. White space
7943 surrounding the colons is ignored. For example:
7945 aol.com: spammer1 : spammer2 : ^[0-9]+$ :
7948 As in all colon-separated lists in Exim, a colon can be included in an item by
7951 If the last item in the list starts with a right angle-bracket, the remainder
7952 of the item is taken as a new key to look up in order to obtain a continuation
7953 list of local parts. The new key can be any sequence of characters. Thus one
7954 might have entries like
7956 aol.com: spammer1 : spammer 2 : >*
7957 xyz.com: spammer3 : >*
7960 in a file that was searched with &%@@dbm*%&, to specify a match for 8-digit
7961 local parts for all domains, in addition to the specific local parts listed for
7962 each domain. Of course, using this feature costs another lookup each time a
7963 chain is followed, but the effort needed to maintain the data is reduced.
7965 .cindex "loop" "in lookups"
7966 It is possible to construct loops using this facility, and in order to catch
7967 them, the chains may be no more than fifty items long.
7970 The @@<&'lookup'&> style of item can also be used with a query-style
7971 lookup, but in this case, the chaining facility is not available. The lookup
7972 can only return a single list of local parts.
7975 &*Warning*&: There is an important difference between the address list items
7976 in these two examples:
7979 senders = *@+my_list
7981 In the first one, &`my_list`& is a named address list, whereas in the second
7982 example it is a named domain list.
7987 .section "Case of letters in address lists" "SECTcasletadd"
7988 .cindex "case of local parts"
7989 .cindex "address list" "case forcing"
7990 .cindex "case forcing in address lists"
7991 Domains in email addresses are always handled caselessly, but for local parts
7992 case may be significant on some systems (see &%caseful_local_part%& for how
7993 Exim deals with this when routing addresses). However, RFC 2505 (&'Anti-Spam
7994 Recommendations for SMTP MTAs'&) suggests that matching of addresses to
7995 blocking lists should be done in a case-independent manner. Since most address
7996 lists in Exim are used for this kind of control, Exim attempts to do this by
7999 The domain portion of an address is always lowercased before matching it to an
8000 address list. The local part is lowercased by default, and any string
8001 comparisons that take place are done caselessly. This means that the data in
8002 the address list itself, in files included as plain file names, and in any file
8003 that is looked up using the &"@@"& mechanism, can be in any case. However, the
8004 keys in files that are looked up by a search type other than &(lsearch)& (which
8005 works caselessly) must be in lower case, because these lookups are not
8008 .cindex "&`+caseful`&"
8009 To allow for the possibility of caseful address list matching, if an item in
8010 an address list is the string &"+caseful"&, the original case of the local
8011 part is restored for any comparisons that follow, and string comparisons are no
8012 longer case-independent. This does not affect the domain, which remains in
8013 lower case. However, although independent matches on the domain alone are still
8014 performed caselessly, regular expressions that match against an entire address
8015 become case-sensitive after &"+caseful"& has been seen.
8019 .section "Local part lists" "SECTlocparlis"
8020 .cindex "list" "local part list"
8021 .cindex "local part" "list"
8022 Case-sensitivity in local part lists is handled in the same way as for address
8023 lists, as just described. The &"+caseful"& item can be used if required. In a
8024 setting of the &%local_parts%& option in a router with &%caseful_local_part%&
8025 set false, the subject is lowercased and the matching is initially
8026 case-insensitive. In this case, &"+caseful"& will restore case-sensitive
8027 matching in the local part list, but not elsewhere in the router. If
8028 &%caseful_local_part%& is set true in a router, matching in the &%local_parts%&
8029 option is case-sensitive from the start.
8031 If a local part list is indirected to a file (see section &<<SECTfilnamlis>>&),
8032 comments are handled in the same way as address lists &-- they are recognized
8033 only if the # is preceded by white space or the start of the line.
8034 Otherwise, local part lists are matched in the same way as domain lists, except
8035 that the special items that refer to the local host (&`@`&, &`@[]`&,
8036 &`@mx_any`&, &`@mx_primary`&, and &`@mx_secondary`&) are not recognized.
8037 Refer to section &<<SECTdomainlist>>& for details of the other available item
8039 .ecindex IIDdohoadli
8044 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
8045 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
8047 .chapter "String expansions" "CHAPexpand"
8048 .scindex IIDstrexp "expansion" "of strings"
8049 Many strings in Exim's run time configuration are expanded before use. Some of
8050 them are expanded every time they are used; others are expanded only once.
8052 When a string is being expanded it is copied verbatim from left to right except
8053 when a dollar or backslash character is encountered. A dollar specifies the
8054 start of a portion of the string that is interpreted and replaced as described
8055 below in section &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& onwards. Backslash is used as an
8056 escape character, as described in the following section.
8060 .section "Literal text in expanded strings" "SECTlittext"
8061 .cindex "expansion" "including literal text"
8062 An uninterpreted dollar can be included in an expanded string by putting a
8063 backslash in front of it. A backslash can be used to prevent any special
8064 character being treated specially in an expansion, including backslash itself.
8065 If the string appears in quotes in the configuration file, two backslashes are
8066 required because the quotes themselves cause interpretation of backslashes when
8067 the string is read in (see section &<<SECTstrings>>&).
8069 .cindex "expansion" "non-expandable substrings"
8070 A portion of the string can specified as non-expandable by placing it between
8071 two occurrences of &`\N`&. This is particularly useful for protecting regular
8072 expressions, which often contain backslashes and dollar signs. For example:
8074 deny senders = \N^\d{8}[a-z]@some\.site\.example$\N
8076 On encountering the first &`\N`&, the expander copies subsequent characters
8077 without interpretation until it reaches the next &`\N`& or the end of the
8082 .section "Character escape sequences in expanded strings"
8083 .cindex "expansion" "escape sequences"
8084 A backslash followed by one of the letters &"n"&, &"r"&, or &"t"& in an
8085 expanded string is recognized as an escape sequence for the character newline,
8086 carriage return, or tab, respectively. A backslash followed by up to three
8087 octal digits is recognized as an octal encoding for a single character, and a
8088 backslash followed by &"x"& and up to two hexadecimal digits is a hexadecimal
8091 These escape sequences are also recognized in quoted strings when they are read
8092 in. Their interpretation in expansions as well is useful for unquoted strings,
8093 and for other cases such as looked-up strings that are then expanded.
8096 .section "Testing string expansions"
8097 .cindex "expansion" "testing"
8098 .cindex "testing" "string expansion"
8099 .cindex "&%-be%& option"
8100 Many expansions can be tested by calling Exim with the &%-be%& option. This
8101 takes the command arguments, or lines from the standard input if there are no
8102 arguments, runs them through the string expansion code, and writes the results
8103 to the standard output. Variables based on configuration values are set up, but
8104 since no message is being processed, variables such as &$local_part$& have no
8105 value. Nevertheless the &%-be%& option can be useful for checking out file and
8106 database lookups, and the use of expansion operators such as &%sg%&, &%substr%&
8109 Exim gives up its root privilege when it is called with the &%-be%& option, and
8110 instead runs under the uid and gid it was called with, to prevent users from
8111 using &%-be%& for reading files to which they do not have access.
8115 .section "Forced expansion failure" "SECTforexpfai"
8116 .cindex "expansion" "forced failure"
8117 A number of expansions that are described in the following section have
8118 alternative &"true"& and &"false"& substrings, enclosed in brace characters
8119 (which are sometimes called &"curly brackets"&). Which of the two strings is
8120 used depends on some condition that is evaluated as part of the expansion. If,
8121 instead of a &"false"& substring, the word &"fail"& is used (not in braces),
8122 the entire string expansion fails in a way that can be detected by the code
8123 that requested the expansion. This is called &"forced expansion failure"&, and
8124 its consequences depend on the circumstances. In some cases it is no different
8125 from any other expansion failure, but in others a different action may be
8126 taken. Such variations are mentioned in the documentation of the option that is
8132 .section "Expansion items" "SECTexpansionitems"
8133 The following items are recognized in expanded strings. White space may be used
8134 between sub-items that are keywords or substrings enclosed in braces inside an
8135 outer set of braces, to improve readability. &*Warning*&: Within braces,
8136 white space is significant.
8139 .vitem &*$*&<&'variable&~name'&>&~or&~&*${*&<&'variable&~name'&>&*}*&
8140 .cindex "expansion" "variables"
8141 Substitute the contents of the named variable, for example:
8146 The second form can be used to separate the name from subsequent alphanumeric
8147 characters. This form (using braces) is available only for variables; it does
8148 &'not'& apply to message headers. The names of the variables are given in
8149 section &<<SECTexpvar>>& below. If the name of a non-existent variable is
8150 given, the expansion fails.
8152 .vitem &*${*&<&'op'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8153 .cindex "expansion" "operators"
8154 The string is first itself expanded, and then the operation specified by
8155 <&'op'&> is applied to it. For example:
8159 The string starts with the first character after the colon, which may be
8160 leading white space. A list of operators is given in section &<<SECTexpop>>&
8161 below. The operator notation is used for simple expansion items that have just
8162 one argument, because it reduces the number of braces and therefore makes the
8163 string easier to understand.
8165 .vitem "&*${dlfunc{*&<&'file'&>&*}{*&<&'function'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}&&&
8166 {*&<&'arg'&>&*}...}*&"
8168 This expansion dynamically loads and then calls a locally-written C function.
8169 This functionality is available only if Exim is compiled with
8173 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. Once loaded, Exim remembers the dynamically loaded
8174 object so that it doesn't reload the same object file in the same Exim process
8175 (but of course Exim does start new processes frequently).
8177 There may be from zero to eight arguments to the function. When compiling
8178 a local function that is to be called in this way, &_local_scan.h_& should be
8179 included. The Exim variables and functions that are defined by that API
8180 are also available for dynamically loaded functions. The function itself
8181 must have the following type:
8183 int dlfunction(uschar **yield, int argc, uschar *argv[])
8185 Where &`uschar`& is a typedef for &`unsigned char`& in &_local_scan.h_&. The
8186 function should return one of the following values:
8188 &`OK`&: Success. The string that is placed in the variable &'yield'& is put
8189 into the expanded string that is being built.
8191 &`FAIL`&: A non-forced expansion failure occurs, with the error message taken
8192 from &'yield'&, if it is set.
8194 &`FAIL_FORCED`&: A forced expansion failure occurs, with the error message
8195 taken from &'yield'& if it is set.
8197 &`ERROR`&: Same as &`FAIL`&, except that a panic log entry is written.
8199 When compiling a function that is to be used in this way with gcc,
8200 you need to add &%-shared%& to the gcc command. Also, in the Exim build-time
8201 configuration, you must add &%-export-dynamic%& to EXTRALIBS.
8203 .vitem "&*${extract{*&<&'key'&>&*}{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}&&&
8204 {*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&"
8205 .cindex "expansion" "extracting substrings by key"
8206 .cindex "&%extract%&" "substrings by key"
8207 The key and <&'string1'&> are first expanded separately. Leading and trailing
8208 white space is removed from the key (but not from any of the strings). The key
8209 must not consist entirely of digits. The expanded <&'string1'&> must be of the
8212 <&'key1'&> = <&'value1'&> <&'key2'&> = <&'value2'&> ...
8215 where the equals signs and spaces (but not both) are optional. If any of the
8216 values contain white space, they must be enclosed in double quotes, and any
8217 values that are enclosed in double quotes are subject to escape processing as
8218 described in section &<<SECTstrings>>&. The expanded <&'string1'&> is searched
8219 for the value that corresponds to the key. The search is case-insensitive. If
8220 the key is found, <&'string2'&> is expanded, and replaces the whole item;
8221 otherwise <&'string3'&> is used. During the expansion of <&'string2'&> the
8222 variable &$value$& contains the value that has been extracted. Afterwards, it
8223 is restored to any previous value it might have had.
8225 If {<&'string3'&>} is omitted, the item is replaced by an empty string if the
8226 key is not found. If {<&'string2'&>} is also omitted, the value that was
8227 extracted is used. Thus, for example, these two expansions are identical, and
8230 ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}}
8231 ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}{$value}}
8233 Instead of {<&'string3'&>} the word &"fail"& (not in curly brackets) can
8234 appear, for example:
8236 ${extract{Z}{A=... B=...}{$value} fail }
8238 This forces an expansion failure (see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>&);
8239 {<&'string2'&>} must be present for &"fail"& to be recognized.
8242 .vitem "&*${extract{*&<&'number'&>&*}{*&<&'separators'&>&*}&&&
8243 {*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&"
8244 .cindex "expansion" "extracting substrings by number"
8245 .cindex "&%extract%&" "substrings by number"
8246 The <&'number'&> argument must consist entirely of decimal digits,
8247 apart from leading and trailing white space, which is ignored.
8248 This is what distinguishes this form of &%extract%& from the previous kind. It
8249 behaves in the same way, except that, instead of extracting a named field, it
8250 extracts from <&'string1'&> the field whose number is given as the first
8251 argument. You can use &$value$& in <&'string2'&> or &`fail`& instead of
8252 <&'string3'&> as before.
8254 The fields in the string are separated by any one of the characters in the
8255 separator string. These may include space or tab characters.
8256 The first field is numbered one. If the number is negative, the fields are
8257 counted from the end of the string, with the rightmost one numbered -1. If the
8258 number given is zero, the entire string is returned. If the modulus of the
8259 number is greater than the number of fields in the string, the result is the
8260 expansion of <&'string3'&>, or the empty string if <&'string3'&> is not
8261 provided. For example:
8263 ${extract{2}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}
8267 ${extract{-4}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}
8269 yields &"99"&. Two successive separators mean that the field between them is
8270 empty (for example, the fifth field above).
8273 .vitem &*${hash{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8274 .cindex "hash function" "textual"
8275 .cindex "expansion" "textual hash"
8276 This is a textual hashing function, and was the first to be implemented in
8277 early versions of Exim. In current releases, there are other hashing functions
8278 (numeric, MD5, and SHA-1), which are described below.
8280 The first two strings, after expansion, must be numbers. Call them <&'m'&> and
8281 <&'n'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is, if
8282 <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you can
8283 use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8285 ${hash_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8287 The second number is optional (in both notations). If <&'n'&> is greater than
8288 or equal to the length of the string, the expansion item returns the string.
8289 Otherwise it computes a new string of length <&'n'&> by applying a hashing
8290 function to the string. The new string consists of characters taken from the
8291 first <&'m'&> characters of the string
8293 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQWRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
8295 If <&'m'&> is not present the value 26 is used, so that only lower case
8296 letters appear. For example:
8298 &`$hash{3}{monty}} `& yields &`jmg`&
8299 &`$hash{5}{monty}} `& yields &`monty`&
8300 &`$hash{4}{62}{monty python}}`& yields &`fbWx`&
8303 .vitem "&*$header_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8304 &*$h_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8305 See &*$rheader*& below.
8307 .vitem "&*$bheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8308 &*$bh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8309 See &*$rheader*& below.
8311 .vitem "&*$rheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8312 &*$rh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8313 .cindex "expansion" "header insertion"
8314 .cindex "&$header_$&"
8315 .cindex "&$bheader_$&"
8316 .cindex "&$rheader_$&"
8317 .cindex "header lines" "in expansion strings"
8318 .cindex "header lines" "character sets"
8319 .cindex "header lines" "decoding"
8320 Substitute the contents of the named message header line, for example
8324 The newline that terminates a header line is not included in the expansion, but
8325 internal newlines (caused by splitting the header line over several physical
8326 lines) may be present.
8328 The difference between &%rheader%&, &%bheader%&, and &%header%& is in the way
8329 the data in the header line is interpreted.
8332 .cindex "white space" "in header lines"
8333 &%rheader%& gives the original &"raw"& content of the header line, with no
8334 processing at all, and without the removal of leading and trailing white space.
8337 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in header lines"
8338 &%bheader%& removes leading and trailing white space, and then decodes base64
8339 or quoted-printable MIME &"words"& within the header text, but does no
8340 character set translation. If decoding of what looks superficially like a MIME
8341 &"word"& fails, the raw string is returned. If decoding
8342 .cindex "binary zero" "in header line"
8343 produces a binary zero character, it is replaced by a question mark &-- this is
8344 what Exim does for binary zeros that are actually received in header lines.
8347 &%header%& tries to translate the string as decoded by &%bheader%& to a
8348 standard character set. This is an attempt to produce the same string as would
8349 be displayed on a user's MUA. If translation fails, the &%bheader%& string is
8350 returned. Translation is attempted only on operating systems that support the
8351 &[iconv()]& function. This is indicated by the compile-time macro HAVE_ICONV in
8352 a system Makefile or in &_Local/Makefile_&.
8355 In a filter file, the target character set for &%header%& can be specified by a
8356 command of the following form:
8358 headers charset "UTF-8"
8360 This command affects all references to &$h_$& (or &$header_$&) expansions in
8361 subsequently obeyed filter commands. In the absence of this command, the target
8362 character set in a filter is taken from the setting of the &%headers_charset%&
8363 option in the runtime configuration. The value of this option defaults to the
8364 value of HEADERS_CHARSET in &_Local/Makefile_&. The ultimate default is
8367 Header names follow the syntax of RFC 2822, which states that they may contain
8368 any printing characters except space and colon. Consequently, curly brackets
8369 &'do not'& terminate header names, and should not be used to enclose them as
8370 if they were variables. Attempting to do so causes a syntax error.
8372 Only header lines that are common to all copies of a message are visible to
8373 this mechanism. These are the original header lines that are received with the
8374 message, and any that are added by an ACL &%warn%& statement or by a system
8375 filter. Header lines that are added to a particular copy of a message by a
8376 router or transport are not accessible.
8378 For incoming SMTP messages, no header lines are visible in ACLs that are obeyed
8379 before the DATA ACL, because the header structure is not set up until the
8380 message is received. Header lines that are added by &%warn%& statements in a
8381 RCPT ACL (for example) are saved until the message's incoming header lines
8382 are available, at which point they are added. When a DATA ACL is running,
8383 however, header lines added by earlier ACLs are visible.
8385 Upper case and lower case letters are synonymous in header names. If the
8386 following character is white space, the terminating colon may be omitted, but
8387 this is not recommended, because you may then forget it when it is needed. When
8388 white space terminates the header name, it is included in the expanded string.
8389 If the message does not contain the given header, the expansion item is
8390 replaced by an empty string. (See the &%def%& condition in section
8391 &<<SECTexpcond>>& for a means of testing for the existence of a header.)
8393 If there is more than one header with the same name, they are all
8394 concatenated to form the substitution string, up to a maximum length of 64K. A
8395 newline character is inserted between each line. For the &%header%& expansion,
8396 for those headers that contain lists of addresses, a comma is also inserted at
8397 the junctions between lines. This does not happen for the &%rheader%&
8401 .vitem &*${hmac{*&<&'hashname'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}{*&<&'string'&>&*}}*&
8402 .cindex "expansion" "hmac hashing"
8404 This function uses cryptographic hashing (either MD5 or SHA-1) to convert a
8405 shared secret and some text into a message authentication code, as specified in
8406 RFC 2104. This differs from &`${md5:secret_text...}`& or
8407 &`${sha1:secret_text...}`& in that the hmac step adds a signature to the
8408 cryptographic hash, allowing for authentication that is not possible with MD5
8409 or SHA-1 alone. The hash name must expand to either &`md5`& or &`sha1`& at
8410 present. For example:
8412 ${hmac{md5}{somesecret}{$primary_hostname $tod_log}}
8414 For the hostname &'mail.example.com'& and time 2002-10-17 11:30:59, this
8417 dd97e3ba5d1a61b5006108f8c8252953
8419 As an example of how this might be used, you might put in the main part of
8420 an Exim configuration:
8422 SPAMSCAN_SECRET=cohgheeLei2thahw
8424 In a router or a transport you could then have:
8427 X-Spam-Scanned: ${primary_hostname} ${message_exim_id} \
8428 ${hmac{md5}{SPAMSCAN_SECRET}\
8429 {${primary_hostname},${message_exim_id},$h_message-id:}}
8431 Then given a message, you can check where it was scanned by looking at the
8432 &'X-Spam-Scanned:'& header line. If you know the secret, you can check that
8433 this header line is authentic by recomputing the authentication code from the
8434 host name, message ID and the &'Message-id:'& header line. This can be done
8435 using Exim's &%-be%& option, or by other means, for example by using the
8436 &'hmac_md5_hex()'& function in Perl.
8439 .vitem &*${if&~*&<&'condition'&>&*&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&
8440 .cindex "expansion" "conditional"
8441 .cindex "&%if%&, expansion item"
8442 If <&'condition'&> is true, <&'string1'&> is expanded and replaces the whole
8443 item; otherwise <&'string2'&> is used. The available conditions are described
8444 in section &<<SECTexpcond>>& below. For example:
8446 ${if eq {$local_part}{postmaster} {yes}{no} }
8448 The second string need not be present; if it is not and the condition is not
8449 true, the item is replaced with nothing. Alternatively, the word &"fail"& may
8450 be present instead of the second string (without any curly brackets). In this
8451 case, the expansion is forced to fail if the condition is not true (see section
8452 &<<SECTforexpfai>>&).
8454 If both strings are omitted, the result is the string &`true`& if the condition
8455 is true, and the empty string if the condition is false. This makes it less
8456 cumbersome to write custom ACL and router conditions. For example, instead of
8458 condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}{true}{false}}
8462 condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}}
8465 .vitem &*${length{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&
8466 .cindex "expansion" "string truncation"
8467 .cindex "&%length%&" "expansion item"
8468 The &%length%& item is used to extract the initial portion of a string. Both
8469 strings are expanded, and the first one must yield a number, <&'n'&>, say. If
8470 you are using a fixed value for the number, that is, if <&'string1'&> does not
8471 change when expanded, you can use the simpler operator notation that avoids
8474 ${length_<n>:<string>}
8476 The result of this item is either the first <&'n'&> characters or the whole
8477 of <&'string2'&>, whichever is the shorter. Do not confuse &%length%& with
8478 &%strlen%&, which gives the length of a string.
8481 .vitem "&*${lookup{*&<&'key'&>&*}&~*&<&'search&~type'&>&*&~&&&
8482 {*&<&'file'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8483 This is the first of one of two different types of lookup item, which are both
8484 described in the next item.
8486 .vitem "&*${lookup&~*&<&'search&~type'&>&*&~{*&<&'query'&>&*}&~&&&
8487 {*&<&'string1'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8488 .cindex "expansion" "lookup in"
8489 .cindex "file" "lookups"
8490 .cindex "lookup" "in expanded string"
8491 The two forms of lookup item specify data lookups in files and databases, as
8492 discussed in chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. The first form is used for single-key
8493 lookups, and the second is used for query-style lookups. The <&'key'&>,
8494 <&'file'&>, and <&'query'&> strings are expanded before use.
8496 If there is any white space in a lookup item which is part of a filter command,
8497 a retry or rewrite rule, a routing rule for the &(manualroute)& router, or any
8498 other place where white space is significant, the lookup item must be enclosed
8499 in double quotes. The use of data lookups in users' filter files may be locked
8500 out by the system administrator.
8503 If the lookup succeeds, <&'string1'&> is expanded and replaces the entire item.
8504 During its expansion, the variable &$value$& contains the data returned by the
8505 lookup. Afterwards it reverts to the value it had previously (at the outer
8506 level it is empty). If the lookup fails, <&'string2'&> is expanded and replaces
8507 the entire item. If {<&'string2'&>} is omitted, the replacement is the empty
8508 string on failure. If <&'string2'&> is provided, it can itself be a nested
8509 lookup, thus providing a mechanism for looking up a default value when the
8510 original lookup fails.
8512 If a nested lookup is used as part of <&'string1'&>, &$value$& contains the
8513 data for the outer lookup while the parameters of the second lookup are
8514 expanded, and also while <&'string2'&> of the second lookup is expanded, should
8515 the second lookup fail. Instead of {<&'string2'&>} the word &"fail"& can
8516 appear, and in this case, if the lookup fails, the entire expansion is forced
8517 to fail (see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>&). If both {<&'string1'&>} and
8518 {<&'string2'&>} are omitted, the result is the looked up value in the case of a
8519 successful lookup, and nothing in the case of failure.
8521 For single-key lookups, the string &"partial"& is permitted to precede the
8522 search type in order to do partial matching, and * or *@ may follow a search
8523 type to request default lookups if the key does not match (see sections
8524 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>& and &<<SECTpartiallookup>>& for details).
8526 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in lookup expansion"
8527 If a partial search is used, the variables &$1$& and &$2$& contain the wild
8528 and non-wild parts of the key during the expansion of the replacement text.
8529 They return to their previous values at the end of the lookup item.
8531 This example looks up the postmaster alias in the conventional alias file:
8533 ${lookup {postmaster} lsearch {/etc/aliases} {$value}}
8535 This example uses NIS+ to look up the full name of the user corresponding to
8536 the local part of an address, forcing the expansion to fail if it is not found:
8538 ${lookup nisplus {[name=$local_part],passwd.org_dir:gcos} \
8542 .vitem &*${nhash{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8543 .cindex "expansion" "numeric hash"
8544 .cindex "hash function" "numeric"
8545 The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers. Call them
8546 <&'n'&> and <&'m'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is,
8547 if <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you
8548 can use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8550 ${nhash_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8552 The second number is optional (in both notations). If there is only one number,
8553 the result is a number in the range 0&--<&'n'&>-1. Otherwise, the string is
8554 processed by a div/mod hash function that returns two numbers, separated by a
8555 slash, in the ranges 0 to <&'n'&>-1 and 0 to <&'m'&>-1, respectively. For
8558 ${nhash{8}{64}{supercalifragilisticexpialidocious}}
8560 returns the string &"6/33"&.
8564 .vitem &*${perl{*&<&'subroutine'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}...}*&
8565 .cindex "Perl" "use in expanded string"
8566 .cindex "expansion" "calling Perl from"
8567 This item is available only if Exim has been built to include an embedded Perl
8568 interpreter. The subroutine name and the arguments are first separately
8569 expanded, and then the Perl subroutine is called with those arguments. No
8570 additional arguments need be given; the maximum number permitted, including the
8571 name of the subroutine, is nine.
8573 The return value of the subroutine is inserted into the expanded string, unless
8574 the return value is &%undef%&. In that case, the expansion fails in the same
8575 way as an explicit &"fail"& on a lookup item. The return value is a scalar.
8576 Whatever you return is evaluated in a scalar context. For example, if you
8577 return the name of a Perl vector, the return value is the size of the vector,
8580 If the subroutine exits by calling Perl's &%die%& function, the expansion fails
8581 with the error message that was passed to &%die%&. More details of the embedded
8582 Perl facility are given in chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&.
8584 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_perl%& which locks
8585 out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8588 .vitem &*${prvs{*&<&'address'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}{*&<&'keynumber'&>&*}}*&
8589 .cindex "prvs" "expansion item"
8590 The first argument is a complete email address and the second is secret
8591 keystring. The third argument, specifying a key number, is optional. If absent,
8592 it defaults to 0. The result of the expansion is a prvs-signed email address,
8593 to be typically used with the &%return_path%& option on an &(smtp)& transport
8594 as part of a bounce address tag validation (BATV) scheme. For more discussion
8595 and an example, see section &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
8597 .vitem "&*${prvscheck{*&<&'address'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}&&&
8598 {*&<&'string'&>&*}}*&"
8599 .cindex "prvscheck" "expansion item"
8600 This expansion item is the complement of the &%prvs%& item. It is used for
8601 checking prvs-signed addresses. If the expansion of the first argument does not
8602 yield a syntactically valid prvs-signed address, the whole item expands to the
8603 empty string. When the first argument does expand to a syntactically valid
8604 prvs-signed address, the second argument is expanded, with the prvs-decoded
8605 version of the address and the key number extracted from the address in the
8606 variables &$prvscheck_address$& and &$prvscheck_keynum$&, respectively.
8608 These two variables can be used in the expansion of the second argument to
8609 retrieve the secret. The validity of the prvs-signed address is then checked
8610 against the secret. The result is stored in the variable &$prvscheck_result$&,
8611 which is empty for failure or &"1"& for success.
8613 The third argument is optional; if it is missing, it defaults to an empty
8614 string. This argument is now expanded. If the result is an empty string, the
8615 result of the expansion is the decoded version of the address. This is the case
8616 whether or not the signature was valid. Otherwise, the result of the expansion
8617 is the expansion of the third argument.
8619 All three variables can be used in the expansion of the third argument.
8620 However, once the expansion is complete, only &$prvscheck_result$& remains set.
8621 For more discussion and an example, see section &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
8623 .vitem &*${readfile{*&<&'file&~name'&>&*}{*&<&'eol&~string'&>&*}}*&
8624 .cindex "expansion" "inserting an entire file"
8625 .cindex "file" "inserting into expansion"
8626 .cindex "&%readfile%& expansion item"
8627 The file name and end-of-line string are first expanded separately. The file is
8628 then read, and its contents replace the entire item. All newline characters in
8629 the file are replaced by the end-of-line string if it is present. Otherwise,
8630 newlines are left in the string.
8631 String expansion is not applied to the contents of the file. If you want this,
8632 you must wrap the item in an &%expand%& operator. If the file cannot be read,
8633 the string expansion fails.
8635 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_readfile%& which
8636 locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8640 .vitem "&*${readsocket{*&<&'name'&>&*}{*&<&'request'&>&*}&&&
8641 {*&<&'timeout'&>&*}{*&<&'eol&~string'&>&*}{*&<&'fail&~string'&>&*}}*&"
8642 .cindex "expansion" "inserting from a socket"
8643 .cindex "socket" "use of in expansion"
8644 .cindex "&%readsocket%& expansion item"
8646 This item inserts data from a Unix domain or Internet socket into the expanded
8647 string. The minimal way of using it uses just two arguments, as in these
8650 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}}
8651 ${readsocket{inet:some.host:1234}{request string}}
8653 For a Unix domain socket, the first substring must be the path to the socket.
8654 For an Internet socket, the first substring must contain &`inet:`& followed by
8655 a host name or IP address, followed by a colon and a port, which can be a
8656 number or the name of a TCP port in &_/etc/services_&. An IP address may
8657 optionally be enclosed in square brackets. This is best for IPv6 addresses. For
8660 ${readsocket{inet:[::1]:1234}{request string}}
8662 Only a single host name may be given, but if looking it up yields more than
8663 one IP address, they are each tried in turn until a connection is made. For
8664 both kinds of socket, Exim makes a connection, writes the request string
8665 (unless it is an empty string) and reads from the socket until an end-of-file
8666 is read. A timeout of 5 seconds is applied. Additional, optional arguments
8667 extend what can be done. Firstly, you can vary the timeout. For example:
8670 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request-string}{3s}}
8672 A fourth argument allows you to change any newlines that are in the data
8673 that is read, in the same way as for &%readfile%& (see above). This example
8674 turns them into spaces:
8677 ${readsocket{inet:127.0.0.1:3294}{request-string}{3s}{ }}
8680 As with all expansions, the substrings are expanded before the processing
8681 happens. Errors in these sub-expansions cause the expansion to fail. In
8682 addition, the following errors can occur:
8685 Failure to create a socket file descriptor;
8687 Failure to connect the socket;
8689 Failure to write the request-string;
8691 Timeout on reading from the socket.
8694 By default, any of these errors causes the expansion to fail. However, if
8695 you supply a fifth substring, it is expanded and used when any of the above
8696 errors occurs. For example:
8698 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request-string}{3s}{\n}\
8702 You can test for the existence of a Unix domain socket by wrapping this
8703 expansion in &`${if exists`&, but there is a race condition between that test
8704 and the actual opening of the socket, so it is safer to use the fifth argument
8705 if you want to be absolutely sure of avoiding an expansion error for a
8706 non-existent Unix domain socket, or a failure to connect to an Internet socket.
8709 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_readsocket%& which
8710 locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8712 .vitem &*$rheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:&~or&~$rh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&
8713 This item inserts &"raw"& header lines. It is described with the &%header%&
8714 expansion item above.
8716 .vitem "&*${run{*&<&'command'&>&*&~*&<&'args'&>&*}{*&<&'string1'&>&*}&&&
8717 {*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8718 .cindex "expansion" "running a command"
8719 .cindex "&%run%& expansion item"
8720 The command and its arguments are first expanded separately, and then the
8721 command is run in a separate process, but under the same uid and gid. As in
8722 other command executions from Exim, a shell is not used by default. If you want
8723 a shell, you must explicitly code it.
8725 .cindex "return code" "from &%run%& expansion"
8727 If the command succeeds (gives a zero return code) <&'string1'&> is expanded
8728 and replaces the entire item; during this expansion, the standard output from
8729 the command is in the variable &$value$&. If the command fails, <&'string2'&>,
8730 if present, is expanded and used. Once again, during the expansion, the
8731 standard output from the command is in the variable &$value$&. If <&'string2'&>
8732 is absent, the result is empty. Alternatively, <&'string2'&> can be the word
8733 &"fail"& (not in braces) to force expansion failure if the command does not
8734 succeed. If both strings are omitted, the result is contents of the standard
8735 output on success, and nothing on failure.
8738 The return code from the command is put in the variable &$runrc$&, and this
8739 remains set afterwards, so in a filter file you can do things like this:
8741 if "${run{x y z}{}}$runrc" is 1 then ...
8742 elif $runrc is 2 then ...
8746 If execution of the command fails (for example, the command does not exist),
8747 the return code is 127 &-- the same code that shells use for non-existent
8750 &*Warning*&: In a router or transport, you cannot assume the order in which
8751 option values are expanded, except for those preconditions whose order of
8752 testing is documented. Therefore, you cannot reliably expect to set &$runrc$&
8753 by the expansion of one option, and use it in another.
8755 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_run%& which locks
8756 out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8759 .vitem &*${sg{*&<&'subject'&>&*}{*&<&'regex'&>&*}{*&<&'replacement'&>&*}}*&
8760 .cindex "expansion" "string substitution"
8761 .cindex "&%sg%& expansion item"
8762 This item works like Perl's substitution operator (s) with the global (/g)
8763 option; hence its name. However, unlike the Perl equivalent, Exim does not
8764 modify the subject string; instead it returns the modified string for insertion
8765 into the overall expansion. The item takes three arguments: the subject string,
8766 a regular expression, and a substitution string. For example:
8768 ${sg{abcdefabcdef}{abc}{xyz}}
8770 yields &"xyzdefxyzdef"&. Because all three arguments are expanded before use,
8771 if any $ or \ characters are required in the regular expression or in the
8772 substitution string, they have to be escaped. For example:
8774 ${sg{abcdef}{^(...)(...)\$}{\$2\$1}}
8776 yields &"defabc"&, and
8778 ${sg{1=A 4=D 3=C}{\N(\d+)=\N}{K\$1=}}
8780 yields &"K1=A K4=D K3=C"&. Note the use of &`\N`& to protect the contents of
8781 the regular expression from string expansion.
8785 .vitem &*${substr{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8786 .cindex "&%substr%&"
8787 .cindex "substring extraction"
8788 .cindex "expansion" "substring extraction"
8789 The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers. Call them
8790 <&'n'&> and <&'m'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is,
8791 if <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you
8792 can use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8794 ${substr_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8796 The second number is optional (in both notations).
8797 If it is absent in the simpler format, the preceding underscore must also be
8800 The &%substr%& item can be used to extract more general substrings than
8801 &%length%&. The first number, <&'n'&>, is a starting offset, and <&'m'&> is the
8802 length required. For example
8804 ${substr{3}{2}{$local_part}}
8806 If the starting offset is greater than the string length the result is the
8807 null string; if the length plus starting offset is greater than the string
8808 length, the result is the right-hand part of the string, starting from the
8809 given offset. The first character in the string has offset zero.
8811 The &%substr%& expansion item can take negative offset values to count
8812 from the right-hand end of its operand. The last character is offset -1, the
8813 second-last is offset -2, and so on. Thus, for example,
8815 ${substr{-5}{2}{1234567}}
8817 yields &"34"&. If the absolute value of a negative offset is greater than the
8818 length of the string, the substring starts at the beginning of the string, and
8819 the length is reduced by the amount of overshoot. Thus, for example,
8821 ${substr{-5}{2}{12}}
8823 yields an empty string, but
8825 ${substr{-3}{2}{12}}
8829 When the second number is omitted from &%substr%&, the remainder of the string
8830 is taken if the offset is positive. If it is negative, all characters in the
8831 string preceding the offset point are taken. For example, an offset of -1 and
8832 no length, as in these semantically identical examples:
8835 ${substr{-1}{abcde}}
8837 yields all but the last character of the string, that is, &"abcd"&.
8841 .vitem "&*${tr{*&<&'subject'&>&*}{*&<&'characters'&>&*}&&&
8842 {*&<&'replacements'&>&*}}*&"
8843 .cindex "expansion" "character translation"
8844 .cindex "&%tr%& expansion item"
8845 This item does single-character translation on its subject string. The second
8846 argument is a list of characters to be translated in the subject string. Each
8847 matching character is replaced by the corresponding character from the
8848 replacement list. For example
8850 ${tr{abcdea}{ac}{13}}
8852 yields &`1b3de1`&. If there are duplicates in the second character string, the
8853 last occurrence is used. If the third string is shorter than the second, its
8854 last character is replicated. However, if it is empty, no translation takes
8860 .section "Expansion operators" "SECTexpop"
8861 .cindex "expansion" "operators"
8862 For expansion items that perform transformations on a single argument string,
8863 the &"operator"& notation is used because it is simpler and uses fewer braces.
8864 The substring is first expanded before the operation is applied to it. The
8865 following operations can be performed:
8868 .vitem &*${address:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8869 .cindex "expansion" "RFC 2822 address handling"
8870 .cindex "&%address%&" "expansion item"
8871 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address, as it might appear in a
8872 header line, and the effective address is extracted from it. If the string does
8873 not parse successfully, the result is empty.
8876 .vitem &*${base62:*&<&'digits'&>&*}*&
8877 .cindex "&%base62%&"
8878 .cindex "expansion" "conversion to base 62"
8879 The string must consist entirely of decimal digits. The number is converted to
8880 base 62 and output as a string of six characters, including leading zeros. In
8881 the few operating environments where Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62 for
8882 its message identifiers (because those systems do not have case-sensitive file
8883 names), base 36 is used by this operator, despite its name. &*Note*&: Just to
8884 be absolutely clear: this is &'not'& base64 encoding.
8886 .vitem &*${base62d:*&<&'base-62&~digits'&>&*}*&
8887 .cindex "&%base62d%&"
8888 .cindex "expansion" "conversion to base 62"
8889 The string must consist entirely of base-62 digits, or, in operating
8890 environments where Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62 for its message
8891 identifiers, base-36 digits. The number is converted to decimal and output as a
8894 .vitem &*${domain:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8895 .cindex "domain" "extraction"
8896 .cindex "expansion" "domain extraction"
8897 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address and the domain is extracted
8898 from it. If the string does not parse successfully, the result is empty.
8901 .vitem &*${escape:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8902 .cindex "expansion" "escaping non-printing characters"
8903 .cindex "&%escape%&, expansion item"
8904 If the string contains any non-printing characters, they are converted to
8905 escape sequences starting with a backslash. Whether characters with the most
8906 significant bit set (so-called &"8-bit characters"&) count as printing or not
8907 is controlled by the &%print_topbitchars%& option.
8910 .vitem &*${eval:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&&~and&~&*${eval10:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8911 .cindex "expansion" "expression evaluation"
8912 .cindex "expansion" "arithmetic expression"
8913 .cindex "&%eval%& expansion item"
8914 These items supports simple arithmetic in expansion strings. The string (after
8915 expansion) must be a conventional arithmetic expression, but it is limited to
8916 five basic operators (plus, minus, times, divide, remainder) and parentheses.
8917 All operations are carried out using integer arithmetic. Plus and minus have a
8918 lower priority than times, divide, and remainder; operators with the same
8919 priority are evaluated from left to right.
8921 For &%eval%&, numbers may be decimal, octal (starting with &"0"&) or
8922 hexadecimal (starting with &"0x"&). For &%eval10%&, all numbers are taken as
8923 decimal, even if they start with a leading zero. This can be useful when
8924 processing numbers extracted from dates or times, which often do have leading
8927 A number may be followed by &"K"& or &"M"& to multiply it by 1024 or 1024*1024,
8928 respectively. Negative numbers are supported. The result of the computation is
8929 a decimal representation of the answer (without &"K"& or &"M"&). For example:
8932 &`${eval:1+1} `& yields 2
8933 &`${eval:1+2*3} `& yields 7
8934 &`${eval:(1+2)*3} `& yields 9
8935 &`${eval:2+42%5} `& yields 4
8938 As a more realistic example, in an ACL you might have
8940 deny message = Too many bad recipients
8943 {>{$rcpt_count}{10}} \
8946 {$recipients_count} \
8947 {${eval:$rcpt_count/2}} \
8951 The condition is true if there have been more than 10 RCPT commands and
8952 fewer than half of them have resulted in a valid recipient.
8955 .vitem &*${expand:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8956 .cindex "expansion" "re-expansion of substring"
8957 The &%expand%& operator causes a string to be expanded for a second time. For
8960 ${expand:${lookup{$domain}dbm{/some/file}{$value}}}
8962 first looks up a string in a file while expanding the operand for &%expand%&,
8963 and then re-expands what it has found.
8966 .vitem &*${from_utf8:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8968 .cindex "UTF-8" "conversion from"
8969 .cindex "expansion" "UTF-8 conversion"
8970 .cindex "&%from_utf8%&"
8971 The world is slowly moving towards Unicode, although there are no standards for
8972 email yet. However, other applications (including some databases) are starting
8973 to store data in Unicode, using UTF-8 encoding. This operator converts from a
8974 UTF-8 string to an ISO-8859-1 string. UTF-8 code values greater than 255 are
8975 converted to underscores. The input must be a valid UTF-8 string. If it is not,
8976 the result is an undefined sequence of bytes.
8978 Unicode code points with values less than 256 are compatible with ASCII and
8979 ISO-8859-1 (also known as Latin-1).
8980 For example, character 169 is the copyright symbol in both cases, though the
8981 way it is encoded is different. In UTF-8, more than one byte is needed for
8982 characters with code values greater than 127, whereas ISO-8859-1 is a
8983 single-byte encoding (but thereby limited to 256 characters). This makes
8984 translation from UTF-8 to ISO-8859-1 straightforward.
8987 .vitem &*${hash_*&<&'n'&>&*_*&<&'m'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8988 .cindex "hash function" "textual"
8989 .cindex "expansion" "textual hash"
8990 The &%hash%& operator is a simpler interface to the hashing function that can
8991 be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to strings that
8992 change when expanded). The effect is the same as
8994 ${hash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}
8996 See the description of the general &%hash%& item above for details. The
8997 abbreviation &%h%& can be used when &%hash%& is used as an operator.
9001 .vitem &*${hex2b64:*&<&'hexstring'&>&*}*&
9002 .cindex "base64 encoding" "conversion from hex"
9003 .cindex "expansion" "hex to base64"
9004 .cindex "&%hex2b64%&"
9005 This operator converts a hex string into one that is base64 encoded. This can
9006 be useful for processing the output of the MD5 and SHA-1 hashing functions.
9009 .vitem &*${lc:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9010 .cindex "case forcing in strings"
9011 .cindex "string" "case forcing"
9012 .cindex "lower casing"
9013 .cindex "expansion" "case forcing"
9014 .cindex "&%lc%& expansion item"
9015 This forces the letters in the string into lower-case, for example:
9020 .vitem &*${length_*&<&'number'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9021 .cindex "expansion" "string truncation"
9022 .cindex "&%length%&" "expansion item"
9023 The &%length%& operator is a simpler interface to the &%length%& function that
9024 can be used when the parameter is a fixed number (as opposed to a string that
9025 changes when expanded). The effect is the same as
9027 ${length{<number>}{<string>}}
9029 See the description of the general &%length%& item above for details. Note that
9030 &%length%& is not the same as &%strlen%&. The abbreviation &%l%& can be used
9031 when &%length%& is used as an operator.
9034 .vitem &*${local_part:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9035 .cindex "expansion" "local part extraction"
9036 .cindex "&%local_part%& expansion item"
9037 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address and the local part is
9038 extracted from it. If the string does not parse successfully, the result is
9042 .vitem &*${mask:*&<&'IP&~address'&>&*/*&<&'bit&~count'&>&*}*&
9043 .cindex "masked IP address"
9044 .cindex "IP address" "masking"
9045 .cindex "CIDR notation"
9046 .cindex "expansion" "IP address masking"
9047 .cindex "&%mask%&, expansion item"
9048 If the form of the string to be operated on is not an IP address followed by a
9049 slash and an integer (that is, a network address in CIDR notation), the
9050 expansion fails. Otherwise, this operator converts the IP address to binary,
9051 masks off the least significant bits according to the bit count, and converts
9052 the result back to text, with mask appended. For example,
9054 ${mask:10.111.131.206/28}
9056 returns the string &"10.111.131.192/28"&. Since this operation is expected to
9057 be mostly used for looking up masked addresses in files, the result for an IPv6
9058 address uses dots to separate components instead of colons, because colon
9059 terminates a key string in lsearch files. So, for example,
9061 ${mask:3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031/99}
9065 3ffe.ffff.836f.0a00.000a.0800.2000.0000/99
9067 Letters in IPv6 addresses are always output in lower case.
9070 .vitem &*${md5:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9072 .cindex "expansion" "MD5 hash"
9073 .cindex "&%md5%& expansion item"
9074 The &%md5%& operator computes the MD5 hash value of the string, and returns it
9075 as a 32-digit hexadecimal number, in which any letters are in lower case.
9078 .vitem &*${nhash_*&<&'n'&>&*_*&<&'m'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9079 .cindex "expansion" "numeric hash"
9080 .cindex "hash function" "numeric"
9081 The &%nhash%& operator is a simpler interface to the numeric hashing function
9082 that can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to
9083 strings that change when expanded). The effect is the same as
9085 ${nhash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}
9087 See the description of the general &%nhash%& item above for details.
9090 .vitem &*${quote:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9091 .cindex "quoting" "in string expansions"
9092 .cindex "expansion" "quoting"
9093 .cindex "&%quote%&, expansion item"
9094 The &%quote%& operator puts its argument into double quotes if it
9095 is an empty string or
9096 contains anything other than letters, digits, underscores, dots, and hyphens.
9097 Any occurrences of double quotes and backslashes are escaped with a backslash.
9098 Newlines and carriage returns are converted to &`\n`& and &`\r`&,
9099 respectively For example,
9107 The place where this is useful is when the argument is a substitution from a
9108 variable or a message header.
9110 .vitem &*${quote_local_part:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9111 .cindex "&%quote_local_part%& expansion item"
9112 This operator is like &%quote%&, except that it quotes the string only if
9113 required to do so by the rules of RFC 2822 for quoting local parts. For
9114 example, a plus sign would not cause quoting (but it would for &%quote%&).
9115 If you are creating a new email address from the contents of &$local_part$&
9116 (or any other unknown data), you should always use this operator.
9119 .vitem &*${quote_*&<&'lookup-type'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9120 .cindex "quoting" "lookup-specific"
9121 This operator applies lookup-specific quoting rules to the string. Each
9122 query-style lookup type has its own quoting rules which are described with
9123 the lookups in chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. For example,
9125 ${quote_ldap:two * two}
9131 For single-key lookup types, no quoting is ever necessary and this operator
9132 yields an unchanged string.
9135 .vitem &*${rxquote:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9136 .cindex "quoting" "in regular expressions"
9137 .cindex "regular expressions" "quoting"
9138 .cindex "&%rxquote%& expansion item"
9139 The &%rxquote%& operator inserts a backslash before any non-alphanumeric
9140 characters in its argument. This is useful when substituting the values of
9141 variables or headers inside regular expressions.
9144 .vitem &*${rfc2047:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9145 .cindex "expansion" "RFC 2047"
9146 .cindex "RFC 2047" "expansion operator"
9147 .cindex "&%rfc2047%& expansion item"
9148 This operator encodes text according to the rules of RFC 2047. This is an
9149 encoding that is used in header lines to encode non-ASCII characters. It is
9150 assumed that the input string is in the encoding specified by the
9151 &%headers_charset%& option, which defaults to ISO-8859-1. If the string
9152 contains only characters in the range 33&--126, and no instances of the
9155 ? = ( ) < > @ , ; : \ " . [ ] _
9157 it is not modified. Otherwise, the result is the RFC 2047 encoding of the
9158 string, using as many &"encoded words"& as necessary to encode all the
9163 .vitem &*${sha1:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9164 .cindex "SHA-1 hash"
9165 .cindex "expansion" "SHA-1 hashing"
9166 .cindex "&%sha2%& expansion item"
9167 The &%sha1%& operator computes the SHA-1 hash value of the string, and returns
9168 it as a 40-digit hexadecimal number, in which any letters are in upper case.
9171 .vitem &*${stat:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9172 .cindex "expansion" "statting a file"
9173 .cindex "file" "extracting characteristics"
9174 .cindex "&%stat%& expansion item"
9175 The string, after expansion, must be a file path. A call to the &[stat()]&
9176 function is made for this path. If &[stat()]& fails, an error occurs and the
9177 expansion fails. If it succeeds, the data from the stat replaces the item, as a
9178 series of <&'name'&>=<&'value'&> pairs, where the values are all numerical,
9179 except for the value of &"smode"&. The names are: &"mode"& (giving the mode as
9180 a 4-digit octal number), &"smode"& (giving the mode in symbolic format as a
9181 10-character string, as for the &'ls'& command), &"inode"&, &"device"&,
9182 &"links"&, &"uid"&, &"gid"&, &"size"&, &"atime"&, &"mtime"&, and &"ctime"&. You
9183 can extract individual fields using the &%extract%& expansion item.
9185 The use of the &%stat%& expansion in users' filter files can be locked out by
9186 the system administrator. &*Warning*&: The file size may be incorrect on 32-bit
9187 systems for files larger than 2GB.
9189 .vitem &*${str2b64:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9190 .cindex "expansion" "base64 encoding"
9191 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in string expansion"
9192 .cindex "&%str2b64%& expansion item"
9193 This operator converts a string into one that is base64 encoded.
9197 .vitem &*${strlen:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9198 .cindex "expansion" "string length"
9199 .cindex "string" "length in expansion"
9200 .cindex "&%strlen%& expansion item"
9201 The item is replace by the length of the expanded string, expressed as a
9202 decimal number. &*Note*&: Do not confuse &%strlen%& with &%length%&.
9205 .vitem &*${substr_*&<&'start'&>&*_*&<&'length'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9206 .cindex "&%substr%& expansion item"
9207 .cindex "substring extraction"
9208 .cindex "expansion" "substring expansion"
9209 The &%substr%& operator is a simpler interface to the &%substr%& function that
9210 can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to strings
9211 that change when expanded). The effect is the same as
9213 ${substr{<start>}{<length>}{<string>}}
9215 See the description of the general &%substr%& item above for details. The
9216 abbreviation &%s%& can be used when &%substr%& is used as an operator.
9218 .vitem &*${time_eval:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9219 .cindex "&%time_eval%& expansion item"
9220 .cindex "time interval" "decoding"
9221 This item converts an Exim time interval such as &`2d4h5m`& into a number of
9224 .vitem &*${time_interval:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9225 .cindex "&%time_interval%& expansion item"
9226 .cindex "time interval" "formatting"
9227 The argument (after sub-expansion) must be a sequence of decimal digits that
9228 represents an interval of time as a number of seconds. It is converted into a
9229 number of larger units and output in Exim's normal time format, for example,
9232 .vitem &*${uc:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9233 .cindex "case forcing in strings"
9234 .cindex "string" "case forcing"
9235 .cindex "upper casing"
9236 .cindex "expansion" "case forcing"
9237 .cindex "&%uc%& expansion item"
9238 This forces the letters in the string into upper-case.
9246 .section "Expansion conditions" "SECTexpcond"
9247 .cindex "expansion" "conditions"
9248 The following conditions are available for testing by the &%${if%& construct
9249 while expanding strings:
9252 .vitem &*!*&<&'condition'&>
9253 .cindex "expansion" "negating a condition"
9254 .cindex "negation" "in expansion condition"
9255 Preceding any condition with an exclamation mark negates the result of the
9258 .vitem <&'symbolic&~operator'&>&~&*{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9259 .cindex "numeric comparison"
9260 .cindex "expansion" "numeric comparison"
9261 There are a number of symbolic operators for doing numeric comparisons. They
9267 &`>= `& greater or equal
9269 &`<= `& less or equal
9273 ${if >{$message_size}{10M} ...
9275 Note that the general negation operator provides for inequality testing. The
9276 two strings must take the form of optionally signed decimal integers,
9277 optionally followed by one of the letters &"K"& or &"M"& (in either upper or
9278 lower case), signifying multiplication by 1024 or 1024*1024, respectively.
9280 .vitem &*crypteq&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9281 .cindex "expansion" "encrypted comparison"
9282 .cindex "encrypted strings" "comparing"
9283 .cindex "&%crypteq%& expansion condition"
9284 This condition is included in the Exim binary if it is built to support any
9285 authentication mechanisms (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&). Otherwise, it is
9286 necessary to define SUPPORT_CRYPTEQ in &_Local/Makefile_& to get &%crypteq%&
9287 included in the binary.
9289 The &%crypteq%& condition has two arguments. The first is encrypted and
9290 compared against the second, which is already encrypted. The second string may
9291 be in the LDAP form for storing encrypted strings, which starts with the
9292 encryption type in curly brackets, followed by the data. If the second string
9293 does not begin with &"{"& it is assumed to be encrypted with &[crypt()]& or
9294 &[crypt16()]& (see below), since such strings cannot begin with &"{"&.
9295 Typically this will be a field from a password file. An example of an encrypted
9296 string in LDAP form is:
9298 {md5}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==
9300 If such a string appears directly in an expansion, the curly brackets have to
9301 be quoted, because they are part of the expansion syntax. For example:
9303 ${if crypteq {test}{\{md5\}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==}{yes}{no}}
9305 The following encryption types (whose names are matched case-independently) are
9310 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in encrypted password"
9311 &%{md5}%& computes the MD5 digest of the first string, and expresses this as
9312 printable characters to compare with the remainder of the second string. If the
9313 length of the comparison string is 24, Exim assumes that it is base64 encoded
9314 (as in the above example). If the length is 32, Exim assumes that it is a
9315 hexadecimal encoding of the MD5 digest. If the length not 24 or 32, the
9319 .cindex "SHA-1 hash"
9320 &%{sha1}%& computes the SHA-1 digest of the first string, and expresses this as
9321 printable characters to compare with the remainder of the second string. If the
9322 length of the comparison string is 28, Exim assumes that it is base64 encoded.
9323 If the length is 40, Exim assumes that it is a hexadecimal encoding of the
9324 SHA-1 digest. If the length is not 28 or 40, the comparison fails.
9327 .cindex "&[crypt()]&"
9328 &%{crypt}%& calls the &[crypt()]& function, which traditionally used to use
9329 only the first eight characters of the password. However, in modern operating
9330 systems this is no longer true, and in many cases the entire password is used,
9331 whatever its length.
9333 .cindex "&[crypt16()]&"
9334 &%{crypt16}%& calls the &[crypt16()]& function (also known as &[bigcrypt()]&),
9335 which was orginally created to use up to 16 characters of the password. Again,
9336 in modern operating systems, more characters may be used.
9339 Exim has its own version of &[crypt16()]& (which is just a double call to
9340 &[crypt()]&). For operating systems that have their own version, setting
9341 HAVE_CRYPT16 in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim causes it to use the
9342 operating system version instead of its own. This option is set by default in
9343 the OS-dependent &_Makefile_& for those operating systems that are known to
9344 support &[crypt16()]&.
9346 If you do not put any curly bracket encryption type in a &%crypteq%&
9347 comparison, the default is either &`{crypt}`& or &`{crypt16}`&, as determined
9348 by the setting of DEFAULT_CRYPT in &_Local/Makefile_&. The default default is
9349 &`{crypt}`&. Whatever the default, you can always use either function by
9350 specifying it explicitly in curly brackets.
9352 Note that if a password is no longer than 8 characters, the results of
9353 encrypting it with &[crypt()]& and &[crypt16()]& are identical. That means that
9354 &[crypt16()]& is backwards compatible, as long as nobody feeds it a password
9355 longer than 8 characters.
9357 .vitem &*def:*&<&'variable&~name'&>
9358 .cindex "expansion" "checking for empty variable"
9359 .cindex "&%def%& expansion condition"
9360 The &%def%& condition must be followed by the name of one of the expansion
9361 variables defined in section &<<SECTexpvar>>&. The condition is true if the
9362 variable does not contain the empty string. For example:
9364 ${if def:sender_ident {from $sender_ident}}
9366 Note that the variable name is given without a leading &%$%& character. If the
9367 variable does not exist, the expansion fails.
9369 .vitem "&*def:header_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~&~or&~&&&
9370 &~&*def:h_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
9371 .cindex "expansion" "checking header line existence"
9372 This condition is true if a message is being processed and the named header
9373 exists in the message. For example,
9375 ${if def:header_reply-to:{$h_reply-to:}{$h_from:}}
9377 &*Note*&: No &%$%& appears before &%header_%& or &%h_%& in the condition, and
9378 the header name must be terminated by a colon if white space does not follow.
9380 .vitem &*eq&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9381 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9382 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9383 .cindex "&%eq%& expansion condition"
9384 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the two
9385 resulting strings are identical, including the case of letters.
9387 .vitem &*eqi&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9388 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9389 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9390 .cindex "&%eqi%& expansion condition"
9391 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the two
9392 resulting strings are identical when compared in a case-independent way.
9394 .vitem &*exists&~{*&<&'file&~name'&>&*}*&
9395 .cindex "expansion" "file existence test"
9396 .cindex "file" "existence test"
9397 .cindex "&%exists%&, expansion condition"
9398 The substring is first expanded and then interpreted as an absolute path. The
9399 condition is true if the named file (or directory) exists. The existence test
9400 is done by calling the &[stat()]& function. The use of the &%exists%& test in
9401 users' filter files may be locked out by the system administrator.
9403 .vitem &*first_delivery*&
9404 .cindex "delivery" "first"
9405 .cindex "first delivery"
9406 .cindex "expansion" "first delivery test"
9407 .cindex "&%first_delivery%& expansion condition"
9408 This condition, which has no data, is true during a message's first delivery
9409 attempt. It is false during any subsequent delivery attempts.
9411 .vitem &*ge&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9412 .cindex "&%ge%& expansion condition"
9415 .vitem &*gei&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9416 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9417 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9418 .cindex "&%gei%& expansion condition"
9419 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9420 string is lexically greater than or equal to the second string: for &%ge%& the
9421 comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for &%gei%& the comparison is
9424 .vitem &*gt&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9425 .cindex "&%gt%& expansion condition"
9428 .vitem &*gti&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9429 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9430 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9431 .cindex "&%gti%& expansion condition"
9432 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9433 string is lexically greater than the second string: for &%gt%& the comparison
9434 includes the case of letters, whereas for &%gti%& the comparison is
9437 .vitem &*isip&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9438 .cindex "&%isip%& expansion condition"
9441 .vitem &*isip4&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9442 .cindex "&%isip4%& expansion condition"
9445 .vitem &*isip6&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9446 .cindex "IP address" "testing string format"
9447 .cindex "string" "testing for IP address"
9448 .cindex "&%isip6%& expansion condition"
9449 The substring is first expanded, and then tested to see if it has the form of
9450 an IP address. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are valid for &%isip%&, whereas
9451 &%isip4%& and &%isip6%& test just for IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, respectively. For
9452 example, you could use
9454 ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}...
9456 to test which version of IP an incoming SMTP connection is using.
9459 .vitem &*ldapauth&~{*&<&'ldap&~query'&>&*}*&
9460 .cindex "LDAP" "use for authentication"
9461 .cindex "expansion" "LDAP authentication test"
9462 .cindex "&%ldapauth%& expansion condition"
9463 This condition supports user authentication using LDAP. See section
9464 &<<SECTldap>>& for details of how to use LDAP in lookups and the syntax of
9465 queries. For this use, the query must contain a user name and password. The
9466 query itself is not used, and can be empty. The condition is true if the
9467 password is not empty, and the user name and password are accepted by the LDAP
9468 server. An empty password is rejected without calling LDAP because LDAP binds
9469 with an empty password are considered anonymous regardless of the username, and
9470 will succeed in most configurations. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details
9471 of SMTP authentication, and chapter &<<CHAPplaintext>>& for an example of how
9475 .vitem &*le&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9476 .cindex "&%le%& expansion condition"
9479 .vitem &*lei&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9480 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9481 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9482 .cindex "&%lei%& expansion condition"
9483 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9484 string is lexically less than or equal to the second string: for &%le%& the
9485 comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for &%lei%& the comparison is
9488 .vitem &*lt&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9489 .cindex "&%lt%& expansion condition"
9492 .vitem &*lti&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9493 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9494 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9495 .cindex "&%lti%& expansion condition"
9496 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9497 string is lexically less than the second string: for &%lt%& the comparison
9498 includes the case of letters, whereas for &%lti%& the comparison is
9502 .vitem &*match&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9503 .cindex "expansion" "regular expression comparison"
9504 .cindex "regular expressions" "match in expanded string"
9505 .cindex "&%match%&, expansion condition"
9506 The two substrings are first expanded. The second is then treated as a regular
9507 expression and applied to the first. Because of the pre-expansion, if the
9508 regular expression contains dollar, or backslash characters, they must be
9509 escaped. Care must also be taken if the regular expression contains braces
9510 (curly brackets). A closing brace must be escaped so that it is not taken as a
9511 premature termination of <&'string2'&>. The easiest approach is to use the
9512 &`\N`& feature to disable expansion of the regular expression.
9515 ${if match {$local_part}{\N^\d{3}\N} ...
9517 If the whole expansion string is in double quotes, further escaping of
9518 backslashes is also required.
9520 The condition is true if the regular expression match succeeds.
9521 The regular expression is not required to begin with a circumflex
9522 metacharacter, but if there is no circumflex, the expression is not anchored,
9523 and it may match anywhere in the subject, not just at the start. If you want
9524 the pattern to match at the end of the subject, you must include the &`$`&
9525 metacharacter at an appropriate point.
9527 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%if%& expansion"
9528 At the start of an &%if%& expansion the values of the numeric variable
9529 substitutions &$1$& etc. are remembered. Obeying a &%match%& condition that
9530 succeeds causes them to be reset to the substrings of that condition and they
9531 will have these values during the expansion of the success string. At the end
9532 of the &%if%& expansion, the previous values are restored. After testing a
9533 combination of conditions using &%or%&, the subsequent values of the numeric
9534 variables are those of the condition that succeeded.
9536 .vitem &*match_address&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9537 .cindex "&%match_address%& expansion condition"
9538 See &*match_local_part*&.
9540 .vitem &*match_domain&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9541 .cindex "&%match_domain%& expansion condition"
9542 See &*match_local_part*&.
9544 .vitem &*match_ip&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9545 .cindex "&%match_ip%& expansion condition"
9546 This condition matches an IP address to a list of IP address patterns. It must
9547 be followed by two argument strings. The first (after expansion) must be an IP
9548 address or an empty string. The second (after expansion) is a restricted host
9549 list that can match only an IP address, not a host name. For example:
9551 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{1.2.3.4:5.6.7.8}{...}{...}}
9553 The specific types of host list item that are permitted in the list are:
9556 An IP address, optionally with a CIDR mask.
9558 A single asterisk, which matches any IP address.
9560 An empty item, which matches only if the IP address is empty. This could be
9561 useful for testing for a locally submitted message or one from specific hosts
9562 in a single test such as
9563 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
9564 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
9566 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{:4.3.2.1:...}{...}{...}}
9568 where the first item in the list is the empty string.
9570 The item @[] matches any of the local host's interface addresses.
9572 Lookups are assumed to be &"net-"& style lookups, even if &`net-`& is not
9573 specified. Thus, the following are equivalent:
9575 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{lsearch;/some/file}...
9576 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{net-lsearch;/some/file}...
9578 You do need to specify the &`net-`& prefix if you want to specify a
9579 specific address mask, for example, by using &`net24-`&.
9582 Consult section &<<SECThoslispatip>>& for further details of these patterns.
9584 .vitem &*match_local_part&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9585 .cindex "domain list" "in expansion condition"
9586 .cindex "address list" "in expansion condition"
9587 .cindex "local part list" "in expansion condition"
9588 .cindex "&%match_local_part%& expansion condition"
9589 This condition, together with &%match_address%& and &%match_domain%&, make it
9590 possible to test domain, address, and local part lists within expansions. Each
9591 condition requires two arguments: an item and a list to match. A trivial
9594 ${if match_domain{a.b.c}{x.y.z:a.b.c:p.q.r}{yes}{no}}
9596 In each case, the second argument may contain any of the allowable items for a
9597 list of the appropriate type. Also, because the second argument (after
9598 expansion) is a standard form of list, it is possible to refer to a named list.
9599 Thus, you can use conditions like this:
9601 ${if match_domain{$domain}{+local_domains}{...
9603 .cindex "&`+caseful`&"
9604 For address lists, the matching starts off caselessly, but the &`+caseful`&
9605 item can be used, as in all address lists, to cause subsequent items to
9606 have their local parts matched casefully. Domains are always matched
9609 &*Note*&: Host lists are &'not'& supported in this way. This is because
9610 hosts have two identities: a name and an IP address, and it is not clear
9611 how to specify cleanly how such a test would work. However, IP addresses can be
9612 matched using &%match_ip%&.
9614 .vitem &*pam&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*:*&<&'string2'&>&*:...}*&
9615 .cindex "PAM authentication"
9616 .cindex "AUTH" "with PAM"
9617 .cindex "Solaris" "PAM support"
9618 .cindex "expansion" "PAM authentication test"
9619 .cindex "&%pam%& expansion condition"
9620 &'Pluggable Authentication Modules'&
9621 (&url(http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/)) are a facility that is
9622 available in the latest releases of Solaris and in some GNU/Linux
9623 distributions. The Exim support, which is intended for use in conjunction with
9624 the SMTP AUTH command, is available only if Exim is compiled with
9628 in &_Local/Makefile_&. You probably need to add &%-lpam%& to EXTRALIBS, and
9629 in some releases of GNU/Linux &%-ldl%& is also needed.
9631 The argument string is first expanded, and the result must be a
9632 colon-separated list of strings. Leading and trailing white space is ignored.
9633 The PAM module is initialized with the service name &"exim"& and the user name
9634 taken from the first item in the colon-separated data string (<&'string1'&>).
9635 The remaining items in the data string are passed over in response to requests
9636 from the authentication function. In the simple case there will only be one
9637 request, for a password, so the data consists of just two strings.
9639 There can be problems if any of the strings are permitted to contain colon
9640 characters. In the usual way, these have to be doubled to avoid being taken as
9641 separators. If the data is being inserted from a variable, the &%sg%& expansion
9642 item can be used to double any existing colons. For example, the configuration
9643 of a LOGIN authenticator might contain this setting:
9645 server_condition = ${if pam{$1:${sg{$2}{:}{::}}}{yes}{no}}
9647 For a PLAIN authenticator you could use:
9649 server_condition = ${if pam{$2:${sg{$3}{:}{::}}}{yes}{no}}
9651 In some operating systems, PAM authentication can be done only from a process
9652 running as root. Since Exim is running as the Exim user when receiving
9653 messages, this means that PAM cannot be used directly in those systems.
9654 A patched version of the &'pam_unix'& module that comes with the
9655 Linux PAM package is available from &url(http://www.e-admin.de/pam_exim/).
9656 The patched module allows one special uid/gid combination, in addition to root,
9657 to authenticate. If you build the patched module to allow the Exim user and
9658 group, PAM can then be used from an Exim authenticator.
9661 .vitem &*pwcheck&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*:*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9662 .cindex "&'pwcheck'& daemon"
9664 .cindex "expansion" "&'pwcheck'& authentication test"
9665 .cindex "&%pwcheck%& expansion condition"
9666 This condition supports user authentication using the Cyrus &'pwcheck'& daemon.
9667 This is one way of making it possible for passwords to be checked by a process
9668 that is not running as root. &*Note*&: The use of &'pwcheck'& is now
9669 deprecated. Its replacement is &'saslauthd'& (see below).
9671 The pwcheck support is not included in Exim by default. You need to specify
9672 the location of the pwcheck daemon's socket in &_Local/Makefile_& before
9673 building Exim. For example:
9675 CYRUS_PWCHECK_SOCKET=/var/pwcheck/pwcheck
9677 You do not need to install the full Cyrus software suite in order to use
9678 the pwcheck daemon. You can compile and install just the daemon alone
9679 from the Cyrus SASL library. Ensure that &'exim'& is the only user that has
9680 access to the &_/var/pwcheck_& directory.
9682 The &%pwcheck%& condition takes one argument, which must be the user name and
9683 password, separated by a colon. For example, in a LOGIN authenticator
9684 configuration, you might have this:
9686 server_condition = ${if pwcheck{$1:$2}{1}{0}}
9688 .vitem &*queue_running*&
9689 .cindex "queue runner" "detecting when delivering from"
9690 .cindex "expansion" "queue runner test"
9691 .cindex "&%queue_runnint%& expansion condition"
9692 This condition, which has no data, is true during delivery attempts that are
9693 initiated by queue runner processes, and false otherwise.
9696 .vitem &*radius&~{*&<&'authentication&~string'&>&*}*&
9698 .cindex "expansion" "Radius authentication"
9699 .cindex "&%radiu%& expansion condition"
9700 Radius authentication (RFC 2865) is supported in a similar way to PAM. You must
9701 set RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_& to specify the location of
9702 the Radius client configuration file in order to build Exim with Radius
9705 With just that one setting, Exim expects to be linked with the &%radiusclient%&
9706 library, using the original API. If you are using release 0.4.0 or later of
9707 this library, you need to set
9709 RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADIUSCLIENTNEW
9711 in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim. You can also link Exim with the
9712 &%libradius%& library that comes with FreeBSD. To do this, set
9714 RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADLIB
9716 in &_Local/Makefile_&, in addition to setting RADIUS_CONFIGURE_FILE.
9717 You may also have to supply a suitable setting in EXTRALIBS so that the
9718 Radius library can be found when Exim is linked.
9720 The string specified by RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE is expanded and passed to the
9721 Radius client library, which calls the Radius server. The condition is true if
9722 the authentication is successful. For example:
9724 server_condition = ${if radius{<arguments>}{yes}{no}}
9728 .vitem "&*saslauthd&~{{*&<&'user'&>&*}{*&<&'password'&>&*}&&&
9729 {*&<&'service'&>&*}{*&<&'realm'&>&*}}*&"
9730 .cindex "&'saslauthd'& daemon"
9732 .cindex "expansion" "&'saslauthd'& authentication test"
9733 .cindex "&%saslauthd%& expansion condition"
9734 This condition supports user authentication using the Cyrus &'saslauthd'&
9735 daemon. This replaces the older &'pwcheck'& daemon, which is now deprecated.
9736 Using this daemon is one way of making it possible for passwords to be checked
9737 by a process that is not running as root.
9739 The saslauthd support is not included in Exim by default. You need to specify
9740 the location of the saslauthd daemon's socket in &_Local/Makefile_& before
9741 building Exim. For example:
9743 CYRUS_SASLAUTHD_SOCKET=/var/state/saslauthd/mux
9745 You do not need to install the full Cyrus software suite in order to use
9746 the saslauthd daemon. You can compile and install just the daemon alone
9747 from the Cyrus SASL library.
9749 Up to four arguments can be supplied to the &%saslauthd%& condition, but only
9750 two are mandatory. For example:
9752 server_condition = ${if saslauthd{{$1}{$2}}{1}{0}}
9754 The service and the realm are optional (which is why the arguments are enclosed
9755 in their own set of braces). For details of the meaning of the service and
9756 realm, and how to run the daemon, consult the Cyrus documentation.
9761 .section "Combining expansion conditions"
9762 .cindex "expansion" "combining conditions"
9763 Several conditions can be tested at once by combining them using the &%and%&
9764 and &%or%& combination conditions. Note that &%and%& and &%or%& are complete
9765 conditions on their own, and precede their lists of sub-conditions. Each
9766 sub-condition must be enclosed in braces within the overall braces that contain
9767 the list. No repetition of &%if%& is used.
9771 .vitem &*or&~{{*&<&'cond1'&>&*}{*&<&'cond2'&>&*}...}*&
9772 .cindex "&""or""& expansion condition"
9773 .cindex "expansion" "&""or""& of conditions"
9774 The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right. The condition is true if
9775 any one of the sub-conditions is true.
9778 ${if or {{eq{$local_part}{spqr}}{eq{$domain}{testing.com}}}...
9780 When a true sub-condition is found, the following ones are parsed but not
9781 evaluated. If there are several &"match"& sub-conditions the values of the
9782 numeric variables afterwards are taken from the first one that succeeds.
9784 .vitem &*and&~{{*&<&'cond1'&>&*}{*&<&'cond2'&>&*}...}*&
9785 .cindex "&""and""& expansion condition"
9786 .cindex "expansion" "&""and""& of conditions"
9787 The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right. The condition is true if
9788 all of the sub-conditions are true. If there are several &"match"&
9789 sub-conditions, the values of the numeric variables afterwards are taken from
9790 the last one. When a false sub-condition is found, the following ones are
9791 parsed but not evaluated.
9797 .section "Expansion variables" "SECTexpvar"
9798 .cindex "expansion variables" "list of"
9799 This section contains an alphabetical list of all the expansion variables. Some
9800 of them are available only when Exim is compiled with specific options such as
9801 support for TLS or the content scanning extension.
9804 .vitem "&$0$&, &$1$&, etc"
9805 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)"
9806 When a &%match%& expansion condition succeeds, these variables contain the
9807 captured substrings identified by the regular expression during subsequent
9808 processing of the success string of the containing &%if%& expansion item. They
9809 may also be set externally by some other matching process which precedes the
9810 expansion of the string. For example, the commands available in Exim filter
9811 files include an &%if%& command with its own regular expression matching
9814 .vitem "&$acl_c0$& &-- &$acl_c19$&"
9815 Values can be placed in these variables by the &%set%& modifier in an ACL. The
9816 values persist throughout the lifetime of an SMTP connection. They can be used
9817 to pass information between ACLs and different invocations of the same ACL.
9818 When a message is received, the values of these variables are saved with the
9819 message, and can be accessed by filters, routers, and transports during
9820 subsequent delivery.
9822 .vitem "&$acl_m0$& &-- &$acl_m19$&"
9823 Values can be placed in these variables by the &%set%& modifier in an ACL. They
9824 retain their values while a message is being received, but are reset
9825 afterwards. They are also reset by MAIL, RSET, EHLO, HELO, and after starting a
9826 TLS session. When a message is received, the values of these variables are
9827 saved with the message, and can be accessed by filters, routers, and transports
9828 during subsequent delivery.
9830 .vitem &$acl_verify_message$&
9831 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
9832 After an address verification has failed, this variable contains the failure
9833 message. It retains its value for use in subsequent modifiers. The message can
9834 be preserved by coding like this:
9836 warn !verify = sender
9837 set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message
9839 You can use &$acl_verify_message$& during the expansion of the &%message%& or
9840 &%log_message%& modifiers, to include information about the verification
9843 .vitem &$address_data$&
9844 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
9845 This variable is set by means of the &%address_data%& option in routers. The
9846 value then remains with the address while it is processed by subsequent routers
9847 and eventually a transport. If the transport is handling multiple addresses,
9848 the value from the first address is used. See chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&
9849 for more details. &*Note*&: The contents of &$address_data$& are visible in
9852 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify
9853 a recipient address, the final value is still in the variable for subsequent
9854 conditions and modifiers of the ACL statement. If routing the address caused it
9855 to be redirected to just one address, the child address is also routed as part
9856 of the verification, and in this case the final value of &$address_data$& is
9857 from the child's routing.
9859 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify a
9860 sender address, the final value is also preserved, but this time in
9861 &$sender_address_data$&, to distinguish it from data from a recipient
9864 In both cases (recipient and sender verification), the value does not persist
9865 after the end of the current ACL statement. If you want to preserve
9866 these values for longer, you can save them in ACL variables.
9868 .vitem &$address_file$&
9869 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
9870 When, as a result of aliasing, forwarding, or filtering, a message is directed
9871 to a specific file, this variable holds the name of the file when the transport
9872 is running. At other times, the variable is empty. For example, using the
9873 default configuration, if user &%r2d2%& has a &_.forward_& file containing
9877 then when the &(address_file)& transport is running, &$address_file$&
9878 contains &"/home/r2d2/savemail"&.
9880 .cindex "Sieve filter" "value of &$address_file$&"
9881 For Sieve filters, the value may be &"inbox"& or a relative folder name. It is
9882 then up to the transport configuration to generate an appropriate absolute path
9883 to the relevant file.
9885 .vitem &$address_pipe$&
9886 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
9887 When, as a result of aliasing or forwarding, a message is directed to a pipe,
9888 this variable holds the pipe command when the transport is running.
9890 .vitem "&$auth1$& &-- &$auth3$&"
9891 .cindex "&$auth1$&, &$auth2$&, etc"
9892 These variables are used in SMTP authenticators (see chapters
9893 &<<CHAPplaintext>>&&--&<<CHAPspa>>&). Elsewhere, they are empty.
9895 .vitem &$authenticated_id$&
9896 .cindex "authentication" "id"
9897 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
9898 When a server successfully authenticates a client it may be configured to
9899 preserve some of the authentication information in the variable
9900 &$authenticated_id$& (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&). For example, a
9901 user/password authenticator configuration might preserve the user name for use
9902 in the routers. Note that this is not the same information that is saved in
9903 &$sender_host_authenticated$&. When a message is submitted locally (that is,
9904 not over a TCP connection), the value of &$authenticated_id$& is the login name
9905 of the calling process.
9907 .vitem &$authenticated_sender$&
9908 .cindex "sender" "authenticated"
9909 .cindex "authentication" "sender"
9910 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
9911 .cindex "&$authenticated_sender$&"
9912 When acting as a server, Exim takes note of the AUTH= parameter on an incoming
9913 SMTP MAIL command if it believes the sender is sufficiently trusted, as
9914 described in section &<<SECTauthparamail>>&. Unless the data is the string
9915 &"<>"&, it is set as the authenticated sender of the message, and the value is
9916 available during delivery in the &$authenticated_sender$& variable. If the
9917 sender is not trusted, Exim accepts the syntax of AUTH=, but ignores the data.
9919 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
9920 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP connection), the
9921 value of &$authenticated_sender$& is an address constructed from the login
9922 name of the calling process and &$qualify_domain$&.
9925 .vitem &$authentication_failed$&
9926 .cindex "authentication" "failure"
9927 .cindex "&$authentication_failed$&"
9928 This variable is set to &"1"& in an Exim server if a client issues an AUTH
9929 command that does not succeed. Otherwise it is set to &"0"&. This makes it
9930 possible to distinguish between &"did not try to authenticate"&
9931 (&$sender_host_authenticated$& is empty and &$authentication_failed$& is set to
9932 &"0"&) and &"tried to authenticate but failed"& (&$sender_host_authenticated$&
9933 is empty and &$authentication_failed$& is set to &"1"&). Failure includes any
9934 negative response to an AUTH command, including (for example) an attempt to use
9935 an undefined mechanism.
9937 .vitem &$body_linecount$&
9938 .cindex "message body" "line count"
9939 .cindex "body of message" "line count"
9940 .cindex "&$body_linecount$&"
9941 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
9942 number of lines in the message's body. See also &$message_linecount$&.
9944 .vitem &$body_zerocount$&
9945 .cindex "message body" "binary zero count"
9946 .cindex "body of message" "binary zero count"
9947 .cindex "binary zero" "in message body"
9948 .cindex "&$body_zerocount$&"
9949 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
9950 number of binary zero bytes in the message's body.
9952 .vitem &$bounce_recipient$&
9953 .cindex "&$bounce_recipient$&"
9954 This is set to the recipient address of a bounce message while Exim is creating
9955 it. It is useful if a customized bounce message text file is in use (see
9956 chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&).
9958 .vitem &$bounce_return_size_limit$&
9959 .cindex "&$bounce_return_size_limit$&"
9960 This contains the value set in the &%bounce_return_size_limit%& option, rounded
9961 up to a multiple of 1000. It is useful when a customized error message text
9962 file is in use (see chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&).
9964 .vitem &$caller_gid$&
9965 .cindex "gid (group id)" "caller"
9966 .cindex "&$caller_gid$&"
9967 The real group id under which the process that called Exim was running. This is
9968 not the same as the group id of the originator of a message (see
9969 &$originator_gid$&). If Exim re-execs itself, this variable in the new
9970 incarnation normally contains the Exim gid.
9972 .vitem &$caller_uid$&
9973 .cindex "uid (user id)" "caller"
9974 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
9975 The real user id under which the process that called Exim was running. This is
9976 not the same as the user id of the originator of a message (see
9977 &$originator_uid$&). If Exim re-execs itself, this variable in the new
9978 incarnation normally contains the Exim uid.
9980 .vitem &$compile_date$&
9981 .cindex "&$compile_date$&"
9982 The date on which the Exim binary was compiled.
9984 .vitem &$compile_number$&
9985 .cindex "&$compile_number$&"
9986 The building process for Exim keeps a count of the number
9987 of times it has been compiled. This serves to distinguish different
9988 compilations of the same version of the program.
9990 .vitem &$demime_errorlevel$&
9991 .cindex "&$demime_errorlevel$&"
9992 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with
9993 the content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For
9994 details, see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
9996 .vitem &$demime_reason$&
9997 .cindex "&$demime_reason$&"
9998 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
9999 content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For details,
10000 see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
10003 .vitem &$dnslist_domain$&
10004 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
10005 .cindex "&$dnslist_domain$&"
10006 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list,
10007 the list's domain name is put into this variable so that it can be included in
10008 the rejection message.
10010 .vitem &$dnslist_text$&
10011 .cindex "&$dnslist_text$&"
10012 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list, the
10013 contents of any associated TXT record are placed in this variable.
10015 .vitem &$dnslist_value$&
10016 .cindex "&$dnslist_value$&"
10017 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list,
10018 the IP address from the resource record is placed in this variable.
10019 If there are multiple records, all the addresses are included, comma-space
10023 .cindex "&$domain$&"
10024 When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this variable
10025 contains the domain. Global address rewriting happens when a message is
10026 received, so the value of &$domain$& during routing and delivery is the value
10027 after rewriting. &$domain$& is set during user filtering, but not during system
10028 filtering, because a message may have many recipients and the system filter is
10031 When more than one address is being delivered at once (for example, several
10032 RCPT commands in one SMTP delivery), &$domain$& is set only if they all
10033 have the same domain. Transports can be restricted to handling only one domain
10034 at a time if the value of &$domain$& is required at transport time &-- this is
10035 the default for local transports. For further details of the environment in
10036 which local transports are run, see chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
10038 .cindex "&%delay_warning_condition%&"
10039 At the end of a delivery, if all deferred addresses have the same domain, it is
10040 set in &$domain$& during the expansion of &%delay_warning_condition%&.
10042 The &$domain$& variable is also used in some other circumstances:
10045 When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, &$domain$& contains the domain of
10046 the recipient address. The domain of the &'sender'& address is in
10047 &$sender_address_domain$& at both MAIL time and at RCPT time. &$domain$& is not
10048 normally set during the running of the MAIL ACL. However, if the sender address
10049 is verified with a callout during the MAIL ACL, the sender domain is placed in
10050 &$domain$& during the expansions of &%hosts%&, &%interface%&, and &%port%& in
10051 the &(smtp)& transport.
10054 When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&),
10055 &$domain$& contains the domain portion of the address that is being rewritten;
10056 it can be used in the expansion of the replacement address, for example, to
10057 rewrite domains by file lookup.
10060 With one important exception, whenever a domain list is being scanned,
10061 &$domain$& contains the subject domain. &*Exception*&: When a domain list in
10062 a &%sender_domains%& condition in an ACL is being processed, the subject domain
10063 is in &$sender_address_domain$& and not in &$domain$&. It works this way so
10064 that, in a RCPT ACL, the sender domain list can be dependent on the
10065 recipient domain (which is what is in &$domain$& at this time).
10068 .cindex "ETRN" "value of &$domain$&"
10069 .cindex "&%smtp_etrn_command%&"
10070 When the &%smtp_etrn_command%& option is being expanded, &$domain$& contains
10071 the complete argument of the ETRN command (see section &<<SECTETRN>>&).
10075 .vitem &$domain_data$&
10076 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
10077 When the &%domains%& option on a router matches a domain by
10078 means of a lookup, the data read by the lookup is available during the running
10079 of the router as &$domain_data$&. In addition, if the driver routes the
10080 address to a transport, the value is available in that transport. If the
10081 transport is handling multiple addresses, the value from the first address is
10084 &$domain_data$& is also set when the &%domains%& condition in an ACL matches a
10085 domain by means of a lookup. The data read by the lookup is available during
10086 the rest of the ACL statement. In all other situations, this variable expands
10089 .vitem &$exim_gid$&
10090 .cindex "&$exim_gid$&"
10091 This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim group id.
10093 .vitem &$exim_path$&
10094 .cindex "&$exim_path$&"
10095 This variable contains the path to the Exim binary.
10097 .vitem &$exim_uid$&
10098 .cindex "&$exim_uid$&"
10099 This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim user id.
10101 .vitem &$found_extension$&
10102 .cindex "&$found_extension$&"
10103 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
10104 content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For details,
10105 see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
10107 .vitem &$header_$&<&'name'&>
10108 This is not strictly an expansion variable. It is expansion syntax for
10109 inserting the message header line with the given name. Note that the name must
10110 be terminated by colon or white space, because it may contain a wide variety of
10111 characters. Note also that braces must &'not'& be used.
10115 When the &%check_local_user%& option is set for a router, the user's home
10116 directory is placed in &$home$& when the check succeeds. In particular, this
10117 means it is set during the running of users' filter files. A router may also
10118 explicitly set a home directory for use by a transport; this can be overridden
10119 by a setting on the transport itself.
10121 When running a filter test via the &%-bf%& option, &$home$& is set to the value
10122 of the environment variable HOME.
10126 When the &(smtp)& transport is expanding its options for encryption using TLS,
10127 &$host$& contains the name of the host to which it is connected. Likewise, when
10128 used in the client part of an authenticator configuration (see chapter
10129 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&), &$host$& contains the name of the server to which the
10130 client is connected.
10132 .cindex "transport" "filter"
10133 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
10134 When used in a transport filter (see chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&)
10135 &$host$& refers to the host involved in the current connection. When a local
10136 transport is run as a result of a router that sets up a host list, &$host$&
10137 contains the name of the first host.
10139 .vitem &$host_address$&
10140 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
10141 This variable is set to the remote host's IP address whenever &$host$& is set
10142 for a remote connection. It is also set to the IP address that is being checked
10143 when the &%ignore_target_hosts%& option is being processed.
10145 .vitem &$host_data$&
10146 .cindex "&$host_data$&"
10147 If a &%hosts%& condition in an ACL is satisfied by means of a lookup, the
10148 result of the lookup is made available in the &$host_data$& variable. This
10149 allows you, for example, to do things like this:
10151 deny hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
10152 message = $host_data
10154 .vitem &$host_lookup_deferred$&
10155 .cindex "host name lookup" "failure of"
10156 .cindex "&$host_lookup_deferred$&"
10157 This variable normally contains &"0"&, as does &$host_lookup_failed$&. When a
10158 message comes from a remote host and there is an attempt to look up the host's
10159 name from its IP address, and the attempt is not successful, one of these
10160 variables is set to &"1"&.
10163 If the lookup receives a definite negative response (for example, a DNS lookup
10164 succeeded, but no records were found), &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&.
10167 If there is any kind of problem during the lookup, such that Exim cannot
10168 tell whether or not the host name is defined (for example, a timeout for a DNS
10169 lookup), &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to &"1"&.
10172 Looking up a host's name from its IP address consists of more than just a
10173 single reverse lookup. Exim checks that a forward lookup of at least one of the
10174 names it receives from a reverse lookup yields the original IP address. If this
10175 is not the case, Exim does not accept the looked up name(s), and
10176 &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&. Thus, being able to find a name from an
10177 IP address (for example, the existence of a PTR record in the DNS) is not
10178 sufficient on its own for the success of a host name lookup. If the reverse
10179 lookup succeeds, but there is a lookup problem such as a timeout when checking
10180 the result, the name is not accepted, and &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to
10181 &"1"&. See also &$sender_host_name$&.
10183 .vitem &$host_lookup_failed$&
10184 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
10185 See &$host_lookup_deferred$&.
10189 .cindex "&$inode$&"
10190 The only time this variable is set is while expanding the &%directory_file%&
10191 option in the &(appendfile)& transport. The variable contains the inode number
10192 of the temporary file which is about to be renamed. It can be used to construct
10193 a unique name for the file.
10195 .vitem &$interface_address$&
10196 .cindex "&$interface_address$&"
10197 As soon as a server starts processing a TCP/IP connection, this variable is set
10198 to the address of the local IP interface, and &$interface_port$& is set to the
10199 port number. These values are therefore available for use in the &"connect"&
10200 ACL. See also the &%-oMi%& command line option. As well as being used in ACLs,
10201 these variable could be used, for example, to make the file name for a TLS
10202 certificate depend on which interface and/or port is being used.
10204 .vitem &$interface_port$&
10205 .cindex "&$interface_port$&"
10206 See &$interface_address$&.
10209 .cindex "&$ldap_dn$&"
10210 This variable, which is available only when Exim is compiled with LDAP support,
10211 contains the DN from the last entry in the most recently successful LDAP
10214 .vitem &$load_average$&
10215 .cindex "&$load_average$&"
10216 This variable contains the system load average, multiplied by 1000 to that it
10217 is an integer. For example, if the load average is 0.21, the value of the
10218 variable is 210. The value is recomputed every time the variable is referenced.
10220 .vitem &$local_part$&
10221 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
10222 When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this
10223 variable contains the local part. When a number of addresses are being
10224 delivered together (for example, multiple RCPT commands in an SMTP
10225 session), &$local_part$& is not set.
10227 Global address rewriting happens when a message is received, so the value of
10228 &$local_part$& during routing and delivery is the value after rewriting.
10229 &$local_part$& is set during user filtering, but not during system filtering,
10230 because a message may have many recipients and the system filter is called just
10233 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
10234 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
10235 If a local part prefix or suffix has been recognized, it is not included in the
10236 value of &$local_part$& during routing and subsequent delivery. The values of
10237 any prefix or suffix are in &$local_part_prefix$& and
10238 &$local_part_suffix$&, respectively.
10240 When a message is being delivered to a file, pipe, or autoreply transport as a
10241 result of aliasing or forwarding, &$local_part$& is set to the local part of
10242 the parent address, not to the file name or command (see &$address_file$& and
10245 When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, &$local_part$& contains the
10246 local part of the recipient address.
10248 When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&),
10249 &$local_part$& contains the local part of the address that is being rewritten;
10250 it can be used in the expansion of the replacement address, for example.
10252 In all cases, all quoting is removed from the local part. For example, for both
10255 "abc:xyz"@test.example
10256 abc\:xyz@test.example
10258 the value of &$local_part$& is
10262 If you use &$local_part$& to create another address, you should always wrap it
10263 inside a quoting operator. For example, in a &(redirect)& router you could
10266 data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@new.domain.example
10268 &*Note*&: The value of &$local_part$& is normally lower cased. If you want
10269 to process local parts in a case-dependent manner in a router, you can set the
10270 &%caseful_local_part%& option (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&).
10272 .vitem &$local_part_data$&
10273 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
10274 When the &%local_parts%& option on a router matches a local part by means of a
10275 lookup, the data read by the lookup is available during the running of the
10276 router as &$local_part_data$&. In addition, if the driver routes the address
10277 to a transport, the value is available in that transport. If the transport is
10278 handling multiple addresses, the value from the first address is used.
10280 &$local_part_data$& is also set when the &%local_parts%& condition in an ACL
10281 matches a local part by means of a lookup. The data read by the lookup is
10282 available during the rest of the ACL statement. In all other situations, this
10283 variable expands to nothing.
10285 .vitem &$local_part_prefix$&
10286 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
10287 When an address is being routed or delivered, and a
10288 specific prefix for the local part was recognized, it is available in this
10289 variable, having been removed from &$local_part$&.
10291 .vitem &$local_part_suffix$&
10292 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
10293 When an address is being routed or delivered, and a
10294 specific suffix for the local part was recognized, it is available in this
10295 variable, having been removed from &$local_part$&.
10297 .vitem &$local_scan_data$&
10298 .cindex "&$local_scan_data$&"
10299 This variable contains the text returned by the &[local_scan()]& function when
10300 a message is received. See chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>& for more details.
10302 .vitem &$local_user_gid$&
10303 .cindex "&$local_user_gid$&"
10304 See &$local_user_uid$&.
10306 .vitem &$local_user_uid$&
10307 .cindex "&$local_user_uid$&"
10308 This variable and &$local_user_gid$& are set to the uid and gid after the
10309 &%check_local_user%& router precondition succeeds. This means that their values
10310 are available for the remaining preconditions (&%senders%&, &%require_files%&,
10311 and &%condition%&), for the &%address_data%& expansion, and for any
10312 router-specific expansions. At all other times, the values in these variables
10313 are &`(uid_t)(-1)`& and &`(gid_t)(-1)`&, respectively.
10315 .vitem &$localhost_number$&
10316 .cindex "&$localhost_number$&"
10317 This contains the expanded value of the
10318 &%localhost_number%& option. The expansion happens after the main options have
10321 .vitem &$log_inodes$&
10322 .cindex "&$log_inodes$&"
10323 The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's
10324 log files are being written. The value is recalculated whenever the variable is
10325 referenced. If the relevant file system does not have the concept of inodes,
10326 the value of is -1. See also the &%check_log_inodes%& option.
10328 .vitem &$log_space$&
10329 .cindex "&$log_space$&"
10330 The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk
10331 partition where Exim's log files are being written. The value is recalculated
10332 whenever the variable is referenced. If the operating system does not have the
10333 ability to find the amount of free space (only true for experimental systems),
10334 the space value is -1. See also the &%check_log_space%& option.
10337 .vitem &$mailstore_basename$&
10338 .cindex "&$mailstore_basename$&"
10339 This variable is set only when doing deliveries in &"mailstore"& format in the
10340 &(appendfile)& transport. During the expansion of the &%mailstore_prefix%&,
10341 &%mailstore_suffix%&, &%message_prefix%&, and &%message_suffix%& options, it
10342 contains the basename of the files that are being written, that is, the name
10343 without the &".tmp"&, &".env"&, or &".msg"& suffix. At all other times, this
10346 .vitem &$malware_name$&
10347 .cindex "&$malware_name$&"
10348 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
10349 content-scanning extension. It is set to the name of the virus that was found
10350 when the ACL &%malware%& condition is true (see section &<<SECTscanvirus>>&).
10353 .vitem &$message_age$&
10354 .cindex "message" "age of"
10355 .cindex "&$message_age$&"
10356 This variable is set at the start of a delivery attempt to contain the number
10357 of seconds since the message was received. It does not change during a single
10360 .vitem &$message_body$&
10361 .cindex "body of message" "expansion variable"
10362 .cindex "message body" "in expansion"
10363 .cindex "binary zero" "in message body"
10364 .cindex "&$message_body$&"
10365 This variable contains the initial portion of a message's
10366 body while it is being delivered, and is intended mainly for use in filter
10367 files. The maximum number of characters of the body that are put into the
10368 variable is set by the &%message_body_visible%& configuration option; the
10369 default is 500. Newlines are converted into spaces to make it easier to search
10370 for phrases that might be split over a line break.
10371 Binary zeros are also converted into spaces.
10373 .vitem &$message_body_end$&
10374 .cindex "body of message" "expansion variable"
10375 .cindex "message body" "in expansion"
10376 .cindex "&$message_body_end$&"
10377 This variable contains the final portion of a message's
10378 body while it is being delivered. The format and maximum size are as for
10381 .vitem &$message_body_size$&
10382 .cindex "body of message" "size"
10383 .cindex "message body" "size"
10384 .cindex "&$message_body_size$&"
10385 When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the size of the body
10386 in bytes. The count starts from the character after the blank line that
10387 separates the body from the header. Newlines are included in the count. See
10388 also &$message_size$&, &$body_linecount$&, and &$body_zerocount$&.
10390 .vitem &$message_exim_id$&
10391 .cindex "&$message_exim_id$&"
10392 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
10393 unique message id that is generated and used by Exim to identify the message.
10394 An id is not created for a message until after its header has been successfully
10395 received. &*Note*&: This is &'not'& the contents of the &'Message-ID:'& header
10396 line; it is the local id that Exim assigns to the message, for example:
10397 &`1BXTIK-0001yO-VA`&.
10399 .vitem &$message_headers$&
10400 This variable contains a concatenation of all the header lines when a message
10401 is being processed, except for lines added by routers or transports. The header
10402 lines are separated by newline characters.
10404 .vitem &$message_id$&
10405 This is an old name for &$message_exim_id$&, which is now deprecated.
10407 .vitem &$message_linecount$&
10408 .cindex "&$message_linecount$&"
10409 This variable contains the total number of lines in the header and body of the
10410 message. Compare &$body_linecount$&, which is the count for the body only.
10411 During the DATA and content-scanning ACLs, &$message_linecount$& contains the
10412 number of lines received. Before delivery happens (that is, before filters,
10413 routers, and transports run) the count is increased to include the
10414 &'Received:'& header line that Exim standardly adds, and also any other header
10415 lines that are added by ACLs. The blank line that separates the message header
10416 from the body is not counted. Here is an example of the use of this variable in
10419 deny message = Too many lines in message header
10421 ${if <{250}{${eval:$message_linecount - $body_linecount}}}
10423 In the MAIL and RCPT ACLs, the value is zero because at that stage the
10424 message has not yet been received.
10426 .vitem &$message_size$&
10427 .cindex "size" "of message"
10428 .cindex "message" "size"
10429 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
10430 When a message is being processed, this variable contains its size in bytes. In
10431 most cases, the size includes those headers that were received with the
10432 message, but not those (such as &'Envelope-to:'&) that are added to individual
10433 deliveries as they are written. However, there is one special case: during the
10434 expansion of the &%maildir_tag%& option in the &(appendfile)& transport while
10435 doing a delivery in maildir format, the value of &$message_size$& is the
10436 precise size of the file that has been written. See also
10437 &$message_body_size$&, &$body_linecount$&, and &$body_zerocount$&.
10439 .cindex "RCPT" "value of &$message_size$&"
10440 While running an ACL at the time of an SMTP RCPT command, &$message_size$&
10441 contains the size supplied on the MAIL command, or -1 if no size was given. The
10442 value may not, of course, be truthful.
10444 .vitem &$mime_$&&'xxx'&
10445 A number of variables whose names start with &$mime$& are
10446 available when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension. For
10447 details, see section &<<SECTscanmimepart>>&.
10449 .vitem "&$n0$& &-- &$n9$&"
10450 These variables are counters that can be incremented by means
10451 of the &%add%& command in filter files.
10453 .vitem &$original_domain$&
10454 .cindex "&$domain$&"
10455 .cindex "&$original_domain$&"
10456 When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this contains the
10457 same value as &$domain$&. However, if a &"child"& address (for example,
10458 generated by an alias, forward, or filter file) is being processed, this
10459 variable contains the domain of the original address. This differs from
10460 &$parent_domain$& only when there is more than one level of aliasing or
10461 forwarding. When more than one address is being delivered in a single transport
10462 run, &$original_domain$& is not set.
10464 If a new address is created by means of a &%deliver%& command in a system
10465 filter, it is set up with an artificial &"parent"& address. This has the local
10466 part &'system-filter'& and the default qualify domain.
10468 .vitem &$original_local_part$&
10469 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
10470 .cindex "&$original_local_part$&"
10471 When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this contains the
10472 same value as &$local_part$&, unless a prefix or suffix was removed from the
10473 local part, because &$original_local_part$& always contains the full local
10474 part. When a &"child"& address (for example, generated by an alias, forward, or
10475 filter file) is being processed, this variable contains the full local part of
10476 the original address.
10478 If the router that did the redirection processed the local part
10479 case-insensitively, the value in &$original_local_part$& is in lower case.
10480 This variable differs from &$parent_local_part$& only when there is more than
10481 one level of aliasing or forwarding. When more than one address is being
10482 delivered in a single transport run, &$original_local_part$& is not set.
10484 If a new address is created by means of a &%deliver%& command in a system
10485 filter, it is set up with an artificial &"parent"& address. This has the local
10486 part &'system-filter'& and the default qualify domain.
10488 .vitem &$originator_gid$&
10489 .cindex "gid (group id)" "of originating user"
10490 .cindex "sender" "gid"
10491 .cindex "&$caller_gid$&"
10492 .cindex "&$originator_gid$&"
10493 This variable contains the value of &$caller_gid$& that was set when the
10494 message was received. For messages received via the command line, this is the
10495 gid of the sending user. For messages received by SMTP over TCP/IP, this is
10496 normally the gid of the Exim user.
10498 .vitem &$originator_uid$&
10499 .cindex "uid (user id)" "of originating user"
10500 .cindex "sender" "uid"
10501 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
10502 .cindex "&$originaltor_uid$&"
10503 The value of &$caller_uid$& that was set when the message was received. For
10504 messages received via the command line, this is the uid of the sending user.
10505 For messages received by SMTP over TCP/IP, this is normally the uid of the Exim
10508 .vitem &$parent_domain$&
10509 .cindex "&$parent_domain$&"
10510 This variable is similar to &$original_domain$& (see
10511 above), except that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.
10513 .vitem &$parent_local_part$&
10514 .cindex "&$parent_local_part$&"
10515 This variable is similar to &$original_local_part$&
10516 (see above), except that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.
10519 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of current process"
10521 This variable contains the current process id.
10523 .vitem &$pipe_addresses$&
10524 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
10525 .cindex "transport" "filter"
10526 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
10527 This is not an expansion variable, but is mentioned here because the string
10528 &`$pipe_addresses`& is handled specially in the command specification for the
10529 &(pipe)& transport (chapter &<<CHAPpipetransport>>&) and in transport filters
10530 (described under &%transport_filter%& in chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
10531 It cannot be used in general expansion strings, and provokes an &"unknown
10532 variable"& error if encountered.
10534 .vitem &$primary_hostname$&
10535 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
10536 This variable contains the value set by &%primary_hostname%& in the
10537 configuration file, or read by the &[uname()]& function. If &[uname()]& returns
10538 a single-component name, Exim calls &[gethostbyname()]& (or
10539 &[getipnodebyname()]& where available) in an attempt to acquire a fully
10540 qualified host name. See also &$smtp_active_hostname$&.
10543 .vitem &$prvscheck_address$&
10544 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10545 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10546 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10548 .vitem &$prvscheck_keynum$&
10549 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10550 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10551 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10553 .vitem &$prvscheck_result$&
10554 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10555 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10556 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10558 .vitem &$qualify_domain$&
10559 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
10560 The value set for the &%qualify_domain%& option in the configuration file.
10562 .vitem &$qualify_recipient$&
10563 .cindex "&$qualify_recipient$&"
10564 The value set for the &%qualify_recipient%& option in the configuration file,
10565 or if not set, the value of &$qualify_domain$&.
10567 .vitem &$rcpt_count$&
10568 .cindex "&$rcpt_count$&"
10569 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10570 RCPT commands received for the current message. If this variable is used in a
10571 RCPT ACL, its value includes the current command.
10573 .vitem &$rcpt_defer_count$&
10574 .cindex "&$rcpt_defer_count$&"
10575 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10576 RCPT commands in the current message that have previously been rejected with a
10577 temporary (4&'xx'&) response.
10579 .vitem &$rcpt_fail_count$&
10580 .cindex "&$rcpt_fail_count$&"
10581 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10582 RCPT commands in the current message that have previously been rejected with a
10583 permanent (5&'xx'&) response.
10585 .vitem &$received_count$&
10586 .cindex "&$received_count$&"
10587 This variable contains the number of &'Received:'& header lines in the message,
10588 including the one added by Exim (so its value is always greater than zero). It
10589 is available in the DATA ACL, the non-SMTP ACL, and while routing and
10592 .vitem &$received_for$&
10593 .cindex "&$received_for$&"
10594 If there is only a single recipient address in an incoming message, this
10595 variable contains that address when the &'Received:'& header line is being
10596 built. The value is copied after recipient rewriting has happened, but before
10597 the &[local_scan()]& function is run.
10599 .vitem &$received_protocol$&
10600 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
10601 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the name of the
10602 protocol by which it was received. Most of the names used by Exim are defined
10603 by RFCs 821, 2821, and 3848. They start with &"smtp"& (the client used HELO) or
10604 &"esmtp"& (the client used EHLO). This can be followed by &"s"& for secure
10605 (encrypted) and/or &"a"& for authenticated. Thus, for example, if the protocol
10606 is set to &"esmtpsa"&, the message was received over an encrypted SMTP
10607 connection and the client was successfully authenticated.
10609 Exim uses the protocol name &"smtps"& for the case when encryption is
10610 automatically set up on connection without the use of STARTTLS (see
10611 &%tls_on_connect_ports%&), and the client uses HELO to initiate the
10612 encrypted SMTP session. The name &"smtps"& is also used for the rare situation
10613 where the client initially uses EHLO, sets up an encrypted connection using
10614 STARTTLS, and then uses HELO afterwards.
10616 The &%-oMr%& option provides a way of specifying a custom protocol name for
10617 messages that are injected locally by trusted callers. This is commonly used to
10618 identify messages that are being re-injected after some kind of scanning.
10620 .vitem &$received_time$&
10621 .cindex "&$received_time$&"
10622 This variable contains the date and time when the current message was received,
10623 as a number of seconds since the start of the Unix epoch.
10625 .vitem &$recipient_data$&
10626 .cindex "&$recipient_data$&"
10627 This variable is set after an indexing lookup success in an ACL &%recipients%&
10628 condition. It contains the data from the lookup, and the value remains set
10629 until the next &%recipients%& test. Thus, you can do things like this:
10631 &`require recipients = cdb*@;/some/file`&
10632 &`deny `&&'some further test involving'& &`$recipient_data`&
10634 &*Warning*&: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an indexing
10635 method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as in the example above.
10636 The variable is not set for a lookup that is used as part of the string
10637 expansion that all such lists undergo before being interpreted.
10639 .vitem &$recipient_verify_failure$&
10640 .cindex "&$recipient_verify_failure$&"
10641 In an ACL, when a recipient verification fails, this variable contains
10642 information about the failure. It is set to one of the following words:
10645 &"qualify"&: The address was unqualified (no domain), and the message
10646 was neither local nor came from an exempted host.
10649 &"route"&: Routing failed.
10652 &"mail"&: Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted; rejection occurred at
10653 or before the MAIL command (that is, on initial connection, HELO, or
10657 &"recipient"&: The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.
10660 &"postmaster"&: The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.
10663 The main use of this variable is expected to be to distinguish between
10664 rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT.
10666 .vitem &$recipients$&
10667 .cindex "&$recipients$&"
10668 This variable contains a list of envelope recipients for a
10669 message. A comma and a space separate the addresses in the replacement text.
10670 However, the variable is not generally available, to prevent exposure of Bcc
10671 recipients in unprivileged users' filter files. You can use &$recipients$& only
10672 in these two cases:
10675 In a system filter file.
10677 In the ACLs associated with the DATA command, that is, the ACLs defined by
10678 &%acl_smtp_predata%& and &%acl_smtp_data%&.
10682 .vitem &$recipients_count$&
10683 .cindex "&$recipients_count$&"
10684 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the number of
10685 envelope recipients that came with the message. Duplicates are not excluded
10686 from the count. While a message is being received over SMTP, the number
10687 increases for each accepted recipient. It can be referenced in an ACL.
10689 .vitem &$reply_address$&
10690 .cindex "&$reply_address$&"
10691 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the contents of the
10692 &'Reply-To:'& header line if one exists and it is not empty, or otherwise the
10693 contents of the &'From:'& header line. Apart from the removal of leading
10694 white space, the value is not processed in any way. In particular, no RFC 2047
10695 decoding or character code translation takes place.
10697 .vitem &$return_path$&
10698 .cindex "&$return_path$&"
10699 When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the return path &--
10700 the sender field that will be sent as part of the envelope. It is not enclosed
10701 in <> characters. At the start of routing an address, &$return_path$& has the
10702 same value as &$sender_address$&, but if, for example, an incoming message to a
10703 mailing list has been expanded by a router which specifies a different address
10704 for bounce messages, &$return_path$& subsequently contains the new bounce
10705 address, whereas &$sender_address$& always contains the original sender address
10706 that was received with the message. In other words, &$sender_address$& contains
10707 the incoming envelope sender, and &$return_path$& contains the outgoing
10710 .vitem &$return_size_limit$&
10711 .cindex "&$return_size_limit$&"
10712 This is an obsolete name for &$bounce_return_size_limit$&.
10715 .cindex "return code" "from &%run%& expansion"
10716 .cindex "&$runrc$&"
10717 This variable contains the return code from a command that is run by the
10718 &%${run...}%& expansion item. &*Warning*&: In a router or transport, you cannot
10719 assume the order in which option values are expanded, except for those
10720 preconditions whose order of testing is documented. Therefore, you cannot
10721 reliably expect to set &$runrc$& by the expansion of one option, and use it in
10724 .vitem &$self_hostname$&
10725 .cindex "&%self%& option" "value of host name"
10726 .cindex "&$self_hostname$&"
10727 When an address is routed to a supposedly remote host that turns out to be the
10728 local host, what happens is controlled by the &%self%& generic router option.
10729 One of its values causes the address to be passed to another router. When this
10730 happens, &$self_hostname$& is set to the name of the local host that the
10731 original router encountered. In other circumstances its contents are null.
10733 .vitem &$sender_address$&
10734 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
10735 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the sender's address
10736 that was received in the message's envelope. For bounce messages, the value of
10737 this variable is the empty string. See also &$return_path$&.
10739 .vitem &$sender_address_data$&
10740 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
10741 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
10742 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify a
10743 sender address, the final value is preserved in &$sender_address_data$&, to
10744 distinguish it from data from a recipient address. The value does not persist
10745 after the end of the current ACL statement. If you want to preserve it for
10746 longer, you can save it in an ACL variable.
10748 .vitem &$sender_address_domain$&
10749 .cindex "&$sender_address_domain$&"
10750 The domain portion of &$sender_address$&.
10752 .vitem &$sender_address_local_part$&
10753 .cindex "&$sender_address_local_part$&"
10754 The local part portion of &$sender_address$&.
10756 .vitem &$sender_data$&
10757 .cindex "&$sender_data$&"
10758 This variable is set after a lookup success in an ACL &%senders%& condition or
10759 in a router &%senders%& option. It contains the data from the lookup, and the
10760 value remains set until the next &%senders%& test. Thus, you can do things like
10763 &`require senders = cdb*@;/some/file`&
10764 &`deny `&&'some further test involving'& &`$sender_data`&
10766 &*Warning*&: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an indexing
10767 method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as in the example above.
10768 The variable is not set for a lookup that is used as part of the string
10769 expansion that all such lists undergo before being interpreted.
10771 .vitem &$sender_fullhost$&
10772 .cindex "&$sender_fullhost$&"
10773 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the host
10774 name and IP address in a single string. It ends with the IP address in square
10775 brackets, followed by a colon and a port number if the logging of ports is
10776 enabled. The format of the rest of the string depends on whether the host
10777 issued a HELO or EHLO SMTP command, and whether the host name was verified by
10778 looking up its IP address. (Looking up the IP address can be forced by the
10779 &%host_lookup%& option, independent of verification.) A plain host name at the
10780 start of the string is a verified host name; if this is not present,
10781 verification either failed or was not requested. A host name in parentheses is
10782 the argument of a HELO or EHLO command. This is omitted if it is identical to
10783 the verified host name or to the host's IP address in square brackets.
10785 .vitem &$sender_helo_name$&
10786 .cindex "&$sender_hslo_name$&"
10787 When a message is received from a remote host that has issued a HELO or EHLO
10788 command, the argument of that command is placed in this variable. It is also
10789 set if HELO or EHLO is used when a message is received using SMTP locally via
10790 the &%-bs%& or &%-bS%& options.
10792 .vitem &$sender_host_address$&
10793 .cindex "&$sender_host_address$&"
10794 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains that
10795 host's IP address. For locally submitted messages, it is empty.
10797 .vitem &$sender_host_authenticated$&
10798 .cindex "&$sender_host_authenticated$&"
10799 This variable contains the name (not the public name) of the authenticator
10800 driver that successfully authenticated the client from which the message was
10801 received. It is empty if there was no successful authentication. See also
10802 &$authenticated_id$&.
10804 .vitem &$sender_host_name$&
10805 .cindex "&$sender_host_name$&"
10806 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the
10807 host's name as obtained by looking up its IP address. For messages received by
10808 other means, this variable is empty.
10810 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
10811 If the host name has not previously been looked up, a reference to
10812 &$sender_host_name$& triggers a lookup (for messages from remote hosts).
10813 A looked up name is accepted only if it leads back to the original IP address
10814 via a forward lookup. If either the reverse or the forward lookup fails to find
10815 any data, or if the forward lookup does not yield the original IP address,
10816 &$sender_host_name$& remains empty, and &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&.
10818 .cindex "&$host_lookup_deferred$&"
10819 However, if either of the lookups cannot be completed (for example, there is a
10820 DNS timeout), &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to &"1"&, and
10821 &$host_lookup_failed$& remains set to &"0"&.
10823 Once &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&, Exim does not try to look up the
10824 host name again if there is a subsequent reference to &$sender_host_name$&
10825 in the same Exim process, but it does try again if &$sender_host_deferred$&
10828 Exim does not automatically look up every calling host's name. If you want
10829 maximum efficiency, you should arrange your configuration so that it avoids
10830 these lookups altogether. The lookup happens only if one or more of the
10831 following are true:
10834 A string containing &$sender_host_name$& is expanded.
10836 The calling host matches the list in &%host_lookup%&. In the default
10837 configuration, this option is set to *, so it must be changed if lookups are
10838 to be avoided. (In the code, the default for &%host_lookup%& is unset.)
10840 Exim needs the host name in order to test an item in a host list. The items
10841 that require this are described in sections &<<SECThoslispatnam>>& and
10842 &<<SECThoslispatnamsk>>&.
10844 The calling host matches &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& or &%helo_verify_hosts%&.
10845 In this case, the host name is required to compare with the name quoted in any
10846 EHLO or HELO commands that the client issues.
10848 The remote host issues a EHLO or HELO command that quotes one of the
10849 domains in &%helo_lookup_domains%&. The default value of this option is
10850 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
10851 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
10853 helo_lookup_domains = @ : @[]
10855 which causes a lookup if a remote host (incorrectly) gives the server's name or
10856 IP address in an EHLO or HELO command.
10860 .vitem &$sender_host_port$&
10861 .cindex "&$sender_host_port$&"
10862 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the port
10863 number that was used on the remote host.
10865 .vitem &$sender_ident$&
10866 .cindex "&$sender_ident$&"
10867 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the
10868 identification received in response to an RFC 1413 request. When a message has
10869 been received locally, this variable contains the login name of the user that
10872 .vitem &$sender_rate_$&&'xxx'&
10873 A number of variables whose names begin &$sender_rate_$& are set as part of the
10874 &%ratelimit%& ACL condition. Details are given in section
10875 &<<SECTratelimiting>>&.
10877 .vitem &$sender_rcvhost$&
10878 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
10879 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
10880 .cindex "&$sender_rcvhost$&"
10881 This is provided specifically for use in &'Received:'& headers. It starts with
10882 either the verified host name (as obtained from a reverse DNS lookup) or, if
10883 there is no verified host name, the IP address in square brackets. After that
10884 there may be text in parentheses. When the first item is a verified host name,
10885 the first thing in the parentheses is the IP address in square brackets,
10886 followed by a colon and a port number if port logging is enabled. When the
10887 first item is an IP address, the port is recorded as &"port=&'xxxx'&"& inside
10890 There may also be items of the form &"helo=&'xxxx'&"& if HELO or EHLO
10891 was used and its argument was not identical to the real host name or IP
10892 address, and &"ident=&'xxxx'&"& if an RFC 1413 ident string is available. If
10893 all three items are present in the parentheses, a newline and tab are inserted
10894 into the string, to improve the formatting of the &'Received:'& header.
10896 .vitem &$sender_verify_failure$&
10897 .cindex "&$sender_verify_failure$&"
10898 In an ACL, when a sender verification fails, this variable contains information
10899 about the failure. The details are the same as for
10900 &$recipient_verify_failure$&.
10902 .vitem &$smtp_active_hostname$&
10903 .cindex "&$smtp_active_hostname$&"
10904 During an SMTP session, this variable contains the value of the active host
10905 name, as specified by the &%smtp_active_hostname%& option. The value of
10906 &$smtp_active_hostname$& is saved with any message that is received, so its
10907 value can be consulted during routing and delivery.
10909 .vitem &$smtp_command$&
10910 .cindex "&$smtp_command$&"
10911 During the processing of an incoming SMTP command, this variable contains the
10912 entire command. This makes it possible to distinguish between HELO and EHLO in
10913 the HELO ACL, and also to distinguish between commands such as these:
10918 For a MAIL command, extra parameters such as SIZE can be inspected. For a RCPT
10919 command, the address in &$smtp_command$& is the original address before any
10920 rewriting, whereas the values in &$local_part$& and &$domain$& are taken from
10921 the address after SMTP-time rewriting.
10923 .vitem &$smtp_command_argument$&
10924 .cindex "SMTP command" "argument for"
10925 .cindex "&$smtp_command_argument$&"
10926 While an ACL is running to check an SMTP command, this variable contains the
10927 argument, that is, the text that follows the command name, with leading white
10928 space removed. Following the introduction of &$smtp_command$&, this variable is
10929 somewhat redundant, but is retained for backwards compatibility.
10931 .vitem "&$sn0$& &-- &$sn9$&"
10932 These variables are copies of the values of the &$n0$& &-- &$n9$& accumulators
10933 that were current at the end of the system filter file. This allows a system
10934 filter file to set values that can be tested in users' filter files. For
10935 example, a system filter could set a value indicating how likely it is that a
10936 message is junk mail.
10938 .vitem &$spam_$&&'xxx'&
10939 A number of variables whose names start with &$spam$& are available when Exim
10940 is compiled with the content-scanning extension. For details, see section
10941 &<<SECTscanspamass>>&.
10944 .vitem &$spool_directory$&
10945 .cindex "&$spool_directory$&"
10946 The name of Exim's spool directory.
10948 .vitem &$spool_inodes$&
10949 .cindex "&$spool_inodes$&"
10950 The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's spool files are
10951 being written. The value is recalculated whenever the variable is referenced.
10952 If the relevant file system does not have the concept of inodes, the value of
10953 is -1. See also the &%check_spool_inodes%& option.
10955 .vitem &$spool_space$&
10956 .cindex "&$spool_space$&"
10957 The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk partition where
10958 Exim's spool files are being written. The value is recalculated whenever the
10959 variable is referenced. If the operating system does not have the ability to
10960 find the amount of free space (only true for experimental systems), the space
10961 value is -1. For example, to check in an ACL that there is at least 50
10962 megabytes free on the spool, you could write:
10964 condition = ${if > {$spool_space}{50000}}
10966 See also the &%check_spool_space%& option.
10969 .vitem &$thisaddress$&
10970 .cindex "&$thisaddress$&"
10971 This variable is set only during the processing of the &%foranyaddress%&
10972 command in a filter file. Its use is explained in the description of that
10973 command, which can be found in the separate document entitled &'Exim's
10974 interfaces to mail filtering'&.
10976 .vitem &$tls_certificate_verified$&
10977 .cindex "&$tls_certificate_verified$&"
10978 This variable is set to &"1"& if a TLS certificate was verified when the
10979 message was received, and &"0"& otherwise.
10981 .vitem &$tls_cipher$&
10982 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
10983 When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted SMTP
10984 connection, this variable is set to the cipher suite that was negotiated, for
10985 example DES-CBC3-SHA. In other circumstances, in particular, for message
10986 received over unencrypted connections, the variable is empty. See chapter
10987 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS support.
10989 .vitem &$tls_peerdn$&
10990 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
10991 When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted SMTP
10992 connection, and Exim is configured to request a certificate from the client,
10993 the value of the Distinguished Name of the certificate is made available in the
10994 &$tls_peerdn$& during subsequent processing.
10996 .vitem &$tod_bsdinbox$&
10997 .cindex "&$tod_bsdinbox$&"
10998 The time of day and the date, in the format required for BSD-style mailbox
10999 files, for example: Thu Oct 17 17:14:09 1995.
11001 .vitem &$tod_epoch$&
11002 .cindex "&$tod_epoch$&"
11003 The time and date as a number of seconds since the start of the Unix epoch.
11005 .vitem &$tod_full$&
11006 .cindex "&$tod_full$&"
11007 A full version of the time and date, for example: Wed, 16 Oct 1995 09:51:40
11008 +0100. The timezone is always given as a numerical offset from UTC, with
11009 positive values used for timezones that are ahead (east) of UTC, and negative
11010 values for those that are behind (west).
11013 .cindex "&$tod_log$&"
11014 The time and date in the format used for writing Exim's log files, for example:
11015 1995-10-12 15:32:29, but without a timezone.
11017 .vitem &$tod_logfile$&
11018 .cindex "&$tod_logfile$&"
11019 This variable contains the date in the format yyyymmdd. This is the format that
11020 is used for datestamping log files when &%log_file_path%& contains the &`%D`&
11023 .vitem &$tod_zone$&
11024 .cindex "&$tod_zone$&"
11025 This variable contains the numerical value of the local timezone, for example:
11028 .vitem &$tod_zulu$&
11029 .cindex "&$tod_zulu$&"
11030 This variable contains the UTC date and time in &"Zulu"& format, as specified
11031 by ISO 8601, for example: 20030221154023Z.
11034 .cindex "&$value$&"
11035 This variable contains the result of an expansion lookup, extraction operation,
11036 or external command, as described above.
11038 .vitem &$version_number$&
11039 .cindex "&$version_number$&"
11040 The version number of Exim.
11042 .vitem &$warn_message_delay$&
11043 .cindex "&$warn_message_delay$&"
11044 This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning about a
11045 delivery delay. Details of its use are explained in section &<<SECTcustwarn>>&.
11047 .vitem &$warn_message_recipients$&
11048 .cindex "&$warn_message_recipients$&"
11049 This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning about a
11050 delivery delay. Details of its use are explained in section &<<SECTcustwarn>>&.
11056 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11057 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11059 .chapter "Embedded Perl" "CHAPperl"
11060 .scindex IIDperl "Perl" "calling from Exim"
11061 Exim can be built to include an embedded Perl interpreter. When this is done,
11062 Perl subroutines can be called as part of the string expansion process. To make
11063 use of the Perl support, you need version 5.004 or later of Perl installed on
11064 your system. To include the embedded interpreter in the Exim binary, include
11069 in your &_Local/Makefile_& and then build Exim in the normal way.
11072 .section "Setting up so Perl can be used"
11073 .cindex "&%perl_startup%&"
11074 Access to Perl subroutines is via a global configuration option called
11075 &%perl_startup%& and an expansion string operator &%${perl ...}%&. If there is
11076 no &%perl_startup%& option in the Exim configuration file then no Perl
11077 interpreter is started and there is almost no overhead for Exim (since none of
11078 the Perl library will be paged in unless used). If there is a &%perl_startup%&
11079 option then the associated value is taken to be Perl code which is executed in
11080 a newly created Perl interpreter.
11082 The value of &%perl_startup%& is not expanded in the Exim sense, so you do not
11083 need backslashes before any characters to escape special meanings. The option
11084 should usually be something like
11086 perl_startup = do '/etc/exim.pl'
11088 where &_/etc/exim.pl_& is Perl code which defines any subroutines you want to
11089 use from Exim. Exim can be configured either to start up a Perl interpreter as
11090 soon as it is entered, or to wait until the first time it is needed. Starting
11091 the interpreter at the beginning ensures that it is done while Exim still has
11092 its setuid privilege, but can impose an unnecessary overhead if Perl is not in
11093 fact used in a particular run. Also, note that this does not mean that Exim is
11094 necessarily running as root when Perl is called at a later time. By default,
11095 the interpreter is started only when it is needed, but this can be changed in
11099 .cindex "&%perl_at_start%&"
11100 Setting &%perl_at_start%& (a boolean option) in the configuration requests
11101 a startup when Exim is entered.
11103 The command line option &%-ps%& also requests a startup when Exim is entered,
11104 overriding the setting of &%perl_at_start%&.
11107 There is also a command line option &%-pd%& (for delay) which suppresses the
11108 initial startup, even if &%perl_at_start%& is set.
11111 .section "Calling Perl subroutines"
11112 When the configuration file includes a &%perl_startup%& option you can make use
11113 of the string expansion item to call the Perl subroutines that are defined
11114 by the &%perl_startup%& code. The operator is used in any of the following
11118 ${perl{foo}{argument}}
11119 ${perl{foo}{argument1}{argument2} ... }
11121 which calls the subroutine &%foo%& with the given arguments. A maximum of eight
11122 arguments may be passed. Passing more than this results in an expansion failure
11123 with an error message of the form
11125 Too many arguments passed to Perl subroutine "foo" (max is 8)
11127 The return value of the Perl subroutine is evaluated in a scalar context before
11128 it is passed back to Exim to be inserted into the expanded string. If the
11129 return value is &'undef'&, the expansion is forced to fail in the same way as
11130 an explicit &"fail"& on an &%if%& or &%lookup%& item. If the subroutine aborts
11131 by obeying Perl's &%die%& function, the expansion fails with the error message
11132 that was passed to &%die%&.
11135 .section "Calling Exim functions from Perl"
11136 Within any Perl code called from Exim, the function &'Exim::expand_string()'&
11137 is available to call back into Exim's string expansion function. For example,
11140 my $lp = Exim::expand_string('$local_part');
11142 makes the current Exim &$local_part$& available in the Perl variable &$lp$&.
11143 Note those are single quotes and not double quotes to protect against
11144 &$local_part$& being interpolated as a Perl variable.
11146 If the string expansion is forced to fail by a &"fail"& item, the result of
11147 &'Exim::expand_string()'& is &%undef%&. If there is a syntax error in the
11148 expansion string, the Perl call from the original expansion string fails with
11149 an appropriate error message, in the same way as if &%die%& were used.
11151 .cindex "debugging" "from embedded Perl"
11152 .cindex "log" "writing from embedded Perl"
11153 Two other Exim functions are available for use from within Perl code.
11154 &'Exim::debug_write()'& writes a string to the standard error stream if Exim's
11155 debugging is enabled. If you want a newline at the end, you must supply it.
11156 &'Exim::log_write()'& writes a string to Exim's main log, adding a leading
11157 timestamp. In this case, you should not supply a terminating newline.
11160 .section "Use of standard output and error by Perl"
11161 .cindex "Perl" "standard output and error"
11162 You should not write to the standard error or output streams from within your
11163 Perl code, as it is not defined how these are set up. In versions of Exim
11164 before 4.50, it is possible for the standard output or error to refer to the
11165 SMTP connection during message reception via the daemon. Writing to this stream
11166 is certain to cause chaos. From Exim 4.50 onwards, the standard output and
11167 error streams are connected to &_/dev/null_& in the daemon. The chaos is
11168 avoided, but the output is lost.
11170 .cindex "Perl" "use of &%warn%&"
11171 The Perl &%warn%& statement writes to the standard error stream by default.
11172 Calls to &%warn%& may be embedded in Perl modules that you use, but over which
11173 you have no control. When Exim starts up the Perl interpreter, it arranges for
11174 output from the &%warn%& statement to be written to the Exim main log. You can
11175 change this by including appropriate Perl magic somewhere in your Perl code.
11176 For example, to discard &%warn%& output completely, you need this:
11178 $SIG{__WARN__} = sub { };
11180 Whenever a &%warn%& is obeyed, the anonymous subroutine is called. In this
11181 example, the code for the subroutine is empty, so it does nothing, but you can
11182 include any Perl code that you like. The text of the &%warn%& message is passed
11183 as the first subroutine argument.
11187 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11188 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11190 .chapter "Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces" &&&
11191 "CHAPinterfaces" &&&
11192 "Starting the daemon"
11193 .cindex "daemon" "starting"
11194 .cindex "interface" "listening"
11195 .cindex "network interface"
11196 .cindex "interface" "network"
11197 .cindex "IP address" "for listening"
11198 .cindex "daemon" "listening IP addresses"
11199 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening interfaces"
11200 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
11201 A host that is connected to a TCP/IP network may have one or more physical
11202 hardware network interfaces. Each of these interfaces may be configured as one
11203 or more &"logical"& interfaces, which are the entities that a program actually
11204 works with. Each of these logical interfaces is associated with an IP address.
11205 In addition, TCP/IP software supports &"loopback"& interfaces (127.0.0.1 in
11206 IPv4 and ::1 in IPv6), which do not use any physical hardware. Exim requires
11207 knowledge about the host's interfaces for use in three different circumstances:
11210 When a listening daemon is started, Exim needs to know which interfaces
11211 and ports to listen on.
11213 When Exim is routing an address, it needs to know which IP addresses
11214 are associated with local interfaces. This is required for the correct
11215 processing of MX lists by removing the local host and others with the
11216 same or higher priority values. Also, Exim needs to detect cases
11217 when an address is routed to an IP address that in fact belongs to the
11218 local host. Unless the &%self%& router option or the &%allow_localhost%&
11219 option of the smtp transport is set (as appropriate), this is treated
11220 as an error situation.
11222 When Exim connects to a remote host, it may need to know which interface to use
11223 for the outgoing connection.
11227 Exim's default behaviour is likely to be appropriate in the vast majority
11228 of cases. If your host has only one interface, and you want all its IP
11229 addresses to be treated in the same way, and you are using only the
11230 standard SMTP port, you should not need to take any special action. The
11231 rest of this chapter does not apply to you.
11233 In a more complicated situation you may want to listen only on certain
11234 interfaces, or on different ports, and for this reason there are a number of
11235 options that can be used to influence Exim's behaviour. The rest of this
11236 chapter describes how they operate.
11238 When a message is received over TCP/IP, the interface and port that were
11239 actually used are set in &$interface_address$& and &$interface_port$&.
11243 .section "Starting a listening daemon"
11244 When a listening daemon is started (by means of the &%-bd%& command line
11245 option), the interfaces and ports on which it listens are controlled by the
11249 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& contains a list of default ports. (For backward
11250 compatibility, this option can also be specified in the singular.)
11252 &%local_interfaces%& contains list of interface IP addresses on which to
11253 listen. Each item may optionally also specify a port.
11256 The default list separator in both cases is a colon, but this can be changed as
11257 described in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. When IPv6 addresses are involved,
11258 it is usually best to change the separator to avoid having to double all the
11259 colons. For example:
11261 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; \
11264 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061
11266 There are two different formats for specifying a port along with an IP address
11267 in &%local_interfaces%&:
11270 The port is added onto the address with a dot separator. For example, to listen
11271 on port 1234 on two different IP addresses:
11273 local_interfaces = <; 192.168.23.65.1234 ; \
11274 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061.1234
11277 The IP address is enclosed in square brackets, and the port is added
11278 with a colon separator, for example:
11280 local_interfaces = <; [192.168.23.65]:1234 ; \
11281 [3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061]:1234
11285 When a port is not specified, the value of &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is used. The
11286 default setting contains just one port:
11288 daemon_smtp_ports = smtp
11290 If more than one port is listed, each interface that does not have its own port
11291 specified listens on all of them. Ports that are listed in
11292 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& can be identified either by name (defined in
11293 &_/etc/services_&) or by number. However, when ports are given with individual
11294 IP addresses in &%local_interfaces%&, only numbers (not names) can be used.
11298 .section "Special IP listening addresses"
11299 The addresses 0.0.0.0 and ::0 are treated specially. They are interpreted
11300 as &"all IPv4 interfaces"& and &"all IPv6 interfaces"&, respectively. In each
11301 case, Exim tells the TCP/IP stack to &"listen on all IPv&'x'& interfaces"&
11302 instead of setting up separate listening sockets for each interface. The
11303 default value of &%local_interfaces%& is
11305 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0
11307 when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is:
11309 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11311 Thus, by default, Exim listens on all available interfaces, on the SMTP port.
11315 .section "Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports"
11316 The &%-oX%& command line option can be used to override the values of
11317 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& and/or &%local_interfaces%& for a particular daemon
11318 instance. Another way of doing this would be to use macros and the &%-D%&
11319 option. However, &%-oX%& can be used by any admin user, whereas modification of
11320 the runtime configuration by &%-D%& is allowed only when the caller is root or
11323 The value of &%-oX%& is a list of items. The default colon separator can be
11324 changed in the usual way if required. If there are any items that do not
11325 contain dots or colons (that is, are not IP addresses), the value of
11326 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is replaced by the list of those items. If there are any
11327 items that do contain dots or colons, the value of &%local_interfaces%& is
11328 replaced by those items. Thus, for example,
11332 overrides &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, but leaves &%local_interfaces%& unchanged,
11335 -oX 192.168.34.5.1125
11337 overrides &%local_interfaces%&, leaving &%daemon_smtp_ports%& unchanged.
11338 (However, since &%local_interfaces%& now contains no items without ports, the
11339 value of &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is no longer relevant in this example.)
11343 .section "Support for the obsolete SSMTP (or SMTPS) protocol" "SECTsupobssmt"
11344 .cindex "ssmtp protocol"
11345 .cindex "smtps protocol"
11346 .cindex "SMTP" "ssmtp protocol"
11347 .cindex "SMTP" "smtps protocol"
11348 Exim supports the obsolete SSMTP protocol (also known as SMTPS) that was used
11349 before the STARTTLS command was standardized for SMTP. Some legacy clients
11350 still use this protocol. If the &%tls_on_connect_ports%& option is set to a
11351 list of port numbers, connections to those ports must use SSMTP. The most
11352 common use of this option is expected to be
11354 tls_on_connect_ports = 465
11356 because 465 is the usual port number used by the legacy clients. There is also
11357 a command line option &%-tls-on-connect%&, which forces all ports to behave in
11358 this way when a daemon is started.
11360 &*Warning*&: Setting &%tls_on_connect_ports%& does not of itself cause the
11361 daemon to listen on those ports. You must still specify them in
11362 &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, &%local_interfaces%&, or the &%-oX%& option. (This is
11363 because &%tls_on_connect_ports%& applies to &%inetd%& connections as well as to
11364 connections via the daemon.)
11369 .section "IPv6 address scopes"
11370 .cindex "IPv6" "address scopes"
11371 IPv6 addresses have &"scopes"&, and a host with multiple hardware interfaces
11372 can, in principle, have the same link-local IPv6 address on different
11373 interfaces. Thus, additional information is needed, over and above the IP
11374 address, to distinguish individual interfaces. A convention of using a
11375 percent sign followed by something (often the interface name) has been
11376 adopted in some cases, leading to addresses like this:
11378 fe80::202:b3ff:fe03:45c1%eth0
11380 To accommodate this usage, a percent sign followed by an arbitrary string is
11381 allowed at the end of an IPv6 address. By default, Exim calls &[getaddrinfo()]&
11382 to convert a textual IPv6 address for actual use. This function recognizes the
11383 percent convention in operating systems that support it, and it processes the
11384 address appropriately. Unfortunately, some older libraries have problems with
11385 &[getaddrinfo()]&. If
11387 IPV6_USE_INET_PTON=yes
11389 is set in &_Local/Makefile_& (or an OS-dependent Makefile) when Exim is built,
11390 Exim uses &'inet_pton()'& to convert a textual IPv6 address for actual use,
11391 instead of &[getaddrinfo()]&. (Before version 4.14, it always used this
11392 function.) Of course, this means that the additional functionality of
11393 &[getaddrinfo()]& &-- recognizing scoped addresses &-- is lost.
11395 .section "Disabling IPv6"
11396 .cindex "IPv6" "disabling"
11397 Sometimes it happens that an Exim binary that was compiled with IPv6 support is
11398 run on a host whose kernel does not support IPv6. The binary will fall back to
11399 using IPv4, but it may waste resources looking up AAAA records, and trying to
11400 connect to IPv6 addresses, causing delays to mail delivery. If you set the
11401 .oindex "&%disable_ipv6%&"
11402 &%disable_ipv6%& option true, even if the Exim binary has IPv6 support, no IPv6
11403 activities take place. AAAA records are never looked up, and any IPv6 addresses
11404 that are listed in &%local_interfaces%&, data for the &(manualroute)& router,
11405 etc. are ignored. If IP literals are enabled, the &(ipliteral)& router declines
11406 to handle IPv6 literal addresses.
11408 On the other hand, when IPv6 is in use, there may be times when you want to
11409 disable it for certain hosts or domains. You can use the &%dns_ipv4_lookup%&
11410 option to globally suppress the lookup of AAAA records for specified domains,
11411 and you can use the &%ignore_target_hosts%& generic router option to ignore
11412 IPv6 addresses in an individual router.
11416 .section "Examples of starting a listening daemon"
11417 The default case in an IPv6 environment is
11419 daemon_smtp_ports = smtp
11420 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11422 This specifies listening on the smtp port on all IPv6 and IPv4 interfaces.
11423 Either one or two sockets may be used, depending on the characteristics of
11424 the TCP/IP stack. (This is complicated and messy; for more information,
11425 read the comments in the &_daemon.c_& source file.)
11427 To specify listening on ports 25 and 26 on all interfaces:
11429 daemon_smtp_ports = 25 : 26
11431 (leaving &%local_interfaces%& at the default setting) or, more explicitly:
11433 local_interfaces = <; ::0.25 ; ::0.26 \
11434 0.0.0.0.25 ; 0.0.0.0.26
11436 To listen on the default port on all IPv4 interfaces, and on port 26 on the
11437 IPv4 loopback address only:
11439 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.1.26
11441 To specify listening on the default port on specific interfaces only:
11443 local_interfaces = 192.168.34.67 : 192.168.34.67
11445 &*Warning*&: Such a setting excludes listening on the loopback interfaces.
11449 .section "Recognising the local host" "SECTreclocipadd"
11450 The &%local_interfaces%& option is also used when Exim needs to determine
11451 whether or not an IP address refers to the local host. That is, the IP
11452 addresses of all the interfaces on which a daemon is listening are always
11455 For this usage, port numbers in &%local_interfaces%& are ignored. If either of
11456 the items 0.0.0.0 or ::0 are encountered, Exim gets a complete list of
11457 available interfaces from the operating system, and extracts the relevant
11458 (that is, IPv4 or IPv6) addresses to use for checking.
11460 Some systems set up large numbers of virtual interfaces in order to provide
11461 many virtual web servers. In this situation, you may want to listen for
11462 email on only a few of the available interfaces, but nevertheless treat all
11463 interfaces as local when routing. You can do this by setting
11464 &%extra_local_interfaces%& to a list of IP addresses, possibly including the
11465 &"all"& wildcard values. These addresses are recognized as local, but are not
11466 used for listening. Consider this example:
11468 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1 ; \
11470 3ffe:2101:12:1:a00:20ff:fe86:a061
11472 extra_local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11474 The daemon listens on the loopback interfaces and just one IPv4 and one IPv6
11475 address, but all available interface addresses are treated as local when
11478 In some environments the local host name may be in an MX list, but with an IP
11479 address that is not assigned to any local interface. In other cases it may be
11480 desirable to treat other host names as if they referred to the local host. Both
11481 these cases can be handled by setting the &%hosts_treat_as_local%& option.
11482 This contains host names rather than IP addresses. When a host is referenced
11483 during routing, either via an MX record or directly, it is treated as the local
11484 host if its name matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, or if any of its IP
11485 addresses match &%local_interfaces%& or &%extra_local_interfaces%&.
11489 .section "Delivering to a remote host"
11490 Delivery to a remote host is handled by the smtp transport. By default, it
11491 allows the system's TCP/IP functions to choose which interface to use (if
11492 there is more than one) when connecting to a remote host. However, the
11493 &%interface%& option can be set to specify which interface is used. See the
11494 description of the smtp transport in chapter &<<CHAPsmtptrans>>& for more
11500 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11501 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11503 .chapter "Main configuration" "CHAPmainconfig"
11504 .scindex IIDconfima "configuration file" "main section"
11505 .scindex IIDmaiconf "main configuration"
11506 The first part of the run time configuration file contains three types of item:
11509 Macro definitions: These lines start with an upper case letter. See section
11510 &<<SECTmacrodefs>>& for details of macro processing.
11512 Named list definitions: These lines start with one of the words &"domainlist"&,
11513 &"hostlist"&, &"addresslist"&, or &"localpartlist"&. Their use is described in
11514 section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&.
11516 Main configuration settings: Each setting occupies one line of the file
11517 (with possible continuations). If any setting is preceded by the word
11518 &"hide"&, the &%-bP%& command line option displays its value to admin users
11519 only. See section &<<SECTcos>>& for a description of the syntax of these option
11523 This chapter specifies all the main configuration options, along with their
11524 types and default values. For ease of finding a particular option, they appear
11525 in alphabetical order in section &<<SECTalomo>>& below. However, because there
11526 are now so many options, they are first listed briefly in functional groups, as
11527 an aid to finding the name of the option you are looking for. Some options are
11528 listed in more than one group.
11530 .section "Miscellaneous"
11532 .row &%bi_command%& "to run for &%-bi%& command line option"
11533 .row &%disable_ipv6%& "do no IPv6 processing"
11534 .row &%keep_malformed%& "for broken files &-- should not happen"
11535 .row &%localhost_number%& "for unique message ids in clusters"
11536 .row &%message_body_visible%& "how much to show in &$message_body$&"
11537 .row &%mua_wrapper%& "run in &""MUA wrapper""& mode"
11538 .row &%print_topbitchars%& "top-bit characters are printing"
11539 .row &%timezone%& "force time zone"
11543 .section "Exim parameters"
11545 .row &%exim_group%& "override compiled-in value"
11546 .row &%exim_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11547 .row &%exim_user%& "override compiled-in value"
11548 .row &%primary_hostname%& "default from &[uname()]&"
11549 .row &%split_spool_directory%& "use multiple directories"
11550 .row &%spool_directory%& "override compiled-in value"
11555 .section "Privilege controls"
11557 .row &%admin_groups%& "groups that are Exim admin users"
11558 .row &%deliver_drop_privilege%& "drop root for delivery processes"
11559 .row &%local_from_check%& "insert &'Sender:'& if necessary"
11560 .row &%local_from_prefix%& "for testing &'From:'& for local sender"
11561 .row &%local_from_suffix%& "for testing &'From:'& for local sender"
11562 .row &%local_sender_retain%& "keep &'Sender:'& from untrusted user"
11563 .row &%never_users%& "do not run deliveries as these"
11564 .row &%prod_requires_admin%& "forced delivery requires admin user"
11565 .row &%queue_list_requires_admin%& "queue listing requires admin user"
11566 .row &%trusted_groups%& "groups that are trusted"
11567 .row &%trusted_users%& "users that are trusted"
11574 .row &%hosts_connection_nolog%& "exemption from connect logging"
11575 .row &%log_file_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11576 .row &%log_selector%& "set/unset optional logging"
11577 .row &%log_timezone%& "add timezone to log lines"
11578 .row &%message_logs%& "create per-message logs"
11579 .row &%preserve_message_logs%& "after message completion"
11580 .row &%process_log_path%& "for SIGUSR1 and &'exiwhat'&"
11581 .row &%syslog_duplication%& "controls duplicate log lines on syslog"
11582 .row &%syslog_facility%& "set syslog &""facility""& field"
11583 .row &%syslog_processname%& "set syslog &""ident""& field"
11584 .row &%syslog_timestamp%& "timestamp syslog lines"
11585 .row &%write_rejectlog%& "control use of message log"
11590 .section "Frozen messages"
11592 .row &%auto_thaw%& "sets time for retrying frozen messages"
11593 .row &%freeze_tell%& "send message when freezing"
11594 .row &%move_frozen_messages%& "to another directory"
11595 .row &%timeout_frozen_after%& "keep frozen messages only so long"
11600 .section "Data lookups"
11602 .row &%ldap_default_servers%& "used if no server in query"
11603 .row &%ldap_version%& "set protocol version"
11604 .row &%lookup_open_max%& "lookup files held open"
11605 .row &%mysql_servers%& "as it says"
11606 .row &%oracle_servers%& "as it says"
11607 .row &%pgsql_servers%& "as it says"
11608 .row &%sqlite_lock_timeout%& "as it says"
11613 .section "Message ids"
11615 .row &%message_id_header_domain%& "used to build &'Message-ID:'& header"
11616 .row &%message_id_header_text%& "ditto"
11621 .section "Embedded Perl Startup"
11623 .row &%perl_at_start%& "always start the interpreter"
11624 .row &%perl_startup%& "code to obey when starting Perl"
11631 .row &%daemon_smtp_ports%& "default ports"
11632 .row &%daemon_startup_retries%& "number of times to retry"
11633 .row &%daemon_startup_sleep%& "time to sleep between tries"
11634 .row &%extra_local_interfaces%& "not necessarily listened on"
11635 .row &%local_interfaces%& "on which to listen, with optional ports"
11636 .row &%pid_file_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11637 .row &%queue_run_max%& "maximum simultaneous queue runners"
11642 .section "Resource control"
11644 .row &%check_log_inodes%& "before accepting a message"
11645 .row &%check_log_space%& "before accepting a message"
11646 .row &%check_spool_inodes%& "before accepting a message"
11647 .row &%check_spool_space%& "before accepting a message"
11648 .row &%deliver_queue_load_max%& "no queue deliveries if load high"
11649 .row &%queue_only_load%& "queue incoming if load high"
11650 .row &%queue_run_max%& "maximum simultaneous queue runners"
11651 .row &%remote_max_parallel%& "parallel SMTP delivery per message"
11652 .row &%smtp_accept_max%& "simultaneous incoming connections"
11653 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nommail%& "non-mail commands"
11654 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%& "hosts to which the limit applies"
11655 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_connection%& "messages per connection"
11656 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& "connections from one host"
11657 .row &%smtp_accept_queue%& "queue mail if more connections"
11658 .row &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& "queue if more messages per &&&
11660 .row &%smtp_accept_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if more connections"
11661 .row &%smtp_check_spool_space%& "from SIZE on MAIL command"
11662 .row &%smtp_connect_backlog%& "passed to TCP/IP stack"
11663 .row &%smtp_load_reserve%& "SMTP from reserved hosts if load high"
11664 .row &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& "these are the reserve hosts"
11669 .section "Policy controls"
11671 .row &%acl_not_smtp%& "ACL for non-SMTP messages"
11672 .row &%acl_not_smtp_mime%& "ACL for non-SMTP MIME parts"
11673 .row &%acl_smtp_auth%& "ACL for AUTH"
11674 .row &%acl_smtp_connect%& "ACL for connection"
11675 .row &%acl_smtp_data%& "ACL for DATA"
11676 .row &%acl_smtp_etrn%& "ACL for ETRN"
11677 .row &%acl_smtp_expn%& "ACL for EXPN"
11678 .row &%acl_smtp_helo%& "ACL for EHLO or HELO"
11679 .row &%acl_smtp_mail%& "ACL for MAIL"
11680 .row &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& "ACL for AUTH on MAIL command"
11681 .row &%acl_smtp_mime%& "ACL for MIME parts"
11682 .row &%acl_smtp_predata%& "ACL for start of data"
11683 .row &%acl_smtp_quit%& "ACL for QUIT"
11684 .row &%acl_smtp_rcpt%& "ACL for RCPT"
11685 .row &%acl_smtp_starttls%& "ACL for STARTTLS"
11686 .row &%acl_smtp_vrfy%& "ACL for VRFY"
11687 .row &%av_scanner%& "specify virus scanner"
11688 .row &%check_rfc2047_length%& "check length of RFC 2047 &""encoded &&&
11690 .row &%dns_csa_search_limit%& "control CSA parent search depth"
11691 .row &%dns_csa_use_reverse%& "en/disable CSA IP reverse search"
11692 .row &%header_maxsize%& "total size of message header"
11693 .row &%header_line_maxsize%& "individual header line limit"
11694 .row &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& "allow syntactic junk from these hosts"
11695 .row &%helo_allow_chars%& "allow illegal chars in HELO names"
11696 .row &%helo_lookup_domains%& "lookup hostname for these HELO names"
11697 .row &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& "HELO soft-checked for these hosts"
11698 .row &%helo_verify_hosts%& "HELO hard-checked for these hosts"
11699 .row &%host_lookup%& "host name looked up for these hosts"
11700 .row &%host_lookup_order%& "order of DNS and local name lookups"
11701 .row &%host_reject_connection%& "reject connection from these hosts"
11702 .row &%hosts_treat_as_local%& "useful in some cluster configurations"
11703 .row &%local_scan_timeout%& "timeout for &[local_scan()]&"
11704 .row &%message_size_limit%& "for all messages"
11705 .row &%percent_hack_domains%& "recognize %-hack for these domains"
11706 .row &%spamd_address%& "set interface to SpamAssassin"
11711 .section "Callout cache"
11713 .row &%callout_domain_negative_expire%& "timeout for negative domain cache &&&
11715 .row &%callout_domain_positive_expire%& "timeout for positive domain cache &&&
11717 .row &%callout_negative_expire%& "timeout for negative address cache item"
11718 .row &%callout_positive_expire%& "timeout for positive address cache item"
11719 .row &%callout_random_local_part%& "string to use for &""random""& testing"
11726 .row &%tls_advertise_hosts%& "advertise TLS to these hosts"
11727 .row &%tls_certificate%& "location of server certificate"
11728 .row &%tls_crl%& "certificate revocation list"
11729 .row &%tls_dhparam%& "DH parameters for server"
11730 .row &%tls_on_connect_ports%& "specify SSMTP (SMTPS) ports"
11731 .row &%tls_privatekey%& "location of server private key"
11732 .row &%tls_remember_esmtp%& "don't reset after starting TLS"
11733 .row &%tls_require_ciphers%& "specify acceptable cipers"
11734 .row &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& "try to verify client certificate"
11735 .row &%tls_verify_certificates%& "expected client certificates"
11736 .row &%tls_verify_hosts%& "insist on client certificate verify"
11741 .section "Local user handling"
11743 .row &%finduser_retries%& "useful in NIS environments"
11744 .row &%gecos_name%& "used when creating &'Sender:'&"
11745 .row &%gecos_pattern%& "ditto"
11746 .row &%max_username_length%& "for systems that truncate"
11747 .row &%unknown_login%& "used when no login name found"
11748 .row &%unknown_username%& "ditto"
11749 .row &%uucp_from_pattern%& "for recognizing &""From ""& lines"
11750 .row &%uucp_from_sender%& "ditto"
11755 .section "All incoming messages (SMTP and non-SMTP)"
11757 .row &%header_maxsize%& "total size of message header"
11758 .row &%header_line_maxsize%& "individual header line limit"
11759 .row &%message_size_limit%& "applies to all messages"
11760 .row &%percent_hack_domains%& "recognize %-hack for these domains"
11761 .row &%received_header_text%& "expanded to make &'Received:'&"
11762 .row &%received_headers_max%& "for mail loop detection"
11763 .row &%recipients_max%& "limit per message"
11764 .row &%recipients_max_reject%& "permanently reject excess"
11770 .section "Non-SMTP incoming messages"
11772 .row &%receive_timeout%& "for non-SMTP messages"
11779 .section "Incoming SMTP messages"
11780 See also the &'Policy controls'& section above.
11783 .row &%host_lookup%& "host name looked up for these hosts"
11784 .row &%host_lookup_order%& "order of DNS and local name lookups"
11785 .row &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& "may send unqualified recipients"
11786 .row &%rfc1413_hosts%& "make ident calls to these hosts"
11787 .row &%rfc1413_query_timeout%& "zero disables ident calls"
11788 .row &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& "may send unqualified senders"
11789 .row &%smtp_accept_keepalive%& "some TCP/IP magic"
11790 .row &%smtp_accept_max%& "simultaneous incoming connections"
11791 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%& "non-mail commands"
11792 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%& "hosts to which the limit applies"
11793 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_connection%& "messages per connection"
11794 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& "connections from one host"
11795 .row &%smtp_accept_queue%& "queue mail if more connections"
11796 .row &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& "queue if more messages per &&&
11798 .row &%smtp_accept_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if more connections"
11799 .row &%smtp_active_hostname%& "host name to use in messages"
11800 .row &%smtp_banner%& "text for welcome banner"
11801 .row &%smtp_check_spool_space%& "from SIZE on MAIL command"
11802 .row &%smtp_connect_backlog%& "passed to TCP/IP stack"
11803 .row &%smtp_enforce_sync%& "of SMTP command/responses"
11804 .row &%smtp_etrn_command%& "what to run for ETRN"
11805 .row &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& "only one at once"
11806 .row &%smtp_load_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if this load"
11807 .row &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& "before dropping connection"
11808 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& "apply ratelimiting to these hosts"
11809 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_mail%& "ratelimit for MAIL commands"
11810 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_rcpt%& "ratelimit for RCPT commands"
11811 .row &%smtp_receive_timeout%& "per command or data line"
11812 .row &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& "these are the reserve hosts"
11813 .row &%smtp_return_error_details%& "give detail on rejections"
11818 .section "SMTP extensions"
11820 .row &%accept_8bitmime%& "advertise 8BITMIME"
11821 .row &%auth_advertise_hosts%& "advertise AUTH to these hosts"
11822 .row &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& "allow &""From ""& from these hosts"
11823 .row &%ignore_fromline_local%& "allow &""From ""& from local SMTP"
11824 .row &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%& "advertise pipelining to these hosts"
11825 .row &%tls_advertise_hosts%& "advertise TLS to these hosts"
11830 .section "Processing messages"
11832 .row &%allow_domain_literals%& "recognize domain literal syntax"
11833 .row &%allow_mx_to_ip%& "allow MX to point to IP address"
11834 .row &%allow_utf8_domains%& "in addresses"
11835 .row &%check_rfc2047_length%& "check length of RFC 2047 &""encoded &&&
11837 .row &%delivery_date_remove%& "from incoming messages"
11838 .row &%envelope_to_remote%& "from incoming messages"
11839 .row &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& "affects &%-t%& processing"
11840 .row &%headers_charset%& "default for translations"
11841 .row &%qualify_domain%& "default for senders"
11842 .row &%qualify_recipient%& "default for recipients"
11843 .row &%return_path_remove%& "from incoming messages"
11844 .row &%strip_excess_angle_brackets%& "in addresses"
11845 .row &%strip_trailing_dot%& "at end of addresses"
11846 .row &%untrusted_set_sender%& "untrusted can set envelope sender"
11851 .section "System filter"
11853 .row &%system_filter%& "locate system filter"
11854 .row &%system_filter_directory_transport%& "transport for delivery to a &&&
11856 .row &%system_filter_file_transport%& "transport for delivery to a file"
11857 .row &%system_filter_group%& "group for filter running"
11858 .row &%system_filter_pipe_transport%& "transport for delivery to a pipe"
11859 .row &%system_filter_reply_transport%& "transport for autoreply delivery"
11860 .row &%system_filter_user%& "user for filter running"
11865 .section "Routing and delivery"
11867 .row &%disable_ipv6%& "do no IPv6 processing"
11868 .row &%dns_again_means_nonexist%& "for broken domains"
11869 .row &%dns_check_names_pattern%& "pre-DNS syntax check"
11870 .row &%dns_ipv4_lookup%& "only v4 lookup for these domains"
11871 .row &%dns_retrans%& "parameter for resolver"
11872 .row &%dns_retry%& "parameter for resolver"
11873 .row &%hold_domains%& "hold delivery for these domains"
11874 .row &%local_interfaces%& "for routing checks"
11875 .row &%queue_domains%& "no immediate delivery for these"
11876 .row &%queue_only%& "no immediate delivery at all"
11877 .row &%queue_only_file%& "no immediate delivery if file exists"
11878 .row &%queue_only_load%& "no immediate delivery if load is high"
11879 .row &%queue_only_override%& "allow command line to override"
11880 .row &%queue_run_in_order%& "order of arrival"
11881 .row &%queue_run_max%& "of simultaneous queue runners"
11882 .row &%queue_smtp_domains%& "no immediate SMTP delivery for these"
11883 .row &%remote_max_parallel%& "parallel SMTP delivery per message"
11884 .row &%remote_sort_domains%& "order of remote deliveries"
11885 .row &%retry_data_expire%& "timeout for retry data"
11886 .row &%retry_interval_max%& "safety net for retry rules"
11891 .section "Bounce and warning messages"
11893 .row &%bounce_message_file%& "content of bounce"
11894 .row &%bounce_message_text%& "content of bounce"
11895 .row &%bounce_return_body%& "include body if returning message"
11896 .row &%bounce_return_message%& "include original message in bounce"
11897 .row &%bounce_return_size_limit%& "limit on returned message"
11898 .row &%bounce_sender_authentication%& "send authenticated sender with bounce"
11899 .row &%errors_copy%& "copy bounce messages"
11900 .row &%errors_reply_to%& "&'Reply-to:'& in bounces"
11901 .row &%delay_warning%& "time schedule"
11902 .row &%delay_warning_condition%& "condition for warning messages"
11903 .row &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%& "discard undeliverable bounces"
11904 .row &%smtp_return_error_details%& "give detail on rejections"
11905 .row &%warn_message_file%& "content of warning message"
11910 .section "Alphabetical list of main options" "SECTalomo"
11911 Those options that undergo string expansion before use are marked with
11914 .option accept_8bitmime main boolean false
11916 .cindex "8-bit characters"
11917 This option causes Exim to send 8BITMIME in its response to an SMTP
11918 EHLO command, and to accept the BODY= parameter on MAIL commands.
11919 However, though Exim is 8-bit clean, it is not a protocol converter, and it
11920 takes no steps to do anything special with messages received by this route.
11921 Consequently, this option is turned off by default.
11923 .option acl_not_smtp main string&!! unset
11924 .cindex "&ACL;" "for non-SMTP messages"
11925 .cindex "non-SMTP messages" "ACLs for"
11926 This option defines the ACL that is run when a non-SMTP message is on the point
11927 of being accepted. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11929 .option acl_not_smtp_mime main string&!! unset
11930 This option defines the ACL that is run for individual MIME parts of non-SMTP
11931 messages. It operates in exactly the same way as &%acl_smtp_mime%& operates for
11934 .option acl_smtp_auth main string&!! unset
11935 .cindex "&ACL;" "setting up for SMTP commands"
11936 .cindex "AUTH" "ACL for"
11937 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP AUTH command is
11938 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11940 .option acl_smtp_connect main string&!! unset
11941 .cindex "&ACL;" "on SMTP connection"
11942 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP connection is received.
11943 See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11945 .option acl_smtp_data main string&!! unset
11946 .cindex "DATA" "ACL for"
11947 This option defines the ACL that is run after an SMTP DATA command has been
11948 processed and the message itself has been received, but before the final
11949 acknowledgement is sent. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11951 .option acl_smtp_etrn main string&!! unset
11952 .cindex "ETRN" "ACL for"
11953 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP ETRN command is
11954 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11956 .option acl_smtp_expn main string&!! unset
11957 .cindex "EXPN" "ACL for"
11958 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EXPN command is
11959 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11961 .option acl_smtp_helo main string&!! unset
11962 .cindex "EHLO" "ACL for"
11963 .cindex "HELO" "ACL for"
11964 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EHLO or HELO
11965 command is received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11968 .option acl_smtp_mail main string&!! unset
11969 .cindex "MAIL" "ACL for"
11970 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP MAIL command is
11971 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11973 .option acl_smtp_mailauth main string&!! unset
11974 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
11975 This option defines the ACL that is run when there is an AUTH parameter on
11976 a MAIL command. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details of ACLs, and chapter
11977 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
11979 .option acl_smtp_mime main string&!! unset
11980 .cindex "MIME content scanning" "ACL for"
11981 This option is available when Exim is built with the content-scanning
11982 extension. It defines the ACL that is run for each MIME part in a message. See
11983 section &<<SECTscanmimepart>>& for details.
11985 .option acl_smtp_predata main string&!! unset
11986 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP DATA command is
11987 received, before the message itself is received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for
11990 .option acl_smtp_quit main string&!! unset
11991 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
11992 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP QUIT command is
11993 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11995 .option acl_smtp_rcpt main string&!! unset
11996 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
11997 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP RCPT command is
11998 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
12000 .option acl_smtp_starttls main string&!! unset
12001 .cindex "STARTTLS" "ACL for"
12002 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP STARTTLS command is
12003 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
12005 .option acl_smtp_vrfy main string&!! unset
12006 .cindex "VRFY" "ACL for"
12007 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP VRFY command is
12008 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
12010 .option admin_groups main "string list&!!" unset
12011 .cindex "admin user"
12012 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If the
12013 current group or any of the supplementary groups of an Exim caller is in this
12014 colon-separated list, the caller has admin privileges. If all your system
12015 programmers are in a specific group, for example, you can give them all Exim
12016 admin privileges by putting that group in &%admin_groups%&. However, this does
12017 not permit them to read Exim's spool files (whose group owner is the Exim gid).
12018 To permit this, you have to add individuals to the Exim group.
12020 .option allow_domain_literals main boolean false
12021 .cindex "domain literal"
12022 If this option is set, the RFC 2822 domain literal format is permitted in
12023 email addresses. The option is not set by default, because the domain literal
12024 format is not normally required these days, and few people know about it. It
12025 has, however, been exploited by mail abusers.
12027 Unfortunately, it seems that some DNS black list maintainers are using this
12028 format to report black listing to postmasters. If you want to accept messages
12029 addressed to your hosts by IP address, you need to set
12030 &%allow_domain_literals%& true, and also to add &`@[]`& to the list of local
12031 domains (defined in the named domain list &%local_domains%& in the default
12032 configuration). This &"magic string"& matches the domain literal form of all
12033 the local host's IP addresses.
12036 .option allow_mx_to_ip main boolean false
12037 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to IP address"
12038 It appears that more and more DNS zone administrators are breaking the rules
12039 and putting domain names that look like IP addresses on the right hand side of
12040 MX records. Exim follows the rules and rejects this, giving an error message
12041 that explains the mis-configuration. However, some other MTAs support this
12042 practice, so to avoid &"Why can't Exim do this?"& complaints,
12043 &%allow_mx_to_ip%& exists, in order to enable this heinous activity. It is not
12044 recommended, except when you have no other choice.
12046 .option allow_utf8_domains main boolean false
12047 .cindex "domain" "UTF-8 characters in"
12048 .cindex "UTF-8" "in domain name"
12049 Lots of discussion is going on about internationalized domain names. One
12050 camp is strongly in favour of just using UTF-8 characters, and it seems
12051 that at least two other MTAs permit this. This option allows Exim users to
12052 experiment if they wish.
12054 If it is set true, Exim's domain parsing function allows valid
12055 UTF-8 multicharacters to appear in domain name components, in addition to
12056 letters, digits, and hyphens. However, just setting this option is not
12057 enough; if you want to look up these domain names in the DNS, you must also
12058 adjust the value of &%dns_check_names_pattern%& to match the extended form. A
12059 suitable setting is:
12061 dns_check_names_pattern = (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[a-z0-9\xc0-\xff]\
12062 (?>[-a-z0-9\x80-\xff]*[a-z0-9\x80-\xbf])?)+$
12064 Alternatively, you can just disable this feature by setting
12066 dns_check_names_pattern =
12068 That is, set the option to an empty string so that no check is done.
12071 .option auth_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" *
12072 .cindex "authentication" "advertising"
12073 .cindex "AUTH" "advertising"
12074 If any server authentication mechanisms are configured, Exim advertises them in
12075 response to an EHLO command only if the calling host matches this list.
12076 Otherwise, Exim does not advertise AUTH.
12077 Exim does not accept AUTH commands from clients to which it has not
12078 advertised the availability of AUTH. The advertising of individual
12079 authentication mechanisms can be controlled by the use of the
12080 &%server_advertise_condition%& generic authenticator option on the individual
12081 authenticators. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for further details.
12083 Certain mail clients (for example, Netscape) require the user to provide a name
12084 and password for authentication if AUTH is advertised, even though it may
12085 not be needed (the host may accept messages from hosts on its local LAN without
12086 authentication, for example). The &%auth_advertise_hosts%& option can be used
12087 to make these clients more friendly by excluding them from the set of hosts to
12088 which Exim advertises AUTH.
12090 .cindex "AUTH" "advertising when encrypted"
12091 If you want to advertise the availability of AUTH only when the connection
12092 is encrypted using TLS, you can make use of the fact that the value of this
12093 option is expanded, with a setting like this:
12095 auth_advertise_hosts = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{}{*}}
12097 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
12098 If &$tls_cipher$& is empty, the session is not encrypted, and the result of
12099 the expansion is empty, thus matching no hosts. Otherwise, the result of the
12100 expansion is *, which matches all hosts.
12103 .option auto_thaw main time 0s
12104 .cindex "thawing messages"
12105 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
12106 If this option is set to a time greater than zero, a queue runner will try a
12107 new delivery attempt on any frozen message, other than a bounce message, if
12108 this much time has passed since it was frozen. This may result in the message
12109 being re-frozen if nothing has changed since the last attempt. It is a way of
12110 saying &"keep on trying, even though there are big problems"&.
12112 &*Note*&: This is an old option, which predates &%timeout_frozen_after%& and
12113 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&. It is retained for compatibility, but it is not
12114 thought to be very useful any more, and its use should probably be avoided.
12116 .option av_scanner main string "see below"
12117 This option is available if Exim is built with the content-scanning extension.
12118 It specifies which anti-virus scanner to use. The default value is:
12120 sophie:/var/run/sophie
12122 If the value of &%av_scanner%& starts with dollar character, it is expanded
12123 before use. See section &<<SECTscanvirus>>& for further details.
12127 .option bi_command main string unset
12128 .cindex "&%-bi%& option"
12129 This option supplies the name of a command that is run when Exim is called with
12130 the &%-bi%& option (see chapter &<<CHAPcommandline>>&). The string value is
12131 just the command name, it is not a complete command line. If an argument is
12132 required, it must come from the &%-oA%& command line option.
12135 .option bounce_message_file main string unset
12136 .cindex "bounce message" "customizing"
12137 .cindex "customizing" "bounce message"
12138 This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to be used
12139 for constructing bounce messages. Details of the file's contents are given in
12140 chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&. See also &%warn_message_file%&.
12143 .option bounce_message_text main string unset
12144 When this option is set, its contents are included in the default bounce
12145 message immediately after &"This message was created automatically by mail
12146 delivery software."& It is not used if &%bounce_message_file%& is set.
12148 .option bounce_return_body main boolean true
12149 .cindex "bounce message" "including body"
12150 This option controls whether the body of an incoming message is included in a
12151 bounce message when &%bounce_return_message%& is true. The default setting
12152 causes the entire message, both header and body, to be returned (subject to the
12153 value of &%bounce_return_size_limit%&). If this option is false, only the
12154 message header is included. In the case of a non-SMTP message containing an
12155 error that is detected during reception, only those header lines preceding the
12156 point at which the error was detected are returned.
12157 .cindex "bounce message" "including original"
12159 .option bounce_return_message main boolean true
12160 If this option is set false, none of the original message is included in
12161 bounce messages generated by Exim. See also &%bounce_return_size_limit%& and
12162 &%bounce_return_body%&.
12165 .option bounce_return_size_limit main integer 100K
12166 .cindex "size limit" "of bounce"
12167 .cindex "bounce message" "size limit"
12168 .cindex "limit" "bounce message size"
12169 This option sets a limit in bytes on the size of messages that are returned to
12170 senders as part of bounce messages when &%bounce_return_message%& is true. The
12171 limit should be less than the value of the global &%message_size_limit%& and of
12172 any &%message_size_limit%& settings on transports, to allow for the bounce text
12173 that Exim generates. If this option is set to zero there is no limit.
12175 When the body of any message that is to be included in a bounce message is
12176 greater than the limit, it is truncated, and a comment pointing this out is
12177 added at the top. The actual cutoff may be greater than the value given, owing
12178 to the use of buffering for transferring the message in chunks (typically 8K in
12179 size). The idea is to save bandwidth on those undeliverable 15-megabyte
12182 .option bounce_sender_authentication main string unset
12183 .cindex "bounce message" "sender authentication"
12184 .cindex "authentication" "bounce message"
12185 .cindex "AUTH" "on bounce message"
12186 This option provides an authenticated sender address that is sent with any
12187 bounce messages generated by Exim that are sent over an authenticated SMTP
12188 connection. A typical setting might be:
12190 bounce_sender_authentication = mailer-daemon@my.domain.example
12192 which would cause bounce messages to be sent using the SMTP command:
12194 MAIL FROM:<> AUTH=mailer-daemon@my.domain.example
12196 The value of &%bounce_sender_authentication%& must always be a complete email
12199 .option callout_domain_negative_expire main time 3h
12200 .cindex "caching" "callout timeouts"
12201 .cindex "callout" "caching timeouts"
12202 This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data for a
12203 domain. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12204 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12207 .option callout_domain_positive_expire main time 7d
12208 This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data for a
12209 domain. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12210 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12213 .option callout_negative_expire main time 2h
12214 This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data for an
12215 address. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12216 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12219 .option callout_positive_expire main time 24h
12220 This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data for an
12221 address. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12222 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12225 .option callout_random_local_part main string&!! "see below"
12226 This option defines the &"random"& local part that can be used as part of
12227 callout verification. The default value is
12229 $primary_host_name-$tod_epoch-testing
12231 See section &<<CALLaddparcall>>& for details of how this value is used.
12234 .option check_log_inodes main integer 0
12235 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12238 .option check_log_space main integer 0
12239 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12241 .oindex "&%check_rfc2047_length%&"
12242 .cindex "RFC 2047" "disabling length check"
12243 .option check_rfc2047_length " User: main" boolean true
12244 RFC 2047 defines a way of encoding non-ASCII characters in headers using a
12245 system of &"encoded words"&. The RFC specifies a maximum length for an encoded
12246 word; strings to be encoded that exceed this length are supposed to use
12247 multiple encoded words. By default, Exim does not recognize encoded words that
12248 exceed the maximum length. However, it seems that some software, in violation
12249 of the RFC, generates overlong encoded words. If &%check_rfc2047_length%& is
12250 set false, Exim recognizes encoded words of any length.
12253 .option check_spool_inodes main integer 0
12254 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12257 .option check_spool_space main integer 0
12258 .cindex "checking disk space"
12259 .cindex "disk space" "checking"
12260 .cindex "spool directory" "checking space"
12261 The four &%check_...%& options allow for checking of disk resources before a
12262 message is accepted.
12264 .cindex "&$log_inodes$&"
12265 .cindex "&$log_space$&"
12266 .cindex "&$spool_inodes$&"
12267 .cindex "&$spool_space$&"
12268 When any of these options are set, they apply to all incoming messages. If you
12269 want to apply different checks to different kinds of message, you can do so by
12270 testing the the variables &$log_inodes$&, &$log_space$&, &$spool_inodes$&, and
12271 &$spool_space$& in an ACL with appropriate additional conditions.
12274 &%check_spool_space%& and &%check_spool_inodes%& check the spool partition if
12275 either value is greater than zero, for example:
12277 check_spool_space = 10M
12278 check_spool_inodes = 100
12280 The spool partition is the one that contains the directory defined by
12281 SPOOL_DIRECTORY in &_Local/Makefile_&. It is used for holding messages in
12284 &%check_log_space%& and &%check_log_inodes%& check the partition in which log
12285 files are written if either is greater than zero. These should be set only if
12286 &%log_file_path%& and &%spool_directory%& refer to different partitions.
12288 If there is less space or fewer inodes than requested, Exim refuses to accept
12289 incoming mail. In the case of SMTP input this is done by giving a 452 temporary
12290 error response to the MAIL command. If ESMTP is in use and there was a
12291 SIZE parameter on the MAIL command, its value is added to the
12292 &%check_spool_space%& value, and the check is performed even if
12293 &%check_spool_space%& is zero, unless &%no_smtp_check_spool_space%& is set.
12295 The values for &%check_spool_space%& and &%check_log_space%& are held as a
12296 number of kilobytes. If a non-multiple of 1024 is specified, it is rounded up.
12298 For non-SMTP input and for batched SMTP input, the test is done at start-up; on
12299 failure a message is written to stderr and Exim exits with a non-zero code, as
12300 it obviously cannot send an error message of any kind.
12302 .option daemon_smtp_ports main string &`smtp`&
12303 .cindex "port" "for daemon"
12304 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
12305 This option specifies one or more default SMTP ports on which the Exim daemon
12306 listens. See chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& for details of how it is used. For
12307 backward compatibility, &%daemon_smtp_port%& (singular) is a synonym.
12309 .option daemon_startup_retries main integer 9
12310 .cindex "daemon startup" "retrying"
12311 This option, along with &%daemon_startup_sleep%&, controls the retrying done by
12312 the daemon at startup when it cannot immediately bind a listening socket
12313 (typically because the socket is already in use): &%daemon_startup_retries%&
12314 defines the number of retries after the first failure, and
12315 &%daemon_startup_sleep%& defines the length of time to wait between retries.
12317 .option daemon_startup_sleep main time 30s
12318 See &%daemon_startup_retries%&.
12320 .option delay_warning main "time list" 24h
12321 .cindex "warning of delay"
12322 .cindex "delay warning" "specifying"
12323 When a message is delayed, Exim sends a warning message to the sender at
12324 intervals specified by this option. The data is a colon-separated list of times
12325 after which to send warning messages. If the value of the option is an empty
12326 string or a zero time, no warnings are sent. Up to 10 times may be given. If a
12327 message has been on the queue for longer than the last time, the last interval
12328 between the times is used to compute subsequent warning times. For example,
12331 delay_warning = 4h:8h:24h
12333 the first message is sent after 4 hours, the second after 8 hours, and
12334 the third one after 24 hours. After that, messages are sent every 16 hours,
12335 because that is the interval between the last two times on the list. If you set
12336 just one time, it specifies the repeat interval. For example, with:
12340 messages are repeated every six hours. To stop warnings after a given time, set
12341 a very large time at the end of the list. For example:
12343 delay_warning = 2h:12h:99d
12346 .option delay_warning_condition main string&!! "see below"
12347 .cindex "&$domain$&"
12348 The string is expanded at the time a warning message might be sent. If all the
12349 deferred addresses have the same domain, it is set in &$domain$& during the
12350 expansion. Otherwise &$domain$& is empty. If the result of the expansion is a
12351 forced failure, an empty string, or a string matching any of &"0"&, &"no"& or
12352 &"false"& (the comparison being done caselessly) then the warning message is
12353 not sent. The default is
12355 delay_warning_condition = \
12356 ${if match{$h_precedence:}{(?i)bulk|list|junk}{no}{yes}}
12358 which suppresses the sending of warnings about messages that have &"bulk"&,
12359 &"list"& or &"junk"& in a &'Precedence:'& header.
12361 .option deliver_drop_privilege main boolean false
12362 .cindex "unprivileged delivery"
12363 .cindex "delivery" "unprivileged"
12364 If this option is set true, Exim drops its root privilege at the start of a
12365 delivery process, and runs as the Exim user throughout. This severely restricts
12366 the kinds of local delivery that are possible, but is viable in certain types
12367 of configuration. There is a discussion about the use of root privilege in
12368 chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>&.
12370 .option deliver_queue_load_max main fixed-point unset
12371 .cindex "load average"
12372 .cindex "queue runner" "abandoning"
12373 When this option is set, a queue run is abandoned if the system load average
12374 becomes greater than the value of the option. The option has no effect on
12375 ancient operating systems on which Exim cannot determine the load average.
12376 See also &%queue_only_load%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%&.
12379 .option delivery_date_remove main boolean true
12380 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
12381 Exim's transports have an option for adding a &'Delivery-date:'& header to a
12382 message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as &'Return-path:'& is
12383 handled. &'Delivery-date:'& records the actual time of delivery. Such headers
12384 should not be present in incoming messages, and this option causes them to be
12385 removed at the time the message is received, to avoid any problems that might
12386 occur when a delivered message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.
12389 .option disable_ipv6 main boolean false
12390 .cindex "IPv6" "disabling"
12391 If this option is set true, even if the Exim binary has IPv6 support, no IPv6
12392 activities take place. AAAA records are never looked up, and any IPv6 addresses
12393 that are listed in &%local_interfaces%&, data for the &%manualroute%& router,
12394 etc. are ignored. If IP literals are enabled, the &(ipliteral)& router declines
12395 to handle IPv6 literal addresses.
12398 .option dns_again_means_nonexist main "domain list&!!" unset
12399 .cindex "DNS" "&""try again""& response; overriding"
12400 DNS lookups give a &"try again"& response for the DNS errors
12401 &"non-authoritative host not found"& and &"SERVERFAIL"&. This can cause Exim to
12402 keep trying to deliver a message, or to give repeated temporary errors to
12403 incoming mail. Sometimes the effect is caused by a badly set up name server and
12404 may persist for a long time. If a domain which exhibits this problem matches
12405 anything in &%dns_again_means_nonexist%&, it is treated as if it did not exist.
12406 This option should be used with care. You can make it apply to reverse lookups
12407 by a setting such as this:
12409 dns_again_means_nonexist = *.in-addr.arpa
12411 This option applies to all DNS lookups that Exim does. It also applies when the
12412 &[gethostbyname()]& or &[getipnodebyname()]& functions give temporary errors,
12413 since these are most likely to be caused by DNS lookup problems. The
12414 &(dnslookup)& router has some options of its own for controlling what happens
12415 when lookups for MX or SRV records give temporary errors. These more specific
12416 options are applied after this global option.
12418 .option dns_check_names_pattern main string "see below"
12419 .cindex "DNS" "pre-check of name syntax"
12420 When this option is set to a non-empty string, it causes Exim to check domain
12421 names for characters that are not allowed in host names before handing them to
12422 the DNS resolver, because some resolvers give temporary errors for names that
12423 contain unusual characters. If a domain name contains any unwanted characters,
12424 a &"not found"& result is forced, and the resolver is not called. The check is
12425 done by matching the domain name against a regular expression, which is the
12426 value of this option. The default pattern is
12428 dns_check_names_pattern = \
12429 (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[^\W_](?>[a-z0-9/-]*[^\W_])?)+$
12431 which permits only letters, digits, slashes, and hyphens in components, but
12432 they must start and end with a letter or digit. Hyphens are not, in fact,
12433 permitted in host names, but they are found in certain NS records (which can be
12434 accessed in Exim by using a &%dnsdb%& lookup). If you set
12435 &%allow_utf8_domains%&, you must modify this pattern, or set the option to an
12438 .option dns_csa_search_limit main integer 5
12439 This option controls the depth of parental searching for CSA SRV records in the
12440 DNS, as described in more detail in section &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
12442 .option dns_csa_use_reverse main boolean true
12443 This option controls whether or not an IP address, given as a CSA domain, is
12444 reversed and looked up in the reverse DNS, as described in more detail in
12445 section &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
12447 .option dns_ipv4_lookup main "domain list&!!" unset
12448 .cindex "IPv6" "DNS lookup for AAAA records"
12449 .cindex "DNS" "IPv6 lookup for AAAA records"
12450 When Exim is compiled with IPv6 support and &%disable_ipv6%& is not set, it
12451 looks for IPv6 address records (AAAA records) as well as IPv4 address records
12452 (A records) when trying to find IP addresses for hosts, unless the host's
12453 domain matches this list.
12455 This is a fudge to help with name servers that give big delays or otherwise do
12456 not work for the AAAA record type. In due course, when the world's name
12457 servers have all been upgraded, there should be no need for this option.
12460 .option dns_retrans main time 0s
12461 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
12462 The options &%dns_retrans%& and &%dns_retry%& can be used to set the
12463 retransmission and retry parameters for DNS lookups. Values of zero (the
12464 defaults) leave the system default settings unchanged. The first value is the
12465 time between retries, and the second is the number of retries. It isn't
12466 totally clear exactly how these settings affect the total time a DNS lookup may
12467 take. I haven't found any documentation about timeouts on DNS lookups; these
12468 parameter values are available in the external resolver interface structure,
12469 but nowhere does it seem to describe how they are used or what you might want
12473 .option dns_retry main integer 0
12474 See &%dns_retrans%& above.
12477 .option drop_cr main boolean false
12478 This is an obsolete option that is now a no-op. It used to affect the way Exim
12479 handled CR and LF characters in incoming messages. What happens now is
12480 described in section &<<SECTlineendings>>&.
12483 .option envelope_to_remove main boolean true
12484 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
12485 Exim's transports have an option for adding an &'Envelope-to:'& header to a
12486 message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as &'Return-path:'& is
12487 handled. &'Envelope-to:'& records the original recipient address from the
12488 messages's envelope that caused the delivery to happen. Such headers should not
12489 be present in incoming messages, and this option causes them to be removed at
12490 the time the message is received, to avoid any problems that might occur when a
12491 delivered message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.
12494 .option errors_copy main "string list&!!" unset
12495 .cindex "bounce message" "copy to other address"
12496 .cindex "copy of bounce message"
12497 Setting this option causes Exim to send bcc copies of bounce messages that it
12498 generates to other addresses. &*Note*&: This does not apply to bounce messages
12499 coming from elsewhere. The value of the option is a colon-separated list of
12500 items. Each item consists of a pattern, terminated by white space, followed by
12501 a comma-separated list of email addresses. If a pattern contains spaces, it
12502 must be enclosed in double quotes.
12504 Each pattern is processed in the same way as a single item in an address list
12505 (see section &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). When a pattern matches the recipient of
12506 the bounce message, the message is copied to the addresses on the list. The
12507 items are scanned in order, and once a matching one is found, no further items
12508 are examined. For example:
12510 errors_copy = spqr@mydomain postmaster@mydomain.example :\
12511 rqps@mydomain hostmaster@mydomain.example,\
12512 postmaster@mydomain.example
12514 .cindex "&$domain$&"
12515 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
12516 The address list is expanded before use. The expansion variables &$local_part$&
12517 and &$domain$& are set from the original recipient of the error message, and if
12518 there was any wildcard matching in the pattern, the expansion
12519 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%errors_copy%&"
12520 variables &$0$&, &$1$&, etc. are set in the normal way.
12523 .option errors_reply_to main string unset
12524 .cindex "bounce message" "&'Reply-to:'& in"
12525 By default, Exim's bounce and delivery warning messages contain the header line
12527 &`From: Mail Delivery System <Mailer-Daemon@`&&'qualify-domain'&&`>`&
12529 .oindex &%quota_warn_message%&
12530 where &'qualify-domain'& is the value of the &%qualify_domain%& option.
12531 A warning message that is generated by the &%quota_warn_message%& option in an
12532 &(appendfile)& transport may contain its own &'From:'& header line that
12533 overrides the default.
12535 Experience shows that people reply to bounce messages. If the
12536 &%errors_reply_to%& option is set, a &'Reply-To:'& header is added to bounce
12537 and warning messages. For example:
12539 errors_reply_to = postmaster@my.domain.example
12541 The value of the option is not expanded. It must specify a valid RFC 2822
12542 address. However, if a warning message that is generated by the
12543 &%quota_warn_message%& option in an &(appendfile)& transport contain its
12544 own &'Reply-To:'& header line, the value of the &%errors_reply_to%& option is
12548 .option exim_group main string "compile-time configured"
12549 .cindex "gid (group id)" "Exim's own"
12550 .cindex "Exim group"
12551 This option changes the gid under which Exim runs when it gives up root
12552 privilege. The default value is compiled into the binary. The value of this
12553 option is used only when &%exim_user%& is also set. Unless it consists entirely
12554 of digits, the string is looked up using &[getgrnam()]&, and failure causes a
12555 configuration error. See chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for a discussion of
12559 .option exim_path main string "see below"
12560 .cindex "Exim binary" "path name"
12561 This option specifies the path name of the Exim binary, which is used when Exim
12562 needs to re-exec itself. The default is set up to point to the file &'exim'& in
12563 the directory configured at compile time by the BIN_DIRECTORY setting. It
12564 is necessary to change &%exim_path%& if, exceptionally, Exim is run from some
12566 &*Warning*&: Do not use a macro to define the value of this option, because
12567 you will break those Exim utilities that scan the configuration file to find
12568 where the binary is. (They then use the &%-bP%& option to extract option
12569 settings such as the value of &%spool_directory%&.)
12572 .option exim_user main string "compile-time configured"
12573 .cindex "uid (user id)" "Exim's own"
12574 .cindex "Exim user"
12575 This option changes the uid under which Exim runs when it gives up root
12576 privilege. The default value is compiled into the binary. Ownership of the run
12577 time configuration file and the use of the &%-C%& and &%-D%& command line
12578 options is checked against the values in the binary, not what is set here.
12580 Unless it consists entirely of digits, the string is looked up using
12581 &[getpwnam()]&, and failure causes a configuration error. If &%exim_group%& is
12582 not also supplied, the gid is taken from the result of &[getpwnam()]& if it is
12583 used. See chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for a discussion of security issues.
12586 .option extra_local_interfaces main "string list" unset
12587 This option defines network interfaces that are to be considered local when
12588 routing, but which are not used for listening by the daemon. See section
12589 &<<SECTreclocipadd>>& for details.
12592 .option "extract_addresses_remove_ &~arguments" main boolean true
12593 .cindex "&%-t%& option"
12594 .cindex "command line" "addresses with &%-t%&"
12595 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-t%& option"
12596 According to some Sendmail documentation (Sun, IRIX, HP-UX), if any addresses
12597 are present on the command line when the &%-t%& option is used to build an
12598 envelope from a message's &'To:'&, &'Cc:'& and &'Bcc:'& headers, the command
12599 line addresses are removed from the recipients list. This is also how Smail
12600 behaves. However, other Sendmail documentation (the O'Reilly book) states that
12601 command line addresses are added to those obtained from the header lines. When
12602 &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& is true (the default), Exim subtracts
12603 argument headers. If it is set false, Exim adds rather than removes argument
12607 .option finduser_retries main integer 0
12608 .cindex "NIS" "looking up users; retrying"
12609 On systems running NIS or other schemes in which user and group information is
12610 distributed from a remote system, there can be times when &[getpwnam()]& and
12611 related functions fail, even when given valid data, because things time out.
12612 Unfortunately these failures cannot be distinguished from genuine &"not found"&
12613 errors. If &%finduser_retries%& is set greater than zero, Exim will try that
12614 many extra times to find a user or a group, waiting for one second between
12617 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&" "multiple reading of"
12618 You should not set this option greater than zero if your user information is in
12619 a traditional &_/etc/passwd_& file, because it will cause Exim needlessly to
12620 search the file multiple times for non-existent users, and also cause delay.
12624 .option freeze_tell main "string list, comma separated" unset
12625 .cindex "freezing messages" "sending a message when freezing"
12626 On encountering certain errors, or when configured to do so in a system filter,
12627 ACL, or special router, Exim freezes a message. This means that no further
12628 delivery attempts take place until an administrator thaws the message, or the
12629 &%auto_thaw%&, &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&, or &%timeout_frozen_after%&
12630 feature cause it to be processed. If &%freeze_tell%& is set, Exim generates a
12631 warning message whenever it freezes something, unless the message it is
12632 freezing is a locally-generated bounce message. (Without this exception there
12633 is the possibility of looping.) The warning message is sent to the addresses
12634 supplied as the comma-separated value of this option. If several of the
12635 message's addresses cause freezing, only a single message is sent. If the
12636 freezing was automatic, the reason(s) for freezing can be found in the message
12637 log. If you configure freezing in a filter or ACL, you must arrange for any
12638 logging that you require.
12641 .option gecos_name main string&!! unset
12643 .cindex "&""gecos""& field" "parsing"
12644 Some operating systems, notably HP-UX, use the &"gecos"& field in the system
12645 password file to hold other information in addition to users' real names. Exim
12646 looks up this field for use when it is creating &'Sender:'& or &'From:'&
12647 headers. If either &%gecos_pattern%& or &%gecos_name%& are unset, the contents
12648 of the field are used unchanged, except that, if an ampersand is encountered,
12649 it is replaced by the user's login name with the first character forced to
12650 upper case, since this is a convention that is observed on many systems.
12652 When these options are set, &%gecos_pattern%& is treated as a regular
12653 expression that is to be applied to the field (again with && replaced by the
12654 login name), and if it matches, &%gecos_name%& is expanded and used as the
12657 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%gecos_name%&"
12658 Numeric variables such as &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. can be used in the expansion to
12659 pick up sub-fields that were matched by the pattern. In HP-UX, where the user's
12660 name terminates at the first comma, the following can be used:
12662 gecos_pattern = ([^,]*)
12666 .option gecos_pattern main string unset
12667 See &%gecos_name%& above.
12670 .option headers_charset main string "see below"
12671 This option sets a default character set for translating from encoded MIME
12672 &"words"& in header lines, when referenced by an &$h_xxx$& expansion item. The
12673 default is the value of HEADERS_CHARSET in &_Local/Makefile_&. The
12674 ultimate default is ISO-8859-1. For more details see the description of header
12675 insertions in section &<<SECTexpansionitems>>&.
12679 .option header_maxsize main integer "see below"
12680 .cindex "header section" "maximum size of"
12681 .cindex "limit" "size of message header section"
12682 This option controls the overall maximum size of a message's header
12683 section. The default is the value of HEADER_MAXSIZE in
12684 &_Local/Makefile_&; the default for that is 1M. Messages with larger header
12685 sections are rejected.
12688 .option header_line_maxsize main integer 0
12689 .cindex "header lines" "maximum size of"
12690 .cindex "limit" "size of one header line"
12691 This option limits the length of any individual header line in a message, after
12692 all the continuations have been joined together. Messages with individual
12693 header lines that are longer than the limit are rejected. The default value of
12694 zero means &"no limit"&.
12699 .option helo_accept_junk_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12700 .cindex "HELO" "accepting junk data"
12701 .cindex "EHLO" "accepting junk data"
12702 Exim checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands for incoming SMTP
12703 mail, and gives an error response for invalid data. Unfortunately, there are
12704 some SMTP clients that send syntactic junk. They can be accommodated by setting
12705 this option. Note that this is a syntax check only. See &%helo_verify_hosts%&
12706 if you want to do semantic checking.
12707 See also &%helo_allow_chars%& for a way of extending the permitted character
12711 .option helo_allow_chars main string unset
12712 .cindex "HELO" "underscores in"
12713 .cindex "EHLO" "underscores in"
12714 .cindex "underscore in EHLO/HELO"
12715 This option can be set to a string of rogue characters that are permitted in
12716 all EHLO and HELO names in addition to the standard letters, digits,
12717 hyphens, and dots. If you really must allow underscores, you can set
12719 helo_allow_chars = _
12721 Note that the value is one string, not a list.
12724 .option helo_lookup_domains main "domain list&!!" &`@:@[]`&
12725 .cindex "HELO" "forcing reverse lookup"
12726 .cindex "EHLO" "forcing reverse lookup"
12727 If the domain given by a client in a HELO or EHLO command matches this
12728 list, a reverse lookup is done in order to establish the host's true name. The
12729 default forces a lookup if the client host gives the server's name or any of
12730 its IP addresses (in brackets), something that broken clients have been seen to
12734 .option helo_try_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12735 .cindex "HELO verifying" "optional"
12736 .cindex "EHLO verifying" "optional"
12737 By default, Exim just checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands (see
12738 &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& and &%helo_allow_chars%&). However, some sites like
12739 to do more extensive checking of the data supplied by these commands. The ACL
12740 condition &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& is provided to make this possible.
12741 Formerly, it was necessary also to set this option (&%helo_try_verify_hosts%&)
12742 to force the check to occur. From release 4.53 onwards, this is no longer
12743 necessary. If the check has not been done before &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& is
12744 encountered, it is done at that time. Consequently, this option is obsolete.
12745 Its specification is retained here for backwards compatibility.
12747 When an EHLO or HELO command is received, if the calling host matches
12748 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&, Exim checks that the host name given in the HELO or
12749 EHLO command either:
12752 is an IP literal matching the calling address of the host, or
12754 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
12755 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
12756 matches the host name that Exim obtains by doing a reverse lookup of the
12757 calling host address, or
12759 when looked up using &[gethostbyname()]& (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when
12760 available) yields the calling host address.
12763 However, the EHLO or HELO command is not rejected if any of the checks
12764 fail. Processing continues, but the result of the check is remembered, and can
12765 be detected later in an ACL by the &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& condition.
12767 .option helo_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12768 .cindex "HELO verifying" "mandatory"
12769 .cindex "EHLO verifying" "mandatory"
12770 Like &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&, this option is obsolete, and retained only for
12771 backwards compatibility. For hosts that match this option, Exim checks the host
12772 name given in the HELO or EHLO in the same way as for
12773 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&. If the check fails, the HELO or EHLO command is
12774 rejected with a 550 error, and entries are written to the main and reject logs.
12775 If a MAIL command is received before EHLO or HELO, it is rejected with a 503
12778 .option hold_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
12779 .cindex "domain" "delaying delivery"
12780 .cindex "delivery" "delaying certain domains"
12781 This option allows mail for particular domains to be held on the queue
12782 manually. The option is overridden if a message delivery is forced with the
12783 &%-M%&, &%-qf%&, &%-Rf%& or &%-Sf%& options, and also while testing or
12784 verifying addresses using &%-bt%& or &%-bv%&. Otherwise, if a domain matches an
12785 item in &%hold_domains%&, no routing or delivery for that address is done, and
12786 it is deferred every time the message is looked at.
12788 This option is intended as a temporary operational measure for delaying the
12789 delivery of mail while some problem is being sorted out, or some new
12790 configuration tested. If you just want to delay the processing of some
12791 domains until a queue run occurs, you should use &%queue_domains%& or
12792 &%queue_smtp_domains%&, not &%hold_domains%&.
12794 A setting of &%hold_domains%& does not override Exim's code for removing
12795 messages from the queue if they have been there longer than the longest retry
12796 time in any retry rule. If you want to hold messages for longer than the normal
12797 retry times, insert a dummy retry rule with a long retry time.
12800 .option host_lookup main "host list&!!" unset
12801 .cindex "host name lookup" "forcing"
12802 Exim does not look up the name of a calling host from its IP address unless it
12803 is required to compare against some host list, or the host matches
12804 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& or &%helo_verify_hosts%&, or the host matches this
12805 option (which normally contains IP addresses rather than host names). The
12806 default configuration file contains
12810 which causes a lookup to happen for all hosts. If the expense of these lookups
12811 is felt to be too great, the setting can be changed or removed.
12813 After a successful reverse lookup, Exim does a forward lookup on the name it
12814 has obtained, to verify that it yields the IP address that it started with. If
12815 this check fails, Exim behaves as if the name lookup failed.
12817 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
12818 .cindex "&$sender_host_name$&"
12819 After any kind of failure, the host name (in &$sender_host_name$&) remains
12820 unset, and &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to the string &"1"&. See also
12821 &%dns_again_means_nonexist%&, &%helo_lookup_domains%&, and &`verify`& &`=`&
12822 &`reverse_host_lookup`& in ACLs.
12825 .option host_lookup_order main "string list" &`bydns:byaddr`&
12826 This option specifies the order of different lookup methods when Exim is trying
12827 to find a host name from an IP address. The default is to do a DNS lookup
12828 first, and then to try a local lookup (using &[gethostbyaddr()]& or equivalent)
12829 if that fails. You can change the order of these lookups, or omit one entirely,
12832 &*Warning*&: The &"byaddr"& method does not always yield aliases when there are
12833 multiple PTR records in the DNS and the IP address is not listed in
12834 &_/etc/hosts_&. Different operating systems give different results in this
12835 case. That is why the default tries a DNS lookup first.
12839 .option host_reject_connection main "host list&!!" unset
12840 .cindex "host" "rejecting connections from"
12841 If this option is set, incoming SMTP calls from the hosts listed are rejected
12842 as soon as the connection is made.
12843 This option is obsolete, and retained only for backward compatibility, because
12844 nowadays the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_connect%& can also reject incoming
12845 connections immediately.
12847 The ability to give an immediate rejection (either by this option or using an
12848 ACL) is provided for use in unusual cases. Many hosts will just try again,
12849 sometimes without much delay. Normally, it is better to use an ACL to reject
12850 incoming messages at a later stage, such as after RCPT commands. See
12851 chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&.
12854 .option hosts_connection_nolog main "host list&!!" unset
12855 .cindex "host" "not logging connections from"
12856 This option defines a list of hosts for which connection logging does not
12857 happen, even though the &%smtp_connection%& log selector is set. For example,
12858 you might want not to log SMTP connections from local processes, or from
12859 127.0.0.1, or from your local LAN. This option is consulted in the main loop of
12860 the daemon; you should therefore strive to restrict its value to a short inline
12861 list of IP addresses and networks. To disable logging SMTP connections from
12862 local processes, you must create a host list with an empty item. For example:
12864 hosts_connection_nolog = :
12866 If the &%smtp_connection%& log selector is not set, this option has no effect.
12870 .option hosts_treat_as_local main "domain list&!!" unset
12871 .cindex "local host" "domains treated as"
12872 .cindex "host" "treated as local"
12873 If this option is set, any host names that match the domain list are treated as
12874 if they were the local host when Exim is scanning host lists obtained from MX
12876 or other sources. Note that the value of this option is a domain list, not a
12877 host list, because it is always used to check host names, not IP addresses.
12879 This option also applies when Exim is matching the special items
12880 &`@mx_any`&, &`@mx_primary`&, and &`@mx_secondary`& in a domain list (see
12881 section &<<SECTdomainlist>>&), and when checking the &%hosts%& option in the
12882 &(smtp)& transport for the local host (see the &%allow_localhost%& option in
12883 that transport). See also &%local_interfaces%&, &%extra_local_interfaces%&, and
12884 chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>&, which contains a discussion about local network
12885 interfaces and recognising the local host.
12888 .option ignore_bounce_errors_after main time 10w
12889 .cindex "bounce message" "discarding"
12890 .cindex "discarding bounce message"
12891 This option affects the processing of bounce messages that cannot be delivered,
12892 that is, those that suffer a permanent delivery failure. (Bounce messages that
12893 suffer temporary delivery failures are of course retried in the usual way.)
12895 After a permanent delivery failure, bounce messages are frozen,
12896 because there is no sender to whom they can be returned. When a frozen bounce
12897 message has been on the queue for more than the given time, it is unfrozen at
12898 the next queue run, and a further delivery is attempted. If delivery fails
12899 again, the bounce message is discarded. This makes it possible to keep failed
12900 bounce messages around for a shorter time than the normal maximum retry time
12901 for frozen messages. For example,
12903 ignore_bounce_errors_after = 12h
12905 retries failed bounce message deliveries after 12 hours, discarding any further
12906 failures. If the value of this option is set to a zero time period, bounce
12907 failures are discarded immediately. Setting a very long time (as in the default
12908 value) has the effect of disabling this option. For ways of automatically
12909 dealing with other kinds of frozen message, see &%auto_thaw%& and
12910 &%timeout_frozen_after%&.
12913 .option ignore_fromline_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12914 .cindex "&""From""& line"
12915 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
12916 Some broken SMTP clients insist on sending a UUCP-like &"From&~"& line before
12917 the headers of a message. By default this is treated as the start of the
12918 message's body, which means that any following headers are not recognized as
12919 such. Exim can be made to ignore it by setting &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& to
12920 match those hosts that insist on sending it. If the sender is actually a local
12921 process rather than a remote host, and is using &%-bs%& to inject the messages,
12922 &%ignore_fromline_local%& must be set to achieve this effect.
12925 .option ignore_fromline_local main boolean false
12926 See &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& above.
12929 .option keep_malformed main time 4d
12930 This option specifies the length of time to keep messages whose spool files
12931 have been corrupted in some way. This should, of course, never happen. At the
12932 next attempt to deliver such a message, it gets removed. The incident is
12936 .option ldap_default_servers main "string list" unset
12937 .cindex "LDAP" "default servers"
12938 This option provides a list of LDAP servers which are tried in turn when an
12939 LDAP query does not contain a server. See section &<<SECTforldaque>>& for
12940 details of LDAP queries. This option is available only when Exim has been built
12944 .option ldap_version main integer unset
12945 .cindex "LDAP protocol version" "forcing"
12946 This option can be used to force Exim to set a specific protocol version for
12947 LDAP. If it option is unset, it is shown by the &%-bP%& command line option as
12948 -1. When this is the case, the default is 3 if LDAP_VERSION3 is defined in
12949 the LDAP headers; otherwise it is 2. This option is available only when Exim
12950 has been built with LDAP support.
12954 .option local_from_check main boolean true
12955 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line" "disabling addition of"
12956 .cindex "&'From:'& header line" "disabling checking of"
12957 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP connection) by
12958 an untrusted user, Exim removes any existing &'Sender:'& header line, and
12959 checks that the &'From:'& header line matches the login of the calling user and
12960 the domain specified by &%qualify_domain%&.
12962 &*Note*&: An unqualified address (no domain) in the &'From:'& header in a
12963 locally submitted message is automatically qualified by Exim, unless the
12964 &%-bnq%& command line option is used.
12966 You can use &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%& to permit affixes
12967 on the local part. If the &'From:'& header line does not match, Exim adds a
12968 &'Sender:'& header with an address constructed from the calling user's login
12969 and the default qualify domain.
12971 If &%local_from_check%& is set false, the &'From:'& header check is disabled,
12972 and no &'Sender:'& header is ever added. If, in addition, you want to retain
12973 &'Sender:'& header lines supplied by untrusted users, you must also set
12974 &%local_sender_retain%& to be true.
12976 .cindex "envelope sender"
12977 These options affect only the header lines in the message. The envelope sender
12978 is still forced to be the login id at the qualify domain unless
12979 &%untrusted_set_sender%& permits the user to supply an envelope sender.
12981 For messages received over TCP/IP, an ACL can specify &"submission mode"& to
12982 request similar header line checking. See section &<<SECTthesenhea>>&, which
12983 has more details about &'Sender:'& processing.
12988 .option local_from_prefix main string unset
12989 When Exim checks the &'From:'& header line of locally submitted messages for
12990 matching the login id (see &%local_from_check%& above), it can be configured to
12991 ignore certain prefixes and suffixes in the local part of the address. This is
12992 done by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and/or &%local_from_suffix%& to
12993 appropriate lists, in the same form as the &%local_part_prefix%& and
12994 &%local_part_suffix%& router options (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&). For
12997 local_from_prefix = *-
12999 is set, a &'From:'& line containing
13001 From: anything-user@your.domain.example
13003 will not cause a &'Sender:'& header to be added if &'user@your.domain.example'&
13004 matches the actual sender address that is constructed from the login name and
13008 .option local_from_suffix main string unset
13009 See &%local_from_prefix%& above.
13012 .option local_interfaces main "string list" "see below"
13013 This option controls which network interfaces are used by the daemon for
13014 listening; they are also used to identify the local host when routing. Chapter
13015 &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& contains a full description of this option and the related
13016 options &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, &%extra_local_interfaces%&,
13017 &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, and &%tls_on_connect_ports%&. The default value for
13018 &%local_interfaces%& is
13020 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0
13022 when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is
13024 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
13027 .option local_scan_timeout main time 5m
13028 .cindex "timeout" "for &[local_scan()]& function"
13029 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "timeout"
13030 This timeout applies to the &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter
13031 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&). Zero means &"no timeout"&. If the timeout is exceeded,
13032 the incoming message is rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP
13033 message. For a non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a
13034 non-zero code. The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.
13038 .option local_sender_retain main boolean false
13039 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line" "retaining from local submission"
13040 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP connection) by
13041 an untrusted user, Exim removes any existing &'Sender:'& header line. If you
13042 do not want this to happen, you must set &%local_sender_retain%&, and you must
13043 also set &%local_from_check%& to be false (Exim will complain if you do not).
13044 See also the ACL modifier &`control = suppress_local_fixups`&. Section
13045 &<<SECTthesenhea>>& has more details about &'Sender:'& processing.
13050 .option localhost_number main string&!! unset
13051 .cindex "host" "locally unique number for"
13052 .cindex "message ids" "with multiple hosts"
13053 .cindex "&$localhost_number$&"
13054 Exim's message ids are normally unique only within the local host. If
13055 uniqueness among a set of hosts is required, each host must set a different
13056 value for the &%localhost_number%& option. The string is expanded immediately
13057 after reading the configuration file (so that a number can be computed from the
13058 host name, for example) and the result of the expansion must be a number in the
13059 range 0&--16 (or 0&--10 on operating systems with case-insensitive file
13060 systems). This is available in subsequent string expansions via the variable
13061 &$localhost_number$&. When &%localhost_number is set%&, the final two
13062 characters of the message id, instead of just being a fractional part of the
13063 time, are computed from the time and the local host number as described in
13064 section &<<SECTmessiden>>&.
13068 .option log_file_path main "string list&!!" "set at compile time"
13069 .cindex "log" "file path for"
13070 This option sets the path which is used to determine the names of Exim's log
13071 files, or indicates that logging is to be to syslog, or both. It is expanded
13072 when Exim is entered, so it can, for example, contain a reference to the host
13073 name. If no specific path is set for the log files at compile or run time, they
13074 are written in a sub-directory called &_log_& in Exim's spool directory.
13075 Chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& contains further details about Exim's logging, and
13076 section &<<SECTwhelogwri>>& describes how the contents of &%log_file_path%& are
13077 used. If this string is fixed at your installation (contains no expansion
13078 variables) it is recommended that you do not set this option in the
13079 configuration file, but instead supply the path using LOG_FILE_PATH in
13080 &_Local/Makefile_& so that it is available to Exim for logging errors detected
13081 early on &-- in particular, failure to read the configuration file.
13084 .option log_selector main string unset
13085 .cindex "log" "selectors"
13086 This option can be used to reduce or increase the number of things that Exim
13087 writes to its log files. Its argument is made up of names preceded by plus or
13088 minus characters. For example:
13090 log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer
13092 A list of possible names and what they control is given in the chapter on
13093 logging, in section &<<SECTlogselector>>&.
13096 .option log_timezone main boolean false
13097 .cindex "log" "timezone for entries"
13098 .cindex "&$tod_log$&"
13099 .cindex "&$tod_zone$&"
13100 By default, the timestamps on log lines are in local time without the
13101 timezone. This means that if your timezone changes twice a year, the timestamps
13102 in log lines are ambiguous for an hour when the clocks go back. One way of
13103 avoiding this problem is to set the timezone to UTC. An alternative is to set
13104 &%log_timezone%& true. This turns on the addition of the timezone offset to
13105 timestamps in log lines. Turning on this option can add quite a lot to the size
13106 of log files because each line is extended by 6 characters. Note that the
13107 &$tod_log$& variable contains the log timestamp without the zone, but there is
13108 another variable called &$tod_zone$& that contains just the timezone offset.
13111 .option lookup_open_max main integer 25
13112 .cindex "too many open files"
13113 .cindex "open files" "too many"
13114 .cindex "file" "too many open"
13115 .cindex "lookup" "maximum open files"
13116 .cindex "limit" "open files for lookups"
13117 This option limits the number of simultaneously open files for single-key
13118 lookups that use regular files (that is, &(lsearch)&, &(dbm)&, and &(cdb)&).
13119 Exim normally keeps these files open during routing, because often the same
13120 file is required several times. If the limit is reached, Exim closes the least
13121 recently used file. Note that if you are using the &'ndbm'& library, it
13122 actually opens two files for each logical DBM database, though it still counts
13123 as one for the purposes of &%lookup_open_max%&. If you are getting &"too many
13124 open files"& errors with NDBM, you need to reduce the value of
13125 &%lookup_open_max%&.
13128 .option max_username_length main integer 0
13129 .cindex "length" "of login name"
13130 .cindex "user name" "maximum length"
13131 .cindex "limit" "user name length"
13132 Some operating systems are broken in that they truncate long arguments to
13133 &[getpwnam()]& to eight characters, instead of returning &"no such user"&. If
13134 this option is set greater than zero, any attempt to call &[getpwnam()]& with
13135 an argument that is longer behaves as if &[getpwnam()]& failed.
13139 .option message_body_visible main integer 500
13140 .cindex "body of message" "visible size"
13141 .cindex "message body" "visible size"
13142 .cindex "&$message_body$&"
13143 .cindex "&$message_body_end$&"
13144 This option specifies how much of a message's body is to be included in the
13145 &$message_body$& and &$message_body_end$& expansion variables.
13148 .option message_id_header_domain main string&!! unset
13149 .cindex "&'Message-ID:'& header line"
13150 If this option is set, the string is expanded and used as the right hand side
13151 (domain) of the &'Message-ID:'& header that Exim creates if a
13152 locally-originated incoming message does not have one. &"Locally-originated"&
13153 means &"not received over TCP/IP."&
13154 Otherwise, the primary host name is used.
13155 Only letters, digits, dot and hyphen are accepted; any other characters are
13156 replaced by hyphens. If the expansion is forced to fail, or if the result is an
13157 empty string, the option is ignored.
13160 .option message_id_header_text main string&!! unset
13161 If this variable is set, the string is expanded and used to augment the text of
13162 the &'Message-id:'& header that Exim creates if a locally-originated incoming
13163 message does not have one. The text of this header is required by RFC 2822 to
13164 take the form of an address. By default, Exim uses its internal message id as
13165 the local part, and the primary host name as the domain. If this option is set,
13166 it is expanded, and provided the expansion is not forced to fail, and does not
13167 yield an empty string, the result is inserted into the header immediately
13168 before the @, separated from the internal message id by a dot. Any characters
13169 that are illegal in an address are automatically converted into hyphens. This
13170 means that variables such as &$tod_log$& can be used, because the spaces and
13171 colons will become hyphens.
13174 .option message_logs main boolean true
13175 .cindex "message log" "disabling"
13176 .cindex "log" "message log; disabling"
13177 If this option is turned off, per-message log files are not created in the
13178 &_msglog_& spool sub-directory. This reduces the amount of disk I/O required by
13179 Exim, by reducing the number of files involved in handling a message from a
13180 minimum of four (header spool file, body spool file, delivery journal, and
13181 per-message log) to three. The other major I/O activity is Exim's main log,
13182 which is not affected by this option.
13185 .option message_size_limit main string&!! 50M
13186 .cindex "message" "size limit"
13187 .cindex "limit" "message size"
13188 .cindex "size of message" "limit"
13189 This option limits the maximum size of message that Exim will process. The
13190 value is expanded for each incoming
13191 connection so, for example, it can be made to depend on the IP address of the
13192 remote host for messages arriving via TCP/IP. &*Note*&: This limit cannot be
13193 made to depend on a message's sender or any other properties of an individual
13194 message, because it has to be advertised in the server's response to EHLO.
13195 String expansion failure causes a temporary error. A value of zero means no
13196 limit, but its use is not recommended. See also &%bounce_return_size_limit%&.
13198 Incoming SMTP messages are failed with a 552 error if the limit is
13199 exceeded; locally-generated messages either get a stderr message or a delivery
13200 failure message to the sender, depending on the &%-oe%& setting. Rejection of
13201 an oversized message is logged in both the main and the reject logs. See also
13202 the generic transport option &%message_size_limit%&, which limits the size of
13203 message that an individual transport can process.
13206 .option move_frozen_messages main boolean false
13207 .cindex "frozen messages" "moving"
13208 This option, which is available only if Exim has been built with the setting
13210 SUPPORT_MOVE_FROZEN_MESSAGES=yes
13212 in &_Local/Makefile_&, causes frozen messages and their message logs to be
13213 moved from the &_input_& and &_msglog_& directories on the spool to &_Finput_&
13214 and &_Fmsglog_&, respectively. There is currently no support in Exim or the
13215 standard utilities for handling such moved messages, and they do not show up in
13216 lists generated by &%-bp%& or by the Exim monitor.
13219 .option mua_wrapper main boolean false
13220 Setting this option true causes Exim to run in a very restrictive mode in which
13221 it passes messages synchronously to a smart host. Chapter &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&
13222 contains a full description of this facility.
13226 .option mysql_servers main "string list" unset
13227 .cindex "MySQL" "server list"
13228 This option provides a list of MySQL servers and associated connection data, to
13229 be used in conjunction with &(mysql)& lookups (see section &<<SECTsql>>&). The
13230 option is available only if Exim has been built with MySQL support.
13233 .option never_users main "string list&!!" unset
13234 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. Local
13235 message deliveries are normally run in processes that are setuid to the
13236 recipient, and remote deliveries are normally run under Exim's own uid and gid.
13237 It is usually desirable to prevent any deliveries from running as root, as a
13240 When Exim is built, an option called FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to a
13241 list of users that must not be used for local deliveries. This list is fixed in
13242 the binary and cannot be overridden by the configuration file. By default, it
13243 contains just the single user name &"root"&. The &%never_users%& runtime option
13244 can be used to add more users to the fixed list.
13246 If a message is to be delivered as one of the users on the fixed list or the
13247 &%never_users%& list, an error occurs, and delivery is deferred. A common
13250 never_users = root:daemon:bin
13252 Including root is redundant if it is also on the fixed list, but it does no
13253 harm. This option overrides the &%pipe_as_creator%& option of the &(pipe)&
13257 .option oracle_servers main "string list" unset
13258 .cindex "Oracle" "server list"
13259 This option provides a list of Oracle servers and associated connection data,
13260 to be used in conjunction with &(oracle)& lookups (see section &<<SECTsql>>&).
13261 The option is available only if Exim has been built with Oracle support.
13264 .option percent_hack_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13265 .cindex "&""percent hack""&"
13266 .cindex "source routing" "in email address"
13267 .cindex "address" "source-routed"
13268 The &"percent hack"& is the convention whereby a local part containing a
13269 percent sign is re-interpreted as a new email address, with the percent
13270 replaced by @. This is sometimes called &"source routing"&, though that term is
13271 also applied to RFC 2822 addresses that begin with an @ character. If this
13272 option is set, Exim implements the percent facility for those domains listed,
13273 but no others. This happens before an incoming SMTP address is tested against
13276 &*Warning*&: The &"percent hack"& has often been abused by people who are
13277 trying to get round relaying restrictions. For this reason, it is best avoided
13278 if at all possible. Unfortunately, a number of less security-conscious MTAs
13279 implement it unconditionally. If you are running Exim on a gateway host, and
13280 routing mail through to internal MTAs without processing the local parts, it is
13281 a good idea to reject recipient addresses with percent characters in their
13282 local parts. Exim's default configuration does this.
13285 .option perl_at_start main boolean false
13286 This option is available only when Exim is built with an embedded Perl
13287 interpreter. See chapter &<<CHAPperl>>& for details of its use.
13290 .option perl_startup main string unset
13291 This option is available only when Exim is built with an embedded Perl
13292 interpreter. See chapter &<<CHAPperl>>& for details of its use.
13295 .option pgsql_servers main "string list" unset
13296 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type" "server list"
13297 This option provides a list of PostgreSQL servers and associated connection
13298 data, to be used in conjunction with &(pgsql)& lookups (see section
13299 &<<SECTsql>>&). The option is available only if Exim has been built with
13300 PostgreSQL support.
13303 .option pid_file_path main string&!! "set at compile time"
13304 .cindex "daemon" "pid file path"
13305 .cindex "pid file" "path for"
13306 This option sets the name of the file to which the Exim daemon writes its
13307 process id. The string is expanded, so it can contain, for example, references
13310 pid_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim.pid
13312 If no path is set, the pid is written to the file &_exim-daemon.pid_& in Exim's
13314 The value set by the option can be overridden by the &%-oP%& command line
13315 option. A pid file is not written if a &"non-standard"& daemon is run by means
13316 of the &%-oX%& option, unless a path is explicitly supplied by &%-oP%&.
13319 .option pipelining_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13320 .cindex "PIPELINING advertising" "suppressing"
13321 This option can be used to suppress the advertisement of the SMTP
13322 PIPELINING extension to specific hosts. When PIPELINING is not
13323 advertised and &%smtp_enforce_sync%& is true, an Exim server enforces strict
13324 synchronization for each SMTP command and response.
13325 When PIPELINING is advertised, Exim assumes that clients will use it; &"out
13326 of order"& commands that are &"expected"& do not count as protocol errors (see
13327 &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%&).
13330 .option preserve_message_logs main boolean false
13331 .cindex "message logs" "preserving"
13332 If this option is set, message log files are not deleted when messages are
13333 completed. Instead, they are moved to a sub-directory of the spool directory
13334 called &_msglog.OLD_&, where they remain available for statistical or debugging
13335 purposes. This is a dangerous option to set on systems with any appreciable
13336 volume of mail. Use with care!
13339 .option primary_hostname main string "see below"
13340 .cindex "name" "of local host"
13341 .cindex "host" "name of local"
13342 .cindex "local host" "name of"
13343 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
13344 This specifies the name of the current host. It is used in the default EHLO or
13345 HELO command for outgoing SMTP messages (changeable via the &%helo_data%&
13346 option in the &(smtp)& transport), and as the default for &%qualify_domain%&.
13347 The value is also used by default in some SMTP response messages from an Exim
13348 server. This can be changed dynamically by setting &%smtp_active_hostname%&.
13350 If &%primary_hostname%& is not set, Exim calls &[uname()]& to find the host
13351 name. If this fails, Exim panics and dies. If the name returned by &[uname()]&
13352 contains only one component, Exim passes it to &[gethostbyname()]& (or
13353 &[getipnodebyname()]& when available) in order to obtain the fully qualified
13354 version. The variable &$primary_hostname$& contains the host name, whether set
13355 explicitly by this option, or defaulted.
13358 .option print_topbitchars main boolean false
13359 .cindex "printing characters"
13360 .cindex "8-bit characters"
13361 By default, Exim considers only those characters whose codes lie in the range
13362 32&--126 to be printing characters. In a number of circumstances (for example,
13363 when writing log entries) non-printing characters are converted into escape
13364 sequences, primarily to avoid messing up the layout. If &%print_topbitchars%&
13365 is set, code values of 128 and above are also considered to be printing
13369 .option process_log_path main string unset
13370 .cindex "process log path"
13371 .cindex "log" "process log"
13372 .cindex "&'exiwhat'&"
13373 This option sets the name of the file to which an Exim process writes its
13374 &"process log"& when sent a USR1 signal. This is used by the &'exiwhat'&
13375 utility script. If this option is unset, the file called &_exim-process.info_&
13376 in Exim's spool directory is used. The ability to specify the name explicitly
13377 can be useful in environments where two different Exims are running, using
13378 different spool directories.
13381 .option prod_requires_admin main boolean true
13382 .cindex "&%-M%& option"
13383 .cindex "&%-R%& option"
13384 .cindex "&%-q%& option"
13385 The &%-M%&, &%-R%&, and &%-q%& command-line options require the caller to be an
13386 admin user unless &%prod_requires_admin%& is set false. See also
13387 &%queue_list_requires_admin%&.
13390 .option qualify_domain main string "see below"
13391 .cindex "domain" "for qualifying addresses"
13392 .cindex "address" "qualification"
13393 This option specifies the domain name that is added to any envelope sender
13394 addresses that do not have a domain qualification. It also applies to
13395 recipient addresses if &%qualify_recipient%& is not set. Unqualified addresses
13396 are accepted by default only for locally-generated messages. Qualification is
13397 also applied to addresses in header lines such as &'From:'& and &'To:'& for
13398 locally-generated messages, unless the &%-bnq%& command line option is used.
13400 Messages from external sources must always contain fully qualified addresses,
13401 unless the sending host matches &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or
13402 &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& (as appropriate), in which case incoming
13403 addresses are qualified with &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%& as
13404 necessary. Internally, Exim always works with fully qualified envelope
13405 addresses. If &%qualify_domain%& is not set, it defaults to the
13406 &%primary_hostname%& value.
13409 .option qualify_recipient main string "see below"
13410 This option allows you to specify a different domain for qualifying recipient
13411 addresses to the one that is used for senders. See &%qualify_domain%& above.
13415 .option queue_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13416 .cindex "domain" "specifying non-immediate delivery"
13417 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13418 .cindex "message" "queueing certain domains"
13419 This option lists domains for which immediate delivery is not required.
13420 A delivery process is started whenever a message is received, but only those
13421 domains that do not match are processed. All other deliveries wait until the
13422 next queue run. See also &%hold_domains%& and &%queue_smtp_domains%&.
13425 .option queue_list_requires_admin main boolean true
13426 .cindex "&%-bp%& option"
13427 The &%-bp%& command-line option, which lists the messages that are on the
13428 queue, requires the caller to be an admin user unless
13429 &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set false. See also &%prod_requires_admin%&.
13432 .option queue_only main boolean false
13433 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13434 .cindex "message" "queueing unconditionally"
13435 If &%queue_only%& is set, a delivery process is not automatically started
13436 whenever a message is received. Instead, the message waits on the queue for the
13437 next queue run. Even if &%queue_only%& is false, incoming messages may not get
13438 delivered immediately when certain conditions (such as heavy load) occur.
13440 The &%-odq%& command line has the same effect as &%queue_only%&. The &%-odb%&
13441 and &%-odi%& command line options override &%queue_only%& unless
13442 &%queue_only_override%& is set false. See also &%queue_only_file%&,
13443 &%queue_only_load%&, and &%smtp_accept_queue%&.
13446 .option queue_only_file main string unset
13447 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13448 .cindex "message" "queueing by file existence"
13449 This option can be set to a colon-separated list of absolute path names, each
13450 one optionally preceded by &"smtp"&. When Exim is receiving a message,
13451 it tests for the existence of each listed path using a call to &[stat()]&. For
13452 each path that exists, the corresponding queuing option is set.
13453 For paths with no prefix, &%queue_only%& is set; for paths prefixed by
13454 &"smtp"&, &%queue_smtp_domains%& is set to match all domains. So, for example,
13456 queue_only_file = smtp/some/file
13458 causes Exim to behave as if &%queue_smtp_domains%& were set to &"*"& whenever
13459 &_/some/file_& exists.
13462 .option queue_only_load main fixed-point unset
13463 .cindex "load average"
13464 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13465 .cindex "message" "queueing by load"
13466 If the system load average is higher than this value, incoming messages from
13467 all sources are queued, and no automatic deliveries are started. If this
13468 happens during local or remote SMTP input, all subsequent messages on the same
13469 connection are queued. Deliveries will subsequently be performed by queue
13470 runner processes. This option has no effect on ancient operating systems on
13471 which Exim cannot determine the load average. See also
13472 &%deliver_queue_load_max%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%&.
13475 .option queue_only_override main boolean true
13476 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13477 When this option is true, the &%-od%&&'x'& command line options override the
13478 setting of &%queue_only%& or &%queue_only_file%& in the configuration file. If
13479 &%queue_only_override%& is set false, the &%-od%&&'x'& options cannot be used
13480 to override; they are accepted, but ignored.
13483 .option queue_run_in_order main boolean false
13484 .cindex "queue runner" "processing messages in order"
13485 If this option is set, queue runs happen in order of message arrival instead of
13486 in an arbitrary order. For this to happen, a complete list of the entire queue
13487 must be set up before the deliveries start. When the queue is all held in a
13488 single directory (the default), a single list is created for both the ordered
13489 and the non-ordered cases. However, if &%split_spool_directory%& is set, a
13490 single list is not created when &%queue_run_in_order%& is false. In this case,
13491 the sub-directories are processed one at a time (in a random order), and this
13492 avoids setting up one huge list for the whole queue. Thus, setting
13493 &%queue_run_in_order%& with &%split_spool_directory%& may degrade performance
13494 when the queue is large, because of the extra work in setting up the single,
13495 large list. In most situations, &%queue_run_in_order%& should not be set.
13499 .option queue_run_max main integer 5
13500 .cindex "queue runner" "maximum number of"
13501 This controls the maximum number of queue runner processes that an Exim daemon
13502 can run simultaneously. This does not mean that it starts them all at once,
13503 but rather that if the maximum number are still running when the time comes to
13504 start another one, it refrains from starting another one. This can happen with
13505 very large queues and/or very sluggish deliveries. This option does not,
13506 however, interlock with other processes, so additional queue runners can be
13507 started by other means, or by killing and restarting the daemon.
13509 Setting this option to zero does not suppress queue runs; rather, it disables
13510 the limit, allowing any number of simultaneous queue runner processes to be
13511 run. If you do not want queue runs to occur, omit the &%-q%&&'xx'& setting on
13512 the daemon's command line.
13514 .option queue_smtp_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13515 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13516 .cindex "message" "queueing remote deliveries"
13517 When this option is set, a delivery process is started whenever a message is
13518 received, routing is performed, and local deliveries take place.
13519 However, if any SMTP deliveries are required for domains that match
13520 &%queue_smtp_domains%&, they are not immediately delivered, but instead the
13521 message waits on the queue for the next queue run. Since routing of the message
13522 has taken place, Exim knows to which remote hosts it must be delivered, and so
13523 when the queue run happens, multiple messages for the same host are delivered
13524 over a single SMTP connection. The &%-odqs%& command line option causes all
13525 SMTP deliveries to be queued in this way, and is equivalent to setting
13526 &%queue_smtp_domains%& to &"*"&. See also &%hold_domains%& and
13530 .option receive_timeout main time 0s
13531 .cindex "timeout" "for non-SMTP input"
13532 This option sets the timeout for accepting a non-SMTP message, that is, the
13533 maximum time that Exim waits when reading a message on the standard input. If
13534 the value is zero, it will wait for ever. This setting is overridden by the
13535 &%-or%& command line option. The timeout for incoming SMTP messages is
13536 controlled by &%smtp_receive_timeout%&.
13538 .option received_header_text main string&!! "see below"
13539 .cindex "customizing" "&'Received:'& header"
13540 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line" "customizing"
13541 This string defines the contents of the &'Received:'& message header that is
13542 added to each message, except for the timestamp, which is automatically added
13543 on at the end (preceded by a semicolon). The string is expanded each time it is
13544 used. If the expansion yields an empty string, no &'Received:'& header line is
13545 added to the message. Otherwise, the string should start with the text
13546 &"Received:"& and conform to the RFC 2822 specification for &'Received:'&
13547 header lines. The default setting is:
13550 received_header_text = Received: \
13551 ${if def:sender_rcvhost {from $sender_rcvhost\n\t}\
13552 {${if def:sender_ident \
13553 {from ${quote_local_part:$sender_ident} }}\
13554 ${if def:sender_helo_name {(helo=$sender_helo_name)\n\t}}}}\
13555 by $primary_hostname \
13556 ${if def:received_protocol {with $received_protocol}} \
13557 ${if def:tls_cipher {($tls_cipher)\n\t}}\
13558 (Exim $version_number)\n\t\
13559 ${if def:sender_address \
13560 {(envelope-from <$sender_address>)\n\t}}\
13561 id $message_exim_id\
13562 ${if def:received_for {\n\tfor $received_for}}
13565 The reference to the TLS cipher is omitted when Exim is built without TLS
13566 support. The use of conditional expansions ensures that this works for both
13567 locally generated messages and messages received from remote hosts, giving
13568 header lines such as the following:
13570 Received: from scrooge.carol.example ([192.168.12.25] ident=root)
13571 by marley.carol.example with esmtp (Exim 4.00)
13572 (envelope-from <bob@carol.example>)
13573 id 16IOWa-00019l-00
13574 for chas@dickens.example; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:44 +0000
13575 Received: by scrooge.carol.example with local (Exim 4.00)
13576 id 16IOWW-000083-00; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:41 +0000
13578 Until the body of the message has been received, the timestamp is the time when
13579 the message started to be received. Once the body has arrived, and all policy
13580 checks have taken place, the timestamp is updated to the time at which the
13581 message was accepted.
13584 .option received_headers_max main integer 30
13585 .cindex "loop" "prevention"
13586 .cindex "mail loop prevention"
13587 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line" "counting"
13588 When a message is to be delivered, the number of &'Received:'& headers is
13589 counted, and if it is greater than this parameter, a mail loop is assumed to
13590 have occurred, the delivery is abandoned, and an error message is generated.
13591 This applies to both local and remote deliveries.
13594 .option recipient_unqualified_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
13595 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
13596 .cindex "host" "unqualified addresses from"
13597 This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept unqualified
13598 recipient addresses in message envelopes. The addresses are made fully
13599 qualified by the addition of the &%qualify_recipient%& value. This option also
13600 affects message header lines. Exim does not reject unqualified recipient
13601 addresses in headers, but it qualifies them only if the message came from a
13602 host that matches &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&,
13603 or if the message was submitted locally (not using TCP/IP), and the &%-bnq%&
13604 option was not set.
13607 .option recipients_max main integer 0
13608 .cindex "limit" "number of recipients"
13609 .cindex "recipient" "maximum number"
13610 If this option is set greater than zero, it specifies the maximum number of
13611 original recipients for any message. Additional recipients that are generated
13612 by aliasing or forwarding do not count. SMTP messages get a 452 response for
13613 all recipients over the limit; earlier recipients are delivered as normal.
13614 Non-SMTP messages with too many recipients are failed, and no deliveries are
13617 .cindex "RCPT" "maximum number of incoming"
13618 &*Note*&: The RFCs specify that an SMTP server should accept at least 100
13619 RCPT commands in a single message.
13622 .option recipients_max_reject main boolean false
13623 If this option is set true, Exim rejects SMTP messages containing too many
13624 recipients by giving 552 errors to the surplus RCPT commands, and a 554
13625 error to the eventual DATA command. Otherwise (the default) it gives a 452
13626 error to the surplus RCPT commands and accepts the message on behalf of the
13627 initial set of recipients. The remote server should then re-send the message
13628 for the remaining recipients at a later time.
13631 .option remote_max_parallel main integer 2
13632 .cindex "delivery" "parallelism for remote"
13633 This option controls parallel delivery of one message to a number of remote
13634 hosts. If the value is less than 2, parallel delivery is disabled, and Exim
13635 does all the remote deliveries for a message one by one. Otherwise, if a single
13636 message has to be delivered to more than one remote host, or if several copies
13637 have to be sent to the same remote host, up to &%remote_max_parallel%&
13638 deliveries are done simultaneously. If more than &%remote_max_parallel%&
13639 deliveries are required, the maximum number of processes are started, and as
13640 each one finishes, another is begun. The order of starting processes is the
13641 same as if sequential delivery were being done, and can be controlled by the
13642 &%remote_sort_domains%& option. If parallel delivery takes place while running
13643 with debugging turned on, the debugging output from each delivery process is
13644 tagged with its process id.
13646 This option controls only the maximum number of parallel deliveries for one
13647 message in one Exim delivery process. Because Exim has no central queue
13648 manager, there is no way of controlling the total number of simultaneous
13649 deliveries if the configuration allows a delivery attempt as soon as a message
13652 .cindex "number of deliveries"
13653 .cindex "delivery" "maximum number of"
13654 If you want to control the total number of deliveries on the system, you
13655 need to set the &%queue_only%& option. This ensures that all incoming messages
13656 are added to the queue without starting a delivery process. Then set up an Exim
13657 daemon to start queue runner processes at appropriate intervals (probably
13658 fairly often, for example, every minute), and limit the total number of queue
13659 runners by setting the &%queue_run_max%& parameter. Because each queue runner
13660 delivers only one message at a time, the maximum number of deliveries that can
13661 then take place at once is &%queue_run_max%& multiplied by
13662 &%remote_max_parallel%&.
13664 If it is purely remote deliveries you want to control, use
13665 &%queue_smtp_domains%& instead of &%queue_only%&. This has the added benefit of
13666 doing the SMTP routing before queuing, so that several messages for the same
13667 host will eventually get delivered down the same connection.
13670 .option remote_sort_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13671 .cindex "sorting remote deliveries"
13672 .cindex "delivery" "sorting remote"
13673 When there are a number of remote deliveries for a message, they are sorted by
13674 domain into the order given by this list. For example,
13676 remote_sort_domains = *.cam.ac.uk:*.uk
13678 would attempt to deliver to all addresses in the &'cam.ac.uk'& domain first,
13679 then to those in the &%uk%& domain, then to any others.
13682 .option retry_data_expire main time 7d
13683 .cindex "hints database" "data expiry"
13684 This option sets a &"use before"& time on retry information in Exim's hints
13685 database. Any older retry data is ignored. This means that, for example, once a
13686 host has not been tried for 7 days, Exim behaves as if it has no knowledge of
13690 .option retry_interval_max main time 24h
13691 .cindex "retry" "limit on interval"
13692 .cindex "limit" "on retry interval"
13693 Chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& describes Exim's mechanisms for controlling the
13694 intervals between delivery attempts for messages that cannot be delivered
13695 straight away. This option sets an overall limit to the length of time between
13696 retries. It cannot be set greater than 24 hours; any attempt to do so forces
13700 .option return_path_remove main boolean true
13701 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line" "removing"
13702 RFC 2821, section 4.4, states that an SMTP server must insert a
13703 &'Return-path:'& header line into a message when it makes a &"final delivery"&.
13704 The &'Return-path:'& header preserves the sender address as received in the
13705 MAIL command. This description implies that this header should not be present
13706 in an incoming message. If &%return_path_remove%& is true, any existing
13707 &'Return-path:'& headers are removed from messages at the time they are
13708 received. Exim's transports have options for adding &'Return-path:'& headers at
13709 the time of delivery. They are normally used only for final local deliveries.
13712 .option return_size_limit main integer 100K
13713 This option is an obsolete synonym for &%bounce_return_size_limit%&.
13716 .option rfc1413_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13718 .cindex "host" "for RFC 1413 calls"
13719 RFC 1413 identification calls are made to any client host which matches an item
13722 .option rfc1413_query_timeout main time 5s
13723 .cindex "RFC 1413" "query timeout"
13724 .cindex "timeout" "for RFC 1413 call"
13725 This sets the timeout on RFC 1413 identification calls. If it is set to zero,
13726 no RFC 1413 calls are ever made.
13729 .option sender_unqualified_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
13730 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
13731 .cindex "host" "unqualified addresses from"
13732 This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept unqualified
13733 sender addresses. The addresses are made fully qualified by the addition of
13734 &%qualify_domain%&. This option also affects message header lines. Exim does
13735 not reject unqualified addresses in headers that contain sender addresses, but
13736 it qualifies them only if the message came from a host that matches
13737 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%&, or if the message was submitted locally (not
13738 using TCP/IP), and the &%-bnq%& option was not set.
13741 .option smtp_accept_keepalive main boolean true
13742 .cindex "keepalive" "on incoming connection"
13743 This option controls the setting of the SO_KEEPALIVE option on incoming
13744 TCP/IP socket connections. When set, it causes the kernel to probe idle
13745 connections periodically, by sending packets with &"old"& sequence numbers. The
13746 other end of the connection should send an acknowledgement if the connection is
13747 still okay or a reset if the connection has been aborted. The reason for doing
13748 this is that it has the beneficial effect of freeing up certain types of
13749 connection that can get stuck when the remote host is disconnected without
13750 tidying up the TCP/IP call properly. The keepalive mechanism takes several
13751 hours to detect unreachable hosts.
13755 .option smtp_accept_max main integer 20
13756 .cindex "limit" "incoming SMTP connections"
13757 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming connection count"
13759 This option specifies the maximum number of simultaneous incoming SMTP calls
13760 that Exim will accept. It applies only to the listening daemon; there is no
13761 control (in Exim) when incoming SMTP is being handled by &'inetd'&. If the
13762 value is set to zero, no limit is applied. However, it is required to be
13763 non-zero if either &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& or &%smtp_accept_queue%& is
13764 set. See also &%smtp_accept_reserve%&.
13768 .option smtp_accept_max_nonmail main integer 10
13769 .cindex "limit" "non-mail SMTP commands"
13770 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting non-mail commands"
13771 Exim counts the number of &"non-mail"& commands in an SMTP session, and drops
13772 the connection if there are too many. This option defines &"too many"&. The
13773 check catches some denial-of-service attacks, repeated failing AUTHs, or a mad
13774 client looping sending EHLO, for example. The check is applied only if the
13775 client host matches &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%&.
13777 When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not counted. This
13778 allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this is not necessary,
13779 but some clients do it). Exim also allows one uncounted occurence of HELO
13780 or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS between messages. After
13781 starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is expected, and so it too is not
13782 counted. The first occurrence of AUTH in a connection, or immediately
13783 following STARTTLS is not counted. Otherwise, all commands other than
13784 MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are counted.
13787 .option smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13788 You can control which hosts are subject to the &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%&
13789 check by setting this option. The default value makes it apply to all hosts. By
13790 changing the value, you can exclude any badly-behaved hosts that you have to
13795 .option smtp_accept_max_per_connection main integer 1000
13796 .cindex "SMTP incoming message count" "limiting"
13797 .cindex "limit" "messages per SMTP connection"
13798 The value of this option limits the number of MAIL commands that Exim is
13799 prepared to accept over a single SMTP connection, whether or not each command
13800 results in the transfer of a message. After the limit is reached, a 421
13801 response is given to subsequent MAIL commands. This limit is a safety
13802 precaution against a client that goes mad (incidents of this type have been
13806 .option smtp_accept_max_per_host main string&!! unset
13807 .cindex "limit" "SMTP connections from one host"
13808 .cindex "host" "limiting SMTP connections from"
13809 This option restricts the number of simultaneous IP connections from a single
13810 host (strictly, from a single IP address) to the Exim daemon. The option is
13811 expanded, to enable different limits to be applied to different hosts by
13812 reference to &$sender_host_address$&. Once the limit is reached, additional
13813 connection attempts from the same host are rejected with error code 421. The
13814 default value of zero imposes no limit. If this option is set, it is required
13815 that &%smtp_accept_max%& be non-zero.
13817 &*Warning*&: When setting this option you should not use any expansion
13818 constructions that take an appreciable amount of time. The expansion and test
13819 happen in the main daemon loop, in order to reject additional connections
13820 without forking additional processes (otherwise a denial-of-service attack
13821 could cause a vast number or processes to be created). While the daemon is
13822 doing this processing, it cannot accept any other incoming connections.
13826 .option smtp_accept_queue main integer 0
13827 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming connection count"
13828 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13829 .cindex "message" "queueing by SMTP connection count"
13830 If the number of simultaneous incoming SMTP calls handled via the listening
13831 daemon exceeds this value, messages received by SMTP are just placed on the
13832 queue; no delivery processes are started automatically. A value of zero implies
13833 no limit, and clearly any non-zero value is useful only if it is less than the
13834 &%smtp_accept_max%& value (unless that is zero). See also &%queue_only%&,
13835 &%queue_only_load%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&, and the various &%-od%&&'x'&
13836 command line options.
13839 .option smtp_accept_queue_per_connection main integer 10
13840 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13841 .cindex "message" "queueing by message count"
13842 This option limits the number of delivery processes that Exim starts
13843 automatically when receiving messages via SMTP, whether via the daemon or by
13844 the use of &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&. If the value of the option is greater than zero,
13845 and the number of messages received in a single SMTP session exceeds this
13846 number, subsequent messages are placed on the queue, but no delivery processes
13847 are started. This helps to limit the number of Exim processes when a server
13848 restarts after downtime and there is a lot of mail waiting for it on other
13849 systems. On large systems, the default should probably be increased, and on
13850 dial-in client systems it should probably be set to zero (that is, disabled).
13853 .option smtp_accept_reserve main integer 0
13854 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming call count"
13855 .cindex "host" "reserved"
13856 When &%smtp_accept_max%& is set greater than zero, this option specifies a
13857 number of SMTP connections that are reserved for connections from the hosts
13858 that are specified in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&. The value set in
13859 &%smtp_accept_max%& includes this reserve pool. The specified hosts are not
13860 restricted to this number of connections; the option specifies a minimum number
13861 of connection slots for them, not a maximum. It is a guarantee that that group
13862 of hosts can always get at least &%smtp_accept_reserve%& connections.
13864 For example, if &%smtp_accept_max%& is set to 50 and &%smtp_accept_reserve%& is
13865 set to 5, once there are 45 active connections (from any hosts), new
13866 connections are accepted only from hosts listed in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&.
13867 See also &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%&.
13870 .option smtp_active_hostname main string&!! unset
13871 .cindex "host" "name in SMTP responses"
13872 .cindex "SMTP" "host name in responses"
13873 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
13874 This option is provided for multi-homed servers that want to masquerade as
13875 several different hosts. At the start of an SMTP connection, its value is
13876 expanded and used instead of the value of &$primary_hostname$& in SMTP
13877 responses. For example, it is used as domain name in the response to an
13878 incoming HELO or EHLO command.
13880 .cindex "&$smtp_active_hostname$&"
13881 It is also used in HELO commands for callout verification. The active hostname
13882 is placed in the &$smtp_active_hostname$& variable, which is saved with any
13883 messages that are received. It is therefore available for use in routers and
13884 transports when the message is later delivered.
13886 If this option is unset, or if its expansion is forced to fail, or if the
13887 expansion results in an empty string, the value of &$primary_hostname$& is
13888 used. Other expansion failures cause a message to be written to the main and
13889 panic logs, and the SMTP command receives a temporary error. Typically, the
13890 value of &%smtp_active_hostname%& depends on the incoming interface address.
13893 smtp_active_hostname = ${if eq{$interface_address}{10.0.0.1}\
13894 {cox.mydomain}{box.mydomain}}
13897 .option smtp_banner main string&!! "see below"
13898 .cindex "SMTP" "welcome banner"
13899 .cindex "banner for SMTP"
13900 .cindex "welcome banner for SMTP"
13901 .cindex "customizing" "SMTP banner"
13902 This string, which is expanded every time it is used, is output as the initial
13903 positive response to an SMTP connection. The default setting is:
13905 smtp_banner = $smtp_active_hostname ESMTP Exim \
13906 $version_number $tod_full
13908 Failure to expand the string causes a panic error. If you want to create a
13909 multiline response to the initial SMTP connection, use &"\n"& in the string at
13910 appropriate points, but not at the end. Note that the 220 code is not included
13911 in this string. Exim adds it automatically (several times in the case of a
13912 multiline response).
13915 .option smtp_check_spool_space main boolean true
13916 .cindex "checking disk space"
13917 .cindex "disk space" "checking"
13918 .cindex "spool directory" "checking space"
13919 When this option is set, if an incoming SMTP session encounters the SIZE
13920 option on a MAIL command, it checks that there is enough space in the
13921 spool directory's partition to accept a message of that size, while still
13922 leaving free the amount specified by &%check_spool_space%& (even if that value
13923 is zero). If there isn't enough space, a temporary error code is returned.
13926 .option smtp_connect_backlog main integer 20
13927 .cindex "connection backlog"
13928 .cindex "SMTP" "connection backlog"
13929 .cindex "backlog of connections"
13930 This option specifies a maximum number of waiting SMTP connections. Exim passes
13931 this value to the TCP/IP system when it sets up its listener. Once this number
13932 of connections are waiting for the daemon's attention, subsequent connection
13933 attempts are refused at the TCP/IP level. At least, that is what the manuals
13934 say; in some circumstances such connection attempts have been observed to time
13935 out instead. For large systems it is probably a good idea to increase the
13936 value (to 50, say). It also gives some protection against denial-of-service
13937 attacks by SYN flooding.
13940 .option smtp_enforce_sync main boolean true
13941 .cindex "SMTP" "synchronization checking"
13942 .cindex "synchronization checking in SMTP"
13943 The SMTP protocol specification requires the client to wait for a response from
13944 the server at certain points in the dialogue. Without PIPELINING these
13945 synchronization points are after every command; with PIPELINING they are
13946 fewer, but they still exist.
13948 Some spamming sites send out a complete set of SMTP commands without waiting
13949 for any response. Exim protects against this by rejecting a message if the
13950 client has sent further input when it should not have. The error response &"554
13951 SMTP synchronization error"& is sent, and the connection is dropped. Testing
13952 for this error cannot be perfect because of transmission delays (unexpected
13953 input may be on its way but not yet received when Exim checks). However, it
13954 does detect many instances.
13956 The check can be globally disabled by setting &%smtp_enforce_sync%& false.
13957 If you want to disable the check selectively (for example, only for certain
13958 hosts), you can do so by an appropriate use of a &%control%& modifier in an ACL
13959 (see section &<<SECTcontrols>>&). See also &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%&.
13963 .option smtp_etrn_command main string&!! unset
13964 .cindex "ETRN" "command to be run"
13965 .cindex "&$domain$&"
13966 If this option is set, the given command is run whenever an SMTP ETRN
13967 command is received from a host that is permitted to issue such commands (see
13968 chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). The string is split up into separate arguments which
13969 are independently expanded. The expansion variable &$domain$& is set to the
13970 argument of the ETRN command, and no syntax checking is done on it. For
13973 smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
13974 $sender_host_address
13976 A new process is created to run the command, but Exim does not wait for it to
13977 complete. Consequently, its status cannot be checked. If the command cannot be
13978 run, a line is written to the panic log, but the ETRN caller still receives
13979 a 250 success response. Exim is normally running under its own uid when
13980 receiving SMTP, so it is not possible for it to change the uid before running
13984 .option smtp_etrn_serialize main boolean true
13985 .cindex "ETRN" "serializing"
13986 When this option is set, it prevents the simultaneous execution of more than
13987 one identical command as a result of ETRN in an SMTP connection. See
13988 section &<<SECTETRN>>& for details.
13991 .option smtp_load_reserve main fixed-point unset
13992 .cindex "load average"
13993 If the system load average ever gets higher than this, incoming SMTP calls are
13994 accepted only from those hosts that match an entry in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&.
13995 If &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& is not set, no incoming SMTP calls are accepted when
13996 the load is over the limit. The option has no effect on ancient operating
13997 systems on which Exim cannot determine the load average. See also
13998 &%deliver_queue_load_max%& and &%queue_only_load%&.
14002 .option smtp_max_synprot_errors main integer 3
14003 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting syntax and protocol errors"
14004 .cindex "limit" "SMTP syntax and protocol errors"
14005 Exim rejects SMTP commands that contain syntax or protocol errors. In
14006 particular, a syntactically invalid email address, as in this command:
14008 RCPT TO:<abc xyz@a.b.c>
14010 causes immediate rejection of the command, before any other tests are done.
14011 (The ACL cannot be run if there is no valid address to set up for it.) An
14012 example of a protocol error is receiving RCPT before MAIL. If there are
14013 too many syntax or protocol errors in one SMTP session, the connection is
14014 dropped. The limit is set by this option.
14016 .cindex "PIPELINING" "expected errors"
14017 When the PIPELINING extension to SMTP is in use, some protocol errors are
14018 &"expected"&, for instance, a RCPT command after a rejected MAIL command.
14019 Exim assumes that PIPELINING will be used if it advertises it (see
14020 &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%&), and in this situation, &"expected"& errors do
14021 not count towards the limit.
14025 .option smtp_max_unknown_commands main integer 3
14026 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting unknown commands"
14027 .cindex "limit" "unknown SMTP commands"
14028 If there are too many unrecognized commands in an incoming SMTP session, an
14029 Exim server drops the connection. This is a defence against some kinds of abuse
14032 into making connections to SMTP ports; in these circumstances, a number of
14033 non-SMTP command lines are sent first.
14037 .option smtp_ratelimit_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14038 .cindex "SMTP" "rate limiting"
14039 .cindex "limit" "rate of message arrival"
14040 .cindex "RCPT" "rate limiting"
14041 Some sites find it helpful to be able to limit the rate at which certain hosts
14042 can send them messages, and the rate at which an individual message can specify
14045 Exim has two rate-limiting facilities. This section describes the older
14046 facility, which can limit rates within a single connection. The newer
14047 &%ratelimit%& ACL condition can limit rates across all connections. See section
14048 &<<SECTratelimiting>>& for details of the newer facility.
14050 When a host matches &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%&, the values of
14051 &%smtp_ratelimit_mail%& and &%smtp_ratelimit_rcpt%& are used to control the
14052 rate of acceptance of MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session,
14053 respectively. Each option, if set, must contain a set of four comma-separated
14057 A threshold, before which there is no rate limiting.
14059 An initial time delay. Unlike other times in Exim, numbers with decimal
14060 fractional parts are allowed here.
14062 A factor by which to increase the delay each time.
14064 A maximum value for the delay. This should normally be less than 5 minutes,
14065 because after that time, the client is liable to timeout the SMTP command.
14068 For example, these settings have been used successfully at the site which
14069 first suggested this feature, for controlling mail from their customers:
14071 smtp_ratelimit_mail = 2,0.5s,1.05,4m
14072 smtp_ratelimit_rcpt = 4,0.25s,1.015,4m
14074 The first setting specifies delays that are applied to MAIL commands after
14075 two have been received over a single connection. The initial delay is 0.5
14076 seconds, increasing by a factor of 1.05 each time. The second setting applies
14077 delays to RCPT commands when more than four occur in a single message.
14080 .option smtp_ratelimit_mail main string unset
14081 See &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& above.
14084 .option smtp_ratelimit_rcpt main string unset
14085 See &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& above.
14088 .option smtp_receive_timeout main time 5m
14089 .cindex "timeout" "for SMTP input"
14090 .cindex "SMTP timeout" "input"
14091 This sets a timeout value for SMTP reception. It applies to all forms of SMTP
14092 input, including batch SMTP. If a line of input (either an SMTP command or a
14093 data line) is not received within this time, the SMTP connection is dropped and
14094 the message is abandoned.
14095 A line is written to the log containing one of the following messages:
14097 SMTP command timeout on connection from...
14098 SMTP data timeout on connection from...
14100 The former means that Exim was expecting to read an SMTP command; the latter
14101 means that it was in the DATA phase, reading the contents of a message.
14104 .cindex "&%-os%& option"
14105 The value set by this option can be overridden by the
14106 &%-os%& command-line option. A setting of zero time disables the timeout, but
14107 this should never be used for SMTP over TCP/IP. (It can be useful in some cases
14108 of local input using &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&.) For non-SMTP input, the reception
14109 timeout is controlled by &%receive_timeout%& and &%-or%&.
14112 .option smtp_reserve_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14113 This option defines hosts for which SMTP connections are reserved; see
14114 &%smtp_accept_reserve%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%& above.
14117 .option smtp_return_error_details main boolean false
14118 .cindex "SMTP" "details policy failures"
14119 .cindex "policy control rejection" "returning details"
14120 In the default state, Exim uses bland messages such as
14121 &"Administrative prohibition"& when it rejects SMTP commands for policy
14122 reasons. Many sysadmins like this because it gives away little information
14123 to spammers. However, some other syadmins who are applying strict checking
14124 policies want to give out much fuller information about failures. Setting
14125 &%smtp_return_error_details%& true causes Exim to be more forthcoming. For
14126 example, instead of &"Administrative prohibition"&, it might give:
14128 550-Rejected after DATA: '>' missing at end of address:
14129 550 failing address in "From" header is: <user@dom.ain
14132 .option spamd_address main string "see below"
14133 This option is available when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning
14134 extension. It specifies how Exim connects to SpamAssassin's &%spamd%& daemon.
14135 The default value is
14139 See section &<<SECTscanspamass>>& for more details.
14143 .option split_spool_directory main boolean false
14144 .cindex "multiple spool directories"
14145 .cindex "spool directory" "split"
14146 .cindex "directories" "multiple"
14147 If this option is set, it causes Exim to split its input directory into 62
14148 subdirectories, each with a single alphanumeric character as its name. The
14149 sixth character of the message id is used to allocate messages to
14150 subdirectories; this is the least significant base-62 digit of the time of
14151 arrival of the message.
14153 Splitting up the spool in this way may provide better performance on systems
14154 where there are long mail queues, by reducing the number of files in any one
14155 directory. The msglog directory is also split up in a similar way to the input
14156 directory; however, if &%preserve_message_logs%& is set, all old msglog files
14157 are still placed in the single directory &_msglog.OLD_&.
14159 It is not necessary to take any special action for existing messages when
14160 changing &%split_spool_directory%&. Exim notices messages that are in the
14161 &"wrong"& place, and continues to process them. If the option is turned off
14162 after a period of being on, the subdirectories will eventually empty and be
14163 automatically deleted.
14165 When &%split_spool_directory%& is set, the behaviour of queue runner processes
14166 changes. Instead of creating a list of all messages in the queue, and then
14167 trying to deliver each one in turn, it constructs a list of those in one
14168 sub-directory and tries to deliver them, before moving on to the next
14169 sub-directory. The sub-directories are processed in a random order. This
14170 spreads out the scanning of the input directories, and uses less memory. It is
14171 particularly beneficial when there are lots of messages on the queue. However,
14172 if &%queue_run_in_order%& is set, none of this new processing happens. The
14173 entire queue has to be scanned and sorted before any deliveries can start.
14176 .option spool_directory main string&!! "set at compile time"
14177 .cindex "spool directory" "path to"
14178 This defines the directory in which Exim keeps its spool, that is, the messages
14179 it is waiting to deliver. The default value is taken from the compile-time
14180 configuration setting, if there is one. If not, this option must be set. The
14181 string is expanded, so it can contain, for example, a reference to
14182 &$primary_hostname$&.
14184 If the spool directory name is fixed on your installation, it is recommended
14185 that you set it at build time rather than from this option, particularly if the
14186 log files are being written to the spool directory (see &%log_file_path%&).
14187 Otherwise log files cannot be used for errors that are detected early on, such
14188 as failures in the configuration file.
14190 By using this option to override the compiled-in path, it is possible to run
14191 tests of Exim without using the standard spool.
14193 .option sqlite_lock_timeout main time 5s
14194 .cindex "sqlite" "lock timeout"
14195 This option controls the timeout that the &(sqlite)& lookup uses when trying to
14196 access an SQLite database. See section &<<SECTsqlite>>& for more details.
14198 .option strip_excess_angle_brackets main boolean false
14199 .cindex "angle brackets" "excess"
14200 If this option is set, redundant pairs of angle brackets round &"route-addr"&
14201 items in addresses are stripped. For example, &'<<xxx@a.b.c.d>>'& is
14202 treated as &'<xxx@a.b.c.d>'&. If this is in the envelope and the message is
14203 passed on to another MTA, the excess angle brackets are not passed on. If this
14204 option is not set, multiple pairs of angle brackets cause a syntax error.
14207 .option strip_trailing_dot main boolean false
14208 .cindex "trailing dot on domain"
14209 .cindex "dot" "trailing on domain"
14210 If this option is set, a trailing dot at the end of a domain in an address is
14211 ignored. If this is in the envelope and the message is passed on to another
14212 MTA, the dot is not passed on. If this option is not set, a dot at the end of a
14213 domain causes a syntax error.
14214 However, addresses in header lines are checked only when an ACL requests header
14218 .option syslog_duplication main boolean true
14219 .cindex "syslog" "duplicate log lines; suppressing"
14220 When Exim is logging to syslog, it writes the log lines for its three
14221 separate logs at different syslog priorities so that they can in principle
14222 be separated on the logging hosts. Some installations do not require this
14223 separation, and in those cases, the duplication of certain log lines is a
14224 nuisance. If &%syslog_duplication%& is set false, only one copy of any
14225 particular log line is written to syslog. For lines that normally go to
14226 both the main log and the reject log, the reject log version (possibly
14227 containing message header lines) is written, at LOG_NOTICE priority.
14228 Lines that normally go to both the main and the panic log are written at
14229 the LOG_ALERT priority.
14232 .option syslog_facility main string unset
14233 .cindex "syslog" "facility; setting"
14234 This option sets the syslog &"facility"& name, used when Exim is logging to
14235 syslog. The value must be one of the strings &"mail"&, &"user"&, &"news"&,
14236 &"uucp"&, &"daemon"&, or &"local&'x'&"& where &'x'& is a digit between 0 and 7.
14237 If this option is unset, &"mail"& is used. See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for
14238 details of Exim's logging.
14242 .option syslog_processname main string &`exim`&
14243 .cindex "syslog" "process name; setting"
14244 This option sets the syslog &"ident"& name, used when Exim is logging to
14245 syslog. The value must be no longer than 32 characters. See chapter
14246 &<<CHAPlog>>& for details of Exim's logging.
14250 .option syslog_timestamp main boolean true
14251 .cindex "syslog" "timestamps"
14252 If &%syslog_timestamp%& is set false, the timestamps on Exim's log lines are
14253 omitted when these lines are sent to syslog. See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for
14254 details of Exim's logging.
14257 .option system_filter main string&!! unset
14258 .cindex "filter" "system filter"
14259 .cindex "system filter" "specifying"
14260 .cindex "Sieve filter" "not available for system filter"
14261 This option specifies an Exim filter file that is applied to all messages at
14262 the start of each delivery attempt, before any routing is done. System filters
14263 must be Exim filters; they cannot be Sieve filters. If the system filter
14264 generates any deliveries to files or pipes, or any new mail messages, the
14265 appropriate &%system_filter_..._transport%& option(s) must be set, to define
14266 which transports are to be used. Details of this facility are given in chapter
14267 &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>&.
14270 .option system_filter_directory_transport main string&!! unset
14271 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
14272 This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when the
14273 &%save%& command in a system message filter specifies a path ending in &"/"&,
14274 implying delivery of each message into a separate file in some directory.
14275 During the delivery, the variable &$address_file$& contains the path name.
14278 .option system_filter_file_transport main string&!! unset
14279 .cindex "file" "transport for system filter"
14280 This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when the &%save%&
14281 command in a system message filter specifies a path not ending in &"/"&. During
14282 the delivery, the variable &$address_file$& contains the path name.
14284 .option system_filter_group main string unset
14285 .cindex "gid (group id)" "system filter"
14286 This option is used only when &%system_filter_user%& is also set. It sets the
14287 gid under which the system filter is run, overriding any gid that is associated
14288 with the user. The value may be numerical or symbolic.
14290 .option system_filter_pipe_transport main string&!! unset
14291 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "for system filter"
14292 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
14293 This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a &%pipe%& command
14294 is used in a system filter. During the delivery, the variable &$address_pipe$&
14295 contains the pipe command.
14298 .option system_filter_reply_transport main string&!! unset
14299 .cindex "&(autoreply)& transport" "for system filter"
14300 This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a &%mail%& command
14301 is used in a system filter.
14303 .option system_filter_user main string unset
14304 .cindex "uid (user id)" "system filter"
14305 If this option is not set, the system filter is run in the main Exim delivery
14306 process, as root. When the option is set, the system filter runs in a separate
14307 process, as the given user. Unless the string consists entirely of digits, it
14308 is looked up in the password data. Failure to find the named user causes a
14309 configuration error. The gid is either taken from the password data, or
14310 specified by &%system_filter_group%&. When the uid is specified numerically,
14311 &%system_filter_group%& is required to be set.
14313 If the system filter generates any pipe, file, or reply deliveries, the uid
14314 under which the filter is run is used when transporting them, unless a
14315 transport option overrides. Normally you should set &%system_filter_user%& if
14316 your system filter generates these kinds of delivery.
14319 .option tcp_nodelay main boolean true
14320 .cindex "daemon" "TCP_NODELAY on sockets"
14321 .cindex "Nagle algorithm"
14322 .cindex "TCP_NODELAY on listening sockets"
14323 If this option is set false, it stops the Exim daemon setting the
14324 TCP_NODELAY option on its listening sockets. Setting TCP_NODELAY
14325 turns off the &"Nagle algorithm"&, which is a way of improving network
14326 performance in interactive (character-by-character) situations. Turning it off
14327 should improve Exim's performance a bit, so that is what happens by default.
14328 However, it appears that some broken clients cannot cope, and time out. Hence
14329 this option. It affects only those sockets that are set up for listening by the
14330 daemon. Sockets created by the smtp transport for delivering mail always set
14334 .option timeout_frozen_after main time 0s
14335 .cindex "frozen messages" "timing out"
14336 .cindex "timeout" "frozen messages"
14337 If &%timeout_frozen_after%& is set to a time greater than zero, a frozen
14338 message of any kind that has been on the queue for longer than the given
14339 time is automatically cancelled at the next queue run. If it is a bounce
14340 message, it is just discarded; otherwise, a bounce is sent to the sender, in a
14341 similar manner to cancellation by the &%-Mg%& command line option. If you want
14342 to timeout frozen bounce messages earlier than other kinds of frozen message,
14343 see &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&.
14346 .option timezone main string unset
14347 .cindex "timezone" "setting"
14348 The value of &%timezone%& is used to set the environment variable TZ while
14349 running Exim (if it is different on entry). This ensures that all timestamps
14350 created by Exim are in the required timezone. If you want all your timestamps
14351 to be in UTC (aka GMT) you should set
14355 The default value is taken from TIMEZONE_DEFAULT in &_Local/Makefile_&,
14356 or, if that is not set, from the value of the TZ environment variable when Exim
14357 is built. If &%timezone%& is set to the empty string, either at build or run
14358 time, any existing TZ variable is removed from the environment when Exim
14359 runs. This is appropriate behaviour for obtaining wall-clock time on some, but
14360 unfortunately not all, operating systems.
14363 .option tls_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14364 .cindex "TLS" "advertising"
14365 .cindex "encryption" "on SMTP connection"
14366 .cindex "SMTP" "encrypted connection"
14367 When Exim is built with support for TLS encrypted connections, the availability
14368 of the STARTTLS command to set up an encrypted session is advertised in
14369 response to EHLO only to those client hosts that match this option. See
14370 chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of Exim's support for TLS.
14373 .option tls_certificate main string&!! unset
14374 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate; location of"
14375 .cindex "certificate for server" "location of"
14376 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to a
14377 file which contains the server's certificates. The server's private key is also
14378 assumed to be in this file if &%tls_privatekey%& is unset. See chapter
14379 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
14381 &*Note*&: The certificates defined by this option are used only when Exim is
14382 receiving incoming messages as a server. If you want to supply certificates for
14383 use when sending messages as a client, you must set the &%tls_certificate%&
14384 option in the relevant &(smtp)& transport.
14387 .option tls_crl main string&!! unset
14388 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate revocation list"
14389 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list for server"
14390 This option specifies a certificate revocation list. The expanded value must
14391 be the name of a file that contains a CRL in PEM format.
14394 .option tls_dhparam main string&!! unset
14395 .cindex "TLS" "D-H parameters for server"
14396 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to
14397 a file which contains the server's DH parameter values.
14398 This is used only for OpenSSL. When Exim is linked with GnuTLS, this option is
14399 ignored. See section &<<SECTopenvsgnu>>& for further details.
14402 .option tls_on_connect_ports main "string list" unset
14403 This option specifies a list of incoming SSMTP (aka SMTPS) ports that should
14404 operate the obsolete SSMTP (SMTPS) protocol, where a TLS session is immediately
14405 set up without waiting for the client to issue a STARTTLS command. For
14406 further details, see section &<<SECTsupobssmt>>&.
14410 .option tls_privatekey main string&!! unset
14411 .cindex "TLS" "server private key; location of"
14412 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to a
14413 file which contains the server's private key. If this option is unset, or if
14414 the expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string, the private
14415 key is assumed to be in the same file as the server's certificates. See chapter
14416 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
14419 .option tls_remember_esmtp main boolean false
14420 .cindex "TLS" "esmtp state; remembering"
14421 .cindex "TLS" "broken clients"
14422 If this option is set true, Exim violates the RFCs by remembering that it is in
14423 &"esmtp"& state after successfully negotiating a TLS session. This provides
14424 support for broken clients that fail to send a new EHLO after starting a
14428 .option tls_require_ciphers main string&!! unset
14429 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers"
14430 .cindex "cipher" "requiring specific"
14431 This option controls which ciphers can be used for incoming TLS connections.
14432 The &(smtp)& transport has an option of the same name for controlling outgoing
14433 connections. This option is expanded for each connection, so can be varied for
14434 different clients if required. The value of this option must be a list of
14435 permitted cipher suites. The OpenSSL and GnuTLS libraries handle cipher control
14436 in somewhat different ways. If GnuTLS is being used, the client controls the
14437 preference order of the available ciphers. Details are given in sections
14438 &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&.
14441 .option tls_try_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14442 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14443 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14444 See &%tls_verify_hosts%& below.
14447 .option tls_verify_certificates main string&!! unset
14448 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14449 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14450 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to
14451 a file containing permitted certificates for clients that
14452 match &%tls_verify_hosts%& or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. Alternatively, if you
14453 are using OpenSSL, you can set &%tls_verify_certificates%& to the name of a
14454 directory containing certificate files. This does not work with GnuTLS; the
14455 option must be set to the name of a single file if you are using GnuTLS.
14458 .option tls_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14459 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14460 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14461 This option, along with &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&, controls the checking of
14462 certificates from clients.
14463 The expected certificates are defined by &%tls_verify_certificates%&, which
14464 must be set. A configuration error occurs if either &%tls_verify_hosts%& or
14465 &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& is set and &%tls_verify_certificates%& is not set.
14467 Any client that matches &%tls_verify_hosts%& is constrained by
14468 &%tls_verify_certificates%&. The client must present one of the listed
14469 certificates. If it does not, the connection is aborted.
14471 A weaker form of checking is provided by &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. If a client
14472 matches this option (but not &%tls_verify_hosts%&), Exim requests a
14473 certificate and checks it against &%tls_verify_certificates%&, but does not
14474 abort the connection if there is no certificate or if it does not match. This
14475 state can be detected in an ACL, which makes it possible to implement policies
14476 such as &"accept for relay only if a verified certificate has been received,
14477 but accept for local delivery if encrypted, even without a verified
14480 Client hosts that match neither of these lists are not asked to present
14484 .option trusted_groups main "string list&!!" unset
14485 .cindex "trusted group"
14486 .cindex "group" "trusted"
14487 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If this
14488 option is set, any process that is running in one of the listed groups, or
14489 which has one of them as a supplementary group, is trusted. The groups can be
14490 specified numerically or by name. See section &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for
14491 details of what trusted callers are permitted to do. If neither
14492 &%trusted_groups%& nor &%trusted_users%& is set, only root and the Exim user
14495 .option trusted_users main "string list&!!" unset
14496 .cindex "trusted user"
14497 .cindex "user" "trusted"
14498 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If this
14499 option is set, any process that is running as one of the listed users is
14500 trusted. The users can be specified numerically or by name. See section
14501 &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for details of what trusted callers are permitted to do.
14502 If neither &%trusted_groups%& nor &%trusted_users%& is set, only root and the
14503 Exim user are trusted.
14505 .option unknown_login main string&!! unset
14506 .cindex "uid (user id)" "unknown caller"
14507 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
14508 This is a specialized feature for use in unusual configurations. By default, if
14509 the uid of the caller of Exim cannot be looked up using &[getpwuid()]&, Exim
14510 gives up. The &%unknown_login%& option can be used to set a login name to be
14511 used in this circumstance. It is expanded, so values like &%user$caller_uid%&
14512 can be set. When &%unknown_login%& is used, the value of &%unknown_username%&
14513 is used for the user's real name (gecos field), unless this has been set by the
14516 .option unknown_username main string unset
14517 See &%unknown_login%&.
14519 .option untrusted_set_sender main "address list&!!" unset
14520 .cindex "trusted user"
14521 .cindex "sender" "setting by untrusted user"
14522 .cindex "untrusted user" "setting sender"
14523 .cindex "user" "untrusted setting sender"
14524 .cindex "envelope sender"
14525 When an untrusted user submits a message to Exim using the standard input, Exim
14526 normally creates an envelope sender address from the user's login and the
14527 default qualification domain. Data from the &%-f%& option (for setting envelope
14528 senders on non-SMTP messages) or the SMTP MAIL command (if &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&
14529 is used) is ignored.
14531 However, untrusted users are permitted to set an empty envelope sender address,
14532 to declare that a message should never generate any bounces. For example:
14534 exim -f '<>' user@domain.example
14536 .cindex "&$sender_ident$&"
14537 The &%untrusted_set_sender%& option allows you to permit untrusted users to set
14538 other envelope sender addresses in a controlled way. When it is set, untrusted
14539 users are allowed to set envelope sender addresses that match any of the
14540 patterns in the list. Like all address lists, the string is expanded. The
14541 identity of the user is in &$sender_ident$&, so you can, for example, restrict
14542 users to setting senders that start with their login ids
14543 followed by a hyphen
14544 by a setting like this:
14546 untrusted_set_sender = ^$sender_ident-
14548 If you want to allow untrusted users to set envelope sender addresses without
14549 restriction, you can use
14551 untrusted_set_sender = *
14553 The &%untrusted_set_sender%& option applies to all forms of local input, but
14554 only to the setting of the envelope sender. It does not permit untrusted users
14555 to use the other options which trusted user can use to override message
14556 parameters. Furthermore, it does not stop Exim from removing an existing
14557 &'Sender:'& header in the message, or from adding a &'Sender:'& header if
14558 necessary. See &%local_sender_retain%& and &%local_from_check%& for ways of
14559 overriding these actions. The handling of the &'Sender:'& header is also
14560 described in section &<<SECTthesenhea>>&.
14562 The log line for a message's arrival shows the envelope sender following
14563 &"<="&. For local messages, the user's login always follows, after &"U="&. In
14564 &%-bp%& displays, and in the Exim monitor, if an untrusted user sets an
14565 envelope sender address, the user's login is shown in parentheses after the
14569 .option uucp_from_pattern main string "see below"
14570 .cindex "&""From""& line"
14571 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
14572 Some applications that pass messages to an MTA via a command line interface use
14573 an initial line starting with &"From&~"& to pass the envelope sender. In
14574 particular, this is used by UUCP software. Exim recognizes such a line by means
14575 of a regular expression that is set in &%uucp_from_pattern%&. When the pattern
14576 matches, the sender address is constructed by expanding the contents of
14577 &%uucp_from_sender%&, provided that the caller of Exim is a trusted user. The
14578 default pattern recognizes lines in the following two forms:
14580 From ph10 Fri Jan 5 12:35 GMT 1996
14581 From ph10 Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT
14583 The pattern can be seen by running
14585 exim -bP uucp_from_pattern
14587 It checks only up to the hours and minutes, and allows for a 2-digit or 4-digit
14588 year in the second case. The first word after &"From&~"& is matched in the
14589 regular expression by a parenthesized subpattern. The default value for
14590 &%uucp_from_sender%& is &"$1"&, which therefore just uses this first word
14591 (&"ph10"& in the example above) as the message's sender. See also
14592 &%ignore_fromline_hosts%&.
14595 .option uucp_from_sender main string&!! &`$1`&
14596 See &%uucp_from_pattern%& above.
14599 .option warn_message_file main string unset
14600 .cindex "warning of delay" "customizing the message"
14601 .cindex "customizing" "warning message"
14602 This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to be used
14603 for constructing the warning message which is sent by Exim when a message has
14604 been on the queue for a specified amount of time, as specified by
14605 &%delay_warning%&. Details of the file's contents are given in chapter
14606 &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&. See also &%bounce_message_file%&.
14609 .option write_rejectlog main boolean true
14610 .cindex "reject log" "disabling"
14611 If this option is set false, Exim no longer writes anything to the reject log.
14612 See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for details of what Exim writes to its logs.
14613 .ecindex IIDconfima
14614 .ecindex IIDmaiconf
14619 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
14620 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
14622 .chapter "Generic options for routers" "CHAProutergeneric"
14623 .scindex IIDgenoprou1 "options" "generic; for routers"
14624 .scindex IIDgenoprou2 "generic options" "router"
14625 This chapter describes the generic options that apply to all routers.
14626 Those that are preconditions are marked with ‡ in the &"use"& field.
14628 For a general description of how a router operates, see sections
14629 &<<SECTrunindrou>>& and &<<SECTrouprecon>>&. The latter specifies the order in
14630 which the preconditions are tested. The order of expansion of the options that
14631 provide data for a transport is: &%errors_to%&, &%headers_add%&,
14632 &%headers_remove%&, &%transport%&.
14636 .option address_data routers string&!! unset
14637 .cindex "router" "data attached to address"
14638 The string is expanded just before the router is run, that is, after all the
14639 precondition tests have succeeded. If the expansion is forced to fail, the
14640 router declines, the value of &%address_data%& remains unchanged, and the
14641 &%more%& option controls what happens next. Other expansion failures cause
14642 delivery of the address to be deferred.
14644 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14645 When the expansion succeeds, the value is retained with the address, and can be
14646 accessed using the variable &$address_data$& in the current router, subsequent
14647 routers, and the eventual transport.
14649 &*Warning*&: If the current or any subsequent router is a &(redirect)& router
14650 that runs a user's filter file, the contents of &$address_data$& are accessible
14651 in the filter. This is not normally a problem, because such data is usually
14652 either not confidential or it &"belongs"& to the current user, but if you do
14653 put confidential data into &$address_data$& you need to remember this point.
14655 Even if the router declines or passes, the value of &$address_data$& remains
14656 with the address, though it can be changed by another &%address_data%& setting
14657 on a subsequent router. If a router generates child addresses, the value of
14658 &$address_data$& propagates to them. This also applies to the special kind of
14659 &"child"& that is generated by a router with the &%unseen%& option.
14661 The idea of &%address_data%& is that you can use it to look up a lot of data
14662 for the address once, and then pick out parts of the data later. For example,
14663 you could use a single LDAP lookup to return a string of the form
14665 uid=1234 gid=5678 mailbox=/mail/xyz forward=/home/xyz/.forward
14667 In the transport you could pick out the mailbox by a setting such as
14669 file = ${extract{mailbox}{$address_data}}
14671 This makes the configuration file less messy, and also reduces the number of
14672 lookups (though Exim does cache lookups).
14674 The &%address_data%& facility is also useful as a means of passing information
14675 from one router to another, and from a router to a transport. In addition, if
14677 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
14678 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14679 When &$address_data$& is set by a router when verifying a recipient address
14680 from an ACL, it remains available for use in the rest of the ACL statement.
14681 After verifying a sender, the value is transferred to &$sender_address_data$&.
14686 .option address_test routers&!? boolean true
14687 .cindex "&%-bt%& option"
14688 .cindex "router" "skipping when address testing"
14689 If this option is set false, the router is skipped when routing is being tested
14690 by means of the &%-bt%& command line option. This can be a convenience when
14691 your first router sends messages to an external scanner, because it saves you
14692 having to set the &"already scanned"& indicator when testing real address
14697 .option cannot_route_message routers string&!! unset
14698 .cindex "router" "customizing &""cannot route""& message"
14699 .cindex "customizing" "&""cannot route""& message"
14700 This option specifies a text message that is used when an address cannot be
14701 routed because Exim has run out of routers. The default message is
14702 &"Unrouteable address"&. This option is useful only on routers that have
14703 &%more%& set false, or on the very last router in a configuration, because the
14704 value that is used is taken from the last router that is considered. This
14705 includes a router that is skipped because its preconditions are not met, as
14706 well as a router that declines. For example, using the default configuration,
14709 cannot_route_message = Remote domain not found in DNS
14711 on the first router, which is a &(dnslookup)& router with &%more%& set false,
14714 cannot_route_message = Unknown local user
14716 on the final router that checks for local users. If string expansion fails for
14717 this option, the default message is used. Unless the expansion failure was
14718 explicitly forced, a message about the failure is written to the main and panic
14719 logs, in addition to the normal message about the routing failure.
14722 .option caseful_local_part routers boolean false
14723 .cindex "case of local parts"
14724 .cindex "router" "case of local parts"
14725 By default, routers handle the local parts of addresses in a case-insensitive
14726 manner, though the actual case is preserved for transmission with the message.
14727 If you want the case of letters to be significant in a router, you must set
14728 this option true. For individual router options that contain address or local
14729 part lists (for example, &%local_parts%&), case-sensitive matching can be
14730 turned on by &"+caseful"& as a list item. See section &<<SECTcasletadd>>& for
14733 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
14734 .cindex "&$original_local_part$&"
14735 .cindex "&$parent_local_part$&"
14736 The value of the &$local_part$& variable is forced to lower case while a
14737 router is running unless &%caseful_local_part%& is set. When a router assigns
14738 an address to a transport, the value of &$local_part$& when the transport runs
14739 is the same as it was in the router. Similarly, when a router generates child
14740 addresses by aliasing or forwarding, the values of &$original_local_part$&
14741 and &$parent_local_part$& are those that were used by the redirecting router.
14743 This option applies to the processing of an address by a router. When a
14744 recipient address is being processed in an ACL, there is a separate &%control%&
14745 modifier that can be used to specify case-sensitive processing within the ACL
14746 (see section &<<SECTcontrols>>&).
14750 .option check_local_user routers&!? boolean false
14751 .cindex "local user" "checking in router"
14752 .cindex "router" "checking for local user"
14753 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&"
14755 When this option is true, Exim checks that the local part of the recipient
14756 address (with affixes removed if relevant) is the name of an account on the
14757 local system. The check is done by calling the &[getpwnam()]& function rather
14758 than trying to read &_/etc/passwd_& directly. This means that other methods of
14759 holding password data (such as NIS) are supported. If the local part is a local
14760 user, &$home$& is set from the password data, and can be tested in other
14761 preconditions that are evaluated after this one (the order of evaluation is
14762 given in section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). However, the value of &$home$& can be
14763 overridden by &%router_home_directory%&. If the local part is not a local user,
14764 the router is skipped.
14766 If you want to check that the local part is either the name of a local user
14767 or matches something else, you cannot combine &%check_local_user%& with a
14768 setting of &%local_parts%&, because that specifies the logical &'and'& of the
14769 two conditions. However, you can use a &(passwd)& lookup in a &%local_parts%&
14770 setting to achieve this. For example:
14772 local_parts = passwd;$local_part : lsearch;/etc/other/users
14774 Note, however, that the side effects of &%check_local_user%& (such as setting
14775 up a home directory) do not occur when a &(passwd)& lookup is used in a
14776 &%local_parts%& (or any other) precondition.
14780 .option condition routers&!? string&!! unset
14781 .cindex "router" "customized precondition"
14782 This option specifies a general precondition test that has to succeed for the
14783 router to be called. The &%condition%& option is the last precondition to be
14784 evaluated (see section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). The string is expanded, and if the
14785 result is a forced failure, or an empty string, or one of the strings &"0"& or
14786 &"no"& or &"false"& (checked without regard to the case of the letters), the
14787 router is skipped, and the address is offered to the next one.
14789 If the result is any other value, the router is run (as this is the last
14790 precondition to be evaluated, all the other preconditions must be true).
14792 The &%condition%& option provides a means of applying custom conditions to the
14793 running of routers. Note that in the case of a simple conditional expansion,
14794 the default expansion values are exactly what is wanted. For example:
14796 condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}}
14798 Because of the default behaviour of the string expansion, this is equivalent to
14800 condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}{true}{}}
14802 If the expansion fails (other than forced failure) delivery is deferred. Some
14803 of the other precondition options are common special cases that could in fact
14804 be specified using &%condition%&.
14808 .option debug_print routers string&!! unset
14809 .cindex "testing" "variables in drivers"
14810 If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%& command line
14811 option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging output.
14812 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
14813 output, and Exim carries on processing.
14814 This option is provided to help with checking out the values of variables and
14815 so on when debugging router configurations. For example, if a &%condition%&
14816 option appears not to be working, &%debug_print%& can be used to output the
14817 variables it references. The output happens after checks for &%domains%&,
14818 &%local_parts%&, and &%check_local_user%& but before any other preconditions
14819 are tested. A newline is added to the text if it does not end with one.
14823 .option disable_logging routers boolean false
14824 If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any routing errors
14825 or for any deliveries caused by this router. You should not set this option
14826 unless you really, really know what you are doing. See also the generic
14827 transport option of the same name.
14830 .option domains routers&!? "domain list&!!" unset
14831 .cindex "router" "restricting to specific domains"
14832 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
14833 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the current domain matches
14834 the list. If the match is achieved by means of a file lookup, the data that the
14835 lookup returned for the domain is placed in &$domain_data$& for use in string
14836 expansions of the driver's private options. See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for
14837 a list of the order in which preconditions are evaluated.
14841 .option driver routers string unset
14842 This option must always be set. It specifies which of the available routers is
14847 .option errors_to routers string&!! unset
14848 .cindex "envelope sender"
14849 .cindex "router" "changing address for errors"
14850 If a router successfully handles an address, it may assign the address to a
14851 transport for delivery or it may generate child addresses. In both cases, if
14852 there is a delivery problem during later processing, the resulting bounce
14853 message is sent to the address that results from expanding this string,
14854 provided that the address verifies successfully. The &%errors_to%& option is
14855 expanded before &%headers_add%&, &%headers_remove%&, and &%transport%&.
14857 The &%errors_to%& setting associated with an address can be overridden if it
14858 subsequently passes through other routers that have their own &%errors_to%&
14859 settings, or if the message is delivered by a transport with a &%return_path%&
14862 If &%errors_to%& is unset, or the expansion is forced to fail, or the result of
14863 the expansion fails to verify, the errors address associated with the incoming
14864 address is used. At top level, this is the envelope sender. A non-forced
14865 expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.
14867 If an address for which &%errors_to%& has been set ends up being delivered over
14868 SMTP, the envelope sender for that delivery is the &%errors_to%& value, so that
14869 any bounces that are generated by other MTAs on the delivery route are also
14870 sent there. You can set &%errors_to%& to the empty string by either of these
14876 An expansion item that yields an empty string has the same effect. If you do
14877 this, a locally detected delivery error for addresses processed by this router
14878 no longer gives rise to a bounce message; the error is discarded. If the
14879 address is delivered to a remote host, the return path is set to &`<>`&, unless
14880 overridden by the &%return_path%& option on the transport.
14882 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14883 If for some reason you want to discard local errors, but use a non-empty
14884 MAIL command for remote delivery, you can preserve the original return
14885 path in &$address_data$& in the router, and reinstate it in the transport by
14886 setting &%return_path%&.
14888 The most common use of &%errors_to%& is to direct mailing list bounces to the
14889 manager of the list, as described in section &<<SECTmailinglists>>&, or to
14890 implement VERP (Variable Envelope Return Paths) (see section &<<SECTverp>>&).
14894 .option expn routers&!? boolean true
14895 .cindex "address" "testing"
14896 .cindex "testing" "addresses"
14897 .cindex "EXPN" "router skipping"
14898 .cindex "router" "skipping for EXPN"
14899 If this option is turned off, the router is skipped when testing an address
14900 as a result of processing an SMTP EXPN command. You might, for example,
14901 want to turn it off on a router for users' &_.forward_& files, while leaving it
14902 on for the system alias file.
14903 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
14906 The use of the SMTP EXPN command is controlled by an ACL (see chapter
14907 &<<CHAPACL>>&). When Exim is running an EXPN command, it is similar to testing
14908 an address with &%-bt%&. Compare VRFY, whose counterpart is &%-bv%&.
14912 .option fail_verify routers boolean false
14913 .cindex "router" "forcing verification failure"
14914 Setting this option has the effect of setting both &%fail_verify_sender%& and
14915 &%fail_verify_recipient%& to the same value.
14919 .option fail_verify_recipient routers boolean false
14920 If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
14921 verifying a recipient, verification fails.
14925 .option fail_verify_sender routers boolean false
14926 If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
14927 verifying a sender, verification fails.
14931 .option fallback_hosts routers "string list" unset
14932 .cindex "router" "fallback hosts"
14933 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on router"
14934 String expansion is not applied to this option. The argument must be a
14935 colon-separated list of host names or IP addresses. The list separator can be
14936 changed (see section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&), and a port can be specified with
14937 each name or address. In fact, the format of each item is exactly the same as
14938 defined for the list of hosts in a &(manualroute)& router (see section
14939 &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&).
14941 If a router queues an address for a remote transport, this host list is
14942 associated with the address, and used instead of the transport's fallback host
14943 list. If &%hosts_randomize%& is set on the transport, the order of the list is
14944 randomized for each use. See the &%fallback_hosts%& option of the &(smtp)&
14945 transport for further details.
14948 .option group routers string&!! "see below"
14949 .cindex "gid (group id)" "local delivery"
14950 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
14951 .cindex "transport" "local"
14952 .cindex "router" "setting group"
14953 When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport does not
14954 specify a group, the group given here is used when running the delivery
14956 The group may be specified numerically or by name. If expansion fails, the
14957 error is logged and delivery is deferred.
14958 The default is unset, unless &%check_local_user%& is set, when the default
14959 is taken from the password information. See also &%initgroups%& and &%user%&
14960 and the discussion in chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
14964 .option headers_add routers string&!! unset
14965 .cindex "header lines" "adding"
14966 .cindex "router" "adding header lines"
14967 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded at routing time, and
14968 associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router. However, this
14969 option has no effect when an address is just being verified. The way in which
14970 the text is used to add header lines at transport time is described in section
14971 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. New header lines are not actually added until the
14972 message is in the process of being transported. This means that references to
14973 header lines in string expansions in the transport's configuration do not
14974 &"see"& the added header lines.
14976 The &%headers_add%& option is expanded after &%errors_to%&, but before
14977 &%headers_remove%& and &%transport%&. If the expanded string is empty, or if
14978 the expansion is forced to fail, the option has no effect. Other expansion
14979 failures are treated as configuration errors.
14981 &*Warning 1*&: The &%headers_add%& option cannot be used for a &(redirect)&
14982 router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
14984 &*Warning 2*&: If the &%unseen%& option is set on the router, all header
14985 additions are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent routers.
14989 .option headers_remove routers string&!! unset
14990 .cindex "header lines" "removing"
14991 .cindex "router" "removing header lines"
14992 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded at routing time, and
14993 associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router. However, this
14994 option has no effect when an address is just being verified. The way in which
14995 the text is used to remove header lines at transport time is described in
14996 section &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Header lines are not actually removed until
14997 the message is in the process of being transported. This means that references
14998 to header lines in string expansions in the transport's configuration still
14999 &"see"& the original header lines.
15001 The &%headers_remove%& option is expanded after &%errors_to%& and
15002 &%headers_add%&, but before &%transport%&. If the expansion is forced to fail,
15003 the option has no effect. Other expansion failures are treated as configuration
15006 &*Warning 1*&: The &%headers_remove%& option cannot be used for a &(redirect)&
15007 router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
15009 &*Warning 2*&: If the &%unseen%& option is set on the router, all header
15010 removal requests are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent
15014 .option ignore_target_hosts routers "host list&!!" unset
15015 .cindex "IP address" "discarding"
15016 .cindex "router" "discarding IP addresses"
15017 Although this option is a host list, it should normally contain IP address
15018 entries rather than names. If any host that is looked up by the router has an
15019 IP address that matches an item in this list, Exim behaves as if that IP
15020 address did not exist. This option allows you to cope with rogue DNS entries
15023 remote.domain.example. A 127.0.0.1
15027 ignore_target_hosts = 127.0.0.1
15029 on the relevant router. If all the hosts found by a &(dnslookup)& router are
15030 discarded in this way, the router declines. In a conventional configuration, an
15031 attempt to mail to such a domain would normally provoke the &"unrouteable
15032 domain"& error, and an attempt to verify an address in the domain would fail.
15033 Similarly, if &%ignore_target_hosts%& is set on an &(ipliteral)& router, the
15034 router declines if presented with one of the listed addresses.
15036 You can use this option to disable the use of IPv4 or IPv6 for mail delivery by
15037 means of the first or the second of the following settings, respectively:
15039 ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0/0
15040 ignore_target_hosts = <; 0::0/0
15042 The pattern in the first line matches all IPv4 addresses, whereas the pattern
15043 in the second line matches all IPv6 addresses.
15045 This option may also be useful for ignoring link-local and site-local IPv6
15046 addresses. Because, like all host lists, the value of &%ignore_target_hosts%&
15047 is expanded before use as a list, it is possible to make it dependent on the
15048 domain that is being routed.
15050 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
15051 During its expansion, &$host_address$& is set to the IP address that is being
15054 .option initgroups routers boolean false
15055 .cindex "additional groups"
15056 .cindex "groups" "additional"
15057 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
15058 .cindex "transport" "local"
15059 If the router queues an address for a transport, and this option is true, and
15060 the uid supplied by the router is not overridden by the transport, the
15061 &[initgroups()]& function is called when running the transport to ensure that
15062 any additional groups associated with the uid are set up. See also &%group%&
15063 and &%user%& and the discussion in chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
15067 .option local_part_prefix routers&!? "string list" unset
15068 .cindex "router" "prefix for local part"
15069 .cindex "prefix" "for local part; used in router"
15070 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the local part starts with
15071 one of the given strings, or &%local_part_prefix_optional%& is true. See
15072 section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions are
15075 The list is scanned from left to right, and the first prefix that matches is
15076 used. A limited form of wildcard is available; if the prefix begins with an
15077 asterisk, it matches the longest possible sequence of arbitrary characters at
15078 the start of the local part. An asterisk should therefore always be followed by
15079 some character that does not occur in normal local parts.
15080 .cindex "multiple mailboxes"
15081 .cindex "mailbox" "multiple"
15082 Wildcarding can be used to set up multiple user mailboxes, as described in
15083 section &<<SECTmulbox>>&.
15085 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
15086 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
15087 During the testing of the &%local_parts%& option, and while the router is
15088 running, the prefix is removed from the local part, and is available in the
15089 expansion variable &$local_part_prefix$&. When a message is being delivered, if
15090 the router accepts the address, this remains true during subsequent delivery by
15091 a transport. In particular, the local part that is transmitted in the RCPT
15092 command for LMTP, SMTP, and BSMTP deliveries has the prefix removed by default.
15093 This behaviour can be overridden by setting &%rcpt_include_affixes%& true on
15094 the relevant transport.
15096 When an address is being verified, &%local_part_prefix%& affects only the
15097 behaviour of the router. If the callout feature of verification is in use, this
15098 means that the full address, including the prefix, will be used during the
15101 The prefix facility is commonly used to handle local parts of the form
15102 &%owner-something%&. Another common use is to support local parts of the form
15103 &%real-username%& to bypass a user's &_.forward_& file &-- helpful when trying
15104 to tell a user their forwarding is broken &-- by placing a router like this one
15105 immediately before the router that handles &_.forward_& files:
15109 local_part_prefix = real-
15111 transport = local_delivery
15113 If both &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& are set for a router,
15114 both conditions must be met if not optional. Care must be taken if wildcards
15115 are used in both a prefix and a suffix on the same router. Different
15116 separator characters must be used to avoid ambiguity.
15119 .option local_part_prefix_optional routers boolean false
15120 See &%local_part_prefix%& above.
15124 .option local_part_suffix routers&!? "string list" unset
15125 .cindex "router" "suffix for local part"
15126 .cindex "suffix for local part" "used in router"
15127 This option operates in the same way as &%local_part_prefix%&, except that the
15128 local part must end (rather than start) with the given string, the
15129 &%local_part_suffix_optional%& option determines whether the suffix is
15130 mandatory, and the wildcard * character, if present, must be the last
15131 character of the suffix. This option facility is commonly used to handle local
15132 parts of the form &%something-request%& and multiple user mailboxes of the form
15136 .option local_part_suffix_optional routers boolean false
15137 See &%local_part_suffix%& above.
15141 .option local_parts routers&!? "local part list&!!" unset
15142 .cindex "router" "restricting to specific local parts"
15143 .cindex "local part" "checking in router"
15144 The router is run only if the local part of the address matches the list.
15145 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15147 section &<<SECTlocparlis>>& for a discussion of local part lists. Because the
15148 string is expanded, it is possible to make it depend on the domain, for
15151 local_parts = dbm;/usr/local/specials/$domain
15153 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
15154 If the match is achieved by a lookup, the data that the lookup returned
15155 for the local part is placed in the variable &$local_part_data$& for use in
15156 expansions of the router's private options. You might use this option, for
15157 example, if you have a large number of local virtual domains, and you want to
15158 send all postmaster mail to the same place without having to set up an alias in
15159 each virtual domain:
15163 local_parts = postmaster
15164 data = postmaster@real.domain.example
15168 .option log_as_local routers boolean "see below"
15169 .cindex "log" "delivery line"
15170 .cindex "delivery" "log line format"
15171 Exim has two logging styles for delivery, the idea being to make local
15172 deliveries stand out more visibly from remote ones. In the &"local"& style, the
15173 recipient address is given just as the local part, without a domain. The use of
15174 this style is controlled by this option. It defaults to true for the &(accept)&
15175 router, and false for all the others. This option applies only when a
15176 router assigns an address to a transport. It has no effect on routers that
15177 redirect addresses.
15181 .option more routers boolean&!! true
15182 The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid boolean value,
15183 that is, one of the strings &"yes"&, &"no"&, &"true"&, or &"false"&. Any other
15184 result causes an error, and delivery is deferred. If the expansion is forced to
15185 fail, the default value for the option (true) is used. Other failures cause
15186 delivery to be deferred.
15188 If this option is set false, and the router declines to handle the address, no
15189 further routers are tried, routing fails, and the address is bounced.
15190 .cindex "&%self%& option"
15191 However, if the router explicitly passes an address to the following router by
15192 means of the setting
15196 or otherwise, the setting of &%more%& is ignored. Also, the setting of &%more%&
15197 does not affect the behaviour if one of the precondition tests fails. In that
15198 case, the address is always passed to the next router.
15200 Note that &%address_data%& is not considered to be a precondition. If its
15201 expansion is forced to fail, the router declines, and the value of &%more%&
15202 controls what happens next.
15205 .option pass_on_timeout routers boolean false
15206 .cindex "timeout" "of router"
15207 .cindex "router" "timeout"
15208 If a router times out during a host lookup, it normally causes deferral of the
15209 address. If &%pass_on_timeout%& is set, the address is passed on to the next
15210 router, overriding &%no_more%&. This may be helpful for systems that are
15211 intermittently connected to the Internet, or those that want to pass to a smart
15212 host any messages that cannot immediately be delivered.
15214 There are occasional other temporary errors that can occur while doing DNS
15215 lookups. They are treated in the same way as a timeout, and this option
15216 applies to all of them.
15220 .option pass_router routers string unset
15221 .cindex "router" "go to after &""pass""&"
15222 When a router returns &"pass"&, the address is normally handed on to the next
15223 router in sequence. This can be changed by setting &%pass_router%& to the name
15224 of another router. However (unlike &%redirect_router%&) the named router must
15225 be below the current router, to avoid loops. Note that this option applies only
15226 to the special case of &"pass"&. It does not apply when a router returns
15231 .option redirect_router routers string unset
15232 .cindex "router" "start at after redirection"
15233 Sometimes an administrator knows that it is pointless to reprocess addresses
15234 generated from alias or forward files with the same router again. For
15235 example, if an alias file translates real names into login ids there is no
15236 point searching the alias file a second time, especially if it is a large file.
15238 The &%redirect_router%& option can be set to the name of any router instance.
15239 It causes the routing of any generated addresses to start at the named router
15240 instead of at the first router. This option has no effect if the router in
15241 which it is set does not generate new addresses.
15245 .option require_files routers&!? "string list&!!" unset
15246 .cindex "file" "requiring for router"
15247 .cindex "router" "requiring file existence"
15248 This option provides a general mechanism for predicating the running of a
15249 router on the existence or non-existence of certain files or directories.
15250 Before running a router, as one of its precondition tests, Exim works its way
15251 through the &%require_files%& list, expanding each item separately.
15253 Because the list is split before expansion, any colons in expansion items must
15254 be doubled, or the facility for using a different list separator must be used.
15255 If any expansion is forced to fail, the item is ignored. Other expansion
15256 failures cause routing of the address to be deferred.
15258 If any expanded string is empty, it is ignored. Otherwise, except as described
15259 below, each string must be a fully qualified file path, optionally preceded by
15260 &"!"&. The paths are passed to the &[stat()]& function to test for the
15261 existence of the files or directories. The router is skipped if any paths not
15262 preceded by &"!"& do not exist, or if any paths preceded by &"!"& do exist.
15265 If &[stat()]& cannot determine whether a file exists or not, delivery of
15266 the message is deferred. This can happen when NFS-mounted filesystems are
15269 This option is checked after the &%domains%&, &%local_parts%&, and &%senders%&
15270 options, so you cannot use it to check for the existence of a file in which to
15271 look up a domain, local part, or sender. (See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a
15272 full list of the order in which preconditions are evaluated.) However, as
15273 these options are all expanded, you can use the &%exists%& expansion condition
15274 to make such tests. The &%require_files%& option is intended for checking files
15275 that the router may be going to use internally, or which are needed by a
15276 transport (for example &_.procmailrc_&).
15278 During delivery, the &[stat()]& function is run as root, but there is a
15279 facility for some checking of the accessibility of a file by another user.
15280 This is not a proper permissions check, but just a &"rough"& check that
15281 operates as follows:
15283 If an item in a &%require_files%& list does not contain any forward slash
15284 characters, it is taken to be the user (and optional group, separated by a
15285 comma) to be checked for subsequent files in the list. If no group is specified
15286 but the user is specified symbolically, the gid associated with the uid is
15289 require_files = mail:/some/file
15290 require_files = $local_part:$home/.procmailrc
15292 If a user or group name in a &%require_files%& list does not exist, the
15293 &%require_files%& condition fails.
15295 Exim performs the check by scanning along the components of the file path, and
15296 checking the access for the given uid and gid. It checks for &"x"& access on
15297 directories, and &"r"& access on the final file. Note that this means that file
15298 access control lists, if the operating system has them, are ignored.
15300 &*Warning 1*&: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an
15301 incoming SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own uid. This
15302 may affect the result of a &%require_files%& check. In particular, &[stat()]&
15303 may yield the error EACCES (&"Permission denied"&). This means that the Exim
15304 user is not permitted to read one of the directories on the file's path.
15306 &*Warning 2*&: Even when Exim is running as root while delivering a message,
15307 &[stat()]& can yield EACCES for a file in an NFS directory that is mounted
15308 without root access. In this case, if a check for access by a particular user
15309 is requested, Exim creates a subprocess that runs as that user, and tries the
15310 check again in that process.
15312 The default action for handling an unresolved EACCES is to consider it to
15313 be caused by a configuration error, and routing is deferred because the
15314 existence or non-existence of the file cannot be determined. However, in some
15315 circumstances it may be desirable to treat this condition as if the file did
15316 not exist. If the file name (or the exclamation mark that precedes the file
15317 name for non-existence) is preceded by a plus sign, the EACCES error is treated
15318 as if the file did not exist. For example:
15320 require_files = +/some/file
15322 If the router is not an essential part of verification (for example, it
15323 handles users' &_.forward_& files), another solution is to set the &%verify%&
15324 option false so that the router is skipped when verifying.
15328 .option retry_use_local_part routers boolean "see below"
15329 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
15330 .cindex "local part" "in retry keys"
15331 When a delivery suffers a temporary routing failure, a retry record is created
15332 in Exim's hints database. For addresses whose routing depends only on the
15333 domain, the key for the retry record should not involve the local part, but for
15334 other addresses, both the domain and the local part should be included.
15335 Usually, remote routing is of the former kind, and local routing is of the
15338 This option controls whether the local part is used to form the key for retry
15339 hints for addresses that suffer temporary errors while being handled by this
15340 router. The default value is true for any router that has &%check_local_user%&
15341 set, and false otherwise. Note that this option does not apply to hints keys
15342 for transport delays; they are controlled by a generic transport option of the
15345 The setting of &%retry_use_local_part%& applies only to the router on which it
15346 appears. If the router generates child addresses, they are routed
15347 independently; this setting does not become attached to them.
15351 .option router_home_directory routers string&!! unset
15352 .cindex "router" "home directory for"
15353 .cindex "home directory" "for router"
15355 This option sets a home directory for use while the router is running. (Compare
15356 &%transport_home_directory%&, which sets a home directory for later
15357 transporting.) In particular, if used on a &(redirect)& router, this option
15358 sets a value for &$home$& while a filter is running. The value is expanded;
15359 forced expansion failure causes the option to be ignored &-- other failures
15360 cause the router to defer.
15362 Expansion of &%router_home_directory%& happens immediately after the
15363 &%check_local_user%& test (if configured), before any further expansions take
15365 (See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15367 While the router is running, &%router_home_directory%& overrides the value of
15368 &$home$& that came from &%check_local_user%&.
15370 When a router accepts an address and assigns it to a local transport (including
15371 the cases when a &(redirect)& router generates a pipe, file, or autoreply
15372 delivery), the home directory setting for the transport is taken from the first
15373 of these values that is set:
15376 The &%home_directory%& option on the transport;
15378 The &%transport_home_directory%& option on the router;
15380 The password data if &%check_local_user%& is set on the router;
15382 The &%router_home_directory%& option on the router.
15385 In other words, &%router_home_directory%& overrides the password data for the
15386 router, but not for the transport.
15390 .option self routers string freeze
15391 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to local host"
15392 .cindex "local host" "MX pointing to"
15393 This option applies to those routers that use a recipient address to find a
15394 list of remote hosts. Currently, these are the &(dnslookup)&, &(ipliteral)&,
15395 and &(manualroute)& routers.
15396 Certain configurations of the &(queryprogram)& router can also specify a list
15398 Usually such routers are configured to send the message to a remote host via an
15399 &(smtp)& transport. The &%self%& option specifies what happens when the first
15400 host on the list turns out to be the local host.
15401 The way in which Exim checks for the local host is described in section
15402 &<<SECTreclocipadd>>&.
15404 Normally this situation indicates either an error in Exim's configuration (for
15405 example, the router should be configured not to process this domain), or an
15406 error in the DNS (for example, the MX should not point to this host). For this
15407 reason, the default action is to log the incident, defer the address, and
15408 freeze the message. The following alternatives are provided for use in special
15413 Delivery of the message is tried again later, but the message is not frozen.
15415 .vitem "&%reroute%&: <&'domain'&>"
15416 The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is passed back to
15417 be reprocessed by the routers. No rewriting of headers takes place. This
15418 behaviour is essentially a redirection.
15420 .vitem "&%reroute: rewrite:%& <&'domain'&>"
15421 The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is passed back to be
15422 reprocessed by the routers. Any headers that contain the original domain are
15426 .cindex "&%more%& option"
15427 .cindex "&$self_hostname$&"
15428 The router passes the address to the next router, or to the router named in the
15429 &%pass_router%& option if it is set. This overrides &%no_more%&. During
15430 subsequent routing and delivery, the variable &$self_hostname$& contains the
15431 name of the local host that the router encountered. This can be used to
15432 distinguish between different cases for hosts with multiple names. The
15438 ensures that only those addresses that routed to the local host are passed on.
15439 Without &%no_more%&, addresses that were declined for other reasons would also
15440 be passed to the next router.
15443 Delivery fails and an error report is generated.
15446 .cindex "local host" "sending to"
15447 The anomaly is ignored and the address is queued for the transport. This
15448 setting should be used with extreme caution. For an &(smtp)& transport, it
15449 makes sense only in cases where the program that is listening on the SMTP port
15450 is not this version of Exim. That is, it must be some other MTA, or Exim with a
15451 different configuration file that handles the domain in another way.
15456 .option senders routers&!? "address list&!!" unset
15457 .cindex "router" "checking senders"
15458 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the message's sender
15459 address matches something on the list.
15460 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15463 There are issues concerning verification when the running of routers is
15464 dependent on the sender. When Exim is verifying the address in an &%errors_to%&
15465 setting, it sets the sender to the null string. When using the &%-bt%& option
15466 to check a configuration file, it is necessary also to use the &%-f%& option to
15467 set an appropriate sender. For incoming mail, the sender is unset when
15468 verifying the sender, but is available when verifying any recipients. If the
15469 SMTP VRFY command is enabled, it must be used after MAIL if the sender address
15473 .option translate_ip_address routers string&!! unset
15474 .cindex "IP address" "translating"
15475 .cindex "packet radio"
15476 .cindex "router" "IP address translation"
15477 There exist some rare networking situations (for example, packet radio) where
15478 it is helpful to be able to translate IP addresses generated by normal routing
15479 mechanisms into other IP addresses, thus performing a kind of manual IP
15480 routing. This should be done only if the normal IP routing of the TCP/IP stack
15481 is inadequate or broken. Because this is an extremely uncommon requirement, the
15482 code to support this option is not included in the Exim binary unless
15483 SUPPORT_TRANSLATE_IP_ADDRESS=yes is set in &_Local/Makefile_&.
15485 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
15486 The &%translate_ip_address%& string is expanded for every IP address generated
15487 by the router, with the generated address set in &$host_address$&. If the
15488 expansion is forced to fail, no action is taken.
15489 For any other expansion error, delivery of the message is deferred.
15490 If the result of the expansion is an IP address, that replaces the original
15491 address; otherwise the result is assumed to be a host name &-- this is looked
15492 up using &[gethostbyname()]& (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available) to
15493 produce one or more replacement IP addresses. For example, to subvert all IP
15494 addresses in some specific networks, this could be added to a router:
15496 translate_ip_address = \
15497 ${lookup{${mask:$host_address/26}}lsearch{/some/file}\
15500 The file would contain lines like
15502 10.2.3.128/26 some.host
15503 10.8.4.34/26 10.44.8.15
15505 You should not make use of this facility unless you really understand what you
15510 .option transport routers string&!! unset
15511 This option specifies the transport to be used when a router accepts an address
15512 and sets it up for delivery. A transport is never needed if a router is used
15513 only for verification. The value of the option is expanded at routing time,
15514 after the expansion of &%errors_to%&, &%headers_add%&, and &%headers_remove%&,
15515 and result must be the name of one of the configured transports. If it is not,
15516 delivery is deferred.
15518 The &%transport%& option is not used by the &(redirect)& router, but it does
15519 have some private options that set up transports for pipe and file deliveries
15520 (see chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>&).
15524 .option transport_current_directory routers string&!! unset
15525 .cindex "current directory for local transport"
15526 This option associates a current directory with any address that is routed
15527 to a local transport. This can happen either because a transport is
15528 explicitly configured for the router, or because it generates a delivery to a
15529 file or a pipe. During the delivery process (that is, at transport time), this
15530 option string is expanded and is set as the current directory, unless
15531 overridden by a setting on the transport.
15532 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
15533 logged, and delivery is deferred.
15534 See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for details of the local delivery
15540 .option transport_home_directory routers string&!! "see below"
15541 .cindex "home directory" "for local transport"
15542 This option associates a home directory with any address that is routed to a
15543 local transport. This can happen either because a transport is explicitly
15544 configured for the router, or because it generates a delivery to a file or a
15545 pipe. During the delivery process (that is, at transport time), the option
15546 string is expanded and is set as the home directory, unless overridden by a
15547 setting of &%home_directory%& on the transport.
15548 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
15549 logged, and delivery is deferred.
15551 If the transport does not specify a home directory, and
15552 &%transport_home_directory%& is not set for the router, the home directory for
15553 the tranport is taken from the password data if &%check_local_user%& is set for
15554 the router. Otherwise it is taken from &%router_home_directory%& if that option
15555 is set; if not, no home directory is set for the transport.
15557 See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for further details of the local delivery
15563 .option unseen routers boolean&!! false
15564 .cindex "router" "carrying on after success"
15565 The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid boolean value,
15566 that is, one of the strings &"yes"&, &"no"&, &"true"&, or &"false"&. Any other
15567 result causes an error, and delivery is deferred. If the expansion is forced to
15568 fail, the default value for the option (false) is used. Other failures cause
15569 delivery to be deferred.
15571 When this option is set true, routing does not cease if the router accepts the
15572 address. Instead, a copy of the incoming address is passed to the next router,
15573 overriding a false setting of &%more%&. There is little point in setting
15574 &%more%& false if &%unseen%& is always true, but it may be useful in cases when
15575 the value of &%unseen%& contains expansion items (and therefore, presumably, is
15576 sometimes true and sometimes false).
15578 .cindex "copy of message (&%unseen%& option)"
15579 The &%unseen%& option can be used to cause copies of messages to be delivered
15580 to some other destination, while also carrying out a normal delivery. In
15581 effect, the current address is made into a &"parent"& that has two children &--
15582 one that is delivered as specified by this router, and a clone that goes on to
15583 be routed further. For this reason, &%unseen%& may not be combined with the
15584 &%one_time%& option in a &(redirect)& router.
15586 &*Warning*&: Header lines added to the address (or specified for removal) by
15587 this router or by previous routers affect the &"unseen"& copy of the message
15588 only. The clone that continues to be processed by further routers starts with
15589 no added headers and none specified for removal. However, any data that was set
15590 by the &%address_data%& option in the current or previous routers is passed on.
15591 Setting the &%unseen%& option has a similar effect to the &%unseen%& command
15592 qualifier in filter files.
15596 .option user routers string&!! "see below"
15597 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
15598 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
15599 .cindex "transport" "local"
15600 .cindex "router" "user for filter processing"
15601 .cindex "filter" "user for processing"
15602 When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport does not
15603 specify a user, the user given here is used when running the delivery process.
15604 The user may be specified numerically or by name. If expansion fails, the
15605 error is logged and delivery is deferred.
15606 This user is also used by the &(redirect)& router when running a filter file.
15607 The default is unset, except when &%check_local_user%& is set. In this case,
15608 the default is taken from the password information. If the user is specified as
15609 a name, and &%group%& is not set, the group associated with the user is used.
15610 See also &%initgroups%& and &%group%& and the discussion in chapter
15611 &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
15615 .option verify routers&!? boolean true
15616 Setting this option has the effect of setting &%verify_sender%& and
15617 &%verify_recipient%& to the same value.
15620 .option verify_only routers&!? boolean false
15621 .cindex "EXPN" "with &%verify_only%&"
15622 .cindex "&%-bv%& option"
15623 .cindex "router" "used only when verifying"
15624 If this option is set, the router is used only when verifying an address or
15625 testing with the &%-bv%& option, not when actually doing a delivery, testing
15626 with the &%-bt%& option, or running the SMTP EXPN command. It can be further
15627 restricted to verifying only senders or recipients by means of
15628 &%verify_sender%& and &%verify_recipient%&.
15630 &*Warning*&: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an incoming
15631 SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own uid. If the router
15632 accesses any files, you need to make sure that they are accessible to the Exim
15636 .option verify_recipient routers&!? boolean true
15637 If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying recipient
15639 or testing recipient verification using &%-bv%&.
15640 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15644 .option verify_sender routers&!? boolean true
15645 If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying sender addresses
15646 or testing sender verification using &%-bvs%&.
15647 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15649 .ecindex IIDgenoprou1
15650 .ecindex IIDgenoprou2
15657 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15658 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15660 .chapter "The accept router"
15661 .cindex "&(accept)& router"
15662 .cindex "routers" "&(accept)&"
15663 The &(accept)& router has no private options of its own. Unless it is being
15664 used purely for verification (see &%verify_only%&) a transport is required to
15665 be defined by the generic &%transport%& option. If the preconditions that are
15666 specified by generic options are met, the router accepts the address and queues
15667 it for the given transport. The most common use of this router is for setting
15668 up deliveries to local mailboxes. For example:
15672 domains = mydomain.example
15674 transport = local_delivery
15676 The &%domains%& condition in this example checks the domain of the address, and
15677 &%check_local_user%& checks that the local part is the login of a local user.
15678 When both preconditions are met, the &(accept)& router runs, and queues the
15679 address for the &(local_delivery)& transport.
15686 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15687 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15689 .chapter "The dnslookup router" "CHAPdnslookup"
15690 .scindex IIDdnsrou1 "&(dnslookup)& router"
15691 .scindex IIDdnsrou2 "routers" "&(dnslookup)&"
15692 The &(dnslookup)& router looks up the hosts that handle mail for the
15693 recipient's domain in the DNS. A transport must always be set for this router,
15694 unless &%verify_only%& is set.
15696 If SRV support is configured (see &%check_srv%& below), Exim first searches for
15697 SRV records. If none are found, or if SRV support is not configured,
15698 MX records are looked up. If no MX records exist, address records are sought.
15699 However, &%mx_domains%& can be set to disable the direct use of address
15702 MX records of equal priority are sorted by Exim into a random order. Exim then
15703 looks for address records for the host names obtained from MX or SRV records.
15704 When a host has more than one IP address, they are sorted into a random order,
15705 except that IPv6 addresses are always sorted before IPv4 addresses. If all the
15706 IP addresses found are discarded by a setting of the &%ignore_target_hosts%&
15707 generic option, the router declines.
15709 Unless they have the highest priority (lowest MX value), MX records that point
15710 to the local host, or to any host name that matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&,
15711 are discarded, together with any other MX records of equal or lower priority.
15713 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to local host"
15714 .cindex "local host" "MX pointing to"
15715 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(dnslookup)& router"
15716 If the host pointed to by the highest priority MX record, or looked up as an
15717 address record, is the local host, or matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, what
15718 happens is controlled by the generic &%self%& option.
15721 .section "Problems with DNS lookups" "SECTprowitdnsloo"
15722 There have been problems with DNS servers when SRV records are looked up.
15723 Some mis-behaving servers return a DNS error or timeout when a non-existent
15724 SRV record is sought. Similar problems have in the past been reported for
15725 MX records. The global &%dns_again_means_nonexist%& option can help with this
15726 problem, but it is heavy-handed because it is a global option.
15728 For this reason, there are two options, &%srv_fail_domains%& and
15729 &%mx_fail_domains%&, that control what happens when a DNS lookup in a
15730 &(dnslookup)& router results in a DNS failure or a &"try again"& response. If
15731 an attempt to look up an SRV or MX record causes one of these results, and the
15732 domain matches the relevant list, Exim behaves as if the DNS had responded &"no
15733 such record"&. In the case of an SRV lookup, this means that the router
15734 proceeds to look for MX records; in the case of an MX lookup, it proceeds to
15735 look for A or AAAA records, unless the domain matches &%mx_domains%&, in which
15736 case routing fails.
15741 .section "Private options for dnslookup"
15742 .cindex "options" "&(dnslookup)& router"
15743 The private options for the &(dnslookup)& router are as follows:
15745 .option check_secondary_mx dnslookup boolean false
15746 .cindex "MX record" "checking for secondary"
15747 If this option is set, the router declines unless the local host is found in
15748 (and removed from) the list of hosts obtained by MX lookup. This can be used to
15749 process domains for which the local host is a secondary mail exchanger
15750 differently to other domains. The way in which Exim decides whether a host is
15751 the local host is described in section &<<SECTreclocipadd>>&.
15754 .option check_srv dnslookup string&!! unset
15755 .cindex "SRV record" "enabling use of"
15756 The &(dnslookup)& router supports the use of SRV records (see RFC 2782) in
15757 addition to MX and address records. The support is disabled by default. To
15758 enable SRV support, set the &%check_srv%& option to the name of the service
15759 required. For example,
15763 looks for SRV records that refer to the normal smtp service. The option is
15764 expanded, so the service name can vary from message to message or address
15765 to address. This might be helpful if SRV records are being used for a
15766 submission service. If the expansion is forced to fail, the &%check_srv%&
15767 option is ignored, and the router proceeds to look for MX records in the
15770 When the expansion succeeds, the router searches first for SRV records for
15771 the given service (it assumes TCP protocol). A single SRV record with a
15772 host name that consists of just a single dot indicates &"no such service for
15773 this domain"&; if this is encountered, the router declines. If other kinds of
15774 SRV record are found, they are used to construct a host list for delivery
15775 according to the rules of RFC 2782. MX records are not sought in this case.
15777 When no SRV records are found, MX records (and address records) are sought in
15778 the traditional way. In other words, SRV records take precedence over MX
15779 records, just as MX records take precedence over address records. Note that
15780 this behaviour is not sanctioned by RFC 2782, though a previous draft RFC
15781 defined it. It is apparently believed that MX records are sufficient for email
15782 and that SRV records should not be used for this purpose. However, SRV records
15783 have an additional &"weight"& feature which some people might find useful when
15784 trying to split an SMTP load between hosts of different power.
15786 See section &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& above for a discussion of Exim's behaviour
15787 when there is a DNS lookup error.
15791 .option mx_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15792 .cindex "MX record" "required to exist"
15793 .cindex "SRV record" "required to exist"
15794 A domain that matches &%mx_domains%& is required to have either an MX or an SRV
15795 record in order to be recognised. (The name of this option could be improved.)
15796 For example, if all the mail hosts in &'fict.example'& are known to have MX
15797 records, except for those in &'discworld.fict.example'&, you could use this
15800 mx_domains = ! *.discworld.fict.example : *.fict.example
15802 This specifies that messages addressed to a domain that matches the list but
15803 has no MX record should be bounced immediately instead of being routed using
15804 the address record.
15807 .option mx_fail_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15808 If the DNS lookup for MX records for one of the domains in this list causes a
15809 DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no MX records were found. See section
15810 &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& for more discussion.
15815 .option qualify_single dnslookup boolean true
15816 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
15817 .cindex "DNS" "qualifying single-component names"
15818 When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DEFNAMES is set for DNS
15819 lookups. Typically, but not standardly, this causes the resolver to qualify
15820 single-component names with the default domain. For example, on a machine
15821 called &'dictionary.ref.example'&, the domain &'thesaurus'& would be changed to
15822 &'thesaurus.ref.example'& inside the resolver. For details of what your
15823 resolver actually does, consult your man pages for &'resolver'& and
15828 .option rewrite_headers dnslookup boolean true
15829 .cindex "rewriting" "header lines"
15830 .cindex "header lines" "rewriting"
15831 If the domain name in the address that is being processed is not fully
15832 qualified, it may be expanded to its full form by a DNS lookup. For example, if
15833 an address is specified as &'dormouse@teaparty'&, the domain might be
15834 expanded to &'teaparty.wonderland.fict.example'&. Domain expansion can also
15835 occur as a result of setting the &%widen_domains%& option. If
15836 &%rewrite_headers%& is true, all occurrences of the abbreviated domain name in
15837 any &'Bcc:'&, &'Cc:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-to:'&, &'Sender:'&, and &'To:'&
15838 header lines of the message are rewritten with the full domain name.
15840 This option should be turned off only when it is known that no message is
15841 ever going to be sent outside an environment where the abbreviation makes
15844 When an MX record is looked up in the DNS and matches a wildcard record, name
15845 servers normally return a record containing the name that has been looked up,
15846 making it impossible to detect whether a wildcard was present or not. However,
15847 some name servers have recently been seen to return the wildcard entry. If the
15848 name returned by a DNS lookup begins with an asterisk, it is not used for
15852 .option same_domain_copy_routing dnslookup boolean false
15853 .cindex "address" "copying routing"
15854 Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the &(dnslookup)& router
15855 to the same list of hosts. However, this cannot be presumed, because the router
15856 options and preconditions may refer to the local part of the address. By
15857 default, therefore, Exim routes each address in a message independently. DNS
15858 servers run caches, so repeated DNS lookups are not normally expensive, and in
15859 any case, personal messages rarely have more than a few recipients.
15861 If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at the same
15862 domain, and you are using a &(dnslookup)& router which is independent of the
15863 local part, you can set &%same_domain_copy_routing%& to bypass repeated DNS
15864 lookups for identical domains in one message. In this case, when &(dnslookup)&
15865 routes an address to a remote transport, any other unrouted addresses in the
15866 message that have the same domain are automatically given the same routing
15867 without processing them independently,
15868 provided the following conditions are met:
15871 No router that processed the address specified &%headers_add%& or
15872 &%headers_remove%&.
15874 The router did not change the address in any way, for example, by &"widening"&
15881 .option search_parents dnslookup boolean false
15882 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
15883 When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DNSRCH is set for DNS
15884 lookups. This is different from the &%qualify_single%& option in that it
15885 applies to domains containing dots. Typically, but not standardly, it causes
15886 the resolver to search for the name in the current domain and in parent
15887 domains. For example, on a machine in the &'fict.example'& domain, if looking
15888 up &'teaparty.wonderland'& failed, the resolver would try
15889 &'teaparty.wonderland.fict.example'&. For details of what your resolver
15890 actually does, consult your man pages for &'resolver'& and &'resolv.conf'&.
15892 Setting this option true can cause problems in domains that have a wildcard MX
15893 record, because any domain that does not have its own MX record matches the
15898 .option srv_fail_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15899 If the DNS lookup for SRV records for one of the domains in this list causes a
15900 DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no SRV records were found. See section
15901 &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& for more discussion.
15906 .option widen_domains dnslookup "string list" unset
15907 .cindex "domain" "partial; widening"
15908 If a DNS lookup fails and this option is set, each of its strings in turn is
15909 added onto the end of the domain, and the lookup is tried again. For example,
15912 widen_domains = fict.example:ref.example
15914 is set and a lookup of &'klingon.dictionary'& fails,
15915 &'klingon.dictionary.fict.example'& is looked up, and if this fails,
15916 &'klingon.dictionary.ref.example'& is tried. Note that the &%qualify_single%&
15917 and &%search_parents%& options can cause some widening to be undertaken inside
15918 the DNS resolver. &%widen_domains%& is not applied to sender addresses
15919 when verifying, unless &%rewrite_headers%& is false (not the default).
15922 .section "Effect of qualify_single and search_parents"
15923 When a domain from an envelope recipient is changed by the resolver as a result
15924 of the &%qualify_single%& or &%search_parents%& options, Exim rewrites the
15925 corresponding address in the message's header lines unless &%rewrite_headers%&
15926 is set false. Exim then re-routes the address, using the full domain.
15928 These two options affect only the DNS lookup that takes place inside the router
15929 for the domain of the address that is being routed. They do not affect lookups
15930 such as that implied by
15934 that may happen while processing a router precondition before the router is
15935 entered. No widening ever takes place for these lookups.
15936 .ecindex IIDdnsrou1
15937 .ecindex IIDdnsrou2
15947 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15948 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15950 .chapter "The ipliteral router"
15951 .cindex "&(ipliteral)& router"
15952 .cindex "domain literal" "routing"
15953 .cindex "routers" "&(ipliteral)&"
15954 This router has no private options. Unless it is being used purely for
15955 verification (see &%verify_only%&) a transport is required to be defined by the
15956 generic &%transport%& option. The router accepts the address if its domain part
15957 takes the form of an RFC 2822 domain literal. For example, the &(ipliteral)&
15958 router handles the address
15962 by setting up delivery to the host with that IP address. IPv4 domain literals
15963 consist of an IPv4 address enclosed in square brackets. IPv6 domain literals
15964 are similar, but the address is preceded by &`ipv6:`&. For example:
15966 postmaster@[ipv6:fe80::a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678]
15968 Exim allows &`ipv4:`& before IPv4 addresses, for consistency, and on the
15969 grounds that sooner or later somebody will try it.
15971 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(ipliteral)& router"
15972 If the IP address matches something in &%ignore_target_hosts%&, the router
15973 declines. If an IP literal turns out to refer to the local host, the generic
15974 &%self%& option determines what happens.
15976 The RFCs require support for domain literals; however, their use is
15977 controversial in today's Internet. If you want to use this router, you must
15978 also set the main configuration option &%allow_domain_literals%&. Otherwise,
15979 Exim will not recognize the domain literal syntax in addresses.
15983 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15984 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15986 .chapter "The iplookup router"
15987 .cindex "&(iplookup)& router"
15988 .cindex "routers" "&(iplookup)&"
15989 The &(iplookup)& router was written to fulfil a specific requirement in
15990 Cambridge University (which in fact no longer exists). For this reason, it is
15991 not included in the binary of Exim by default. If you want to include it, you
15994 ROUTER_IPLOOKUP=yes
15996 in your &_Local/Makefile_& configuration file.
15998 The &(iplookup)& router routes an address by sending it over a TCP or UDP
15999 connection to one or more specific hosts. The host can then return the same or
16000 a different address &-- in effect rewriting the recipient address in the
16001 message's envelope. The new address is then passed on to subsequent routers. If
16002 this process fails, the address can be passed on to other routers, or delivery
16003 can be deferred. Since &(iplookup)& is just a rewriting router, a transport
16004 must not be specified for it.
16006 .cindex "options" "&(iplookup)& router"
16007 .option hosts iplookup string unset
16008 This option must be supplied. Its value is a colon-separated list of host
16009 names. The hosts are looked up using &[gethostbyname()]&
16010 (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available)
16011 and are tried in order until one responds to the query. If none respond, what
16012 happens is controlled by &%optional%&.
16015 .option optional iplookup boolean false
16016 If &%optional%& is true, if no response is obtained from any host, the address
16017 is passed to the next router, overriding &%no_more%&. If &%optional%& is false,
16018 delivery to the address is deferred.
16021 .option port iplookup integer 0
16022 .cindex "port" "&(iplookup)& router"
16023 This option must be supplied. It specifies the port number for the TCP or UDP
16027 .option protocol iplookup string udp
16028 This option can be set to &"udp"& or &"tcp"& to specify which of the two
16029 protocols is to be used.
16032 .option query iplookup string&!! "&`$local_part@$domain $local_part@$domain`&"
16033 This defines the content of the query that is sent to the remote hosts. The
16034 repetition serves as a way of checking that a response is to the correct query
16035 in the default case (see &%response_pattern%& below).
16038 .option reroute iplookup string&!! unset
16039 If this option is not set, the rerouted address is precisely the byte string
16040 returned by the remote host, up to the first white space, if any. If set, the
16041 string is expanded to form the rerouted address. It can include parts matched
16042 in the response by &%response_pattern%& by means of numeric variables such as
16043 &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. The variable &$0$& refers to the entire input string,
16044 whether or not a pattern is in use. In all cases, the rerouted address must end
16045 up in the form &'local_part@domain'&.
16048 .option response_pattern iplookup string unset
16049 This option can be set to a regular expression that is applied to the string
16050 returned from the remote host. If the pattern does not match the response, the
16051 router declines. If &%response_pattern%& is not set, no checking of the
16052 response is done, unless the query was defaulted, in which case there is a
16053 check that the text returned after the first white space is the original
16054 address. This checks that the answer that has been received is in response to
16055 the correct question. For example, if the response is just a new domain, the
16056 following could be used:
16058 response_pattern = ^([^@]+)$
16059 reroute = $local_part@$1
16062 .option timeout iplookup time 5s
16063 This specifies the amount of time to wait for a response from the remote
16064 machine. The same timeout is used for the &[connect()]& function for a TCP
16065 call. It does not apply to UDP.
16070 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16071 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16073 .chapter "The manualroute router"
16074 .scindex IIDmanrou1 "&(manualroute)& router"
16075 .scindex IIDmanrou2 "routers" "&(manualroute)&"
16076 .cindex "domain" "manually routing"
16077 The &(manualroute)& router is so-called because it provides a way of manually
16078 routing an address according to its domain. It is mainly used when you want to
16079 route addresses to remote hosts according to your own rules, bypassing the
16080 normal DNS routing that looks up MX records. However, &(manualroute)& can also
16081 route to local transports, a facility that may be useful if you want to save
16082 messages for dial-in hosts in local files.
16084 The &(manualroute)& router compares a list of domain patterns with the domain
16085 it is trying to route. If there is no match, the router declines. Each pattern
16086 has associated with it a list of hosts and some other optional data, which may
16087 include a transport. The combination of a pattern and its data is called a
16088 &"routing rule"&. For patterns that do not have an associated transport, the
16089 generic &%transport%& option must specify a transport, unless the router is
16090 being used purely for verification (see &%verify_only%&).
16093 In the case of verification, matching the domain pattern is sufficient for the
16094 router to accept the address. When actually routing an address for delivery,
16095 an address that matches a domain pattern is queued for the associated
16096 transport. If the transport is not a local one, a host list must be associated
16097 with the pattern; IP addresses are looked up for the hosts, and these are
16098 passed to the transport along with the mail address. For local transports, a
16099 host list is optional. If it is present, it is passed in &$host$& as a single
16102 The list of routing rules can be provided as an inline string in
16103 &%route_list%&, or the data can be obtained by looking up the domain in a file
16104 or database by setting &%route_data%&. Only one of these settings may appear in
16105 any one instance of &(manualroute)&. The format of routing rules is described
16106 below, following the list of private options.
16109 .section "Private options for manualroute" "SECTprioptman"
16111 .cindex "options" "&(manualroute)& router"
16112 The private options for the &(manualroute)& router are as follows:
16115 .option host_find_failed manualroute string freeze
16116 This option controls what happens when &(manualroute)& tries to find an IP
16117 address for a host, and the host does not exist. The option can be set to one
16126 The default assumes that this state is a serious configuration error. The
16127 difference between &"pass"& and &"decline"& is that the former forces the
16128 address to be passed to the next router (or the router defined by
16130 .cindex "&%more%& option"
16131 overriding &%no_more%&, whereas the latter passes the address to the next
16132 router only if &%more%& is true.
16134 This option applies only to a definite &"does not exist"& state; if a host
16135 lookup gets a temporary error, delivery is deferred unless the generic
16136 &%pass_on_timeout%& option is set.
16139 .option hosts_randomize manualroute boolean false
16140 .cindex "randomized host list"
16141 .cindex "host" "list of; randomized"
16142 If this option is set, the order of the items in a host list in a routing rule
16143 is randomized each time the list is used, unless an option in the routing rule
16144 overrides (see below). Randomizing the order of a host list can be used to do
16145 crude load sharing. However, if more than one mail address is routed by the
16146 same router to the same host list, the host lists are considered to be the same
16147 (even though they may be randomized into different orders) for the purpose of
16148 deciding whether to batch the deliveries into a single SMTP transaction.
16150 When &%hosts_randomize%& is true, a host list may be split
16151 into groups whose order is separately randomized. This makes it possible to
16152 set up MX-like behaviour. The boundaries between groups are indicated by an
16153 item that is just &`+`& in the host list. For example:
16155 route_list = * host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5
16157 The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two hosts is
16158 randomized for each use, but the first three always end up before the last two.
16159 If &%hosts_randomize%& is not set, a &`+`& item in the list is ignored. If a
16160 randomized host list is passed to an &(smtp)& transport that also has
16161 &%hosts_randomize set%&, the list is not re-randomized.
16164 .option route_data manualroute string&!! unset
16165 If this option is set, it must expand to yield the data part of a routing rule.
16166 Typically, the expansion string includes a lookup based on the domain. For
16169 route_data = ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/etc/routes}}
16171 If the expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string, the
16172 router declines. Other kinds of expansion failure cause delivery to be
16176 .option route_list manualroute " "string list" " semicolon-separated""
16177 This string is a list of routing rules, in the form defined below. Note that,
16178 unlike most string lists, the items are separated by semicolons. This is so
16179 that they may contain colon-separated host lists.
16182 .option same_domain_copy_routing manualroute boolean false
16183 .cindex "address" "copying routing"
16184 Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the &(manualroute)&
16185 router to the same list of hosts. However, this cannot be presumed, because the
16186 router options and preconditions may refer to the local part of the address. By
16187 default, therefore, Exim routes each address in a message independently. DNS
16188 servers run caches, so repeated DNS lookups are not normally expensive, and in
16189 any case, personal messages rarely have more than a few recipients.
16191 If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at the same
16192 domain, and you are using a &(manualroute)& router which is independent of the
16193 local part, you can set &%same_domain_copy_routing%& to bypass repeated DNS
16194 lookups for identical domains in one message. In this case, when
16195 &(manualroute)& routes an address to a remote transport, any other unrouted
16196 addresses in the message that have the same domain are automatically given the
16197 same routing without processing them independently. However, this is only done
16198 if &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& are unset.
16203 .section "Routing rules in route_list"
16204 The value of &%route_list%& is a string consisting of a sequence of routing
16205 rules, separated by semicolons. If a semicolon is needed in a rule, it can be
16206 entered as two semicolons. Alternatively, the list separator can be changed as
16207 described (for colon-separated lists) in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&.
16208 Empty rules are ignored. The format of each rule is
16210 <&'domain pattern'&> <&'list of hosts'&> <&'options'&>
16212 The following example contains two rules, each with a simple domain pattern and
16216 dict.ref.example mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example ; \
16217 thes.ref.example mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example
16219 The three parts of a rule are separated by white space. The pattern and the
16220 list of hosts can be enclosed in quotes if necessary, and if they are, the
16221 usual quoting rules apply. Each rule in a &%route_list%& must start with a
16222 single domain pattern, which is the only mandatory item in the rule. The
16223 pattern is in the same format as one item in a domain list (see section
16224 &<<SECTdomainlist>>&),
16225 except that it may not be the name of an interpolated file.
16226 That is, it may be wildcarded, or a regular expression, or a file or database
16227 lookup (with semicolons doubled, because of the use of semicolon as a separator
16228 in a &%route_list%&).
16230 The rules in &%route_list%& are searched in order until one of the patterns
16231 matches the domain that is being routed. The list of hosts and then options are
16232 then used as described below. If there is no match, the router declines. When
16233 &%route_list%& is set, &%route_data%& must not be set.
16237 .section "Routing rules in route_data"
16238 The use of &%route_list%& is convenient when there are only a small number of
16239 routing rules. For larger numbers, it is easier to use a file or database to
16240 hold the routing information, and use the &%route_data%& option instead.
16241 The value of &%route_data%& is a list of hosts, followed by (optional) options.
16242 Most commonly, &%route_data%& is set as a string that contains an
16243 expansion lookup. For example, suppose we place two routing rules in a file
16246 dict.ref.example: mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example
16247 thes.ref.example: mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example
16249 This data can be accessed by setting
16251 route_data = ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/the/file/name}}
16253 Failure of the lookup results in an empty string, causing the router to
16254 decline. However, you do not have to use a lookup in &%route_data%&. The only
16255 requirement is that the result of expanding the string is a list of hosts,
16256 possibly followed by options, separated by white space. The list of hosts must
16257 be enclosed in quotes if it contains white space.
16262 .section "Format of the list of hosts"
16263 A list of hosts, whether obtained via &%route_data%& or &%route_list%&, is
16264 always separately expanded before use. If the expansion fails, the router
16265 declines. The result of the expansion must be a colon-separated list of names
16266 and/or IP addresses, optionally also including ports. The format of each item
16267 in the list is described in the next section. The list separator can be changed
16268 as described in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&.
16270 If the list of hosts was obtained from a &%route_list%& item, the following
16271 variables are set during its expansion:
16274 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(manualroute)& router"
16275 If the domain was matched against a regular expression, the numeric variables
16276 &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. may be set. For example:
16278 route_list = ^domain(\d+) host-$1.text.example
16281 &$0$& is always set to the entire domain.
16283 &$1$& is also set when partial matching is done in a file lookup.
16286 .cindex "&$value$&"
16287 If the pattern that matched the domain was a lookup item, the data that was
16288 looked up is available in the expansion variable &$value$&. For example:
16290 route_list = lsearch;;/some/file.routes $value
16294 Note the doubling of the semicolon in the pattern that is necessary because
16295 semicolon is the default route list separator.
16299 .section "Format of one host item" "SECTformatonehostitem"
16300 Each item in the list of hosts is either a host name or an IP address,
16301 optionally with an attached port number. When no port is given, an IP address
16302 is not enclosed in brackets. When a port is specified, it overrides the port
16303 specification on the transport. The port is separated from the name or address
16304 by a colon. This leads to some complications:
16307 Because colon is the default separator for the list of hosts, either
16308 the colon that specifies a port must be doubled, or the list separator must
16309 be changed. The following two examples have the same effect:
16311 route_list = * "host1.tld::1225 : host2.tld::1226"
16312 route_list = * "<+ host1.tld:1225 + host2.tld:1226"
16315 When IPv6 addresses are involved, it gets worse, because they contain
16316 colons of their own. To make this case easier, it is permitted to
16317 enclose an IP address (either v4 or v6) in square brackets if a port
16318 number follows. For example:
16320 route_list = * "</ [10.1.1.1]:1225 / [::1]:1226"
16324 .section "How the list of hosts is used" "SECThostshowused"
16325 When an address is routed to an &(smtp)& transport by &(manualroute)&, each of
16326 the hosts is tried, in the order specified, when carrying out the SMTP
16327 delivery. However, the order can be changed by setting the &%hosts_randomize%&
16328 option, either on the router (see section &<<SECTprioptman>>& above), or on the
16331 Hosts may be listed by name or by IP address. An unadorned name in the list of
16332 hosts is interpreted as a host name. A name that is followed by &`/MX`& is
16333 interpreted as an indirection to a sublist of hosts obtained by looking up MX
16334 records in the DNS. For example:
16336 route_list = * x.y.z:p.q.r/MX:e.f.g
16338 If this feature is used with a port specifier, the port must come last. For
16341 route_list = * dom1.tld/mx::1225
16343 If the &%hosts_randomize%& option is set, the order of the items in the list is
16344 randomized before any lookups are done. Exim then scans the list; for any name
16345 that is not followed by &`/MX`& it looks up an IP address. If this turns out to
16346 be an interface on the local host and the item is not the first in the list,
16347 Exim discards it and any subsequent items. If it is the first item, what
16348 happens is controlled by the
16349 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(manualroute)& router"
16350 &%self%& option of the router.
16352 A name on the list that is followed by &`/MX`& is replaced with the list of
16353 hosts obtained by looking up MX records for the name. This is always a DNS
16354 lookup; the &%bydns%& and &%byname%& options (see section &<<SECThowoptused>>&
16355 below) are not relevant here. The order of these hosts is determined by the
16356 preference values in the MX records, according to the usual rules. Because
16357 randomizing happens before the MX lookup, it does not affect the order that is
16358 defined by MX preferences.
16360 If the local host is present in the sublist obtained from MX records, but is
16361 not the most preferred host in that list, it and any equally or less
16362 preferred hosts are removed before the sublist is inserted into the main list.
16364 If the local host is the most preferred host in the MX list, what happens
16365 depends on where in the original list of hosts the &`/MX`& item appears. If it
16366 is not the first item (that is, there are previous hosts in the main list),
16367 Exim discards this name and any subsequent items in the main list.
16369 If the MX item is first in the list of hosts, and the local host is the
16370 most preferred host, what happens is controlled by the &%self%& option of the
16373 DNS failures when lookup up the MX records are treated in the same way as DNS
16374 failures when looking up IP addresses: &%pass_on_timeout%& and
16375 &%host_find_failed%& are used when relevant.
16377 The generic &%ignore_target_hosts%& option applies to all hosts in the list,
16378 whether obtained from an MX lookup or not.
16382 .section "How the options are used" "SECThowoptused"
16383 The options are a sequence of words; in practice no more than three are ever
16384 present. One of the words can be the name of a transport; this overrides the
16385 &%transport%& option on the router for this particular routing rule only. The
16386 other words (if present) control randomization of the list of hosts on a
16387 per-rule basis, and how the IP addresses of the hosts are to be found when
16388 routing to a remote transport. These options are as follows:
16391 &%randomize%&: randomize the order of the hosts in this list, overriding the
16392 setting of &%hosts_randomize%& for this routing rule only.
16394 &%no_randomize%&: do not randomize the order of the hosts in this list,
16395 overriding the setting of &%hosts_randomize%& for this routing rule only.
16397 &%byname%&: use &[getipnodebyname()]& (&[gethostbyname()]& on older systems) to
16398 find IP addresses. This function may ultimately cause a DNS lookup, but it may
16399 also look in &_/etc/hosts_& or other sources of information.
16401 &%bydns%&: look up address records for the hosts directly in the DNS; fail if
16402 no address records are found. If there is a temporary DNS error (such as a
16403 timeout), delivery is deferred.
16408 route_list = domain1 host1:host2:host3 randomize bydns;\
16409 domain2 host4:host5
16411 If neither &%byname%& nor &%bydns%& is given, Exim behaves as follows: First, a
16412 DNS lookup is done. If this yields anything other than HOST_NOT_FOUND, that
16413 result is used. Otherwise, Exim goes on to try a call to &[getipnodebyname()]&
16414 or &[gethostbyname()]&, and the result of the lookup is the result of that
16417 &*Warning*&: It has been discovered that on some systems, if a DNS lookup
16418 called via &[getipnodebyname()]& times out, HOST_NOT_FOUND is returned
16419 instead of TRY_AGAIN. That is why the default action is to try a DNS
16420 lookup first. Only if that gives a definite &"no such host"& is the local
16425 If no IP address for a host can be found, what happens is controlled by the
16426 &%host_find_failed%& option.
16429 When an address is routed to a local transport, IP addresses are not looked up.
16430 The host list is passed to the transport in the &$host$& variable.
16434 .section "Manualroute examples"
16435 In some of the examples that follow, the presence of the &%remote_smtp%&
16436 transport, as defined in the default configuration file, is assumed:
16439 .cindex "smart host" "example router"
16440 The &(manualroute)& router can be used to forward all external mail to a
16441 &'smart host'&. If you have set up, in the main part of the configuration, a
16442 named domain list that contains your local domains, for example:
16444 domainlist local_domains = my.domain.example
16446 You can arrange for all other domains to be routed to a smart host by making
16447 your first router something like this:
16450 driver = manualroute
16451 domains = !+local_domains
16452 transport = remote_smtp
16453 route_list = * smarthost.ref.example
16455 This causes all non-local addresses to be sent to the single host
16456 &'smarthost.ref.example'&. If a colon-separated list of smart hosts is given,
16457 they are tried in order
16458 (but you can use &%hosts_randomize%& to vary the order each time).
16459 Another way of configuring the same thing is this:
16462 driver = manualroute
16463 transport = remote_smtp
16464 route_list = !+local_domains smarthost.ref.example
16466 There is no difference in behaviour between these two routers as they stand.
16467 However, they behave differently if &%no_more%& is added to them. In the first
16468 example, the router is skipped if the domain does not match the &%domains%&
16469 precondition; the following router is always tried. If the router runs, it
16470 always matches the domain and so can never decline. Therefore, &%no_more%&
16471 would have no effect. In the second case, the router is never skipped; it
16472 always runs. However, if it doesn't match the domain, it declines. In this case
16473 &%no_more%& would prevent subsequent routers from running.
16476 .cindex "mail hub example"
16477 A &'mail hub'& is a host which receives mail for a number of domains via MX
16478 records in the DNS and delivers it via its own private routing mechanism. Often
16479 the final destinations are behind a firewall, with the mail hub being the one
16480 machine that can connect to machines both inside and outside the firewall. The
16481 &(manualroute)& router is usually used on a mail hub to route incoming messages
16482 to the correct hosts. For a small number of domains, the routing can be inline,
16483 using the &%route_list%& option, but for a larger number a file or database
16484 lookup is easier to manage.
16486 If the domain names are in fact the names of the machines to which the mail is
16487 to be sent by the mail hub, the configuration can be quite simple. For
16491 driver = manualroute
16492 transport = remote_smtp
16493 route_list = *.rhodes.tvs.example $domain
16495 This configuration routes domains that match &`*.rhodes.tvs.example`& to hosts
16496 whose names are the same as the mail domains. A similar approach can be taken
16497 if the host name can be obtained from the domain name by a string manipulation
16498 that the expansion facilities can handle. Otherwise, a lookup based on the
16499 domain can be used to find the host:
16502 driver = manualroute
16503 transport = remote_smtp
16504 route_data = ${lookup {$domain} cdb {/internal/host/routes}}
16506 The result of the lookup must be the name or IP address of the host (or
16507 hosts) to which the address is to be routed. If the lookup fails, the route
16508 data is empty, causing the router to decline. The address then passes to the
16512 .cindex "batched SMTP output example"
16513 .cindex "SMTP" "batched outgoing; example"
16514 You can use &(manualroute)& to deliver messages to pipes or files in batched
16515 SMTP format for onward transportation by some other means. This is one way of
16516 storing mail for a dial-up host when it is not connected. The route list entry
16517 can be as simple as a single domain name in a configuration like this:
16520 driver = manualroute
16521 transport = batchsmtp_appendfile
16522 route_list = saved.domain.example
16524 though often a pattern is used to pick up more than one domain. If there are
16525 several domains or groups of domains with different transport requirements,
16526 different transports can be listed in the routing information:
16529 driver = manualroute
16531 *.saved.domain1.example $domain batch_appendfile; \
16532 *.saved.domain2.example \
16533 ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/domain2/hosts}{$value}fail} \
16536 .cindex "&$domain$&"
16538 The first of these just passes the domain in the &$host$& variable, which
16539 doesn't achieve much (since it is also in &$domain$&), but the second does a
16540 file lookup to find a value to pass, causing the router to decline to handle
16541 the address if the lookup fails.
16544 .cindex "UUCP" "example of router for"
16545 Routing mail directly to UUCP software is a specific case of the use of
16546 &(manualroute)& in a gateway to another mail environment. This is an example of
16547 one way it can be done:
16553 command = /usr/local/bin/uux -r - \
16554 ${substr_-5:$host}!rmail ${local_part}
16555 return_fail_output = true
16560 driver = manualroute
16562 ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/usr/local/exim/uucphosts}}
16564 The file &_/usr/local/exim/uucphosts_& contains entries like
16566 darksite.ethereal.example: darksite.UUCP
16568 It can be set up more simply without adding and removing &".UUCP"& but this way
16569 makes clear the distinction between the domain name
16570 &'darksite.ethereal.example'& and the UUCP host name &'darksite'&.
16572 .ecindex IIDmanrou1
16573 .ecindex IIDmanrou2
16582 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16583 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16585 .chapter "The queryprogram router" "CHAPdriverlast"
16586 .scindex IIDquerou1 "&(queryprogram)& router"
16587 .scindex IIDquerou2 "routers" "&(queryprogram)&"
16588 .cindex "routing" "by external program"
16589 The &(queryprogram)& router routes an address by running an external command
16590 and acting on its output. This is an expensive way to route, and is intended
16591 mainly for use in lightly-loaded systems, or for performing experiments.
16592 However, if it is possible to use the precondition options (&%domains%&,
16593 &%local_parts%&, etc) to skip this router for most addresses, it could sensibly
16594 be used in special cases, even on a busy host. There are the following private
16596 .cindex "options" "&(queryprogram)& router"
16598 .option command queryprogram string&!! unset
16599 This option must be set. It specifies the command that is to be run. The
16600 command is split up into a command name and arguments, and then each is
16601 expanded separately (exactly as for a &(pipe)& transport, described in chapter
16602 &<<CHAPpipetransport>>&).
16605 .option command_group queryprogram string unset
16606 .cindex "gid (group id)" "in &(queryprogram)& router"
16607 This option specifies a gid to be set when running the command while routing an
16608 address for deliver. It must be set if &%command_user%& specifies a numerical
16609 uid. If it begins with a digit, it is interpreted as the numerical value of the
16610 gid. Otherwise it is looked up using &[getgrnam()]&.
16613 .option command_user queryprogram string unset
16614 .cindex "uid (user id)" "for &(queryprogram)&"
16615 This option must be set. It specifies the uid which is set when running the
16616 command while routing an address for delivery. If the value begins with a digit,
16617 it is interpreted as the numerical value of the uid. Otherwise, it is looked up
16618 using &[getpwnam()]& to obtain a value for the uid and, if &%command_group%& is
16619 not set, a value for the gid also.
16621 &*Warning:*& Changing uid and gid is possible only when Exim is running as
16622 root, which it does during a normal delivery in a conventional configuration.
16623 However, when an address is being verified during message reception, Exim is
16624 usually running as the Exim user, not as root. If the &(queryprogram)& router
16625 is called from a non-root process, Exim cannot change uid or gid before running
16626 the command. In this circumstance the command runs under the current uid and
16630 .option current_directory queryprogram string /
16631 This option specifies an absolute path which is made the current directory
16632 before running the command.
16635 .option timeout queryprogram time 1h
16636 If the command does not complete within the timeout period, its process group
16637 is killed and the message is frozen. A value of zero time specifies no
16641 The standard output of the command is connected to a pipe, which is read when
16642 the command terminates. It should consist of a single line of output,
16643 containing up to five fields, separated by white space. The maximum length of
16644 the line is 1023 characters. Longer lines are silently truncated. The first
16645 field is one of the following words (case-insensitive):
16648 &'Accept'&: routing succeeded; the remaining fields specify what to do (see
16651 &'Decline'&: the router declines; pass the address to the next router, unless
16652 &%no_more%& is set.
16654 &'Fail'&: routing failed; do not pass the address to any more routers. Any
16655 subsequent text on the line is an error message. If the router is run as part
16656 of address verification during an incoming SMTP message, the message is
16657 included in the SMTP response.
16659 &'Defer'&: routing could not be completed at this time; try again later. Any
16660 subsequent text on the line is an error message which is logged. It is not
16661 included in any SMTP response.
16663 &'Freeze'&: the same as &'defer'&, except that the message is frozen.
16665 &'Pass'&: pass the address to the next router (or the router specified by
16666 &%pass_router%&), overriding &%no_more%&.
16668 &'Redirect'&: the message is redirected. The remainder of the line is a list of
16669 new addresses, which are routed independently, starting with the first router,
16670 or the router specified by &%redirect_router%&, if set.
16673 When the first word is &'accept'&, the remainder of the line consists of a
16674 number of keyed data values, as follows (split into two lines here, to fit on
16677 ACCEPT TRANSPORT=<transport> HOSTS=<list of hosts>
16678 LOOKUP=byname|bydns DATA=<text>
16680 The data items can be given in any order, and all are optional. If no transport
16681 is included, the transport specified by the generic &%transport%& option is
16682 used. The list of hosts and the lookup type are needed only if the transport is
16683 an &(smtp)& transport that does not itself supply a list of hosts.
16685 The format of the list of hosts is the same as for the &(manualroute)& router.
16686 As well as host names and IP addresses with optional port numbers, as described
16687 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&, it may contain names followed by
16688 &`/MX`& to specify sublists of hosts that are obtained by looking up MX records
16689 (see section &<<SECThostshowused>>&).
16691 If the lookup type is not specified, Exim behaves as follows when trying to
16692 find an IP address for each host: First, a DNS lookup is done. If this yields
16693 anything other than HOST_NOT_FOUND, that result is used. Otherwise, Exim
16694 goes on to try a call to &[getipnodebyname()]& or &[gethostbyname()]&, and the
16695 result of the lookup is the result of that call.
16697 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
16698 If the DATA field is set, its value is placed in the &$address_data$&
16699 variable. For example, this return line
16701 accept hosts=x1.y.example:x2.y.example data="rule1"
16703 routes the address to the default transport, passing a list of two hosts. When
16704 the transport runs, the string &"rule1"& is in &$address_data$&.
16705 .ecindex IIDquerou1
16706 .ecindex IIDquerou2
16711 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16712 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16714 .chapter "The redirect router" "CHAPredirect"
16715 .scindex IIDredrou1 "&(redirect)& router"
16716 .scindex IIDredrou2 "routers" "&(redirect)&"
16717 .cindex "alias file" "in a &(redirect)& router"
16718 .cindex "address redirection" "&(redirect)& router"
16719 The &(redirect)& router handles several kinds of address redirection. Its most
16720 common uses are for resolving local part aliases from a central alias file
16721 (usually called &_/etc/aliases_&) and for handling users' personal &_.forward_&
16722 files, but it has many other potential uses. The incoming address can be
16723 redirected in several different ways:
16726 It can be replaced by one or more new addresses which are themselves routed
16729 It can be routed to be delivered to a given file or directory.
16731 It can be routed to be delivered to a specified pipe command.
16733 It can cause an automatic reply to be generated.
16735 It can be forced to fail, with a custom error message.
16737 It can be temporarily deferred.
16739 It can be discarded.
16742 The generic &%transport%& option must not be set for &(redirect)& routers.
16743 However, there are some private options which define transports for delivery to
16744 files and pipes, and for generating autoreplies. See the &%file_transport%&,
16745 &%pipe_transport%& and &%reply_transport%& descriptions below.
16749 .section "Redirection data"
16750 The router operates by interpreting a text string which it obtains either by
16751 expanding the contents of the &%data%& option, or by reading the entire
16752 contents of a file whose name is given in the &%file%& option. These two
16753 options are mutually exclusive. The first is commonly used for handling system
16754 aliases, in a configuration like this:
16758 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}
16760 If the lookup fails, the expanded string in this example is empty. When the
16761 expansion of &%data%& results in an empty string, the router declines. A forced
16762 expansion failure also causes the router to decline; other expansion failures
16763 cause delivery to be deferred.
16765 A configuration using &%file%& is commonly used for handling users'
16766 &_.forward_& files, like this:
16771 file = $home/.forward
16774 If the file does not exist, or causes no action to be taken (for example, it is
16775 empty or consists only of comments), the router declines. &*Warning*&: This
16776 is not the case when the file contains syntactically valid items that happen to
16777 yield empty addresses, for example, items containing only RFC 2822 address
16782 .section "Forward files and address verification"
16783 .cindex "address redirection" "while verifying"
16784 It is usual to set &%no_verify%& on &(redirect)& routers which handle users'
16785 &_.forward_& files, as in the example above. There are two reasons for this:
16788 When Exim is receiving an incoming SMTP message from a remote host, it is
16789 running under the Exim uid, not as root.
16790 No additional groups are set up, even if the Exim uid is a member of other
16791 groups (that is, the &[initgroups()]& function is not run).
16792 Exim is unable to change uid to read the file as the user, and it may not be
16793 able to read it as the Exim user. So in practice the router may not be able to
16796 However, even when the router can operate, the existence of a &_.forward_& file
16797 is unimportant when verifying an address. What should be checked is whether the
16798 local part is a valid user name or not. Cutting out the redirection processing
16799 saves some resources.
16807 .section "Interpreting redirection data"
16808 .cindex "Sieve filter" "specifying in redirection data"
16809 .cindex "filter" "specifying in redirection data"
16810 The contents of the data string, whether obtained from &%data%& or &%file%&,
16811 can be interpreted in two different ways:
16814 If the &%allow_filter%& option is set true, and the data begins with the text
16815 &"#Exim filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"&, it is interpreted as a list of
16816 &'filtering'& instructions in the form of an Exim or Sieve filter file,
16817 respectively. Details of the syntax and semantics of filter files are described
16818 in a separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&; this
16819 document is intended for use by end users.
16821 Otherwise, the data must be a comma-separated list of redirection items, as
16822 described in the next section.
16825 When a message is redirected to a file (a &"mail folder"&), the file name given
16826 in a non-filter redirection list must always be an absolute path. A filter may
16827 generate a relative path &-- how this is handled depends on the transport's
16828 configuration. See section &<<SECTfildiropt>>& for a discussion of this issue
16829 for the &(appendfile)& transport.
16833 .section "Items in a non-filter redirection list" "SECTitenonfilred"
16834 .cindex "address redirection" "non-filter list items"
16835 When the redirection data is not an Exim or Sieve filter, for example, if it
16836 comes from a conventional alias or forward file, it consists of a list of
16837 addresses, file names, pipe commands, or certain special items (see section
16838 &<<SECTspecitredli>>& below). The special items can be individually enabled or
16839 disabled by means of options whose names begin with &%allow_%& or &%forbid_%&,
16840 depending on their default values. The items in the list are separated by
16841 commas or newlines.
16842 If a comma is required in an item, the entire item must be enclosed in double
16845 Lines starting with a # character are comments, and are ignored, and # may
16846 also appear following a comma, in which case everything between the # and the
16847 next newline character is ignored.
16849 If an item is entirely enclosed in double quotes, these are removed. Otherwise
16850 double quotes are retained because some forms of mail address require their use
16851 (but never to enclose the entire address). In the following description,
16852 &"item"& refers to what remains after any surrounding double quotes have been
16855 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
16856 &*Warning*&: If you use an Exim expansion to construct a redirection address,
16857 and the expansion contains a reference to &$local_part$&, you should make use
16858 of the &%quote_local_part%& expansion operator, in case the local part contains
16859 special characters. For example, to redirect all mail for the domain
16860 &'obsolete.example'&, retaining the existing local part, you could use this
16863 data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@newdomain.example
16867 .section "Redirecting to a local mailbox" "SECTredlocmai"
16868 .cindex "routing" "loops in"
16869 .cindex "loop while routing" "avoidance of"
16870 .cindex "address redirection" "to local mailbox"
16871 A redirection item may safely be the same as the address currently under
16872 consideration. This does not cause a routing loop, because a router is
16873 automatically skipped if any ancestor of the address that is being processed
16874 is the same as the current address and was processed by the current router.
16875 Such an address is therefore passed to the following routers, so it is handled
16876 as if there were no redirection. When making this loop-avoidance test, the
16877 complete local part, including any prefix or suffix, is used.
16879 .cindex "address redirection" "local part without domain"
16880 Specifying the same local part without a domain is a common usage in personal
16881 filter files when the user wants to have messages delivered to the local
16882 mailbox and also forwarded elsewhere. For example, the user whose login is
16883 &'cleo'& might have a &_.forward_& file containing this:
16885 cleo, cleopatra@egypt.example
16887 .cindex "backslash in alias file"
16888 .cindex "alias file" "backslash in"
16889 For compatibility with other MTAs, such unqualified local parts may be
16890 preceeded by &"\"&, but this is not a requirement for loop prevention. However,
16891 it does make a difference if more than one domain is being handled
16894 If an item begins with &"\"& and the rest of the item parses as a valid RFC
16895 2822 address that does not include a domain, the item is qualified using the
16896 domain of the incoming address. In the absence of a leading &"\"&, unqualified
16897 addresses are qualified using the value in &%qualify_recipient%&, but you can
16898 force the incoming domain to be used by setting &%qualify_preserve_domain%&.
16900 Care must be taken if there are alias names for local users.
16901 Consider an MTA handling a single local domain where the system alias file
16906 Now suppose that Sam (whose login id is &'spqr'&) wants to save copies of
16907 messages in the local mailbox, and also forward copies elsewhere. He creates
16910 Sam.Reman, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example
16912 With these settings, an incoming message addressed to &'Sam.Reman'& fails. The
16913 &(redirect)& router for system aliases does not process &'Sam.Reman'& the
16914 second time round, because it has previously routed it,
16915 and the following routers presumably cannot handle the alias. The forward file
16916 should really contain
16918 spqr, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example
16920 but because this is such a common error, the &%check_ancestor%& option (see
16921 below) exists to provide a way to get round it. This is normally set on a
16922 &(redirect)& router that is handling users' &_.forward_& files.
16926 .section "Special items in redirection lists" "SECTspecitredli"
16927 In addition to addresses, the following types of item may appear in redirection
16928 lists (that is, in non-filter redirection data):
16931 .cindex "pipe" "in redirection list"
16932 .cindex "address redirection" "to pipe"
16933 An item is treated as a pipe command if it begins with &"|"& and does not parse
16934 as a valid RFC 2822 address that includes a domain. A transport for running the
16935 command must be specified by the &%pipe_transport%& option.
16936 Normally, either the router or the transport specifies a user and a group under
16937 which to run the delivery. The default is to use the Exim user and group.
16939 Single or double quotes can be used for enclosing the individual arguments of
16940 the pipe command; no interpretation of escapes is done for single quotes. If
16941 the command contains a comma character, it is necessary to put the whole item
16942 in double quotes, for example:
16944 "|/some/command ready,steady,go"
16946 since items in redirection lists are terminated by commas. Do not, however,
16947 quote just the command. An item such as
16949 |"/some/command ready,steady,go"
16951 is interpreted as a pipe with a rather strange command name, and no arguments.
16954 .cindex "file" "in redirection list"
16955 .cindex "address redirection" "to file"
16956 An item is interpreted as a path name if it begins with &"/"& and does not
16957 parse as a valid RFC 2822 address that includes a domain. For example,
16959 /home/world/minbari
16961 is treated as a file name, but
16963 /s=molari/o=babylon/@x400gate.way
16965 is treated as an address. For a file name, a transport must be specified using
16966 the &%file_transport%& option. However, if the generated path name ends with a
16967 forward slash character, it is interpreted as a directory name rather than a
16968 file name, and &%directory_transport%& is used instead.
16970 Normally, either the router or the transport specifies a user and a group under
16971 which to run the delivery. The default is to use the Exim user and group.
16973 .cindex "&_/dev/null_&"
16974 However, if a redirection item is the path &_/dev/null_&, delivery to it is
16975 bypassed at a high level, and the log entry shows &"**bypassed**"&
16976 instead of a transport name. In this case the user and group are not used.
16979 .cindex "included address list"
16980 .cindex "address redirection" "included external list"
16981 If an item is of the form
16983 :include:<path name>
16985 a list of further items is taken from the given file and included at that
16986 point. &*Note*&: Such a file can not be a filter file; it is just an
16987 out-of-line addition to the list. The items in the included list are separated
16988 by commas or newlines and are not subject to expansion. If this is the first
16989 item in an alias list in an &(lsearch)& file, a colon must be used to terminate
16990 the alias name. This example is incorrect:
16992 list1 :include:/opt/lists/list1
16994 It must be given as
16996 list1: :include:/opt/lists/list1
16999 .cindex "address redirection" "to black hole"
17000 Sometimes you want to throw away mail to a particular local part. Making the
17001 &%data%& option expand to an empty string does not work, because that causes
17002 the router to decline. Instead, the alias item
17003 .cindex "black hole"
17004 .cindex "abandoning mail"
17008 can be used. It does what its name implies. No delivery is done, and no error
17009 message is generated. This has the same effect as specifing &_/dev/null_&, but
17010 can be independently disabled.
17012 &*Warning*&: If &`:blackhole:`& appears anywhere in a redirection list, no
17013 delivery is done for the original local part, even if other redirection items
17014 are present. If you are generating a multi-item list (for example, by reading a
17015 database) and need the ability to provide a no-op item, you must use
17019 .cindex "delivery" "forcing failure"
17020 .cindex "delivery" "forcing deferral"
17021 .cindex "failing delivery" "forcing"
17022 .cindex "deferred delivery" "forcing"
17023 .cindex "customizing" "failure message"
17024 An attempt to deliver a particular address can be deferred or forced to fail by
17025 redirection items of the form
17030 respectively. When a redirection list contains such an item, it applies to the
17031 entire redirection; any other items in the list are ignored (&':blackhole:'& is
17032 different). Any text following &':fail:'& or &':defer:'& is placed in the error
17033 text associated with the failure. For example, an alias file might contain:
17035 X.Employee: :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address
17037 In the case of an address that is being verified from an ACL or as the subject
17039 .cindex "VRFY error text" "display of"
17040 VRFY command, the text is included in the SMTP error response by
17042 .cindex "EXPN error text" "display of"
17043 The text is not included in the response to an EXPN command.
17045 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
17046 In an ACL, an explicitly provided message overrides the default, but the
17047 default message is available in the variable &$acl_verify_message$& and can
17048 therefore be included in a custom message if this is desired. Exim sends a 451
17049 SMTP code for a &':defer:'&, and 550 for &':fail:'&. In non-SMTP cases the text
17050 is included in the error message that Exim generates.
17052 Normally the error text is the rest of the redirection list &-- a comma does
17053 not terminate it &-- but a newline does act as a terminator. Newlines are not
17054 normally present in alias expansions. In &(lsearch)& lookups they are removed
17055 as part of the continuation process, but they may exist in other kinds of
17056 lookup and in &':include:'& files.
17058 During routing for message delivery (as opposed to verification), a redirection
17059 containing &':fail:'& causes an immediate failure of the incoming address,
17060 whereas &':defer:'& causes the message to remain on the queue so that a
17061 subsequent delivery attempt can happen at a later time. If an address is
17062 deferred for too long, it will ultimately fail, because the normal retry
17066 .cindex "alias file" "exception to default"
17067 Sometimes it is useful to use a single-key search type with a default (see
17068 chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&) to look up aliases. However, there may be a need
17069 for exceptions to the default. These can be handled by aliasing them to
17073 This differs from &':fail:'& in that it causes the &(redirect)& router to
17074 decline, whereas &':fail:'& forces routing to fail. A lookup which results in
17075 an empty redirection list has the same effect.
17079 .section "Duplicate addresses"
17080 .cindex "duplicate addresses"
17081 .cindex "address duplicate" "discarding"
17082 .cindex "pipe" "duplicated"
17083 Exim removes duplicate addresses from the list to which it is delivering, so as
17084 to deliver just one copy to each address. This does not apply to deliveries
17085 routed to pipes by different immediate parent addresses, but an indirect
17086 aliasing scheme of the type
17088 pipe: |/some/command $local_part
17092 does not work with a message that is addressed to both local parts, because
17093 when the second is aliased to the intermediate local part &"pipe"& it gets
17094 discarded as being the same as a previously handled address. However, a scheme
17097 localpart1: |/some/command $local_part
17098 localpart2: |/some/command $local_part
17100 does result in two different pipe deliveries, because the immediate parents of
17101 the pipes are distinct.
17105 .section "Repeated redirection expansion"
17106 .cindex "repeated redirection expansion"
17107 .cindex "address redirection" "repeated for each delivery attempt"
17108 When a message cannot be delivered to all of its recipients immediately,
17109 leading to two or more delivery attempts, redirection expansion is carried out
17110 afresh each time for those addresses whose children were not all previously
17111 delivered. If redirection is being used as a mailing list, this can lead to new
17112 members of the list receiving copies of old messages. The &%one_time%& option
17113 can be used to avoid this.
17116 .section "Errors in redirection lists"
17117 .cindex "address redirection" "errors"
17118 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set, a malformed address that causes a parsing
17119 error is skipped, and an entry is written to the main log. This may be useful
17120 for mailing lists that are automatically managed. Otherwise, if an error is
17121 detected while generating the list of new addresses, the original address is
17122 deferred. See also &%syntax_errors_to%&.
17126 .section "Private options for the redirect router"
17128 .cindex "options" "&(redirect)& router"
17129 The private options for the &(redirect)& router are as follows:
17132 .option allow_defer redirect boolean false
17133 Setting this option allows the use of &':defer:'& in non-filter redirection
17134 data, or the &%defer%& command in an Exim filter file.
17137 .option allow_fail redirect boolean false
17138 .cindex "failing delivery" "from filter"
17139 If this option is true, the &':fail:'& item can be used in a redirection list,
17140 and the &%fail%& command may be used in an Exim filter file.
17143 .option allow_filter redirect boolean false
17144 .cindex "filter" "enabling use of"
17145 .cindex "Sieve filter" "enabling use of"
17146 Setting this option allows Exim to interpret redirection data that starts with
17147 &"#Exim filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"& as a set of filtering instructions. There
17148 are some features of Exim filter files that some administrators may wish to
17149 lock out; see the &%forbid_filter_%&&'xxx'& options below.
17151 It is also possible to lock out Exim filters or Sieve filters while allowing
17152 the other type; see &%forbid_exim_filter%& and &%forbid_sieve_filter%&.
17155 The filter is run using the uid and gid set by the generic &%user%& and
17156 &%group%& options. These take their defaults from the password data if
17157 &%check_local_user%& is set, so in the normal case of users' personal filter
17158 files, the filter is run as the relevant user. When &%allow_filter%& is set
17159 true, Exim insists that either &%check_local_user%& or &%user%& is set.
17163 .option allow_freeze redirect boolean false
17164 .cindex "freezing messages" "allowing in filter"
17165 Setting this option allows the use of the &%freeze%& command in an Exim filter.
17166 This command is more normally encountered in system filters, and is disabled by
17167 default for redirection filters because it isn't something you usually want to
17168 let ordinary users do.
17172 .option check_ancestor redirect boolean false
17173 This option is concerned with handling generated addresses that are the same
17174 as some address in the list of redirection ancestors of the current address.
17175 Although it is turned off by default in the code, it is set in the default
17176 configuration file for handling users' &_.forward_& files. It is recommended
17177 for this use of the &(redirect)& router.
17179 When &%check_ancestor%& is set, if a generated address (including the domain)
17180 is the same as any ancestor of the current address, it is replaced by a copy of
17181 the current address. This helps in the case where local part A is aliased to B,
17182 and B has a &_.forward_& file pointing back to A. For example, within a single
17183 domain, the local part &"Joe.Bloggs"& is aliased to &"jb"& and
17184 &_&~jb/.forward_& contains:
17186 \Joe.Bloggs, <other item(s)>
17188 Without the &%check_ancestor%& setting, either local part (&"jb"& or
17189 &"joe.bloggs"&) gets processed once by each router and so ends up as it was
17190 originally. If &"jb"& is the real mailbox name, mail to &"jb"& gets delivered
17191 (having been turned into &"joe.bloggs"& by the &_.forward_& file and back to
17192 &"jb"& by the alias), but mail to &"joe.bloggs"& fails. Setting
17193 &%check_ancestor%& on the &(redirect)& router that handles the &_.forward_&
17194 file prevents it from turning &"jb"& back into &"joe.bloggs"& when that was the
17195 original address. See also the &%repeat_use%& option below.
17198 .option check_group redirect boolean "see below"
17199 When the &%file%& option is used, the group owner of the file is checked only
17200 when this option is set. The permitted groups are those listed in the
17201 &%owngroups%& option, together with the user's default group if
17202 &%check_local_user%& is set. If the file has the wrong group, routing is
17203 deferred. The default setting for this option is true if &%check_local_user%&
17204 is set and the &%modemask%& option permits the group write bit, or if the
17205 &%owngroups%& option is set. Otherwise it is false, and no group check occurs.
17209 .option check_owner redirect boolean "see below"
17210 When the &%file%& option is used, the owner of the file is checked only when
17211 this option is set. If &%check_local_user%& is set, the local user is
17212 permitted; otherwise the owner must be one of those listed in the &%owners%&
17213 option. The default value for this option is true if &%check_local_user%& or
17214 &%owners%& is set. Otherwise the default is false, and no owner check occurs.
17217 .option data redirect string&!! unset
17218 This option is mutually exclusive with &%file%&. One or other of them must be
17219 set, but not both. The contents of &%data%& are expanded, and then used as the
17220 list of forwarding items, or as a set of filtering instructions. If the
17221 expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string or a string that
17222 has no effect (consists entirely of comments), the router declines.
17224 When filtering instructions are used, the string must begin with &"#Exim
17225 filter"&, and all comments in the string, including this initial one, must be
17226 terminated with newline characters. For example:
17228 data = #Exim filter\n\
17229 if $h_to: contains Exim then save $home/mail/exim endif
17231 If you are reading the data from a database where newlines cannot be included,
17232 you can use the &${sg}$& expansion item to turn the escape string of your
17233 choice into a newline.
17236 .option directory_transport redirect string&!! unset
17237 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a directory when a path name
17238 ending with a slash is specified as a new &"address"&. The transport used is
17239 specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a
17240 configured transport. This should normally be an &(appendfile)& transport.
17243 .option file redirect string&!! unset
17244 This option specifies the name of a file that contains the redirection data. It
17245 is mutually exclusive with the &%data%& option. The string is expanded before
17246 use; if the expansion is forced to fail, the router declines. Other expansion
17247 failures cause delivery to be deferred. The result of a successful expansion
17248 must be an absolute path. The entire file is read and used as the redirection
17249 data. If the data is an empty string or a string that has no effect (consists
17250 entirely of comments), the router declines.
17252 .cindex "NFS" "checking for file existence"
17253 If the attempt to open the file fails with a &"does not exist"& error, Exim
17254 runs a check on the containing directory,
17255 unless &%ignore_enotdir%& is true (see below).
17256 If the directory does not appear to exist, delivery is deferred. This can
17257 happen when users' &_.forward_& files are in NFS-mounted directories, and there
17258 is a mount problem. If the containing directory does exist, but the file does
17259 not, the router declines.
17262 .option file_transport redirect string&!! unset
17263 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
17264 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a file when a path name not
17265 ending in a slash is specified as a new &"address"&. The transport used is
17266 specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a
17267 configured transport. This should normally be an &(appendfile)& transport. When
17268 it is running, the file name is in &$address_file$&.
17271 .option forbid_blackhole redirect boolean false
17272 If this option is true, the &':blackhole:'& item may not appear in a
17276 .option forbid_exim_filter redirect boolean false
17277 If this option is set true, only Sieve filters are permitted when
17278 &%allow_filter%& is true.
17283 .option forbid_file redirect boolean false
17284 .cindex "delivery" "to file; forbidding"
17285 .cindex "Sieve filter" "forbidding delivery to a file"
17286 .cindex "Sieve filter" "&""keep""& facility; disabling"
17287 If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address that
17288 specifies delivery to a local file or directory, either from a filter or from a
17289 conventional forward file. This option is forced to be true if &%one_time%& is
17290 set. It applies to Sieve filters as well as to Exim filters, but if true, it
17291 locks out the Sieve's &"keep"& facility.
17294 .option forbid_filter_dlfunc redirect boolean false
17295 .cindex "filter" "locking out certain features"
17296 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not allowed to
17297 make use of the &%dlfunc%& expansion facility to run dynamically loaded
17300 .option forbid_filter_existstest redirect boolean false
17301 .cindex "expansion" "statting a file"
17302 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not allowed to
17303 make use of the &%exists%& condition or the &%stat%& expansion item.
17305 .option forbid_filter_logwrite redirect boolean false
17306 If this option is true, use of the logging facility in Exim filters is not
17307 permitted. Logging is in any case available only if the filter is being run
17308 under some unprivileged uid (which is normally the case for ordinary users'
17309 &_.forward_& files).
17312 .option forbid_filter_lookup redirect boolean false
17313 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17314 to make use of &%lookup%& items.
17317 .option forbid_filter_perl redirect boolean false
17318 This option has an effect only if Exim is built with embedded Perl support. If
17319 it is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed to make use
17320 of the embedded Perl support.
17323 .option forbid_filter_readfile redirect boolean false
17324 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17325 to make use of &%readfile%& items.
17328 .option forbid_filter_readsocket redirect boolean false
17329 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17330 to make use of &%readsocket%& items.
17333 .option forbid_filter_reply redirect boolean false
17334 If this option is true, this router may not generate an automatic reply
17335 message. Automatic replies can be generated only from Exim or Sieve filter
17336 files, not from traditional forward files. This option is forced to be true if
17337 &%one_time%& is set.
17340 .option forbid_filter_run redirect boolean false
17341 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17342 to make use of &%run%& items.
17345 .option forbid_include redirect boolean false
17346 If this option is true, items of the form
17348 :include:<path name>
17350 are not permitted in non-filter redirection lists.
17353 .option forbid_pipe redirect boolean false
17354 .cindex "delivery" "to pipe; forbidding"
17355 If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address which
17356 specifies delivery to a pipe, either from an Exim filter or from a conventional
17357 forward file. This option is forced to be true if &%one_time%& is set.
17360 .option forbid_sieve_filter redirect boolean false
17361 If this option is set true, only Exim filters are permitted when
17362 &%allow_filter%& is true.
17367 .option hide_child_in_errmsg redirect boolean false
17368 .cindex "bounce message" "redirection details; suppressing"
17369 If this option is true, it prevents Exim from quoting a child address if it
17370 generates a bounce or delay message for it. Instead it says &"an address
17371 generated from <&'the top level address'&>"&. Of course, this applies only to
17372 bounces generated locally. If a message is forwarded to another host, &'its'&
17373 bounce may well quote the generated address.
17376 .option ignore_eacces redirect boolean false
17378 If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file yields the
17379 EACCES error (permission denied), the &(redirect)& router behaves as if the
17380 file did not exist.
17383 .option ignore_enotdir redirect boolean false
17385 If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file yields the
17386 ENOTDIR error (something on the path is not a directory), the &(redirect)&
17387 router behaves as if the file did not exist.
17389 Setting &%ignore_enotdir%& has another effect as well: When a &(redirect)&
17390 router that has the &%file%& option set discovers that the file does not exist
17391 (the ENOENT error), it tries to &[stat()]& the parent directory, as a check
17392 against unmounted NFS directories. If the parent can not be statted, delivery
17393 is deferred. However, it seems wrong to do this check when &%ignore_enotdir%&
17394 is set, because that option tells Exim to ignore &"something on the path is not
17395 a directory"& (the ENOTDIR error). This is a confusing area, because it seems
17396 that some operating systems give ENOENT where others give ENOTDIR.
17400 .option include_directory redirect string unset
17401 If this option is set, the path names of any &':include:'& items in a
17402 redirection list must start with this directory.
17405 .option modemask redirect "octal integer" 022
17406 This specifies mode bits which must not be set for a file specified by the
17407 &%file%& option. If any of the forbidden bits are set, delivery is deferred.
17410 .option one_time redirect boolean false
17411 .cindex "one-time aliasing/forwarding expansion"
17412 .cindex "alias file" "one-time expansion"
17413 .cindex "forward file" "one-time expansion"
17414 .cindex "mailing lists" "one-time expansion"
17415 .cindex "address redirection" "one-time expansion"
17416 Sometimes the fact that Exim re-evaluates aliases and reprocesses redirection
17417 files each time it tries to deliver a message causes a problem when one or more
17418 of the generated addresses fails be delivered at the first attempt. The problem
17419 is not one of duplicate delivery &-- Exim is clever enough to handle that &--
17420 but of what happens when the redirection list changes during the time that the
17421 message is on Exim's queue. This is particularly true in the case of mailing
17422 lists, where new subscribers might receive copies of messages that were posted
17423 before they subscribed.
17425 If &%one_time%& is set and any addresses generated by the router fail to
17426 deliver at the first attempt, the failing addresses are added to the message as
17427 &"top level"& addresses, and the parent address that generated them is marked
17428 &"delivered"&. Thus, redirection does not happen again at the next delivery
17431 &*Warning 1*&: Any header line addition or removal that is specified by this
17432 router would be lost if delivery did not succeed at the first attempt. For this
17433 reason, the &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& generic options are not
17434 permitted when &%one_time%& is set.
17436 &*Warning 2*&: To ensure that the router generates only addresses (as opposed
17437 to pipe or file deliveries or auto-replies) &%forbid_file%&, &%forbid_pipe%&,
17438 and &%forbid_filter_reply%& are forced to be true when &%one_time%& is set.
17440 &*Warning 3*&: The &%unseen%& generic router option may not be set with
17443 The original top-level address is remembered with each of the generated
17444 addresses, and is output in any log messages. However, any intermediate parent
17445 addresses are not recorded. This makes a difference to the log only if
17446 &%all_parents%& log selector is set. It is expected that &%one_time%& will
17447 typically be used for mailing lists, where there is normally just one level of
17451 .option owners redirect "string list" unset
17452 .cindex "ownership" "alias file"
17453 .cindex "ownership" "forward file"
17454 .cindex "alias file" "ownership"
17455 .cindex "forward file" "ownership"
17456 This specifies a list of permitted owners for the file specified by &%file%&.
17457 This list is in addition to the local user when &%check_local_user%& is set.
17458 See &%check_owner%& above.
17461 .option owngroups redirect "string list" unset
17462 This specifies a list of permitted groups for the file specified by &%file%&.
17463 The list is in addition to the local user's primary group when
17464 &%check_local_user%& is set. See &%check_group%& above.
17467 .option pipe_transport redirect string&!! unset
17468 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
17469 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a pipe when a string
17470 starting with a vertical bar character is specified as a new &"address"&. The
17471 transport used is specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the
17472 name of a configured transport. This should normally be a &(pipe)& transport.
17473 When the transport is run, the pipe command is in &$address_pipe$&.
17476 .option qualify_domain redirect string&!! unset
17477 .cindex "&$qualify_recipient$&"
17478 If this option is set, and an unqualified address (one without a domain) is
17479 generated, and that address would normally be qualified by the global setting
17480 in &%qualify_recipient%&, it is instead qualified with the domain specified by
17481 expanding this string. If the expansion fails, the router declines. If you want
17482 to revert to the default, you can have the expansion generate
17483 &$qualify_recipient$&.
17485 This option applies to all unqualified addresses generated by Exim filters,
17486 but for traditional &_.forward_& files, it applies only to addresses that are
17487 not preceded by a backslash. Sieve filters cannot generate unqualified
17490 .option qualify_preserve_domain redirect boolean false
17491 .cindex "domain" "in redirection; preserving"
17492 .cindex "preserving domain in redirection"
17493 .cindex "address redirection" "domain; preserving"
17494 If this option is set, the router's local &%qualify_domain%& option must not be
17495 set (a configuration error occurs if it is). If an unqualified address (one
17496 without a domain) is generated, it is qualified with the domain of the parent
17497 address (the immediately preceding ancestor) instead of the global
17498 &%qualify_recipient%& value. In the case of a traditional &_.forward_& file,
17499 this applies whether or not the address is preceded by a backslash.
17502 .option repeat_use redirect boolean true
17503 If this option is set false, the router is skipped for a child address that has
17504 any ancestor that was routed by this router. This test happens before any of
17505 the other preconditions are tested. Exim's default anti-looping rules skip
17506 only when the ancestor is the same as the current address. See also
17507 &%check_ancestor%& above and the generic &%redirect_router%& option.
17510 .option reply_transport redirect string&!! unset
17511 A &(redirect)& router sets up an automatic reply when a &%mail%& or
17512 &%vacation%& command is used in a filter file. The transport used is specified
17513 by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a configured
17514 transport. This should normally be an &(autoreply)& transport. Other transports
17515 are unlikely to do anything sensible or useful.
17518 .option rewrite redirect boolean true
17519 .cindex "address redirection" "disabling rewriting"
17520 If this option is set false, addresses generated by the router are not
17521 subject to address rewriting. Otherwise, they are treated like new addresses
17522 and are rewritten according to the global rewriting rules.
17525 .option sieve_subaddress redirect string&!! unset
17526 The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the
17527 :subaddress part of an address.
17529 .option sieve_useraddress redirect string&!! unset
17530 The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the :user part
17531 of an address. However, if it is unset, the entire original local part
17532 (including any prefix or suffix) is used for :user.
17535 .option sieve_vacation_directory redirect string&!! unset
17536 .cindex "Sieve filter" "vacation directory"
17537 To enable the &"vacation"& extension for Sieve filters, you must set
17538 &%sieve_vacation_directory%& to the directory where vacation databases are held
17539 (do not put anything else in that directory), and ensure that the
17540 &%reply_transport%& option refers to an &(autoreply)& transport. Each user
17541 needs their own directory; Exim will create it if necessary.
17545 .option skip_syntax_errors redirect boolean false
17546 .cindex "forward file" "broken"
17547 .cindex "address redirection" "broken files"
17548 .cindex "alias file" "broken"
17549 .cindex "broken alias or forward files"
17550 .cindex "ignoring faulty addresses"
17551 .cindex "skipping faulty addresses"
17552 .cindex "error" "skipping bad syntax"
17553 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set, syntactically malformed addresses in
17554 non-filter redirection data are skipped, and each failing address is logged. If
17555 &%syntax_errors_to%& is set, a message is sent to the address it defines,
17556 giving details of the failures. If &%syntax_errors_text%& is set, its contents
17557 are expanded and placed at the head of the error message generated by
17558 &%syntax_errors_to%&. Usually it is appropriate to set &%syntax_errors_to%& to
17559 be the same address as the generic &%errors_to%& option. The
17560 &%skip_syntax_errors%& option is often used when handling mailing lists.
17562 If all the addresses in a redirection list are skipped because of syntax
17563 errors, the router declines to handle the original address, and it is passed to
17564 the following routers.
17566 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set when an Exim filter is interpreted, any syntax
17567 error in the filter causes filtering to be abandoned without any action being
17568 taken. The incident is logged, and the router declines to handle the address,
17569 so it is passed to the following routers.
17571 .cindex "Sieve filter" "syntax errors in"
17572 Syntax errors in a Sieve filter file cause the &"keep"& action to occur. This
17573 action is specified by RFC 3028. The values of &%skip_syntax_errors%&,
17574 &%syntax_errors_to%&, and &%syntax_errors_text%& are not used.
17576 &%skip_syntax_errors%& can be used to specify that errors in users' forward
17577 lists or filter files should not prevent delivery. The &%syntax_errors_to%&
17578 option, used with an address that does not get redirected, can be used to
17579 notify users of these errors, by means of a router like this:
17585 file = $home/.forward
17586 file_transport = address_file
17587 pipe_transport = address_pipe
17588 reply_transport = address_reply
17591 syntax_errors_to = real-$local_part@$domain
17592 syntax_errors_text = \
17593 This is an automatically generated message. An error has\n\
17594 been found in your .forward file. Details of the error are\n\
17595 reported below. While this error persists, you will receive\n\
17596 a copy of this message for every message that is addressed\n\
17597 to you. If your .forward file is a filter file, or if it is\n\
17598 a non-filter file containing no valid forwarding addresses,\n\
17599 a copy of each incoming message will be put in your normal\n\
17600 mailbox. If a non-filter file contains at least one valid\n\
17601 forwarding address, forwarding to the valid addresses will\n\
17602 happen, and those will be the only deliveries that occur.
17604 You also need a router to ensure that local addresses that are prefixed by
17605 &`real-`& are recognized, but not forwarded or filtered. For example, you could
17606 put this immediately before the &(userforward)& router:
17611 local_part_prefix = real-
17612 transport = local_delivery
17615 .option syntax_errors_text redirect string&!! unset
17616 See &%skip_syntax_errors%& above.
17619 .option syntax_errors_to redirect string unset
17620 See &%skip_syntax_errors%& above.
17621 .ecindex IIDredrou1
17622 .ecindex IIDredrou2
17629 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17630 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17632 .chapter "Environment for running local transports" "CHAPenvironment" &&&
17633 "Environment for local transports"
17634 .scindex IIDenvlotra1 "local transports" "environment for"
17635 .scindex IIDenvlotra2 "environment for local transports"
17636 .scindex IIDenvlotra3 "transport" "local; environment for"
17637 Local transports handle deliveries to files and pipes. (The &(autoreply)&
17638 transport can be thought of as similar to a pipe.) Exim always runs transports
17639 in subprocesses, under specified uids and gids. Typical deliveries to local
17640 mailboxes run under the uid and gid of the local user.
17642 Exim also sets a specific current directory while running the transport; for
17643 some transports a home directory setting is also relevant. The &(pipe)&
17644 transport is the only one that sets up environment variables; see section
17645 &<<SECTpipeenv>>& for details.
17647 The values used for the uid, gid, and the directories may come from several
17648 different places. In many cases, the router that handles the address associates
17649 settings with that address as a result of its &%check_local_user%&, &%group%&,
17650 or &%user%& options. However, values may also be given in the transport's own
17651 configuration, and these override anything that comes from the router.
17655 .section "Concurrent deliveries"
17656 .cindex "concurrent deliveries"
17657 .cindex "simultaneous deliveries"
17658 If two different messages for the same local recpient arrive more or less
17659 simultaneously, the two delivery processes are likely to run concurrently. When
17660 the &(appendfile)& transport is used to write to a file, Exim applies locking
17661 rules to stop concurrent processes from writing to the same file at the same
17664 However, when you use a &(pipe)& transport, it is up to you to arrange any
17665 locking that is needed. Here is a silly example:
17669 command = /bin/sh -c 'cat >>/some/file'
17671 This is supposed to write the message at the end of the file. However, if two
17672 messages arrive at the same time, the file will be scrambled. You can use the
17673 &%exim_lock%& utility program (see section &<<SECTmailboxmaint>>&) to lock a
17674 file using the same algorithm that Exim itself uses.
17679 .section "Uids and gids" "SECTenvuidgid"
17680 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
17681 .cindex "transport" "local; uid and gid"
17682 All transports have the options &%group%& and &%user%&. If &%group%& is set, it
17683 overrides any group that the router set in the address, even if &%user%& is not
17684 set for the transport. This makes it possible, for example, to run local mail
17685 delivery under the uid of the recipient (set by the router), but in a special
17686 group (set by the transport). For example:
17689 # User/group are set by check_local_user in this router
17693 transport = group_delivery
17696 # This transport overrides the group
17698 driver = appendfile
17699 file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part
17702 If &%user%& is set for a transport, its value overrides what is set in the
17703 address by the router. If &%user%& is non-numeric and &%group%& is not set, the
17704 gid associated with the user is used. If &%user%& is numeric, &%group%& must be
17707 .cindex "&%initgroups%& option"
17708 When the uid is taken from the transport's configuration, the &[initgroups()]&
17709 function is called for the groups associated with that uid if the
17710 &%initgroups%& option is set for the transport. When the uid is not specified
17711 by the transport, but is associated with the address by a router, the option
17712 for calling &[initgroups()]& is taken from the router configuration.
17714 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "uid for"
17715 The &(pipe)& transport contains the special option &%pipe_as_creator%&. If this
17716 is set and &%user%& is not set, the uid of the process that called Exim to
17717 receive the message is used, and if &%group%& is not set, the corresponding
17718 original gid is also used.
17720 This is the detailed preference order for obtaining a gid; the first of the
17721 following that is set is used:
17724 A &%group%& setting of the transport;
17726 A &%group%& setting of the router;
17728 A gid associated with a user setting of the router, either as a result of
17729 &%check_local_user%& or an explicit non-numeric &%user%& setting;
17731 The group associated with a non-numeric &%user%& setting of the transport;
17733 In a &(pipe)& transport, the creator's gid if &%deliver_as_creator%& is set and
17734 the uid is the creator's uid;
17736 The Exim gid if the Exim uid is being used as a default.
17739 If, for example, the user is specified numerically on the router and there are
17740 no group settings, no gid is available. In this situation, an error occurs.
17741 This is different for the uid, for which there always is an ultimate default.
17742 The first of the following that is set is used:
17745 A &%user%& setting of the transport;
17747 In a &(pipe)& transport, the creator's uid if &%deliver_as_creator%& is set;
17749 A &%user%& setting of the router;
17751 A &%check_local_user%& setting of the router;
17756 Of course, an error will still occur if the uid that is chosen is on the
17757 &%never_users%& list.
17763 .section "Current and home directories"
17764 .cindex "current directory for local transport"
17765 .cindex "home directory" "for local transport"
17766 .cindex "transport" "local; home directory for"
17767 .cindex "transport" "local; current directory for"
17768 Routers may set current and home directories for local transports by means of
17769 the &%transport_current_directory%& and &%transport_home_directory%& options.
17770 However, if the transport's &%current_directory%& or &%home_directory%& options
17771 are set, they override the router's values. In detail, the home directory
17772 for a local transport is taken from the first of these values that is set:
17775 The &%home_directory%& option on the transport;
17777 The &%transport_home_directory%& option on the router;
17779 The password data if &%check_local_user%& is set on the router;
17781 The &%router_home_directory%& option on the router.
17784 The current directory is taken from the first of these values that is set:
17787 The &%current_directory%& option on the transport;
17789 The &%transport_current_directory%& option on the router.
17793 If neither the router nor the transport sets a current directory, Exim uses the
17794 value of the home directory, if it is set. Otherwise it sets the current
17795 directory to &_/_& before running a local transport.
17799 .section "Expansion variables derived from the address"
17800 .cindex "&$domain$&"
17801 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
17802 .cindex "&$original_domain$&"
17803 Normally a local delivery is handling a single address, and in that case the
17804 variables such as &$domain$& and &$local_part$& are set during local
17805 deliveries. However, in some circumstances more than one address may be handled
17806 at once (for example, while writing batch SMTP for onward transmission by some
17807 other means). In this case, the variables associated with the local part are
17808 never set, &$domain$& is set only if all the addresses have the same domain,
17809 and &$original_domain$& is never set.
17810 .ecindex IIDenvlotra1
17811 .ecindex IIDenvlotra2
17812 .ecindex IIDenvlotra3
17820 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17821 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17823 .chapter "Generic options for transports" "CHAPtransportgeneric"
17824 .scindex IIDgenoptra1 "generic options" "transport"
17825 .scindex IIDgenoptra2 "options" "generic; for transports"
17826 .scindex IIDgenoptra3 "transport" "generic options for"
17827 The following generic options apply to all transports:
17830 .option body_only transports boolean false
17831 .cindex "transport" "body only"
17832 .cindex "message" "transporting body only"
17833 .cindex "body of message" "transporting"
17834 If this option is set, the message's headers are not transported. It is
17835 mutually exclusive with &%headers_only%&. If it is used with the &(appendfile)&
17836 or &(pipe)& transports, the settings of &%message_prefix%& and
17837 &%message_suffix%& should be checked, because this option does not
17838 automatically suppress them.
17841 .option current_directory transports string&!! unset
17842 .cindex "transport" "current directory for"
17843 This specifies the current directory that is to be set while running the
17844 transport, overriding any value that may have been set by the router.
17845 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
17846 logged, and delivery is deferred.
17849 .option disable_logging transports boolean false
17850 If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any
17851 deliveries by the transport or for any
17852 transport errors. You should not set this option unless you really, really know
17853 what you are doing.
17856 .option debug_print transports string&!! unset
17857 .cindex "testing" "variables in drivers"
17858 If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%& command line
17859 option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging output when the
17861 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
17862 output, and Exim carries on processing.
17863 This facility is provided to help with checking out the values of variables and
17864 so on when debugging driver configurations. For example, if a &%headers_add%&
17865 option is not working properly, &%debug_print%& could be used to output the
17866 variables it references. A newline is added to the text if it does not end with
17870 .option delivery_date_add transports boolean false
17871 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
17872 If this option is true, a &'Delivery-date:'& header is added to the message.
17873 This gives the actual time the delivery was made. As this is not a standard
17874 header, Exim has a configuration option (&%delivery_date_remove%&) which
17875 requests its removal from incoming messages, so that delivered messages can
17876 safely be resent to other recipients.
17879 .option driver transports string unset
17880 This specifies which of the available transport drivers is to be used.
17881 There is no default, and this option must be set for every transport.
17884 .option envelope_to_add transports boolean false
17885 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
17886 If this option is true, an &'Envelope-to:'& header is added to the message.
17887 This gives the original address(es) in the incoming envelope that caused this
17888 delivery to happen. More than one address may be present if the transport is
17889 configured to handle several addresses at once, or if more than one original
17890 address was redirected to the same final address. As this is not a standard
17891 header, Exim has a configuration option (&%envelope_to_remove%&) which requests
17892 its removal from incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be
17893 resent to other recipients.
17896 .option group transports string&!! "Exim group"
17897 .cindex "transport" "group; specifying"
17898 This option specifies a gid for running the transport process, overriding any
17899 value that the router supplies, and also overriding any value associated with
17900 &%user%& (see below).
17903 .option headers_add transports string&!! unset
17904 .cindex "header lines" "adding in transport"
17905 .cindex "transport" "header lines; adding"
17906 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded and added to the header
17907 portion of a message as it is transported, as described in section
17908 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Additional header lines can also be specified by
17909 routers. If the result of the expansion is an empty string, or if the expansion
17910 is forced to fail, no action is taken. Other expansion failures are treated as
17911 errors and cause the delivery to be deferred.
17915 .option headers_only transports boolean false
17916 .cindex "transport" "header lines only"
17917 .cindex "message" "transporting headers only"
17918 .cindex "header lines" "transporting"
17919 If this option is set, the message's body is not transported. It is mutually
17920 exclusive with &%body_only%&. If it is used with the &(appendfile)& or &(pipe)&
17921 transports, the settings of &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& should be
17922 checked, since this option does not automatically suppress them.
17925 .option headers_remove transports string&!! unset
17926 .cindex "header lines" "removing"
17927 .cindex "transport" "header lines; removing"
17928 This option specifies a string that is expanded into a list of header names;
17929 these headers are omitted from the message as it is transported, as described
17930 in section &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Header removal can also be specified by
17931 routers. If the result of the expansion is an empty string, or if the expansion
17932 is forced to fail, no action is taken. Other expansion failures are treated as
17933 errors and cause the delivery to be deferred.
17937 .option headers_rewrite transports string unset
17938 .cindex "transport" "header lines; rewriting"
17939 .cindex "rewriting" "at transport time"
17940 This option allows addresses in header lines to be rewritten at transport time,
17941 that is, as the message is being copied to its destination. The contents of the
17942 option are a colon-separated list of rewriting rules. Each rule is in exactly
17943 the same form as one of the general rewriting rules that are applied when a
17944 message is received. These are described in chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&. For
17947 headers_rewrite = a@b c@d f : \
17950 changes &'a@b'& into &'c@d'& in &'From:'& header lines, and &'x@y'& into
17951 &'w@z'& in all address-bearing header lines. The rules are applied to the
17952 header lines just before they are written out at transport time, so they affect
17953 only those copies of the message that pass through the transport. However, only
17954 the message's original header lines, and any that were added by a system
17955 filter, are rewritten. If a router or transport adds header lines, they are not
17956 affected by this option. These rewriting rules are &'not'& applied to the
17957 envelope. You can change the return path using &%return_path%&, but you cannot
17958 change envelope recipients at this time.
17961 .option home_directory transports string&!! unset
17962 .cindex "transport" "home directory for"
17964 This option specifies a home directory setting for a local transport,
17965 overriding any value that may be set by the router. The home directory is
17966 placed in &$home$& while expanding the transport's private options. It is also
17967 used as the current directory if no current directory is set by the
17968 &%current_directory%& option on the transport or the
17969 &%transport_current_directory%& option on the router. If the expansion fails
17970 for any reason, including forced failure, an error is logged, and delivery is
17974 .option initgroups transports boolean false
17975 .cindex "additional groups"
17976 .cindex "groups" "additional"
17977 .cindex "transport" "group; additional"
17978 If this option is true and the uid for the delivery process is provided by the
17979 transport, the &[initgroups()]& function is called when running the transport
17980 to ensure that any additional groups associated with the uid are set up.
17983 .option message_size_limit transports string&!! 0
17984 .cindex "limit" "message size per transport"
17985 .cindex "size of message" "limit"
17986 .cindex "transport" "message size; limiting"
17987 This option controls the size of messages passed through the transport. It is
17988 expanded before use; the result of the expansion must be a sequence of digits,
17989 optionally followed by K or M.
17990 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, or if the
17991 result is not of the required form, delivery is deferred.
17992 If the value is greater than zero and the size of a message exceeds this
17993 limit, the address is failed. If there is any chance that the resulting bounce
17994 message could be routed to the same transport, you should ensure that
17995 &%return_size_limit%& is less than the transport's &%message_size_limit%&, as
17996 otherwise the bounce message will fail to get delivered.
18000 .option rcpt_include_affixes transports boolean false
18001 .cindex "prefix" "for local part; including in envelope"
18002 .cindex "suffix" "for local part; including in envelope"
18003 .cindex "local part" "prefix"
18004 .cindex "local part" "suffix"
18005 When this option is false (the default), and an address that has had any
18006 affixes (prefixes or suffixes) removed from the local part is delivered by any
18007 form of SMTP or LMTP, the affixes are not included. For example, if a router
18010 local_part_prefix = *-
18012 routes the address &'abc-xyz@some.domain'& to an SMTP transport, the envelope
18015 RCPT TO:<xyz@some.domain>
18017 This is also the case when an ACL-time callout is being used to verify a
18018 recipient address. However, if &%rcpt_include_affixes%& is set true, the
18019 whole local part is included in the RCPT command. This option applies to BSMTP
18020 deliveries by the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports as well as to the
18021 &(lmtp)& and &(smtp)& transports.
18024 .option retry_use_local_part transports boolean "see below"
18025 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
18026 When a delivery suffers a temporary failure, a retry record is created
18027 in Exim's hints database. For remote deliveries, the key for the retry record
18028 is based on the name and/or IP address of the failing remote host. For local
18029 deliveries, the key is normally the entire address, including both the local
18030 part and the domain. This is suitable for most common cases of local delivery
18031 temporary failure &-- for example, exceeding a mailbox quota should delay only
18032 deliveries to that mailbox, not to the whole domain.
18034 However, in some special cases you may want to treat a temporary local delivery
18035 as a failure associated with the domain, and not with a particular local part.
18036 (For example, if you are storing all mail for some domain in files.) You can do
18037 this by setting &%retry_use_local_part%& false.
18039 For all the local transports, its default value is true. For remote transports,
18040 the default value is false for tidiness, but changing the value has no effect
18041 on a remote transport in the current implementation.
18044 .option return_path transports string&!! unset
18045 .cindex "envelope sender"
18046 .cindex "transport" "return path; changing"
18047 .cindex "return path" "changing in transport"
18048 If this option is set, the string is expanded at transport time and replaces
18049 the existing return path (envelope sender) value in the copy of the message
18050 that is being delivered. An empty return path is permitted. This feature is
18051 designed for remote deliveries, where the value of this option is used in the
18052 SMTP MAIL command. If you set &%return_path%& for a local transport, the
18053 only effect is to change the address that is placed in the &'Return-path:'&
18054 header line, if one is added to the message (see the next option).
18056 .cindex "&$return_path$&"
18057 The expansion can refer to the existing value via &$return_path$&. This is
18058 either the message's envelope sender, or an address set by the
18059 &%errors_to%& option on a router. If the expansion is forced to fail, no
18060 replacement occurs; if it fails for another reason, delivery is deferred. This
18061 option can be used to support VERP (Variable Envelope Return Paths) &-- see
18062 section &<<SECTverp>>&.
18064 &*Note*&: If a delivery error is detected locally, including the case when a
18065 remote server rejects a message at SMTP time, the bounce message is not sent to
18066 the value of this option. It is sent to the previously set errors address.
18067 This defaults to the incoming sender address, but can be changed by setting
18068 &%errors_to%& in a router.
18072 .option return_path_add transports boolean false
18073 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line"
18074 If this option is true, a &'Return-path:'& header is added to the message.
18075 Although the return path is normally available in the prefix line of BSD
18076 mailboxes, this is commonly not displayed by MUAs, and so the user does not
18077 have easy access to it.
18079 RFC 2821 states that the &'Return-path:'& header is added to a message &"when
18080 the delivery SMTP server makes the final delivery"&. This implies that this
18081 header should not be present in incoming messages. Exim has a configuration
18082 option, &%return_path_remove%&, which requests removal of this header from
18083 incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be resent to other
18087 .option shadow_condition transports string&!! unset
18088 See &%shadow_transport%& below.
18091 .option shadow_transport transports string unset
18092 .cindex "shadow transport"
18093 .cindex "transport" "shadow"
18094 A local transport may set the &%shadow_transport%& option to the name of
18095 another local transport. Shadow remote transports are not supported.
18097 Whenever a delivery to the main transport succeeds, and either
18098 &%shadow_condition%& is unset, or its expansion does not result in the empty
18099 string or one of the strings &"0"& or &"no"& or &"false"&, the message is also
18100 passed to the shadow transport, with the same delivery address or addresses. If
18101 expansion fails, no action is taken except that non-forced expansion failures
18102 cause a log line to be written.
18104 The result of the shadow transport is discarded and does not affect the
18105 subsequent processing of the message. Only a single level of shadowing is
18106 provided; the &%shadow_transport%& option is ignored on any transport when it
18107 is running as a shadow. Options concerned with output from pipes are also
18108 ignored. The log line for the successful delivery has an item added on the end,
18111 ST=<shadow transport name>
18113 If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
18114 parentheses afterwards. Shadow transports can be used for a number of different
18115 purposes, including keeping more detailed log information than Exim normally
18116 provides, and implementing automatic acknowledgement policies based on message
18117 headers that some sites insist on.
18120 .option transport_filter transports string&!! unset
18121 .cindex "transport" "filter"
18122 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
18123 This option sets up a filtering (in the Unix shell sense) process for messages
18124 at transport time. It should not be confused with mail filtering as set up by
18125 individual users or via a system filter.
18127 When the message is about to be written out, the command specified by
18128 &%transport_filter%& is started up in a separate, parallel process, and
18129 the entire message, including the header lines, is passed to it on its standard
18130 input (this in fact is done from a third process, to avoid deadlock). The
18131 command must be specified as an absolute path.
18133 The lines of the message that are written to the transport filter are
18134 terminated by newline (&"\n"&). The message is passed to the filter before any
18135 SMTP-specific processing, such as turning &"\n"& into &"\r\n"& and escaping
18136 lines beginning with a dot, and also before any processing implied by the
18137 settings of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%& in the &(appendfile)& or
18138 &(pipe)& transports.
18140 The standard error for the filter process is set to the same destination as its
18141 standard output; this is read and written to the message's ultimate
18142 destination. The process that writes the message to the filter, the
18143 filter itself, and the original process that reads the result and delivers it
18144 are all run in parallel, like a shell pipeline.
18146 The filter can perform any transformations it likes, but of course should take
18147 care not to break RFC 2822 syntax. A demonstration Perl script is provided in
18148 &_util/transport-filter.pl_&; this makes a few arbitrary modifications just to
18149 show the possibilities. Exim does not check the result, except to test for a
18150 final newline when SMTP is in use. All messages transmitted over SMTP must end
18151 with a newline, so Exim supplies one if it is missing.
18153 .cindex "content scanning" "per user"
18154 A transport filter can be used to provide content-scanning on a per-user basis
18155 at delivery time if the only required effect of the scan is to modify the
18156 message. For example, a content scan could insert a new header line containing
18157 a spam score. This could be interpreted by a filter in the user's MUA. It is
18158 not possible to discard a message at this stage.
18160 .cindex "SMTP" "SIZE"
18161 A problem might arise if the filter increases the size of a message that is
18162 being sent down an SMTP connection. If the receiving SMTP server has indicated
18163 support for the SIZE parameter, Exim will have sent the size of the message
18164 at the start of the SMTP session. If what is actually sent is substantially
18165 more, the server might reject the message. This can be worked round by setting
18166 the &%size_addition%& option on the &(smtp)& transport, either to allow for
18167 additions to the message, or to disable the use of SIZE altogether.
18169 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
18170 The value of the &%transport_filter%& option is the command string for starting
18171 the filter, which is run directly from Exim, not under a shell. The string is
18172 parsed by Exim in the same way as a command string for the &(pipe)& transport:
18173 Exim breaks it up into arguments and then expands each argument separately (see
18174 section &<<SECThowcommandrun>>&). Any kind of expansion failure causes delivery
18175 to be deferred. The special argument &$pipe_addresses$& is replaced by a number
18176 of arguments, one for each address that applies to this delivery. (This isn't
18177 an ideal name for this feature here, but as it was already implemented for the
18178 &(pipe)& transport, it seemed sensible not to change it.)
18181 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
18182 The expansion variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& are available when the
18183 transport is a remote one. They contain the name and IP address of the host to
18184 which the message is being sent. For example:
18186 transport_filter = /some/directory/transport-filter.pl \
18187 $host $host_address $sender_address $pipe_addresses
18190 Two problems arise if you want to use more complicated expansion items to
18191 generate transport filter commands, both of which due to the fact that the
18192 command is split up &'before'& expansion.
18194 If an expansion item contains white space, you must quote it, so that it is all
18195 part of the same command item. If the entire option setting is one such
18196 expansion item, you have to take care what kind of quoting you use. For
18199 transport_filter = '/bin/cmd${if eq{$host}{a.b.c}{1}{2}}'
18201 This runs the command &(/bin/cmd1)& if the host name is &'a.b.c'&, and
18202 &(/bin/cmd2)& otherwise. If double quotes had been used, they would have been
18203 stripped by Exim when it read the option's value. When the value is used, if
18204 the single quotes were missing, the line would be split into two items,
18205 &`/bin/cmd${if`& and &`eq{$host}{a.b.c}{1}{2}`&, and an error would occur when
18206 Exim tried to expand the first one.
18208 Except for the special case of &$pipe_addresses$& that is mentioned above, an
18209 expansion cannot generate multiple arguments, or a command name followed by
18210 arguments. Consider this example:
18212 transport_filter = ${lookup{$host}lsearch{/some/file}\
18213 {$value}{/bin/cat}}
18215 The result of the lookup is interpreted as the name of the command, even
18216 if it contains white space. The simplest way round this is to use a shell:
18218 transport_filter = /bin/sh -c ${lookup{$host}lsearch{/some/file}\
18219 {$value}{/bin/cat}}
18223 The filter process is run under the same uid and gid as the normal delivery.
18224 For remote deliveries this is the Exim uid/gid by default. The command should
18225 normally yield a zero return code. Transport filters are not supposed to fail.
18226 A non-zero code is taken to mean that the transport filter encountered some
18227 serious problem. Delivery of the message is deferred; the message remains on
18228 the queue and is tried again later. It is not possible to cause a message to be
18229 bounced from a transport filter.
18231 If a transport filter is set on an autoreply transport, the original message is
18232 passed through the filter as it is being copied into the newly generated
18233 message, which happens if the &%return_message%& option is set.
18236 .option transport_filter_timeout transports time 5m
18237 .cindex "transport filter" "timeout"
18238 When Exim is reading the output of a transport filter, it a applies a timeout
18239 that can be set by this option. Exceeding the timeout is normally treated as a
18240 temporary delivery failure. However, if a transport filter is used with a
18241 &(pipe)& transport, a timeout in the transport filter is treated in the same
18242 way as a timeout in the pipe command itself. By default, a timeout is a hard
18243 error, but if the &(pipe)& transport's &%timeout_defer%& option is set true, it
18244 becomes a temporary error.
18247 .option user transports string&!! "Exim user"
18248 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
18249 .cindex "transport user" "specifying"
18250 This option specifies the user under whose uid the delivery process is to be
18251 run, overriding any uid that may have been set by the router. If the user is
18252 given as a name, the uid is looked up from the password data, and the
18253 associated group is taken as the value of the gid to be used if the &%group%&
18256 For deliveries that use local transports, a user and group are normally
18257 specified explicitly or implicitly (for example, as a result of
18258 &%check_local_user%&) by the router or transport.
18260 .cindex "hints database" "access by remote transport"
18261 For remote transports, you should leave this option unset unless you really are
18262 sure you know what you are doing. When a remote transport is running, it needs
18263 to be able to access Exim's hints databases, because each host may have its own
18265 .ecindex IIDgenoptra1
18266 .ecindex IIDgenoptra2
18267 .ecindex IIDgenoptra3
18274 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18275 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18277 .chapter "Address batching in local transports" "CHAPbatching" &&&
18279 .cindex "transport" "local; address batching in"
18280 The only remote transport (&(smtp)&) is normally configured to handle more than
18281 one address at a time, so that when several addresses are routed to the same
18282 remote host, just one copy of the message is sent. Local transports, however,
18283 normally handle one address at a time. That is, a separate instance of the
18284 transport is run for each address that is routed to the transport. A separate
18285 copy of the message is delivered each time.
18287 .cindex "batched local delivery"
18288 .cindex "&%batch_max%&"
18289 .cindex "&%batch_id%&"
18290 In special cases, it may be desirable to handle several addresses at once in a
18291 local transport, for example:
18294 In an &(appendfile)& transport, when storing messages in files for later
18295 delivery by some other means, a single copy of the message with multiple
18296 recipients saves space.
18298 In an &(lmtp)& transport, when delivering over &"local SMTP"& to some process,
18299 a single copy saves time, and is the normal way LMTP is expected to work.
18301 In a &(pipe)& transport, when passing the message
18302 to a scanner program or
18303 to some other delivery mechanism such as UUCP, multiple recipients may be
18308 These three local transports all have the same options for controlling multiple
18309 (&"batched"&) deliveries, namely &%batch_max%& and &%batch_id%&. To save
18310 repeating the information for each transport, these options are described here.
18312 The &%batch_max%& option specifies the maximum number of addresses that can be
18313 delivered together in a single run of the transport. Its default value is one
18314 (no batching). When more than one address is routed to a transport that has a
18315 &%batch_max%& value greater than one, the addresses are delivered in a batch
18316 (that is, in a single run of the transport with multiple recipients), subject
18317 to certain conditions:
18321 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
18322 If any of the transport's options contain a reference to &$local_part$&, no
18323 batching is possible.
18325 .cindex "&$domain$&"
18326 If any of the transport's options contain a reference to &$domain$&, only
18327 addresses with the same domain are batched.
18329 .cindex "customizing" "batching condition"
18330 If &%batch_id%& is set, it is expanded for each address, and only those
18331 addresses with the same expanded value are batched. This allows you to specify
18332 customized batching conditions. Failure of the expansion for any reason,
18333 including forced failure, disables batching, but it does not stop the delivery
18336 Batched addresses must also have the same errors address (where to send
18337 delivery errors), the same header additions and removals, the same user and
18338 group for the transport, and if a host list is present, the first host must
18343 In the case of the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports, batching applies
18344 both when the file or pipe command is specified in the transport, and when it
18345 is specified by a &(redirect)& router, but all the batched addresses must of
18346 course be routed to the same file or pipe command. These two transports have an
18347 option called &%use_bsmtp%&, which causes them to deliver the message in
18348 &"batched SMTP"& format, with the envelope represented as SMTP commands. The
18349 &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%& options are forced to the values
18352 escape_string = ".."
18354 when batched SMTP is in use. A full description of the batch SMTP mechanism is
18355 given in section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&. The &(lmtp)& transport does not have a
18356 &%use_bsmtp%& option, because it always delivers using the SMTP protocol.
18358 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
18359 If the generic &%envelope_to_add%& option is set for a batching transport, the
18360 &'Envelope-to:'& header that is added to the message contains all the addresses
18361 that are being processed together. If you are using a batching &(appendfile)&
18362 transport without &%use_bsmtp%&, the only way to preserve the recipient
18363 addresses is to set the &%envelope_to_add%& option.
18365 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "with multiple addresses"
18366 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
18367 If you are using a &(pipe)& transport without BSMTP, and setting the
18368 transport's &%command%& option, you can include &$pipe_addresses$& as part of
18369 the command. This is not a true variable; it is a bit of magic that causes each
18370 of the recipient addresses to be inserted into the command as a separate
18371 argument. This provides a way of accessing all the addresses that are being
18372 delivered in the batch. &*Note:*& This is not possible for pipe commands that
18373 are specififed by a &(redirect)& router.
18379 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18380 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18382 .chapter "The appendfile transport" "CHAPappendfile"
18383 .scindex IIDapptra1 "&(appendfile)& transport"
18384 .scindex IIDapptra2 "transports" "&(appendfile)&"
18385 .cindex "directory creation"
18386 .cindex "creating directories"
18387 The &(appendfile)& transport delivers a message by appending it to an existing
18388 file, or by creating an entirely new file in a specified directory. Single
18389 files to which messages are appended can be in the traditional Unix mailbox
18390 format, or optionally in the MBX format supported by the Pine MUA and
18391 University of Washington IMAP daemon, &'inter alia'&. When each message is
18392 being delivered as a separate file, &"maildir"& format can optionally be used
18393 to give added protection against failures that happen part-way through the
18394 delivery. A third form of separate-file delivery known as &"mailstore"& is also
18395 supported. For all file formats, Exim attempts to create as many levels of
18396 directory as necessary, provided that &%create_directory%& is set.
18398 The code for the optional formats is not included in the Exim binary by
18399 default. It is necessary to set SUPPORT_MBX, SUPPORT_MAILDIR and/or
18400 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE in &_Local/Makefile_& to have the appropriate code
18403 .cindex "quota" "system"
18404 Exim recognises system quota errors, and generates an appropriate message. Exim
18405 also supports its own quota control within the transport, for use when the
18406 system facility is unavailable or cannot be used for some reason.
18408 If there is an error while appending to a file (for example, quota exceeded or
18409 partition filled), Exim attempts to reset the file's length and last
18410 modification time back to what they were before. If there is an error while
18411 creating an entirely new file, the new file is removed.
18413 Before appending to a file, a number of security checks are made, and the
18414 file is locked. A detailed description is given below, after the list of
18417 The &(appendfile)& transport is most commonly used for local deliveries to
18418 users' mailboxes. However, it can also be used as a pseudo-remote transport for
18419 putting messages into files for remote delivery by some means other than Exim.
18420 &"Batch SMTP"& format is often used in this case (see the &%use_bsmtp%&
18425 .section "The file and directory options" "SECTfildiropt"
18426 The &%file%& option specifies a single file, to which the message is appended;
18427 the &%directory%& option specifies a directory, in which a new file containing
18428 the message is created. Only one of these two options can be set, and for
18429 normal deliveries to mailboxes, one of them &'must'& be set.
18431 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
18432 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
18433 However, &(appendfile)& is also used for delivering messages to files or
18434 directories whose names (or parts of names) are obtained from alias,
18435 forwarding, or filtering operations (for example, a &%save%& command in a
18436 user's Exim filter). When such a transport is running, &$local_part$& contains
18437 the local part that was aliased or forwarded, and &$address_file$& contains the
18438 name (or partial name) of the file or directory generated by the redirection
18439 operation. There are two cases:
18442 If neither &%file%& nor &%directory%& is set, the redirection operation
18443 must specify an absolute path (one that begins with &`/`&). This is the most
18444 common case when users with local accounts use filtering to sort mail into
18445 different folders. See for example, the &(address_file)& transport in the
18446 default configuration. If the path ends with a slash, it is assumed to be the
18447 name of a directory. A delivery to a directory can also be forced by setting
18448 &%maildir_format%& or &%mailstore_format%&.
18450 If &%file%& or &%directory%& is set for a delivery from a redirection, it is
18451 used to determine the file or directory name for the delivery. Normally, the
18452 contents of &$address_file$& are used in some way in the string expansion.
18456 .cindex "Sieve filter" "configuring &(appendfile)&"
18457 .cindex "Sieve filter" "relative mailbox path handling"
18458 As an example of the second case, consider an environment where users do not
18459 have home directories. They may be permitted to use Exim filter commands of the
18464 or Sieve filter commands of the form:
18466 require "fileinto";
18467 fileinto "folder23";
18469 In this situation, the expansion of &%file%& or &%directory%& in the transport
18470 must transform the relative path into an appropriate absolute file name. In the
18471 case of Sieve filters, the name &'inbox'& must be handled. It is the name that
18472 is used as a result of a &"keep"& action in the filter. This example shows one
18473 way of handling this requirement:
18475 file = ${if eq{$address_file}{inbox} \
18476 {/var/mail/$local_part} \
18477 {${if eq{${substr_0_1:$address_file}}{/} \
18479 {$home/mail/$address_file} \
18483 With this setting of &%file%&, &'inbox'& refers to the standard mailbox
18484 location, absolute paths are used without change, and other folders are in the
18485 &_mail_& directory within the home directory.
18487 &*Note 1*&: While processing an Exim filter, a relative path such as
18488 &_folder23_& is turned into an absolute path if a home directory is known to
18489 the router. In particular, this is the case if &%check_local_user%& is set. If
18490 you want to prevent this happening at routing time, you can set
18491 &%router_home_directory%& empty. This forces the router to pass the relative
18492 path to the transport.
18494 &*Note 2*&: An absolute path in &$address_file$& is not treated specially;
18495 the &%file%& or &%directory%& option is still used if it is set.
18500 .section "Private options for appendfile"
18501 .cindex "options" "&(appendfile)& transport"
18505 .option allow_fifo appendfile boolean false
18506 .cindex "fifo (named pipe)"
18507 .cindex "named pipe (fifo)"
18508 .cindex "pipe" "named (fifo)"
18509 Setting this option permits delivery to named pipes (FIFOs) as well as to
18510 regular files. If no process is reading the named pipe at delivery time, the
18511 delivery is deferred.
18514 .option allow_symlink appendfile boolean false
18515 .cindex "symbolic link" "to mailbox"
18516 .cindex "mailbox" "symbolic link"
18517 By default, &(appendfile)& will not deliver if the path name for the file is
18518 that of a symbolic link. Setting this option relaxes that constraint, but there
18519 are security issues involved in the use of symbolic links. Be sure you know
18520 what you are doing if you set this. Details of exactly what this option affects
18521 are included in the discussion which follows this list of options.
18524 .option batch_id appendfile string&!! unset
18525 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
18526 However, batching is automatically disabled for &(appendfile)& deliveries that
18527 happen as a result of forwarding or aliasing or other redirection directly to a
18531 .option batch_max appendfile integer 1
18532 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
18535 .option check_group appendfile boolean false
18536 When this option is set, the group owner of the file defined by the &%file%&
18537 option is checked to see that it is the same as the group under which the
18538 delivery process is running. The default setting is false because the default
18539 file mode is 0600, which means that the group is irrelevant.
18542 .option check_owner appendfile boolean true
18543 When this option is set, the owner of the file defined by the &%file%& option
18544 is checked to ensure that it is the same as the user under which the delivery
18545 process is running.
18548 .option check_string appendfile string "see below"
18549 .cindex "&""From""& line"
18550 As &(appendfile)& writes the message, the start of each line is tested for
18551 matching &%check_string%&, and if it does, the initial matching characters are
18552 replaced by the contents of &%escape_string%&. The value of &%check_string%& is
18553 a literal string, not a regular expression, and the case of any letters it
18554 contains is significant.
18556 If &%use_bsmtp%& is set the values of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%&
18557 are forced to &"."& and &".."& respectively, and any settings in the
18558 configuration are ignored. Otherwise, they default to &"From&~"& and
18559 &">From&~"& when the &%file%& option is set, and unset when any of the
18560 &%directory%&, &%maildir%&, or &%mailstore%& options are set.
18562 The default settings, along with &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%&, are
18563 suitable for traditional &"BSD"& mailboxes, where a line beginning with
18564 &"From&~"& indicates the start of a new message. All four options need changing
18565 if another format is used. For example, to deliver to mailboxes in MMDF format:
18566 .cindex "MMDF format mailbox"
18567 .cindex "mailbox" "MMDF format"
18569 check_string = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18570 escape_string = "\1\1\1\1 \n"
18571 message_prefix = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18572 message_suffix = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18574 .option create_directory appendfile boolean true
18575 .cindex "directory creation"
18576 When this option is true, Exim attempts to create any missing superior
18577 directories for the file that it is about to write. A created directory's mode
18578 is given by the &%directory_mode%& option.
18580 The group ownership of a newly created directory is highly dependent on the
18581 operating system (and possibly the file system) that is being used. For
18582 example, in Solaris, if the parent directory has the setgid bit set, its group
18583 is propagated to the child; if not, the currently set group is used. However,
18584 in FreeBSD, the parent's group is always used.
18588 .option create_file appendfile string anywhere
18589 This option constrains the location of files and directories that are created
18590 by this transport. It applies to files defined by the &%file%& option and
18591 directories defined by the &%directory%& option. In the case of maildir
18592 delivery, it applies to the top level directory, not the maildir directories
18595 The option must be set to one of the words &"anywhere"&, &"inhome"&, or
18596 &"belowhome"&. In the second and third cases, a home directory must have been
18597 set for the transport. This option is not useful when an explicit file name is
18598 given for normal mailbox deliveries. It is intended for the case when file
18599 names are generated from users' &_.forward_& files. These are usually handled
18600 by an &(appendfile)& transport called &%address_file%&. See also
18601 &%file_must_exist%&.
18604 .option directory appendfile string&!! unset
18605 This option is mutually exclusive with the &%file%& option, but one of &%file%&
18606 or &%directory%& must be set, unless the delivery is the direct result of a
18607 redirection (see section &<<SECTfildiropt>>&).
18609 When &%directory%& is set, the string is expanded, and the message is delivered
18610 into a new file or files in or below the given directory, instead of being
18611 appended to a single mailbox file. A number of different formats are provided
18612 (see &%maildir_format%& and &%mailstore_format%&), and see section
18613 &<<SECTopdir>>& for further details of this form of delivery.
18616 .option directory_file appendfile string&!! &`q${base62:$tod_epoch}-$inode`&
18618 .cindex "&$inode$&"
18619 When &%directory%& is set, but neither &%maildir_format%& nor
18620 &%mailstore_format%& is set, &(appendfile)& delivers each message into a file
18621 whose name is obtained by expanding this string. The default value generates a
18622 unique name from the current time, in base 62 form, and the inode of the file.
18623 The variable &$inode$& is available only when expanding this option.
18626 .option directory_mode appendfile "octal integer" 0700
18627 If &(appendfile)& creates any directories as a result of the
18628 &%create_directory%& option, their mode is specified by this option.
18631 .option escape_string appendfile string "see description"
18632 See &%check_string%& above.
18635 .option file appendfile string&!! unset
18636 This option is mutually exclusive with the &%directory%& option, but one of
18637 &%file%& or &%directory%& must be set, unless the delivery is the direct result
18638 of a redirection (see section &<<SECTfildiropt>>&). The &%file%& option
18639 specifies a single file, to which the message is appended. One or more of
18640 &%use_fcntl_lock%&, &%use_flock_lock%&, or &%use_lockfile%& must be set with
18643 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
18644 .cindex "locking files"
18645 .cindex "lock files"
18646 If you are using more than one host to deliver over NFS into the same
18647 mailboxes, you should always use lock files.
18649 The string value is expanded for each delivery, and must yield an absolute
18650 path. The most common settings of this option are variations on one of these
18653 file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part
18654 file = /home/$local_part/inbox
18657 .cindex "&""sticky""& bit"
18658 In the first example, all deliveries are done into the same directory. If Exim
18659 is configured to use lock files (see &%use_lockfile%& below) it must be able to
18660 create a file in the directory, so the &"sticky"& bit must be turned on for
18661 deliveries to be possible, or alternatively the &%group%& option can be used to
18662 run the delivery under a group id which has write access to the directory.
18666 .option file_format appendfile string unset
18667 .cindex "file" "mailbox; checking existing format"
18668 This option requests the transport to check the format of an existing file
18669 before adding to it. The check consists of matching a specific string at the
18670 start of the file. The value of the option consists of an even number of
18671 colon-separated strings. The first of each pair is the test string, and the
18672 second is the name of a transport. If the transport associated with a matched
18673 string is not the current transport, control is passed over to the other
18674 transport. For example, suppose the standard &(local_delivery)& transport has
18677 file_format = "From : local_delivery :\
18678 \1\1\1\1\n : local_mmdf_delivery"
18680 Mailboxes that begin with &"From"& are still handled by this transport, but if
18681 a mailbox begins with four binary ones followed by a newline, control is passed
18682 to a transport called &%local_mmdf_delivery%&, which presumably is configured
18683 to do the delivery in MMDF format. If a mailbox does not exist or is empty, it
18684 is assumed to match the current transport. If the start of a mailbox doesn't
18685 match any string, or if the transport named for a given string is not defined,
18686 delivery is deferred.
18689 .option file_must_exist appendfile boolean false
18690 If this option is true, the file specified by the &%file%& option must exist,
18691 and an error occurs if it does not. Otherwise, it is created if it does not
18695 .option lock_fcntl_timeout appendfile time 0s
18696 .cindex "timeout" "mailbox locking"
18697 .cindex "mailbox locking" "blocking and non-blocking"
18698 .cindex "locking files"
18699 By default, the &(appendfile)& transport uses non-blocking calls to &[fcntl()]&
18700 when locking an open mailbox file. If the call fails, the delivery process
18701 sleeps for &%lock_interval%& and tries again, up to &%lock_retries%& times.
18702 Non-blocking calls are used so that the file is not kept open during the wait
18703 for the lock; the reason for this is to make it as safe as possible for
18704 deliveries over NFS in the case when processes might be accessing an NFS
18705 mailbox without using a lock file. This should not be done, but
18706 misunderstandings and hence misconfigurations are not unknown.
18708 On a busy system, however, the performance of a non-blocking lock approach is
18709 not as good as using a blocking lock with a timeout. In this case, the waiting
18710 is done inside the system call, and Exim's delivery process acquires the lock
18711 and can proceed as soon as the previous lock holder releases it.
18713 If &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& is set to a non-zero time, blocking locks, with that
18714 timeout, are used. There may still be some retrying: the maximum number of
18717 (lock_retries * lock_interval) / lock_fcntl_timeout
18719 rounded up to the next whole number. In other words, the total time during
18720 which &(appendfile)& is trying to get a lock is roughly the same, unless
18721 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& is set very large.
18723 You should consider setting this option if you are getting a lot of delayed
18724 local deliveries because of errors of the form
18726 failed to lock mailbox /some/file (fcntl)
18729 .option lock_flock_timeout appendfile time 0s
18730 This timeout applies to file locking when using &[flock()]& (see
18731 &%use_flock%&); the timeout operates in a similar manner to
18732 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%&.
18735 .option lock_interval appendfile time 3s
18736 This specifies the time to wait between attempts to lock the file. See below
18737 for details of locking.
18740 .option lock_retries appendfile integer 10
18741 This specifies the maximum number of attempts to lock the file. A value of zero
18742 is treated as 1. See below for details of locking.
18745 .option lockfile_mode appendfile "octal integer" 0600
18747 This specifies the mode of the created lock file, when a lock file is being
18748 used (see &%use_lockfile%& and &%use_mbx_lock%&).
18752 .option lockfile_timeout appendfile time 30m
18753 .cindex "timeout" "mailbox locking"
18754 When a lock file is being used (see &%use_lockfile%&), if a lock file already
18755 exists and is older than this value, it is assumed to have been left behind by
18756 accident, and Exim attempts to remove it.
18759 .option mailbox_filecount appendfile string&!! unset
18760 .cindex "mailbox" "specifying size of"
18761 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
18762 If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the current
18763 number of files in the mailbox. It must be a decimal number, optionally
18764 followed by K or M. This provides a way of obtaining this information from an
18765 external source that maintains the data.
18768 .option mailbox_size appendfile string&!! unset
18769 .cindex "mailbox" "specifying size of"
18770 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
18771 If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the current
18772 size the mailbox. It must be a decimal number, optionally followed by K or M.
18773 This provides a way of obtaining this information from an external source that
18774 maintains the data. This is likely to be helpful for maildir deliveries where
18775 it is computationally expensive to compute the size of a mailbox.
18779 .option maildir_format appendfile boolean false
18780 .cindex "maildir format" "specifying"
18781 If this option is set with the &%directory%& option, the delivery is into a new
18782 file, in the &"maildir"& format that is used by other mail software. When the
18783 transport is activated directly from a &(redirect)& router (for example, the
18784 &(address_file)& transport in the default configuration), setting
18785 &%maildir_format%& causes the path received from the router to be treated as a
18786 directory, whether or not it ends with &`/`&. This option is available only if
18787 SUPPORT_MAILDIR is present in &_Local/Makefile_&. See section
18788 &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below for further details.
18791 .option maildir_quota_directory_regex appendfile string "See below"
18792 .cindex "maildir format" "quota; directories included in"
18793 .cindex "quota" "maildir; directories included in"
18795 This option is relevant only when &%maildir_use_size_file%& is set. It defines
18796 a regular expression for specifying directories, relative to the quota
18797 directory (see &%quota_directory%&), that should be included in the quota
18798 calculation. The default value is:
18801 maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\..*)$
18803 This includes the &_cur_& and &_new_& directories, and any maildir++ folders
18804 (directories whose names begin with a dot). If you want to exclude the
18806 folder from the count (as some sites do), you need to change this setting to
18808 maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\.(?!Trash).*)$
18811 This uses a negative lookahead in the regular expression to exclude the
18812 directory whose name is &_.Trash_&. When a directory is excluded from quota
18813 calculations, quota processing is bypassed for any messages that are delivered
18814 directly into that directory.
18818 .option maildir_retries appendfile integer 10
18819 This option specifies the number of times to retry when writing a file in
18820 &"maildir"& format. See section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below.
18823 .option maildir_tag appendfile string&!! unset
18824 This option applies only to deliveries in maildir format, and is described in
18825 section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below.
18828 .option maildir_use_size_file appendfile boolean false
18829 .cindex "maildir format" "&_maildirsize_& file"
18831 Setting this option true enables support for &_maildirsize_& files. Exim
18832 creates a &_maildirsize_& file in a maildir if one does not exist, taking the
18833 quota from the &%quota%& option of the transport. If &%quota%& is unset, the
18834 value is zero. See &%maildir_quota_directory_regex%& above and section
18835 &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below for further details.
18839 .option maildirfolder_create_regex appendfile string unset
18840 .cindex "maildir format" "&_maildirfolder_& file"
18841 .cindex "&_maildirfolder_&, creating"
18842 The value of this option is a regular expression. If it is unset, it has no
18843 effect. Otherwise, before a maildir delivery takes place place, the pattern is
18844 matched against the name of the maildir directory, that is, the directory
18845 containing the &_new_& and &_tmp_& subdirectories that will be used for the
18846 delivery. If there is a match, Exim checks for the existence of a file called
18847 &_maildirfolder_& in the directory, and creates it if it does not exist.
18848 See section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& for more details.
18852 .option mailstore_format appendfile boolean false
18853 .cindex "mailstore format" "specifying"
18854 If this option is set with the &%directory%& option, the delivery is into two
18855 new files in &"mailstore"& format. The option is available only if
18856 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE is present in &_Local/Makefile_&. See section &<<SECTopdir>>&
18857 below for further details.
18860 .option mailstore_prefix appendfile string&!! unset
18861 This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is described in
18862 section &<<SECTopdir>>& below.
18865 .option mailstore_suffix appendfile string&!! unset
18866 This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is described in
18867 section &<<SECTopdir>>& below.
18870 .option mbx_format appendfile boolean false
18871 .cindex "locking files"
18872 .cindex "file" "locking"
18873 .cindex "file" "MBX format"
18874 .cindex "MBX format" "specifying"
18875 This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with SUPPORT_MBX
18876 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. If &%mbx_format%& is set with the &%file%& option,
18877 the message is appended to the mailbox file in MBX format instead of
18878 traditional Unix format. This format is supported by Pine4 and its associated
18879 IMAP and POP daemons, by means of the &'c-client'& library that they all use.
18881 &*Note*&: The &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are not
18882 automatically changed by the use of &%mbx_format%&. They should normally be set
18883 empty when using MBX format, so this option almost always appears in this
18890 If none of the locking options are mentioned in the configuration,
18891 &%use_mbx_lock%& is assumed and the other locking options default to false. It
18892 is possible to specify the other kinds of locking with &%mbx_format%&, but
18893 &%use_fcntl_lock%& and &%use_mbx_lock%& are mutually exclusive. MBX locking
18894 interworks with &'c-client'&, providing for shared access to the mailbox. It
18895 should not be used if any program that does not use this form of locking is
18896 going to access the mailbox, nor should it be used if the mailbox file is NFS
18897 mounted, because it works only when the mailbox is accessed from a single host.
18899 If you set &%use_fcntl_lock%& with an MBX-format mailbox, you cannot use
18900 the standard version of &'c-client'&, because as long as it has a mailbox open
18901 (this means for the whole of a Pine or IMAP session), Exim will not be able to
18902 append messages to it.
18905 .option message_prefix appendfile string&!! "see below"
18906 .cindex "&""From""& line"
18907 The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of every message.
18908 The default is unset unless &%file%& is specified and &%use_bsmtp%& is not set,
18909 in which case it is:
18911 message_prefix = "From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}\
18912 {MAILER-DAEMON}} $tod_bsdinbox\n"
18916 .option message_suffix appendfile string&!! "see below"
18917 The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every message.
18918 The default is unset unless &%file%& is specified and &%use_bsmtp%& is not set,
18919 in which case it is a single newline character. The suffix can be suppressed by
18925 .option mode appendfile "octal integer" 0600
18926 If the output file is created, it is given this mode. If it already exists and
18927 has wider permissions, they are reduced to this mode. If it has narrower
18928 permissions, an error occurs unless &%mode_fail_narrower%& is false. However,
18929 if the delivery is the result of a &%save%& command in a filter file specifing
18930 a particular mode, the mode of the output file is always forced to take that
18931 value, and this option is ignored.
18934 .option mode_fail_narrower appendfile boolean true
18935 This option applies in the case when an existing mailbox file has a narrower
18936 mode than that specified by the &%mode%& option. If &%mode_fail_narrower%& is
18937 true, the delivery is deferred (&"mailbox has the wrong mode"&); otherwise Exim
18938 continues with the delivery attempt, using the existing mode of the file.
18941 .option notify_comsat appendfile boolean false
18942 If this option is true, the &'comsat'& daemon is notified after every
18943 successful delivery to a user mailbox. This is the daemon that notifies logged
18944 on users about incoming mail.
18947 .option quota appendfile string&!! unset
18948 .cindex "quota" "imposed by Exim"
18949 This option imposes a limit on the size of the file to which Exim is appending,
18950 or to the total space used in the directory tree when the &%directory%& option
18951 is set. In the latter case, computation of the space used is expensive, because
18952 all the files in the directory (and any sub-directories) have to be
18953 individually inspected and their sizes summed. (See &%quota_size_regex%& and
18954 &%maildir_use_size_file%& for ways to avoid this in environments where users
18955 have no shell access to their mailboxes).
18957 As there is no interlock against two simultaneous deliveries into a
18958 multi-file mailbox, it is possible for the quota to be overrun in this case.
18959 For single-file mailboxes, of course, an interlock is a necessity.
18961 A file's size is taken as its &'used'& value. Because of blocking effects, this
18962 may be a lot less than the actual amount of disk space allocated to the file.
18963 If the sizes of a number of files are being added up, the rounding effect can
18964 become quite noticeable, especially on systems that have large block sizes.
18965 Nevertheless, it seems best to stick to the &'used'& figure, because this is
18966 the obvious value which users understand most easily.
18968 The value of the option is expanded, and must then be a numerical value
18969 (decimal point allowed), optionally followed by one of the letters K, M, or G,
18970 for kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes. If Exim is running on a system with
18971 large file support (Linux and FreeBSD have this), mailboxes larger than 2G can
18974 &*Note*&: A value of zero is interpreted as &"no quota"&.
18976 The expansion happens while Exim is running as root, before it changes uid for
18977 the delivery. This means that files that are inaccessible to the end user can
18978 be used to hold quota values that are looked up in the expansion. When delivery
18979 fails because this quota is exceeded, the handling of the error is as for
18980 system quota failures.
18982 By default, Exim's quota checking mimics system quotas, and restricts the
18983 mailbox to the specified maximum size, though the value is not accurate to the
18984 last byte, owing to separator lines and additional headers that may get added
18985 during message delivery. When a mailbox is nearly full, large messages may get
18986 refused even though small ones are accepted, because the size of the current
18987 message is added to the quota when the check is made. This behaviour can be
18988 changed by setting &%quota_is_inclusive%& false. When this is done, the check
18989 for exceeding the quota does not include the current message. Thus, deliveries
18990 continue until the quota has been exceeded; thereafter, no further messages are
18991 delivered. See also &%quota_warn_threshold%&.
18994 .option quota_directory appendfile string&!! unset
18995 This option defines the directory to check for quota purposes when delivering
18996 into individual files. The default is the delivery directory, or, if a file
18997 called &_maildirfolder_& exists in a maildir directory, the parent of the
18998 delivery directory.
19001 .option quota_filecount appendfile string&!! 0
19002 This option applies when the &%directory%& option is set. It limits the total
19003 number of files in the directory (compare the inode limit in system quotas). It
19004 can only be used if &%quota%& is also set. The value is expanded; an expansion
19005 failure causes delivery to be deferred. A value of zero is interpreted as
19009 .option quota_is_inclusive appendfile boolean true
19010 See &%quota%& above.
19013 .option quota_size_regex appendfile string unset
19014 This option applies when one of the delivery modes that writes a separate file
19015 for each message is being used. When Exim wants to find the size of one of
19016 these files in order to test the quota, it first checks &%quota_size_regex%&.
19017 If this is set to a regular expression that matches the file name, and it
19018 captures one string, that string is interpreted as a representation of the
19019 file's size. The value of &%quota_size_regex%& is not expanded.
19021 This feature is useful only when users have no shell access to their mailboxes
19022 &-- otherwise they could defeat the quota simply by renaming the files. This
19023 facility can be used with maildir deliveries, by setting &%maildir_tag%& to add
19024 the file length to the file name. For example:
19026 maildir_tag = ,S=$message_size
19027 quota_size_regex = ,S=(\d+)
19029 An alternative to &$message_size$& is &$message_linecount$&, which contains the
19030 number of lines in the message.
19032 The regular expression should not assume that the length is at the end of the
19033 file name (even though &%maildir_tag%& puts it there) because maildir MUAs
19034 sometimes add other information onto the ends of message file names.
19038 .option quota_warn_message appendfile string&!! "see below"
19039 See below for the use of this option. If it is not set when
19040 &%quota_warn_threshold%& is set, it defaults to
19042 quota_warn_message = "\
19043 To: $local_part@$domain\n\
19044 Subject: Your mailbox\n\n\
19045 This message is automatically created \
19046 by mail delivery software.\n\n\
19047 The size of your mailbox has exceeded \
19048 a warning threshold that is\n\
19049 set by the system administrator.\n"
19053 .option quota_warn_threshold appendfile string&!! 0
19054 .cindex "quota" "warning threshold"
19055 .cindex "mailbox" "size warning"
19056 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
19057 This option is expanded in the same way as &%quota%& (see above). If the
19058 resulting value is greater than zero, and delivery of the message causes the
19059 size of the file or total space in the directory tree to cross the given
19060 threshold, a warning message is sent. If &%quota%& is also set, the threshold
19061 may be specified as a percentage of it by following the value with a percent
19065 quota_warn_threshold = 75%
19067 If &%quota%& is not set, a setting of &%quota_warn_threshold%& that ends with a
19068 percent sign is ignored.
19070 The warning message itself is specified by the &%quota_warn_message%& option,
19071 and it must start with a &'To:'& header line containing the recipient(s) of the
19072 warning message. These do not necessarily have to include the recipient(s) of
19073 the original message. A &'Subject:'& line should also normally be supplied. You
19074 can include any other header lines that you want. If you do not include a
19075 &'From:'& line, the default is:
19077 From: Mail Delivery System <mailer-daemon@$qualify_domain_sender>
19079 .oindex &%errors_reply_to%&
19080 If you supply a &'Reply-To:'& line, it overrides the global &%errors_reply_to%&
19083 The &%quota%& option does not have to be set in order to use this option; they
19084 are independent of one another except when the threshold is specified as a
19088 .option use_bsmtp appendfile boolean false
19089 .cindex "envelope sender"
19090 If this option is set true, &(appendfile)& writes messages in &"batch SMTP"&
19091 format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included as SMTP commands. If
19092 you want to include a leading HELO command with such messages, you can do
19093 so by setting the &%message_prefix%& option. See section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&
19094 for details of batch SMTP.
19097 .option use_crlf appendfile boolean false
19098 .cindex "carriage return"
19100 This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF sequence
19101 (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed character. In the case
19102 of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to the file is then an exact image
19103 of what would be sent down a real SMTP connection.
19105 The contents of the &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are
19106 written verbatim, so must contain their own carriage return characters if these
19107 are needed. In cases where these options have non-empty defaults, the values
19108 end with a single linefeed, so they must be changed to end with &`\r\n`& if
19109 &%use_crlf%& is set.
19112 .option use_fcntl_lock appendfile boolean "see below"
19113 This option controls the use of the &[fcntl()]& function to lock a file for
19114 exclusive use when a message is being appended. It is set by default unless
19115 &%use_flock_lock%& is set. Otherwise, it should be turned off only if you know
19116 that all your MUAs use lock file locking. When both &%use_fcntl_lock%& and
19117 &%use_flock_lock%& are unset, &%use_lockfile%& must be set.
19120 .option use_flock_lock appendfile boolean false
19121 This option is provided to support the use of &[flock()]& for file locking, for
19122 the few situations where it is needed. Most modern operating systems support
19123 &[fcntl()]& and &[lockf()]& locking, and these two functions interwork with
19124 each other. Exim uses &[fcntl()]& locking by default.
19126 This option is required only if you are using an operating system where
19127 &[flock()]& is used by programs that access mailboxes (typically MUAs), and
19128 where &[flock()]& does not correctly interwork with &[fcntl()]&. You can use
19129 both &[fcntl()]& and &[flock()]& locking simultaneously if you want.
19131 .cindex "Solaris" "&[flock()]& support"
19132 Not all operating systems provide &[flock()]&. Some versions of Solaris do not
19133 have it (and some, I think, provide a not quite right version built on top of
19134 &[lockf()]&). If the OS does not have &[flock()]&, Exim will be built without
19135 the ability to use it, and any attempt to do so will cause a configuration
19138 &*Warning*&: &[flock()]& locks do not work on NFS files (unless &[flock()]&
19139 is just being mapped onto &[fcntl()]& by the OS).
19142 .option use_lockfile appendfile boolean "see below"
19143 If this option is turned off, Exim does not attempt to create a lock file when
19144 appending to a mailbox file. In this situation, the only locking is by
19145 &[fcntl()]&. You should only turn &%use_lockfile%& off if you are absolutely
19146 sure that every MUA that is ever going to look at your users' mailboxes uses
19147 &[fcntl()]& rather than a lock file, and even then only when you are not
19148 delivering over NFS from more than one host.
19150 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
19151 In order to append to an NFS file safely from more than one host, it is
19152 necessary to take out a lock &'before'& opening the file, and the lock file
19153 achieves this. Otherwise, even with &[fcntl()]& locking, there is a risk of
19156 The &%use_lockfile%& option is set by default unless &%use_mbx_lock%& is set.
19157 It is not possible to turn both &%use_lockfile%& and &%use_fcntl_lock%& off,
19158 except when &%mbx_format%& is set.
19161 .option use_mbx_lock appendfile boolean "see below"
19162 This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with SUPPORT_MBX
19163 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. Setting the option specifies that special MBX
19164 locking rules be used. It is set by default if &%mbx_format%& is set and none
19165 of the locking options are mentioned in the configuration. The locking rules
19166 are the same as are used by the &'c-client'& library that underlies Pine and
19167 the IMAP4 and POP daemons that come with it (see the discussion below). The
19168 rules allow for shared access to the mailbox. However, this kind of locking
19169 does not work when the mailbox is NFS mounted.
19171 You can set &%use_mbx_lock%& with either (or both) of &%use_fcntl_lock%& and
19172 &%use_flock_lock%& to control what kind of locking is used in implementing the
19173 MBX locking rules. The default is to use &[fcntl()]& if &%use_mbx_lock%& is set
19174 without &%use_fcntl_lock%& or &%use_flock_lock%&.
19179 .section "Operational details for appending" "SECTopappend"
19180 .cindex "appending to a file"
19181 .cindex "file" "appending"
19182 Before appending to a file, the following preparations are made:
19185 If the name of the file is &_/dev/null_&, no action is taken, and a success
19189 .cindex "directory creation"
19190 If any directories on the file's path are missing, Exim creates them if the
19191 &%create_directory%& option is set. A created directory's mode is given by the
19192 &%directory_mode%& option.
19195 If &%file_format%& is set, the format of an existing file is checked. If this
19196 indicates that a different transport should be used, control is passed to that
19200 .cindex "file" "locking"
19201 .cindex "locking files"
19202 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
19203 If &%use_lockfile%& is set, a lock file is built in a way that will work
19204 reliably over NFS, as follows:
19207 Create a &"hitching post"& file whose name is that of the lock file with the
19208 current time, primary host name, and process id added, by opening for writing
19209 as a new file. If this fails with an access error, delivery is deferred.
19211 Close the hitching post file, and hard link it to the lock file name.
19213 If the call to &[link()]& succeeds, creation of the lock file has succeeded.
19214 Unlink the hitching post name.
19216 Otherwise, use &[stat()]& to get information about the hitching post file, and
19217 then unlink hitching post name. If the number of links is exactly two, creation
19218 of the lock file succeeded but something (for example, an NFS server crash and
19219 restart) caused this fact not to be communicated to the &[link()]& call.
19221 If creation of the lock file failed, wait for &%lock_interval%& and try again,
19222 up to &%lock_retries%& times. However, since any program that writes to a
19223 mailbox should complete its task very quickly, it is reasonable to time out old
19224 lock files that are normally the result of user agent and system crashes. If an
19225 existing lock file is older than &%lockfile_timeout%& Exim attempts to unlink
19226 it before trying again.
19230 A call is made to &[lstat()]& to discover whether the main file exists, and if
19231 so, what its characteristics are. If &[lstat()]& fails for any reason other
19232 than non-existence, delivery is deferred.
19235 .cindex "symbolic link" "to mailbox"
19236 .cindex "mailbox" "symbolic link"
19237 If the file does exist and is a symbolic link, delivery is deferred, unless the
19238 &%allow_symlink%& option is set, in which case the ownership of the link is
19239 checked, and then &[stat()]& is called to find out about the real file, which
19240 is then subjected to the checks below. The check on the top-level link
19241 ownership prevents one user creating a link for another's mailbox in a sticky
19242 directory, though allowing symbolic links in this case is definitely not a good
19243 idea. If there is a chain of symbolic links, the intermediate ones are not
19247 If the file already exists but is not a regular file, or if the file's owner
19248 and group (if the group is being checked &-- see &%check_group%& above) are
19249 different from the user and group under which the delivery is running,
19250 delivery is deferred.
19253 If the file's permissions are more generous than specified, they are reduced.
19254 If they are insufficient, delivery is deferred, unless &%mode_fail_narrower%&
19255 is set false, in which case the delivery is tried using the existing
19259 The file's inode number is saved, and the file is then opened for appending.
19260 If this fails because the file has vanished, &(appendfile)& behaves as if it
19261 hadn't existed (see below). For any other failures, delivery is deferred.
19264 If the file is opened successfully, check that the inode number hasn't
19265 changed, that it is still a regular file, and that the owner and permissions
19266 have not changed. If anything is wrong, defer delivery and freeze the message.
19269 If the file did not exist originally, defer delivery if the &%file_must_exist%&
19270 option is set. Otherwise, check that the file is being created in a permitted
19271 directory if the &%create_file%& option is set (deferring on failure), and then
19272 open for writing as a new file, with the O_EXCL and O_CREAT options,
19273 except when dealing with a symbolic link (the &%allow_symlink%& option must be
19274 set). In this case, which can happen if the link points to a non-existent file,
19275 the file is opened for writing using O_CREAT but not O_EXCL, because
19276 that prevents link following.
19279 .cindex "loop" "while file testing"
19280 If opening fails because the file exists, obey the tests given above for
19281 existing files. However, to avoid looping in a situation where the file is
19282 being continuously created and destroyed, the exists/not-exists loop is broken
19283 after 10 repetitions, and the message is then frozen.
19286 If opening fails with any other error, defer delivery.
19289 .cindex "file" "locking"
19290 .cindex "locking files"
19291 Once the file is open, unless both &%use_fcntl_lock%& and &%use_flock_lock%&
19292 are false, it is locked using &[fcntl()]& or &[flock()]& or both. If
19293 &%use_mbx_lock%& is false, an exclusive lock is requested in each case.
19294 However, if &%use_mbx_lock%& is true, Exim takes out a shared lock on the open
19295 file, and an exclusive lock on the file whose name is
19297 /tmp/.<device-number>.<inode-number>
19300 using the device and inode numbers of the open mailbox file, in accordance with
19301 the MBX locking rules. This file is created with a mode that is specified by
19302 the &%lockfile_mode%& option.
19305 If Exim fails to lock the file, there are two possible courses of action,
19306 depending on the value of the locking timeout. This is obtained from
19307 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& or &%lock_flock_timeout%&, as appropriate.
19309 If the timeout value is zero, the file is closed, Exim waits for
19310 &%lock_interval%&, and then goes back and re-opens the file as above and tries
19311 to lock it again. This happens up to &%lock_retries%& times, after which the
19312 delivery is deferred.
19314 If the timeout has a value greater than zero, blocking calls to &[fcntl()]& or
19315 &[flock()]& are used (with the given timeout), so there has already been some
19316 waiting involved by the time locking fails. Nevertheless, Exim does not give up
19317 immediately. It retries up to
19319 (lock_retries * lock_interval) / <timeout>
19321 times (rounded up).
19324 At the end of delivery, Exim closes the file (which releases the &[fcntl()]&
19325 and/or &[flock()]& locks) and then deletes the lock file if one was created.
19328 .section "Operational details for delivery to a new file" "SECTopdir"
19329 .cindex "delivery" "to single file"
19330 .cindex "&""From""& line"
19331 When the &%directory%& option is set instead of &%file%&, each message is
19332 delivered into a newly-created file or set of files. When &(appendfile)& is
19333 activated directly from a &(redirect)& router, neither &%file%& nor
19334 &%directory%& is normally set, because the path for delivery is supplied by the
19335 router. (See for example, the &(address_file)& transport in the default
19336 configuration.) In this case, delivery is to a new file if either the path name
19337 ends in &`/`&, or the &%maildir_format%& or &%mailstore_format%& option is set.
19339 No locking is required while writing the message to a new file, so the various
19340 locking options of the transport are ignored. The &"From"& line that by default
19341 separates messages in a single file is not normally needed, nor is the escaping
19342 of message lines that start with &"From"&, and there is no need to ensure a
19343 newline at the end of each message. Consequently, the default values for
19344 &%check_string%&, &%message_prefix%&, and &%message_suffix%& are all unset when
19345 any of &%directory%&, &%maildir_format%&, or &%mailstore_format%& is set.
19347 If Exim is required to check a &%quota%& setting, it adds up the sizes of all
19348 the files in the delivery directory by default. However, you can specify a
19349 different directory by setting &%quota_directory%&. Also, for maildir
19350 deliveries (see below) the &_maildirfolder_& convention is honoured.
19353 .cindex "maildir format"
19354 .cindex "mailstore format"
19355 There are three different ways in which delivery to individual files can be
19356 done, controlled by the settings of the &%maildir_format%& and
19357 &%mailstore_format%& options. Note that code to support maildir or mailstore
19358 formats is not included in the binary unless SUPPORT_MAILDIR or
19359 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE, respectively, is set in &_Local/Makefile_&.
19361 .cindex "directory creation"
19362 In all three cases an attempt is made to create the directory and any necessary
19363 sub-directories if they do not exist, provided that the &%create_directory%&
19364 option is set (the default). The location of a created directory can be
19365 constrained by setting &%create_file%&. A created directory's mode is given by
19366 the &%directory_mode%& option. If creation fails, or if the
19367 &%create_directory%& option is not set when creation is required, delivery is
19372 .section "Maildir delivery" "SECTmaildirdelivery"
19373 .cindex "maildir format" "description of"
19375 If the &%maildir_format%& option is true, Exim delivers each message by writing
19376 it to a file whose name is &_tmp/<stime>.H<mtime>P<pid>.<host>_& in the
19377 directory that is defined by the &%directory%& option (the &"delivery
19378 directory"&). If the delivery is successful, the file is renamed into the
19379 &_new_& subdirectory.
19382 In the file name, <&'stime'&> is the current time of day in seconds, and
19383 <&'mtime'&> is the microsecond fraction of the time. After a maildir delivery,
19384 Exim checks that the time-of-day clock has moved on by at least one microsecond
19385 before terminating the delivery process. This guarantees uniqueness for the
19386 file name. However, as a precaution, Exim calls &[stat()]& for the file before
19387 opening it. If any response other than ENOENT (does not exist) is given,
19388 Exim waits 2 seconds and tries again, up to &%maildir_retries%& times.
19391 Before Exim carries out a maildir delivery, it ensures that subdirectories
19392 called &_new_&, &_cur_&, and &_tmp_& exist in the delivery directory. If they
19393 do not exist, Exim tries to create them and any superior directories in their
19394 path, subject to the &%create_directory%& and &%create_file%& options. If the
19395 &%maildirfolder_create_regex%& option is set, and the regular expression it
19396 contains matches the delivery directory, Exim also ensures that a file called
19397 &_maildirfolder_& exists in the delivery directory. If a missing directory or
19398 &_maildirfolder_& file cannot be created, delivery is deferred.
19400 These features make it possible to use Exim to create all the necessary files
19401 and directories in a maildir mailbox, including subdirectories for maildir++
19402 folders. Consider this example:
19404 maildir_format = true
19405 directory = /var/mail/$local_part\
19406 ${if eq{$local_part_suffix}{}{}\
19407 {/.${substr_1:$local_part_suffix}}}
19408 maildirfolder_create_regex = /\.[^/]+$
19410 If &$local_part_suffix$& is empty (there was no suffix for the local part),
19411 delivery is into a toplevel maildir with a name like &_/var/mail/pimbo_& (for
19412 the user called &'pimbo'&). The pattern in &%maildirfolder_create_regex%& does
19413 not match this name, so Exim will not look for or create
19414 &_/var/mail/pimbo/maildirfolder_&, though it will create
19415 &_/var/mail/pimbo/{cur,new,tmp}_& if necessary.
19417 However, if &$local_part_suffix$& contains &`-eximusers`& (for example),
19418 delivery is into the maildir++ folder &_/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers_&, which
19419 does match &%maildirfolder_create_regex%&. In this case, Exim will create
19420 &_/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers/maildirfolder_& as well as the three maildir
19421 directories &_/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers/{cur,new,tmp}_&.
19423 &*Warning:*& Take care when setting &%maildirfolder_create_regex%& that it does
19424 not inadvertently match the toplevel maildir directory, because a
19425 &_maildirfolder_& file at top level would completely break quota calculations.
19428 .cindex "quota" "in maildir delivery"
19429 .cindex "maildir++"
19430 If Exim is required to check a &%quota%& setting before a maildir delivery, and
19431 &%quota_directory%& is not set, it looks for a file called &_maildirfolder_& in
19432 the maildir directory (alongside &_new_&, &_cur_&, &_tmp_&). If this exists,
19433 Exim assumes the directory is a maildir++ folder directory, which is one level
19434 down from the user's top level mailbox directory. This causes it to start at
19435 the parent directory instead of the current directory when calculating the
19436 amount of space used.
19438 One problem with delivering into a multi-file mailbox is that it is
19439 computationally expensive to compute the size of the mailbox for quota
19440 checking. Various approaches have been taken to reduce the amount of work
19441 needed. The next two sections describe two of them. A third alternative is to
19442 use some external process for maintaining the size data, and use the expansion
19443 of the &%mailbox_size%& option as a way of importing it into Exim.
19448 .section "Using tags to record message sizes"
19449 If &%maildir_tag%& is set, the string is expanded for each delivery.
19450 When the maildir file is renamed into the &_new_& sub-directory, the
19451 tag is added to its name. However, if adding the tag takes the length of the
19452 name to the point where the test &[stat()]& call fails with ENAMETOOLONG,
19453 the tag is dropped and the maildir file is created with no tag.
19455 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
19456 Tags can be used to encode the size of files in their names; see
19457 &%quota_size_regex%& above for an example. The expansion of &%maildir_tag%&
19458 happens after the message has been written. The value of the &$message_size$&
19459 variable is set to the number of bytes actually written. If the expansion is
19460 forced to fail, the tag is ignored, but a non-forced failure causes delivery to
19461 be deferred. The expanded tag may contain any printing characters except &"/"&.
19462 Non-printing characters in the string are ignored; if the resulting string is
19463 empty, it is ignored. If it starts with an alphanumeric character, a leading
19468 .section "Using a maildirsize file"
19469 .cindex "quota" "in maildir delivery"
19470 .cindex "maildir format" "&_maildirsize_& file"
19471 If &%maildir_use_size_file%& is true, Exim implements the maildir++ rules for
19472 storing quota and message size information in a file called &_maildirsize_&
19473 within the toplevel maildir directory. If this file does not exist, Exim
19474 creates it, setting the quota from the &%quota%& option of the transport. If
19475 the maildir directory itself does not exist, it is created before any attempt
19476 to write a &_maildirsize_& file.
19478 The &_maildirsize_& file is used to hold information about the sizes of
19479 messages in the maildir, thus speeding up quota calculations. The quota value
19480 in the file is just a cache; if the quota is changed in the transport, the new
19481 value overrides the cached value when the next message is delivered. The cache
19482 is maintained for the benefit of other programs that access the maildir and
19483 need to know the quota.
19485 If the &%quota%& option in the transport is unset or zero, the &_maildirsize_&
19486 file is maintained (with a zero quota setting), but no quota is imposed.
19489 A regular expression is available for controlling which directories in the
19490 maildir participate in quota calculations when a &_maildirsizefile_& is in use.
19491 See the description of the &%maildir_quota_directory_regex%& option above for
19496 .section "Mailstore delivery"
19497 .cindex "mailstore format" "description of"
19498 If the &%mailstore_format%& option is true, each message is written as two
19499 files in the given directory. A unique base name is constructed from the
19500 message id and the current delivery process, and the files that are written use
19501 this base name plus the suffixes &_.env_& and &_.msg_&. The &_.env_& file
19502 contains the message's envelope, and the &_.msg_& file contains the message
19503 itself. The base name is placed in the variable &$mailstore_basename$&.
19505 During delivery, the envelope is first written to a file with the suffix
19506 &_.tmp_&. The &_.msg_& file is then written, and when it is complete, the
19507 &_.tmp_& file is renamed as the &_.env_& file. Programs that access messages in
19508 mailstore format should wait for the presence of both a &_.msg_& and a &_.env_&
19509 file before accessing either of them. An alternative approach is to wait for
19510 the absence of a &_.tmp_& file.
19512 The envelope file starts with any text defined by the &%mailstore_prefix%&
19513 option, expanded and terminated by a newline if there isn't one. Then follows
19514 the sender address on one line, then all the recipient addresses, one per line.
19515 There can be more than one recipient only if the &%batch_max%& option is set
19516 greater than one. Finally, &%mailstore_suffix%& is expanded and the result
19517 appended to the file, followed by a newline if it does not end with one.
19519 If expansion of &%mailstore_prefix%& or &%mailstore_suffix%& ends with a forced
19520 failure, it is ignored. Other expansion errors are treated as serious
19521 configuration errors, and delivery is deferred. The variable
19522 &$mailstore_basename$& is available for use during these expansions.
19525 .section "Non-special new file delivery"
19526 If neither &%maildir_format%& nor &%mailstore_format%& is set, a single new
19527 file is created directly in the named directory. For example, when delivering
19528 messages into files in batched SMTP format for later delivery to some host (see
19529 section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&), a setting such as
19531 directory = /var/bsmtp/$host
19533 might be used. A message is written to a file with a temporary name, which is
19534 then renamed when the delivery is complete. The final name is obtained by
19535 expanding the contents of the &%directory_file%& option.
19536 .ecindex IIDapptra1
19537 .ecindex IIDapptra2
19544 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19545 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19547 .chapter "The autoreply transport"
19548 .scindex IIDauttra1 "transports" "&(autoreply)&"
19549 .scindex IIDauttra2 "&(autoreply)& transport"
19550 The &(autoreply)& transport is not a true transport in that it does not cause
19551 the message to be transmitted. Instead, it generates a new mail message as an
19552 automatic reply to the incoming message. &'References:'& and
19553 &'Auto-Submitted:'& header lines are included. These are constructed according
19554 to the rules in RFCs 2822 and 3834, respectively.
19556 If the router that passes the message to this transport does not have the
19557 &%unseen%& option set, the original message (for the current recipient) is not
19558 delivered anywhere. However, when the &%unseen%& option is set on the router
19559 that passes the message to this transport, routing of the address continues, so
19560 another router can set up a normal message delivery.
19563 The &(autoreply)& transport is usually run as the result of mail filtering, a
19564 &"vacation"& message being the standard example. However, it can also be run
19565 directly from a router like any other transport. To reduce the possibility of
19566 message cascades, messages created by the &(autoreply)& transport always have
19567 empty envelope sender addresses, like bounce messages.
19569 The parameters of the message to be sent can be specified in the configuration
19570 by options described below. However, these are used only when the address
19571 passed to the transport does not contain its own reply information. When the
19572 transport is run as a consequence of a
19574 or &%vacation%& command in a filter file, the parameters of the message are
19575 supplied by the filter, and passed with the address. The transport's options
19576 that define the message are then ignored (so they are not usually set in this
19577 case). The message is specified entirely by the filter or by the transport; it
19578 is never built from a mixture of options. However, the &%file_optional%&,
19579 &%mode%&, and &%return_message%& options apply in all cases.
19581 &(Autoreply)& is implemented as a local transport. When used as a result of a
19582 command in a user's filter file, &(autoreply)& normally runs under the uid and
19583 gid of the user, and with appropriate current and home directories (see chapter
19584 &<<CHAPenvironment>>&).
19586 There is a subtle difference between routing a message to a &(pipe)& transport
19587 that generates some text to be returned to the sender, and routing it to an
19588 &(autoreply)& transport. This difference is noticeable only if more than one
19589 address from the same message is so handled. In the case of a pipe, the
19590 separate outputs from the different addresses are gathered up and returned to
19591 the sender in a single message, whereas if &(autoreply)& is used, a separate
19592 message is generated for each address that is passed to it.
19594 Non-printing characters are not permitted in the header lines generated for the
19595 message that &(autoreply)& creates, with the exception of newlines that are
19596 immediately followed by white space. If any non-printing characters are found,
19597 the transport defers.
19598 Whether characters with the top bit set count as printing characters or not is
19599 controlled by the &%print_topbitchars%& global option.
19601 If any of the generic options for manipulating headers (for example,
19602 &%headers_add%&) are set on an &(autoreply)& transport, they apply to the copy
19603 of the original message that is included in the generated message when
19604 &%return_message%& is set. They do not apply to the generated message itself.
19606 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
19607 If the &(autoreply)& transport receives return code 2 from Exim when it submits
19608 the message, indicating that there were no recipients, it does not treat this
19609 as an error. This means that autoreplies sent to &$sender_address$& when this
19610 is empty (because the incoming message is a bounce message) do not cause
19611 problems. They are just discarded.
19615 .section "Private options for autoreply"
19616 .cindex "options" "&(autoreply)& transport"
19618 .option bcc autoreply string&!! unset
19619 This specifies the addresses that are to receive &"blind carbon copies"& of the
19620 message when the message is specified by the transport.
19623 .option cc autoreply string&!! unset
19624 This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the &'Cc:'& header
19625 when the message is specified by the transport.
19628 .option file autoreply string&!! unset
19629 The contents of the file are sent as the body of the message when the message
19630 is specified by the transport. If both &%file%& and &%text%& are set, the text
19631 string comes first.
19634 .option file_expand autoreply boolean false
19635 If this is set, the contents of the file named by the &%file%& option are
19636 subjected to string expansion as they are added to the message.
19639 .option file_optional autoreply boolean false
19640 If this option is true, no error is generated if the file named by the &%file%&
19641 option or passed with the address does not exist or cannot be read.
19644 .option from autoreply string&!! unset
19645 This specifies the contents of the &'From:'& header when the message is
19646 specified by the transport.
19649 .option headers autoreply string&!! unset
19650 This specifies additional RFC 2822 headers that are to be added to the message
19651 when the message is specified by the transport. Several can be given by using
19652 &"\n"& to separate them. There is no check on the format.
19655 .option log autoreply string&!! unset
19656 This option names a file in which a record of every message sent is logged when
19657 the message is specified by the transport.
19660 .option mode autoreply "octal integer" 0600
19661 If either the log file or the &"once"& file has to be created, this mode is
19665 .option never_mail autoreply "address list&!!" unset
19667 If any run of the transport creates a message with a recipient that matches any
19668 item in the list, that recipient is quietly discarded. If all recipients are
19669 discarded, no message is created. This applies both when the recipients are
19670 generated by a filter and when they are specified in the transport.
19675 .option once autoreply string&!! unset
19676 This option names a file or DBM database in which a record of each &'To:'&
19677 recipient is kept when the message is specified by the transport. &*Note*&:
19678 This does not apply to &'Cc:'& or &'Bcc:'& recipients.
19680 If &%once%& is unset, or is set to an empty string, the message is always sent.
19681 By default, if &%once%& is set to a non-empty file name, the message
19682 is not sent if a potential recipient is already listed in the database.
19683 However, if the &%once_repeat%& option specifies a time greater than zero, the
19684 message is sent if that much time has elapsed since a message was last sent to
19685 this recipient. A setting of zero time for &%once_repeat%& (the default)
19686 prevents a message from being sent a second time &-- in this case, zero means
19689 If &%once_file_size%& is zero, a DBM database is used to remember recipients,
19690 and it is allowed to grow as large as necessary. If &%once_file_size%& is set
19691 greater than zero, it changes the way Exim implements the &%once%& option.
19692 Instead of using a DBM file to record every recipient it sends to, it uses a
19693 regular file, whose size will never get larger than the given value.
19695 In the file, Exim keeps a linear list of recipient addresses and the times at
19696 which they were sent messages. If the file is full when a new address needs to
19697 be added, the oldest address is dropped. If &%once_repeat%& is not set, this
19698 means that a given recipient may receive multiple messages, but at
19699 unpredictable intervals that depend on the rate of turnover of addresses in the
19700 file. If &%once_repeat%& is set, it specifies a maximum time between repeats.
19703 .option once_file_size autoreply integer 0
19704 See &%once%& above.
19707 .option once_repeat autoreply time&!! 0s
19708 See &%once%& above.
19709 After expansion, the value of this option must be a valid time value.
19712 .option reply_to autoreply string&!! unset
19713 This specifies the contents of the &'Reply-To:'& header when the message is
19714 specified by the transport.
19717 .option return_message autoreply boolean false
19718 If this is set, a copy of the original message is returned with the new
19719 message, subject to the maximum size set in the &%return_size_limit%& global
19720 configuration option.
19723 .option subject autoreply string&!! unset
19724 This specifies the contents of the &'Subject:'& header when the message is
19725 specified by the transport. It is tempting to quote the original subject in
19726 automatic responses. For example:
19728 subject = Re: $h_subject:
19730 There is a danger in doing this, however. It may allow a third party to
19731 subscribe your users to an opt-in mailing list, provided that the list accepts
19732 bounce messages as subscription confirmations. Well-managed lists require a
19733 non-bounce message to confirm a subscription, so the danger is relatively
19738 .option text autoreply string&!! unset
19739 This specifies a single string to be used as the body of the message when the
19740 message is specified by the transport. If both &%text%& and &%file%& are set,
19741 the text comes first.
19744 .option to autoreply string&!! unset
19745 This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the &'To:'& header
19746 when the message is specified by the transport.
19747 .ecindex IIDauttra1
19748 .ecindex IIDauttra2
19753 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19754 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19756 .chapter "The lmtp transport" "CHAPLMTP"
19757 .cindex "transports" "&(lmtp)&"
19758 .cindex "&(lmtp)& transport"
19759 .cindex "LMTP" "over a pipe"
19760 .cindex "LMTP" "over a socket"
19761 The &(lmtp)& transport runs the LMTP protocol (RFC 2033) over a pipe to a
19763 or by interacting with a Unix domain socket.
19764 This transport is something of a cross between the &(pipe)& and &(smtp)&
19765 transports. Exim also has support for using LMTP over TCP/IP; this is
19766 implemented as an option for the &(smtp)& transport. Because LMTP is expected
19767 to be of minority interest, the default build-time configure in &_src/EDITME_&
19768 has it commented out. You need to ensure that
19772 .cindex "options" "&(lmtp)& transport"
19773 is present in your &_Local/Makefile_& in order to have the &(lmtp)& transport
19774 included in the Exim binary. The private options of the &(lmtp)& transport are
19777 .option batch_id lmtp string&!! unset
19778 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19781 .option batch_max lmtp integer 1
19782 This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single delivery.
19783 Most LMTP servers can handle several addresses at once, so it is normally a
19784 good idea to increase this value. See the description of local delivery
19785 batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19788 .option command lmtp string&!! unset
19789 This option must be set if &%socket%& is not set. The string is a command which
19790 is run in a separate process. It is split up into a command name and list of
19791 arguments, each of which is separately expanded (so expansion cannot change the
19792 number of arguments). The command is run directly, not via a shell. The message
19793 is passed to the new process using the standard input and output to operate the
19796 .option ignore_quota lmtp boolean false
19797 .cindex "LMTP" "ignoring quota errors"
19798 If this option is set true, the string &`IGNOREQUOTA`& is added to RCPT
19799 commands, provided that the LMTP server has advertised support for IGNOREQUOTA
19800 in its response to the LHLO command.
19802 .option socket lmtp string&!! unset
19803 This option must be set if &%command%& is not set. The result of expansion must
19804 be the name of a Unix domain socket. The transport connects to the socket and
19805 delivers the message to it using the LMTP protocol.
19808 .option timeout lmtp time 5m
19809 The transport is aborted if the created process
19810 or Unix domain socket
19811 does not respond to LMTP commands or message input within this timeout.
19814 Here is an example of a typical LMTP transport:
19818 command = /some/local/lmtp/delivery/program
19822 This delivers up to 20 addresses at a time, in a mixture of domains if
19823 necessary, running as the user &'exim'&.
19827 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19828 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19830 .chapter "The pipe transport" "CHAPpipetransport"
19831 .scindex IIDpiptra1 "transports" "&(pipe)&"
19832 .scindex IIDpiptra2 "&(pipe)& transport"
19833 The &(pipe)& transport is used to deliver messages via a pipe to a command
19834 running in another process. One example is the use of &(pipe)& as a
19835 pseudo-remote transport for passing messages to some other delivery mechanism
19836 (such as UUCP). Another is the use by individual users to automatically process
19837 their incoming messages. The &(pipe)& transport can be used in one of the
19841 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
19842 A router routes one address to a transport in the normal way, and the
19843 transport is configured as a &(pipe)& transport. In this case, &$local_part$&
19844 contains the local part of the address (as usual), and the command that is run
19845 is specified by the &%command%& option on the transport.
19848 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
19849 If the &%batch_max%& option is set greater than 1 (the default is 1), the
19850 transport can handle more than one address in a single run. In this case, when
19851 more than one address is routed to the transport, &$local_part$& is not set
19852 (because it is not unique). However, the pseudo-variable &$pipe_addresses$&
19853 (described in section &<<SECThowcommandrun>>& below) contains all the addresses
19854 that are routed to the transport.
19856 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
19857 A router redirects an address directly to a pipe command (for example, from an
19858 alias or forward file). In this case, &$address_pipe$& contains the text of the
19859 pipe command, and the &%command%& option on the transport is ignored. If only
19860 one address is being transported (&%batch_max%& is not greater than one, or
19861 only one address was redirected to this pipe command), &$local_part$& contains
19862 the local part that was redirected.
19867 The &(pipe)& transport is a non-interactive delivery method. Exim can also
19868 deliver messages over pipes using the LMTP interactive protocol. This is
19869 implemented by the &(lmtp)& transport.
19871 In the case when &(pipe)& is run as a consequence of an entry in a local user's
19872 &_.forward_& file, the command runs under the uid and gid of that user. In
19873 other cases, the uid and gid have to be specified explicitly, either on the
19874 transport or on the router that handles the address. Current and &"home"&
19875 directories are also controllable. See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for
19876 details of the local delivery environment &new("and chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&
19877 for a discussion of local delivery batching.")
19880 .section "Concurrent delivery"
19881 If two messages arrive at almost the same time, and both are routed to a pipe
19882 delivery, the two pipe transports may be run concurrently. You must ensure that
19883 any pipe commands you set up are robust against this happening. If the commands
19884 write to a file, the &%exim_lock%& utility might be of use.
19889 .section "Returned status and data"
19890 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "returned data"
19891 If the command exits with a non-zero return code, the delivery is deemed to
19892 have failed, unless either the &%ignore_status%& option is set (in which case
19893 the return code is treated as zero), or the return code is one of those listed
19894 in the &%temp_errors%& option, which are interpreted as meaning &"try again
19895 later"&. In this case, delivery is deferred. Details of a permanent failure are
19896 logged, but are not included in the bounce message, which merely contains
19897 &"local delivery failed"&.
19899 If the return code is greater than 128 and the command being run is a shell
19900 script, it normally means that the script was terminated by a signal whose
19901 value is the return code minus 128.
19903 If Exim is unable to run the command (that is, if &[execve()]& fails), the
19904 return code is set to 127. This is the value that a shell returns if it is
19905 asked to run a non-existent command. The wording for the log line suggests that
19906 a non-existent command may be the problem.
19908 The &%return_output%& option can affect the result of a pipe delivery. If it is
19909 set and the command produces any output on its standard output or standard
19910 error streams, the command is considered to have failed, even if it gave a zero
19911 return code or if &%ignore_status%& is set. The output from the command is
19912 included as part of the bounce message. The &%return_fail_output%& option is
19913 similar, except that output is returned only when the command exits with a
19914 failure return code, that is, a value other than zero or a code that matches
19919 .section "How the command is run" "SECThowcommandrun"
19920 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "path for command"
19921 The command line is (by default) broken down into a command name and arguments
19922 by the &(pipe)& transport itself. The &%allow_commands%& and
19923 &%restrict_to_path%& options can be used to restrict the commands that may be
19926 .cindex "quoting" "in pipe command"
19927 Unquoted arguments are delimited by white space. If an argument appears in
19928 double quotes, backslash is interpreted as an escape character in the usual
19929 way. If an argument appears in single quotes, no escaping is done.
19931 String expansion is applied to the command line except when it comes from a
19932 traditional &_.forward_& file (commands from a filter file are expanded). The
19933 expansion is applied to each argument in turn rather than to the whole line.
19934 For this reason, any string expansion item that contains white space must be
19935 quoted so as to be contained within a single argument. A setting such as
19937 command = /some/path ${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}
19939 will not work, because the expansion item gets split between several
19940 arguments. You have to write
19942 command = /some/path "${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}"
19944 to ensure that it is all in one argument. The expansion is done in this way,
19945 argument by argument, so that the number of arguments cannot be changed as a
19946 result of expansion, and quotes or backslashes in inserted variables do not
19947 interact with external quoting. However, this leads to problems if you want to
19948 generate multiple arguments (or the command name plus arguments) from a single
19949 expansion. In this situation, the simplest solution is to use a shell. For
19952 command = /bin/sh -c ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/some/file}}
19955 .cindex "transport" "filter"
19956 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
19957 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
19958 Special handling takes place when an argument consists of precisely the text
19959 &`$pipe_addresses`&. This is not a general expansion variable; the only
19960 place this string is recognized is when it appears as an argument for a pipe or
19961 transport filter command. It causes each address that is being handled to be
19962 inserted in the argument list at that point &'as a separate argument'&. This
19963 avoids any problems with spaces or shell metacharacters, and is of use when a
19964 &(pipe)& transport is handling groups of addresses in a batch.
19966 After splitting up into arguments and expansion, the resulting command is run
19967 in a subprocess directly from the transport, &'not'& under a shell. The
19968 message that is being delivered is supplied on the standard input, and the
19969 standard output and standard error are both connected to a single pipe that is
19970 read by Exim. The &%max_output%& option controls how much output the command
19971 may produce, and the &%return_output%& and &%return_fail_output%& options
19972 control what is done with it.
19974 Not running the command under a shell (by default) lessens the security risks
19975 in cases when a command from a user's filter file is built out of data that was
19976 taken from an incoming message. If a shell is required, it can of course be
19977 explicitly specified as the command to be run. However, there are circumstances
19978 where existing commands (for example, in &_.forward_& files) expect to be run
19979 under a shell and cannot easily be modified. To allow for these cases, there is
19980 an option called &%use_shell%&, which changes the way the &(pipe)& transport
19981 works. Instead of breaking up the command line as just described, it expands it
19982 as a single string and passes the result to &_/bin/sh_&. The
19983 &%restrict_to_path%& option and the &$pipe_addresses$& facility cannot be used
19984 with &%use_shell%&, and the whole mechanism is inherently less secure.
19988 .section "Environment variables" "SECTpipeenv"
19989 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "environment for command"
19990 .cindex "environment for pipe transport"
19991 The environment variables listed below are set up when the command is invoked.
19992 This list is a compromise for maximum compatibility with other MTAs. Note that
19993 the &%environment%& option can be used to add additional variables to this
19996 &`DOMAIN `& the domain of the address
19997 &`HOME `& the home directory, if set
19998 &`HOST `& the host name when called from a router (see below)
19999 &`LOCAL_PART `& see below
20000 &`LOCAL_PART_PREFIX `& see below
20001 &`LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX `& see below
20002 &`LOGNAME `& see below
20003 &`MESSAGE_ID `& Exim's local ID for the message
20004 &`PATH `& as specified by the &%path%& option below
20005 &`QUALIFY_DOMAIN `& the sender qualification domain
20006 &`RECIPIENT `& the complete recipient address
20007 &`SENDER `& the sender of the message (empty if a bounce)
20008 &`SHELL `& &`/bin/sh`&
20009 &`TZ `& the value of the &%timezone%& option, if set
20010 &`USER `& see below
20012 When a &(pipe)& transport is called directly from (for example) an &(accept)&
20013 router, LOCAL_PART is set to the local part of the address. When it is
20014 called as a result of a forward or alias expansion, LOCAL_PART is set to
20015 the local part of the address that was expanded. In both cases, any affixes are
20016 removed from the local part, and made available in LOCAL_PART_PREFIX and
20017 LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX, respectively. LOGNAME and USER are set to the
20018 same value as LOCAL_PART for compatibility with other MTAs.
20021 HOST is set only when a &(pipe)& transport is called from a router that
20022 associates hosts with an address, typically when using &(pipe)& as a
20023 pseudo-remote transport. HOST is set to the first host name specified by
20027 If the transport's generic &%home_directory%& option is set, its value is used
20028 for the HOME environment variable. Otherwise, a home directory may be set
20029 by the router's &%transport_home_directory%& option, which defaults to the
20030 user's home directory if &%check_local_user%& is set.
20033 .section "Private options for pipe"
20034 .cindex "options" "&(pipe)& transport"
20038 .option allow_commands pipe "string list&!!" unset
20039 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "permitted commands"
20040 The string is expanded, and is then interpreted as a colon-separated list of
20041 permitted commands. If &%restrict_to_path%& is not set, the only commands
20042 permitted are those in the &%allow_commands%& list. They need not be absolute
20043 paths; the &%path%& option is still used for relative paths. If
20044 &%restrict_to_path%& is set with &%allow_commands%&, the command must either be
20045 in the &%allow_commands%& list, or a name without any slashes that is found on
20046 the path. In other words, if neither &%allow_commands%& nor
20047 &%restrict_to_path%& is set, there is no restriction on the command, but
20048 otherwise only commands that are permitted by one or the other are allowed. For
20051 allow_commands = /usr/bin/vacation
20053 and &%restrict_to_path%& is not set, the only permitted command is
20054 &_/usr/bin/vacation_&. The &%allow_commands%& option may not be set if
20055 &%use_shell%& is set.
20058 .option batch_id pipe string&!! unset
20059 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
20062 .option batch_max pipe integer 1
20063 This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single delivery.
20064 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
20067 .option check_string pipe string unset
20068 As &(pipe)& writes the message, the start of each line is tested for matching
20069 &%check_string%&, and if it does, the initial matching characters are replaced
20070 by the contents of &%escape_string%&, provided both are set. The value of
20071 &%check_string%& is a literal string, not a regular expression, and the case of
20072 any letters it contains is significant. When &%use_bsmtp%& is set, the contents
20073 of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%& are forced to values that implement
20074 the SMTP escaping protocol. Any settings made in the configuration file are
20078 .option command pipe string&!! unset
20079 This option need not be set when &(pipe)& is being used to deliver to pipes
20080 obtained directly from address redirections. In other cases, the option must be
20081 set, to provide a command to be run. It need not yield an absolute path (see
20082 the &%path%& option below). The command is split up into separate arguments by
20083 Exim, and each argument is separately expanded, as described in section
20084 &<<SECThowcommandrun>>& above.
20087 .option environment pipe string&!! unset
20088 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "environment for command"
20089 .cindex "environment for &(pipe)& transport"
20090 This option is used to add additional variables to the environment in which the
20091 command runs (see section &<<SECTpipeenv>>& for the default list). Its value is
20092 a string which is expanded, and then interpreted as a colon-separated list of
20093 environment settings of the form <&'name'&>=<&'value'&>.
20096 .option escape_string pipe string unset
20097 See &%check_string%& above.
20100 .option freeze_exec_fail pipe boolean false
20101 .cindex "exec failure"
20102 .cindex "failure of exec"
20103 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "failure of exec"
20104 Failure to exec the command in a pipe transport is by default treated like
20105 any other failure while running the command. However, if &%freeze_exec_fail%&
20106 is set, failure to exec is treated specially, and causes the message to be
20107 frozen, whatever the setting of &%ignore_status%&.
20110 .option ignore_status pipe boolean false
20111 If this option is true, the status returned by the subprocess that is set up to
20112 run the command is ignored, and Exim behaves as if zero had been returned.
20113 Otherwise, a non-zero status or termination by signal causes an error return
20114 from the transport unless the status value is one of those listed in
20115 &%temp_errors%&; these cause the delivery to be deferred and tried again later.
20117 &*Note*&: This option does not apply to timeouts, which do not return a status.
20118 See the &%timeout_defer%& option for how timeouts are handled.
20120 .option log_defer_output pipe boolean false
20121 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "logging output"
20122 If this option is set, and the status returned by the command is
20123 one of the codes listed in &%temp_errors%& (that is, delivery was deferred),
20124 and any output was produced, the first line of it is written to the main log.
20127 .option log_fail_output pipe boolean false
20128 If this option is set, and the command returns any output, and also ends with a
20129 return code that is neither zero nor one of the return codes listed in
20130 &%temp_errors%& (that is, the delivery failed), the first line of output is
20131 written to the main log. This option and &%log_output%& are mutually exclusive.
20132 Only one of them may be set.
20136 .option log_output pipe boolean false
20137 If this option is set and the command returns any output, the first line of
20138 output is written to the main log, whatever the return code. This option and
20139 &%log_fail_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one of them may be set.
20143 .option max_output pipe integer 20K
20144 This specifies the maximum amount of output that the command may produce on its
20145 standard output and standard error file combined. If the limit is exceeded, the
20146 process running the command is killed. This is intended as a safety measure to
20147 catch runaway processes. The limit is applied independently of the settings of
20148 the options that control what is done with such output (for example,
20149 &%return_output%&). Because of buffering effects, the amount of output may
20150 exceed the limit by a small amount before Exim notices.
20153 .option message_prefix pipe string&!! "see below"
20154 The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of every message.
20155 The default is unset if &%use_bsmtp%& is set. Otherwise it is
20158 From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}{MAILER-DAEMON}}\
20162 .cindex "&%tmail%&"
20163 .cindex "&""From""& line"
20164 This is required by the commonly used &_/usr/bin/vacation_& program.
20165 However, it must &'not'& be present if delivery is to the Cyrus IMAP server,
20166 or to the &%tmail%& local delivery agent. The prefix can be suppressed by
20172 .option message_suffix pipe string&!! "see below"
20173 The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every message.
20174 The default is unset if &%use_bsmtp%& is set. Otherwise it is a single newline.
20175 The suffix can be suppressed by setting
20180 .option path pipe string &`/bin:/usr/bin`&
20181 This option specifies the string that is set up in the PATH environment
20182 variable of the subprocess. If the &%command%& option does not yield an
20183 absolute path name, the command is sought in the PATH directories, in the usual
20184 way. &*Warning*&: This does not apply to a command specified as a transport
20188 .option pipe_as_creator pipe boolean false
20189 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
20190 If the generic &%user%& option is not set and this option is true, the delivery
20191 process is run under the uid that was in force when Exim was originally called
20192 to accept the message. If the group id is not otherwise set (via the generic
20193 &%group%& option), the gid that was in force when Exim was originally called to
20194 accept the message is used.
20197 .option restrict_to_path pipe boolean false
20198 When this option is set, any command name not listed in &%allow_commands%& must
20199 contain no slashes. The command is searched for only in the directories listed
20200 in the &%path%& option. This option is intended for use in the case when a pipe
20201 command has been generated from a user's &_.forward_& file. This is usually
20202 handled by a &(pipe)& transport called &%address_pipe%&.
20205 .option return_fail_output pipe boolean false
20206 If this option is true, and the command produced any output and ended with a
20207 return code other than zero or one of the codes listed in &%temp_errors%& (that
20208 is, the delivery failed), the output is returned in the bounce message.
20209 However, if the message has a null sender (that is, it is itself a bounce
20210 message), output from the command is discarded. This option and
20211 &%return_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one of them may be set.
20215 .option return_output pipe boolean false
20216 If this option is true, and the command produced any output, the delivery is
20217 deemed to have failed whatever the return code from the command, and the output
20218 is returned in the bounce message. Otherwise, the output is just discarded.
20219 However, if the message has a null sender (that is, it is a bounce message),
20220 output from the command is always discarded, whatever the setting of this
20221 option. This option and &%return_fail_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one
20222 of them may be set.
20226 .option temp_errors pipe "string list" "see below"
20227 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "temporary failure"
20228 This option contains either a colon-separated list of numbers, or a single
20229 asterisk. If &%ignore_status%& is false
20230 and &%return_output%& is not set,
20231 and the command exits with a non-zero return code, the failure is treated as
20232 temporary and the delivery is deferred if the return code matches one of the
20233 numbers, or if the setting is a single asterisk. Otherwise, non-zero return
20234 codes are treated as permanent errors. The default setting contains the codes
20235 defined by EX_TEMPFAIL and EX_CANTCREAT in &_sysexits.h_&. If Exim is
20236 compiled on a system that does not define these macros, it assumes values of 75
20237 and 73, respectively.
20240 .option timeout pipe time 1h
20241 If the command fails to complete within this time, it is killed. This normally
20242 causes the delivery to fail (but see &%timeout_defer%&). A zero time interval
20243 specifies no timeout. In order to ensure that any subprocesses created by the
20244 command are also killed, Exim makes the initial process a process group leader,
20245 and kills the whole process group on a timeout. However, this can be defeated
20246 if one of the processes starts a new process group.
20248 .option timeout_defer pipe boolean false
20249 A timeout in a &(pipe)& transport, either in the command that the transport
20250 runs, or in a transport filter that is associated with it, is by default
20251 treated as a hard error, and the delivery fails. However, if &%timeout_defer%&
20252 is set true, both kinds of timeout become temporary errors, causing the
20253 delivery to be deferred.
20255 .option umask pipe "octal integer" 022
20256 This specifies the umask setting for the subprocess that runs the command.
20259 .option use_bsmtp pipe boolean false
20260 .cindex "envelope sender"
20261 If this option is set true, the &(pipe)& transport writes messages in &"batch
20262 SMTP"& format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included as SMTP
20263 commands. If you want to include a leading HELO command with such messages,
20264 you can do so by setting the &%message_prefix%& option. See section
20265 &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>& for details of batch SMTP.
20267 .option use_classresources pipe boolean false
20268 .cindex "class resources (BSD)"
20269 This option is available only when Exim is running on FreeBSD, NetBSD, or
20270 BSD/OS. If it is set true, the &[setclassresources()]& function is used to set
20271 resource limits when a &(pipe)& transport is run to perform a delivery. The
20272 limits for the uid under which the pipe is to run are obtained from the login
20276 .option use_crlf pipe boolean false
20277 .cindex "carriage return"
20279 This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF sequence
20280 (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed character. In the case
20281 of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to the pipe is then an exact image
20282 of what would be sent down a real SMTP connection.
20284 The contents of the &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are
20285 written verbatim, so must contain their own carriage return characters if these
20286 are needed. Since the default values for both &%message_prefix%& and
20287 &%message_suffix%& end with a single linefeed, their values must be changed to
20288 end with &`\r\n`& if &%use_crlf%& is set.
20291 .option use_shell pipe boolean false
20292 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
20293 If this option is set, it causes the command to be passed to &_/bin/sh_&
20294 instead of being run directly from the transport, as described in section
20295 &<<SECThowcommandrun>>&. This is less secure, but is needed in some situations
20296 where the command is expected to be run under a shell and cannot easily be
20297 modified. The &%allow_commands%& and &%restrict_to_path%& options, and the
20298 &`$pipe_addresses`& facility are incompatible with &%use_shell%&. The
20299 command is expanded as a single string, and handed to &_/bin/sh_& as data for
20304 .section "Using an external local delivery agent"
20305 .cindex "local delivery" "using an external agent"
20306 .cindex "&'procmail'&"
20307 .cindex "external local delivery"
20308 .cindex "delivery" "&'procmail'&"
20309 .cindex "delivery" "by external agent"
20310 The &(pipe)& transport can be used to pass all messages that require local
20311 delivery to a separate local delivery agent such as &%procmail%&. When doing
20312 this, care must be taken to ensure that the pipe is run under an appropriate
20313 uid and gid. In some configurations one wants this to be a uid that is trusted
20314 by the delivery agent to supply the correct sender of the message. It may be
20315 necessary to recompile or reconfigure the delivery agent so that it trusts an
20316 appropriate user. The following is an example transport and router
20317 configuration for &%procmail%&:
20322 command = /usr/local/bin/procmail -d $local_part
20326 check_string = "From "
20327 escape_string = ">From "
20335 transport = procmail_pipe
20337 In this example, the pipe is run as the local user, but with the group set to
20338 &'mail'&. An alternative is to run the pipe as a specific user such as &'mail'&
20339 or &'exim'&, but in this case you must arrange for &%procmail%& to trust that
20340 user to supply a correct sender address. If you do not specify either a
20341 &%group%& or a &%user%& option, the pipe command is run as the local user. The
20342 home directory is the user's home directory by default.
20344 &*Note*&: The command that the pipe transport runs does &'not'& begin with
20348 as shown in some &%procmail%& documentation, because Exim does not by default
20349 use a shell to run pipe commands.
20352 The next example shows a transport and a router for a system where local
20353 deliveries are handled by the Cyrus IMAP server.
20356 local_delivery_cyrus:
20358 command = /usr/cyrus/bin/deliver \
20359 -m ${substr_1:$local_part_suffix} -- $local_part
20371 local_part_suffix = .*
20372 transport = local_delivery_cyrus
20374 Note the unsetting of &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%&, and the use of
20375 &%return_output%& to cause any text written by Cyrus to be returned to the
20377 .ecindex IIDpiptra1
20378 .ecindex IIDpiptra2
20381 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20382 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20384 .chapter "The smtp transport" "CHAPsmtptrans"
20385 .scindex IIDsmttra1 "transports" "&(smtp)&"
20386 .scindex IIDsmttra2 "&(smtp)& transport"
20387 The &(smtp)& transport delivers messages over TCP/IP connections using the SMTP
20388 or LMTP protocol. The list of hosts to try can either be taken from the address
20389 that is being processed (having been set up by the router), or specified
20390 explicitly for the transport. Timeout and retry processing (see chapter
20391 &<<CHAPretry>>&) is applied to each IP address independently.
20394 .section "Multiple messages on a single connection"
20395 The sending of multiple messages over a single TCP/IP connection can arise in
20399 If a message contains more than &%max_rcpt%& (see below) addresses that are
20400 routed to the same host, more than one copy of the message has to be sent to
20401 that host. In this situation, multiple copies may be sent in a single run of
20402 the &(smtp)& transport over a single TCP/IP connection. (What Exim actually
20403 does when it has too many addresses to send in one message also depends on the
20404 value of the global &%remote_max_parallel%& option. Details are given in
20405 section &<<SECToutSMTPTCP>>&.)
20407 .cindex "hints database" "remembering routing"
20408 When a message has been successfully delivered over a TCP/IP connection, Exim
20409 looks in its hints database to see if there are any other messages awaiting a
20410 connection to the same host. If there are, a new delivery process is started
20411 for one of them, and the current TCP/IP connection is passed on to it. The new
20412 process may in turn send multiple copies and possibly create yet another
20417 For each copy sent over the same TCP/IP connection, a sequence counter is
20418 incremented, and if it ever gets to the value of &%connection_max_messages%&,
20419 no further messages are sent over that connection.
20423 .section "Use of the $host variable"
20425 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20426 At the start of a run of the &(smtp)& transport, the values of &$host$& and
20427 &$host_address$& are the name and IP address of the first host on the host list
20428 passed by the router. However, when the transport is about to connect to a
20429 specific host, and while it is connected to that host, &$host$& and
20430 &$host_address$& are set to the values for that host. These are the values
20431 that are in force when the &%helo_data%&, &%hosts_try_auth%&, &%interface%&,
20432 &%serialize_hosts%&, and the various TLS options are expanded.
20436 .section "Private options for smtp"
20437 .cindex "options" "&(smtp)& transport"
20438 The private options of the &(smtp)& transport are as follows:
20441 .option allow_localhost smtp boolean false
20442 .cindex "local host" "sending to"
20443 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on transport"
20444 When a host specified in &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& (see below) turns out
20445 to be the local host, or is listed in &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, delivery is
20446 deferred by default. However, if &%allow_localhost%& is set, Exim goes on to do
20447 the delivery anyway. This should be used only in special cases when the
20448 configuration ensures that no looping will result (for example, a differently
20449 configured Exim is listening on the port to which the message is sent).
20452 .option authenticated_sender smtp string&!! unset
20454 When Exim has authenticated as a client, or if &%authenticated_sender_force%&
20455 is true, this option sets a value for the AUTH= item on outgoing MAIL commands,
20456 overriding any existing authenticated sender value. If the string expansion is
20457 forced to fail, the option is ignored. Other expansion failures cause delivery
20458 to be deferred. If the result of expansion is an empty string, that is also
20461 If the SMTP session is not authenticated, the expansion of
20462 &%authenticated_sender%& still happens (and can cause the delivery to be
20463 deferred if it fails), but no AUTH= item is added to MAIL commands
20464 unless &%authenticated_sender_force%& is true.
20466 This option allows you to use the &(smtp)& transport in LMTP mode to
20467 deliver mail to Cyrus IMAP and provide the proper local part as the
20468 &"authenticated sender"&, via a setting such as:
20470 authenticated_sender = $local_part
20472 This removes the need for IMAP subfolders to be assigned special ACLs to
20473 allow direct delivery to those subfolders.
20475 Because of expected uses such as that just described for Cyrus (when no
20476 domain is involved), there is no checking on the syntax of the provided
20480 .option authenticated_sender_force smtp boolean false
20481 If this option is set true, the &%authenticated_sender%& option's value
20482 is used for the AUTH= item on outgoing MAIL commands, even if Exim has not
20483 authenticated as a client.
20486 .option command_timeout smtp time 5m
20487 This sets a timeout for receiving a response to an SMTP command that has been
20488 sent out. It is also used when waiting for the initial banner line from the
20489 remote host. Its value must not be zero.
20492 .option connect_timeout smtp time 5m
20493 This sets a timeout for the &[connect()]& function, which sets up a TCP/IP call
20494 to a remote host. A setting of zero allows the system timeout (typically
20495 several minutes) to act. To have any effect, the value of this option must be
20496 less than the system timeout. However, it has been observed that on some
20497 systems there is no system timeout, which is why the default value for this
20498 option is 5 minutes, a value recommended by RFC 1123.
20501 .option connection_max_messages smtp integer 500
20502 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
20503 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
20504 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
20505 This controls the maximum number of separate message deliveries that are sent
20506 over a single TCP/IP connection. If the value is zero, there is no limit.
20507 For testing purposes, this value can be overridden by the &%-oB%& command line
20511 .option data_timeout smtp time 5m
20512 This sets a timeout for the transmission of each block in the data portion of
20513 the message. As a result, the overall timeout for a message depends on the size
20514 of the message. Its value must not be zero. See also &%final_timeout%&.
20517 .option delay_after_cutoff smtp boolean true
20518 This option controls what happens when all remote IP addresses for a given
20519 domain have been inaccessible for so long that they have passed their retry
20522 In the default state, if the next retry time has not been reached for any of
20523 them, the address is bounced without trying any deliveries. In other words,
20524 Exim delays retrying an IP address after the final cutoff time until a new
20525 retry time is reached, and can therefore bounce an address without ever trying
20526 a delivery, when machines have been down for a long time. Some people are
20527 unhappy at this prospect, so...
20529 If &%delay_after_cutoff%& is set false, Exim behaves differently. If all IP
20530 addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver to those
20531 IP addresses that have not been tried since the message arrived. If there are
20532 none, of if they all fail, the address is bounced. In other words, it does not
20533 delay when a new message arrives, but immediately tries those expired IP
20534 addresses that haven't been tried since the message arrived. If there is a
20535 continuous stream of messages for the dead hosts, unsetting
20536 &%delay_after_cutoff%& means that there will be many more attempts to deliver
20540 .option dns_qualify_single smtp boolean true
20541 If the &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& option is being used,
20542 and the &%gethostbyname%& option is false,
20543 the RES_DEFNAMES resolver option is set. See the &%qualify_single%& option
20544 in chapter &<<CHAPdnslookup>>& for more details.
20547 .option dns_search_parents smtp boolean false
20548 .cindex "&%search_parents%&"
20549 If the &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& option is being used, and the
20550 &%gethostbyname%& option is false, the RES_DNSRCH resolver option is set.
20551 See the &%search_parents%& option in chapter &<<CHAPdnslookup>>& for more
20556 .option fallback_hosts smtp "string list" unset
20557 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on transport"
20558 String expansion is not applied to this option. The argument must be a
20559 colon-separated list of host names or IP addresses, optionally also including
20560 port numbers, though the separator can be changed, as described in section
20561 &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. Each individual item in the list is the same as an
20562 item in a &%route_list%& setting for the &(manualroute)& router, as described
20563 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&.
20565 Fallback hosts can also be specified on routers, which associate them with the
20566 addresses they process. As for the &%hosts%& option without &%hosts_override%&,
20567 &%fallback_hosts%& specified on the transport is used only if the address does
20568 not have its own associated fallback host list. Unlike &%hosts%&, a setting of
20569 &%fallback_hosts%& on an address is not overridden by &%hosts_override%&.
20570 However, &%hosts_randomize%& does apply to fallback host lists.
20572 If Exim is unable to deliver to any of the hosts for a particular address, and
20573 the errors are not permanent rejections, the address is put on a separate
20574 transport queue with its host list replaced by the fallback hosts, unless the
20575 address was routed via MX records and the current host was in the original MX
20576 list. In that situation, the fallback host list is not used.
20578 Once normal deliveries are complete, the fallback queue is delivered by
20579 re-running the same transports with the new host lists. If several failing
20580 addresses have the same fallback hosts (and &%max_rcpt%& permits it), a single
20581 copy of the message is sent.
20583 The resolution of the host names on the fallback list is controlled by the
20584 &%gethostbyname%& option, as for the &%hosts%& option. Fallback hosts apply
20585 both to cases when the host list comes with the address and when it is taken
20586 from &%hosts%&. This option provides a &"use a smart host only if delivery
20590 .option final_timeout smtp time 10m
20591 This is the timeout that applies while waiting for the response to the final
20592 line containing just &"."& that terminates a message. Its value must not be
20596 .option gethostbyname smtp boolean false
20597 If this option is true when the &%hosts%& and/or &%fallback_hosts%& options are
20598 being used, names are looked up using &[gethostbyname()]&
20599 (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available)
20600 instead of using the DNS. Of course, that function may in fact use the DNS, but
20601 it may also consult other sources of information such as &_/etc/hosts_&.
20603 .option helo_data smtp string&!! &`$primary_hostname`&
20604 .cindex "HELO argument" "setting"
20605 .cindex "EHLO argument" "setting"
20606 .cindex "LHLO argument" "setting"
20608 The value of this option is expanded, and used as the argument for the EHLO,
20609 HELO, or LHLO command that starts the outgoing SMTP or LMTP session. The
20610 variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& are set to the identity of the remote
20611 host, and can be used to generate different values for different servers.
20614 .option hosts smtp "string list&!!" unset
20615 Hosts are associated with an address by a router such as &(dnslookup)&, which
20616 finds the hosts by looking up the address domain in the DNS, or by
20617 &(manualroute)&, which has lists of hosts in its configuration. However,
20618 email addresses can be passed to the &(smtp)& transport by any router, and not
20619 all of them can provide an associated list of hosts.
20621 The &%hosts%& option specifies a list of hosts to be used if the address being
20622 processed does not have any hosts associated with it. The hosts specified by
20623 &%hosts%& are also used, whether or not the address has its own hosts, if
20624 &%hosts_override%& is set.
20626 The string is first expanded, before being interpreted as a colon-separated
20627 list of host names or IP addresses, possibly including port numbers. The
20628 separator may be changed to something other than colon, as described in section
20629 &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. Each individual item in the list is the same as an
20630 item in a &%route_list%& setting for the &(manualroute)& router, as described
20631 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&. However, note that the &`/MX`& facility
20632 of the &(manualroute)& router is not available here.
20634 If the expansion fails, delivery is deferred. Unless the failure was caused by
20635 the inability to complete a lookup, the error is logged to the panic log as
20636 well as the main log. Host names are looked up either by searching directly for
20637 address records in the DNS or by calling &[gethostbyname()]& (or
20638 &[getipnodebyname()]& when available), depending on the setting of the
20639 &%gethostbyname%& option. When Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, if a host
20640 that is looked up in the DNS has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, both types of
20643 During delivery, the hosts are tried in order, subject to their retry status,
20644 unless &%hosts_randomize%& is set.
20647 .option hosts_avoid_esmtp smtp "host list&!!" unset
20648 .cindex "ESMTP" "avoiding use of"
20649 .cindex "HELO" "forcing use of"
20650 .cindex "EHLO" "avoiding use of"
20651 .cindex "PIPELINING" "avoiding the use of"
20652 This option is for use with broken hosts that announce ESMTP facilities (for
20653 example, PIPELINING) and then fail to implement them properly. When a host
20654 matches &%hosts_avoid_esmtp%&, Exim sends HELO rather than EHLO at the
20655 start of the SMTP session. This means that it cannot use any of the ESMTP
20656 facilities such as AUTH, PIPELINING, SIZE, and STARTTLS.
20659 .option hosts_avoid_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20660 .cindex "TLS" "avoiding for certain hosts"
20661 Exim will not try to start a TLS session when delivering to any host that
20662 matches this list. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20665 .option hosts_max_try smtp integer 5
20666 .cindex "host" "maximum number to try"
20667 .cindex "limit" "number of hosts tried"
20668 .cindex "limit" "number of MX tried"
20669 .cindex "MX record" "maximum tried"
20670 This option limits the number of IP addresses that are tried for any one
20671 delivery in cases where there are temporary delivery errors. Section
20672 &<<SECTvalhosmax>>& describes in detail how the value of this option is used.
20675 .option hosts_max_try_hardlimit smtp integer 50
20676 This is an additional check on the maximum number of IP addresses that Exim
20677 tries for any one delivery. Section &<<SECTvalhosmax>>& describes its use and
20682 .option hosts_nopass_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20683 .cindex "TLS" "passing connection"
20684 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
20685 .cindex "TLS" "multiple message deliveries"
20686 For any host that matches this list, a connection on which a TLS session has
20687 been started will not be passed to a new delivery process for sending another
20688 message on the same connection. See section &<<SECTmulmessam>>& for an
20689 explanation of when this might be needed.
20692 .option hosts_override smtp boolean false
20693 If this option is set and the &%hosts%& option is also set, any hosts that are
20694 attached to the address are ignored, and instead the hosts specified by the
20695 &%hosts%& option are always used. This option does not apply to
20696 &%fallback_hosts%&.
20699 .option hosts_randomize smtp boolean false
20700 .cindex "randomized host list"
20701 .cindex "host" "list of; randomized"
20702 .cindex "fallback" "randomized hosts"
20703 If this option is set, and either the list of hosts is taken from the
20704 &%hosts%& or the &%fallback_hosts%& option, or the hosts supplied by the router
20705 were not obtained from MX records (this includes fallback hosts from the
20706 router), and were not randomizied by the router, the order of trying the hosts
20707 is randomized each time the transport runs. Randomizing the order of a host
20708 list can be used to do crude load sharing.
20710 When &%hosts_randomize%& is true, a host list may be split into groups whose
20711 order is separately randomized. This makes it possible to set up MX-like
20712 behaviour. The boundaries between groups are indicated by an item that is just
20713 &`+`& in the host list. For example:
20715 hosts = host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5
20717 The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two hosts is
20718 randomized for each use, but the first three always end up before the last two.
20719 If &%hosts_randomize%& is not set, a &`+`& item in the list is ignored.
20721 .option hosts_require_auth smtp "host list&!!" unset
20722 .cindex "authentication" "required by client"
20723 This option provides a list of servers for which authentication must succeed
20724 before Exim will try to transfer a message. If authentication fails for
20725 servers which are not in this list, Exim tries to send unauthenticated. If
20726 authentication fails for one of these servers, delivery is deferred. This
20727 temporary error is detectable in the retry rules, so it can be turned into a
20728 hard failure if required. See also &%hosts_try_auth%&, and chapter
20729 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
20732 .option hosts_require_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20733 .cindex "TLS" "requiring for certain servers"
20734 Exim will insist on using a TLS session when delivering to any host that
20735 matches this list. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20736 &*Note*&: This option affects outgoing mail only. To insist on TLS for
20737 incoming messages, use an appropriate ACL.
20739 .option hosts_try_auth smtp "host list&!!" unset
20740 .cindex "authentication" "optional in client"
20741 This option provides a list of servers to which, provided they announce
20742 authentication support, Exim will attempt to authenticate as a client when it
20743 connects. If authentication fails, Exim will try to transfer the message
20744 unauthenticated. See also &%hosts_require_auth%&, and chapter
20745 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
20747 .option interface smtp "string list&!!" unset
20748 .cindex "bind IP address"
20749 .cindex "IP address" "binding"
20751 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20752 This option specifies which interface to bind to when making an outgoing SMTP
20753 call. The variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& refer to the host to which a
20754 connection is about to be made during the expansion of the string. Forced
20755 expansion failure, or an empty string result causes the option to be ignored.
20756 Otherwise, after expansion,
20757 the string must be a list of IP addresses, colon-separated by default, but the
20758 separator can be changed in the usual way.
20761 interface = <; 192.168.123.123 ; 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061
20763 The first interface of the correct type (IPv4 or IPv6) is used for the outgoing
20764 connection. If none of them are the correct type, the option is ignored. If
20765 &%interface%& is not set, or is ignored, the system's IP functions choose which
20766 interface to use if the host has more than one.
20769 .option keepalive smtp boolean true
20770 .cindex "keepalive" "on outgoing connection"
20771 This option controls the setting of SO_KEEPALIVE on outgoing TCP/IP socket
20772 connections. When set, it causes the kernel to probe idle connections
20773 periodically, by sending packets with &"old"& sequence numbers. The other end
20774 of the connection should send a acknowledgement if the connection is still okay
20775 or a reset if the connection has been aborted. The reason for doing this is
20776 that it has the beneficial effect of freeing up certain types of connection
20777 that can get stuck when the remote host is disconnected without tidying up the
20778 TCP/IP call properly. The keepalive mechanism takes several hours to detect
20782 .option lmtp_ignore_quota smtp boolean false
20783 .cindex "LMTP" "ignoring quota errors"
20784 If this option is set true when the &%protocol%& option is set to &"lmtp"&, the
20785 string &`IGNOREQUOTA`& is added to RCPT commands, provided that the LMTP server
20786 has advertised support for IGNOREQUOTA in its response to the LHLO command.
20788 .option max_rcpt smtp integer 100
20789 .cindex "RCPT" "maximum number of outgoing"
20790 This option limits the number of RCPT commands that are sent in a single
20791 SMTP message transaction. Each set of addresses is treated independently, and
20792 so can cause parallel connections to the same host if &%remote_max_parallel%&
20796 .option multi_domain smtp boolean true
20797 .cindex "&$domain$&"
20798 When this option is set, the &(smtp)& transport can handle a number of
20799 addresses containing a mixture of different domains provided they all resolve
20800 to the same list of hosts. Turning the option off restricts the transport to
20801 handling only one domain at a time. This is useful if you want to use
20802 &$domain$& in an expansion for the transport, because it is set only when there
20803 is a single domain involved in a remote delivery.
20806 .option port smtp string&!! "see below"
20807 .cindex "port" "sending TCP/IP"
20808 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting outgoing port"
20809 This option specifies the TCP/IP port on the server to which Exim connects. If
20810 it begins with a digit it is taken as a port number; otherwise it is looked up
20811 using &[getservbyname()]&. The default value is normally &"smtp"&, but if
20812 &%protocol%& is set to &"lmtp"&, the default is &"lmtp"&.
20813 If the expansion fails, or if a port number cannot be found, delivery is
20818 .option protocol smtp string smtp
20819 .cindex "LMTP" "over TCP/IP"
20820 If this option is set to &"lmtp"& instead of &"smtp"&, the default value for
20821 the &%port%& option changes to &"lmtp"&, and the transport operates the LMTP
20822 protocol (RFC 2033) instead of SMTP. This protocol is sometimes used for local
20823 deliveries into closed message stores. Exim also has support for running LMTP
20824 over a pipe to a local process &-- see chapter &<<CHAPLMTP>>&.
20827 .option retry_include_ip_address smtp boolean true
20828 Exim normally includes both the host name and the IP address in the key it
20829 constructs for indexing retry data after a temporary delivery failure. This
20830 means that when one of several IP addresses for a host is failing, it gets
20831 tried periodically (controlled by the retry rules), but use of the other IP
20832 addresses is not affected.
20834 However, in some dialup environments hosts are assigned a different IP address
20835 each time they connect. In this situation the use of the IP address as part of
20836 the retry key leads to undesirable behaviour. Setting this option false causes
20837 Exim to use only the host name. This should normally be done on a separate
20838 instance of the &(smtp)& transport, set up specially to handle the dialup
20842 .option serialize_hosts smtp "host list&!!" unset
20843 .cindex "serializing connections"
20844 .cindex "host" "serializing connections"
20845 Because Exim operates in a distributed manner, if several messages for the same
20846 host arrive at around the same time, more than one simultaneous connection to
20847 the remote host can occur. This is not usually a problem except when there is a
20848 slow link between the hosts. In that situation it may be helpful to restrict
20849 Exim to one connection at a time. This can be done by setting
20850 &%serialize_hosts%& to match the relevant hosts.
20852 .cindex "hints database" "serializing deliveries to a host"
20853 Exim implements serialization by means of a hints database in which a record is
20854 written whenever a process connects to one of the restricted hosts. The record
20855 is deleted when the connection is completed. Obviously there is scope for
20856 records to get left lying around if there is a system or program crash. To
20857 guard against this, Exim ignores any records that are more than six hours old.
20859 If you set up this kind of serialization, you should also arrange to delete the
20860 relevant hints database whenever your system reboots. The names of the files
20861 start with &_misc_& and they are kept in the &_spool/db_& directory. There
20862 may be one or two files, depending on the type of DBM in use. The same files
20863 are used for ETRN serialization.
20866 .option size_addition smtp integer 1024
20867 .cindex "SMTP" "SIZE"
20868 .cindex "message" "size issue for transport filter"
20869 .cindex "size" "of message"
20870 .cindex "transport" "filter"
20871 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
20872 If a remote SMTP server indicates that it supports the SIZE option of the
20873 MAIL command, Exim uses this to pass over the message size at the start of
20874 an SMTP transaction. It adds the value of &%size_addition%& to the value it
20875 sends, to allow for headers and other text that may be added during delivery by
20876 configuration options or in a transport filter. It may be necessary to increase
20877 this if a lot of text is added to messages.
20879 Alternatively, if the value of &%size_addition%& is set negative, it disables
20880 the use of the SIZE option altogether.
20883 .option tls_certificate smtp string&!! unset
20884 .cindex "TLS client certificate" "location of"
20885 .cindex "certificate for client" "location of"
20887 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20888 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which contains the
20889 client's certificate, for possible use when sending a message over an encrypted
20890 connection. The values of &$host$& and &$host_address$& are set to the name and
20891 address of the server during the expansion. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for
20894 &*Note*&: This option must be set if you want Exim to be able to use a TLS
20895 certificate when sending messages as a client. The global option of the same
20896 name specifies the certificate for Exim as a server; it is not automatically
20897 assumed that the same certificate should be used when Exim is operating as a
20901 .option tls_crl smtp string&!! unset
20902 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate revocation list"
20903 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list for client"
20904 This option specifies a certificate revocation list. The expanded value must
20905 be the name of a file that contains a CRL in PEM format.
20908 .option tls_privatekey smtp string&!! unset
20909 .cindex "TLS client private key" "location of"
20911 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20912 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which contains the
20913 client's private key. This is used when sending a message over an encrypted
20914 connection using a client certificate. The values of &$host$& and
20915 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20916 expansion. If this option is unset, or the expansion is forced to fail, or the
20917 result is an empty string, the private key is assumed to be in the same file as
20918 the certificate. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20921 .option tls_require_ciphers smtp string&!! unset
20922 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers"
20923 .cindex "cipher" "requiring specific"
20925 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20926 The value of this option must be a list of permitted cipher suites, for use
20927 when setting up an outgoing encrypted connection. (There is a global option of
20928 the same name for controlling incoming connections.) The values of &$host$& and
20929 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20930 expansion. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS; note that this option
20931 is used in different ways by OpenSSL and GnuTLS (see sections
20932 &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&). For GnuTLS, the order of the
20933 ciphers is a preference order.
20937 .option tls_tempfail_tryclear smtp boolean true
20938 When the server host is not in &%hosts_require_tls%&, and there is a problem in
20939 setting up a TLS session, this option determines whether or not Exim should try
20940 to deliver the message unencrypted. If it is set false, delivery to the
20941 current host is deferred; if there are other hosts, they are tried. If this
20942 option is set true, Exim attempts to deliver unencrypted after a 4&'xx'&
20943 response to STARTTLS. Also, if STARTTLS is accepted, but the subsequent
20944 TLS negotiation fails, Exim closes the current connection (because it is in an
20945 unknown state), opens a new one to the same host, and then tries the delivery
20949 .option tls_verify_certificates smtp string&!! unset
20950 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate verification"
20951 .cindex "certificate" "verification of server"
20953 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20954 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file containing
20955 permitted server certificates, for use when setting up an encrypted connection.
20956 Alternatively, if you are using OpenSSL, you can set
20957 &%tls_verify_certificates%& to the name of a directory containing certificate
20958 files. This does not work with GnuTLS; the option must be set to the name of a
20959 single file if you are using GnuTLS. The values of &$host$& and
20960 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20961 expansion of this option. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20966 .section "How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used" &&&
20968 .cindex "host" "maximum number to try"
20969 .cindex "limit" "hosts; maximum number tried"
20970 There are two options that are concerned with the number of hosts that are
20971 tried when an SMTP delivery takes place. They are &%hosts_max_try%& and
20972 &%hosts_max_try_hardlimit%&.
20975 The &%hosts_max_try%& option limits the number of hosts that are tried
20976 for a single delivery. However, despite the term &"host"& in its name, the
20977 option actually applies to each IP address independently. In other words, a
20978 multihomed host is treated as several independent hosts, just as it is for
20981 Many of the larger ISPs have multiple MX records which often point to
20982 multihomed hosts. As a result, a list of a dozen or more IP addresses may be
20983 created as a result of routing one of these domains.
20985 Trying every single IP address on such a long list does not seem sensible; if
20986 several at the top of the list fail, it is reasonable to assume there is some
20987 problem that is likely to affect all of them. Roughly speaking, the value of
20988 &%hosts_max_try%& is the maximum number that are tried before deferring the
20989 delivery. However, the logic cannot be quite that simple.
20991 Firstly, IP addresses that are skipped because their retry times have not
20992 arrived do not count, and in addition, addresses that are past their retry
20993 limits are also not counted, even when they are tried. This means that when
20994 some IP addresses are past their retry limits, more than the value of
20995 &%hosts_max_retry%& may be tried. The reason for this behaviour is to ensure
20996 that all IP addresses are considered before timing out an email address (but
20997 see below for an exception).
20999 Secondly, when the &%hosts_max_try%& limit is reached, Exim looks down the host
21000 list to see if there is a subsequent host with a different (higher valued) MX.
21001 If there is, that host is considered next, and the current IP address is used
21002 but not counted. This behaviour helps in the case of a domain with a retry rule
21003 that hardly ever delays any hosts, as is now explained:
21005 Consider the case of a long list of hosts with one MX value, and a few with a
21006 higher MX value. If &%hosts_max_try%& is small (the default is 5) only a few
21007 hosts at the top of the list are tried at first. With the default retry rule,
21008 which specifies increasing retry times, the higher MX hosts are eventually
21009 tried when those at the top of the list are skipped because they have not
21010 reached their retry times.
21012 However, it is common practice to put a fixed short retry time on domains for
21013 large ISPs, on the grounds that their servers are rarely down for very long.
21014 Unfortunately, these are exactly the domains that tend to resolve to long lists
21015 of hosts. The short retry time means that the lowest MX hosts are tried every
21016 time. The attempts may be in a different order because of random sorting, but
21017 without the special MX check, the higher MX hosts would never be tried until
21018 all the lower MX hosts had timed out (which might be several days), because
21019 there are always some lower MX hosts that have reached their retry times. With
21020 the special check, Exim considers at least one IP address from each MX value at
21021 every delivery attempt, even if the &%hosts_max_try%& limit has already been
21024 The above logic means that &%hosts_max_try%& is not a hard limit, and in
21025 particular, Exim normally eventually tries all the IP addresses before timing
21026 out an email address. When &%hosts_max_try%& was implemented, this seemed a
21027 reasonable thing to do. Recently, however, some lunatic DNS configurations have
21028 been set up with hundreds of IP addresses for some domains. It can
21029 take a very long time indeed for an address to time out in these cases.
21031 The &%hosts_max_try_hardlimit%& option was added to help with this problem.
21032 Exim never tries more than this number of IP addresses; if it hits this limit
21033 and they are all timed out, the email address is bounced, even though not all
21034 possible IP addresses have been tried.
21035 .ecindex IIDsmttra1
21036 .ecindex IIDsmttra2
21042 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21043 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21045 .chapter "Address rewriting" "CHAPrewrite"
21046 .scindex IIDaddrew "rewriting" "addresses"
21047 There are some circumstances in which Exim automatically rewrites domains in
21048 addresses. The two most common are when an address is given without a domain
21049 (referred to as an &"unqualified address"&) or when an address contains an
21050 abbreviated domain that is expanded by DNS lookup.
21052 Unqualified envelope addresses are accepted only for locally submitted
21053 messages, or for messages that are received from hosts matching
21054 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&, as
21055 appropriate. Unqualified addresses in header lines are qualified if they are in
21056 locally submitted messages, or messages from hosts that are permitted to send
21057 unqualified envelope addresses. Otherwise, unqualified addresses in header
21058 lines are neither qualified nor rewritten.
21060 One situation in which Exim does &'not'& automatically rewrite a domain is
21061 when it is the name of a CNAME record in the DNS. The older RFCs suggest that
21062 such a domain should be rewritten using the &"canonical"& name, and some MTAs
21063 do this. The new RFCs do not contain this suggestion.
21066 .section "Explicitly configured address rewriting"
21067 This chapter describes the rewriting rules that can be used in the
21068 main rewrite section of the configuration file, and also in the generic
21069 &%headers_rewrite%& option that can be set on any transport.
21071 Some people believe that configured address rewriting is a Mortal Sin.
21072 Others believe that life is not possible without it. Exim provides the
21073 facility; you do not have to use it.
21075 The main rewriting rules that appear in the &"rewrite"& section of the
21076 configuration file are applied to addresses in incoming messages, both envelope
21077 addresses and addresses in header lines. Each rule specifies the types of
21078 address to which it applies.
21080 Rewriting of addresses in header lines applies only to those headers that
21081 were received with the message, and, in the case of transport rewriting, those
21082 that were added by a system filter. That is, it applies only to those headers
21083 that are common to all copies of the message. Header lines that are added by
21084 individual routers or transports (and which are therefore specific to
21085 individual recipient addresses) are not rewritten.
21087 In general, rewriting addresses from your own system or domain has some
21088 legitimacy. Rewriting other addresses should be done only with great care and
21089 in special circumstances. The author of Exim believes that rewriting should be
21090 used sparingly, and mainly for &"regularizing"& addresses in your own domains.
21091 Although it can sometimes be used as a routing tool, this is very strongly
21094 There are two commonly encountered circumstances where rewriting is used, as
21095 illustrated by these examples:
21098 The company whose domain is &'hitch.fict.example'& has a number of hosts that
21099 exchange mail with each other behind a firewall, but there is only a single
21100 gateway to the outer world. The gateway rewrites &'*.hitch.fict.example'& as
21101 &'hitch.fict.example'& when sending mail off-site.
21103 A host rewrites the local parts of its own users so that, for example,
21104 &'fp42@hitch.fict.example'& becomes &'Ford.Prefect@hitch.fict.example'&.
21109 .section "When does rewriting happen?"
21110 .cindex "rewriting" "timing of"
21111 .cindex "&ACL;" "rewriting addresses in"
21112 Configured address rewriting can take place at several different stages of a
21113 message's processing.
21115 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
21116 At the start of an ACL for MAIL, the sender address may have been rewritten
21117 by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule (see section &<<SECTrewriteS>>&), but no
21118 ordinary rewrite rules have yet been applied. If, however, the sender address
21119 is verified in the ACL, it is rewritten before verification, and remains
21120 rewritten thereafter. The subsequent value of &$sender_address$& is the
21121 rewritten address. This also applies if sender verification happens in a
21122 RCPT ACL. Otherwise, when the sender address is not verified, it is
21123 rewritten as soon as a message's header lines have been received.
21125 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21126 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21127 Similarly, at the start of an ACL for RCPT, the current recipient's address
21128 may have been rewritten by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule, but no ordinary
21129 rewrite rules have yet been applied to it. However, the behaviour is different
21130 from the sender address when a recipient is verified. The address is rewritten
21131 for the verification, but the rewriting is not remembered at this stage. The
21132 value of &$local_part$& and &$domain$& after verification are always the same
21133 as they were before (that is, they contain the unrewritten &-- except for
21134 SMTP-time rewriting &-- address).
21136 As soon as a message's header lines have been received, all the envelope
21137 recipient addresses are permanently rewritten, and rewriting is also applied to
21138 the addresses in the header lines (if configured). This happens before adding
21139 any header lines that were specified in MAIL or RCPT ACLs, and
21140 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "address rewriting; timing of"
21141 before the DATA ACL and &[local_scan()]& functions are run.
21143 When an address is being routed, either for delivery or for verification,
21144 rewriting is applied immediately to child addresses that are generated by
21145 redirection, unless &%no_rewrite%& is set on the router.
21147 .cindex "envelope sender" "rewriting at transport time"
21148 .cindex "rewriting" "at transport time"
21149 .cindex "header lines" "rewriting at transport time"
21150 At transport time, additional rewriting of addresses in header lines can be
21151 specified by setting the generic &%headers_rewrite%& option on a transport.
21152 This option contains rules that are identical in form to those in the rewrite
21153 section of the configuration file. They are applied to the original message
21154 header lines and any that were added by ACLs or a system filter. They are not
21155 applied to header lines that are added by routers or the transport.
21157 The outgoing envelope sender can be rewritten by means of the &%return_path%&
21158 transport option. However, it is not possible to rewrite envelope recipients at
21164 .section "Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input"
21165 .cindex "rewriting" "testing"
21166 .cindex "testing" "rewriting"
21167 Exim's input rewriting configuration appears in a part of the run time
21168 configuration file headed by &"begin rewrite"&. It can be tested by the
21169 &%-brw%& command line option. This takes an address (which can be a full RFC
21170 2822 address) as its argument. The output is a list of how the address would be
21171 transformed by the rewriting rules for each of the different places it might
21172 appear in an incoming message, that is, for each different header and for the
21173 envelope sender and recipient fields. For example,
21175 exim -brw ph10@exim.workshop.example
21177 might produce the output
21179 sender: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
21180 from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
21181 to: ph10@exim.workshop.example
21182 cc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
21183 bcc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
21184 reply-to: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
21185 env-from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
21186 env-to: ph10@exim.workshop.example
21188 which shows that rewriting has been set up for that address when used in any of
21189 the source fields, but not when it appears as a recipient address. At the
21190 present time, there is no equivalent way of testing rewriting rules that are
21191 set for a particular transport.
21194 .section "Rewriting rules"
21195 .cindex "rewriting" "rules"
21196 The rewrite section of the configuration file consists of lines of rewriting
21199 <&'source pattern'&> <&'replacement'&> <&'flags'&>
21201 Rewriting rules that are specified for the &%headers_rewrite%& generic
21202 transport option are given as a colon-separated list. Each item in the list
21203 takes the same form as a line in the main rewriting configuration (except that
21204 any colons must be doubled, of course).
21206 The formats of source patterns and replacement strings are described below.
21207 Each is terminated by white space, unless enclosed in double quotes, in which
21208 case normal quoting conventions apply inside the quotes. The flags are single
21209 characters which may appear in any order. Spaces and tabs between them are
21212 For each address that could potentially be rewritten, the rules are scanned in
21213 order, and replacements for the address from earlier rules can themselves be
21214 replaced by later rules (but see the &"q"& and &"R"& flags).
21216 The order in which addresses are rewritten is undefined, may change between
21217 releases, and must not be relied on, with one exception: when a message is
21218 received, the envelope sender is always rewritten first, before any header
21219 lines are rewritten. For example, the replacement string for a rewrite of an
21220 address in &'To:'& must not assume that the message's address in &'From:'& has
21221 (or has not) already been rewritten. However, a rewrite of &'From:'& may assume
21222 that the envelope sender has already been rewritten.
21224 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21225 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21226 The variables &$local_part$& and &$domain$& can be used in the replacement
21227 string to refer to the address that is being rewritten. Note that lookup-driven
21228 rewriting can be done by a rule of the form
21232 where the lookup key uses &$1$& and &$2$& or &$local_part$& and &$domain$& to
21233 refer to the address that is being rewritten.
21236 .section "Rewriting patterns"
21237 .cindex "rewriting" "patterns"
21238 .cindex "address list" "in a rewriting pattern"
21239 The source pattern in a rewriting rule is any item which may appear in an
21240 address list (see section &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). It is in fact processed as a
21241 single-item address list, which means that it is expanded before being tested
21242 against the address. As always, if you use a regular expression as a pattern,
21243 you must take care to escape dollar and backslash characters, or use the &`\N`&
21244 facility to suppress string expansion within the regular expression.
21246 Domains in patterns should be given in lower case. Local parts in patterns are
21247 case-sensitive. If you want to do case-insensitive matching of local parts, you
21248 can use a regular expression that starts with &`^(?i)`&.
21250 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in rewriting rules"
21251 After matching, the numerical variables &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. may be set,
21252 depending on the type of match which occurred. These can be used in the
21253 replacement string to insert portions of the incoming address. &$0$& always
21254 refers to the complete incoming address. When a regular expression is used, the
21255 numerical variables are set from its capturing subexpressions. For other types
21256 of pattern they are set as follows:
21259 If a local part or domain starts with an asterisk, the numerical variables
21260 refer to the character strings matched by asterisks, with &$1$& associated with
21261 the first asterisk, and &$2$& with the second, if present. For example, if the
21264 *queen@*.fict.example
21266 is matched against the address &'hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example'& then
21268 $0 = hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example
21272 Note that if the local part does not start with an asterisk, but the domain
21273 does, it is &$1$& that contains the wild part of the domain.
21276 If the domain part of the pattern is a partial lookup, the wild and fixed parts
21277 of the domain are placed in the next available numerical variables. Suppose,
21278 for example, that the address &'foo@bar.baz.example'& is processed by a
21279 rewriting rule of the form
21281 &`*@partial-dbm;/some/dbm/file`& <&'replacement string'&>
21283 and the key in the file that matches the domain is &`*.baz.example`&. Then
21289 If the address &'foo@baz.example'& is looked up, this matches the same
21290 wildcard file entry, and in this case &$2$& is set to the empty string, but
21291 &$3$& is still set to &'baz.example'&. If a non-wild key is matched in a
21292 partial lookup, &$2$& is again set to the empty string and &$3$& is set to the
21293 whole domain. For non-partial domain lookups, no numerical variables are set.
21297 .section "Rewriting replacements"
21298 .cindex "rewriting" "replacements"
21299 If the replacement string for a rule is a single asterisk, addresses that
21300 match the pattern and the flags are &'not'& rewritten, and no subsequent
21301 rewriting rules are scanned. For example,
21303 hatta@lookingglass.fict.example * f
21305 specifies that &'hatta@lookingglass.fict.example'& is never to be rewritten in
21308 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21309 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21310 If the replacement string is not a single asterisk, it is expanded, and must
21311 yield a fully qualified address. Within the expansion, the variables
21312 &$local_part$& and &$domain$& refer to the address that is being rewritten.
21313 Any letters they contain retain their original case &-- they are not lower
21314 cased. The numerical variables are set up according to the type of pattern that
21315 matched the address, as described above. If the expansion is forced to fail by
21316 the presence of &"fail"& in a conditional or lookup item, rewriting by the
21317 current rule is abandoned, but subsequent rules may take effect. Any other
21318 expansion failure causes the entire rewriting operation to be abandoned, and an
21319 entry written to the panic log.
21323 .section "Rewriting flags"
21324 There are three different kinds of flag that may appear on rewriting rules:
21327 Flags that specify which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite: E, F, T, b,
21330 A flag that specifies rewriting at SMTP time: S.
21332 Flags that control the rewriting process: Q, q, R, w.
21335 For rules that are part of the &%headers_rewrite%& generic transport option,
21336 E, F, T, and S are not permitted.
21340 .section "Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite"
21341 .cindex "rewriting" "flags"
21342 If none of the following flag letters, nor the &"S"& flag (see section
21343 &<<SECTrewriteS>>&) are present, a main rewriting rule applies to all headers
21344 and to both the sender and recipient fields of the envelope, whereas a
21345 transport-time rewriting rule just applies to all headers. Otherwise, the
21346 rewriting rule is skipped unless the relevant addresses are being processed.
21348 &`E`& rewrite all envelope fields
21349 &`F`& rewrite the envelope From field
21350 &`T`& rewrite the envelope To field
21351 &`b`& rewrite the &'Bcc:'& header
21352 &`c`& rewrite the &'Cc:'& header
21353 &`f`& rewrite the &'From:'& header
21354 &`h`& rewrite all headers
21355 &`r`& rewrite the &'Reply-To:'& header
21356 &`s`& rewrite the &'Sender:'& header
21357 &`t`& rewrite the &'To:'& header
21359 You should be particularly careful about rewriting &'Sender:'& headers, and
21360 restrict this to special known cases in your own domains.
21363 .section "The SMTP-time rewriting flag" "SECTrewriteS"
21364 .cindex "SMTP" "rewriting malformed addresses"
21365 .cindex "RCPT" "rewriting argument of"
21366 .cindex "MAIL" "rewriting argument of"
21367 The rewrite flag &"S"& specifies a rewrite of incoming envelope addresses at
21368 SMTP time, as soon as an address is received in a MAIL or RCPT command, and
21369 before any other processing; even before syntax checking. The pattern is
21370 required to be a regular expression, and it is matched against the whole of the
21371 data for the command, including any surrounding angle brackets.
21373 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21374 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21375 This form of rewrite rule allows for the handling of addresses that are not
21376 compliant with RFCs 2821 and 2822 (for example, &"bang paths"& in batched SMTP
21377 input). Because the input is not required to be a syntactically valid address,
21378 the variables &$local_part$& and &$domain$& are not available during the
21379 expansion of the replacement string. The result of rewriting replaces the
21380 original address in the MAIL or RCPT command.
21383 .section "Flags controlling the rewriting process"
21384 There are four flags which control the way the rewriting process works. These
21385 take effect only when a rule is invoked, that is, when the address is of the
21386 correct type (matches the flags) and matches the pattern:
21389 If the &"Q"& flag is set on a rule, the rewritten address is permitted to be an
21390 unqualified local part. It is qualified with &%qualify_recipient%&. In the
21391 absence of &"Q"& the rewritten address must always include a domain.
21393 If the &"q"& flag is set on a rule, no further rewriting rules are considered,
21394 even if no rewriting actually takes place because of a &"fail"& in the
21395 expansion. The &"q"& flag is not effective if the address is of the wrong type
21396 (does not match the flags) or does not match the pattern.
21398 The &"R"& flag causes a successful rewriting rule to be re-applied to the new
21399 address, up to ten times. It can be combined with the &"q"& flag, to stop
21400 rewriting once it fails to match (after at least one successful rewrite).
21402 .cindex "rewriting" "whole addresses"
21403 When an address in a header is rewritten, the rewriting normally applies only
21404 to the working part of the address, with any comments and RFC 2822 &"phrase"&
21405 left unchanged. For example, rewriting might change
21407 From: Ford Prefect <fp42@restaurant.hitch.fict.example>
21411 From: Ford Prefect <prefectf@hitch.fict.example>
21414 Sometimes there is a need to replace the whole address item, and this can be
21415 done by adding the flag letter &"w"& to a rule. If this is set on a rule that
21416 causes an address in a header line to be rewritten, the entire address is
21417 replaced, not just the working part. The replacement must be a complete RFC
21418 2822 address, including the angle brackets if necessary. If text outside angle
21419 brackets contains a character whose value is greater than 126 or less than 32
21420 (except for tab), the text is encoded according to RFC 2047. The character set
21421 is taken from &%headers_charset%&, which defaults to ISO-8859-1.
21423 When the &"w"& flag is set on a rule that causes an envelope address to be
21424 rewritten, all but the working part of the replacement address is discarded.
21428 .section "Rewriting examples"
21429 Here is an example of the two common rewriting paradigms:
21431 *@*.hitch.fict.example $1@hitch.fict.example
21432 *@hitch.fict.example ${lookup{$1}dbm{/etc/realnames}\
21433 {$value}fail}@hitch.fict.example bctfrF
21435 Note the use of &"fail"& in the lookup expansion in the second rule, forcing
21436 the string expansion to fail if the lookup does not succeed. In this context it
21437 has the effect of leaving the original address unchanged, but Exim goes on to
21438 consider subsequent rewriting rules, if any, because the &"q"& flag is not
21439 present in that rule. An alternative to &"fail"& would be to supply &$1$&
21440 explicitly, which would cause the rewritten address to be the same as before,
21441 at the cost of a small bit of processing. Not supplying either of these is an
21442 error, since the rewritten address would then contain no local part.
21444 The first example above replaces the domain with a superior, more general
21445 domain. This may not be desirable for certain local parts. If the rule
21447 root@*.hitch.fict.example *
21449 were inserted before the first rule, rewriting would be suppressed for the
21450 local part &'root'& at any domain ending in &'hitch.fict.example'&.
21452 Rewriting can be made conditional on a number of tests, by making use of
21453 &${if$& in the expansion item. For example, to apply a rewriting rule only to
21454 messages that originate outside the local host:
21456 *@*.hitch.fict.example "${if !eq {$sender_host_address}{}\
21457 {$1@hitch.fict.example}fail}"
21459 The replacement string is quoted in this example because it contains white
21462 .cindex "rewriting" "bang paths"
21463 .cindex "bang paths" "rewriting"
21464 Exim does not handle addresses in the form of &"bang paths"&. If it sees such
21465 an address it treats it as an unqualified local part which it qualifies with
21466 the local qualification domain (if the source of the message is local or if the
21467 remote host is permitted to send unqualified addresses). Rewriting can
21468 sometimes be used to handle simple bang paths with a fixed number of
21469 components. For example, the rule
21471 \N^([^!]+)!(.*)@your.domain.example$\N $2@$1
21473 rewrites a two-component bang path &'host.name!user'& as the domain address
21474 &'user@host.name'&. However, there is a security implication in using this as
21475 a global rewriting rule for envelope addresses. It can provide a backdoor
21476 method for using your system as a relay, because the incoming addresses appear
21477 to be local. If the bang path addresses are received via SMTP, it is safer to
21478 use the &"S"& flag to rewrite them as they are received, so that relay checking
21479 can be done on the rewritten addresses.
21486 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21487 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21489 .chapter "Retry configuration" "CHAPretry"
21490 .scindex IIDretconf1 "retry configuration" "description of"
21491 .scindex IIDregconf2 "configuration file" "retry section"
21492 The &"retry"& section of the run time configuration file contains a list of
21493 retry rules that control how often Exim tries to deliver messages that cannot
21494 be delivered at the first attempt. If there are no retry rules, temporary
21495 errors are treated as permanent. The &%-brt%& command line option can be used
21496 to test which retry rule will be used for a given address, domain and error.
21498 The most common cause of retries is temporary failure to deliver to a remote
21499 host because the host is down, or inaccessible because of a network problem.
21500 Exim's retry processing in this case is applied on a per-host (strictly, per IP
21501 address) basis, not on a per-message basis. Thus, if one message has recently
21502 been delayed, delivery of a new message to the same host is not immediately
21503 tried, but waits for the host's retry time to arrive. If the &%retry_defer%&
21504 log selector is set, the message
21505 .cindex "retry" "time not reached"
21506 &"retry time not reached"& is written to the main log whenever a delivery is
21507 skipped for this reason. Section &<<SECToutSMTPerr>>& contains more details of
21508 the handling of errors during remote deliveries.
21510 Retry processing applies to routing as well as to delivering, except as covered
21511 in the next paragraph. The retry rules do not distinguish between these
21512 actions. It is not possible, for example, to specify different behaviour for
21513 failures to route the domain &'snark.fict.example'& and failures to deliver to
21514 the host &'snark.fict.example'&. I didn't think anyone would ever need this
21515 added complication, so did not implement it. However, although they share the
21516 same retry rule, the actual retry times for routing and transporting a given
21517 domain are maintained independently.
21519 When a delivery is not part of a queue run (typically an immediate delivery on
21520 receipt of a message), the routers are always run, and local deliveries are
21521 always attempted, even if retry times are set for them. This makes for better
21522 behaviour if one particular message is causing problems (for example, causing
21523 quota overflow, or provoking an error in a filter file). If such a delivery
21524 suffers a temporary failure, the retry data is updated as normal, and
21525 subsequent delivery attempts from queue runs occur only when the retry time for
21526 the local address is reached.
21530 .section "Retry rules"
21531 .cindex "retry" "rules"
21532 Each retry rule occupies one line and consists of three or four parts,
21533 separated by white space: a pattern, an error name, an optional list of sender
21534 addresses, and a list of retry parameters. The pattern and sender lists must be
21535 enclosed in double quotes if they contain white space. The rules are searched
21536 in order until one is found where the pattern, error name, and sender list (if
21537 present) match the failing host or address, the error that occurred, and the
21538 message's sender, respectively.
21541 The pattern is any single item that may appear in an address list (see section
21542 &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). It is in fact processed as a one-item address list,
21543 which means that it is expanded before being tested against the address that
21544 has been delayed. Address list processing treats a plain domain name as if it
21545 were preceded by &"*@"&, which makes it possible for many retry rules to start
21546 with just a domain. For example,
21548 lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21550 provides a rule for any address in the &'lookingglass.fict.example'& domain,
21553 alice@lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21555 applies only to temporary failures involving the local part &%alice%&.
21556 In practice, almost all rules start with a domain name pattern without a local
21559 .cindex "regular expressions" "in retry rules"
21560 &*Warning*&: If you use a regular expression in a routing rule pattern, it
21561 must match a complete address, not just a domain, because that is how regular
21562 expressions work in address lists.
21564 &`^\Nxyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N * G,1h,10m,2`& &%Wrong%&
21565 &`^\N[^@]+@xyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N * G,1h,10m,2`& &%Right%&
21569 .section "Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors"
21570 When Exim is looking for a retry rule after a routing attempt has failed (for
21571 example, after a DNS timeout), each line in the retry configuration is tested
21572 against the complete address only if &%retry_use_local_part%& is set for the
21573 router. Otherwise, only the domain is used, except when matching against a
21574 regular expression, when the local part of the address is replaced with &"*"&.
21575 A domain on its own can match a domain pattern, or a pattern that starts with
21576 &"*@"&. By default, &%retry_use_local_part%& is true for routers where
21577 &%check_local_user%& is true, and false for other routers.
21579 Similarly, when Exim is looking for a retry rule after a local delivery has
21580 failed (for example, after a mailbox full error), each line in the retry
21581 configuration is tested against the complete address only if
21582 &%retry_use_local_part%& is set for the transport (it defaults true for all
21585 However, when Exim is looking for a retry rule after a remote delivery attempt
21586 suffers an address error (a 4&'xx'& SMTP response for a recipient address), the
21587 whole address is always used as the key when searching the retry rules. The
21588 rule that is found is used to create a retry time for the failing address.
21591 .section "Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors"
21592 For a temporary error that is not related to an individual address (for
21593 example, a connection timeout), each line in the retry configuration is checked
21594 twice. First, the name of the remote host is used as a domain name (preceded by
21595 &"*@"& when matching a regular expression). If this does not match the line,
21596 the domain from the email address is tried in a similar fashion. For example,
21597 suppose the MX records for &'a.b.c.example'& are
21599 a.b.c.example MX 5 x.y.z.example
21603 and the retry rules are
21605 p.q.r.example * F,24h,30m;
21606 a.b.c.example * F,4d,45m;
21608 and a delivery to the host &'x.y.z.example'& suffers a connection failure. The
21609 first rule matches neither the host nor the domain, so Exim looks at the second
21610 rule. This does not match the host, but it does match the domain, so it is used
21611 to calculate the retry time for the host &'x.y.z.example'&. Meanwhile, Exim
21612 tries to deliver to &'p.q.r.example'&. If this also suffers a host error, the
21613 first retry rule is used, because it matches the host.
21615 In other words, temporary failures to deliver to host &'p.q.r.example'& use the
21616 first rule to determine retry times, but for all the other hosts for the domain
21617 &'a.b.c.example'&, the second rule is used. The second rule is also used if
21618 routing to &'a.b.c.example'& suffers a temporary failure.
21620 &*Note*&: The host name is used when matching the patterns, not its IP address.
21621 However, if a message is routed directly to an IP address without the use of a
21622 host name, for example, if a &(manualroute)& router contains a setting such as:
21624 route_list = *.a.example 192.168.34.23
21626 then the &"host name"& that is used when searching for a retry rule is the
21627 textual form of the IP address.
21629 .section "Retry rules for specific errors"
21630 .cindex "retry" "specific errors; specifying"
21631 The second field in a retry rule is the name of a particular error, or an
21632 asterisk, which matches any error. The errors that can be tested for are:
21635 .vitem &%auth_failed%&
21636 Authentication failed when trying to send to a host in the
21637 &%hosts_require_auth%& list in an &(smtp)& transport.
21639 .vitem &%data_4xx%&
21640 A 4&'xx'& error was received for an outgoing DATA command, either immediately
21641 after the command, or after sending the message's data.
21643 .vitem &%mail_4xx%&
21644 A 4&'xx'& error was received for an outgoing MAIL command.
21646 .vitem &%rcpt_4xx%&
21647 A 4&'xx'& error was received for an outgoing RCPT command.
21650 For the three 4&'xx'& errors, either the first or both of the x's can be given
21651 as specific digits, for example: &`mail_45x`& or &`rcpt_436`&. For example, to
21652 recognize 452 errors given to RCPT commands for addresses in a certain domain,
21653 and have retries every ten minutes with a one-hour timeout, you could set up a
21654 retry rule of this form:
21656 the.domain.name rcpt_452 F,1h,10m
21658 These errors apply to both outgoing SMTP (the &(smtp)& transport) and outgoing
21659 LMTP (either the &(lmtp)& transport, or the &(smtp)& transport in LMTP mode).
21662 .vitem &%lost_connection%&
21663 A server unexpectedly closed the SMTP connection. There may, of course,
21664 legitimate reasons for this (host died, network died), but if it repeats a lot
21665 for the same host, it indicates something odd.
21667 .vitem &%refused_MX%&
21668 A connection to a host obtained from an MX record was refused.
21670 .vitem &%refused_A%&
21671 A connection to a host not obtained from an MX record was refused.
21674 A connection was refused.
21676 .vitem &%timeout_connect_MX%&
21677 A connection attempt to a host obtained from an MX record timed out.
21679 .vitem &%timeout_connect_A%&
21680 A connection attempt to a host not obtained from an MX record timed out.
21682 .vitem &%timeout_connect%&
21683 A connection attempt timed out.
21685 .vitem &%timeout_MX%&
21686 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with a host
21687 obtained from an MX record.
21689 .vitem &%timeout_A%&
21690 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with a host not
21691 obtained from an MX record.
21694 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session.
21696 .vitem &%tls_required%&
21697 The server was required to use TLS (it matched &%hosts_require_tls%& in the
21698 &(smtp)& transport), but either did not offer TLS, or it responded with 4&'xx'&
21699 to STARTTLS, or there was a problem setting up the TLS connection.
21702 A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the &(appendfile)&
21705 .vitem &%quota_%&<&'time'&>
21706 .cindex "quota" "error testing in retry rule"
21707 .cindex "retry" "quota error testing"
21708 A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the &(appendfile)&
21709 transport, and the mailbox has not been accessed for <&'time'&>. For example,
21710 &'quota_4d'& applies to a quota error when the mailbox has not been accessed
21714 .cindex "mailbox" "time of last read"
21715 The idea of &%quota_%&<&'time'&> is to make it possible to have shorter
21716 timeouts when the mailbox is full and is not being read by its owner. Ideally,
21717 it should be based on the last time that the user accessed the mailbox.
21718 However, it is not always possible to determine this. Exim uses the following
21722 If the mailbox is a single file, the time of last access (the &"atime"&) is
21723 used. As no new messages are being delivered (because the mailbox is over
21724 quota), Exim does not access the file, so this is the time of last user access.
21726 .cindex "maildir format" "time of last read"
21727 For a maildir delivery, the time of last modification of the &_new_&
21728 subdirectory is used. As the mailbox is over quota, no new files are created in
21729 the &_new_& subdirectory, because no new messages are being delivered. Any
21730 change to the &_new_& subdirectory is therefore assumed to be the result of an
21731 MUA moving a new message to the &_cur_& directory when it is first read. The
21732 time that is used is therefore the last time that the user read a new message.
21734 For other kinds of multi-file mailbox, the time of last access cannot be
21735 obtained, so a retry rule that uses this type of error field is never matched.
21738 The quota errors apply both to system-enforced quotas and to Exim's own quota
21739 mechanism in the &(appendfile)& transport. The &'quota'& error also applies
21740 when a local delivery is deferred because a partition is full (the ENOSPC
21745 .section "Retry rules for specified senders"
21746 .cindex "retry" "rules; sender-specific"
21747 You can specify retry rules that apply only when the failing message has a
21748 specific sender. In particular, this can be used to define retry rules that
21749 apply only to bounce messages. The third item in a retry rule can be of this
21752 &`senders=`&<&'address list'&>
21754 The retry timings themselves are then the fourth item. For example:
21756 * rcpt_4xx senders=: F,1h,30m
21758 matches recipient 4&'xx'& errors for bounce messages sent to any address at any
21759 host. If the address list contains white space, it must be enclosed in quotes.
21762 a.domain rcpt_452 senders="xb.dom : yc.dom" G,8h,10m,1.5
21764 &*Warning*&: This facility can be unhelpful if it is used for host errors
21765 (which do not depend on the recipient). The reason is that the sender is used
21766 only to match the retry rule. Once the rule has been found for a host error,
21767 its contents are used to set a retry time for the host, and this will apply to
21768 all messages, not just those with specific senders.
21770 When testing retry rules using &%-brt%&, you can supply a sender using the
21771 &%-f%& command line option, like this:
21773 exim -f "" -brt user@dom.ain
21775 If you do not set &%-f%& with &%-brt%&, a retry rule that contains a senders
21776 list is never matched.
21782 .section "Retry parameters"
21783 .cindex "retry" "parameters in rules"
21784 The third (or fourth, if a senders list is present) field in a retry rule is a
21785 sequence of retry parameter sets, separated by semicolons. Each set consists of
21787 <&'letter'&>,<&'cutoff time'&>,<&'arguments'&>
21789 The letter identifies the algorithm for computing a new retry time; the cutoff
21790 time is the time beyond which this algorithm no longer applies, and the
21791 arguments vary the algorithm's action. The cutoff time is measured from the
21792 time that the first failure for the domain (combined with the local part if
21793 relevant) was detected, not from the time the message was received.
21795 .cindex "retry" "algorithms"
21796 .cindex "retry" "fixed intervals"
21797 .cindex "retry" "increasing intervals"
21798 .cindex "retry" "random intervals"
21799 The available algorithms are:
21802 &'F'&: retry at fixed intervals. There is a single time parameter specifying
21805 &'G'&: retry at geometrically increasing intervals. The first argument
21806 specifies a starting value for the interval, and the second a multiplier, which
21807 is used to increase the size of the interval at each retry.
21809 &'H'&: retry at randomized intervals. The arguments are as for &'G'&. For each
21810 retry, the previous interval is multiplied by the factor in order to get a
21811 maximum for the next interval. The mininum interval is the first argument of
21812 the parameter, and an actual interval is chosen randomly between them. Such a
21813 rule has been found to be helpful in cluster configurations when all the
21814 members of the cluster restart at once, and may therefore synchronize their
21815 queue processing times.
21818 When computing the next retry time, the algorithm definitions are scanned in
21819 order until one whose cutoff time has not yet passed is reached. This is then
21820 used to compute a new retry time that is later than the current time. In the
21821 case of fixed interval retries, this simply means adding the interval to the
21822 current time. For geometrically increasing intervals, retry intervals are
21823 computed from the rule's parameters until one that is greater than the previous
21824 interval is found. The main configuration variable
21825 .cindex "limit" "retry interval"
21826 .cindex "retry interval" "maximum"
21827 .cindex "&%retry_interval_max%&"
21828 &%retry_interval_max%& limits the maximum interval between retries. It
21829 cannot be set greater than &`24h`&, which is its default value.
21831 A single remote domain may have a number of hosts associated with it, and each
21832 host may have more than one IP address. Retry algorithms are selected on the
21833 basis of the domain name, but are applied to each IP address independently. If,
21834 for example, a host has two IP addresses and one is unusable, Exim will
21835 generate retry times for it and will not try to use it until its next retry
21836 time comes. Thus the good IP address is likely to be tried first most of the
21839 .cindex "hints database" "use for retrying"
21840 Retry times are hints rather than promises. Exim does not make any attempt to
21841 run deliveries exactly at the computed times. Instead, a queue runner process
21842 starts delivery processes for delayed messages periodically, and these attempt
21843 new deliveries only for those addresses that have passed their next retry time.
21844 If a new message arrives for a deferred address, an immediate delivery attempt
21845 occurs only if the address has passed its retry time. In the absence of new
21846 messages, the minimum time between retries is the interval between queue runner
21847 processes. There is not much point in setting retry times of five minutes if
21848 your queue runners happen only once an hour, unless there are a significant
21849 number of incoming messages (which might be the case on a system that is
21850 sending everything to a smart host, for example).
21852 The data in the retry hints database can be inspected by using the
21853 &'exim_dumpdb'& or &'exim_fixdb'& utility programs (see chapter
21854 &<<CHAPutils>>&). The latter utility can also be used to change the data. The
21855 &'exinext'& utility script can be used to find out what the next retry times
21856 are for the hosts associated with a particular mail domain, and also for local
21857 deliveries that have been deferred.
21860 .section "Retry rule examples"
21861 Here are some example retry rules:
21863 alice@wonderland.fict.example quota_5d F,7d,3h
21864 wonderland.fict.example quota_5d
21865 wonderland.fict.example * F,1h,15m; G,2d,1h,2;
21866 lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21867 * refused_A F,2h,20m;
21868 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,5d,8h
21870 The first rule sets up special handling for mail to
21871 &'alice@wonderland.fict.example'& when there is an over-quota error and the
21872 mailbox has not been read for at least 5 days. Retries continue every three
21873 hours for 7 days. The second rule handles over-quota errors for all other local
21874 parts at &'wonderland.fict.example'&; the absence of a local part has the same
21875 effect as supplying &"*@"&. As no retry algorithms are supplied, messages that
21876 fail are bounced immediately if the mailbox has not been read for at least 5
21879 The third rule handles all other errors at &'wonderland.fict.example'&; retries
21880 happen every 15 minutes for an hour, then with geometrically increasing
21881 intervals until two days have passed since a delivery first failed. After the
21882 first hour there is a delay of one hour, then two hours, then four hours, and
21883 so on (this is a rather extreme example).
21885 The fourth rule controls retries for the domain &'lookingglass.fict.example'&.
21886 They happen every 30 minutes for 24 hours only. The remaining two rules handle
21887 all other domains, with special action for connection refusal from hosts that
21888 were not obtained from an MX record.
21890 The final rule in a retry configuration should always have asterisks in the
21891 first two fields so as to provide a general catch-all for any addresses that do
21892 not have their own special handling. This example tries every 15 minutes for 2
21893 hours, then with intervals starting at one hour and increasing by a factor of
21894 1.5 up to 16 hours, then every 8 hours up to 5 days.
21898 .section "Timeout of retry data"
21899 .cindex "timeout" "of retry data"
21900 .cindex "&%retry_data_expire%&"
21901 .cindex "hints database" "data expiry"
21902 .cindex "retry" "timeout of data"
21903 Exim timestamps the data that it writes to its retry hints database. When it
21904 consults the data during a delivery it ignores any that is older than the value
21905 set in &%retry_data_expire%& (default 7 days). If, for example, a host hasn't
21906 been tried for 7 days, Exim will try to deliver to it immediately a message
21907 arrives, and if that fails, it will calculate a retry time as if it were
21908 failing for the first time.
21910 This improves the behaviour for messages routed to rarely-used hosts such as MX
21911 backups. If such a host was down at one time, and happens to be down again when
21912 Exim tries a month later, using the old retry data would imply that it had been
21913 down all the time, which is not a justified assumption.
21915 If a host really is permanently dead, this behaviour causes a burst of retries
21916 every now and again, but only if messages routed to it are rare. It there is a
21917 message at least once every 7 days the retry data never expires.
21922 .section "Long-term failures"
21923 .cindex "delivery failure" "long-term"
21924 .cindex "retry" "after long-term failure"
21925 Special processing happens when an email address has been failing for so long
21926 that the cutoff time for the last algorithm is reached. For example, using the
21927 default retry rule:
21929 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h
21931 the cutoff time is four days. Reaching the retry cutoff is independent of how
21932 long any specific message has been failing; it is the length of continuous
21933 failure for the recipient address that counts.
21935 When the cutoff time is reached for a local delivery, or for all the IP
21936 addresses associated with a remote delivery, a subsequent delivery failure
21937 causes Exim to give up on the address, and a bounce message is generated.
21938 In order to cater for new messages that use the failing address, a next retry
21939 time is still computed from the final algorithm, and is used as follows:
21941 For local deliveries, one delivery attempt is always made for any subsequent
21942 messages. If this delivery fails, the address fails immediately. The
21943 post-cutoff retry time is not used.
21945 If the delivery is remote, there are two possibilities, controlled by the
21946 .cindex "&%delay_after_cutoff%&"
21947 &%delay_after_cutoff%& option of the &(smtp)& transport. The option is true by
21948 default. Until the post-cutoff retry time for one of the IP addresses is
21949 reached, the failing email address is bounced immediately, without a delivery
21950 attempt taking place. After that time, one new delivery attempt is made to
21951 those IP addresses that are past their retry times, and if that still fails,
21952 the address is bounced and new retry times are computed.
21954 In other words, when all the hosts for a given email address have been failing
21955 for a long time, Exim bounces rather then defers until one of the hosts' retry
21956 times is reached. Then it tries once, and bounces if that attempt fails. This
21957 behaviour ensures that few resources are wasted in repeatedly trying to deliver
21958 to a broken destination, but if the host does recover, Exim will eventually
21961 If &%delay_after_cutoff%& is set false, Exim behaves differently. If all IP
21962 addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver to those IP
21963 addresses that have not been tried since the message arrived. If there are
21964 no suitable IP addresses, or if they all fail, the address is bounced. In other
21965 words, it does not delay when a new message arrives, but tries the expired
21966 addresses immediately, unless they have been tried since the message arrived.
21967 If there is a continuous stream of messages for the failing domains, setting
21968 &%delay_after_cutoff%& false means that there will be many more attempts to
21969 deliver to permanently failing IP addresses than when &%delay_after_cutoff%& is
21972 .section "Deliveries that work intermittently"
21973 .cindex "retry" "intermittently working deliveries"
21975 Some additional logic is needed to cope with cases where a host is
21976 intermittently available, or when a message has some attribute that prevents
21977 its delivery when others to the same address get through. In this situation,
21978 because some messages are successfully delivered, the &"retry clock"& for the
21979 host or address keeps getting reset by the successful deliveries, and so
21980 failing messages remain on the queue for ever because the cutoff time is never
21983 Two exceptional actions are applied to prevent this happening. The first
21984 applies to errors that are related to a message rather than a remote host.
21985 Section &<<SECToutSMTPerr>>& has a discussion of the different kinds of error;
21986 examples of message-related errors are 4&'xx'& responses to MAIL or DATA
21987 commands, and quota failures. For this type of error, if a message's arrival
21988 time is earlier than the &"first failed"& time for the error, the earlier time
21989 is used when scanning the retry rules to decide when to try next and when to
21990 time out the address.
21992 The exceptional second action applies in all cases. If a message has been on
21993 the queue for longer than the cutoff time of any applicable retry rule for a
21994 given address, a delivery is attempted for that address, even if it is not yet
21995 time, and if this delivery fails, the address is timed out. A new retry time is
21996 not computed in this case, so that other messages for the same address are
21997 considered immediately.
21999 .ecindex IIDretconf1
22000 .ecindex IIDregconf2
22007 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22008 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22010 .chapter "SMTP authentication" "CHAPSMTPAUTH"
22011 .scindex IIDauthconf1 "SMTP" "authentication configuration"
22012 .scindex IIDauthconf2 "authentication"
22013 The &"authenticators"& section of Exim's run time configuration is concerned
22014 with SMTP authentication. This facility is an extension to the SMTP protocol,
22015 described in RFC 2554, which allows a client SMTP host to authenticate itself
22016 to a server. This is a common way for a server to recognize clients that are
22017 permitted to use it as a relay. SMTP authentication is not of relevance to the
22018 transfer of mail between servers that have no managerial connection with each
22021 .cindex "AUTH" "description of"
22022 Very briefly, the way SMTP authentication works is as follows:
22025 The server advertises a number of authentication &'mechanisms'& in response to
22026 the client's EHLO command.
22028 The client issues an AUTH command, naming a specific mechanism. The command
22029 may, optionally, contain some authentication data.
22031 The server may issue one or more &'challenges'&, to which the client must send
22032 appropriate responses. In simple authentication mechanisms, the challenges are
22033 just prompts for user names and passwords. The server does not have to issue
22034 any challenges &-- in some mechanisms the relevant data may all be transmitted
22035 with the AUTH command.
22037 The server either accepts or denies authentication.
22039 If authentication succeeds, the client may optionally make use of the AUTH
22040 option on the MAIL command to pass an authenticated sender in subsequent
22041 mail transactions. Authentication lasts for the remainder of the SMTP
22044 If authentication fails, the client may give up, or it may try a different
22045 authentication mechanism, or it may try transferring mail over the
22046 unauthenticated connection.
22049 If you are setting up a client, and want to know which authentication
22050 mechanisms the server supports, you can use Telnet to connect to port 25 (the
22051 SMTP port) on the server, and issue an EHLO command. The response to this
22052 includes the list of supported mechanisms. For example:
22054 &`$ `&&*&`telnet server.example 25`&*&
22055 &`Trying 192.168.34.25...`&
22056 &`Connected to server.example.`&
22057 &`Escape character is '^]'.`&
22058 &`220 server.example ESMTP Exim 4.20 ...`&
22059 &*&`ehlo client.example`&*&
22060 &`250-server.example Hello client.example [10.8.4.5]`&
22061 &`250-SIZE 52428800`&
22066 The second-last line of this example output shows that the server supports
22067 authentication using the PLAIN mechanism. In Exim, the different authentication
22068 mechanisms are configured by specifying &'authenticator'& drivers. Like the
22069 routers and transports, which authenticators are included in the binary is
22070 controlled by build-time definitions. The following are currently available,
22071 included by setting
22074 AUTH_CYRUS_SASL=yes
22078 in &_Local/Makefile_&, respectively. The first of these supports the CRAM-MD5
22079 authentication mechanism (RFC 2195), and the second provides an interface to
22080 the Cyrus SASL authentication library. The third can be configured to support
22081 the PLAIN authentication mechanism (RFC 2595) or the LOGIN mechanism, which is
22082 not formally documented, but used by several MUAs. The fourth authenticator
22083 supports Microsoft's &'Secure Password Authentication'& mechanism.
22085 The authenticators are configured using the same syntax as other drivers (see
22086 section &<<SECTfordricon>>&). If no authenticators are required, no
22087 authentication section need be present in the configuration file. Each
22088 authenticator can in principle have both server and client functions. When Exim
22089 is receiving SMTP mail, it is acting as a server; when it is sending out
22090 messages over SMTP, it is acting as a client. Authenticator configuration
22091 options are provided for use in both these circumstances.
22093 To make it clear which options apply to which situation, the prefixes
22094 &%server_%& and &%client_%& are used on option names that are specific to
22095 either the server or the client function, respectively. Server and client
22096 functions are disabled if none of their options are set. If an authenticator is
22097 to be used for both server and client functions, a single definition, using
22098 both sets of options, is required. For example:
22102 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22103 server_secret = ${if eq{$auth1}{ph10}{secret1}fail}
22105 client_secret = secret2
22107 The &%server_%& option is used when Exim is acting as a server, and the
22108 &%client_%& options when it is acting as a client.
22110 Descriptions of the individual authenticators are given in subsequent chapters.
22111 The remainder of this chapter covers the generic options for the
22112 authenticators, followed by general discussion of the way authentication works
22117 .section "Generic options for authenticators"
22118 .cindex "authentication" "generic options"
22119 .cindex "options" "generic; for authenticators"
22122 .option driver authenticators string unset
22123 This option must always be set. It specifies which of the available
22124 authenticators is to be used.
22127 .option public_name authenticators string unset
22128 This option specifies the name of the authentication mechanism that the driver
22129 implements, and by which it is known to the outside world. These names should
22130 contain only upper case letters, digits, underscores, and hyphens (RFC 2222),
22131 but Exim in fact matches them caselessly. If &%public_name%& is not set, it
22132 defaults to the driver's instance name.
22135 .option server_advertise_condition authenticators string&!! unset
22136 When a server is about to advertise an authentication mechanism, the condition
22137 is expanded. If it yields the empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, the
22138 mechanism is not advertised.
22139 If the expansion fails, the mechanism is not advertised. If the failure was not
22140 forced, and was not caused by a lookup defer, the incident is logged.
22141 See section &<<SECTauthexiser>>& below for further discussion.
22144 .option server_debug_print authenticators string&!! unset
22145 If this option is set and authentication debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%&
22146 command line option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging
22147 output when the authenticator is run as a server. This can help with checking
22148 out the values of variables.
22149 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
22150 output, and Exim carries on processing.
22153 .option server_set_id authenticators string&!! unset
22154 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
22155 When an Exim server successfully authenticates a client, this string is
22156 expanded using data from the authentication, and preserved for any incoming
22157 messages in the variable &$authenticated_id$&. It is also included in the log
22158 lines for incoming messages. For example, a user/password authenticator
22159 configuration might preserve the user name that was used to authenticate, and
22160 refer to it subsequently during delivery of the message.
22161 If expansion fails, the option is ignored.
22164 .option server_mail_auth_condition authenticators string&!! unset
22165 This option allows a server to discard authenticated sender addresses supplied
22166 as part of MAIL commands in SMTP connections that are authenticated by the
22167 driver on which &%server_mail_auth_condition%& is set. The option is not used
22168 as part of the authentication process; instead its (unexpanded) value is
22169 remembered for later use.
22170 How it is used is described in the following section.
22176 .section "The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands" "SECTauthparamail"
22177 .cindex "authentication" "sender; authenticated"
22178 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
22179 When a client supplied an AUTH= item on a MAIL command, Exim applies
22180 the following checks before accepting it as the authenticated sender of the
22184 If the connection is not using extended SMTP (that is, HELO was used rather
22185 than EHLO), the use of AUTH= is a syntax error.
22187 If the value of the AUTH= parameter is &"<>"&, it is ignored.
22189 .cindex "&$authenticated_sender$&"
22190 If &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& is defined, the ACL it specifies is run. While it is
22191 running, the value of &$authenticated_sender$& is set to the value obtained
22192 from the AUTH= parameter. If the ACL does not yield &"accept"&, the value of
22193 &$authenticated_sender$& is deleted. The &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& ACL may not
22194 return &"drop"& or &"discard"&. If it defers, a temporary error code (451) is
22195 given for the MAIL command.
22197 If &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& is not defined, the value of the AUTH= parameter
22198 is accepted and placed in &$authenticated_sender$& only if the client has
22201 If the AUTH= value was accepted by either of the two previous rules, and
22202 the client has authenticated, and the authenticator has a setting for the
22203 &%server_mail_auth_condition%&, the condition is checked at this point. The
22204 valued that was saved from the authenticator is expanded. If the expansion
22205 fails, or yields an empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, the value of
22206 &$authenticated_sender$& is deleted. If the expansion yields any other value,
22207 the value of &$authenticated_sender$& is retained and passed on with the
22212 When &$authenticated_sender$& is set for a message, it is passed on to other
22213 hosts to which Exim authenticates as a client. Do not confuse this value with
22214 &$authenticated_id$&, which is a string obtained from the authentication
22215 process, and which is not usually a complete email address.
22217 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
22218 Whenever an AUTH= value is ignored, the incident is logged. The ACL for
22219 MAIL, if defined, is run after AUTH= is accepted or ignored. It can
22220 therefore make use of &$authenticated_sender$&. The converse is not true: the
22221 value of &$sender_address$& is not yet set up when the &%acl_smtp_mailauth%&
22226 .section "Authentication on an Exim server" "SECTauthexiser"
22227 .cindex "authentication" "on an Exim server"
22228 When Exim receives an EHLO command, it advertises the public names of those
22229 authenticators that are configured as servers, subject to the following
22233 The client host must match &%auth_advertise_hosts%& (default *).
22235 It the &%server_advertise_condition%& option is set, its expansion must not
22236 yield the empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&.
22239 The order in which the authenticators are defined controls the order in which
22240 the mechanisms are advertised.
22242 Some mail clients (for example, some versions of Netscape) require the user to
22243 provide a name and password for authentication whenever AUTH is advertised,
22244 even though authentication may not in fact be needed (for example, Exim may be
22245 set up to allow unconditional relaying from the client by an IP address check).
22246 You can make such clients more friendly by not advertising AUTH to them.
22247 For example, if clients on the 10.9.8.0/24 network are permitted (by the ACL
22248 that runs for RCPT) to relay without authentication, you should set
22250 auth_advertise_hosts = ! 10.9.8.0/24
22252 so that no authentication mechanisms are advertised to them.
22254 The &%server_advertise_condition%& controls the advertisement of individual
22255 authentication mechanisms. For example, it can be used to restrict the
22256 advertisement of a patricular mechanism to encrypted connections, by a setting
22259 server_advertise_condition = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{no}{yes}}
22261 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
22262 If the session is encrypted, &$tls_cipher$& is not empty, and so the expansion
22263 yields &"yes"&, which allows the advertisement to happen.
22265 When an Exim server receives an AUTH command from a client, it rejects it
22266 immediately if AUTH was not advertised in response to an earlier EHLO
22267 command. This is the case if
22270 The client host does not match &%auth_advertise_hosts%&; or
22272 No authenticators are configured with server options; or
22274 Expansion of &%server_advertise_condition%& blocked the advertising of all the
22275 server authenticators.
22279 Otherwise, Exim runs the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_auth%& in order
22280 to decide whether to accept the command. If &%acl_smtp_auth%& is not set,
22281 AUTH is accepted from any client host.
22283 If AUTH is not rejected by the ACL, Exim searches its configuration for a
22284 server authentication mechanism that was advertised in response to EHLO and
22285 that matches the one named in the AUTH command. If it finds one, it runs
22286 the appropriate authentication protocol, and authentication either succeeds or
22287 fails. If there is no matching advertised mechanism, the AUTH command is
22288 rejected with a 504 error.
22290 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
22291 .cindex "&$sender_host_authenticated$&"
22292 When a message is received from an authenticated host, the value of
22293 &$received_protocol$& is set to &"esmtpa"& or &"esmtpsa"& instead of &"esmtp"&
22294 or &"esmtps"&, and &$sender_host_authenticated$& contains the name (not the
22295 public name) of the authenticator driver that successfully authenticated the
22296 client from which the message was received. This variable is empty if there was
22297 no successful authentication.
22302 .section "Testing server authentication"
22303 .cindex "authentication" "testing a server"
22304 .cindex "AUTH" "testing a server"
22305 .cindex "base64 encoding" "creating authentication test data"
22306 Exim's &%-bh%& option can be useful for testing server authentication
22307 configurations. The data for the AUTH command has to be sent using base64
22308 encoding. A quick way to produce such data for testing is the following Perl
22312 printf ("%s", encode_base64(eval "\"$ARGV[0]\""));
22314 .cindex "binary zero" "in authentication data"
22315 This interprets its argument as a Perl string, and then encodes it. The
22316 interpretation as a Perl string allows binary zeros, which are required for
22317 some kinds of authentication, to be included in the data. For example, a
22318 command line to run this script on such data might be
22320 encode '\0user\0password'
22322 Note the use of single quotes to prevent the shell interpreting the
22323 backslashes, so that they can be interpreted by Perl to specify characters
22324 whose code value is zero.
22326 &*Warning 1*&: If either of the user or password strings starts with an octal
22327 digit, you must use three zeros instead of one after the leading backslash. If
22328 you do not, the octal digit that starts your string will be incorrectly
22329 interpreted as part of the code for the first character.
22331 &*Warning 2*&: If there are characters in the strings that Perl interprets
22332 specially, you must use a Perl escape to prevent them being misinterpreted. For
22333 example, a command such as
22335 encode '\0user@domain.com\0pas$$word'
22337 gives an incorrect answer because of the unescaped &"@"& and &"$"& characters.
22339 If you have the &%mimencode%& command installed, another way to do produce
22340 base64-encoded strings is to run the command
22342 echo -e -n `\0user\0password' | mimencode
22344 The &%-e%& option of &%echo%& enables the interpretation of backslash escapes
22345 in the argument, and the &%-n%& option specifies no newline at the end of its
22346 output. However, not all versions of &%echo%& recognize these options, so you
22347 should check your version before relying on this suggestion.
22351 .section "Authentication by an Exim client"
22352 .cindex "authentication" "on an Exim client"
22353 The &(smtp)& transport has two options called &%hosts_require_auth%& and
22354 &%hosts_try_auth%&. When the &(smtp)& transport connects to a server that
22355 announces support for authentication, and the host matches an entry in either
22356 of these options, Exim (as a client) tries to authenticate as follows:
22359 For each authenticator that is configured as a client, it searches the
22360 authentication mechanisms announced by the server for one whose name
22361 matches the public name of the authenticator.
22364 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
22365 When it finds one that matches, it runs the authenticator's client code.
22366 The variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& are available for any string
22367 expansions that the client might do. They are set to the server's name and
22368 IP address. If any expansion is forced to fail, the authentication attempt
22370 and Exim moves on to the next authenticator.
22371 Otherwise an expansion failure causes delivery to be
22374 If the result of the authentication attempt is a temporary error or a timeout,
22375 Exim abandons trying to send the message to the host for the moment. It will
22376 try again later. If there are any backup hosts available, they are tried in the
22379 If the response to authentication is a permanent error (5&'xx'& code), Exim
22380 carries on searching the list of authenticators and tries another one if
22381 possible. If all authentication attempts give permanent errors, or if there are
22382 no attempts because no mechanisms match (or option expansions force failure),
22383 what happens depends on whether the host matches &%hosts_require_auth%& or
22384 &%hosts_try_auth%&. In the first case, a temporary error is generated, and
22385 delivery is deferred. The error can be detected in the retry rules, and thereby
22386 turned into a permanent error if you wish. In the second case, Exim tries to
22387 deliver the message unauthenticated.
22390 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
22391 When Exim has authenticated itself to a remote server, it adds the AUTH
22392 parameter to the MAIL commands it sends, if it has an authenticated sender for
22393 the message. If the message came from a remote host, the authenticated sender
22394 is the one that was receiving on an incoming MAIL command, provided that the
22395 incoming connection was authenticated and the &%server_mail_auth%& condition
22396 allowed the authenticated sender to be retained. If a local process calls Exim
22397 to send a message, the sender address that is built from the login name and
22398 &%qualify_domain%& is treated as authenticated. However, if the
22399 &%authenticated_sender%& option is set on the &(smtp)& transport, it overrides
22400 the authenticated sender that was received with the message.
22401 .ecindex IIDauthconf1
22402 .ecindex IIDauthconf2
22409 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22410 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22412 .chapter "The plaintext authenticator" "CHAPplaintext"
22413 .scindex IIDplaiauth1 "&(plaintext)& authenticator"
22414 .scindex IIDplaiauth2 "authenticators" "&(plaintext)&"
22415 The &(plaintext)& authenticator can be configured to support the PLAIN and
22416 LOGIN authentication mechanisms, both of which transfer authentication data as
22417 plain (unencrypted) text (though base64 encoded). The use of plain text is a
22418 security risk; you are strongly advised to insist on the use of SMTP encryption
22419 (see chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&) if you use the PLAIN or LOGIN mechanisms. If you do
22420 use unencrypted plain text, you should not use the same passwords for SMTP
22421 connections as you do for login accounts.
22423 .section "Using plaintext in a server"
22424 .cindex "options" "&(plaintext)& authenticator (server)"
22425 When running as a server, &(plaintext)& performs the authentication test by
22426 expanding a string. It has the following options:
22428 .option server_prompts plaintext string&!! unset
22429 The contents of this option, after expansion, must be a colon-separated list of
22430 prompt strings. If expansion fails, a temporary authentication rejection is
22433 .option server_condition plaintext string&!! unset
22434 This option must be set in order to configure the driver as a server. Its use
22435 is described below.
22437 .cindex "AUTH" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22438 .cindex "binary zero" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22439 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" &&&
22440 "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22441 .cindex "&$auth1$&, &$auth2$&, etc"
22442 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22443 The data sent by the client with the AUTH command, or in response to
22444 subsequent prompts, is base64 encoded, and so may contain any byte values
22445 when decoded. If any data is supplied with the command, it is treated as a
22446 list of strings, separated by NULs (binary zeros), the first three of which are
22447 placed in the expansion variables &$auth1$&, &$auth2$&, and &$auth3$& (neither
22448 LOGIN nor PLAIN uses more than three strings).
22450 For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the values are also placed in
22451 the expansion variables &$1$&, &$2$&, and &$3$&. However, the use of these
22452 variables for this purpose is now deprecated, as it can lead to confusion in
22453 string expansions that also use them for other things.
22455 If there are more strings in &%server_prompts%& than the number of strings
22456 supplied with the AUTH command, the remaining prompts are used to obtain more
22457 data. Each response from the client may be a list of NUL-separated strings.
22459 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
22460 Once a sufficient number of data strings have been received,
22461 &%server_condition%& is expanded. If the expansion is forced to fail,
22462 authentication fails. Any other expansion failure causes a temporary error code
22463 to be returned. If the result of a successful expansion is an empty string,
22464 &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, authentication fails. If the result of the
22465 expansion is &"1"&, &"yes"&, or &"true"&, authentication succeeds and the
22466 generic &%server_set_id%& option is expanded and saved in &$authenticated_id$&.
22467 For any other result, a temporary error code is returned, with the expanded
22468 string as the error text.
22470 &*Warning*&: If you use a lookup in the expansion to find the user's
22471 password, be sure to make the authentication fail if the user is unknown.
22472 There are good and bad examples at the end of the next section.
22476 .section "The PLAIN authentication mechanism"
22477 .cindex "PLAIN authentication mechanism"
22478 .cindex "authentication" "PLAIN mechanism"
22479 .cindex "binary zero" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22480 The PLAIN authentication mechanism (RFC 2595) specifies that three strings be
22481 sent as one item of data (that is, one combined string containing two NUL
22482 separators). The data is sent either as part of the AUTH command, or
22483 subsequently in response to an empty prompt from the server.
22485 The second and third strings are a user name and a corresponding password.
22486 Using a single fixed user name and password as an example, this could be
22487 configured as follows:
22491 public_name = PLAIN
22493 server_condition = \
22494 ${if and {{eq{$auth2}{username}}{eq{$auth3}{mysecret}}}\
22496 server_set_id = $auth2
22498 The &%server_prompts%& setting specifies a single, empty prompt (empty items at
22499 the end of a string list are ignored). If all the data comes as part of the
22500 AUTH command, as is commonly the case, the prompt is not used. This
22501 authenticator is advertised in the response to EHLO as
22505 and a client host can authenticate itself by sending the command
22507 AUTH PLAIN AHVzZXJuYW1lAG15c2VjcmV0
22509 As this contains three strings (more than the number of prompts), no further
22510 data is required from the client. Alternatively, the client may just send
22514 to initiate authentication, in which case the server replies with an empty
22515 prompt. The client must respond with the combined data string.
22517 The data string is base64 encoded, as required by the RFC. This example,
22518 when decoded, is <&'NUL'&>&`username`&<&'NUL'&>&`mysecret`&, where <&'NUL'&>
22519 represents a zero byte. This is split up into three strings, the first of which
22520 is empty. The &%server_condition%& option in the authenticator checks that the
22521 second two are &`username`& and &`mysecret`& respectively.
22523 Having just one fixed user name and password, as in this example, is not very
22524 realistic, though for a small organization with only a handful of
22525 authenticating clients it could make sense.
22527 A more sophisticated instance of this authenticator could use the user name in
22528 &$auth2$& to look up a password in a file or database, and maybe do an encrypted
22529 comparison (see &%crypteq%& in chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&). Here is a example of
22530 this approach, where the passwords are looked up in a DBM file. &*Warning*&:
22531 This is an incorrect example:
22533 server_condition = \
22534 ${if eq{$auth3}{${lookup{$auth2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}}}{yes}{no}}
22536 The expansion uses the user name (&$auth2$&) as the key to look up a password,
22537 which it then compares to the supplied password (&$auth3$&). Why is this example
22538 incorrect? It works fine for existing users, but consider what happens if a
22539 non-existent user name is given. The lookup fails, but as no success/failure
22540 strings are given for the lookup, it yields an empty string. Thus, to defeat
22541 the authentication, all a client has to do is to supply a non-existent user
22542 name and an empty password. The correct way of writing this test is:
22544 server_condition = ${lookup{$auth2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}\
22545 {${if eq{$value}{$auth3}{yes}{no}}}{no}}
22547 In this case, if the lookup succeeds, the result is checked; if the lookup
22548 fails, authentication fails. If &%crypteq%& is being used instead of &%eq%&,
22549 the first example is in fact safe, because &%crypteq%& always fails if its
22550 second argument is empty. However, the second way of writing the test makes the
22555 .section "The LOGIN authentication mechanism"
22556 .cindex "LOGIN authentication mechanism"
22557 .cindex "authentication" "LOGIN mechanism"
22558 The LOGIN authentication mechanism is not documented in any RFC, but is in use
22559 in a number of programs. No data is sent with the AUTH command. Instead, a
22560 user name and password are supplied separately, in response to prompts. The
22561 plaintext authenticator can be configured to support this as in this example:
22565 public_name = LOGIN
22566 server_prompts = User Name : Password
22567 server_condition = \
22568 ${if and {{eq{$auth1}{username}}{eq{$auth2}{mysecret}}}\
22570 server_set_id = $auth1
22572 Because of the way plaintext operates, this authenticator accepts data supplied
22573 with the AUTH command (in contravention of the specification of LOGIN), but
22574 if the client does not supply it (as is the case for LOGIN clients), the prompt
22575 strings are used to obtain two data items.
22577 Some clients are very particular about the precise text of the prompts. For
22578 example, Outlook Express is reported to recognize only &"Username:"& and
22579 &"Password:"&. Here is an example of a LOGIN authenticator that uses those
22580 strings. It uses the &%ldapauth%& expansion condition to check the user
22581 name and password by binding to an LDAP server:
22585 public_name = LOGIN
22586 server_prompts = Username:: : Password::
22587 server_condition = ${if ldapauth \
22588 {user="cn=${quote_ldap_dn:$auth1},ou=people,o=example.org" \
22589 pass=${quote:$auth2} \
22590 ldap://ldap.example.org/}{yes}{no}}
22591 server_set_id = uid=$auth1,ou=people,o=example.org
22593 Note the use of the &%quote_ldap_dn%& operator to correctly quote the DN for
22594 authentication. However, the basic &%quote%& operator, rather than any of the
22595 LDAP quoting operators, is the correct one to use for the password, because
22596 quoting is needed only to make the password conform to the Exim syntax. At the
22597 LDAP level, the password is an uninterpreted string.
22601 .section "Support for different kinds of authentication"
22602 A number of string expansion features are provided for the purpose of
22603 interfacing to different ways of user authentication. These include checking
22604 traditionally encrypted passwords from &_/etc/passwd_& (or equivalent), PAM,
22605 Radius, &%ldapauth%&, &'pwcheck'&, and &'saslauthd'&. For details see section
22611 .section "Using plaintext in a client"
22612 .cindex "options" "&(plaintext)& authenticator (client)"
22613 The &(plaintext)& authenticator has two client options:
22615 .option client_ignore_invalid_base64 plaintext boolean false
22616 If the client receives a server prompt that is not a valid base64 string,
22617 authentication is abandoned by default. However, if this option is set true,
22618 the error in the challenge is ignored and the client sends the response as
22621 .option client_send plaintext string&!! unset
22622 The string is a colon-separated list of authentication data strings. Each
22623 string is independently expanded before being sent to the server. The first
22624 string is sent with the AUTH command; any more strings are sent in response
22625 to prompts from the server. Before each string is expanded, the value of the
22626 most recent prompt is placed in the next &$auth$&<&'n'&> variable, starting
22627 with &$auth1$& for the first prompt. Up to three prompts are stored in this
22628 way. Thus, the prompt that is received in response to sending the first string
22629 (with the AUTH command) can be used in the expansion of the second string, and
22630 so on. If an invalid base64 string is received when
22631 &%client_ignore_invalid_base64%& is set, an empty string is put in the
22632 &$auth$&<&'n'&> variable.
22634 &*Note*&: You cannot use expansion to create multiple strings, because
22635 splitting takes priority and happens first.
22637 Because the PLAIN authentication mechanism requires NUL (binary zero) bytes in
22638 the data, further processing is applied to each string before it is sent. If
22639 there are any single circumflex characters in the string, they are converted to
22640 NULs. Should an actual circumflex be required as data, it must be doubled in
22643 This is an example of a client configuration that implements the PLAIN
22644 authentication mechanism with a fixed user name and password:
22648 public_name = PLAIN
22649 client_send = ^username^mysecret
22651 The lack of colons means that the entire text is sent with the AUTH
22652 command, with the circumflex characters converted to NULs. A similar example
22653 that uses the LOGIN mechanism is:
22657 public_name = LOGIN
22658 client_send = : username : mysecret
22660 The initial colon means that the first string is empty, so no data is sent with
22661 the AUTH command itself. The remaining strings are sent in response to
22663 .ecindex IIDplaiauth1
22664 .ecindex IIDplaiauth2
22669 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22670 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22672 .chapter "The cram_md5 authenticator"
22673 .scindex IIDcramauth1 "&(cram_md5)& authenticator"
22674 .scindex IIDcramauth2 "authenticators" "&(cram_md5)&"
22675 .cindex "CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism"
22676 .cindex "authentication" "CRAM-MD5 mechanism"
22677 The CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism is described in RFC 2195. The server
22678 sends a challenge string to the client, and the response consists of a user
22679 name and the CRAM-MD5 digest of the challenge string combined with a secret
22680 string (password) which is known to both server and client. Thus, the secret
22681 is not sent over the network as plain text, which makes this authenticator more
22682 secure than &(plaintext)&. However, the downside is that the secret has to be
22683 available in plain text at either end.
22686 .section "Using cram_md5 as a server"
22687 .cindex "options" "&(cram_md5)& authenticator (server)"
22688 This authenticator has one server option, which must be set to configure the
22689 authenticator as a server:
22691 .option server_secret cram_md5 string&!! unset
22692 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(cram_md5)& authenticator"
22693 When the server receives the client's response, the user name is placed in
22694 the expansion variable &$auth1$&, and &%server_secret%& is expanded to
22695 obtain the password for that user. The server then computes the CRAM-MD5 digest
22696 that the client should have sent, and checks that it received the correct
22697 string. If the expansion of &%server_secret%& is forced to fail, authentication
22698 fails. If the expansion fails for some other reason, a temporary error code is
22699 returned to the client.
22701 For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the user name is also placed
22702 in &$1$&. However, the use of this variables for this purpose is now
22703 deprecated, as it can lead to confusion in string expansions that also use
22704 numeric variables for other things.
22706 For example, the following authenticator checks that the user name given by the
22707 client is &"ph10"&, and if so, uses &"secret"& as the password. For any other
22708 user name, authentication fails.
22712 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22713 server_secret = ${if eq{$auth1}{ph10}{secret}fail}
22714 server_set_id = $auth1
22716 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
22717 If authentication succeeds, the setting of &%server_set_id%& preserves the user
22718 name in &$authenticated_id$&. A more tyical configuration might look up the
22719 secret string in a file, using the user name as the key. For example:
22723 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22724 server_secret = ${lookup{$auth1}lsearch{/etc/authpwd}{$value}fail}
22725 server_set_id = $auth1
22727 Note that this expansion explicitly forces failure if the lookup fails
22728 because &$1$& contains an unknown user name.
22731 .section "Using cram_md5 as a client"
22732 .cindex "options" "&(cram_md5)& authenticator (client)"
22733 When used as a client, the &(cram_md5)& authenticator has two options:
22737 .option client_name cram_md5 string&!! "the primary host name"
22738 This string is expanded, and the result used as the user name data when
22739 computing the response to the server's challenge.
22742 .option client_secret cram_md5 string&!! unset
22743 This option must be set for the authenticator to work as a client. Its value is
22744 expanded and the result used as the secret string when computing the response.
22748 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
22749 Different user names and secrets can be used for different servers by referring
22750 to &$host$& or &$host_address$& in the options. Forced failure of either
22751 expansion string is treated as an indication that this authenticator is not
22752 prepared to handle this case. Exim moves on to the next configured client
22753 authenticator. Any other expansion failure causes Exim to give up trying to
22754 send the message to the current server.
22756 A simple example configuration of a &(cram_md5)& authenticator, using fixed
22761 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22763 client_secret = secret
22765 .ecindex IIDcramauth1
22766 .ecindex IIDcramauth2
22770 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22771 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22773 .chapter "The cyrus_sasl authenticator"
22774 .scindex IIDcyrauth1 "&(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator"
22775 .scindex IIDcyrauth2 "authenticators" "&(cyrus_sasl)&"
22776 .cindex "Cyrus" "SASL library"
22777 The code for this authenticator was provided by Matthew Byng-Maddick of A L
22778 Digital Ltd (&url(http://www.aldigital.co.uk)).
22780 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator provides server support for the Cyrus SASL
22781 library implementation of the RFC 2222 (&"Simple Authentication and Security
22782 Layer"&). This library supports a number of authentication mechanisms,
22783 including PLAIN and LOGIN, but also several others that Exim does not support
22784 directly. In particular, there is support for Kerberos authentication.
22786 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator provides a gatewaying mechanism directly to
22787 the Cyrus interface, so if your Cyrus library can do, for example, CRAM-MD5,
22788 then so can the &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator. By default it uses the public
22789 name of the driver to determine which mechanism to support.
22791 Where access to some kind of secret file is required, for example in GSSAPI
22792 or CRAM-MD5, it is worth noting that the authenticator runs as the Exim
22793 user, and that the Cyrus SASL library has no way of escalating privileges
22794 by default. You may also find you need to set environment variables,
22795 depending on the driver you are using.
22798 .section "Using cyrus_sasl as a server"
22799 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator has four private options. It puts the username
22800 (on a successful authentication) into &$auth1$&. For compatibility with
22801 previous releases of Exim, the username is also placed in &$1$&. However, the
22802 use of this variable for this purpose is now deprecated, as it can lead to
22803 confusion in string expansions that also use numeric variables for other
22807 .option server_hostname cyrus_sasl string&!! &`$primary_hostname`&
22808 This option selects the hostname that is used when communicating with
22809 the library. It is up to the underlying SASL plug-in what it does with
22813 .option server_mech cyrus_sasl string &`public_name`&
22814 This option selects the authentication mechanism this driver should
22815 use. It allows you to use a different underlying mechanism from the
22816 advertised name. For example:
22819 driver = cyrus_sasl
22820 public_name = X-ANYTHING
22821 server_mech = CRAM-MD5
22822 server_set_id = $auth1
22825 .option server_realm cyrus_sasl string unset
22826 This specifies the SASL realm that the server claims to be in.
22829 .option server_service cyrus_sasl string &`smtp`&
22830 This is the SASL service that the server claims to implement.
22833 For straightforward cases, you do not need to set any of the authenticator's
22834 private options. All you need to do is to specify an appropriate mechanism as
22835 the public name. Thus, if you have a SASL library that supports CRAM-MD5 and
22836 PLAIN, you could have two authenticators as follows:
22839 driver = cyrus_sasl
22840 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22841 server_set_id = $auth1
22844 driver = cyrus_sasl
22845 public_name = PLAIN
22846 server_set_id = $auth1
22848 Cyrus SASL does implement the LOGIN authentication method, even though it is
22849 not a standard method. It is disabled by default in the source distribution,
22850 but it is present in many binary distributions.
22851 .ecindex IIDcyrauth1
22852 .ecindex IIDcyrauth2
22857 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22858 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22860 .chapter "The spa authenticator" "CHAPspa"
22861 .scindex IIDspaauth1 "&(spa)& authenticator"
22862 .scindex IIDspaauth2 "authenticators" "&(spa)&"
22863 .cindex "authentication" "Microsoft Secure Password"
22864 .cindex "authentication" "NTLM"
22865 .cindex "Microsoft Secure Password Authentication"
22866 .cindex "NTLM authentication"
22867 The &(spa)& authenticator provides client support for Microsoft's &'Secure
22868 Password Authentication'& mechanism,
22869 which is also sometimes known as NTLM (NT LanMan). The code for client side of
22870 this authenticator was contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux, and much of it is
22871 taken from the Samba project (&url(http://www.samba.org)). The code for the
22872 server side was subsequently contributed by Tom Kistner. The mechanism works as
22876 After the AUTH command has been accepted, the client sends an SPA
22877 authentication request based on the user name and optional domain.
22879 The server sends back a challenge.
22881 The client builds a challenge response which makes use of the user's password
22882 and sends it to the server, which then accepts or rejects it.
22885 Encryption is used to protect the password in transit.
22889 .section "Using spa as a server"
22890 .cindex "options" "&(spa)& authenticator (server)"
22891 The &(spa)& authenticator has just one server option:
22893 .option server_password spa string&!! unset
22894 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(spa)& authenticator"
22895 This option is expanded, and the result must be the cleartext password for the
22896 authenticating user, whose name is at this point in &$auth1$&. For
22897 compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the user name is also placed in
22898 &$1$&. However, the use of this variable for this purpose is now deprecated, as
22899 it can lead to confusion in string expansions that also use numeric variables
22900 for other things. For example:
22905 server_password = \
22906 ${lookup{$auth1}lsearch{/etc/exim/spa_clearpass}{$value}fail}
22908 If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails. Any other expansion
22909 failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.
22915 .section "Using spa as a client"
22916 .cindex "options" "&(spa)& authenticator (client)"
22917 The &(spa)& authenticator has the following client options:
22921 .option client_domain spa string&!! unset
22922 This option specifies an optional domain for the authentication.
22925 .option client_password spa string&!! unset
22926 This option specifies the user's password, and must be set.
22929 .option client_username spa string&!! unset
22930 This option specifies the user name, and must be set. Here is an example of a
22931 configuration of this authenticator for use with the mail servers at
22937 client_username = msn/msn_username
22938 client_password = msn_plaintext_password
22939 client_domain = DOMAIN_OR_UNSET
22941 .ecindex IIDspaauth1
22942 .ecindex IIDspaauth2
22948 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22949 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22951 .chapter "Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL" "CHAPTLS" &&&
22952 "Encrypted SMTP connections"
22953 .scindex IIDencsmtp1 "encryption" "on SMTP connection"
22954 .scindex IIDencsmtp2 "SMTP" "encryption"
22955 .cindex "TLS" "on SMTP connection"
22958 Support for TLS (Transport Layer Security), formerly known as SSL (Secure
22959 Sockets Layer), is implemented by making use of the OpenSSL library or the
22960 GnuTLS library (Exim requires GnuTLS release 1.0 or later). There is no
22961 cryptographic code in the Exim distribution itself for implementing TLS. In
22962 order to use this feature you must install OpenSSL or GnuTLS, and then build a
22963 version of Exim that includes TLS support (see section &<<SECTinctlsssl>>&).
22964 You also need to understand the basic concepts of encryption at a managerial
22965 level, and in particular, the way that public keys, private keys, and
22966 certificates are used.
22968 RFC 3207 defines how SMTP connections can make use of encryption. Once a
22969 connection is established, the client issues a STARTTLS command. If the
22970 server accepts this, the client and the server negotiate an encryption
22971 mechanism. If the negotiation succeeds, the data that subsequently passes
22972 between them is encrypted.
22974 Exim's ACLs can detect whether the current SMTP session is encrypted or not,
22975 and if so, what cipher suite is in use, whether the client supplied a
22976 certificate, and whether or not that certificate was verified. This makes it
22977 possible for an Exim server to deny or accept certain commands based on the
22980 &*Warning*&: Certain types of firewall and certain anti-virus products can
22981 disrupt TLS connections. You need to turn off SMTP scanning for these products
22982 in order to get TLS to work.
22986 .section "Support for the legacy &""ssmtp""& (aka &""smtps""&) protocol"
22987 .cindex "ssmtp protocol"
22988 .cindex "smtps protocol"
22989 .cindex "SMTP" "ssmtp protocol"
22990 .cindex "SMTP" "smtps protocol"
22991 Early implementations of encrypted SMTP used a different TCP port from normal
22992 SMTP, and expected an encryption negotiation to start immediately, instead of
22993 waiting for a STARTTLS command from the client using the standard SMTP
22994 port. The protocol was called &"ssmtp"& or &"smtps"&, and port 465 was
22995 allocated for this purpose.
22997 This approach was abandoned when encrypted SMTP was standardised, but there are
22998 still some legacy clients that use it. Exim supports these clients by means of
22999 the &%tls_on_connect_ports%& global option. Its value must be a list of port
23000 numbers; the most common use is expected to be:
23002 tls_on_connect_ports = 465
23004 The port numbers specified by this option apply to all SMTP connections, both
23005 via the daemon and via &'inetd'&. You still need to specify all the ports that
23006 the daemon uses (by setting &%daemon_smtp_ports%& or &%local_interfaces%& or
23007 the &%-oX%& command line option) because &%tls_on_connect_ports%& does not add
23008 an extra port &-- rather, it specifies different behaviour on a port that is
23011 There is also a &%-tls-on-connect%& command line option. This overrides
23012 &%tls_on_connect_ports%&; it forces the legacy behaviour for all ports.
23019 .section "OpenSSL vs GnuTLS" "SECTopenvsgnu"
23020 .cindex "TLS" "OpenSSL &'vs'& GnuTLS"
23021 The first TLS support in Exim was implemented using OpenSSL. Support for GnuTLS
23022 followed later, when the first versions of GnuTLS were released. To build Exim
23023 to use GnuTLS, you need to set
23027 in Local/Makefile, in addition to
23031 You must also set TLS_LIBS and TLS_INCLUDE appropriately, so that the
23032 include files and libraries for GnuTLS can be found.
23034 There are some differences in usage when using GnuTLS instead of OpenSSL:
23037 The &%tls_verify_certificates%& option must contain the name of a file, not the
23038 name of a directory (for OpenSSL it can be either).
23040 The &%tls_dhparam%& option is ignored, because early versions of GnuTLS had no
23041 facility for varying its Diffie-Hellman parameters. I understand that this has
23042 changed, but Exim has not been updated to provide this facility.
23044 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
23045 Distinguished Name (DN) strings reported by the OpenSSL library use a slash for
23046 separating fields; GnuTLS uses commas, in accordance with RFC 2253. This
23047 affects the value of the &$tls_peerdn$& variable.
23049 OpenSSL identifies cipher suites using hyphens as separators, for example:
23050 DES-CBC3-SHA. GnuTLS uses underscores, for example: RSA_ARCFOUR_SHA. What is
23051 more, OpenSSL complains if underscores are present in a cipher list. To make
23052 life simpler, Exim changes underscores to hyhens for OpenSSL and hyphens to
23053 underscores for GnuTLS when processing lists of cipher suites in the
23054 &%tls_require_ciphers%& options (the global option and the &(smtp)& transport
23057 The &%tls_require_ciphers%& options operate differently, as described in the
23058 sections &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&.
23062 .section "GnuTLS parameter computation"
23063 GnuTLS uses RSA and D-H parameters that take a substantial amount of time to
23064 compute. It is unreasonable to re-compute them for every TLS session.
23065 Therefore, Exim keeps this data in a file in its spool directory, called
23066 &_gnutls-params_&. The file is owned by the Exim user and is readable only by
23067 its owner. Every Exim process that start up GnuTLS reads the RSA and D-H
23068 parameters from this file. If the file does not exist, the first Exim process
23069 that needs it computes the data and writes it to a temporary file which is
23070 renamed once it is complete. It does not matter if several Exim processes do
23071 this simultaneously (apart from wasting a few resources). Once a file is in
23072 place, new Exim processes immediately start using it.
23074 For maximum security, the parameters that are stored in this file should be
23075 recalculated periodically, the frequency depending on your paranoia level.
23076 Arranging this is easy in principle; just delete the file when you want new
23077 values to be computed. However, there may be a problem. The calculation of new
23078 parameters needs random numbers, and these are obtained from &_/dev/random_&.
23079 If the system is not very active, &_/dev/random_& may delay returning data
23080 until enough randomness (entropy) is available. This may cause Exim to hang for
23081 a substantial amount of time, causing timeouts on incoming connections.
23083 The solution is to generate the parameters externally to Exim. They are stored
23084 in &_gnutls-params_& in PEM format, which means that they can be generated
23085 externally using the &(certtool)& command that is part of GnuTLS.
23087 To replace the parameters with new ones, instead of deleting the file
23088 and letting Exim re-create it, you can generate new parameters using
23089 &(certtool)& and, when this has been done, replace Exim's cache file by
23090 renaming. The relevant commands are something like this:
23094 # chown exim:exim new-params
23095 # chmod 0400 new-params
23096 # certtool --generate-privkey --bits 512 >new-params
23097 # echo "" >>new-params
23098 # certtool --generate-dh-params --bits 1024 >> new-params
23099 # mv new-params gnutls-params
23101 If Exim never has to generate the parameters itself, the possibility of
23102 stalling is removed.
23105 .section "Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL" "SECTreqciphssl"
23106 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers (OpenSSL)"
23107 .cindex "&%tls_require_ciphers%&" "OpenSSL"
23108 There is a function in the OpenSSL library that can be passed a list of cipher
23109 suites before the cipher negotiation takes place. This specifies which ciphers
23110 are acceptable. The list is colon separated and may contain names like
23111 DES-CBC3-SHA. Exim passes the expanded value of &%tls_require_ciphers%&
23112 directly to this function call. The following quotation from the OpenSSL
23113 documentation specifies what forms of item are allowed in the cipher string:
23116 It can consist of a single cipher suite such as RC4-SHA.
23118 It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain algorithm,
23119 or cipher suites of a certain type. For example SHA1 represents all
23120 ciphers suites using the digest algorithm SHA1 and SSLv3 represents all
23123 Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string using
23124 the + character. This is used as a logical and operation. For example
23125 SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES
23129 Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by one of the characters &`!`&,
23132 If &`!`& is used, the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list. The
23133 ciphers deleted can never reappear in the list even if they are explicitly
23136 If &`-`& is used, the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or all
23137 of the ciphers can be added again by later options.
23139 If &`+`& is used, the ciphers are moved to the end of the list. This
23140 option does not add any new ciphers; it just moves matching existing ones.
23143 If none of these characters is present, the string is interpreted as
23144 a list of ciphers to be appended to the current preference list. If the list
23145 includes any ciphers already present they will be ignored: that is, they will
23146 not be moved to the end of the list.
23152 .section "Requiring specific ciphers in GnuTLS" "SECTreqciphgnu"
23153 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers (GnuTLS)"
23154 .cindex "&%tls_require_ciphers%&" "GnuTLS"
23155 The GnuTLS library does not have a combined function like OpenSSL. Instead,
23156 it allows the caller to specify separate lists of key-exchange methods,
23157 main cipher algorithms, and MAC algorithms. Unfortunately, these lists are
23158 numerical, and the library does not have a function for turning names into
23159 numbers. Consequently, the list of recognized names has to be built into
23162 At present, Exim permits only the list of main cipher algorithms to be
23163 changed. The &%tls_require_ciphers%& option is in the same format as for
23164 OpenSSL. Exim searches each item for the name of available algorithm. For
23165 example, if the list contains RSA_AES_SHA then AES is recognized.
23167 The cipher algorithms list starts out with a default set of algorithms. If
23168 the first item in &%tls_require_ciphers%& does &'not'& start with an
23169 exclamation mark, all the default items are deleted. Thus, only those specified
23170 can be used. If the first item in &%tls_require_ciphers%& &'does'& start with
23171 an exclamation mark, the defaults are left on the list.
23173 Then, any item that starts with an exclamation mark causes the relevant
23174 algorithms to be removed from the list, and any item that does not start
23175 with an exclamation mark causes the relevant algorithms to be added to the
23178 tls_require_ciphers = !RSA_ARCFOUR_SHA
23180 allows all the defaults except those that use ARCFOUR, whereas
23182 tls_require_ciphers = AES : 3DES
23184 allows only cipher suites that use AES and 3DES. The currently recognized
23185 algorithms are: AES_256, AES_128, AES (both of the preceding), 3DES, and
23186 ARCFOUR_128. Unrecognized algorithms are ignored. In a server, the order of the
23187 list is unimportant; the server will advertise the availability of all the
23188 relevant cipher suites. However, in a client, the order of the list specifies a
23189 preference order for the algorithms. The first one in the client's list that is
23190 also advertised by the server is tried first. The default order is as listed
23196 .section "Configuring an Exim server to use TLS"
23197 .cindex "TLS" "configuring an Exim server"
23198 When Exim has been built with TLS support, it advertises the availability of
23199 the STARTTLS command to client hosts that match &%tls_advertise_hosts%&,
23200 but not to any others. The default value of this option is unset, which means
23201 that STARTTLS is not advertised at all. This default is chosen because you
23202 need to set some other options in order to make TLS avaliable, and also it is
23203 sensible for systems that want to use TLS only as a client.
23205 If a client issues a STARTTLS command and there is some configuration
23206 problem in the server, the command is rejected with a 454 error. If the client
23207 persists in trying to issue SMTP commands, all except QUIT are rejected
23210 554 Security failure
23212 If a STARTTLS command is issued within an existing TLS session, it is
23213 rejected with a 554 error code.
23215 To enable TLS operations on a server, you must set &%tls_advertise_hosts%& to
23216 match some hosts. You can, of course, set it to * to match all hosts.
23217 However, this is not all you need to do. TLS sessions to a server won't work
23218 without some further configuration at the server end.
23220 It is rumoured that all existing clients that support TLS/SSL use RSA
23221 encryption. To make this work you need to set, in the server,
23223 tls_certificate = /some/file/name
23224 tls_privatekey = /some/file/name
23226 These options are, in fact, expanded strings, so you can make them depend on
23227 the identity of the client that is connected if you wish. The first file
23228 contains the server's X509 certificate, and the second contains the private key
23229 that goes with it. These files need to be readable by the Exim user, and must
23230 always be given as full path names. They can be the same file if both the
23231 certificate and the key are contained within it. If &%tls_privatekey%& is not
23232 set, or if its expansion is forced to fail or results in an empty string, this
23233 is assumed to be the case. The certificate file may also contain intermediate
23234 certificates that need to be sent to the client to enable it to authenticate
23235 the server's certificate.
23237 If you do not understand about certificates and keys, please try to find a
23238 source of this background information, which is not Exim-specific. (There are a
23239 few comments below in section &<<SECTcerandall>>&.)
23241 &*Note*&: These options do not apply when Exim is operating as a client &--
23242 they apply only in the case of a server. If you need to use a certificate in an
23243 Exim client, you must set the options of the same names in an &(smtp)&
23246 With just these options, an Exim server will be able to use TLS. It does not
23247 require the client to have a certificate (but see below for how to insist on
23248 this). There is one other option that may be needed in other situations. If
23250 tls_dhparam = /some/file/name
23252 is set, the SSL library is initialized for the use of Diffie-Hellman ciphers
23253 with the parameters contained in the file. This increases the set of cipher
23254 suites that the server supports. See the command
23258 for a way of generating this data. At present, &%tls_dhparam%& is used only
23259 when Exim is linked with OpenSSL. It is ignored if GnuTLS is being used.
23261 The strings supplied for these three options are expanded every time a client
23262 host connects. It is therefore possible to use different certificates and keys
23263 for different hosts, if you so wish, by making use of the client's IP address
23264 in &$sender_host_address$& to control the expansion. If a string expansion is
23265 forced to fail, Exim behaves as if the option is not set.
23267 .cindex "cipher" "logging"
23268 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
23269 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
23270 The variable &$tls_cipher$& is set to the cipher suite that was negotiated for
23271 an incoming TLS connection. It is included in the &'Received:'& header of an
23272 incoming message (by default &-- you can, of course, change this), and it is
23273 also included in the log line that records a message's arrival, keyed by
23274 &"X="&, unless the &%tls_cipher%& log selector is turned off. The &%encrypted%&
23275 condition can be used to test for specific cipher suites in ACLs.
23277 The ACLs that run for subsequent SMTP commands can check the name of the cipher
23278 suite and vary their actions accordingly. The cipher suite names are those used
23279 by OpenSSL. These may differ from the names used elsewhere. For example,
23280 OpenSSL uses the name DES-CBC3-SHA for the cipher suite which in other contexts
23281 is known as TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA. Check the OpenSSL
23282 documentation for more details.
23286 .section "Requesting and verifying client certificates"
23287 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
23288 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
23289 If you want an Exim server to request a certificate when negotiating a TLS
23290 session with a client, you must set either &%tls_verify_hosts%& or
23291 &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. You can, of course, set either of them to * to
23292 apply to all TLS connections. For any host that matches one of these options,
23293 Exim requests a certificate as part of the setup of the TLS session. The
23294 contents of the certificate are verified by comparing it with a list of
23295 expected certificates. These must be available in a file or,
23296 for OpenSSL only (not GnuTLS), a directory, identified by
23297 &%tls_verify_certificates%&.
23299 A file can contain multiple certificates, concatenated end to end. If a
23302 each certificate must be in a separate file, with a name (or a symbolic link)
23303 of the form <&'hash'&>.0, where <&'hash'&> is a hash value constructed from the
23304 certificate. You can compute the relevant hash by running the command
23306 openssl x509 -hash -noout -in /cert/file
23308 where &_/cert/file_& contains a single certificate.
23310 The difference between &%tls_verify_hosts%& and &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& is
23311 what happens if the client does not supply a certificate, or if the certificate
23312 does not match any of the certificates in the collection named by
23313 &%tls_verify_certificates%&. If the client matches &%tls_verify_hosts%&, the
23314 attempt to set up a TLS session is aborted, and the incoming connection is
23315 dropped. If the client matches &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&, the (encrypted) SMTP
23316 session continues. ACLs that run for subsequent SMTP commands can detect the
23317 fact that no certificate was verified, and vary their actions accordingly. For
23318 example, you can insist on a certificate before accepting a message for
23319 relaying, but not when the message is destined for local delivery.
23321 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
23322 When a client supplies a certificate (whether it verifies or not), the value of
23323 the Distinguished Name of the certificate is made available in the variable
23324 &$tls_peerdn$& during subsequent processing of the message.
23326 .cindex "log" "distinguished name"
23327 Because it is often a long text string, it is not included in the log line or
23328 &'Received:'& header by default. You can arrange for it to be logged, keyed by
23329 &"DN="&, by setting the &%tls_peerdn%& log selector, and you can use
23330 &%received_header_text%& to change the &'Received:'& header. When no
23331 certificate is supplied, &$tls_peerdn$& is empty.
23334 .section "Revoked certificates"
23335 .cindex "TLS" "revoked certificates"
23336 .cindex "revocation list"
23337 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list"
23338 Certificate issuing authorities issue Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) when
23339 certificates are revoked. If you have such a list, you can pass it to an Exim
23340 server using the global option called &%tls_crl%& and to an Exim client using
23341 an identically named option for the &(smtp)& transport. In each case, the value
23342 of the option is expanded and must then be the name of a file that contains a
23346 .section "Configuring an Exim client to use TLS"
23347 .cindex "cipher" "logging"
23348 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
23349 .cindex "log" "distinguished name"
23350 .cindex "TLS" "configuring an Exim client"
23351 The &%tls_cipher%& and &%tls_peerdn%& log selectors apply to outgoing SMTP
23352 deliveries as well as to incoming, the latter one causing logging of the
23353 server certificate's DN. The remaining client configuration for TLS is all
23354 within the &(smtp)& transport.
23356 It is not necessary to set any options to have TLS work in the &(smtp)&
23357 transport. If Exim is built with TLS support, and TLS is advertised by a
23358 server, the &(smtp)& transport always tries to start a TLS session. However,
23359 this can be prevented by setting &%hosts_avoid_tls%& (an option of the
23360 transport) to a list of server hosts for which TLS should not be used.
23362 If you do not want Exim to attempt to send messages unencrypted when an attempt
23363 to set up an encrypted connection fails in any way, you can set
23364 &%hosts_require_tls%& to a list of hosts for which encryption is mandatory. For
23365 those hosts, delivery is always deferred if an encrypted connection cannot be
23366 set up. If there are any other hosts for the address, they are tried in the
23369 When the server host is not in &%hosts_require_tls%&, Exim may try to deliver
23370 the message unencrypted. It always does this if the response to STARTTLS is
23371 a 5&'xx'& code. For a temporary error code, or for a failure to negotiate a TLS
23372 session after a success response code, what happens is controlled by the
23373 &%tls_tempfail_tryclear%& option of the &(smtp)& transport. If it is false,
23374 delivery to this host is deferred, and other hosts (if available) are tried. If
23375 it is true, Exim attempts to deliver unencrypted after a 4&'xx'& response to
23376 STARTTLS, and if STARTTLS is accepted, but the subsequent TLS
23377 negotiation fails, Exim closes the current connection (because it is in an
23378 unknown state), opens a new one to the same host, and then tries the delivery
23382 The &%tls_certificate%& and &%tls_privatekey%& options of the &(smtp)&
23383 transport provide the client with a certificate, which is passed to the server
23384 if it requests it. If the server is Exim, it will request a certificate only if
23385 &%tls_verify_hosts%& or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& matches the client. &*Note*&:
23386 These options must be set in the &(smtp)& transport for Exim to use TLS when it
23387 is operating as a client. Exim does not assume that a server certificate (set
23388 by the global options of the same name) should also be used when operating as a
23391 If &%tls_verify_certificates%& is set, it must name a file or,
23392 for OpenSSL only (not GnuTLS), a directory, that contains a collection of
23393 expected server certificates. The client verifies the server's certificate
23394 against this collection, taking into account any revoked certificates that are
23395 in the list defined by &%tls_crl%&.
23398 &%tls_require_ciphers%& is set on the &(smtp)& transport, it must contain a
23399 list of permitted cipher suites. If either of these checks fails, delivery to
23400 the current host is abandoned, and the &(smtp)& transport tries to deliver to
23401 alternative hosts, if any.
23404 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
23405 All the TLS options in the &(smtp)& transport are expanded before use, with
23406 &$host$& and &$host_address$& containing the name and address of the server to
23407 which the client is connected. Forced failure of an expansion causes Exim to
23408 behave as if the relevant option were unset.
23412 .section "Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection" &&&
23414 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries with TLS"
23415 .cindex "TLS" "multiple message deliveries"
23416 Exim sends multiple messages down the same TCP/IP connection by starting up
23417 an entirely new delivery process for each message, passing the socket from
23418 one process to the next. This implementation does not fit well with the use
23419 of TLS, because there is quite a lot of state information associated with a TLS
23420 connection, not just a socket identification. Passing all the state information
23421 to a new process is not feasible. Consequently, Exim shuts down an existing TLS
23422 session before passing the socket to a new process. The new process may then
23423 try to start a new TLS session, and if successful, may try to re-authenticate
23424 if AUTH is in use, before sending the next message.
23426 The RFC is not clear as to whether or not an SMTP session continues in clear
23427 after TLS has been shut down, or whether TLS may be restarted again later, as
23428 just described. However, if the server is Exim, this shutdown and
23429 reinitialization works. It is not known which (if any) other servers operate
23430 successfully if the client closes a TLS session and continues with unencrypted
23431 SMTP, but there are certainly some that do not work. For such servers, Exim
23432 should not pass the socket to another process, because the failure of the
23433 subsequent attempt to use it would cause Exim to record a temporary host error,
23434 and delay other deliveries to that host.
23436 To test for this case, Exim sends an EHLO command to the server after
23437 closing down the TLS session. If this fails in any way, the connection is
23438 closed instead of being passed to a new delivery process, but no retry
23439 information is recorded.
23441 There is also a manual override; you can set &%hosts_nopass_tls%& on the
23442 &(smtp)& transport to match those hosts for which Exim should not pass
23443 connections to new processes if TLS has been used.
23448 .section "Certificates and all that" "SECTcerandall"
23449 .cindex "certificate" "references to discussion"
23450 In order to understand fully how TLS works, you need to know about
23451 certificates, certificate signing, and certificate authorities. This is not the
23452 place to give a tutorial, especially as I do not know very much about it
23453 myself. Some helpful introduction can be found in the FAQ for the SSL addition
23454 to Apache, currently at
23456 &url(http://www.modssl.org/docs/2.7/ssl_faq.html#ToC24)
23458 Other parts of the &'modssl'& documentation are also helpful, and have
23459 links to further files.
23460 Eric Rescorla's book, &'SSL and TLS'&, published by Addison-Wesley (ISBN
23461 0-201-61598-3), contains both introductory and more in-depth descriptions.
23462 Some sample programs taken from the book are available from
23464 &url(http://www.rtfm.com/openssl-examples/)
23468 .section "Certificate chains"
23469 The file named by &%tls_certificate%& may contain more than one
23470 certificate. This is useful in the case where the certificate that is being
23471 sent is validated by an intermediate certificate which the other end does
23472 not have. Multiple certificates must be in the correct order in the file.
23473 First the host's certificate itself, then the first intermediate
23474 certificate to validate the issuer of the host certificate, then the next
23475 intermediate certificate to validate the issuer of the first intermediate
23476 certificate, and so on, until finally (optionally) the root certificate.
23477 The root certificate must already be trusted by the recipient for
23478 validation to succeed, of course, but if it's not preinstalled, sending the
23479 root certificate along with the rest makes it available for the user to
23480 install if the receiving end is a client MUA that can interact with a user.
23483 .section "Self-signed certificates"
23484 .cindex "certificate" "self-signed"
23485 You can create a self-signed certificate using the &'req'& command provided
23486 with OpenSSL, like this:
23488 openssl req -x509 -newkey rsa:1024 -keyout file1 -out file2 \
23491 &_file1_& and &_file2_& can be the same file; the key and the certificate are
23492 delimited and so can be identified independently. The &%-days%& option
23493 specifies a period for which the certificate is valid. The &%-nodes%& option is
23494 important: if you do not set it, the key is encrypted with a passphrase
23495 that you are prompted for, and any use that is made of the key causes more
23496 prompting for the passphrase. This is not helpful if you are going to use
23497 this certificate and key in an MTA, where prompting is not possible.
23499 A self-signed certificate made in this way is sufficient for testing, and
23500 may be adequate for all your requirements if you are mainly interested in
23501 encrypting transfers, and not in secure identification.
23503 However, many clients require that the certificate presented by the server be a
23504 user (also called &"leaf"& or &"site"&) certificate, and not a self-signed
23505 certificate. In this situation, the self-signed certificate described above
23506 must be installed on the client host as a trusted root &'certification
23507 authority'& (CA), and the certificate used by Exim must be a user certificate
23508 signed with that self-signed certificate.
23510 For information on creating self-signed CA certificates and using them to sign
23511 user certificates, see the &'General implementation overview'& chapter of the
23512 Open-source PKI book, available online at
23513 &url(http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/).
23514 .ecindex IIDencsmtp1
23515 .ecindex IIDencsmtp2
23519 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
23520 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
23522 .chapter "Access control lists" "CHAPACL"
23523 .scindex IIDacl "&ACL;" "description"
23524 .cindex "control of incoming mail"
23525 .cindex "message" "controlling incoming"
23526 .cindex "policy control" "access control lists"
23527 Access Control Lists (ACLs) are defined in a separate section of the run time
23528 configuration file, headed by &"begin acl"&. Each ACL definition starts with a
23529 name, terminated by a colon. Here is a complete ACL section that contains just
23530 one very small ACL:
23535 accept hosts = one.host.only
23537 You can have as many lists as you like in the ACL section, and the order in
23538 which they appear does not matter. The lists are self-terminating.
23540 The majority of ACLs are used to control Exim's behaviour when it receives
23541 certain SMTP commands. This applies both to incoming TCP/IP connections, and
23542 when a local process submits a message using SMTP by specifying the &%-bs%&
23543 option. The most common use is for controlling which recipients are accepted
23544 in incoming messages. In addition, you can define an ACL that is used to check
23545 local non-SMTP messages. The default configuration file contains an example of
23546 a realistic ACL for checking RCPT commands. This is discussed in chapter
23547 &<<CHAPdefconfil>>&.
23550 .section "Testing ACLs"
23551 The &%-bh%& command line option provides a way of testing your ACL
23552 configuration locally by running a fake SMTP session with which you interact.
23553 The host &'relay-test.mail-abuse.org'& provides a service for checking your
23554 relaying configuration (see section &<<SECTcheralcon>>& for more details).
23558 .section "Specifying when ACLs are used"
23559 .cindex "&ACL;" "options for specifying"
23560 In order to cause an ACL to be used, you have to name it in one of the relevant
23561 options in the main part of the configuration. These options are:
23562 .cindex "AUTH" "ACL for"
23563 .cindex "DATA" "ACLs for"
23564 .cindex "ETRN" "ACL for"
23565 .cindex "EXPN" "ACL for"
23566 .cindex "HELO" "ACL for"
23567 .cindex "EHLO" "ACL for"
23568 .cindex "MAIL" "ACL for"
23569 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
23570 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
23571 .cindex "STARTTLS" "ACL for"
23572 .cindex "VRFY" "ACL for"
23573 .cindex "SMTP connection" "ACL for"
23574 .cindex "non-smtp message" "ACL for"
23577 .row &~&%acl_not_smtp%& "ACL for non-SMTP messages"
23578 .row &~&%acl_smtp_auth%& "ACL for AUTH"
23579 .row &~&%acl_smtp_connect%& "ACL for start of SMTP connection"
23580 .row &~&%acl_smtp_data%& "ACL after DATA is complete"
23581 .row &~&%acl_smtp_etrn%& "ACL for ETRN"
23582 .row &~&%acl_smtp_expn%& "ACL for EXPN"
23583 .row &~&%acl_smtp_helo%& "ACL for HELO or EHLO"
23584 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mail%& "ACL for MAIL"
23585 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mailauth%& "ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL"
23586 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mime%& "ACL for content-scanning MIME parts"
23587 .row &~&%acl_smtp_predata%& "ACL at start of DATA command"
23588 .row &~&%acl_smtp_quit%& "ACL for QUIT"
23589 .row &~&%acl_smtp_rcpt%& "ACL for RCPT"
23590 .row &~&%acl_smtp_starttls%& "ACL for STARTTLS"
23591 .row &~&%acl_smtp_vrfy%& "ACL for VRFY"
23594 For example, if you set
23596 acl_smtp_rcpt = small_acl
23598 the little ACL defined above is used whenever Exim receives a RCPT command
23599 in an SMTP dialogue. The majority of policy tests on incoming messages can be
23600 done when RCPT commands arrive. A rejection of RCPT should cause the
23601 sending MTA to give up on the recipient address contained in the RCPT
23602 command, whereas rejection at other times may cause the client MTA to keep on
23603 trying to deliver the message. It is therefore recommended that you do as much
23604 testing as possible at RCPT time.
23607 .section "The non-SMTP ACL"
23608 .cindex "non-smtp message" "ACL for"
23609 The non-SMTP ACL applies to all non-interactive incoming messages, that is, it
23610 applies to batch SMTP as well as to non-SMTP messages. (Batch SMTP is not
23611 really SMTP.) This ACL is run just before the &[local_scan()]& function. Any
23612 kind of rejection is treated as permanent, because there is no way of sending a
23613 temporary error for these kinds of message. Many of the ACL conditions (for
23614 example, host tests, and tests on the state of the SMTP connection such as
23615 encryption and authentication) are not relevant and are forbidden in this ACL.
23618 .section "The connect ACL"
23619 .cindex "SMTP connection" "ACL for"
23620 The ACL test specified by &%acl_smtp_connect%& happens after the test specified
23621 by &%host_reject_connection%& (which is now an anomaly) and any TCP Wrappers
23622 testing (if configured).
23625 .section "The DATA ACLs"
23626 .cindex "DATA" "ACLs for"
23627 Two ACLs are associated with the DATA command, because it is two-stage
23628 command, with two responses being sent to the client.
23629 When the DATA command is received, the ACL defined by &%acl_smtp_predata%&
23630 is obeyed. This gives you control after all the RCPT commands, but before
23631 the message itself is received. It offers the opportunity to give a negative
23632 response to the DATA command before the data is transmitted. Header lines
23633 added by MAIL or RCPT ACLs are not visible at this time, but any that
23634 are defined here are visible when the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL is run.
23636 You cannot test the contents of the message, for example, to verify addresses
23637 in the headers, at RCPT time or when the DATA command is received. Such
23638 tests have to appear in the ACL that is run after the message itself has been
23639 received, before the final response to the DATA command is sent. This is
23640 the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%&, which is the second ACL that is
23641 associated with the DATA command.
23643 For both of these ACLs, it is not possible to reject individual recipients. An
23644 error response rejects the entire message. Unfortunately, it is known that some
23645 MTAs do not treat hard (5&'xx'&) responses to the DATA command (either
23646 before or after the data) correctly &-- they keep the message on their queues
23647 and try again later, but that is their problem, though it does waste some of
23651 .section "The MIME ACL"
23652 The &%acl_smtp_mime%& option is available only when Exim is compiled with the
23653 content-scanning extension. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
23656 .section "The QUIT ACL" "SECTQUITACL"
23657 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
23658 The ACL for the SMTP QUIT command is anomalous, in that the outcome of the ACL
23659 does not affect the response code to QUIT, which is always 221. Thus, the ACL
23660 does not in fact control any access. For this reason, the only verbs that are
23661 permitted are &%accept%& and &%warn%&.
23663 This ACL can be used for tasks such as custom logging at the end of an SMTP
23664 session. For example, you can use ACL variables in other ACLs to count
23665 messages, recipients, etc., and log the totals at QUIT time using one or
23666 more &%logwrite%& modifiers on a &%warn%& verb.
23668 &*Warning*&: Only the &$acl_c$&&'x'& variables can be used for this, because
23669 the &$acl_m$&&'x'& variables are reset at the end of each incoming message.
23671 You do not need to have a final &%accept%&, but if you do, you can use a
23672 &%message%& modifier to specify custom text that is sent as part of the 221
23675 This ACL is run only for a &"normal"& QUIT. For certain kinds of disastrous
23676 failure (for example, failure to open a log file, or when Exim is bombing out
23677 because it has detected an unrecoverable error), all SMTP commands from the
23678 client are given temporary error responses until QUIT is received or the
23679 connection is closed. In these special cases, the QUIT ACL does not run.
23683 .section "Finding an ACL to use"
23684 .cindex "&ACL;" "finding which to use"
23685 The value of an &%acl_smtp_%&&'xxx'& option is expanded before use, so you can
23686 use different ACLs in different circumstances. The resulting string does not
23687 have to be the name of an ACL in the configuration file; there are other
23688 possibilities. Having expanded the string, Exim searches for an ACL as follows:
23691 If the string begins with a slash, Exim uses it as a file name, and reads its
23692 contents as an ACL. The lines are processed in the same way as lines in the
23693 Exim configuration file. In particular, continuation lines are supported, blank
23694 lines are ignored, as are lines whose first non-whitespace character is &"#"&.
23695 If the file does not exist or cannot be read, an error occurs (typically
23696 causing a temporary failure of whatever caused the ACL to be run). For example:
23698 acl_smtp_data = /etc/acls/\
23699 ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch\
23700 {/etc/acllist}{$value}{default}}
23702 This looks up an ACL file to use on the basis of the host's IP address, falling
23703 back to a default if the lookup fails. If an ACL is successfully read from a
23704 file, it is retained in memory for the duration of the Exim process, so that it
23705 can be re-used without having to re-read the file.
23707 If the string does not start with a slash, and does not contain any spaces,
23708 Exim searches the ACL section of the configuration for an ACL whose name
23709 matches the string.
23711 If no named ACL is found, or if the string contains spaces, Exim parses
23712 the string as an inline ACL. This can save typing in cases where you just
23713 want to have something like
23715 acl_smtp_vrfy = accept
23717 in order to allow free use of the VRFY command. Such a string may contain
23718 newlines; it is processed in the same way as an ACL that is read from a file.
23724 .section "ACL return codes"
23725 .cindex "&ACL;" "return codes"
23726 Except for the QUIT ACL, which does not affect the SMTP return code (see
23727 section &<<SECTQUITACL>>& above), the result of running an ACL is either
23728 &"accept"& or &"deny"&, or, if some test cannot be completed (for example, if a
23729 database is down), &"defer"&. These results cause 2&'xx'&, 5&'xx'&, and 4&'xx'&
23730 return codes, respectively, to be used in the SMTP dialogue. A fourth return,
23731 &"error"&, occurs when there is an error such as invalid syntax in the ACL.
23732 This also causes a 4&'xx'& return code.
23734 For the non-SMTP ACL, &"defer"& and &"error"& are treated in the same way as
23735 &"deny"&, because there is no mechanism for passing temporary errors to the
23736 submitters of non-SMTP messages.
23739 ACLs that are relevant to message reception may also return &"discard"&. This
23740 has the effect of &"accept"&, but causes either the entire message or an
23741 individual recipient address to be discarded. In other words, it is a
23742 blackholing facility. Use it with care.
23744 If the ACL for MAIL returns &"discard"&, all recipients are discarded, and no
23745 ACL is run for subsequent RCPT commands. The effect of &"discard"& in a
23746 RCPT ACL is to discard just the one recipient address. If there are no
23747 recipients left when the message's data is received, the DATA ACL is not
23748 run. A &"discard"& return from the DATA or the non-SMTP ACL discards all the
23749 remaining recipients. The &"discard"& return is not permitted for the
23750 &%acl_smtp_predata%& ACL.
23753 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "when all recipients discarded"
23754 The &[local_scan()]& function is always run, even if there are no remaining
23755 recipients; it may create new recipients.
23759 .section "Unset ACL options"
23760 .cindex "&ACL;" "unset options"
23761 The default actions when any of the &%acl_%&&'xxx'& options are unset are not
23762 all the same. &*Note*&: These defaults apply only when the relevant ACL is
23763 not defined at all. For any defined ACL, the default action when control
23764 reaches the end of the ACL statements is &"deny"&.
23766 For &%acl_not_smtp%&, &%acl_smtp_auth%&, &%acl_smtp_connect%&,
23767 &%acl_smtp_data%&, &%acl_smtp_helo%&, &%acl_smtp_mail%&, &%acl_smtp_mailauth%&,
23768 &%acl_smtp_mime%&, &%acl_smtp_predata%&, &%acl_smtp_quit%&, and
23769 &%acl_smtp_starttls%&, the action when the ACL is not defined is &"accept"&.
23771 For the others (&%acl_smtp_etrn%&, &%acl_smtp_expn%&, &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&, and
23772 &%acl_smtp_vrfy%&), the action when the ACL is not defined is &"deny"&.
23773 This means that &%acl_smtp_rcpt%& must be defined in order to receive any
23774 messages over an SMTP connection. For an example, see the ACL in the default
23775 configuration file.
23780 .section "Data for message ACLs"
23781 .cindex "&ACL;" "data for message ACL"
23783 .cindex &$local_part$&
23784 .cindex &$sender_address$&
23785 .cindex &$sender_host_address$&
23786 .cindex &$smtp_command$&
23787 When a MAIL or RCPT ACL, or either of the DATA ACLs, is running, the variables
23788 that contain information about the host and the message's sender (for example,
23789 &$sender_host_address$& and &$sender_address$&) are set, and can be used in ACL
23790 statements. In the case of RCPT (but not MAIL or DATA), &$domain$& and
23791 &$local_part$& are set from the argument address. The entire SMTP command
23792 is available in &$smtp_command$&.
23794 When an ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL is running, the variables that
23795 contain information about the host are set, but &$sender_address$& is not yet
23796 set. Section &<<SECTauthparamail>>& contains a discussion of this parameter and
23799 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
23800 The &$message_size$& variable is set to the value of the SIZE parameter on
23801 the MAIL command at MAIL, RCPT and pre-data time, or to -1 if
23802 that parameter is not given. The value is updated to the true message size by
23803 the time the final DATA ACL is run (after the message data has been
23806 .cindex "&$rcpt_count$&"
23807 .cindex "&$recipients_count$&"
23808 The &$rcpt_count$& variable increases by one for each RCPT command received.
23809 The &$recipients_count$& variable increases by one each time a RCPT command is
23810 accepted, so while an ACL for RCPT is being processed, it contains the number
23811 of previously accepted recipients. At DATA time (for both the DATA ACLs),
23812 &$rcpt_count$& contains the total number of RCPT commands, and
23813 &$recipients_count$& contains the total number of accepted recipients.
23819 .section "Data for non-message ACLs" "SECTdatfornon"
23820 .cindex "&ACL;" "data for non-message ACL"
23821 .cindex &$smtp_command_argument$&
23822 .cindex &$smtp_command$&
23823 When an ACL is being run for AUTH, EHLO, ETRN, EXPN, HELO, STARTTLS, or VRFY,
23824 the remainder of the SMTP command line is placed in &$smtp_command_argument$&,
23825 and the entire SMTP command is available in &$smtp_command$&.
23826 These variables can be tested using a &%condition%& condition. For example,
23827 here is an ACL for use with AUTH, which insists that either the session is
23828 encrypted, or the CRAM-MD5 authentication method is used. In other words, it
23829 does not permit authentication methods that use cleartext passwords on
23830 unencrypted connections.
23833 accept encrypted = *
23834 accept condition = ${if eq{${uc:$smtp_command_argument}}\
23836 deny message = TLS encryption or CRAM-MD5 required
23838 (Another way of applying this restriction is to arrange for the authenticators
23839 that use cleartext passwords not to be advertised when the connection is not
23840 encrypted. You can use the generic &%server_advertise_condition%& authenticator
23841 option to do this.)
23845 .section "Format of an ACL"
23846 .cindex "&ACL;" "format of"
23847 .cindex "&ACL;" "verbs; definition of"
23848 An individual ACL consists of a number of statements. Each statement starts
23849 with a verb, optionally followed by a number of conditions and &"modifiers"&.
23850 Modifiers can change the way the verb operates, define error and log messages,
23851 set variables, insert delays, and vary the processing of accepted messages.
23853 If all the conditions are met, the verb is obeyed. The same condition may be
23854 used (with different arguments) more than once in the same statement. This
23855 provides a means of specifying an &"and"& conjunction between conditions. For
23858 deny dnslists = list1.example
23859 dnslists = list2.example
23861 If there are no conditions, the verb is always obeyed. Exim stops evaluating
23862 the conditions and modifiers when it reaches a condition that fails. What
23863 happens then depends on the verb (and in one case, on a special modifier). Not
23864 all the conditions make sense at every testing point. For example, you cannot
23865 test a sender address in the ACL that is run for a VRFY command.
23868 .section "ACL verbs"
23869 The ACL verbs are as follows:
23872 .cindex "&%accept%&" "ACL verb"
23873 &%accept%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"accept"&. If any
23874 of the conditions are not met, what happens depends on whether &%endpass%&
23875 appears among the conditions (for syntax see below). If the failing condition
23876 is before &%endpass%&, control is passed to the next ACL statement; if it is
23877 after &%endpass%&, the ACL returns &"deny"&. Consider this statement, used to
23878 check a RCPT command:
23880 accept domains = +local_domains
23884 If the recipient domain does not match the &%domains%& condition, control
23885 passes to the next statement. If it does match, the recipient is verified, and
23886 the command is accepted if verification succeeds. However, if verification
23887 fails, the ACL yields &"deny"&, because the failing condition is after
23891 .cindex "&%defer%&" "ACL verb"
23892 &%defer%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"defer"& which, in
23893 an SMTP session, causes a 4&'xx'& response to be given. For a non-SMTP ACL,
23894 &%defer%& is the same as &%deny%&, because there is no way of sending a
23895 temporary error. For a RCPT command, &%defer%& is much the same as using a
23896 &(redirect)& router and &`:defer:`& while verifying, but the &%defer%& verb can
23897 be used in any ACL, and even for a recipient it might be a simpler approach.
23899 .cindex "&%deny%&" "ACL verb"
23900 &%deny%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"deny"&. If any of
23901 the conditions are not met, control is passed to the next ACL statement. For
23904 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
23906 rejects commands from hosts that are on a DNS black list.
23909 .cindex "&%discard%&" "ACL verb"
23910 &%discard%&: This verb behaves like &%accept%&, except that it returns
23911 &"discard"& from the ACL instead of &"accept"&. It is permitted only on ACLs
23912 that are concerned with receiving messages, and it causes recipients to be
23913 discarded. If the &%log_message%& modifier is set when &%discard%& operates,
23914 its contents are added to the line that is automatically written to the log.
23916 If &%discard%& is used in an ACL for RCPT, just the one recipient is
23917 discarded; if used for MAIL, DATA or in the non-SMTP ACL, all the
23918 message's recipients are discarded. Recipients that are discarded before
23919 DATA do not appear in the log line when the &%log_recipients%& log selector
23922 .cindex "&%drop%&" "ACL verb"
23923 &%drop%&: This verb behaves like &%deny%&, except that an SMTP connection is
23924 forcibly closed after the 5&'xx'& error message has been sent. For example:
23926 drop message = I don't take more than 20 RCPTs
23927 condition = ${if > {$rcpt_count}{20}}
23929 There is no difference between &%deny%& and &%drop%& for the connect-time ACL.
23930 The connection is always dropped after sending a 550 response.
23933 .cindex "&%require%&" "ACL verb"
23934 &%require%&: If all the conditions are met, control is passed to the next ACL
23935 statement. If any of the conditions are not met, the ACL returns &"deny"&. For
23936 example, when checking a RCPT command,
23938 require verify = sender
23940 passes control to subsequent statements only if the message's sender can be
23941 verified. Otherwise, it rejects the command.
23944 .cindex "&%warn%&" "ACL verb"
23945 &%warn%&: If all the conditions are met, a header line is added to an incoming
23946 message and/or a line is written to Exim's main log. In all cases, control
23947 passes to the next ACL statement. The text of the added header line and the log
23948 line are specified by modifiers; if they are not present, a &%warn%& verb just
23949 checks its conditions and obeys any &"immediate"& modifiers such as &%set%& and
23950 &%logwrite%&. There is more about adding header lines in section
23951 &<<SECTaddheadacl>>&.
23953 If any condition on a &%warn%& statement cannot be completed (that is, there is
23954 some sort of defer), no header lines are added and the configured log line is
23955 not written. No further conditions or modifiers in the &%warn%& statement are
23956 processed. The incident is logged, but the ACL continues to be processed, from
23957 the next statement onwards.
23959 If a &%message%& modifier is present on a &%warn%& verb in an ACL that is not
23960 testing an incoming message, it is ignored, and the incident is logged.
23962 A &%warn%& statement may use the &%log_message%& modifier to cause a line to be
23963 written to the main log when the statement's conditions are true.
23964 If an identical log line is requested several times in the same message, only
23965 one copy is actually written to the log. If you want to force duplicates to be
23966 written, use the &%logwrite%& modifier instead.
23968 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
23969 When one of the &%warn%& conditions is an address verification that fails, the
23970 text of the verification failure message is in &$acl_verify_message$&. If you
23971 want this logged, you must set it up explicitly. For example:
23973 warn !verify = sender
23974 log_message = sender verify failed: $acl_verify_message
23978 At the end of each ACL there is an implicit unconditional &%deny%&.
23980 As you can see from the examples above, the conditions and modifiers are
23981 written one to a line, with the first one on the same line as the verb, and
23982 subsequent ones on following lines. If you have a very long condition, you can
23983 continue it onto several physical lines by the usual backslash continuation
23984 mechanism. It is conventional to align the conditions vertically.
23988 .section "ACL variables" "SECTaclvariables"
23989 .cindex "&ACL;" "variables"
23990 There are some special variables that can be set during ACL processing. They
23991 can be used to pass information between different ACLs, different invocations
23992 of the same ACL in the same SMTP connection, and between ACLs and the routers,
23993 transports, and filters that are used to deliver a message. There are two sets
23994 of these variables:
23997 The values of &$acl_c0$& to &$acl_c19$& persist throughout an SMTP
23998 connection. They are never reset. Thus, a value that is set while receiving one
23999 message is still available when receiving the next message on the same SMTP
24002 The values of &$acl_m0$& to &$acl_m19$& persist only while a message is
24003 being received. They are reset afterwards. They are also reset by MAIL, RSET,
24004 EHLO, HELO, and after starting up a TLS session.
24007 When a message is accepted, the current values of all the ACL variables are
24008 preserved with the message and are subsequently made available at delivery
24009 time. The ACL variables are set by modifier called &%set%&. For example:
24011 accept hosts = whatever
24012 set acl_m4 = some value
24014 &*Note*&: A leading dollar sign is not used when naming a variable that is to
24015 be set. If you want to set a variable without taking any action, you can use a
24016 &%warn%& verb without any other modifiers or conditions.
24020 .section "Condition and modifier processing"
24021 .cindex "&ACL;" "conditions; processing"
24022 .cindex "&ACL;" "modifiers; processing"
24023 An exclamation mark preceding a condition negates its result. For example:
24025 deny domains = *.dom.example
24026 !verify = recipient
24028 causes the ACL to return &"deny"& if the recipient domain ends in
24029 &'dom.example'& and the recipient address cannot be verified. Sometimes
24030 negation can be used on the right-hand side of a condition. For example, these
24031 two statements are equivalent:
24033 deny hosts = !192.168.3.4
24034 deny !hosts = 192.168.3.4
24036 However, for many conditions (&%verify%& being a good example), only left-hand
24037 side negation of the whole condition is possible.
24039 The arguments of conditions and modifiers are expanded. A forced failure
24040 of an expansion causes a condition to be ignored, that is, it behaves as if the
24041 condition is true. Consider these two statements:
24043 accept senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
24044 {/some/file}{$value}fail}
24045 accept senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
24046 {/some/file}{$value}{}}
24048 Each attempts to look up a list of acceptable senders. If the lookup succeeds,
24049 the returned list is searched, but if the lookup fails the behaviour is
24050 different in the two cases. The &%fail%& in the first statement causes the
24051 condition to be ignored, leaving no further conditions. The &%accept%& verb
24052 therefore succeeds. The second statement, however, generates an empty list when
24053 the lookup fails. No sender can match an empty list, so the condition fails,
24054 and therefore the &%accept%& also fails.
24056 ACL modifiers appear mixed in with conditions in ACL statements. Some of them
24057 specify actions that are taken as the conditions for a statement are checked;
24058 others specify text for messages that are used when access is denied or a
24059 warning is generated. The &%control%& modifier affects the way an incoming
24060 message is handled.
24062 The positioning of the modifiers in an ACL statement important, because the
24063 processing of a verb ceases as soon as its outcome is known. Only those
24064 modifiers that have already been encountered will take effect. For example,
24065 consider this use of the &%message%& modifier:
24067 require message = Can't verify sender
24069 message = Can't verify recipient
24071 message = This message cannot be used
24073 If sender verification fails, Exim knows that the result of the statement is
24074 &"deny"&, so it goes no further. The first &%message%& modifier has been seen,
24075 so its text is used as the error message. If sender verification succeeds, but
24076 recipient verification fails, the second message is used. If recipient
24077 verification succeeds, the third message becomes &"current"&, but is never used
24078 because there are no more conditions to cause failure.
24080 For the &%deny%& verb, on the other hand, it is always the last &%message%&
24081 modifier that is used, because all the conditions must be true for rejection to
24082 happen. Specifying more than one &%message%& modifier does not make sense, and
24083 the message can even be specified after all the conditions. For example:
24086 !senders = *@my.domain.example
24087 message = Invalid sender from client host
24089 The &"deny"& result does not happen until the end of the statement is reached,
24090 by which time Exim has set up the message.
24094 .section "ACL modifiers" "SECTACLmodi"
24095 .cindex "&ACL;" "modifiers; list of"
24096 The ACL modifiers are as follows:
24099 .vitem &*add_header*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
24100 This modifier specifies one of more header lines that are to be added to an
24101 incoming message, assuming, of course, that the message is ultimately
24102 accepted. For details, see section &<<SECTaddheadacl>>&.
24104 .vitem &*control*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
24105 .cindex "&%control%&" "ACL modifier"
24106 This modifier affects the subsequent processing of the SMTP connection or of an
24107 incoming message that is accepted. The effect of the first type of control
24108 lasts for the duration of the connection, whereas the effect of the second type
24109 lasts only until the current message has been received. The message-specific
24110 controls always apply to the whole message, not to individual recipients,
24111 even if the &%control%& modifier appears in a RCPT ACL.
24113 As there are now quite a few controls that can be applied, they are described
24114 separately in section &<<SECTcontrols>>&. The &%control%& modifier can be used
24115 in several different ways. For example:
24117 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
24118 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
24121 It can be at the end of an &%accept%& statement:
24123 accept ...some conditions
24124 control = queue_only
24126 In this case, the control is applied when this statement yields &"accept"&, in
24127 other words, when the conditions are all true.
24130 It can be in the middle of an &%accept%& statement:
24132 accept ...some conditions...
24133 control = queue_only
24134 ...some more conditions...
24136 If the first set of conditions are true, the control is applied, even if the
24137 statement does not accept because one of the second set of conditions is false.
24138 In this case, some subsequent statement must yield &"accept"& for the control
24142 It can be used with &%warn%& to apply the control, leaving the
24143 decision about accepting or denying to a subsequent verb. For
24146 warn ...some conditions...
24150 This example of &%warn%& does not contain &%message%&, &%log_message%&, or
24151 &%logwrite%&, so it does not add anything to the message and does not write a
24155 If you want to apply a control unconditionally, you can use it with a
24156 &%require%& verb. For example:
24158 require control = no_multiline_response
24162 .vitem &*delay*&&~=&~<&'time'&>
24163 .cindex "&%delay%&" "ACL modifier"
24164 .cindex "&%-bh%& option"
24165 This modifier causes Exim to wait for the time interval before proceeding. The
24166 time is given in the usual Exim notation. This modifier may appear in any ACL.
24167 The delay happens as soon as the modifier is processed. However, when testing
24168 Exim using the &%-bh%& option, the delay is not actually imposed (an
24169 appropriate message is output instead).
24171 Like &%control%&, &%delay%& can be used with &%accept%& or &%deny%&, for
24174 deny ...some conditions...
24177 The delay happens if all the conditions are true, before the statement returns
24178 &"deny"&. Compare this with:
24181 ...some conditions...
24183 which waits for 30s before processing the conditions. The &%delay%& modifier
24184 can also be used with &%warn%& and together with &%control%&:
24186 warn ...some conditions...
24193 .cindex "&%endpass%&" "ACL modifier"
24194 This modifier, which has no argument, is recognized only in &%accept%&
24195 statements. It marks the boundary between the conditions whose failure causes
24196 control to pass to the next statement, and the conditions whose failure causes
24197 the ACL to return &"deny"&. See the description of &%accept%& above.
24199 .vitem &*log_message*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
24200 .cindex "&%log_message%&" "ACL modifier"
24201 This modifier sets up a message that is used as part of the log message if the
24202 ACL denies access or a &%warn%& statement's conditions are true. For example:
24204 require log_message = wrong cipher suite $tls_cipher
24205 encrypted = DES-CBC3-SHA
24207 &%log_message%& adds to any underlying error message that may exist because of
24208 the condition failure. For example, while verifying a recipient address, a
24209 &':fail:'& redirection might have already set up a message. Although the
24210 message is usually defined before the conditions to which it applies, the
24211 expansion does not happen until Exim decides that access is to be denied. This
24212 means that any variables that are set by the condition are available for
24213 inclusion in the message. For example, the &$dnslist_$&<&'xxx'&> variables are
24214 set after a DNS black list lookup succeeds. If the expansion of &%log_message%&
24215 fails, or if the result is an empty string, the modifier is ignored.
24217 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
24218 If you want to use a &%warn%& statement to log the result of an address
24219 verification, you can use &$acl_verify_message$& to include the verification
24222 If &%log_message%& is used with a &%warn%& statement, &"Warning:"& is added to
24223 the start of the logged message. If the same warning log message is requested
24224 more than once while receiving a single email message, only one copy is
24225 actually logged. If you want to log multiple copies, use &%logwrite%& instead
24226 of &%log_message%&. In the absence of &%log_message%& and &%logwrite%&, nothing
24227 is logged for a succesful &%warn%& statement.
24229 If &%log_message%& is not present and there is no underlying error message (for
24230 example, from the failure of address verification), but &%message%& is present,
24231 the &%message%& text is used for logging rejections. However, if any text for
24232 logging contains newlines, only the first line is logged. In the absence of
24233 both &%log_message%& and &%message%&, a default built-in message is used for
24234 logging rejections.
24236 .vitem &*logwrite*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
24237 .cindex "&%logwrite%&" "ACL modifier"
24238 .cindex "logging in ACL" "immediate"
24239 This modifier writes a message to a log file as soon as it is encountered when
24240 processing an ACL. (Compare &%log_message%&, which, except in the case of
24241 &%warn%&, is used only if the ACL statement denies access.) The &%logwrite%&
24242 modifier can be used to log special incidents in ACLs. For example:
24244 &`accept `&<&'some special conditions'&>
24245 &` control = freeze`&
24246 &` logwrite = froze message because ...`&
24248 By default, the message is written to the main log. However, it may begin
24249 with a colon, followed by a comma-separated list of log names, and then
24250 another colon, to specify exactly which logs are to be written. For
24253 logwrite = :main,reject: text for main and reject logs
24254 logwrite = :panic: text for panic log only
24257 .vitem &*message*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
24258 .cindex "&%message%&" "ACL modifier"
24259 This modifier sets up a text string that is expanded and used as an error
24260 message if the current statement causes the ACL to deny access. The expansion
24261 happens at the time Exim decides that access is to be denied, not at the time
24262 it processes &%message%&. If the expansion fails, or generates an empty string,
24263 the modifier is ignored. For ACLs that are triggered by SMTP commands, the
24264 message is returned as part of the SMTP error response.
24266 The text is literal; any quotes are taken as literals, but because the string
24267 is expanded, backslash escapes are processed anyway. If the message contains
24268 newlines, this gives rise to a multi-line SMTP response. Like &%log_message%&,
24269 the contents of &%message%& are not expanded until after a condition has
24272 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
24273 If &%message%& is used on a statement that verifies an address, the message
24274 specified overrides any message that is generated by the verification process.
24275 However, the original message is available in the variable
24276 &$acl_verify_message$&, so you can incorporate it into your message if you
24277 wish. In particular, if you want the text from &%:fail:%& items in &(redirect)&
24278 routers to be passed back as part of the SMTP response, you should either not
24279 use a &%message%& modifier, or make use of &$acl_verify_message$&.
24281 For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, a &%message%& modifier that
24282 is used with a &%warn%& verb behaves in a similar way to the &%add_header%&
24283 modifier, but this usage is now deprecated. However, &%message%& acts only when
24284 all the conditions are true, wherever it appears in an ACL command, whereas
24285 &%add_header%& acts as soon as it is encountered. If &%message%& is used with
24286 &%warn%& in an ACL that is not concerned with receiving a message, it has no
24289 .vitem &*set*&&~<&'acl_name'&>&~=&~<&'value'&>
24290 .cindex "&%set%&" "ACL modifier"
24291 This modifier puts a value into one of the ACL variables (see section
24292 &<<SECTaclvariables>>&).
24299 .section "Use of the control modifier" "SECTcontrols"
24300 .cindex "&%control%&" "ACL modifier"
24301 The &%control%& modifier supports the following settings:
24304 .vitem &*control&~=&~allow_auth_unadvertised*&
24305 This modifier allows a client host to use the SMTP AUTH command even when it
24306 has not been advertised in response to EHLO. Furthermore, because there are
24307 apparently some really broken clients that do this, Exim will accept AUTH after
24308 HELO (rather than EHLO) when this control is set. It should be used only if you
24309 really need it, and you should limit its use to those broken clients that do
24310 not work without it. For example:
24312 warn hosts = 192.168.34.25
24313 control = allow_auth_unadvertised
24315 Normally, when an Exim server receives an AUTH command, it checks the name of
24316 the authentication mechanism that is given in the command to ensure that it
24317 matches an advertised mechanism. When this control is set, the check that a
24318 mechanism has been advertised is bypassed. Any configured mechanism can be used
24319 by the client. This control is permitted only in the connection and HELO ACLs.
24322 .vitem &*control&~=&~caseful_local_part*&
24325 .vitem &*control&~=&~caselower_local_part*&
24326 .cindex "&ACL;" "case of local part in"
24327 .cindex "case of local parts"
24328 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
24329 These two controls are permitted only in the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&
24330 (that is, during RCPT processing). By default, the contents of &$local_part$&
24331 are lower cased before ACL processing. If &"caseful_local_part"& is specified,
24332 any uppercase letters in the original local part are restored in &$local_part$&
24333 for the rest of the ACL, or until a control that sets &"caselower_local_part"&
24336 These controls affect only the current recipient. Moreover, they apply only to
24337 local part handling that takes place directly in the ACL (for example, as a key
24338 in lookups). If a test to verify the recipient is obeyed, the case-related
24339 handling of the local part during the verification is controlled by the router
24340 configuration (see the &%caseful_local_part%& generic router option).
24342 This facility could be used, for example, to add a spam score to local parts
24343 containing upper case letters. For example, using &$acl_m4$& to accumulate the
24346 warn control = caseful_local_part
24347 set acl_m4 = ${eval:\
24349 ${if match{$local_part}{[A-Z]}{1}{0}}\
24351 control = caselower_local_part
24353 Notice that we put back the lower cased version afterwards, assuming that
24354 is what is wanted for subsequent tests.
24356 .vitem &*control&~=&~enforce_sync*&
24359 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_enforce_sync*&
24360 .cindex "SMTP" "synchronization checking"
24361 .cindex "synchronization checking in SMTP"
24362 These controls make it possible to be selective about when SMTP synchronization
24363 is enforced. The global option &%smtp_enforce_sync%& specifies the initial
24364 state of the switch (it is true by default). See the description of this option
24365 in chapter &<<CHAPmainconfig>>& for details of SMTP synchronization checking.
24367 The effect of these two controls lasts for the remainder of the SMTP
24368 connection. They can appear in any ACL except the one for the non-SMTP
24369 messages. The most straightforward place to put them is in the ACL defined by
24370 &%acl_smtp_connect%&, which is run at the start of an incoming SMTP connection,
24371 before the first synchronization check. The expected use is to turn off the
24372 synchronization checks for badly-behaved hosts that you nevertheless need to
24376 .vitem &*control&~=&~fakedefer/*&<&'message'&>
24377 .cindex "fake defer"
24378 .cindex "defer" "fake"
24379 This control works in exactly the same way as &%fakereject%& (described below)
24380 except that it causes an SMTP 450 response after the message data instead of a
24381 550 response. You must take care when using &%fakedefer%& because it causes the
24382 messages to be duplicated when the sender retries. Therefore, you should not
24383 use &%fakedefer%& if the message is to be delivered normally.
24385 .vitem &*control&~=&~fakereject/*&<&'message'&>
24386 .cindex "fake rejection"
24387 .cindex "rejection" "fake"
24388 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and DATA ACLs, in other
24389 words, only when an SMTP message is being received. If Exim accepts the
24390 message, instead the final 250 response, a 550 rejection message is sent.
24391 However, Exim proceeds to deliver the message as normal. The control applies
24392 only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in
24393 the same SMTP connection.
24395 The text for the 550 response is taken from the &%control%& modifier. If no
24396 message is supplied, the following is used:
24398 550-Your message has been rejected but is being
24399 550-kept for evaluation.
24400 550-If it was a legitimate message, it may still be
24401 550 delivered to the target recipient(s).
24403 This facilty should be used with extreme caution.
24405 .vitem &*control&~=&~freeze*&
24406 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing in ACL"
24407 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and non-SMTP ACLs, in
24408 other words, only when a message is being received. If the message is accepted,
24409 it is placed on Exim's queue and frozen. The control applies only to the
24410 current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the same
24413 This modifier can optionally be followed by &`/no_tell`&. If the global option
24414 &%freeze_tell%& is set, it is ignored for the current message (that is, nobody
24415 is told about the freezing), provided all the &*control=freeze*& modifiers that
24416 are obeyed for the current message have the &`/no_tell`& option.
24419 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_mbox_unspool*&
24420 This control is available when Exim is compiled with the content scanning
24421 extension. Content scanning may require a copy of the current message, or parts
24422 of it, to be written in &"mbox format"& to a spool file, for passing to a virus
24423 or spam scanner. Normally, such copies are deleted when they are no longer
24424 needed. If this control is set, the copies are not deleted. The control applies
24425 only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in
24426 the same SMTP connection. It is provided for debugging purposes and is unlikely
24427 to be useful in production.
24429 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_multiline_response*&
24430 .cindex "multiline responses" "suppressing"
24431 This control is permitted for any ACL except the one for non-SMTP messages.
24432 It seems that there are broken clients in use that cannot handle multiline
24433 SMTP responses, despite the fact that RFC 821 defined them over 20 years ago.
24435 If this control is set, multiline SMTP responses from ACL rejections are
24436 suppressed. One way of doing this would have been to put out these responses as
24437 one long line. However, RFC 2821 specifies a maximum of 512 bytes per response
24438 (&"use multiline responses for more"& it says &-- ha!), and some of the
24439 responses might get close to that. So this facility, which is after all only a
24440 sop to broken clients, is implemented by doing two very easy things:
24443 Extra information that is normally output as part of a rejection caused by
24444 sender verification failure is omitted. Only the final line (typically &"sender
24445 verification failed"&) is sent.
24447 If a &%message%& modifier supplies a multiline response, only the first
24451 The setting of the switch can, of course, be made conditional on the
24452 calling host. Its effect lasts until the end of the SMTP connection.
24454 .vitem &*control&~=&~queue_only*&
24455 .cindex "&%queue_only%&"
24456 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
24457 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and non-SMTP ACLs, in
24458 other words, only when a message is being received. If the message is accepted,
24459 it is placed on Exim's queue and left there for delivery by a subsequent queue
24460 runner. No immediate delivery process is started. In other words, it has the
24461 effect as the &%queue_only%& global option. However, the control applies only
24462 to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the
24463 same SMTP connection.
24465 .vitem &*control&~=&~submission/*&<&'options'&>
24466 .cindex "message" "submission"
24467 .cindex "submission mode"
24468 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and start of data ACLs (the
24469 latter is the one defined by &%acl_smtp_predata%&). Setting it tells Exim that
24470 the current message is a submission from a local MUA. In this case, Exim
24471 operates in &"submission mode"&, and applies certain fixups to the message if
24472 necessary. For example, it add a &'Date:'& header line if one is not present.
24473 This control is not permitted in the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL, because that is too
24474 late (the message has already been created).
24476 Chapter &<<CHAPmsgproc>>& describes the processing that Exim applies to
24477 messages. Section &<<SECTsubmodnon>>& covers the processing that happens in
24478 submission mode; the available options for this control are described there.
24479 The control applies only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones
24480 that may be received in the same SMTP connection.
24482 .vitem &*control&~=&~suppress_local_fixups*&
24483 .cindex "submission fixups" "suppressing"
24484 This control applies to locally submitted (non TCP/IP) messages, and is the
24485 complement of &`control`& &`=`& &`submission`&. It disables the fixups that are
24486 normally applied to locally-submitted messages. Specifically:
24489 Any &'Sender:'& header line is left alone (in this respect, it is a
24490 dynamic version of &%local_sender_retain%&).
24492 No &'Message-ID:'&, &'From:'&, or &'Date:'& header lines are added.
24494 There is no check that &'From:'& corresponds to the actual sender.
24497 This feature may be useful when a remotely-originated message is accepted,
24498 passed to some scanning program, and then re-submitted for delivery.
24501 All four possibilities for message fixups can be specified:
24504 Locally submitted, fixups applied: the default.
24506 Locally submitted, no fixups applied: use &`control`& &`=`&
24507 &`suppress_local_fixups`&.
24509 Remotely submitted, no fixups applied: the default.
24511 Remotely submitted, fixups applied: use &`control`& &`=`& &`submission`&.
24516 .section "Adding header lines in ACLs" "SECTaddheadacl"
24517 .cindex "header lines" "adding in an ACL"
24518 .cindex "header lines" "position of added lines"
24519 .cindex "&%message%&" "ACL modifier"
24520 The &%add_header%& modifier can be used to add one or more extra header lines
24521 to an incoming message, as in this example:
24523 warn dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
24524 dialup.mail-abuse.org
24525 add_header = X-blacklisted-at: $dnslist_domain
24527 The &%add_header%& modifier is permitted in the MAIL, RCPT, PREDATA, DATA,
24528 MIME, and non-SMTP ACLs (in other words, those that are concerned with
24529 receiving a message). The message must ultimately be accepted for
24530 &%add_header%& to have any significant effect. You can use &%add_header%& with
24531 any ACL verb, including &%deny%& (though this is potentially useful only in a
24534 If the data for the &%add_header%& modifier contains one or more newlines that
24535 are not followed by a space or a tab, it is assumed to contain multiple header
24536 lines. Each one is checked for valid syntax; &`X-ACL-Warn:`& is added to the
24537 front of any line that is not a valid header line.
24539 Added header lines are accumulated during the MAIL, RCPT, and predata ACLs.
24540 They are added to the message before processing the DATA and MIME ACLs.
24541 However, if an identical header line is requested more than once, only one copy
24542 is actually added to the message. Further header lines may be accumulated
24543 during the DATA and MIME ACLs, after which they are added to the message, again
24544 with duplicates suppressed. Thus, it is possible to add two identical header
24545 lines to an SMTP message, but only if one is added before DATA and one after.
24546 In the case of non-SMTP messages, new headers are accumulated during the
24547 non-SMTP ACL, and added to the message at the end. If a message is rejected
24548 after DATA or by the non-SMTP ACL, all added header lines are included in the
24549 entry that is written to the reject log.
24551 .cindex "header lines" "added; visibility of"
24552 Header lines are not visible in string expansions until they are added to the
24553 message. It follows that header lines defined in the MAIL, RCPT, and predata
24554 ACLs are not visible until the DATA ACL and MIME ACLs are run. Similarly,
24555 header lines that are added by the DATA or MIME ACLs are not visible in those
24556 ACLs. Because of this restriction, you cannot use header lines as a way of
24557 passing data between (for example) the MAIL and RCPT ACLs. If you want to do
24558 this, you can use ACL variables, as described in section
24559 &<<SECTaclvariables>>&.
24561 The &%add_header%& modifier acts immediately it is encountered during the
24562 processing of an ACL. Notice the difference between these two cases:
24564 &`accept add_header = ADDED: some text`&
24565 &` `&<&'some condition'&>
24567 &`accept `&<&'some condition'&>
24568 &` add_header = ADDED: some text`&
24570 In the first case, the header line is always added, whether or not the
24571 condition is true. In the second case, the header line is added only if the
24572 condition is true. Multiple occurrences of &%add_header%& may occur in the same
24573 ACL statement. All those that are encountered before a condition fails are
24576 .cindex "&%warn%&" "ACL verb"
24577 For compatibility with previous versions of Exim, a &%message%& modifier for a
24578 &%warn%& verb acts in the same way as &%add_header%&, except that it takes
24579 effect only if all the conditions are true, even if it appears before some of
24580 them. Furthermore, only the last occurrence of &%message%& is honoured. This
24581 usage of &%message%& is now deprecated. If both &%add_header%& and &%message%&
24582 are present on a &%warn%& verb, both are processed according to their
24585 By default, new header lines are added to a message at the end of the existing
24586 header lines. However, you can specify that any particular header line should
24587 be added right at the start (before all the &'Received:'& lines), immediately
24588 after the first block of &'Received:'& lines, or immediately before any line
24589 that is not a &'Received:'& or &'Resent-something:'& header.
24591 This is done by specifying &":at_start:"&, &":after_received:"&, or
24592 &":at_start_rfc:"& (or, for completeness, &":at_end:"&) before the text of the
24593 header line, respectively. (Header text cannot start with a colon, as there has
24594 to be a header name first.) For example:
24596 warn add_header = \
24597 :after_received:X-My-Header: something or other...
24599 If more than one header line is supplied in a single &%add_header%& modifier,
24600 each one is treated independently and can therefore be placed differently. If
24601 you add more than one line at the start, or after the Received: block, they end
24602 up in reverse order.
24604 &*Warning*&: This facility currently applies only to header lines that are
24605 added in an ACL. It does NOT work for header lines that are added in a
24606 system filter or in a router or transport.
24611 .section "ACL conditions" "SECTaclconditions"
24612 .cindex "&ACL;" "conditions; list of"
24613 Some of conditions listed in this section are available only when Exim is
24614 compiled with the content-scanning extension. They are included here briefly
24615 for completeness. More detailed descriptions can be found in the discussion on
24616 content scanning in chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24618 Not all conditions are relevant in all circumstances. For example, testing
24619 senders and recipients does not make sense in an ACL that is being run as the
24620 result of the arrival of an ETRN command, and checks on message headers can be
24621 done only in the ACLs specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& and &%acl_not_smtp%&. You
24622 can use the same condition (with different parameters) more than once in the
24623 same ACL statement. This provides a way of specifying an &"and"& conjunction.
24624 The conditions are as follows:
24628 .vitem &*acl&~=&~*&<&'name&~of&~acl&~or&~ACL&~string&~or&~file&~name&~'&>
24629 .cindex "&ACL;" "nested"
24630 .cindex "&ACL;" "indirect"
24631 .cindex "&%acl%&" "ACL condition"
24632 The possible values of the argument are the same as for the
24633 &%acl_smtp_%&&'xxx'& options. The named or inline ACL is run. If it returns
24634 &"accept"& the condition is true; if it returns &"deny"& the condition is
24635 false. If it returns &"defer"&, the current ACL returns &"defer"& unless the
24636 condition is on a &%warn%& verb. In that case, a &"defer"& return makes the
24637 condition false. This means that further processing of the &%warn%& verb
24638 ceases, but processing of the ACL continues.
24640 If the nested &%acl%& returns &"drop"& and the outer condition denies access,
24641 the connection is dropped. If it returns &"discard"&, the verb must be
24642 &%accept%& or &%discard%&, and the action is taken immediately &-- no further
24643 conditions are tested.
24645 ACLs may be nested up to 20 deep; the limit exists purely to catch runaway
24646 loops. This condition allows you to use different ACLs in different
24647 circumstances. For example, different ACLs can be used to handle RCPT commands
24648 for different local users or different local domains.
24650 .vitem &*authenticated&~=&~*&<&'string&~list'&>
24651 .cindex "&%authenticated%&" "ACL condition"
24652 .cindex "authentication" "ACL checking"
24653 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing for authentication"
24654 If the SMTP connection is not authenticated, the condition is false. Otherwise,
24655 the name of the authenticator is tested against the list. To test for
24656 authentication by any authenticator, you can set
24661 .vitem &*condition&~=&~*&<&'string'&>
24662 .cindex "&%condition%&" "ACL condition"
24663 .cindex "customizing" "ACL condition"
24664 .cindex "&ACL;" "customized test"
24665 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing; customized"
24666 This feature allows you to make up custom conditions. If the result of
24667 expanding the string is an empty string, the number zero, or one of the strings
24668 &"no"& or &"false"&, the condition is false. If the result is any non-zero
24669 number, or one of the strings &"yes"& or &"true"&, the condition is true. For
24670 any other values, some error is assumed to have occurred, and the ACL returns
24673 .vitem &*decode&~=&~*&<&'location'&>
24674 .cindex "&%decode%&" "ACL condition"
24675 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24676 content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only the the ACL defined by
24677 &%acl_smtp_mime%&. It causes the current MIME part to be decoded into a file.
24678 For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24680 .vitem &*demime&~=&~*&<&'extension&~list'&>
24681 .cindex "&%demime%&" "ACL condition"
24682 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24683 content-scanning extension. Its use is described in section
24684 &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
24686 .vitem &*dnslists&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~domain&~names&~and&~other&~data'&>
24687 .cindex "&%dnslists%&" "ACL condition"
24688 .cindex "DNS list" "in ACL"
24689 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
24690 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a DNS list"
24691 This condition checks for entries in DNS black lists. These are also known as
24692 &"RBL lists"&, after the original Realtime Blackhole List, but note that the
24693 use of the lists at &'mail-abuse.org'& now carries a charge. There are too many
24694 different variants of this condition to describe briefly here. See sections
24695 &<<SECTmorednslists>>&--&<<SECTmorednslistslast>>& for details.
24697 .vitem &*domains&~=&~*&<&'domain&~list'&>
24698 .cindex "&%domains%&" "ACL condition"
24699 .cindex "domain" "ACL checking"
24700 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a recipient domain"
24701 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
24702 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks that the domain
24703 of the recipient address is in the domain list. If percent-hack processing is
24704 enabled, it is done before this test is done. If the check succeeds with a
24705 lookup, the result of the lookup is placed in &$domain_data$& until the next
24708 .vitem &*encrypted&~=&~*&<&'string&~list'&>
24709 .cindex "&%encrypted%&" "ACL condition"
24710 .cindex "encryption" "checking in an ACL"
24711 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing for encryption"
24712 If the SMTP connection is not encrypted, the condition is false. Otherwise, the
24713 name of the cipher suite in use is tested against the list. To test for
24714 encryption without testing for any specific cipher suite(s), set
24719 .vitem &*hosts&~=&~*&<&'&~host&~list'&>
24720 .cindex "&%hosts%&" "ACL condition"
24721 .cindex "host" "ACL checking"
24722 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing the client host"
24723 This condition tests that the calling host matches the host list. If you have
24724 name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses in the same host list,
24725 you should normally put the IP addresses first. For example, you could have:
24727 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts
24729 The reason for this lies in the left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.
24730 It can test IP addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
24731 item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host name to
24732 compare with the pattern. If the above list is given in the opposite order, the
24733 &%accept%& statement fails for a host whose name cannot be found, even if its
24734 IP address is 10.9.8.7.
24736 If you really do want to do the name check first, and still recognize the IP
24737 address even if the name lookup fails, you can rewrite the ACL like this:
24739 accept hosts = dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts
24740 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7
24742 The default action on failing to find the host name is to assume that the host
24743 is not in the list, so the first &%accept%& statement fails. The second
24744 statement can then check the IP address.
24746 .cindex "&$host_data$&"
24747 If a &%hosts%& condition is satisfied by means of a lookup, the result
24748 of the lookup is made available in the &$host_data$& variable. This
24749 allows you, for example, to set up a statement like this:
24751 deny hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
24752 message = $host_data
24754 which gives a custom error message for each denied host.
24756 .vitem &*local_parts&~=&~*&<&'local&~part&~list'&>
24757 .cindex "&%local_parts%&" "ACL condition"
24758 .cindex "local part" "ACL checking"
24759 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a local part"
24760 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
24761 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks that the local
24762 part of the recipient address is in the list. If percent-hack processing is
24763 enabled, it is done before this test. If the check succeeds with a lookup, the
24764 result of the lookup is placed in &$local_part_data$&, which remains set until
24765 the next &%local_parts%& test.
24767 .vitem &*malware&~=&~*&<&'option'&>
24768 .cindex "&%malware%&" "ACL condition"
24769 .cindex "&ACL;" "virus scanning"
24770 .cindex "&ACL;" "scanning for viruses"
24771 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24772 content-scanning extension. It causes the incoming message to be scanned for
24773 viruses. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24775 .vitem &*mime_regex&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~regular&~expressions'&>
24776 .cindex "&%mime_regex%&" "ACL condition"
24777 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing by regex matching"
24778 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24779 content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only the the ACL defined by
24780 &%acl_smtp_mime%&. It causes the current MIME part to be scanned for a match
24781 with any of the regular expressions. For details, see chapter
24784 .vitem &*ratelimit&~=&~*&<&'parameters'&>
24785 .cindex "rate limiting"
24786 This condition can be used to limit the rate at which a user or host submits
24787 messages. Details are given in section &<<SECTratelimiting>>&.
24789 .vitem &*recipients&~=&~*&<&'address&~list'&>
24790 .cindex "&%recipients%&" "ACL condition"
24791 .cindex "recipient" "ACL checking"
24792 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a recipient"
24793 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks the entire
24794 recipient address against a list of recipients.
24796 .vitem &*regex&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~regular&~expressions'&>
24797 .cindex "&%regex%&" "ACL condition"
24798 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing by regex matching"
24799 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24800 content-scanning extension, and is available only in the DATA, MIME, and
24801 non-SMTP ACLs. It causes the incoming message to be scanned for a match with
24802 any of the regular expressions. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24804 .vitem &*sender_domains&~=&~*&<&'domain&~list'&>
24805 .cindex "&%sender_domains%&" "ACL condition"
24806 .cindex "sender" "ACL checking"
24807 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a sender domain"
24808 .cindex "&$domain$&"
24809 .cindex "&$sender_address_domain$&"
24810 This condition tests the domain of the sender of the message against the given
24811 domain list. &*Note*&: The domain of the sender address is in
24812 &$sender_address_domain$&. It is &'not'& put in &$domain$& during the testing
24813 of this condition. This is an exception to the general rule for testing domain
24814 lists. It is done this way so that, if this condition is used in an ACL for a
24815 RCPT command, the recipient's domain (which is in &$domain$&) can be used to
24816 influence the sender checking.
24818 &*Warning*&: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a control on
24819 relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and commonly, forged.
24821 .vitem &*senders&~=&~*&<&'address&~list'&>
24822 .cindex "&%senders%&" "ACL condition"
24823 .cindex "sender" "ACL checking"
24824 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a sender"
24825 This condition tests the sender of the message against the given list. To test
24826 for a bounce message, which has an empty sender, set
24830 &*Warning*&: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a control on
24831 relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and commonly, forged.
24833 .vitem &*spam&~=&~*&<&'username'&>
24834 .cindex "&%spam%&" "ACL condition"
24835 .cindex "&ACL;" "scanning for spam"
24836 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24837 content-scanning extension. It causes the incoming message to be scanned by
24838 SpamAssassin. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24840 .vitem &*verify&~=&~certificate*&
24841 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24842 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
24843 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
24844 .cindex "&ACL;" "certificate verification"
24845 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a TLS certificate"
24846 This condition is true in an SMTP session if the session is encrypted, and a
24847 certificate was received from the client, and the certificate was verified. The
24848 server requests a certificate only if the client matches &%tls_verify_hosts%&
24849 or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& (see chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&).
24851 .vitem &*verify&~=&~csa*&
24852 .cindex "CSA verification"
24853 This condition checks whether the sending host (the client) is authorized to
24854 send email. Details of how this works are given in section
24855 &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
24857 .vitem &*verify&~=&~header_sender/*&<&'options'&>
24858 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24859 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying sender in the header"
24860 .cindex "header lines" "verifying the sender in"
24861 .cindex "sender" "verifying in header"
24862 .cindex "verifying" "sender in header"
24863 This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a message has been
24864 received, that is, in an ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& or
24865 &%acl_not_smtp%&. It checks that there is a verifiable address in at least one
24866 of the &'Sender:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, or &'From:'& header lines. Such an address
24867 is loosely thought of as a &"sender"& address (hence the name of the test).
24868 However, an address that appears in one of these headers need not be an address
24869 that accepts bounce messages; only sender addresses in envelopes are required
24870 to accept bounces. Therefore, if you use the callout option on this check, you
24871 might want to arrange for a non-empty address in the MAIL command.
24873 Details of address verification and the options are given later, starting at
24874 section &<<SECTaddressverification>>& (callouts are described in section
24875 &<<SECTcallver>>&). You can combine this condition with the &%senders%&
24876 condition to restrict it to bounce messages only:
24879 message = A valid sender header is required for bounces
24880 !verify = header_sender
24883 .vitem &*verify&~=&~header_syntax*&
24884 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24885 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying header syntax"
24886 .cindex "header lines" "verifying syntax"
24887 .cindex "verifying" "header syntax"
24888 This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a message has been
24889 received, that is, in an ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& or
24890 &%acl_not_smtp%&. It checks the syntax of all header lines that can contain
24891 lists of addresses (&'Sender:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&,
24892 and &'Bcc:'&). Unqualified addresses (local parts without domains) are
24893 permitted only in locally generated messages and from hosts that match
24894 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&, as
24897 Note that this condition is a syntax check only. However, a common spamming
24898 ploy used to be to send syntactically invalid headers such as
24902 and this condition can be used to reject such messages, though they are not as
24903 common as they used to be.
24905 .vitem &*verify&~=&~helo*&
24906 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24907 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying HELO/EHLO"
24908 .cindex "HELO" "verifying"
24909 .cindex "EHLO" "verifying"
24910 .cindex "verifying" "EHLO"
24911 .cindex "verifying" "HELO"
24912 This condition is true if a HELO or EHLO command has been received from the
24913 client host, and its contents have been verified. It there has been no previous
24914 attempt to verify the the HELO/EHLO contents, it is carried out when this
24915 condition is encountered. See the description of the &%helo_verify_hosts%& and
24916 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& options for details of how to request verification
24917 independently of this condition.
24919 .vitem &*verify&~=&~not_blind*&
24920 .cindex "verifying" "not blind"
24921 .cindex "bcc recipients" "verifying none"
24922 This condition checks that there are no blind (bcc) recipients in the message.
24923 Every envelope recipient must appear either in a &'To:'& header line or in a
24924 &'Cc:'& header line for this condition to be true. Local parts are checked
24925 case-sensitively; domains are checked case-insensitively. If &'Resent-To:'& or
24926 &'Resent-Cc:'& header lines exist, they are also checked. This condition can be
24927 used only in a DATA or non-SMTP ACL.
24929 There are, of course, many legitimate messages that make use of blind (bcc)
24930 recipients. This check should not be used on its own for blocking messages.
24933 .vitem &*verify&~=&~recipient/*&<&'options'&>
24934 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24935 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying recipient"
24936 .cindex "recipient" "verifying"
24937 .cindex "verifying" "recipient"
24938 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
24939 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It verifies the current
24940 recipient. Details of address verification are given later, starting at section
24941 &<<SECTaddressverification>>&. After a recipient has been verified, the value
24942 of &$address_data$& is the last value that was set while routing the address.
24943 This applies even if the verification fails. When an address that is being
24944 verified is redirected to a single address, verification continues with the new
24945 address, and in that case, the subsequent value of &$address_data$& is the
24946 value for the child address.
24948 .vitem &*verify&~=&~reverse_host_lookup*&
24949 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24950 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying host reverse lookup"
24951 .cindex "host" "verifying reverse lookup"
24952 This condition ensures that a verified host name has been looked up from the IP
24953 address of the client host. (This may have happened already if the host name
24954 was needed for checking a host list, or if the host matched &%host_lookup%&.)
24955 Verification ensures that the host name obtained from a reverse DNS lookup, or
24956 one of its aliases, does, when it is itself looked up in the DNS, yield the
24957 original IP address.
24959 If this condition is used for a locally generated message (that is, when there
24960 is no client host involved), it always succeeds.
24962 .vitem &*verify&~=&~sender/*&<&'options'&>
24963 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24964 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying sender"
24965 .cindex "sender" "verifying"
24966 .cindex "verifying" "sender"
24967 This condition is relevant only after a MAIL or RCPT command, or after a
24968 message has been received (the &%acl_smtp_data%& or &%acl_not_smtp%& ACLs). If
24969 the message's sender is empty (that is, this is a bounce message), the
24970 condition is true. Otherwise, the sender address is verified.
24972 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
24973 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
24974 If there is data in the &$address_data$& variable at the end of routing, its
24975 value is placed in &$sender_address_data$& at the end of verification. This
24976 value can be used in subsequent conditions and modifiers in the same ACL
24977 statement. It does not persist after the end of the current statement. If you
24978 want to preserve the value for longer, you can save it in an ACL variable.
24980 Details of verification are given later, starting at section
24981 &<<SECTaddressverification>>&. Exim caches the result of sender verification,
24982 to avoid doing it more than once per message.
24984 .vitem &*verify&~=&~sender=*&<&'address'&>&*/*&<&'options'&>
24985 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24986 This is a variation of the previous option, in which a modified address is
24987 verified as a sender.
24992 .section "Using DNS lists" "SECTmorednslists"
24993 .cindex "DNS list" "in ACL"
24994 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
24995 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a DNS list"
24996 In its simplest form, the &%dnslists%& condition tests whether the calling host
24997 is on at least one of a number of DNS lists by looking up the inverted IP
24998 address in one or more DNS domains. For example, if the calling host's IP
24999 address is 192.168.62.43, and the ACL statement is
25001 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org : \
25002 dialups.mail-abuse.org
25004 the following records are looked up:
25006 43.62.168.192.blackholes.mail-abuse.org
25007 43.62.168.192.dialups.mail-abuse.org
25009 As soon as Exim finds an existing DNS record, processing of the list stops.
25010 Thus, multiple entries on the list provide an &"or"& conjunction. If you want
25011 to test that a host is on more than one list (an &"and"& conjunction), you can
25012 use two separate conditions:
25014 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
25015 dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org
25017 If a DNS lookup times out or otherwise fails to give a decisive answer, Exim
25018 behaves as if the host does not match the list item, that is, as if the DNS
25019 record does not exist. If there are further items in the DNS list, they are
25022 This is usually the required action when &%dnslists%& is used with &%deny%&
25023 (which is the most common usage), because it prevents a DNS failure from
25024 blocking mail. However, you can change this behaviour by putting one of the
25025 following special items in the list:
25027 &`+include_unknown `& behave as if the item is on the list
25028 &`+exclude_unknown `& behave as if the item is not on the list (default)
25029 &`+defer_unknown `& give a temporary error
25031 .cindex "&`+include_unknown`&"
25032 .cindex "&`+exclude_unknown`&"
25033 .cindex "&`+defer_unknown`&"
25034 Each of these applies to any subsequent items on the list. For example:
25036 deny dnslists = +defer_unknown : foo.bar.example
25038 Testing the list of domains stops as soon as a match is found. If you want to
25039 warn for one list and block for another, you can use two different statements:
25041 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
25042 warn message = X-Warn: sending host is on dialups list
25043 dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org
25045 DNS list lookups are cached by Exim for the duration of the SMTP session,
25046 so a lookup based on the IP address is done at most once for any incoming
25047 connection. Exim does not share information between multiple incoming
25048 connections (but your local name server cache should be active).
25052 .section "Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup"
25053 .cindex "DNS list" "keyed by explicit IP address"
25054 By default, the IP address that is used in a DNS list lookup is the IP address
25055 of the calling host. However, you can specify another IP address by listing it
25056 after the domain name, introduced by a slash. For example:
25058 deny dnslists = black.list.tld/192.168.1.2
25060 This feature is not very helpful with explicit IP addresses; it is intended for
25061 use with IP addresses that are looked up, for example, the IP addresses of the
25062 MX hosts or nameservers of an email sender address. For an example, see section
25063 &<<SECTmulkeyfor>>& below.
25068 .section "DNS lists keyed on domain names"
25069 .cindex "DNS list" "keyed by domain name"
25070 There are some lists that are keyed on domain names rather than inverted IP
25071 addresses (see for example the &'domain based zones'& link at
25072 &url(http://www.rfc-ignorant.org/)). No reversing of components is used
25073 with these lists. You can change the name that is looked up in a DNS list by
25074 listing it after the domain name, introduced by a slash. For example,
25076 deny message = Sender's domain is listed at $dnslist_domain
25077 dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain
25079 This particular example is useful only in ACLs that are obeyed after the
25080 RCPT or DATA commands, when a sender address is available. If (for
25081 example) the message's sender is &'user@tld.example'& the name that is looked
25082 up by this example is
25084 tld.example.dsn.rfc-ignorant.org
25086 A single &%dnslists%& condition can contain entries for both names and IP
25087 addresses. For example:
25089 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
25090 dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain
25092 The first item checks the sending host's IP address; the second checks a domain
25093 name. The whole condition is true if either of the DNS lookups succeeds.
25098 .section "Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list" "SECTmulkeyfor"
25099 .cindex "DNS list" "multiple keys for"
25100 The syntax described above for looking up explicitly-defined values (either
25101 names or IP addresses) in a DNS blacklist is a simplification. After the domain
25102 name for the DNS list, what follows the slash can in fact be a list of items.
25103 As with all lists in Exim, the default separator is a colon. However, because
25104 this is a sublist within the list of DNS blacklist domains, it is necessary
25105 either to double the separators like this:
25107 dnslists = black.list.tld/name.1::name.2
25109 or to change the separator character, like this:
25111 dnslists = black.list.tld/<;name.1;name.2
25113 If an item in the list is an IP address, it is inverted before the DNS
25114 blacklist domain is appended. If it is not an IP address, no inversion
25115 occurs. Consider this condition:
25117 dnslists = black.list.tld/<;192.168.1.2;a.domain
25119 The DNS lookups that occur are:
25121 2.1.168.192.black.list.tld
25122 a.domain.black.list.tld
25124 Once a DNS record has been found (that matches a specific IP return
25125 address, if specified &-- see section &<<SECTaddmatcon>>&), no further lookups
25126 are done. If there is a temporary DNS error, the rest of the sublist of domains
25127 or IP addresses is tried. A temporary error for the whole dnslists item occurs
25128 only if no other DNS lookup in this sublist succeeds. In other words, a
25129 successful lookup for any of the items in the sublist overrides a temporary
25130 error for a previous item.
25132 The ability to supply a list of items after the slash is in some sense just a
25133 syntactic convenience. These two examples have the same effect:
25135 dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain : black.list.tld/b.domain
25136 dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain::b.domain
25138 However, when the data for the list is obtained from a lookup, the second form
25139 is usually much more convenient. Consider this example:
25141 deny message = The mail servers for the domain \
25142 $sender_address_domain \
25143 are listed at $dnslist_domain ($dnslist_value); \
25145 dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org/<|${lookup dnsdb {>|a=<|\
25146 ${lookup dnsdb {>|mxh=\
25147 $sender_address_domain} }} }
25149 Note the use of &`>|`& in the dnsdb lookup to specify the separator for
25150 multiple DNS records. The inner dnsdb lookup produces a list of MX hosts
25151 and the outer dnsdb lookup finds the IP addresses for these hosts. The result
25152 of expanding the condition might be something like this:
25154 dnslists = sbl.spahmaus.org/<|192.168.2.3|192.168.5.6|...
25156 Thus, this example checks whether or not the IP addresses of the sender
25157 domain's mail servers are on the Spamhaus black list.
25163 .section "Data returned by DNS lists"
25164 .cindex "DNS list" "data returned from"
25165 DNS lists are constructed using address records in the DNS. The original RBL
25166 just used the address 127.0.0.1 on the right hand side of each record, but the
25167 RBL+ list and some other lists use a number of values with different meanings.
25168 The values used on the RBL+ list are:
25172 127.1.0.3 DUL and RBL
25174 127.1.0.5 RSS and RBL
25175 127.1.0.6 RSS and DUL
25176 127.1.0.7 RSS and DUL and RBL
25178 Some DNS lists may return more than one address record.
25181 .section "Variables set from DNS lists"
25182 .cindex "DNS list" "variables set from"
25183 .cindex "&$dnslist_domain$&"
25184 .cindex "&$dnslist_text$&"
25185 .cindex "&$dnslist_value$&"
25186 When an entry is found in a DNS list, the variable &$dnslist_domain$&
25187 contains the name of the domain that matched, &$dnslist_value$& contains the
25188 data from the entry, and &$dnslist_text$& contains the contents of any
25189 associated TXT record. If more than one address record is returned by the DNS
25190 lookup, all the IP addresses are included in &$dnslist_value$&, separated by
25193 You can use these variables in &%message%& or &%log_message%& modifiers &--
25194 although these appear before the condition in the ACL, they are not expanded
25195 until after it has failed. For example:
25197 deny hosts = !+local_networks
25198 message = $sender_host_address is listed \
25200 dnslists = rbl-plus.mail-abuse.example
25205 .section "Additional matching conditions for DNS lists" "SECTaddmatcon"
25206 .cindex "DNS list" "matching specific returned data"
25207 You can add an equals sign and an IP address after a &%dnslists%& domain name
25208 in order to restrict its action to DNS records with a matching right hand side.
25211 deny dnslists = rblplus.mail-abuse.org=127.0.0.2
25213 rejects only those hosts that yield 127.0.0.2. Without this additional data,
25214 any address record is considered to be a match. If more than one address record
25215 is found on the list, they are all checked for a matching right-hand side.
25217 More than one IP address may be given for checking, using a comma as a
25218 separator. These are alternatives &-- if any one of them matches, the
25219 &%dnslists%& condition is true. For example:
25221 deny dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
25223 If you want to specify a constraining address list and also specify names or IP
25224 addresses to be looked up, the constraining address list must be specified
25225 first. For example:
25227 deny dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org\
25228 =127.0.0.2/$sender_address_domain
25231 If the character &`&&`& is used instead of &`=`&, the comparison for each
25232 listed IP address is done by a bitwise &"and"& instead of by an equality test.
25233 In other words, the listed addresses are used as bit masks. The comparison is
25234 true if all the bits in the mask are present in the address that is being
25235 tested. For example:
25237 dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.3
25239 matches if the address is &'x.x.x.'&3, &'x.x.x.'&7, &'x.x.x.'&11, etc. If you
25240 want to test whether one bit or another bit is present (as opposed to both
25241 being present), you must use multiple values. For example:
25243 dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.1,0.0.0.2
25245 matches if the final component of the address is an odd number or two times
25250 .section "Negated DNS matching conditions"
25251 You can supply a negative list of IP addresses as part of a &%dnslists%&
25254 deny dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
25256 means &"deny if the host is in the black list at the domain &'a.b.c'& and the
25257 IP address yielded by the list is either 127.0.0.2 or 127.0.0.3"&,
25259 deny dnslists = a.b.c!=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
25261 means &"deny if the host is in the black list at the domain &'a.b.c'& and the
25262 IP address yielded by the list is not 127.0.0.2 and not 127.0.0.3"&. In other
25263 words, the result of the test is inverted if an exclamation mark appears before
25264 the &`=`& (or the &`&&`&) sign.
25266 &*Note*&: This kind of negation is not the same as negation in a domain,
25267 host, or address list (which is why the syntax is different).
25269 If you are using just one list, the negation syntax does not gain you much. The
25270 previous example is precisely equivalent to
25272 deny dnslists = a.b.c
25273 !dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
25275 However, if you are using multiple lists, the negation syntax is clearer.
25276 Consider this example:
25278 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
25280 dnsbl.njabl.org!=127.0.0.3 : \
25283 Using only positive lists, this would have to be:
25285 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
25287 deny dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org
25288 !dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org=127.0.0.3
25289 deny dnslists = relays.ordb.org
25291 which is less clear, and harder to maintain.
25296 .section "DNS lists and IPv6" "SECTmorednslistslast"
25297 .cindex "IPv6" "DNS black lists"
25298 .cindex "DNS list" "IPv6 usage"
25299 If Exim is asked to do a dnslist lookup for an IPv6 address, it inverts it
25300 nibble by nibble. For example, if the calling host's IP address is
25301 3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031, Exim might look up
25303 1.3.0.c.a.0.0.2.0.0.8.0.a.0.0.0.0.0.a.0.f.6.3.8.
25304 f.f.f.f.e.f.f.3.blackholes.mail-abuse.org
25306 (split over two lines here to fit on the page). Unfortunately, some of the DNS
25307 lists contain wildcard records, intended for IPv4, that interact badly with
25308 IPv6. For example, the DNS entry
25310 *.3.some.list.example. A 127.0.0.1
25312 is probably intended to put the entire 3.0.0.0/8 IPv4 network on the list.
25313 Unfortunately, it also matches the entire 3::/4 IPv6 network.
25315 You can exclude IPv6 addresses from DNS lookups by making use of a suitable
25316 &%condition%& condition, as in this example:
25318 deny condition = ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}}
25319 dnslists = some.list.example
25322 .section "Rate limiting senders" "SECTratelimiting"
25323 .cindex "rate limiting" "client sending"
25324 .cindex "limiting client sending rates"
25325 .oindex "&%smpt_ratelimit_*%&"
25326 The &%ratelimit%& ACL condition can be used to measure and control the rate at
25327 which clients can send email. This is more powerful than the
25328 &%smtp_ratelimit_*%& options, because those options control the rate of
25329 commands in a single SMTP session only, whereas the &%ratelimit%& condition
25330 works across all connections (concurrent and sequential) from the same client
25331 host. The syntax of the &%ratelimit%& condition is:
25333 &`ratelimit =`& <&'m'&> &`/`& <&'p'&> &`/`& <&'options'&> &`/`& <&'key'&>
25335 If the average client sending rate is less than &'m'& messages per time
25336 period &'p'& then the condition is false; otherwise it is true.
25338 As a side-effect, the &%ratelimit%& condition sets the expansion variable
25339 &$sender_rate$& to the client's computed rate, &$sender_rate_limit$& to the
25340 configured value of &'m'&, and &$sender_rate_period$& to the configured value
25343 The parameter &'p'& is the smoothing time constant, in the form of an Exim
25344 time interval, for example, &`8h`& for eight hours. A larger time constant
25345 means that it takes Exim longer to forget a client's past behaviour. The
25346 parameter &'m'& is the maximum number of messages that a client is permitted to
25347 send in each time interval. It also specifies the number of messages permitted
25348 in a fast burst. By increasing both &'m'& and &'p'& but keeping &'m/p'&
25349 constant, you can allow a client to send more messages in a burst without
25350 changing its overall sending rate limit. Conversely, if &'m'& and &'p'& are
25351 both small, messages must be sent at an even rate.
25353 There is a script in &_util/ratelimit.pl_& which extracts sending rates from
25354 log files, to assist with choosing appropriate settings for &'m'& and &'p'&
25355 when deploying the &%ratelimit%& ACL condition. The script prints usage
25356 instructions when it is run with no arguments.
25358 The key is used to look up the data for calculating the client's average
25359 sending rate. This data is stored in a database maintained by Exim in its spool
25360 directory, alongside the retry and other hints databases. The default key is
25361 &$sender_host_address$&, which applies the limit to each client host IP address.
25362 By changing the key you can change how Exim identifies clients for the purpose
25363 of ratelimiting. For example, to limit the sending rate of each authenticated
25364 user, independent of the computer they are sending from, set the key to
25365 &$authenticated_id$&. You must ensure that the lookup key is meaningful; for
25366 example, &$authenticated_id$& is only meaningful if the client has
25367 authenticated, and you can check with with the &%authenticated%& ACL condition.
25369 Internally, Exim includes the smoothing constant &'p'& and the options in the
25370 lookup key because they alter the meaning of the stored data. This is not true
25371 for the limit &'m'&, so you can alter the configured maximum rate and Exim will
25372 still remember clients' past behaviour, but if you alter the other ratelimit
25373 parameters Exim forgets past behaviour.
25375 Each &%ratelimit%& condition can have up to two options. The first option
25376 specifies what Exim measures the rate of, and the second specifies how Exim
25377 handles excessively fast clients. The options are separated by a slash, like
25378 the other parameters.
25380 The &%per_conn%& option limits the client's connection rate.
25382 The &%per_mail%& option limits the client's rate of sending messages. This is
25383 the default if none of the &%per_*%& options is specified.
25385 The &%per_byte%& option limits the sender's email bandwidth. Note that it is
25386 best to use this option in the DATA ACL; if it is used in an earlier ACL it
25387 relies on the SIZE parameter on the MAIL command, which may be inaccurate or
25388 completely missing. You can follow the limit &'m'& in the configuration with K,
25389 M, or G to specify limits in kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes, respectively.
25391 The &%per_cmd%& option causes Exim to recompute the rate every time the
25392 condition is processed. This can be used to limit the SMTP command rate. The
25393 alias &%per_rcpt%& is provided for use in the RCPT ACL instead of &%per_cmd%&
25394 to make it clear that the effect is to limit the rate at which recipients are
25395 accepted. Note that in this case the rate limiting engine will see a message
25396 with many recipients as a large high-speed burst.
25398 If a client's average rate is greater than the maximum, the rate limiting
25399 engine can react in two possible ways, depending on the presence of the
25400 &%strict%& or &%leaky%& options. This is independent of the other
25401 counter-measures (such as rejecting the message) that may be specified by the
25402 rest of the ACL. The default mode is leaky, which avoids a sender's
25403 over-aggressive retry rate preventing it from getting any email through.
25405 The &%strict%& option means that the client's recorded rate is always updated.
25406 The effect of this is that Exim measures the client's average rate of attempts
25407 to send email, which can be much higher than the maximum. If the client is over
25408 the limit it will be subjected to counter-measures until it slows down below
25409 the maximum rate. The smoothing period determines the time it takes for a high
25410 sending rate to decay exponentially to 37% of its peak value, which means that
25411 you can work out the time (the number of smoothing periods) that a client is
25412 subjected to counter-measures after an over-limit burst with this formula:
25414 ln(peakrate/maxrate)
25416 The &%leaky%& option means that the client's recorded rate is not updated if it
25417 is above the limit. The effect of this is that Exim measures the client's
25418 average rate of successfully sent email, which cannot be greater than the
25419 maximum. If the client is over the limit it will suffer some counter-measures,
25420 but it will still be able to send email at the configured maximum rate,
25421 whatever the rate of its attempts. This is generally the better choice if you
25422 have clients that retry automatically.
25424 Exim's other ACL facilities are used to define what counter-measures are taken
25425 when the rate limit is exceeded. This might be anything from logging a warning
25426 (for example, while measuring existing sending rates in order to define
25427 policy), through time delays to slow down fast senders, up to rejecting the
25428 message. For example:
25430 # Log all senders' rates
25432 ratelimit = 0 / 1h / strict
25433 log_message = Sender rate $sender_rate / $sender_rate_period
25435 # Slow down fast senders; note the need to truncate $sender_rate
25436 # at the decimal point.
25438 ratelimit = 100 / 1h / per_rcpt / strict
25439 delay = ${eval: ${sg{$sender_rate}{[.].*}{}} - \
25440 $sender_rate_limit }s
25442 # Keep authenticated users under control
25445 ratelimit = 100 / 1d / strict / $authenticated_id
25447 # System-wide rate limit
25449 message = Sorry, too busy. Try again later.
25450 ratelimit = 10 / 1s / $primary_hostname
25452 # Restrict incoming rate from each host, with a default
25453 # set using a macro and special cases looked up in a table.
25455 message = Sender rate exceeds $sender_rate_limit \
25456 messages per $sender_rate_period
25457 ratelimit = ${lookup {$sender_host_address} \
25458 cdb {DB/ratelimits.cdb} \
25459 {$value} {RATELIMIT} }
25461 &*Warning*&: If you have a busy server with a lot of &%ratelimit%& tests,
25462 especially with the &%per_rcpt%& option, you may suffer from a performance
25463 bottleneck caused by locking on the ratelimit hints database. Apart from
25464 making your ACLs less complicated, you can reduce the problem by using a
25465 RAM disk for Exim's hints directory (usually &_/var/spool/exim/db/_&). However
25466 this means that Exim will lose its hints data after a reboot (including retry
25467 hints, the callout cache, and ratelimit data).
25470 .section "Address verification" "SECTaddressverification"
25471 .cindex "verifying address" "options for"
25472 .cindex "policy control" "address verification"
25473 Several of the &%verify%& conditions described in section
25474 &<<SECTaclconditions>>& cause addresses to be verified. These conditions can be
25475 followed by options that modify the verification process. The options are
25476 separated from the keyword and from each other by slashes, and some of them
25477 contain parameters. For example:
25479 verify = sender/callout
25480 verify = recipient/defer_ok/callout=10s,defer_ok
25482 The first stage of address verification, which always happens, is to run the
25483 address through the routers, in &"verify mode"&. Routers can detect the
25484 difference between verification and routing for delivery, and their actions can
25485 be varied by a number of generic options such as &%verify%& and &%verify_only%&
25486 (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&). If routing fails, verification fails.
25487 The available options are as follows:
25490 If the &%callout%& option is specified, successful routing to one or more
25491 remote hosts is followed by a &"callout"& to those hosts as an additional
25492 check. Callouts and their sub-options are discussed in the next section.
25494 If there is a defer error while doing verification routing, the ACL
25495 normally returns &"defer"&. However, if you include &%defer_ok%& in the
25496 options, the condition is forced to be true instead. Note that this is a main
25497 verification option as well as a suboption for callouts.
25499 The &%no_details%& option is covered in section &<<SECTsenaddver>>&, which
25500 discusses the reporting of sender address verification failures.
25502 The &%success_on_redirect%& option causes verification always to succeed
25503 immediately after a successful redirection. By default, if a redirection
25504 generates just one address, that address is also verified. See further
25505 discussion in section &<<SECTredirwhilveri>>&.
25508 .cindex "verifying address" "differentiating failures"
25509 .cindex "&$recipient_verify_failure$&"
25510 .cindex "&$sender_verify_failure$&"
25511 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
25512 After an address verification failure, &$acl_verify_message$& contains the
25513 error message that is associated with the failure. It can be preserved by
25516 warn !verify = sender
25517 set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message
25519 If you are writing your own custom rejection message or log message when
25520 denying access, you can use this variable to include information about the
25521 verification failure.
25523 In addition, &$sender_verify_failure$& or &$recipient_verify_failure$& (as
25524 appropriate) contains one of the following words:
25527 &%qualify%&: The address was unqualified (no domain), and the message
25528 was neither local nor came from an exempted host.
25530 &%route%&: Routing failed.
25532 &%mail%&: Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted; rejection
25533 occurred at or before the MAIL command (that is, on initial
25534 connection, HELO, or MAIL).
25536 &%recipient%&: The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.
25538 &%postmaster%&: The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.
25541 The main use of these variables is expected to be to distinguish between
25542 rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT in callouts.
25547 .section "Callout verification" "SECTcallver"
25548 .cindex "verifying address" "by callout"
25549 .cindex "callout" "verification"
25550 .cindex "SMTP" "callout verification"
25551 For non-local addresses, routing verifies the domain, but is unable to do any
25552 checking of the local part. There are situations where some means of verifying
25553 the local part is desirable. One way this can be done is to make an SMTP
25554 &'callback'& to a delivery host for the sender address or a &'callforward'& to
25555 a subsequent host for a recipient address, to see if the host accepts the
25556 address. We use the term &'callout'& to cover both cases. Note that for a
25557 sender address, the callback is not to the client host that is trying to
25558 deliver the message, but to one of the hosts that accepts incoming mail for the
25561 Exim does not do callouts by default. If you want them to happen, you must
25562 request them by setting appropriate options on the &%verify%& condition, as
25563 described below. This facility should be used with care, because it can add a
25564 lot of resource usage to the cost of verifying an address. However, Exim does
25565 cache the results of callouts, which helps to reduce the cost. Details of
25566 caching are in section &<<SECTcallvercache>>&.
25568 Recipient callouts are usually used only between hosts that are controlled by
25569 the same administration. For example, a corporate gateway host could use
25570 callouts to check for valid recipients on an internal mailserver. A successful
25571 callout does not guarantee that a real delivery to the address would succeed;
25572 on the other hand, a failing callout does guarantee that a delivery would fail.
25574 If the &%callout%& option is present on a condition that verifies an address, a
25575 second stage of verification occurs if the address is successfully routed to
25576 one or more remote hosts. The usual case is routing by a &(dnslookup)& or a
25577 &(manualroute)& router, where the router specifies the hosts. However, if a
25578 router that does not set up hosts routes to an &(smtp)& transport with a
25579 &%hosts%& setting, the transport's hosts are used. If an &(smtp)& transport has
25580 &%hosts_override%& set, its hosts are always used, whether or not the router
25581 supplies a host list.
25583 The port that is used is taken from the transport, if it is specified and is a
25584 remote transport. (For routers that do verification only, no transport need be
25585 specified.) Otherwise, the default SMTP port is used. If a remote transport
25586 specifies an outgoing interface, this is used; otherwise the interface is not
25589 For a sender callout check, Exim makes SMTP connections to the remote hosts, to
25590 test whether a bounce message could be delivered to the sender address. The
25591 following SMTP commands are sent:
25593 &`HELO `&<&'smtp active host name'&>
25595 &`RCPT TO:`&<&'the address to be tested'&>
25598 LHLO is used instead of HELO if the transport's &%protocol%& option is
25601 A recipient callout check is similar. By default, it also uses an empty address
25602 for the sender. This default is chosen because most hosts do not make use of
25603 the sender address when verifying a recipient. Using the same address means
25604 that a single cache entry can be used for each recipient. Some sites, however,
25605 do make use of the sender address when verifying. These are catered for by the
25606 &%use_sender%& and &%use_postmaster%& options, described in the next section.
25608 If the response to the RCPT command is a 2&'xx'& code, the verification
25609 succeeds. If it is 5&'xx'&, the verification fails. For any other condition,
25610 Exim tries the next host, if any. If there is a problem with all the remote
25611 hosts, the ACL yields &"defer"&, unless the &%defer_ok%& parameter of the
25612 &%callout%& option is given, in which case the condition is forced to succeed.
25618 .section "Additional parameters for callouts" "CALLaddparcall"
25619 .cindex "callout" "additional parameters for"
25620 The &%callout%& option can be followed by an equals sign and a number of
25621 optional parameters, separated by commas. For example:
25623 verify = recipient/callout=10s,defer_ok
25625 The old syntax, which had &%callout_defer_ok%& and &%check_postmaster%& as
25626 separate verify options, is retained for backwards compatibility, but is now
25627 deprecated. The additional parameters for &%callout%& are as follows:
25631 .vitem <&'a&~time&~interval'&>
25632 .cindex "callout timeout" "specifying"
25633 This specifies the timeout that applies for the callout attempt to each host.
25636 verify = sender/callout=5s
25638 The default is 30 seconds. The timeout is used for each response from the
25639 remote host. It is also used for the intial connection, unless overridden by
25640 the &%connect%& parameter.
25643 .vitem &*connect&~=&~*&<&'time&~interval'&>
25644 .cindex "callout connection timeout" "specifying"
25645 This parameter makes it possible to set a different (usually smaller) timeout
25646 for making the SMTP connection. For example:
25648 verify = sender/callout=5s,connect=1s
25650 If not specified, this timeout defaults to the general timeout value.
25652 .vitem &*defer_ok*&
25653 .cindex "callout defer" "action on"
25654 When this parameter is present, failure to contact any host, or any other kind
25655 of temporary error, is treated as success by the ACL. However, the cache is not
25656 updated in this circumstance.
25658 .vitem &*fullpostmaster*&
25659 .cindex "callout" "full postmaster check"
25660 This operates like the &%postmaster%& option (see below), but if the check for
25661 &'postmaster@domain'& fails, it tries just &'postmaster'&, without a domain, in
25662 accordance with the specification in RFC 2821. The RFC states that the
25663 unqualified address &'postmaster'& should be accepted.
25666 .vitem &*mailfrom&~=&~*&<&'email&~address'&>
25667 .cindex "callout" "sender when verifying header"
25668 When verifying addresses in header lines using the &%header_sender%&
25669 verification option, Exim behaves by default as if the addresses are envelope
25670 sender addresses from a message. Callout verification therefore tests to see
25671 whether a bounce message could be delivered, by using an empty address in the
25672 MAIL command. However, it is arguable that these addresses might never be used
25673 as envelope senders, and could therefore justifiably reject bounce messages
25674 (empty senders). The &%mailfrom%& callout parameter allows you to specify what
25675 address to use in the MAIL command. For example:
25677 require verify = header_sender/callout=mailfrom=abcd@x.y.z
25679 This parameter is available only for the &%header_sender%& verification option.
25682 .vitem &*maxwait&~=&~*&<&'time&~interval'&>
25683 .cindex "callout overall timeout" "specifying"
25684 This parameter sets an overall timeout for performing a callout verification.
25687 verify = sender/callout=5s,maxwait=30s
25689 This timeout defaults to four times the callout timeout for individual SMTP
25690 commands. The overall timeout applies when there is more than one host that can
25691 be tried. The timeout is checked before trying the next host. This prevents
25692 very long delays if there are a large number of hosts and all are timing out
25693 (for example, when network connections are timing out).
25696 .vitem &*no_cache*&
25697 .cindex "callout cache" "suppressing"
25698 .cindex "caching callout" "suppressing"
25699 When this parameter is given, the callout cache is neither read nor updated.
25701 .vitem &*postmaster*&
25702 .cindex "callout" "postmaster; checking"
25703 When this parameter is set, a sucessful callout check is followed by a similar
25704 check for the local part &'postmaster'& at the same domain. If this address is
25705 rejected, the callout fails (but see &%fullpostmaster%& above). The result of
25706 the postmaster check is recorded in a cache record; if it is a failure, this is
25707 used to fail subsequent callouts for the domain without a connection being
25708 made, until the cache record expires.
25710 .vitem &*postmaster_mailfrom&~=&~*&<&'email&~address'&>
25711 The postmaster check uses an empty sender in the MAIL command by default.
25712 You can use this parameter to do a postmaster check using a different address.
25715 require verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=abc@x.y.z
25717 If both &%postmaster%& and &%postmaster_mailfrom%& are present, the rightmost
25718 one overrides. The &%postmaster%& parameter is equivalent to this example:
25720 require verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=
25722 &*Warning*&: The caching arrangements for postmaster checking do not take
25723 account of the sender address. It is assumed that either the empty address or
25724 a fixed non-empty address will be used. All that Exim remembers is that the
25725 postmaster check for the domain succeeded or failed.
25729 .cindex "callout" "&""random""& check"
25730 When this parameter is set, before doing the normal callout check, Exim does a
25731 check for a &"random"& local part at the same domain. The local part is not
25732 really random &-- it is defined by the expansion of the option
25733 &%callout_random_local_part%&, which defaults to
25735 $primary_host_name-$tod_epoch-testing
25737 The idea here is to try to determine whether the remote host accepts all local
25738 parts without checking. If it does, there is no point in doing callouts for
25739 specific local parts. If the &"random"& check succeeds, the result is saved in
25740 a cache record, and used to force the current and subsequent callout checks to
25741 succeed without a connection being made, until the cache record expires.
25743 .vitem &*use_postmaster*&
25744 .cindex "callout" "sender for recipient check"
25745 This parameter applies to recipient callouts only. For example:
25747 deny !verify = recipient/callout=use_postmaster
25749 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
25750 It causes a non-empty postmaster address to be used in the MAIL command when
25751 performing the callout for the recipient, and also for a &"random"& check if
25752 that is configured. The local part of the address is &`postmaster`& and the
25753 domain is the contents of &$qualify_domain$&.
25755 .vitem &*use_sender*&
25756 This option applies to recipient callouts only. For example:
25758 require verify = recipient/callout=use_sender
25760 It causes the message's actual sender address to be used in the MAIL
25761 command when performing the callout, instead of an empty address. There is no
25762 need to use this option unless you know that the called hosts make use of the
25763 sender when checking recipients. If used indiscriminately, it reduces the
25764 usefulness of callout caching.
25767 If you use any of the parameters that set a non-empty sender for the MAIL
25768 command (&%mailfrom%&, &%postmaster_mailfrom%&, &%use_postmaster%&, or
25769 &%use_sender%&), you should think about possible loops. Recipient checking is
25770 usually done between two hosts that are under the same management, and the host
25771 that receives the callouts is not normally configured to do callouts itself.
25772 Therefore, it is normally safe to use &%use_postmaster%& or &%use_sender%& in
25773 these circumstances.
25775 However, if you use a non-empty sender address for a callout to an arbitrary
25776 host, there is the likelihood that the remote host will itself initiate a
25777 callout check back to your host. As it is checking what appears to be a message
25778 sender, it is likely to use an empty address in MAIL, thus avoiding a
25779 callout loop. However, to be on the safe side it would be best to set up your
25780 own ACLs so that they do not do sender verification checks when the recipient
25781 is the address you use for header sender or postmaster callout checking.
25783 Another issue to think about when using non-empty senders for callouts is
25784 caching. When you set &%mailfrom%& or &%use_sender%&, the cache record is keyed
25785 by the sender/recipient combination; thus, for any given recipient, many more
25786 actual callouts are performed than when an empty sender or postmaster is used.
25791 .section "Callout caching" "SECTcallvercache"
25792 .cindex "hints database" "callout cache"
25793 .cindex "callout" "caching"
25794 .cindex "caching" "callout"
25795 Exim caches the results of callouts in order to reduce the amount of resources
25796 used, unless you specify the &%no_cache%& parameter with the &%callout%&
25797 option. A hints database called &"callout"& is used for the cache. Two
25798 different record types are used: one records the result of a callout check for
25799 a specific address, and the other records information that applies to the
25800 entire domain (for example, that it accepts the local part &'postmaster'&).
25802 When an original callout fails, a detailed SMTP error message is given about
25803 the failure. However, for subsequent failures use the cache data, this message
25806 The expiry times for negative and positive address cache records are
25807 independent, and can be set by the global options &%callout_negative_expire%&
25808 (default 2h) and &%callout_positive_expire%& (default 24h), respectively.
25810 If a host gives a negative response to an SMTP connection, or rejects any
25811 commands up to and including
25815 (but not including the MAIL command with a non-empty address),
25816 any callout attempt is bound to fail. Exim remembers such failures in a
25817 domain cache record, which it uses to fail callouts for the domain without
25818 making new connections, until the domain record times out. There are two
25819 separate expiry times for domain cache records:
25820 &%callout_domain_negative_expire%& (default 3h) and
25821 &%callout_domain_positive_expire%& (default 7d).
25823 Domain records expire when the negative expiry time is reached if callouts
25824 cannot be made for the domain, or if the postmaster check failed.
25825 Otherwise, they expire when the positive expiry time is reached. This
25826 ensures that, for example, a host that stops accepting &"random"& local parts
25827 will eventually be noticed.
25829 The callout caching mechanism is based on the domain of the address that is
25830 being tested. If the domain routes to several hosts, it is assumed that their
25831 behaviour will be the same.
25835 .section "Sender address verification reporting" "SECTsenaddver"
25836 .cindex "verifying" "suppressing error details"
25837 When sender verification fails in an ACL, the details of the failure are
25838 given as additional output lines before the 550 response to the relevant
25839 SMTP command (RCPT or DATA). For example, if sender callout is in use,
25842 MAIL FROM:<xyz@abc.example>
25844 RCPT TO:<pqr@def.example>
25845 550-Verification failed for <xyz@abc.example>
25846 550-Called: 192.168.34.43
25847 550-Sent: RCPT TO:<xyz@abc.example>
25848 550-Response: 550 Unknown local part xyz in <xyz@abc.example>
25849 550 Sender verification failed
25851 If more than one RCPT command fails in the same way, the details are given
25852 only for the first of them. However, some administrators do not want to send
25853 out this much information. You can suppress the details by adding
25854 &`/no_details`& to the ACL statement that requests sender verification. For
25857 verify = sender/no_details
25860 .section "Redirection while verifying" "SECTredirwhilveri"
25861 .cindex "verifying" "redirection while"
25862 .cindex "address redirection" "while verifying"
25863 A dilemma arises when a local address is redirected by aliasing or forwarding
25864 during verification: should the generated addresses themselves be verified,
25865 or should the successful expansion of the original address be enough to verify
25866 it? By default, Exim takes the following pragmatic approach:
25869 When an incoming address is redirected to just one child address, verification
25870 continues with the child address, and if that fails to verify, the original
25871 verification also fails.
25873 When an incoming address is redirected to more than one child address,
25874 verification does not continue. A success result is returned.
25877 This seems the most reasonable behaviour for the common use of aliasing as a
25878 way of redirecting different local parts to the same mailbox. It means, for
25879 example, that a pair of alias entries of the form
25882 aw123: :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address
25884 work as expected, with both local parts causing verification failure. When a
25885 redirection generates more than one address, the behaviour is more like a
25886 mailing list, where the existence of the alias itself is sufficient for
25887 verification to succeed.
25889 It is possible, however, to change the default behaviour so that all successful
25890 redirections count as successful verifications, however many new addresses are
25891 generated. This is specified by the &%success_on_redirect%& verification
25892 option. For example:
25894 require verify = recipient/success_on_redirect/callout=10s
25896 In this example, verification succeeds if a router generates a new address, and
25897 the callout does not occur, because no address was routed to a remote host.
25902 .section "Client SMTP authorization (CSA)" "SECTverifyCSA"
25903 .cindex "CSA" "verifying"
25904 Client SMTP Authorization is a system that allows a site to advertise
25905 which machines are and are not permitted to send email. This is done by placing
25906 special SRV records in the DNS; these are looked up using the client's HELO
25907 domain. At the time of writing, CSA is still an Internet Draft. Client SMTP
25908 Authorization checks in Exim are performed by the ACL condition:
25912 This fails if the client is not authorized. If there is a DNS problem, or if no
25913 valid CSA SRV record is found, or if the client is authorized, the condition
25914 succeeds. These three cases can be distinguished using the expansion variable
25915 &$csa_status$&, which can take one of the values &"fail"&, &"defer"&,
25916 &"unknown"&, or &"ok"&. The condition does not itself defer because that would
25917 be likely to cause problems for legitimate email.
25919 The error messages produced by the CSA code include slightly more
25920 detail. If &$csa_status$& is &"defer"&, this may be because of problems
25921 looking up the CSA SRV record, or problems looking up the CSA target
25922 address record. There are four reasons for &$csa_status$& being &"fail"&:
25925 The client's host name is explicitly not authorized.
25927 The client's IP address does not match any of the CSA target IP addresses.
25929 The client's host name is authorized but it has no valid target IP addresses
25930 (for example, the target's addresses are IPv6 and the client is using IPv4).
25932 The client's host name has no CSA SRV record but a parent domain has asserted
25933 that all subdomains must be explicitly authorized.
25936 The &%csa%& verification condition can take an argument which is the domain to
25937 use for the DNS query. The default is:
25939 verify = csa/$sender_helo_name
25941 This implementation includes an extension to CSA. If the query domain
25942 is an address literal such as [192.0.2.95], or if it is a bare IP
25943 address, Exim searches for CSA SRV records in the reverse DNS as if
25944 the HELO domain was (for example) &'95.2.0.192.in-addr.arpa'&. Therefore it is
25947 verify = csa/$sender_host_address
25949 In fact, this is the check that Exim performs if the client does not say HELO.
25950 This extension can be turned off by setting the main configuration option
25951 &%dns_csa_use_reverse%& to be false.
25953 If a CSA SRV record is not found for the domain itself, a search
25954 is performed through its parent domains for a record which might be
25955 making assertions about subdomains. The maximum depth of this search is limited
25956 using the main configuration option &%dns_csa_search_limit%&, which is 5 by
25957 default. Exim does not look for CSA SRV records in a top level domain, so the
25958 default settings handle HELO domains as long as seven
25959 (&'hostname.five.four.three.two.one.com'&). This encompasses the vast majority
25960 of legitimate HELO domains.
25962 The &'dnsdb'& lookup also has support for CSA. Although &'dnsdb'& also supports
25963 direct SRV lookups, this is not sufficient because of the extra parent domain
25964 search behaviour of CSA, and (as with PTR lookups) &'dnsdb'& also turns IP
25965 addresses into lookups in the reverse DNS space. The result of a successful
25968 ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}
25970 has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target host name.
25971 The authorization code can be &"Y"& for yes, &"N"& for no, &"X"& for explicit
25972 authorization required but absent, or &"?"& for unknown.
25977 .section "Bounce address tag validation" "SECTverifyPRVS"
25978 .cindex "BATV" "verifying"
25979 Bounce address tag validation (BATV) is a scheme whereby the envelope senders
25980 of outgoing messages have a cryptographic, timestamped &"tag"& added to them.
25981 Genuine incoming bounce messages should therefore always be addressed to
25982 recipients that have a valid tag. This scheme is a way of detecting unwanted
25983 bounce messages caused by sender address forgeries (often called &"collateral
25984 spam"&), because the recipients of such messages do not include valid tags.
25986 There are two expansion items to help with the implementation of the BATV
25987 &"prvs"& (private signature) scheme in an Exim configuration. This scheme signs
25988 the original envelope sender address by using a simple shared key to add a hash
25989 of the address and some time-based randomizing information. The &%prvs%&
25990 expansion item creates a signed address, and the &%prvscheck%& expansion item
25991 checks one. The syntax of these expansion items is described in section
25992 &<<SECTexpansionitems>>&.
25994 As an example, suppose the secret per-address keys are stored in an MySQL
25995 database. A query to look up the key for an address could be defined as a macro
25998 PRVSCHECK_SQL = ${lookup mysql{SELECT secret FROM batv_prvs \
25999 WHERE sender='${quote_mysql:$prvscheck_address}'\
26002 Suppose also that the senders who make use of BATV are defined by an address
26003 list called &%batv_senders%&. Then, in the ACL for RCPT commands, you could
26006 # Bounces: drop unsigned addresses for BATV senders
26007 deny message = This address does not send an unsigned reverse path.
26009 recipients = +batv_senders
26011 # Bounces: In case of prvs-signed address, check signature.
26012 deny message = Invalid reverse path signature.
26014 condition = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}\
26015 {PRVSCHECK_SQL}{1}}
26016 !condition = $prvscheck_result
26018 The first statement rejects recipients for bounce messages that are addressed
26019 to plain BATV sender addresses, because it is known that BATV senders do not
26020 send out messages with plain sender addresses. The second statement rejects
26021 recipients that are prvs-signed, but with invalid signatures (either because
26022 the key is wrong, or the signature has timed out).
26024 A non-prvs-signed address is not rejected by the second statement, because the
26025 &%prvscheck%& expansion yields an empty string if its first argument is not a
26026 prvs-signed address, thus causing the &%condition%& condition to be false. If
26027 the first argument is a syntactically valid prvs-signed address, the yield is
26028 the third string (in this case &"1"&), whether or not the cryptographic and
26029 timeout checks succeed. The &$prvscheck_result$& variable contains the result
26030 of the checks (empty for failure, &"1"& for success).
26032 There are two more issues you must consider when implementing prvs-signing.
26033 Firstly, you need to ensure that prvs-signed addresses are not blocked by your
26034 ACLs. A prvs-signed address contains a slash character, but the default Exim
26035 configuration contains this statement in the RCPT ACL:
26037 deny message = Restricted characters in address
26038 domains = +local_domains
26039 local_parts = ^[.] : ^.*[@%!/|]
26041 This is a conservative rule that blocks local parts that contain slashes. You
26042 should remove the slash in the last line.
26044 Secondly, you have to ensure that the routers accept prvs-signed addresses and
26045 deliver them correctly. The easiest way to handle this is to use a &(redirect)&
26046 router to remove the signature with a configuration along these lines:
26050 data = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}{PRVSCHECK_SQL}}
26052 This works because, if the third argument of &%prvscheck%& is empty, the result
26053 of the expansion of a prvs-signed address is the decoded value of the original
26054 address. This router should probably be the first of your routers that handles
26057 To create BATV-signed addresses in the first place, a transport of this form
26060 external_smtp_batv:
26062 return_path = ${prvs {$return_path} \
26063 {${lookup mysql{SELECT \
26064 secret FROM batv_prvs WHERE \
26065 sender='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'} \
26068 If no key can be found for the existing return path, no signing takes place.
26072 .section "Using an ACL to control relaying" "SECTrelaycontrol"
26073 .cindex "&ACL;" "relay control"
26074 .cindex "relaying" "control by ACL"
26075 .cindex "policy control" "relay control"
26076 An MTA is said to &'relay'& a message if it receives it from some host and
26077 delivers it directly to another host as a result of a remote address contained
26078 within it. Redirecting a local address via an alias or forward file and then
26079 passing the message on to another host is not relaying,
26080 .cindex "&""percent hack""&"
26081 but a redirection as a result of the &"percent hack"& is.
26083 Two kinds of relaying exist, which are termed &"incoming"& and &"outgoing"&.
26084 A host which is acting as a gateway or an MX backup is concerned with incoming
26085 relaying from arbitrary hosts to a specific set of domains. On the other hand,
26086 a host which is acting as a smart host for a number of clients is concerned
26087 with outgoing relaying from those clients to the Internet at large. Often the
26088 same host is fulfilling both functions,
26090 . as illustrated in the diagram below,
26092 but in principle these two kinds of relaying are entirely independent. What is
26093 not wanted is the transmission of mail from arbitrary remote hosts through your
26094 system to arbitrary domains.
26097 You can implement relay control by means of suitable statements in the ACL that
26098 runs for each RCPT command. For convenience, it is often easiest to use
26099 Exim's named list facility to define the domains and hosts involved. For
26100 example, suppose you want to do the following:
26103 Deliver a number of domains to mailboxes on the local host (or process them
26104 locally in some other way). Let's say these are &'my.dom1.example'& and
26105 &'my.dom2.example'&.
26107 Relay mail for a number of other domains for which you are the secondary MX.
26108 These might be &'friend1.example'& and &'friend2.example'&.
26110 Relay mail from the hosts on your local LAN, to whatever domains are involved.
26111 Suppose your LAN is 192.168.45.0/24.
26115 In the main part of the configuration, you put the following definitions:
26117 domainlist local_domains = my.dom1.example : my.dom2.example
26118 domainlist relay_domains = friend1.example : friend2.example
26119 hostlist relay_hosts = 192.168.45.0/24
26121 Now you can use these definitions in the ACL that is run for every RCPT
26125 accept domains = +local_domains : +relay_domains
26126 accept hosts = +relay_hosts
26128 The first statement accepts any RCPT command that contains an address in
26129 the local or relay domains. For any other domain, control passes to the second
26130 statement, which accepts the command only if it comes from one of the relay
26131 hosts. In practice, you will probably want to make your ACL more sophisticated
26132 than this, for example, by including sender and recipient verification. The
26133 default configuration includes a more comprehensive example, which is described
26134 in chapter &<<CHAPdefconfil>>&.
26138 .section "Checking a relay configuration" "SECTcheralcon"
26139 .cindex "relaying" "checking control of"
26140 You can check the relay characteristics of your configuration in the same way
26141 that you can test any ACL behaviour for an incoming SMTP connection, by using
26142 the &%-bh%& option to run a fake SMTP session with which you interact.
26144 For specifically testing for unwanted relaying, the host
26145 &'relay-test.mail-abuse.org'& provides a useful service. If you telnet to this
26146 host from the host on which Exim is running, using the normal telnet port, you
26147 will see a normal telnet connection message and then quite a long delay. Be
26148 patient. The remote host is making an SMTP connection back to your host, and
26149 trying a number of common probes to test for open relay vulnerability. The
26150 results of the tests will eventually appear on your terminal.
26155 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26156 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26158 .chapter "Content scanning at ACL time" "CHAPexiscan"
26159 .scindex IIDcosca "content scanning" "at ACL time"
26160 The extension of Exim to include content scanning at ACL time, formerly known
26161 as &"exiscan"&, was originally implemented as a patch by Tom Kistner. The code
26162 was integrated into the main source for Exim release 4.50, and Tom continues to
26163 maintain it. Most of the wording of this chapter is taken from Tom's
26166 It is also possible to scan the content of messages at other times. The
26167 &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&) allows for content
26168 scanning after all the ACLs have run. A transport filter can be used to scan
26169 messages at delivery time (see the &%transport_filter%& option, described in
26170 chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
26172 If you want to include the ACL-time content-scanning features when you compile
26173 Exim, you need to arrange for WITH_CONTENT_SCAN to be defined in your
26174 &_Local/Makefile_&. When you do that, the Exim binary is built with:
26177 Two additional ACLs (&%acl_smtp_mime%& and &%acl_not_smtp_mime%&) that are run
26178 for all MIME parts for SMTP and non-SMTP messages, respectively.
26180 Additional ACL conditions and modifiers: &%decode%&, &%malware%&,
26181 &%mime_regex%&, &%regex%&, and &%spam%&. These can be used in the ACL that is
26182 run at the end of message reception (the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL).
26184 An additional control feature (&"no_mbox_unspool"&) that saves spooled copies
26185 of messages, or parts of messages, for debugging purposes.
26187 Additional expansion variables that are set in the new ACL and by the new
26190 Two new main configuration options: &%av_scanner%& and &%spamd_address%&.
26193 There is another content-scanning configuration option for &_Local/Makefile_&,
26194 called WITH_OLD_DEMIME. If this is set, the old, deprecated &%demime%& ACL
26195 condition is compiled, in addition to all the other content-scanning features.
26197 Content-scanning is continually evolving, and new features are still being
26198 added. While such features are still unstable and liable to incompatible
26199 changes, they are made available in Exim by setting options whose names begin
26200 EXPERIMENTAL_ in &_Local/Makefile_&. Such features are not documented in
26201 this manual. You can find out about them by reading the file called
26202 &_doc/experimental.txt_&.
26204 All the content-scanning facilites work on a MBOX copy of the message that is
26205 temporarily created in a file called:
26207 <&'spool_directory'&>&`/scan/`&<&'message_id'&>/<&'message_id'&>&`.eml`&
26209 The &_.eml_& extension is a friendly hint to virus scanners that they can
26210 expect an MBOX-like structure inside that file. The file is created when the
26211 first content scanning facility is called. Subsequent calls to content
26212 scanning conditions open the same file again. The directory is recursively
26213 removed when the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL has finished running, unless
26215 control = no_mbox_unspool
26217 has been encountered. When the MIME ACL decodes files, they are put into the
26218 same directory by default.
26222 .section "Scanning for viruses" "SECTscanvirus"
26223 .cindex "virus scanning"
26224 .cindex "content scanning" "for viruses"
26225 .cindex "content scanning" "the &%malware%& condition"
26226 The &%malware%& ACL condition lets you connect virus scanner software to Exim.
26227 It supports a &"generic"& interface to scanners called via the shell, and
26228 specialized interfaces for &"daemon"& type virus scanners, which are resident
26229 in memory and thus are much faster.
26231 .cindex "&%av_scanner%&"
26232 You can set the &%av_scanner%& option in first part of the Exim configuration
26233 file to specify which scanner to use, together with any additional options that
26234 are needed. The basic syntax is as follows:
26236 &`av_scanner = <`&&'scanner-type'&&`>:<`&&'option1'&&`>:<`&&'option2'&&`>:[...]`&
26238 If you do not set &%av_scanner%&, it defaults to
26240 av_scanner = sophie:/var/run/sophie
26242 If the value of &%av_scanner%& starts with dollar character, it is expanded
26243 before use. The following scanner types are supported in this release:
26246 .vitem &%aveserver%&
26247 .cindex "virus scanners" "Kaspersky"
26248 This is the scanner daemon of Kaspersky Version 5. You can get a trial version
26249 at &url(http://www.kaspersky.com). This scanner type takes one option,
26250 which is the path to the daemon's UNIX socket. The default is shown in this
26253 av_scanner = aveserver:/var/run/aveserver
26257 .cindex "virus scanners" "clamd"
26258 This daemon-type scanner is GPL and free. You can get it at
26259 &url(http://www.clamav.net/). Some older versions of clamd do not seem to
26260 unpack MIME containers, so it used to be recommended to unpack MIME attachments
26261 in the MIME ACL. This no longer believed to be necessary. One option is
26262 required: either the path and name of a UNIX socket file, or a hostname or IP
26263 number, and a port, separated by space, as in the second of these examples:
26265 av_scanner = clamd:/opt/clamd/socket
26266 av_scanner = clamd:192.168.2.100 1234
26268 If the option is unset, the default is &_/tmp/clamd_&. Thanks to David Saez for
26269 contributing the code for this scanner.
26272 .cindex "virus scanners" "command line interface"
26273 This is the keyword for the generic command line scanner interface. It can be
26274 used to attach virus scanners that are invoked from the shell. This scanner
26275 type takes 3 mandatory options:
26278 The full path and name of the scanner binary, with all command line options,
26279 and a placeholder (&`%s`&) for the directory to scan.
26282 A regular expression to match against the STDOUT and STDERR output of the
26283 virus scanner. If the expression matches, a virus was found. You must make
26284 absolutely sure that this expression matches on &"virus found"&. This is called
26285 the &"trigger"& expression.
26288 Another regular expression, containing exactly one pair of parentheses, to
26289 match the name of the virus found in the scanners output. This is called the
26290 &"name"& expression.
26293 For example, Sophos Sweep reports a virus on a line like this:
26295 Virus 'W32/Magistr-B' found in file ./those.bat
26297 For the trigger expression, we can just match the word &"found"&. For the name
26298 expression, we want to extract the W32/Magistr-B string, so we can match for
26299 the single quotes left and right of it. Altogether, this makes the
26300 configuration setting:
26302 av_scanner = cmdline:\
26303 /path/to/sweep -all -rec -archive %s:\
26307 .cindex "virus scanners" "DrWeb"
26308 The DrWeb daemon scanner (&url(http://www.sald.com/)) interface takes one
26309 argument, either a full path to a UNIX socket, or an IP address and port
26310 separated by white space, as in these examples:
26312 av_scanner = drweb:/var/run/drwebd.sock
26313 av_scanner = drweb:192.168.2.20 31337
26315 If you omit the argument, the default path &_/usr/local/drweb/run/drwebd.sock_&
26316 is used. Thanks to Alex Miller for contributing the code for this scanner.
26319 .cindex "virus scanners" "F-Secure"
26320 The F-Secure daemon scanner (&url(http://www.f-secure.com)) takes one
26321 argument which is the path to a UNIX socket. For example:
26323 av_scanner = fsecure:/path/to/.fsav
26325 If no argument is given, the default is &_/var/run/.fsav_&. Thanks to Johan
26326 Thelmen for contributing the code for this scanner.
26328 .vitem &%kavdaemon%&
26329 .cindex "virus scanners" "Kaspersky"
26330 This is the scanner daemon of Kaspersky Version 4. This version of the
26331 Kaspersky scanner is outdated. Please upgrade (see &%aveserver%& above). This
26332 scanner type takes one option, which is the path to the daemon's UNIX socket.
26335 av_scanner = kavdaemon:/opt/AVP/AvpCtl
26337 The default path is &_/var/run/AvpCtl_&.
26340 .cindex "virus scanners" "mksd"
26341 This is a daemon type scanner that is aimed mainly at Polish users, though some
26342 parts of documentation are now available in English. You can get it at
26343 &url(http://linux.mks.com.pl/). The only option for this scanner type is
26344 the maximum number of processes used simultaneously to scan the attachments,
26345 provided that the demime facility is employed and also provided that mksd has
26346 been run with at least the same number of child processes. For example:
26348 av_scanner = mksd:2
26350 You can safely omit this option (the default value is 1).
26353 .cindex "virus scanners" "Sophos and Sophie"
26354 Sophie is a daemon that uses Sophos' &%libsavi%& library to scan for viruses.
26355 You can get Sophie at &url(http://www.vanja.com/tools/sophie/). The only
26356 option for this scanner type is the path to the UNIX socket that Sophie uses
26357 for client communication. For example:
26359 av_scanner = sophie:/tmp/sophie
26361 The default path is &_/var/run/sophie_&, so if you are using this, you can omit
26365 When &%av_scanner%& is correctly set, you can use the &%malware%& condition in
26366 the DATA ACL. &*Note*&: You cannot use the &%malware%& condition in the MIME
26369 The &%av_scanner%& option is expanded each time &%malware%& is called. This
26370 makes it possible to use different scanners. See further below for an example.
26371 The &%malware%& condition caches its results, so when you use it multiple times
26372 for the same message, the actual scanning process is only carried out once.
26373 However, using expandable items in &%av_scanner%& disables this caching, in
26374 which case each use of the &%malware%& condition causes a new scan of the
26377 The &%malware%& condition takes a right-hand argument that is expanded before
26378 use. It can then be one of
26381 &"true"&, &"*"&, or &"1"&, in which case the message is scanned for viruses.
26382 The condition succeeds if a virus was found, and fail otherwise. This is the
26385 &"false"& or &"0"&, in which case no scanning is done and the condition fails
26388 A regular expression, in which case the message is scanned for viruses. The
26389 condition succeeds if a virus is found and its name matches the regular
26390 expression. This allows you to take special actions on certain types of virus.
26393 You can append &`/defer_ok`& to the &%malware%& condition to accept messages
26394 even if there is a problem with the virus scanner.
26396 .cindex "&$malware_name$&"
26397 When a virus is found, the condition sets up an expansion variable called
26398 &$malware_name$& that contains the name of the virus. You can use it in a
26399 &%message%& modifier that specifies the error returned to the sender, and/or in
26402 If your virus scanner cannot unpack MIME and TNEF containers itself, you should
26403 use the &%demime%& condition (see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&) before the
26404 &%malware%& condition.
26406 Here is a very simple scanning example:
26408 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26412 The next example accepts messages when there is a problem with the scanner:
26414 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26416 malware = */defer_ok
26418 The next example shows how to use an ACL variable to scan with both sophie and
26419 aveserver. It assumes you have set:
26421 av_scanner = $acl_m0
26423 in the main Exim configuration.
26425 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26426 set acl_m0 = sophie
26429 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26430 set acl_m0 = aveserver
26435 .section "Scanning with SpamAssassin" "SECTscanspamass"
26436 .cindex "content scanning" "for spam"
26437 .cindex "spam scanning"
26438 .cindex "SpamAssassin" "scanning with"
26439 The &%spam%& ACL condition calls SpamAssassin's &%spamd%& daemon to get a spam
26440 score and a report for the message. You can get SpamAssassin at
26441 &url(http://www.spamassassin.org), or, if you have a working Perl
26442 installation, you can use CPAN by running:
26444 perl -MCPAN -e 'install Mail::SpamAssassin'
26446 SpamAssassin has its own set of configuration files. Please review its
26447 documentation to see how you can tweak it. The default installation should work
26450 .cindex "&%spamd_address%&"
26451 After having installed and configured SpamAssassin, start the &%spamd%& daemon.
26452 By default, it listens on 127.0.0.1, TCP port 783. If you use another host or
26453 port for &%spamd%&, you must set the &%spamd_address%& option in the global
26454 part of the Exim configuration as follows (example):
26456 spamd_address = 192.168.99.45 387
26458 You do not need to set this option if you use the default. As of version 2.60,
26459 &%spamd%& also supports communication over UNIX sockets. If you want to use
26460 these, supply &%spamd_address%& with an absolute file name instead of a
26463 spamd_address = /var/run/spamd_socket
26465 You can have multiple &%spamd%& servers to improve scalability. These can
26466 reside on other hardware reachable over the network. To specify multiple
26467 &%spamd%& servers, put multiple address/port pairs in the &%spamd_address%&
26468 option, separated with colons:
26470 spamd_address = 192.168.2.10 783 : \
26471 192.168.2.11 783 : \
26474 Up to 32 &%spamd%& servers are supported. The servers are queried in a random
26475 fashion. When a server fails to respond to the connection attempt, all other
26476 servers are tried until one succeeds. If no server responds, the &%spam%&
26479 &*Warning*&: It is not possible to use the UNIX socket connection method with
26480 multiple &%spamd%& servers.
26483 .section "Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL"
26484 Here is a simple example of the use of the &%spam%& condition in a DATA ACL:
26486 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26489 The right-hand side of the &%spam%& condition specifies the username that
26490 SpamAssassin should scan for. If you do not want to scan for a particular user,
26491 but rather use the SpamAssassin system-wide default profile, you can scan for
26492 an unknown user, or simply use &"nobody"&. However, you must put something on
26493 the right-hand side.
26495 The username allows you to use per-domain or per-user antispam profiles. The
26496 right-hand side is expanded before being used, so you can put lookups or
26497 conditions there. When the right-hand side evaluates to &"0"& or &"false"&, no
26498 scanning is done and the condition fails immediately.
26500 Scanning with SpamAssassin uses a lot of resources. If you scan every message,
26501 large ones may cause significant performance degredation. As most spam messages
26502 are quite small, it is recommended that you do not scan the big ones. For
26505 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26506 condition = ${if < {$message_size}{10K}}
26510 The &%spam%& condition returns true if the threshold specified in the user's
26511 SpamAssassin profile has been matched or exceeded. If you want to use the
26512 &%spam%& condition for its side effects (see the variables below), you can make
26513 it always return &"true"& by appending &`:true`& to the username.
26515 .cindex "spam scanning" "returned variables"
26517 When the &%spam%& condition is run, it sets up a number of expansion
26518 variables. With the exception of &$spam_score_int$&, these are usable only
26519 within ACLs; their values are not retained with the message and so cannot be
26520 used at delivery time.
26524 .vitem &$spam_score$&
26525 The spam score of the message, for example &"3.4"& or &"30.5"&. This is useful
26526 for inclusion in log or reject messages.
26528 .vitem &$spam_score_int$&
26529 The spam score of the message, multiplied by ten, as an integer value. For
26530 example &"34"& or &"305"&. This is useful for numeric comparisons in
26531 conditions. This variable is special; its value is saved with the message, and
26532 written to Exim's spool file. This means that it can be used during the whole
26533 life of the message on your Exim system, in particular, in routers or
26534 transports during the later delivery phase.
26536 .vitem &$spam_bar$&
26537 A string consisting of a number of &"+"& or &"-"& characters, representing the
26538 integer part of the spam score value. A spam score of 4.4 would have a
26539 &$spam_bar$& value of &"++++"&. This is useful for inclusion in warning
26540 headers, since MUAs can match on such strings.
26542 .vitem &$spam_report$&
26543 A multiline text table, containing the full SpamAssassin report for the
26544 message. Useful for inclusion in headers or reject messages.
26547 The &%spam%& condition caches its results. If you call it again with the same
26548 user name, it does not scan again, but rather returns the same values as
26551 The &%spam%& condition returns DEFER if there is any error while running the
26552 message through SpamAssassin. If you want to treat DEFER as FAIL (to pass on to
26553 the next ACL statement block), append &`/defer_ok`& to the right-hand side of
26554 the spam condition, like this:
26556 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26557 spam = joe/defer_ok
26559 This causes messages to be accepted even if there is a problem with &%spamd%&.
26561 Here is a longer, commented example of the use of the &%spam%&
26564 # put headers in all messages (no matter if spam or not)
26565 warn message = X-Spam-Score: $spam_score ($spam_bar)
26567 warn message = X-Spam-Report: $spam_report
26570 # add second subject line with *SPAM* marker when message
26571 # is over threshold
26572 warn message = Subject: *SPAM* $h_Subject:
26575 # reject spam at high scores (> 12)
26576 deny message = This message scored $spam_score spam points.
26578 condition = ${if >{$spam_score_int}{120}{1}{0}}
26583 .section "Scanning MIME parts" "SECTscanmimepart"
26584 .cindex "content scanning" "MIME parts"
26585 .cindex "MIME content scanning"
26586 .cindex "&%acl_smtp_mime%&"
26587 The &%acl_smtp_mime%& global option specifies an ACL that is called once for
26588 each MIME part of an SMTP message, including multipart types, in the sequence
26589 of their position in the message. Similarly, the &%acl_not_smtp_mime%& option
26590 specifies an ACL that is used for the MIME parts of non-SMTP messages. These
26591 options may both refer to the same ACL if you want the same processing in both
26594 These ACLs are called (possibly many times) just before the &%acl_smtp_data%&
26595 ACL in the case of an SMTP message, or just before a non-SMTP message is
26596 accepted. However, a MIME ACL is called only if the message contains a
26597 &'MIME-Version:'& header line. When a call to a MIME ACL does not yield
26598 &"accept"&, ACL processing is aborted and the appropriate result code is sent
26599 to the client. In the case of an SMTP message, the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL is not
26600 called when this happens.
26602 You cannot use the &%malware%& or &%spam%& conditions in a MIME ACL; these can
26603 only be used in the DATA or non-SMTP ACLs. However, you can use the &%regex%&
26604 condition to match against the raw MIME part. You can also use the
26605 &%mime_regex%& condition to match against the decoded MIME part (see section
26606 &<<SECTscanregex>>&).
26608 At the start of a MIME ACL, a number of variables are set from the header
26609 information for the relevant MIME part. These are described below. The contents
26610 of the MIME part are not by default decoded into a disk file except for MIME
26611 parts whose content-type is &"message/rfc822"&. If you want to decode a MIME
26612 part into a disk file, you can use the &%decode%& modifier. The general syntax
26615 &`decode = [/`&<&'path'&>&`/]`&<&'filename'&>
26617 The right hand side is expanded before use. After expansion,
26621 &"0"& or &"false"&, in which case no decoding is done.
26623 The string &"default"&. In that case, the file is put in the temporary
26624 &"default"& directory <&'spool_directory'&>&_/scan/_&<&'message_id'&>&_/_& with
26625 a sequential file name consisting of the message id and a sequence number. The
26626 full path and name is available in &$mime_decoded_filename$& after decoding.
26628 A full path name starting with a slash. If the full name is an existing
26629 directory, it is used as a replacement for the default directory. The filename
26630 is then sequentially assigned. If the path does not exist, it is used as
26631 the full path and file name.
26633 If the string does not start with a slash, it is used as the
26634 filename, and the default path is then used.
26637 You can easily decode a file with its original, proposed filename using
26639 decode = $mime_filename
26641 However, you should keep in mind that &$mime_filename$& might contain
26642 anything. If you place files outside of the default path, they are not
26643 automatically unlinked.
26645 For RFC822 attachments (these are messages attached to messages, with a
26646 content-type of &"message/rfc822"&), the ACL is called again in the same manner
26647 as for the primary message, only that the &$mime_is_rfc822$& expansion
26648 variable is set (see below). Attached messages are always decoded to disk
26649 before being checked, and the files are unlinked once the check is done.
26651 The MIME ACL supports the &%regex%& and &%mime_regex%& conditions. These can be
26652 used to match regular expressions against raw and decoded MIME parts,
26653 respectively. They are described in section &<<SECTscanregex>>&.
26655 .cindex "MIME content scanning" "returned variables"
26656 The following list describes all expansion variables that are
26657 available in the MIME ACL:
26660 .vitem &$mime_boundary$&
26661 If the current part is a multipart (see &$mime_is_multipart$&) below, it should
26662 have a boundary string, which is stored in this variable. If the current part
26663 has no boundary parameter in the &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable
26664 contains the empty string.
26666 .vitem &$mime_charset$&
26667 This variable contains the character set identifier, if one was found in the
26668 &'Content-Type:'& header. Examples for charset identifiers are:
26674 Please note that this value is not normalized, so you should do matches
26675 case-insensitively.
26677 .vitem &$mime_content_description$&
26678 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-Description:'&
26679 header. It can contain a human-readable description of the parts content. Some
26680 implementations repeat the filename for attachments here, but they are usually
26681 only used for display purposes.
26683 .vitem &$mime_content_disposition$&
26684 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-Disposition:'&
26685 header. You can expect strings like &"attachment"& or &"inline"& here.
26687 .vitem &$mime_content_id$&
26688 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-ID:'& header.
26689 This is a unique ID that can be used to reference a part from another part.
26691 .vitem &$mime_content_size$&
26692 This variable is set only after the &%decode%& modifier (see above) has been
26693 successfully run. It contains the size of the decoded part in kilobytes. The
26694 size is always rounded up to full kilobytes, so only a completely empty part
26695 has a &$mime_content_size$& of zero.
26697 .vitem &$mime_content_transfer_encoding$&
26698 This variable contains the normalized content of the
26699 &'Content-transfer-encoding:'& header. This is a symbolic name for an encoding
26700 type. Typical values are &"base64"& and &"quoted-printable"&.
26702 .vitem &$mime_content_type$&
26703 If the MIME part has a &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable contains its
26704 value, lowercased, and without any options (like &"name"& or &"charset"&). Here
26705 are some examples of popular MIME types, as they may appear in this variable:
26709 application/octet-stream
26713 If the MIME part has no &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable contains the
26716 .vitem &$mime_decoded_filename$&
26717 This variable is set only after the &%decode%& modifier (see above) has been
26718 successfully run. It contains the full path and file name of the file
26719 containing the decoded data.
26724 .vitem &$mime_filename$&
26725 This is perhaps the most important of the MIME variables. It contains a
26726 proposed filename for an attachment, if one was found in either the
26727 &'Content-Type:'& or &'Content-Disposition:'& headers. The filename will be
26728 RFC2047 decoded, but no additional sanity checks are done. If no filename was
26729 found, this variable contains the empty string.
26731 .vitem &$mime_is_coverletter$&
26732 This variable attempts to differentiate the &"cover letter"& of an e-mail from
26733 attached data. It can be used to clamp down on flashy or unneccessarily encoded
26734 content in the cover letter, while not restricting attachments at all.
26736 The variable contains 1 (true) for a MIME part believed to be part of the
26737 cover letter, and 0 (false) for an attachment. At present, the algorithm is as
26741 The outermost MIME part of a message is always a cover letter.
26744 If a multipart/alternative or multipart/related MIME part is a cover letter,
26745 so are all MIME subparts within that multipart.
26748 If any other multipart is a cover letter, the first subpart is a cover letter,
26749 and the rest are attachments.
26752 All parts contained within an attachment multipart are attachments.
26755 As an example, the following will ban &"HTML mail"& (including that sent with
26756 alternative plain text), while allowing HTML files to be attached. HTML
26757 coverletter mail attached to non-HMTL coverletter mail will also be allowed:
26759 deny message = HTML mail is not accepted here
26760 !condition = $mime_is_rfc822
26761 condition = $mime_is_coverletter
26762 condition = ${if eq{$mime_content_type}{text/html}{1}{0}}
26764 .vitem &$mime_is_multipart$&
26765 This variable has the value 1 (true) when the current part has the main type
26766 &"multipart"&, for example &"multipart/alternative"& or &"multipart/mixed"&.
26767 Since multipart entities only serve as containers for other parts, you may not
26768 want to carry out specific actions on them.
26770 .vitem &$mime_is_rfc822$&
26771 This variable has the value 1 (true) if the current part is not a part of the
26772 checked message itself, but part of an attached message. Attached message
26773 decoding is fully recursive.
26775 .vitem &$mime_part_count$&
26776 This variable is a counter that is raised for each processed MIME part. It
26777 starts at zero for the very first part (which is usually a multipart). The
26778 counter is per-message, so it is reset when processing RFC822 attachments (see
26779 &$mime_is_rfc822$&). The counter stays set after &%acl_smtp_mime%& is
26780 complete, so you can use it in the DATA ACL to determine the number of MIME
26781 parts of a message. For non-MIME messages, this variable contains the value -1.
26786 .section "Scanning with regular expressions" "SECTscanregex"
26787 .cindex "content scanning" "with regular expressions"
26788 .cindex "regular expressions" "content scanning with"
26789 You can specify your own custom regular expression matches on the full body of
26790 the message, or on individual MIME parts.
26792 The &%regex%& condition takes one or more regular expressions as arguments and
26793 matches them against the full message (when called in the DATA ACL) or a raw
26794 MIME part (when called in the MIME ACL). The &%regex%& condition matches
26795 linewise, with a maximum line length of 32K characters. That means you cannot
26796 have multiline matches with the &%regex%& condition.
26798 The &%mime_regex%& condition can be called only in the MIME ACL. It matches up
26799 to 32K of decoded content (the whole content at once, not linewise). If the
26800 part has not been decoded with the &%decode%& modifier earlier in the ACL, it
26801 is decoded automatically when &%mime_regex%& is executed (using default path
26802 and filename values). If the decoded data is larger than 32K, only the first
26803 32K characters are checked.
26805 The regular expressions are passed as a colon-separated list. To include a
26806 literal colon, you must double it. Since the whole right-hand side string is
26807 expanded before being used, you must also escape dollar signs and backslashes
26808 with more backslashes, or use the &`\N`& facility to disable expansion.
26809 Here is a simple example that contains two regular expressions:
26811 deny message = contains blacklisted regex ($regex_match_string)
26812 regex = [Mm]ortgage : URGENT BUSINESS PROPOSAL
26814 The conditions returns true if any one of the regular expressions matches. The
26815 &$regex_match_string$& expansion variable is then set up and contains the
26816 matching regular expression.
26818 &*Warning*&: With large messages, these conditions can be fairly
26824 .section "The demime condition" "SECTdemimecond"
26825 .cindex "content scanning" "MIME checking"
26826 .cindex "MIME content scanning"
26827 The &%demime%& ACL condition provides MIME unpacking, sanity checking and file
26828 extension blocking. It is usable only in the DATA and non-SMTP ACLs. The
26829 &%demime%& condition uses a simpler interface to MIME decoding than the MIME
26830 ACL functionality, but provides no additional facilities. Please note that this
26831 condition is deprecated and kept only for backward compatibility. You must set
26832 the WITH_OLD_DEMIME option in &_Local/Makefile_& at build time to be able to
26833 use the &%demime%& condition.
26835 The &%demime%& condition unpacks MIME containers in the message. It detects
26836 errors in MIME containers and can match file extensions found in the message
26837 against a list. Using this facility produces files containing the unpacked MIME
26838 parts of the message in the temporary scan directory. If you do antivirus
26839 scanning, it is recommened that you use the &%demime%& condition before the
26840 antivirus (&%malware%&) condition.
26842 On the right-hand side of the &%demime%& condition you can pass a
26843 colon-separated list of file extensions that it should match against. For
26846 deny message = Found blacklisted file attachment
26847 demime = vbs:com:bat:pif:prf:lnk
26849 If one of the file extensions is found, the condition is true, otherwise it is
26850 false. If there is a temporary error while demimeing (for example, &"disk
26851 full"&), the condition defers, and the message is temporarily rejected (unless
26852 the condition is on a &%warn%& verb).
26854 The right-hand side is expanded before being treated as a list, so you can have
26855 conditions and lookups there. If it expands to an empty string, &"false"&, or
26856 zero (&"0"&), no demimeing is done and the condition is false.
26858 The &%demime%& condition set the following variables:
26861 .vitem &$demime_errorlevel$&
26862 .cindex "&$demime_errorlevel$&"
26863 When an error is detected in a MIME container, this variable contains the
26864 severity of the error, as an integer number. The higher the value, the more
26865 severe the error (the current maximum value is 3). If this variable is unset or
26866 zero, no error occurred.
26868 .vitem &$demime_reason$&
26869 .cindex "&$demime_reason$&"
26870 When &$demime_errorlevel$& is greater than zero, this variable contains a
26871 human-readable text string describing the MIME error that occurred.
26875 .vitem &$found_extension$&
26876 .cindex "&$found_extension$&"
26877 When the &%demime%& condition is true, this variable contains the file
26878 extension it found.
26881 Both &$demime_errorlevel$& and &$demime_reason$& are set by the first call of
26882 the &%demime%& condition, and are not changed on subsequent calls.
26884 If you do not want to check for file extensions, but rather use the &%demime%&
26885 condition for unpacking or error checking purposes, pass &"*"& as the
26886 right-hand side value. Here is a more elaborate example of how to use this
26889 # Reject messages with serious MIME container errors
26890 deny message = Found MIME error ($demime_reason).
26892 condition = ${if >{$demime_errorlevel}{2}{1}{0}}
26894 # Reject known virus spreading file extensions.
26895 # Accepting these is pretty much braindead.
26896 deny message = contains $found_extension file (blacklisted).
26897 demime = com:vbs:bat:pif:scr
26899 # Freeze .exe and .doc files. Postmaster can
26900 # examine them and eventually thaw them.
26901 deny log_message = Another $found_extension file.
26910 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26911 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26913 .chapter "Adding a local scan function to Exim" "CHAPlocalscan" &&&
26914 "Local scan function"
26915 .scindex IIDlosca "&[local_scan()]& function" "description of"
26916 .cindex "customizing" "input scan using C function"
26917 .cindex "policy control" "by local scan function"
26918 In these days of email worms, viruses, and ever-increasing spam, some sites
26919 want to apply a lot of checking to messages before accepting them.
26921 The content scanning extension (chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&) has facilities for
26922 passing messages to external virus and spam scanning software. You can also do
26923 a certain amount in Exim itself through string expansions and the &%condition%&
26924 condition in the ACL that runs after the SMTP DATA command or the ACL for
26925 non-SMTP messages (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), but this has its limitations.
26927 To allow for further customization to a site's own requirements, there is the
26928 possibility of linking Exim with a private message scanning function, written
26929 in C. If you want to run code that is written in something other than C, you
26930 can of course use a little C stub to call it.
26932 The local scan function is run once for every incoming message, at the point
26933 when Exim is just about to accept the message.
26934 It can therefore be used to control non-SMTP messages from local processes as
26935 well as messages arriving via SMTP.
26937 Exim applies a timeout to calls of the local scan function, and there is an
26938 option called &%local_scan_timeout%& for setting it. The default is 5 minutes.
26939 Zero means &"no timeout"&.
26940 Exim also sets up signal handlers for SIGSEGV, SIGILL, SIGFPE, and SIGBUS
26941 before calling the local scan function, so that the most common types of crash
26942 are caught. If the timeout is exceeded or one of those signals is caught, the
26943 incoming message is rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP message.
26944 For a non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a non-zero
26945 code. The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.
26949 .section "Building Exim to use a local scan function"
26950 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "building Exim to use"
26951 To make use of the local scan function feature, you must tell Exim where your
26952 function is before building Exim, by setting LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE in your
26953 &_Local/Makefile_&. A recommended place to put it is in the &_Local_&
26954 directory, so you might set
26956 LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE=Local/local_scan.c
26958 for example. The function must be called &[local_scan()]&. It is called by
26959 Exim after it has received a message, when the success return code is about to
26960 be sent. This is after all the ACLs have been run. The return code from your
26961 function controls whether the message is actually accepted or not. There is a
26962 commented template function (that just accepts the message) in the file
26963 _src/local_scan.c_.
26965 If you want to make use of Exim's run time configuration file to set options
26966 for your &[local_scan()]& function, you must also set
26968 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
26970 in &_Local/Makefile_& (see section &<<SECTconoptloc>>& below).
26975 .section "API for local_scan()" "SECTapiforloc"
26976 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "API description"
26977 You must include this line near the start of your code:
26979 #include "local_scan.h"
26981 This header file defines a number of variables and other values, and the
26982 prototype for the function itself. Exim is coded to use unsigned char values
26983 almost exclusively, and one of the things this header defines is a shorthand
26984 for &`unsigned char`& called &`uschar`&.
26985 It also contains the following macro definitions, to simplify casting character
26986 strings and pointers to character strings:
26988 #define CS (char *)
26989 #define CCS (const char *)
26990 #define CSS (char **)
26991 #define US (unsigned char *)
26992 #define CUS (const unsigned char *)
26993 #define USS (unsigned char **)
26995 The function prototype for &[local_scan()]& is:
26997 extern int local_scan(int fd, uschar **return_text);
26999 The arguments are as follows:
27002 &%fd%& is a file descriptor for the file that contains the body of the message
27003 (the -D file). The file is open for reading and writing, but updating it is not
27004 recommended. &*Warning*&: You must &'not'& close this file descriptor.
27006 The descriptor is positioned at character 19 of the file, which is the first
27007 character of the body itself, because the first 19 characters are the message
27008 id followed by &`-D`& and a newline. If you rewind the file, you should use the
27009 macro SPOOL_DATA_START_OFFSET to reset to the start of the data, just in
27010 case this changes in some future version.
27012 &%return_text%& is an address which you can use to return a pointer to a text
27013 string at the end of the function. The value it points to on entry is NULL.
27016 The function must return an &%int%& value which is one of the following macros:
27019 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT`&
27020 .cindex "&$local_scan_data$&"
27021 The message is accepted. If you pass back a string of text, it is saved with
27022 the message, and made available in the variable &$local_scan_data$&. No
27023 newlines are permitted (if there are any, they are turned into spaces) and the
27024 maximum length of text is 1000 characters.
27026 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_FREEZE`&
27027 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message is
27028 queued without immediate delivery, and is frozen.
27030 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_QUEUE`&
27031 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message is
27032 queued without immediate delivery.
27034 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT`&
27035 The message is rejected; the returned text is used as an error message which is
27036 passed back to the sender and which is also logged. Newlines are permitted &--
27037 they cause a multiline response for SMTP rejections, but are converted to
27038 &`\n`& in log lines. If no message is given, &"Administrative prohibition"& is
27041 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT`&
27042 The message is temporarily rejected; the returned text is used as an error
27043 message as for LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT. If no message is given, &"Temporary local
27046 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR`&
27047 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, except that the header of the rejected
27048 message is not written to the reject log. It has the effect of unsetting the
27049 &%rejected_header%& log selector for just this rejection. If
27050 &%rejected_header%& is already unset (see the discussion of the
27051 &%log_selection%& option in section &<<SECTlogselector>>&), this code is the
27052 same as LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.
27054 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT_NOLOGHDR`&
27055 This code is a variation of LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT in the same way that
27056 LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR is a variation of LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.
27059 If the message is not being received by interactive SMTP, rejections are
27060 reported by writing to &%stderr%& or by sending an email, as configured by the
27061 &%-oe%& command line options.
27065 .section "Configuration options for local_scan()" "SECTconoptloc"
27066 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "configuration options"
27067 It is possible to have option settings in the main configuration file
27068 that set values in static variables in the &[local_scan()]& module. If you
27069 want to do this, you must have the line
27071 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
27073 in your &_Local/Makefile_& when you build Exim. (This line is in
27074 &_OS/Makefile-Default_&, commented out). Then, in the &[local_scan()]& source
27075 file, you must define static variables to hold the option values, and a table
27078 The table must be a vector called &%local_scan_options%&, of type
27079 &`optionlist`&. Each entry is a triplet, consisting of a name, an option type,
27080 and a pointer to the variable that holds the value. The entries must appear in
27081 alphabetical order. Following &%local_scan_options%& you must also define a
27082 variable called &%local_scan_options_count%& that contains the number of
27083 entries in the table. Here is a short example, showing two kinds of option:
27085 static int my_integer_option = 42;
27086 static uschar *my_string_option = US"a default string";
27088 optionlist local_scan_options[] = {
27089 { "my_integer", opt_int, &my_integer_option },
27090 { "my_string", opt_stringptr, &my_string_option }
27093 int local_scan_options_count =
27094 sizeof(local_scan_options)/sizeof(optionlist);
27096 The values of the variables can now be changed from Exim's runtime
27097 configuration file by including a local scan section as in this example:
27101 my_string = some string of text...
27103 The available types of option data are as follows:
27106 .vitem &*opt_bool*&
27107 This specifies a boolean (true/false) option. The address should point to a
27108 variable of type &`BOOL`&, which will be set to TRUE or FALSE, which are macros
27109 that are defined as &"1"& and &"0"&, respectively. If you want to detect
27110 whether such a variable has been set at all, you can initialize it to
27111 TRUE_UNSET. (BOOL variables are integers underneath, so can hold more than two
27114 .vitem &*opt_fixed*&
27115 This specifies a fixed point number, such as is used for load averages.
27116 The address should point to a variable of type &`int`&. The value is stored
27117 multiplied by 1000, so, for example, 1.4142 is truncated and stored as 1414.
27120 This specifies an integer; the address should point to a variable of type
27121 &`int`&. The value may be specified in any of the integer formats accepted by
27124 .vitem &*opt_mkint*&
27125 This is the same as &%opt_int%&, except that when such a value is output in a
27126 &%-bP%& listing, if it is an exact number of kilobytes or megabytes, it is
27127 printed with the suffix K or M.
27129 .vitem &*opt_octint*&
27130 This also specifies an integer, but the value is always interpeted as an
27131 octal integer, whether or not it starts with the digit zero, and it is
27132 always output in octal.
27134 .vitem &*opt_stringptr*&
27135 This specifies a string value; the address must be a pointer to a
27136 variable that points to a string (for example, of type &`uschar *`&).
27138 .vitem &*opt_time*&
27139 This specifies a time interval value. The address must point to a variable of
27140 type &`int`&. The value that is placed there is a number of seconds.
27143 If the &%-bP%& command line option is followed by &`local_scan`&, Exim prints
27144 out the values of all the &[local_scan()]& options.
27148 .section "Available Exim variables"
27149 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "available Exim variables"
27150 The header &_local_scan.h_& gives you access to a number of C variables. These
27151 are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained from release to release.
27152 Note, however, that you can obtain the value of any Exim variable by calling
27153 &'expand_string()'&. The exported variables are as follows:
27156 .vitem &*unsigned&~int&~debug_selector*&
27157 This variable is set to zero when no debugging is taking place. Otherwise, it
27158 is a bitmap of debugging selectors. Two bits are identified for use in
27159 &[local_scan()]&; they are defined as macros:
27162 The &`D_v`& bit is set when &%-v%& was present on the command line. This is a
27163 testing option that is not privileged &-- any caller may set it. All the
27164 other selector bits can be set only by admin users.
27167 The &`D_local_scan`& bit is provided for use by &[local_scan()]&; it is set
27168 by the &`+local_scan`& debug selector. It is not included in the default set
27172 Thus, to write to the debugging output only when &`+local_scan`& has been
27173 selected, you should use code like this:
27175 if ((debug_selector & D_local_scan) != 0)
27176 debug_printf("xxx", ...);
27178 .vitem &*uschar&~*expand_string_message*&
27179 After a failing call to &'expand_string()'& (returned value NULL), the
27180 variable &%expand_string_message%& contains the error message, zero-terminated.
27182 .vitem &*header_line&~*header_list*&
27183 A pointer to a chain of header lines. The &%header_line%& structure is
27186 .vitem &*header_line&~*header_last*&
27187 A pointer to the last of the header lines.
27189 .vitem &*uschar&~*headers_charset*&
27190 The value of the &%headers_charset%& configuration option.
27192 .vitem &*BOOL&~host_checking*&
27193 This variable is TRUE during a host checking session that is initiated by the
27194 &%-bh%& command line option.
27196 .vitem &*uschar&~*interface_address*&
27197 The IP address of the interface that received the message, as a string. This
27198 is NULL for locally submitted messages.
27200 .vitem &*int&~interface_port*&
27201 The port on which this message was received.
27203 .vitem &*uschar&~*message_id*&
27204 This variable contains Exim's message id for the incoming message (the value of
27205 &$message_exim_id$&) as a zero-terminated string.
27207 .vitem &*uschar&~*received_protocol*&
27208 The name of the protocol by which the message was received.
27210 .vitem &*int&~recipients_count*&
27211 The number of accepted recipients.
27213 .vitem &*recipient_item&~*recipients_list*&
27214 .cindex "recipient" "adding in local scan"
27215 .cindex "recipient" "removing in local scan"
27216 The list of accepted recipients, held in a vector of length
27217 &%recipients_count%&. The &%recipient_item%& structure is discussed below. You
27218 can add additional recipients by calling &'receive_add_recipient()'& (see
27219 below). You can delete recipients by removing them from the vector and adusting
27220 the value in &%recipients_count%&. In particular, by setting
27221 &%recipients_count%& to zero you remove all recipients. If you then return the
27222 value &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT`&, the message is accepted, but immediately
27223 blackholed. To replace the recipients, you can set &%recipients_count%& to zero
27224 and then call &'receive_add_recipient()'& as often as needed.
27226 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_address*&
27227 The envelope sender address. For bounce messages this is the empty string.
27229 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_address*&
27230 The IP address of the sending host, as a string. This is NULL for
27231 locally-submitted messages.
27233 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_authenticated*&
27234 The name of the authentication mechanism that was used, or NULL if the message
27235 was not received over an authenticated SMTP connection.
27237 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_name*&
27238 The name of the sending host, if known.
27240 .vitem &*int&~sender_host_port*&
27241 The port on the sending host.
27243 .vitem &*BOOL&~smtp_input*&
27244 This variable is TRUE for all SMTP input, including BSMTP.
27246 .vitem &*BOOL&~smtp_batched_input*&
27247 This variable is TRUE for BSMTP input.
27249 .vitem &*int&~store_pool*&
27250 The contents of this variable control which pool of memory is used for new
27251 requests. See section &<<SECTmemhanloc>>& for details.
27255 .section "Structure of header lines"
27256 The &%header_line%& structure contains the members listed below.
27257 You can add additional header lines by calling the &'header_add()'& function
27258 (see below). You can cause header lines to be ignored (deleted) by setting
27263 .vitem &*struct&~header_line&~*next*&
27264 A pointer to the next header line, or NULL for the last line.
27266 .vitem &*int&~type*&
27267 A code identifying certain headers that Exim recognizes. The codes are printing
27268 characters, and are documented in chapter &<<CHAPspool>>& of this manual.
27269 Notice in particular that any header line whose type is * is not transmitted
27270 with the message. This flagging is used for header lines that have been
27271 rewritten, or are to be removed (for example, &'Envelope-sender:'& header
27272 lines.) Effectively, * means &"deleted"&.
27274 .vitem &*int&~slen*&
27275 The number of characters in the header line, including the terminating and any
27278 .vitem &*uschar&~*text*&
27279 A pointer to the text of the header. It always ends with a newline, followed by
27280 a zero byte. Internal newlines are preserved.
27285 .section "Structure of recipient items"
27286 The &%recipient_item%& structure contains these members:
27289 .vitem &*uschar&~*address*&
27290 This is a pointer to the recipient address as it was received.
27292 .vitem &*int&~pno*&
27293 This is used in later Exim processing when top level addresses are created by
27294 the &%one_time%& option. It is not relevant at the time &[local_scan()]& is run
27295 and must always contain -1 at this stage.
27297 .vitem &*uschar&~*errors_to*&
27298 If this value is not NULL, bounce messages caused by failing to deliver to the
27299 recipient are sent to the address it contains. In other words, it overrides the
27300 envelope sender for this one recipient. (Compare the &%errors_to%& generic
27301 router option.) If a &[local_scan()]& function sets an &%errors_to%& field to
27302 an unqualified address, Exim qualifies it using the domain from
27303 &%qualify_recipient%&. When &[local_scan()]& is called, the &%errors_to%& field
27304 is NULL for all recipients.
27309 .section "Available Exim functions"
27310 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "available Exim functions"
27311 The header &_local_scan.h_& gives you access to a number of Exim functions.
27312 These are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained from release to
27316 .vitem "&*pid_t&~child_open(uschar&~**argv,&~uschar&~**envp,&~int&~newumask,&&&
27317 &~int&~*infdptr,&~int&~*outfdptr, &~&~BOOL&~make_leader)*&"
27319 This function creates a child process that runs the command specified by
27320 &%argv%&. The environment for the process is specified by &%envp%&, which can
27321 be NULL if no environment variables are to be passed. A new umask is supplied
27322 for the process in &%newumask%&.
27324 Pipes to the standard input and output of the new process are set up
27325 and returned to the caller via the &%infdptr%& and &%outfdptr%& arguments. The
27326 standard error is cloned to the standard output. If there are any file
27327 descriptors &"in the way"& in the new process, they are closed. If the final
27328 argument is TRUE, the new process is made into a process group leader.
27330 The function returns the pid of the new process, or -1 if things go wrong.
27332 .vitem &*int&~child_close(pid_t&~pid,&~int&~timeout)*&
27333 This function waits for a child process to terminate, or for a timeout (in
27334 seconds) to expire. A timeout value of zero means wait as long as it takes. The
27335 return value is as follows:
27340 The process terminated by a normal exit and the value is the process
27346 The process was terminated by a signal and the value is the negation of the
27352 The process timed out.
27356 The was some other error in wait(); &%errno%& is still set.
27359 .vitem &*pid_t&~child_open_exim(int&~*fd)*&
27360 This function provide you with a means of submitting a new message to
27361 Exim. (Of course, you can also call &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& yourself if you
27362 want, but this packages it all up for you.) The function creates a pipe,
27363 forks a subprocess that is running
27365 exim -t -oem -oi -f <>
27367 and returns to you (via the &`int *`& argument) a file descriptor for the pipe
27368 that is connected to the standard input. The yield of the function is the PID
27369 of the subprocess. You can then write a message to the file descriptor, with
27370 recipients in &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and/or &'Bcc:'& header lines.
27372 When you have finished, call &'child_close()'& to wait for the process to
27373 finish and to collect its ending status. A timeout value of zero is usually
27374 fine in this circumstance. Unless you have made a mistake with the recipient
27375 addresses, you should get a return code of zero.
27378 .vitem &*pid_t&~child_open_exim2(int&~*fd,&~uschar&~*sender,&~uschar&~&&&
27379 *sender_authentication)*&
27380 This function is a more sophisticated version of &'child_open()'&. The command
27383 &`exim -t -oem -oi -f `&&'sender'&&` -oMas `&&'sender_authentication'&
27385 The third argument may be NULL, in which case the &%-oMas%& option is omitted.
27388 .vitem &*void&~debug_printf(char&~*,&~...)*&
27389 This is Exim's debugging function, with arguments as for &'(printf()'&. The
27390 output is written to the standard error stream. If no debugging is selected,
27391 calls to &'debug_printf()'& have no effect. Normally, you should make calls
27392 conditional on the &`local_scan`& debug selector by coding like this:
27394 if ((debug_selector & D_local_scan) != 0)
27395 debug_printf("xxx", ...);
27398 .vitem &*uschar&~*expand_string(uschar&~*string)*&
27399 This is an interface to Exim's string expansion code. The return value is the
27400 expanded string, or NULL if there was an expansion failure.
27401 The C variable &%expand_string_message%& contains an error message after an
27402 expansion failure. If expansion does not change the string, the return value is
27403 the pointer to the input string. Otherwise, the return value points to a new
27404 block of memory that was obtained by a call to &'store_get()'&. See section
27405 &<<SECTmemhanloc>>& below for a discussion of memory handling.
27407 .vitem &*void&~header_add(int&~type,&~char&~*format,&~...)*&
27408 This function allows you to an add additional header line at the end of the
27409 existing ones. The first argument is the type, and should normally be a space
27410 character. The second argument is a format string and any number of
27411 substitution arguments as for &[sprintf()]&. You may include internal newlines
27412 if you want, and you must ensure that the string ends with a newline.
27414 .vitem "&*void&~header_add_at_position(BOOL&~after,&~uschar&~*name,&~&&&
27415 BOOL&~topnot,&~int&~type,&~char&~*format, &~&~...)*&"
27416 This function adds a new header line at a specified point in the header
27417 chain. The header itself is specified as for &'header_add()'&.
27419 If &%name%& is NULL, the new header is added at the end of the chain if
27420 &%after%& is true, or at the start if &%after%& is false. If &%name%& is not
27421 NULL, the header lines are searched for the first non-deleted header that
27422 matches the name. If one is found, the new header is added before it if
27423 &%after%& is false. If &%after%& is true, the new header is added after the
27424 found header and any adjacent subsequent ones with the same name (even if
27425 marked &"deleted"&). If no matching non-deleted header is found, the &%topnot%&
27426 option controls where the header is added. If it is true, addition is at the
27427 top; otherwise at the bottom. Thus, to add a header after all the &'Received:'&
27428 headers, or at the top if there are no &'Received:'& headers, you could use
27430 header_add_at_position(TRUE, US"Received", TRUE,
27431 ' ', "X-xxx: ...");
27433 Normally, there is always at least one non-deleted &'Received:'& header, but
27434 there may not be if &%received_header_text%& expands to an empty string.
27437 .vitem &*void&~header_remove(int&~occurrence,&~uschar&~*name)*&
27438 This function removes header lines. If &%occurrence%& is zero or negative, all
27439 occurrences of the header are removed. If occurrence is greater than zero, that
27440 particular instance of the header is removed. If no header(s) can be found that
27441 match the specification, the function does nothing.
27444 .vitem "&*BOOL&~header_testname(header_line&~*hdr,&~uschar&~*name,&~&&&
27445 int&~length,&~BOOL&~notdel)*&"
27446 This function tests whether the given header has the given name. It is not just
27447 a string comparison, because white space is permitted between the name and the
27448 colon. If the &%notdel%& argument is true, a false return is forced for all
27449 &"deleted"& headers; otherwise they are not treated specially. For example:
27451 if (header_testname(h, US"X-Spam", 6, TRUE)) ...
27453 .vitem &*uschar&~*lss_b64encode(uschar&~*cleartext,&~int&~length)*&
27454 .cindex "base64 encoding" "functions for &[local_scan()]& use"
27455 This function base64-encodes a string, which is passed by address and length.
27456 The text may contain bytes of any value, including zero. The result is passed
27457 back in dynamic memory that is obtained by calling &'store_get()'&. It is
27460 .vitem &*int&~lss_b64decode(uschar&~*codetext,&~uschar&~**cleartext)*&
27461 This function decodes a base64-encoded string. Its arguments are a
27462 zero-terminated base64-encoded string and the address of a variable that is set
27463 to point to the result, which is in dynamic memory. The length of the decoded
27464 string is the yield of the function. If the input is invalid base64 data, the
27465 yield is -1. A zero byte is added to the end of the output string to make it
27466 easy to interpret as a C string (assuming it contains no zeros of its own). The
27467 added zero byte is not included in the returned count.
27469 .vitem &*int&~lss_match_domain(uschar&~*domain,&~uschar&~*list)*&
27470 This function checks for a match in a domain list. Domains are always
27471 matched caselessly. The return value is one of the following:
27473 &`OK `& match succeeded
27474 &`FAIL `& match failed
27475 &`DEFER `& match deferred
27477 DEFER is usually caused by some kind of lookup defer, such as the
27478 inability to contact a database.
27480 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_local_part(uschar&~*localpart,&~uschar&~*list,&~&&&
27482 This function checks for a match in a local part list. The third argument
27483 controls case-sensitivity. The return values are as for
27484 &'lss_match_domain()'&.
27486 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_address(uschar&~*address,&~uschar&~*list,&~&&&
27488 This function checks for a match in an address list. The third argument
27489 controls the case-sensitivity of the local part match. The domain is always
27490 matched caselessly. The return values are as for &'lss_match_domain()'&.
27492 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_host(uschar&~*host_name,&~uschar&~*host_address,&~&&&
27494 This function checks for a match in a host list. The most common usage is
27497 lss_match_host(sender_host_name, sender_host_address, ...)
27499 .cindex "&$sender_host_address$&"
27500 An empty address field matches an empty item in the host list. If the host name
27501 is NULL, the name corresponding to &$sender_host_address$& is automatically
27502 looked up if a host name is required to match an item in the list. The return
27503 values are as for &'lss_match_domain()'&, but in addition, &'lss_match_host()'&
27504 returns ERROR in the case when it had to look up a host name, but the lookup
27507 .vitem "&*void&~log_write(unsigned&~int&~selector,&~int&~which,&~char&~&&&
27509 This function writes to Exim's log files. The first argument should be zero (it
27510 is concerned with &%log_selector%&). The second argument can be &`LOG_MAIN`& or
27511 &`LOG_REJECT`& or &`LOG_PANIC`& or the inclusive &"or"& of any combination of
27512 them. It specifies to which log or logs the message is written. The remaining
27513 arguments are a format and relevant insertion arguments. The string should not
27514 contain any newlines, not even at the end.
27517 .vitem &*void&~receive_add_recipient(uschar&~*address,&~int&~pno)*&
27518 This function adds an additional recipient to the message. The first argument
27519 is the recipient address. If it is unqualified (has no domain), it is qualified
27520 with the &%qualify_recipient%& domain. The second argument must always be -1.
27522 This function does not allow you to specify a private &%errors_to%& address (as
27523 described with the structure of &%recipient_item%& above), because it pre-dates
27524 the addition of that field to the structure. However, it is easy to add such a
27525 value afterwards. For example:
27527 receive_add_recipient(US"monitor@mydom.example", -1);
27528 recipients_list[recipients_count-1].errors_to =
27529 US"postmaster@mydom.example";
27532 .vitem &*BOOL&~receive_remove_recipient(uschar&~*recipient)*&
27533 This is a convenience function to remove a named recipient from the list of
27534 recipients. It returns true if a recipient was removed, and false if no
27535 matching recipient could be found. The argument must be a complete email
27542 .vitem "&*uschar&~rfc2047_decode(uschar&~*string,&~BOOL&~lencheck,&&&
27543 &~uschar&~*target,&~int&~zeroval,&~int&~*lenptr, &~&~uschar&~**error)*&"
27544 This function decodes strings that are encoded according to RFC 2047. Typically
27545 these are the contents of header lines. First, each &"encoded word"& is decoded
27546 from the Q or B encoding into a byte-string. Then, if provided with the name of
27547 a charset encoding, and if the &[iconv()]& function is available, an attempt is
27548 made to translate the result to the named character set. If this fails, the
27549 binary string is returned with an error message.
27551 The first argument is the string to be decoded. If &%lencheck%& is TRUE, the
27552 maximum MIME word length is enforced. The third argument is the target
27553 encoding, or NULL if no translation is wanted.
27555 .cindex "binary zero" "in RFC 2047 decoding"
27556 .cindex "RFC 2047" "binary zero in"
27557 If a binary zero is encountered in the decoded string, it is replaced by the
27558 contents of the &%zeroval%& argument. For use with Exim headers, the value must
27559 not be 0 because header lines are handled as zero-terminated strings.
27561 The function returns the result of processing the string, zero-terminated; if
27562 &%lenptr%& is not NULL, the length of the result is set in the variable to
27563 which it points. When &%zeroval%& is 0, &%lenptr%& should not be NULL.
27565 If an error is encountered, the function returns NULL and uses the &%error%&
27566 argument to return an error message. The variable pointed to by &%error%& is
27567 set to NULL if there is no error; it may be set non-NULL even when the function
27568 returns a non-NULL value if decoding was successful, but there was a problem
27572 .vitem &*int&~smtp_fflush(void)*&
27573 This function is used in conjunction with &'smtp_printf()'&, as described
27576 .vitem &*void&~smtp_printf(char&~*,&~...)*&
27577 The arguments of this function are like &[printf()]&; it writes to the SMTP
27578 output stream. You should use this function only when there is an SMTP output
27579 stream, that is, when the incoming message is being received via interactive
27580 SMTP. This is the case when &%smtp_input%& is TRUE and &%smtp_batched_input%&
27581 is FALSE. If you want to test for an incoming message from another host (as
27582 opposed to a local process that used the &%-bs%& command line option), you can
27583 test the value of &%sender_host_address%&, which is non-NULL when a remote host
27586 If an SMTP TLS connection is established, &'smtp_printf()'& uses the TLS
27587 output function, so it can be used for all forms of SMTP connection.
27589 Strings that are written by &'smtp_printf()'& from within &[local_scan()]&
27590 must start with an appropriate response code: 550 if you are going to return
27591 LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, 451 if you are going to return
27592 LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT, and 250 otherwise. Because you are writing the
27593 initial lines of a multi-line response, the code must be followed by a hyphen
27594 to indicate that the line is not the final response line. You must also ensure
27595 that the lines you write terminate with CRLF. For example:
27597 smtp_printf("550-this is some extra info\r\n");
27598 return LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT;
27600 Note that you can also create multi-line responses by including newlines in
27601 the data returned via the &%return_text%& argument. The added value of using
27602 &'smtp_printf()'& is that, for instance, you could introduce delays between
27603 multiple output lines.
27605 The &'smtp_printf()'& function does not return any error indication, because it
27606 does not automatically flush pending output, and therefore does not test
27607 the state of the stream. (In the main code of Exim, flushing and error
27608 detection is done when Exim is ready for the next SMTP input command.) If
27609 you want to flush the output and check for an error (for example, the
27610 dropping of a TCP/IP connection), you can call &'smtp_fflush()'&, which has no
27611 arguments. It flushes the output stream, and returns a non-zero value if there
27614 .vitem &*void&~*store_get(int)*&
27615 This function accesses Exim's internal store (memory) manager. It gets a new
27616 chunk of memory whose size is given by the argument. Exim bombs out if it ever
27617 runs out of memory. See the next section for a discussion of memory handling.
27619 .vitem &*void&~*store_get_perm(int)*&
27620 This function is like &'store_get()'&, but it always gets memory from the
27621 permanent pool. See the next section for a discussion of memory handling.
27623 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_copy(uschar&~*string)*&
27626 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_copyn(uschar&~*string,&~int&~length)*&
27629 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_sprintf(char&~*format,&~...)*&
27630 These three functions create strings using Exim's dynamic memory facilities.
27631 The first makes a copy of an entire string. The second copies up to a maximum
27632 number of characters, indicated by the second argument. The third uses a format
27633 and insertion arguments to create a new string. In each case, the result is a
27634 pointer to a new string in the current memory pool. See the next section for
27640 .section "More about Exim's memory handling" "SECTmemhanloc"
27641 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "memory handling"
27642 No function is provided for freeing memory, because that is never needed.
27643 The dynamic memory that Exim uses when receiving a message is automatically
27644 recycled if another message is received by the same process (this applies only
27645 to incoming SMTP connections &-- other input methods can supply only one
27646 message at a time). After receiving the last message, a reception process
27649 Because it is recycled, the normal dynamic memory cannot be used for holding
27650 data that must be preserved over a number of incoming messages on the same SMTP
27651 connection. However, Exim in fact uses two pools of dynamic memory; the second
27652 one is not recycled, and can be used for this purpose.
27654 If you want to allocate memory that remains available for subsequent messages
27655 in the same SMTP connection, you should set
27657 store_pool = POOL_PERM
27659 before calling the function that does the allocation. There is no need to
27660 restore the value if you do not need to; however, if you do want to revert to
27661 the normal pool, you can either restore the previous value of &%store_pool%& or
27662 set it explicitly to POOL_MAIN.
27664 The pool setting applies to all functions that get dynamic memory, including
27665 &'expand_string()'&, &'store_get()'&, and the &'string_xxx()'& functions.
27666 There is also a convenience function called &'store_get_perm()'& that gets a
27667 block of memory from the permanent pool while preserving the value of
27674 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27675 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27677 .chapter "System-wide message filtering" "CHAPsystemfilter"
27678 .scindex IIDsysfil1 "filter" "system filter"
27679 .scindex IIDsysfil2 "filtering all mail"
27680 .scindex IIDsysfil3 "system filter"
27681 The previous chapters (on ACLs and the local scan function) describe checks
27682 that can be applied to messages before they are accepted by a host. There is
27683 also a mechanism for checking messages once they have been received, but before
27684 they are delivered. This is called the &'system filter'&.
27686 The system filter operates in a similar manner to users' filter files, but it
27687 is run just once per message (however many recipients the message has).
27688 It should not normally be used as a substitute for routing, because &%deliver%&
27689 commands in a system router provide new envelope recipient addresses.
27690 The system filter must be an Exim filter. It cannot be a Sieve filter.
27692 The system filter is run at the start of a delivery attempt, before any routing
27693 is done. If a message fails to be completely delivered at the first attempt,
27694 the system filter is run again at the start of every retry.
27695 If you want your filter to do something only once per message, you can make use
27696 of the &%first_delivery%& condition in an &%if%& command in the filter to
27697 prevent it happening on retries.
27699 .cindex "&$domain$&"
27700 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
27701 &*Warning*&: Because the system filter runs just once, variables that are
27702 specific to individual recipient addresses, such as &$local_part$& and
27703 &$domain$&, are not set, and the &"personal"& condition is not meaningful. If
27704 you want to run a centrally-specified filter for each recipient address
27705 independently, you can do so by setting up a suitable &(redirect)& router, as
27706 described in section &<<SECTperaddfil>>& below.
27709 .section "Specifying a system filter"
27710 .cindex "uid (user id)" "system filter"
27711 .cindex "gid (group id)" "system filter"
27712 The name of the file that contains the system filter must be specified by
27713 setting &%system_filter%&. If you want the filter to run under a uid and gid
27714 other than root, you must also set &%system_filter_user%& and
27715 &%system_filter_group%& as appropriate. For example:
27717 system_filter = /etc/mail/exim.filter
27718 system_filter_user = exim
27720 If a system filter generates any deliveries directly to files or pipes (via the
27721 &%save%& or &%pipe%& commands), transports to handle these deliveries must be
27722 specified by setting &%system_filter_file_transport%& and
27723 &%system_filter_pipe_transport%&, respectively. Similarly,
27724 &%system_filter_reply_transport%& must be set to handle any messages generated
27725 by the &%reply%& command.
27728 .section "Testing a system filter"
27729 You can run simple tests of a system filter in the same way as for a user
27730 filter, but you should use &%-bF%& rather than &%-bf%&, so that features that
27731 are permitted only in system filters are recognized.
27733 If you want to test the combined effect of a system filter and a user filter,
27734 you can use both &%-bF%& and &%-bf%& on the same command line.
27738 .section "Contents of a system filter"
27739 The language used to specify system filters is the same as for users' filter
27740 files. It is described in the separate end-user document &'Exim's interface to
27741 mail filtering'&. However, there are some additional features that are
27742 available only in system filters; these are described in subsequent sections.
27743 If they are encountered in a user's filter file or when testing with &%-bf%&,
27746 .cindex "frozen messages" "manual thaw; testing in filter"
27747 There are two special conditions which, though available in users' filter
27748 files, are designed for use in system filters. The condition &%first_delivery%&
27749 is true only for the first attempt at delivering a message, and
27750 &%manually_thawed%& is true only if the message has been frozen, and
27751 subsequently thawed by an admin user. An explicit forced delivery counts as a
27752 manual thaw, but thawing as a result of the &%auto_thaw%& setting does not.
27754 &*Warning*&: If a system filter uses the &%first_delivery%& condition to
27755 specify an &"unseen"& (non-significant) delivery, and that delivery does not
27756 succeed, it will not be tried again.
27757 If you want Exim to retry an unseen delivery until it succeeds, you should
27758 arrange to set it up every time the filter runs.
27760 When a system filter finishes running, the values of the variables &$n0$& &--
27761 &$n9$& are copied into &$sn0$& &-- &$sn9$& and are thereby made available to
27762 users' filter files. Thus a system filter can, for example, set up &"scores"&
27763 to which users' filter files can refer.
27767 .section "Additional variable for system filters"
27768 .cindex "&$recipients$&"
27769 The expansion variable &$recipients$&, containing a list of all the recipients
27770 of the message (separated by commas and white space), is available in system
27771 filters. It is not available in users' filters for privacy reasons.
27775 .section "Defer, freeze, and fail commands for system filters"
27776 .cindex "freezing messages"
27777 .cindex "message" "freezing"
27778 .cindex "message" "forced failure"
27779 .cindex "&%fail%&" "in system filter"
27780 .cindex "&%freeze%& in system filter"
27781 .cindex "&%defer%& in system filter"
27782 There are three extra commands (&%defer%&, &%freeze%& and &%fail%&) which are
27783 always available in system filters, but are not normally enabled in users'
27784 filters. (See the &%allow_defer%&, &%allow_freeze%& and &%allow_fail%& options
27785 for the &(redirect)& router.) These commands can optionally be followed by the
27786 word &%text%& and a string containing an error message, for example:
27788 fail text "this message looks like spam to me"
27790 The keyword &%text%& is optional if the next character is a double quote.
27792 The &%defer%& command defers delivery of the original recipients of the
27793 message. The &%fail%& command causes all the original recipients to be failed,
27794 and a bounce message to be created. The &%freeze%& command suspends all
27795 delivery attempts for the original recipients. In all cases, any new deliveries
27796 that are specified by the filter are attempted as normal after the filter has
27799 The &%freeze%& command is ignored if the message has been manually unfrozen and
27800 not manually frozen since. This means that automatic freezing by a system
27801 filter can be used as a way of checking out suspicious messages. If a message
27802 is found to be all right, manually unfreezing it allows it to be delivered.
27804 .cindex "log" "&%fail%& command log line"
27805 .cindex "&%fail%&" "log line; reducing"
27806 The text given with a fail command is used as part of the bounce message as
27807 well as being written to the log. If the message is quite long, this can fill
27808 up a lot of log space when such failures are common. To reduce the size of the
27809 log message, Exim interprets the text in a special way if it starts with the
27810 two characters &`<<`& and contains &`>>`& later. The text between these two
27811 strings is written to the log, and the rest of the text is used in the bounce
27812 message. For example:
27814 fail "<<filter test 1>>Your message is rejected \
27815 because it contains attachments that we are \
27816 not prepared to receive."
27819 .cindex "loop" "caused by &%fail%&"
27820 Take great care with the &%fail%& command when basing the decision to fail on
27821 the contents of the message, because the bounce message will of course include
27822 the contents of the original message and will therefore trigger the &%fail%&
27823 command again (causing a mail loop) unless steps are taken to prevent this.
27824 Testing the &%error_message%& condition is one way to prevent this. You could
27827 if $message_body contains "this is spam" and not error_message
27828 then fail text "spam is not wanted here" endif
27830 though of course that might let through unwanted bounce messages. The
27831 alternative is clever checking of the body and/or headers to detect bounces
27832 generated by the filter.
27834 The interpretation of a system filter file ceases after a
27836 &%freeze%&, or &%fail%& command is obeyed. However, any deliveries that were
27837 set up earlier in the filter file are honoured, so you can use a sequence such
27843 to send a specified message when the system filter is freezing (or deferring or
27844 failing) a message. The normal deliveries for the message do not, of course,
27849 .section "Adding and removing headers in a system filter" "SECTaddremheasys"
27850 .cindex "header lines" "adding; in system filter"
27851 .cindex "header lines" "removing; in system filter"
27852 .cindex "filter" "header lines; adding/removing"
27853 Two filter commands that are available only in system filters are:
27855 headers add <string>
27856 headers remove <string>
27858 The argument for the &%headers add%& is a string that is expanded and then
27859 added to the end of the message's headers. It is the responsibility of the
27860 filter maintainer to make sure it conforms to RFC 2822 syntax. Leading white
27861 space is ignored, and if the string is otherwise empty, or if the expansion is
27862 forced to fail, the command has no effect.
27864 You can use &"\n"& within the string, followed by white space, to specify
27865 continued header lines. More than one header may be added in one command by
27866 including &"\n"& within the string without any following white space. For
27869 headers add "X-header-1: ....\n \
27870 continuation of X-header-1 ...\n\
27873 Note that the header line continuation white space after the first newline must
27874 be placed before the backslash that continues the input string, because white
27875 space after input continuations is ignored.
27877 The argument for &%headers remove%& is a colon-separated list of header names.
27878 This command applies only to those headers that are stored with the message;
27879 those that are added at delivery time (such as &'Envelope-To:'& and
27880 &'Return-Path:'&) cannot be removed by this means. If there is more than one
27881 header with the same name, they are all removed.
27883 The &%headers%& command in a system filter makes an immediate change to the set
27884 of header lines that was received with the message (with possible additions
27885 from ACL processing). Subsequent commands in the system filter operate on the
27886 modified set, which also forms the basis for subsequent message delivery.
27887 Unless further modified during routing or transporting, this set of headers is
27888 used for all recipients of the message.
27890 During routing and transporting, the variables that refer to the contents of
27891 header lines refer only to those lines that are in this set. Thus, header lines
27892 that are added by a system filter are visible to users' filter files and to all
27893 routers and transports. This contrasts with the manipulation of header lines by
27894 routers and transports, which is not immediate, but which instead is saved up
27895 until the message is actually being written (see section
27896 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&).
27898 If the message is not delivered at the first attempt, header lines that were
27899 added by the system filter are stored with the message, and so are still
27900 present at the next delivery attempt. Header lines that were removed are still
27901 present, but marked &"deleted"& so that they are not transported with the
27902 message. For this reason, it is usual to make the &%headers%& command
27903 conditional on &%first_delivery%& so that the set of header lines is not
27904 modified more than once.
27906 Because header modification in a system filter acts immediately, you have to
27907 use an indirect approach if you want to modify the contents of a header line.
27910 headers add "Old-Subject: $h_subject:"
27911 headers remove "Subject"
27912 headers add "Subject: new subject (was: $h_old-subject:)"
27913 headers remove "Old-Subject"
27918 .section "Setting an errors address in a system filter"
27919 .cindex "envelope sender"
27920 In a system filter, if a &%deliver%& command is followed by
27922 errors_to <some address>
27924 in order to change the envelope sender (and hence the error reporting) for that
27925 delivery, any address may be specified. (In a user filter, only the current
27926 user's address can be set.) For example, if some mail is being monitored, you
27929 unseen deliver monitor@spying.example errors_to root@local.example
27931 to take a copy which would not be sent back to the normal error reporting
27932 address if its delivery failed.
27936 .section "Per-address filtering" "SECTperaddfil"
27937 .cindex "&$domain$&"
27938 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
27939 In contrast to the system filter, which is run just once per message for each
27940 delivery attempt, it is also possible to set up a system-wide filtering
27941 operation that runs once for each recipient address. In this case, variables
27942 such as &$local_part$& and &$domain$& can be used, and indeed, the choice of
27943 filter file could be made dependent on them. This is an example of a router
27944 which implements such a filter:
27949 domains = +local_domains
27950 file = /central/filters/$local_part
27955 The filter is run in a separate process under its own uid. Therefore, either
27956 &%check_local_user%& must be set (as above), in which case the filter is run as
27957 the local user, or the &%user%& option must be used to specify which user to
27958 use. If both are set, &%user%& overrides.
27960 Care should be taken to ensure that none of the commands in the filter file
27961 specify a significant delivery if the message is to go on to be delivered to
27962 its intended recipient. The router will not then claim to have dealt with the
27963 address, so it will be passed on to subsequent routers to be delivered in the
27965 .ecindex IIDsysfil1
27966 .ecindex IIDsysfil2
27967 .ecindex IIDsysfil3
27974 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27975 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27977 .chapter "Message processing" "CHAPmsgproc"
27978 .scindex IIDmesproc "message" "general processing"
27979 Exim performs various transformations on the sender and recipient addresses of
27980 all messages that it handles, and also on the messages' header lines. Some of
27981 these are optional and configurable, while others always take place. All of
27982 this processing, except rewriting as a result of routing, and the addition or
27983 removal of header lines while delivering, happens when a message is received,
27984 before it is placed on Exim's queue.
27986 Some of the automatic processing takes place by default only for
27987 &"locally-originated"& messages. This adjective is used to describe messages
27988 that are not received over TCP/IP, but instead are passed to an Exim process on
27989 its standard input. This includes the interactive &"local SMTP"& case that is
27990 set up by the &%-bs%& command line option.
27992 &*Note*&: Messages received over TCP/IP on the loopback interface (127.0.0.1
27993 or ::1) are not considered to be locally-originated. Exim does not treat the
27994 loopback interface specially in any way.
27996 If you want the loopback interface to be treated specially, you must ensure
27997 that there are appropriate entries in your ACLs.
28002 .section "Submission mode for non-local messages" "SECTsubmodnon"
28003 .cindex "message" "submission"
28004 .cindex "submission mode"
28005 Processing that happens automatically for locally-originated messages (unless
28006 &%suppress_local_fixups%& is set) can also be requested for messages that are
28007 received over TCP/IP. The term &"submission mode"& is used to describe this
28008 state. Submisssion mode is set by the modifier
28010 control = submission
28012 in a MAIL, RCPT, or pre-data ACL for an incoming message (see sections
28013 &<<SECTACLmodi>>& and &<<SECTcontrols>>&). This makes Exim treat the message as
28014 a local submission, and is normally used when the source of the message is
28015 known to be an MUA running on a client host (as opposed to an MTA). For
28016 example, to set submission mode for messages originating on the IPv4 loopback
28017 interface, you could include the following in the MAIL ACL:
28019 warn hosts = 127.0.0.1
28020 control = submission
28022 .cindex "&%sender_retain%&"
28023 There are some options that can be used when setting submission mode. A slash
28024 is used to separate options. For example:
28026 control = submission/sender_retain
28028 Specifying &%sender_retain%& has the effect of setting &%local_sender_retain%&
28029 true and &%local_from_check%& false for the current incoming message. The first
28030 of these allows an existing &'Sender:'& header in the message to remain, and
28031 the second suppresses the check to ensure that &'From:'& matches the
28032 authenticated sender. With this setting, Exim still fixes up messages by adding
28033 &'Date:'& and &'Message-ID:'& header lines if they are missing, but makes no
28034 attempt to check sender authenticity in header lines.
28036 When &%sender_retain%& is not set, a submission mode setting may specify a
28037 domain to be used when generating a &'From:'& or &'Sender:'& header line. For
28040 control = submission/domain=some.domain
28042 The domain may be empty. How this value is used is described in sections
28043 &<<SECTthefrohea>>& and &<<SECTthesenhea>>&. There is also a &%name%& option
28044 that allows you to specify the user's full name for inclusion in a created
28045 &'Sender:'& or &'From:'& header line. For example:
28047 accept authenticated = *
28048 control = submission/domain=wonderland.example/\
28049 name=${lookup {$authenticated_id} \
28050 lsearch {/etc/exim/namelist}}
28052 Because the name may contain any characters, including slashes, the &%name%&
28053 option must be given last. The remainder of the string is used as the name. For
28054 the example above, if &_/etc/exim/namelist_& contains:
28056 bigegg: Humpty Dumpty
28058 then when the sender has authenticated as &'bigegg'&, the generated &'Sender:'&
28061 Sender: Humpty Dumpty <bigegg@wonderland.example>
28063 .cindex "return path" "in submission mode"
28064 By default, submission mode forces the return path to the same address as is
28065 used to create the &'Sender:'& header. However, if &%sender_retain%& is
28066 specified, the return path is also left unchanged.
28068 &*Note*&: The changes caused by submission mode take effect after the predata
28069 ACL. This means that any sender checks performed before the fix-ups use the
28070 untrusted sender address specified by the user, not the trusted sender address
28071 specified by submission mode. Although this might be slightly unexpected, it
28072 does mean that you can configure ACL checks to spot that a user is trying to
28073 spoof another's address.
28075 .section "Line endings" "SECTlineendings"
28076 .cindex "line endings"
28077 .cindex "carriage return"
28079 RFC 2821 specifies that CRLF (two characters: carriage-return, followed by
28080 linefeed) is the line ending for messages transmitted over the Internet using
28081 SMTP over TCP/IP. However, within individual operating systems, different
28082 conventions are used. For example, Unix-like systems use just LF, but others
28083 use CRLF or just CR.
28085 Exim was designed for Unix-like systems, and internally, it stores messages
28086 using the system's convention of a single LF as a line terminator. When
28087 receiving a message, all line endings are translated to this standard format.
28088 Originally, it was thought that programs that passed messages directly to an
28089 MTA within an operating system would use that system's convention. Experience
28090 has shown that this is not the case; for example, there are Unix applications
28091 that use CRLF in this circumstance. For this reason, and for compatibility with
28092 other MTAs, the way Exim handles line endings for all messages is now as
28096 LF not preceded by CR is treated as a line ending.
28098 CR is treated as a line ending; if it is immediately followed by LF, the LF
28101 The sequence &"CR, dot, CR"& does not terminate an incoming SMTP message,
28102 nor a local message in the state where a line containing only a dot is a
28105 If a bare CR is encountered within a header line, an extra space is added after
28106 the line terminator so as not to end the header line. The reasoning behind this
28107 is that bare CRs in header lines are most likely either to be mistakes, or
28108 people trying to play silly games.
28110 If the first header line received in a message ends with CRLF, a subsequent
28111 bare LF in a header line is treated in the same way as a bare CR in a header
28119 .section "Unqualified addresses"
28120 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
28121 .cindex "address" "qualification"
28122 By default, Exim expects every envelope address it receives from an external
28123 host to be fully qualified. Unqualified addresses cause negative responses to
28124 SMTP commands. However, because SMTP is used as a means of transporting
28125 messages from MUAs running on personal workstations, there is sometimes a
28126 requirement to accept unqualified addresses from specific hosts or IP networks.
28128 Exim has two options that separately control which hosts may send unqualified
28129 sender or receipient addresses in SMTP commands, namely
28130 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& and &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&. In both
28131 cases, if an unqualified address is accepted, it is qualified by adding the
28132 value of &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate.
28134 .cindex "&%qualify_domain%&"
28135 .cindex "&%qualify_recipient%&"
28136 Unqualified addresses in header lines are automatically qualified for messages
28137 that are locally originated, unless the &%-bnq%& option is given on the command
28138 line. For messages received over SMTP, unqualified addresses in header lines
28139 are qualified only if unqualified addresses are permitted in SMTP commands. In
28140 other words, such qualification is also controlled by
28141 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& and &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&,
28146 .section "The UUCP From line"
28147 .cindex "&""From""& line"
28148 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
28149 .cindex "sender" "address"
28150 .cindex "&%uucp_from_pattern%&"
28151 .cindex "&%uucp_from_sender%&"
28152 .cindex "envelope sender"
28153 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
28154 Messages that have come from UUCP (and some other applications) often begin
28155 with a line containing the envelope sender and a timestamp, following the word
28156 &"From"&. Examples of two common formats are:
28158 From a.oakley@berlin.mus Fri Jan 5 12:35 GMT 1996
28159 From f.butler@berlin.mus Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT
28161 This line precedes the RFC 2822 header lines. For compatibility with Sendmail,
28162 Exim recognizes such lines at the start of messages that are submitted to it
28163 via the command line (that is, on the standard input). It does not recognize
28164 such lines in incoming SMTP messages, unless the sending host matches
28165 &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& or the &%-bs%& option was used for a local message
28166 and &%ignore_fromline_local%& is set. The recognition is controlled by a
28167 regular expression that is defined by the &%uucp_from_pattern%& option, whose
28168 default value matches the two common cases shown above and puts the address
28169 that follows &"From"& into &$1$&.
28171 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &""From ""& line handling"
28172 When the caller of Exim for a non-SMTP message that contains a &"From"& line is
28173 a trusted user, the message's sender address is constructed by expanding the
28174 contents of &%uucp_sender_address%&, whose default value is &"$1"&. This is
28175 then parsed as an RFC 2822 address. If there is no domain, the local part is
28176 qualified with &%qualify_domain%& unless it is the empty string. However, if
28177 the command line &%-f%& option is used, it overrides the &"From"& line.
28179 If the caller of Exim is not trusted, the &"From"& line is recognized, but the
28180 sender address is not changed. This is also the case for incoming SMTP messages
28181 that are permitted to contain &"From"& lines.
28183 Only one &"From"& line is recognized. If there is more than one, the second is
28184 treated as a data line that starts the body of the message, as it is not valid
28185 as a header line. This also happens if a &"From"& line is present in an
28186 incoming SMTP message from a source that is not permitted to send them.
28190 .section "Resent- header lines"
28191 .cindex "&%Resent-%& header lines"
28192 RFC 2822 makes provision for sets of header lines starting with the string
28193 &`Resent-`& to be added to a message when it is resent by the original
28194 recipient to somebody else. These headers are &'Resent-Date:'&,
28195 &'Resent-From:'&, &'Resent-Sender:'&, &'Resent-To:'&, &'Resent-Cc:'&,
28196 &'Resent-Bcc:'& and &'Resent-Message-ID:'&. The RFC says:
28199 &'Resent fields are strictly informational. They MUST NOT be used in the normal
28200 processing of replies or other such automatic actions on messages.'&
28203 This leaves things a bit vague as far as other processing actions such as
28204 address rewriting are concerned. Exim treats &%Resent-%& header lines as
28208 A &'Resent-From:'& line that just contains the login id of the submitting user
28209 is automatically rewritten in the same way as &'From:'& (see below).
28211 If there's a rewriting rule for a particular header line, it is also applied to
28212 &%Resent-%& header lines of the same type. For example, a rule that rewrites
28213 &'From:'& also rewrites &'Resent-From:'&.
28215 For local messages, if &'Sender:'& is removed on input, &'Resent-Sender:'& is
28218 For a locally-submitted message,
28219 if there are any &%Resent-%& header lines but no &'Resent-Date:'&,
28220 &'Resent-From:'&, or &'Resent-Message-Id:'&, they are added as necessary. It is
28221 the contents of &'Resent-Message-Id:'& (rather than &'Message-Id:'&) which are
28222 included in log lines in this case.
28224 The logic for adding &'Sender:'& is duplicated for &'Resent-Sender:'& when any
28225 &%Resent-%& header lines are present.
28231 .section "The Auto-Submitted: header line"
28232 Whenever Exim generates an autoreply, a bounce, or a delay warning message, it
28233 includes the header line:
28235 Auto-Submitted: auto-replied
28238 .section "The Bcc: header line"
28239 .cindex "&'Bcc:'& header line"
28240 If Exim is called with the &%-t%& option, to take recipient addresses from a
28241 message's header, it removes any &'Bcc:'& header line that may exist (after
28242 extracting its addresses). If &%-t%& is not present on the command line, any
28243 existing &'Bcc:'& is not removed.
28246 .section "The Date: header line"
28247 .cindex "&'Date:'& header line"
28248 If a locally-generated or submission-mode message has no &'Date:'& header line,
28249 Exim adds one, using the current date and time, unless the
28250 &%suppress_local_fixups%& control has been specified.
28252 .section "The Delivery-date: header line"
28253 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
28254 .cindex "&%delivery_date_remove%&"
28255 &'Delivery-date:'& header lines are not part of the standard RFC 2822 header
28256 set. Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages. (See
28257 the generic &%delivery_date_add%& transport option.) They should not be present
28258 in messages in transit. If the &%delivery_date_remove%& configuration option is
28259 set (the default), Exim removes &'Delivery-date:'& header lines from incoming
28263 .section "The Envelope-to: header line"
28264 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
28265 .cindex "&%envelope_to_remove%&"
28266 &'Envelope-to:'& header lines are not part of the standard RFC 2822 header set.
28267 Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages. (See the
28268 generic &%envelope_to_add%& transport option.) They should not be present in
28269 messages in transit. If the &%envelope_to_remove%& configuration option is set
28270 (the default), Exim removes &'Envelope-to:'& header lines from incoming
28274 .section "The From: header line" "SECTthefrohea"
28275 .cindex "&'From:'& header line"
28276 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
28277 .cindex "message" "submission"
28278 .cindex "submission mode"
28279 If a submission-mode message does not contain a &'From:'& header line, Exim
28280 adds one if either of the following conditions is true:
28283 The envelope sender address is not empty (that is, this is not a bounce
28284 message). The added header line copies the envelope sender address.
28286 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
28287 The SMTP session is authenticated and &$authenticated_id$& is not empty.
28289 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
28290 If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local part is
28291 &$authenticated_id$& and the domain is &$qualify_domain$&.
28293 If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control, the local
28294 part is &$authenticated_id$&, and the the domain is the specified domain.
28296 If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
28297 &$authenticated_id$& is assumed to be the complete address.
28301 A non-empty envelope sender takes precedence.
28303 If a locally-generated incoming message does not contain a &'From:'& header
28304 line, and the &%suppress_local_fixups%& control is not set, Exim adds one
28305 containing the sender's address. The calling user's login name and full name
28306 are used to construct the address, as described in section &<<SECTconstr>>&.
28307 They are obtained from the password data by calling &[getpwuid()]& (but see the
28308 &%unknown_login%& configuration option). The address is qualified with
28309 &%qualify_domain%&.
28311 For compatibility with Sendmail, if an incoming, non-SMTP message has a
28312 &'From:'& header line containing just the unqualified login name of the calling
28313 user, this is replaced by an address containing the user's login name and full
28314 name as described in section &<<SECTconstr>>&.
28317 .section "The Message-ID: header line"
28318 .cindex "&'Message-ID:'& header line"
28319 .cindex "message" "submission"
28320 .cindex "&%message_id_header_text%&"
28321 If a locally-generated or submission-mode incoming message does not contain a
28322 &'Message-ID:'& or &'Resent-Message-ID:'& header line, and the
28323 &%suppress_local_fixups%& control is not set, Exim adds a suitable header line
28324 to the message. If there are any &'Resent-:'& headers in the message, it
28325 creates &'Resent-Message-ID:'&. The id is constructed from Exim's internal
28326 message id, preceded by the letter E to ensure it starts with a letter, and
28327 followed by @ and the primary host name. Additional information can be included
28328 in this header line by setting the &%message_id_header_text%& and/or
28329 &%message_id_header_domain%& options.
28332 .section "The Received: header line"
28333 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line"
28334 A &'Received:'& header line is added at the start of every message. The
28335 contents are defined by the &%received_header_text%& configuration option, and
28336 Exim automatically adds a semicolon and a timestamp to the configured string.
28338 The &'Received:'& header is generated as soon as the message's header lines
28339 have been received. At this stage, the timestamp in the &'Received:'& header
28340 line is the time that the message started to be received. This is the value
28341 that is seen by the DATA ACL and by the &[local_scan()]& function.
28343 Once a message is accepted, the timestamp in the &'Received:'& header line is
28344 changed to the time of acceptance, which is (apart from a small delay while the
28345 -H spool file is written) the earliest time at which delivery could start.
28348 .section "The References: header line"
28349 .cindex "&'References:'& header line"
28350 Messages created by the &(autoreply)& transport include a &'References:'&
28351 header line. This is constructed according to the rules that are described in
28352 section 3.64 of RFC 2822 (which states that replies should contain such a
28353 header line), and section 3.14 of RFC 3834 (which states that automatic
28354 responses are not different in this respect). However, because some mail
28355 processing software does not cope well with very long header lines, no more
28356 than 12 message IDs are copied from the &'References:'& header line in the
28357 incoming message. If there are more than 12, the first one and then the final
28358 11 are copied, before adding the message ID of the incoming message.
28362 .section "The Return-path: header line"
28363 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line"
28364 .cindex "&%return_path_remove%&"
28365 &'Return-path:'& header lines are defined as something an MTA may insert when
28366 it does the final delivery of messages. (See the generic &%return_path_add%&
28367 transport option.) Therefore, they should not be present in messages in
28368 transit. If the &%return_path_remove%& configuration option is set (the
28369 default), Exim removes &'Return-path:'& header lines from incoming messages.
28373 .section "The Sender: header line" "SECTthesenhea"
28374 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line"
28375 .cindex "message" "submission"
28376 For a locally-originated message from an untrusted user, Exim may remove an
28377 existing &'Sender:'& header line, and it may add a new one. You can modify
28378 these actions by setting the &%local_sender_retain%& option true, the
28379 &%local_from_check%& option false, or by using the &%suppress_local_fixups%&
28382 When a local message is received from an untrusted user and
28383 &%local_from_check%& is true (the default), and the &%suppress_local_fixups%&
28384 control has not been set, a check is made to see if the address given in the
28385 &'From:'& header line is the correct (local) sender of the message. The address
28386 that is expected has the login name as the local part and the value of
28387 &%qualify_domain%& as the domain. Prefixes and suffixes for the local part can
28388 be permitted by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%&
28389 appropriately. If &'From:'& does not contain the correct sender, a &'Sender:'&
28390 line is added to the message.
28392 If you set &%local_from_check%& false, this checking does not occur. However,
28393 the removal of an existing &'Sender:'& line still happens, unless you also set
28394 &%local_sender_retain%& to be true. It is not possible to set both of these
28395 options true at the same time.
28397 .cindex "submission mode"
28398 By default, no processing of &'Sender:'& header lines is done for messages
28399 received over TCP/IP or for messages submitted by trusted users. However, when
28400 a message is received over TCP/IP in submission mode, and &%sender_retain%& is
28401 not specified on the submission control, the following processing takes place:
28403 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
28404 First, any existing &'Sender:'& lines are removed. Then, if the SMTP session is
28405 authenticated, and &$authenticated_id$& is not empty, a sender address is
28406 created as follows:
28409 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
28410 If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local part is
28411 &$authenticated_id$& and the domain is &$qualify_domain$&.
28413 If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control, the local part
28414 is &$authenticated_id$&, and the the domain is the specified domain.
28416 If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
28417 &$authenticated_id$& is assumed to be the complete address.
28420 This address is compared with the address in the &'From:'& header line. If they
28421 are different, a &'Sender:'& header line containing the created address is
28422 added. Prefixes and suffixes for the local part in &'From:'& can be permitted
28423 by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%& appropriately.
28425 .cindex "return path" "created from &'Sender:'&"
28426 &*Note*&: Whenever a &'Sender:'& header line is created, the return path for
28427 the message (the envelope sender address) is changed to be the same address,
28428 except in the case of submission mode when &%sender_retain%& is specified.
28432 .section "Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports" &&&
28433 "SECTheadersaddrem"
28434 .cindex "header lines" "adding; in router or transport"
28435 .cindex "header lines" "removing; in router or transport"
28436 When a message is delivered, the addition and removal of header lines can be
28437 specified in a system filter, or on any of the routers and transports that
28438 process the message. Section &<<SECTaddremheasys>>& contains details about
28439 modifying headers in a system filter. Header lines can also be added in an ACL
28440 as a message is received (see section &<<SECTaddheadacl>>&).
28442 In contrast to what happens in a system filter, header modifications that are
28443 specified on routers and transports apply only to the particular recipient
28444 addresses that are being processed by those routers and transports. These
28445 changes do not actually take place until a copy of the message is being
28446 transported. Therefore, they do not affect the basic set of header lines, and
28447 they do not affect the values of the variables that refer to header lines.
28449 &*Note*&: In particular, this means that any expansions in the configuration of
28450 the transport cannot refer to the modified header lines, because such
28451 expansions all occur before the message is actually transported.
28453 For both routers and transports, the result of expanding a &%headers_add%&
28454 option must be in the form of one or more RFC 2822 header lines, separated by
28455 newlines (coded as &"\n"&). For example:
28457 headers_add = X-added-header: added by $primary_hostname\n\
28458 X-added-second: another added header line
28460 Exim does not check the syntax of these added header lines.
28462 The result of expanding &%headers_remove%& must consist of a colon-separated
28463 list of header names. This is confusing, because header names themselves are
28464 often terminated by colons. In this case, the colons are the list separators,
28465 not part of the names. For example:
28467 headers_remove = return-receipt-to:acknowledge-to
28469 When &%headers_add%& or &%headers_remove%& is specified on a router, its value
28470 is expanded at routing time, and then associated with all addresses that are
28471 accepted by that router, and also with any new addresses that it generates. If
28472 an address passes through several routers as a result of aliasing or
28473 forwarding, the changes are cumulative.
28475 .cindex "&%unseen%& option"
28476 However, this does not apply to multiple routers that result from the use of
28477 the &%unseen%& option. Any header modifications that were specified by the
28478 &"unseen"& router or its predecessors apply only to the &"unseen"& delivery.
28480 Addresses that end up with different &%headers_add%& or &%headers_remove%&
28481 settings cannot be delivered together in a batch, so a transport is always
28482 dealing with a set of addresses that have the same header-processing
28485 The transport starts by writing the original set of header lines that arrived
28486 with the message, possibly modified by the system filter. As it writes out
28487 these lines, it consults the list of header names that were attached to the
28488 recipient address(es) by &%headers_remove%& options in routers, and it also
28489 consults the transport's own &%headers_remove%& option. Header lines whose
28490 names are on either of these lists are not written out. If there are multiple
28491 instances of any listed header, they are all skipped.
28493 After the remaining original header lines have been written, new header
28494 lines that were specified by routers' &%headers_add%& options are written, in
28495 the order in which they were attached to the address. These are followed by any
28496 header lines specified by the transport's &%headers_add%& option.
28498 This way of handling header line modifications in routers and transports has
28499 the following consequences:
28502 The original set of header lines, possibly modified by the system filter,
28503 remains &"visible"&, in the sense that the &$header_$&&'xxx'& variables refer
28504 to it, at all times.
28506 Header lines that are added by a router's
28507 &%headers_add%& option are not accessible by means of the &$header_$&&'xxx'&
28508 expansion syntax in subsequent routers or the transport.
28510 Conversely, header lines that are specified for removal by &%headers_remove%&
28511 in a router remain visible to subsequent routers and the transport.
28513 Headers added to an address by &%headers_add%& in a router cannot be removed by
28514 a later router or by a transport.
28516 An added header can refer to the contents of an original header that is to be
28517 removed, even it has the same name as the added header. For example:
28519 headers_remove = subject
28520 headers_add = Subject: new subject (was: $h_subject:)
28524 &*Warning*&: The &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& options cannot be used
28525 for a &(redirect)& router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
28531 .section "Constructed addresses" "SECTconstr"
28532 .cindex "address" "constructed"
28533 .cindex "constructed address"
28534 When Exim constructs a sender address for a locally-generated message, it uses
28537 <&'user name'&>&~&~<&'login'&&`@`&&'qualify_domain'&>
28541 Zaphod Beeblebrox <zaphod@end.univ.example>
28543 The user name is obtained from the &%-F%& command line option if set, or
28544 otherwise by looking up the calling user by &[getpwuid()]& and extracting the
28545 &"gecos"& field from the password entry. If the &"gecos"& field contains an
28546 ampersand character, this is replaced by the login name with the first letter
28547 upper cased, as is conventional in a number of operating systems. See the
28548 &%gecos_name%& option for a way to tailor the handling of the &"gecos"& field.
28549 The &%unknown_username%& option can be used to specify user names in cases when
28550 there is no password file entry.
28553 In all cases, the user name is made to conform to RFC 2822 by quoting all or
28554 parts of it if necessary. In addition, if it contains any non-printing
28555 characters, it is encoded as described in RFC 2047, which defines a way of
28556 including non-ASCII characters in header lines. The value of the
28557 &%headers_charset%& option specifies the name of the encoding that is used (the
28558 characters are assumed to be in this encoding). The setting of
28559 &%print_topbitchars%& controls whether characters with the top bit set (that
28560 is, with codes greater than 127) count as printing characters or not.
28564 .section "Case of local parts"
28565 .cindex "case of local parts"
28566 .cindex "local part" "case of"
28567 RFC 2822 states that the case of letters in the local parts of addresses cannot
28568 be assumed to be non-significant. Exim preserves the case of local parts of
28569 addresses, but by default it uses a lower-cased form when it is routing,
28570 because on most Unix systems, usernames are in lower case and case-insensitive
28571 routing is required. However, any particular router can be made to use the
28572 original case for local parts by setting the &%caseful_local_part%& generic
28575 .cindex "mixed-case login names"
28576 If you must have mixed-case user names on your system, the best way to proceed,
28577 assuming you want case-independent handling of incoming email, is to set up
28578 your first router to convert incoming local parts in your domains to the
28579 correct case by means of a file lookup. For example:
28583 domains = +local_domains
28584 data = ${lookup{$local_part}cdb\
28585 {/etc/usercased.cdb}{$value}fail}\
28588 For this router, the local part is forced to lower case by the default action
28589 (&%caseful_local_part%& is not set). The lower-cased local part is used to look
28590 up a new local part in the correct case. If you then set &%caseful_local_part%&
28591 on any subsequent routers which process your domains, they will operate on
28592 local parts with the correct case in a case-sensitive manner.
28596 .section "Dots in local parts"
28597 .cindex "dot" "in local part"
28598 .cindex "local part" "dots in"
28599 RFC 2822 forbids empty components in local parts. That is, an unquoted local
28600 part may not begin or end with a dot, nor have two consecutive dots in the
28601 middle. However, it seems that many MTAs do not enforce this, so Exim permits
28602 empty components for compatibility.
28606 .section "Rewriting addresses"
28607 .cindex "rewriting" "addresses"
28608 Rewriting of sender and recipient addresses, and addresses in headers, can
28609 happen automatically, or as the result of configuration options, as described
28610 in chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&. The headers that may be affected by this are
28611 &'Bcc:'&, &'Cc:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, &'Sender:'&, and &'To:'&.
28613 Automatic rewriting includes qualification, as mentioned above. The other case
28614 in which it can happen is when an incomplete non-local domain is given. The
28615 routing process may cause this to be expanded into the full domain name. For
28616 example, a header such as
28620 might get rewritten as
28622 To: hare@teaparty.wonderland.fict.example
28624 Rewriting as a result of routing is the one kind of message processing that
28625 does not happen at input time, as it cannot be done until the address has
28628 Strictly, one should not do &'any'& deliveries of a message until all its
28629 addresses have been routed, in case any of the headers get changed as a
28630 result of routing. However, doing this in practice would hold up many
28631 deliveries for unreasonable amounts of time, just because one address could not
28632 immediately be routed. Exim therefore does not delay other deliveries when
28633 routing of one or more addresses is deferred.
28634 .ecindex IIDmesproc
28638 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28639 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28641 .chapter "SMTP processing" "CHAPSMTP"
28642 .scindex IIDsmtpproc1 "SMTP" "processing details"
28643 .scindex IIDsmtpproc2 "LMTP" "processing details"
28644 Exim supports a number of different ways of using the SMTP protocol, and its
28645 LMTP variant, which is an interactive protocol for transferring messages into a
28646 closed mail store application. This chapter contains details of how SMTP is
28647 processed. For incoming mail, the following are available:
28650 SMTP over TCP/IP (Exim daemon or &'inetd'&);
28652 SMTP over the standard input and output (the &%-bs%& option);
28654 Batched SMTP on the standard input (the &%-bS%& option).
28657 For mail delivery, the following are available:
28660 SMTP over TCP/IP (the &(smtp)& transport);
28662 LMTP over TCP/IP (the &(smtp)& transport with the &%protocol%& option set to
28665 LMTP over a pipe to a process running in the local host (the &(lmtp)&
28668 Batched SMTP to a file or pipe (the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports with
28669 the &%use_bsmtp%& option set).
28672 &'Batched SMTP'& is the name for a process in which batches of messages are
28673 stored in or read from files (or pipes), in a format in which SMTP commands are
28674 used to contain the envelope information.
28678 .section "Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP" "SECToutSMTPTCP"
28679 .cindex "SMTP" "outgoing over TCP/IP"
28680 .cindex "outgoing SMTP over TCP/IP"
28681 .cindex "LMTP" "over TCP/IP"
28682 .cindex "outgoing LMTP over TCP/IP"
28685 .cindex "SIZE option on MAIL command"
28686 Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP is implemented by the &(smtp)& transport.
28687 The &%protocol%& option selects which protocol is to be used, but the actual
28688 processing is the same in both cases.
28690 If, in response to its EHLO command, Exim is told that the SIZE
28691 parameter is supported, it adds SIZE=<&'n'&> to each subsequent MAIL
28692 command. The value of <&'n'&> is the message size plus the value of the
28693 &%size_addition%& option (default 1024) to allow for additions to the message
28694 such as per-transport header lines, or changes made in a
28695 .cindex "transport" "filter"
28696 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
28697 transport filter. If &%size_addition%& is set negative, the use of SIZE is
28700 If the remote server advertises support for PIPELINING, Exim uses the
28701 pipelining extension to SMTP (RFC 2197) to reduce the number of TCP/IP packets
28702 required for the transaction.
28704 If the remote server advertises support for the STARTTLS command, and Exim
28705 was built to support TLS encryption, it tries to start a TLS session unless the
28706 server matches &%hosts_avoid_tls%&. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for more details.
28708 If the remote server advertises support for the AUTH command, Exim scans
28709 the authenticators configuration for any suitable client settings, as described
28710 in chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&.
28712 .cindex "carriage return"
28714 Responses from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR followed by
28715 LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR characters, so in
28716 order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim treats LF on its own as a
28719 If a message contains a number of different addresses, all those with the same
28720 characteristics (for example, the same envelope sender) that resolve to the
28721 same set of hosts, in the same order, are sent in a single SMTP transaction,
28722 even if they are for different domains, unless there are more than the setting
28723 of the &%max_rcpts%& option in the &(smtp)& transport allows, in which case
28724 they are split into groups containing no more than &%max_rcpts%& addresses
28725 each. If &%remote_max_parallel%& is greater than one, such groups may be sent
28726 in parallel sessions. The order of hosts with identical MX values is not
28727 significant when checking whether addresses can be batched in this way.
28729 When the &(smtp)& transport suffers a temporary failure that is not
28730 message-related, Exim updates its transport-specific database, which contains
28731 records indexed by host name that remember which messages are waiting for each
28732 particular host. It also updates the retry database with new retry times.
28734 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
28735 Exim's retry hints are based on host name plus IP address, so if one address of
28736 a multi-homed host is broken, it will soon be skipped most of the time.
28737 See the next section for more detail about error handling.
28739 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
28740 .cindex "SMTP" "batching over TCP/IP"
28741 When a message is successfully delivered over a TCP/IP SMTP connection, Exim
28742 looks in the hints database for the transport to see if there are any queued
28743 messages waiting for the host to which it is connected. If it finds one, it
28744 creates a new Exim process using the &%-MC%& option (which can only be used by
28745 a process running as root or the Exim user) and passes the TCP/IP socket to it
28746 so that it can deliver another message using the same socket. The new process
28747 does only those deliveries that are routed to the connected host, and may in
28748 turn pass the socket on to a third process, and so on.
28750 The &%connection_max_messages%& option of the &(smtp)& transport can be used to
28751 limit the number of messages sent down a single TCP/IP connection.
28753 .cindex "asterisk" "after IP address"
28754 The second and subsequent messages delivered down an existing connection are
28755 identified in the main log by the addition of an asterisk after the closing
28756 square bracket of the IP address.
28761 .section "Errors in outgoing SMTP" "SECToutSMTPerr"
28762 .cindex "error" "in outgoing SMTP"
28763 .cindex "SMTP" "errors in outgoing"
28764 .cindex "host" "error"
28765 Three different kinds of error are recognized for outgoing SMTP: host errors,
28766 message errors, and recipient errors.
28769 .vitem "&*Host errors*&"
28770 A host error is not associated with a particular message or with a
28771 particular recipient of a message. The host errors are:
28774 Connection refused or timed out,
28776 Any error response code on connection,
28778 Any error response code to EHLO or HELO,
28780 Loss of connection at any time, except after &"."&,
28782 I/O errors at any time,
28784 Timeouts during the session, other than in response to MAIL, RCPT or
28785 the &"."& at the end of the data.
28788 For a host error, a permanent error response on connection, or in response to
28789 EHLO, causes all addresses routed to the host to be failed. Any other host
28790 error causes all addresses to be deferred, and retry data to be created for the
28791 host. It is not tried again, for any message, until its retry time arrives. If
28792 the current set of addresses are not all delivered in this run (to some
28793 alternative host), the message is added to the list of those waiting for this
28794 host, so if it is still undelivered when a subsequent successful delivery is
28795 made to the host, it will be sent down the same SMTP connection.
28797 .vitem "&*Message errors*&"
28798 .cindex "message" "error"
28799 A message error is associated with a particular message when sent to a
28800 particular host, but not with a particular recipient of the message. The
28801 message errors are:
28804 Any error response code to MAIL, DATA, or the &"."& that terminates
28807 Timeout after MAIL,
28809 Timeout or loss of connection after the &"."& that terminates the data. A
28810 timeout after the DATA command itself is treated as a host error, as is loss of
28811 connection at any other time.
28814 For a message error, a permanent error response (5&'xx'&) causes all addresses
28815 to be failed, and a delivery error report to be returned to the sender. A
28816 temporary error response (4&'xx'&), or one of the timeouts, causes all
28817 addresses to be deferred. Retry data is not created for the host, but instead,
28818 a retry record for the combination of host plus message id is created. The
28819 message is not added to the list of those waiting for this host. This ensures
28820 that the failing message will not be sent to this host again until the retry
28821 time arrives. However, other messages that are routed to the host are not
28822 affected, so if it is some property of the message that is causing the error,
28823 it will not stop the delivery of other mail.
28825 If the remote host specified support for the SIZE parameter in its response
28826 to EHLO, Exim adds SIZE=&'nnn'& to the MAIL command, so an
28827 over-large message will cause a message error because the error arrives as a
28830 .vitem "&*Recipient errors*&"
28831 .cindex "recipient" "error"
28832 A recipient error is associated with a particular recipient of a message. The
28833 recipient errors are:
28836 Any error response to RCPT,
28838 Timeout after RCPT.
28841 For a recipient error, a permanent error response (5&'xx'&) causes the
28842 recipient address to be failed, and a bounce message to be returned to the
28843 sender. A temporary error response (4&'xx'&) or a timeout causes the failing
28844 address to be deferred, and routing retry data to be created for it. This is
28845 used to delay processing of the address in subsequent queue runs, until its
28846 routing retry time arrives. This applies to all messages, but because it
28847 operates only in queue runs, one attempt will be made to deliver a new message
28848 to the failing address before the delay starts to operate. This ensures that,
28849 if the failure is really related to the message rather than the recipient
28850 (&"message too big for this recipient"& is a possible example), other messages
28851 have a chance of getting delivered. If a delivery to the address does succeed,
28852 the retry information gets cleared, so all stuck messages get tried again, and
28853 the retry clock is reset.
28855 The message is not added to the list of those waiting for this host. Use of the
28856 host for other messages is unaffected, and except in the case of a timeout,
28857 other recipients are processed independently, and may be successfully delivered
28858 in the current SMTP session. After a timeout it is of course impossible to
28859 proceed with the session, so all addresses get deferred. However, those other
28860 than the one that failed do not suffer any subsequent retry delays. Therefore,
28861 if one recipient is causing trouble, the others have a chance of getting
28862 through when a subsequent delivery attempt occurs before the failing
28863 recipient's retry time.
28866 In all cases, if there are other hosts (or IP addresses) available for the
28867 current set of addresses (for example, from multiple MX records), they are
28868 tried in this run for any undelivered addresses, subject of course to their
28869 own retry data. In other words, recipient error retry data does not take effect
28870 until the next delivery attempt.
28872 Some hosts have been observed to give temporary error responses to every
28873 MAIL command at certain times (&"insufficient space"& has been seen). It
28874 would be nice if such circumstances could be recognized, and defer data for the
28875 host itself created, but this is not possible within the current Exim design.
28876 What actually happens is that retry data for every (host, message) combination
28879 The reason that timeouts after MAIL and RCPT are treated specially is that
28880 these can sometimes arise as a result of the remote host's verification
28881 procedures. Exim makes this assumption, and treats them as if a temporary error
28882 response had been received. A timeout after &"."& is treated specially because
28883 it is known that some broken implementations fail to recognize the end of the
28884 message if the last character of the last line is a binary zero. Thus, it is
28885 helpful to treat this case as a message error.
28887 Timeouts at other times are treated as host errors, assuming a problem with the
28888 host, or the connection to it. If a timeout after MAIL, RCPT,
28889 or &"."& is really a connection problem, the assumption is that at the next try
28890 the timeout is likely to occur at some other point in the dialogue, causing it
28891 then to be treated as a host error.
28893 There is experimental evidence that some MTAs drop the connection after the
28894 terminating &"."& if they do not like the contents of the message for some
28895 reason, in contravention of the RFC, which indicates that a 5&'xx'& response
28896 should be given. That is why Exim treats this case as a message rather than a
28897 host error, in order not to delay other messages to the same host.
28902 .section "Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP"
28903 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming over TCP/IP"
28904 .cindex "incoming SMTP over TCP/IP"
28907 Incoming SMTP messages can be accepted in one of two ways: by running a
28908 listening daemon, or by using &'inetd'&. In the latter case, the entry in
28909 &_/etc/inetd.conf_& should be like this:
28911 smtp stream tcp nowait exim /opt/exim/bin/exim in.exim -bs
28913 Exim distinguishes between this case and the case of a locally running user
28914 agent using the &%-bs%& option by checking whether or not the standard input is
28915 a socket. When it is, either the port must be privileged (less than 1024), or
28916 the caller must be root or the Exim user. If any other user passes a socket
28917 with an unprivileged port number, Exim prints a message on the standard error
28918 stream and exits with an error code.
28920 By default, Exim does not make a log entry when a remote host connects or
28921 disconnects (either via the daemon or &'inetd'&), unless the disconnection is
28922 unexpected. It can be made to write such log entries by setting the
28923 &%smtp_connection%& log selector.
28925 .cindex "carriage return"
28927 Commands from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR followed by
28928 LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR characters. In
28929 order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim treats LF on its own as a
28931 Furthermore, because common code is used for receiving messages from all
28932 sources, a CR on its own is also interpreted as a line terminator. However, the
28933 sequence &"CR, dot, CR"& does not terminate incoming SMTP data.
28935 .cindex "EHLO" "invalid data"
28936 .cindex "HELO" "invalid data"
28937 One area that sometimes gives rise to problems concerns the EHLO or
28938 HELO commands. Some clients send syntactically invalid versions of these
28939 commands, which Exim rejects by default. (This is nothing to do with verifying
28940 the data that is sent, so &%helo_verify_hosts%& is not relevant.) You can tell
28941 Exim not to apply a syntax check by setting &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& to
28942 match the broken hosts that send invalid commands.
28944 .cindex "SIZE option on MAIL command"
28945 .cindex "MAIL" "SIZE option"
28946 The amount of disk space available is checked whenever SIZE is received on
28947 a MAIL command, independently of whether &%message_size_limit%& or
28948 &%check_spool_space%& is configured, unless &%smtp_check_spool_space%& is set
28949 false. A temporary error is given if there is not enough space. If
28950 &%check_spool_space%& is set, the check is for that amount of space plus the
28951 value given with SIZE, that is, it checks that the addition of the incoming
28952 message will not reduce the space below the threshold.
28954 When a message is successfully received, Exim includes the local message id in
28955 its response to the final &"."& that terminates the data. If the remote host
28956 logs this text it can help with tracing what has happened to a message.
28958 The Exim daemon can limit the number of simultaneous incoming connections it is
28959 prepared to handle (see the &%smtp_accept_max%& option). It can also limit the
28960 number of simultaneous incoming connections from a single remote host (see the
28961 &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& option). Additional connection attempts are
28962 rejected using the SMTP temporary error code 421.
28964 The Exim daemon does not rely on the SIGCHLD signal to detect when a
28965 subprocess has finished, as this can get lost at busy times. Instead, it looks
28966 for completed subprocesses every time it wakes up. Provided there are other
28967 things happening (new incoming calls, starts of queue runs), completed
28968 processes will be noticed and tidied away. On very quiet systems you may
28969 sometimes see a &"defunct"& Exim process hanging about. This is not a problem;
28970 it will be noticed when the daemon next wakes up.
28972 When running as a daemon, Exim can reserve some SMTP slots for specific hosts,
28973 and can also be set up to reject SMTP calls from non-reserved hosts at times of
28974 high system load &-- for details see the &%smtp_accept_reserve%&,
28975 &%smtp_load_reserve%&, and &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& options. The load check
28976 applies in both the daemon and &'inetd'& cases.
28978 Exim normally starts a delivery process for each message received, though this
28979 can be varied by means of the &%-odq%& command line option and the
28980 &%queue_only%&, &%queue_only_file%&, and &%queue_only_load%& options. The
28981 number of simultaneously running delivery processes started in this way from
28982 SMTP input can be limited by the &%smtp_accept_queue%& and
28983 &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& options. When either limit is reached,
28984 subsequently received messages are just put on the input queue without starting
28985 a delivery process.
28987 The controls that involve counts of incoming SMTP calls (&%smtp_accept_max%&,
28988 &%smtp_accept_queue%&, &%smtp_accept_reserve%&) are not available when Exim is
28989 started up from the &'inetd'& daemon, because in that case each connection is
28990 handled by an entirely independent Exim process. Control by load average is,
28991 however, available with &'inetd'&.
28993 Exim can be configured to verify addresses in incoming SMTP commands as they
28994 are received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details. It can also be configured
28995 to rewrite addresses at this time &-- before any syntax checking is done. See
28996 section &<<SECTrewriteS>>&.
28998 Exim can also be configured to limit the rate at which a client host submits
28999 MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session. See the
29000 &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& option.
29004 .section "Unrecognized SMTP commands"
29005 .cindex "SMTP" "unrecognized commands"
29006 If Exim receives more than &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& unrecognized SMTP
29007 commands during a single SMTP connection, it drops the connection after sending
29008 the error response to the last command. The default value for
29009 &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& is 3. This is a defence against some kinds of
29010 abuse that subvert web servers into making connections to SMTP ports; in these
29011 circumstances, a number of non-SMTP lines are sent first.
29014 .section "Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands"
29015 .cindex "SMTP" "syntax errors"
29016 .cindex "SMTP" "protocol errors"
29017 A syntax error is detected if an SMTP command is recognized, but there is
29018 something syntactically wrong with its data, for example, a malformed email
29019 address in a RCPT command. Protocol errors include invalid command
29020 sequencing such as RCPT before MAIL. If Exim receives more than
29021 &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%& such commands during a single SMTP connection, it
29022 drops the connection after sending the error response to the last command. The
29023 default value for &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%& is 3. This is a defence against
29024 broken clients that loop sending bad commands (yes, it has been seen).
29028 .section "Use of non-mail SMTP commands"
29029 .cindex "SMTP" "non-mail commands"
29030 The &"non-mail"& SMTP commands are those other than MAIL, RCPT, and
29031 DATA. Exim counts such commands, and drops the connection if there are too
29032 many of them in a single SMTP session. This action catches some
29033 denial-of-service attempts and things like repeated failing AUTHs, or a mad
29034 client looping sending EHLO. The global option &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%&
29035 defines what &"too many"& means. Its default value is 10.
29037 When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not counted. This
29038 allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this is not necessary,
29039 but some clients do it). Exim also allows one uncounted occurence of HELO
29040 or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS between messages. After
29041 starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is expected, and so it too is not
29044 The first occurrence of AUTH in a connection, or immediately following
29045 STARTTLS is also not counted. Otherwise, all commands other than MAIL,
29046 RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are counted.
29048 You can control which hosts are subject to the limit set by
29049 &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%& by setting
29050 &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%&. The default value is &`*`&, which makes
29051 the limit apply to all hosts. This option means that you can exclude any
29052 specific badly-behaved hosts that you have to live with.
29057 .section "The VRFY and EXPN commands"
29058 When Exim receives a VRFY or EXPN command on a TCP/IP connection, it
29059 runs the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_vrfy%& or &%acl_smtp_expn%& (as
29060 appropriate) in order to decide whether the command should be accepted or not.
29061 If no ACL is defined, the command is rejected.
29063 .cindex "VRFY" "processing"
29064 When VRFY is accepted, it runs exactly the same code as when Exim is
29065 called with the &%-bv%& option.
29067 .cindex "EXPN" "processing"
29068 When EXPN is accepted, a single-level expansion of the address is done.
29069 EXPN is treated as an &"address test"& (similar to the &%-bt%& option) rather
29070 than a verification (the &%-bv%& option). If an unqualified local part is given
29071 as the argument to EXPN, it is qualified with &%qualify_domain%&. Rejections
29072 of VRFY and EXPN commands are logged on the main and reject logs, and
29073 VRFY verification failures are logged on the main log for consistency with
29078 .section "The ETRN command" "SECTETRN"
29079 .cindex "ETRN" "processing"
29080 RFC 1985 describes an SMTP command called ETRN that is designed to
29081 overcome the security problems of the TURN command (which has fallen into
29082 disuse). When Exim receives an ETRN command on a TCP/IP connection, it runs
29083 the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_etrn%& in order to decide whether the command
29084 should be accepted or not. If no ACL is defined, the command is rejected.
29086 The ETRN command is concerned with &"releasing"& messages that are awaiting
29087 delivery to certain hosts. As Exim does not organize its message queue by host,
29088 the only form of ETRN that is supported by default is the one where the
29089 text starts with the &"#"& prefix, in which case the remainder of the text is
29090 specific to the SMTP server. A valid ETRN command causes a run of Exim with
29091 the &%-R%& option to happen, with the remainder of the ETRN text as its
29092 argument. For example,
29100 which causes a delivery attempt on all messages with undelivered addresses
29101 containing the text &"brigadoon"&. When &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& is set (the
29102 default), Exim prevents the simultaneous execution of more than one queue run
29103 for the same argument string as a result of an ETRN command. This stops
29104 a misbehaving client from starting more than one queue runner at once.
29106 .cindex "hints database" "ETRN serialization"
29107 Exim implements the serialization by means of a hints database in which a
29108 record is written whenever a process is started by ETRN, and deleted when
29109 the process completes. However, Exim does not keep the SMTP session waiting for
29110 the ETRN process to complete. Once ETRN is accepted, the client is sent
29111 a &"success"& return code. Obviously there is scope for hints records to get
29112 left lying around if there is a system or program crash. To guard against this,
29113 Exim ignores any records that are more than six hours old.
29115 .cindex "&%smtp_etrn_command%&"
29116 For more control over what ETRN does, the &%smtp_etrn_command%& option can
29117 used. This specifies a command that is run whenever ETRN is received,
29118 whatever the form of its argument. For
29121 smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
29122 $sender_host_address
29124 .cindex "&$domain$&"
29125 The string is split up into arguments which are independently expanded. The
29126 expansion variable &$domain$& is set to the argument of the ETRN command,
29127 and no syntax checking is done on the contents of this argument. Exim does not
29128 wait for the command to complete, so its status code is not checked. Exim runs
29129 under its own uid and gid when receiving incoming SMTP, so it is not possible
29130 for it to change them before running the command.
29134 .section "Incoming local SMTP"
29135 .cindex "SMTP" "local incoming"
29136 Some user agents use SMTP to pass messages to their local MTA using the
29137 standard input and output, as opposed to passing the envelope on the command
29138 line and writing the message to the standard input. This is supported by the
29139 &%-bs%& option. This form of SMTP is handled in the same way as incoming
29140 messages over TCP/IP (including the use of ACLs), except that the envelope
29141 sender given in a MAIL command is ignored unless the caller is trusted. In
29142 an ACL you can detect this form of SMTP input by testing for an empty host
29143 identification. It is common to have this as the first line in the ACL that
29144 runs for RCPT commands:
29148 This accepts SMTP messages from local processes without doing any other tests.
29152 .section "Outgoing batched SMTP" "SECTbatchSMTP"
29153 .cindex "SMTP" "batched outgoing"
29154 .cindex "batched SMTP output"
29155 Both the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports can be used for handling
29156 batched SMTP. Each has an option called &%use_bsmtp%& which causes messages to
29157 be output in BSMTP format. No SMTP responses are possible for this form of
29158 delivery. All it is doing is using SMTP commands as a way of transmitting the
29159 envelope along with the message.
29161 The message is written to the file or pipe preceded by the SMTP commands
29162 MAIL and RCPT, and followed by a line containing a single dot. Lines in
29163 the message that start with a dot have an extra dot added. The SMTP command
29164 HELO is not normally used. If it is required, the &%message_prefix%& option
29165 can be used to specify it.
29167 Because &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& are both local transports, they accept only
29168 one recipient address at a time by default. However, you can arrange for them
29169 to handle several addresses at once by setting the &%batch_max%& option. When
29170 this is done for BSMTP, messages may contain multiple RCPT commands. See
29171 chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>& for more details.
29174 When one or more addresses are routed to a BSMTP transport by a router that
29175 sets up a host list, the name of the first host on the list is available to the
29176 transport in the variable &$host$&. Here is an example of such a transport and
29181 driver = manualroute
29182 transport = smtp_appendfile
29183 route_list = domain.example batch.host.example
29187 driver = appendfile
29188 directory = /var/bsmtp/$host
29193 This causes messages addressed to &'domain.example'& to be written in BSMTP
29194 format to &_/var/bsmtp/batch.host.example_&, with only a single copy of each
29195 message (unless there are more than 1000 recipients).
29199 .section "Incoming batched SMTP" "SECTincomingbatchedSMTP"
29200 .cindex "SMTP" "batched incoming"
29201 .cindex "batched SMTP input"
29202 The &%-bS%& command line option causes Exim to accept one or more messages by
29203 reading SMTP on the standard input, but to generate no responses. If the caller
29204 is trusted, the senders in the MAIL commands are believed; otherwise the
29205 sender is always the caller of Exim. Unqualified senders and receivers are not
29206 rejected (there seems little point) but instead just get qualified. HELO
29207 and EHLO act as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN and HELP, act
29208 as NOOP; QUIT quits.
29210 No policy checking is done for BSMTP input. That is, no ACL is run at anytime.
29211 In this respect it is like non-SMTP local input.
29213 If an error is detected while reading a message, including a missing &"."& at
29214 the end, Exim gives up immediately. It writes details of the error to the
29215 standard output in a stylized way that the calling program should be able to
29216 make some use of automatically, for example:
29218 554 Unexpected end of file
29219 Transaction started in line 10
29220 Error detected in line 14
29222 It writes a more verbose version, for human consumption, to the standard error
29225 An error was detected while processing a file of BSMTP input.
29226 The error message was:
29228 501 '>' missing at end of address
29230 The SMTP transaction started in line 10.
29231 The error was detected in line 12.
29232 The SMTP command at fault was:
29234 rcpt to:<malformed@in.com.plete
29236 1 previous message was successfully processed.
29237 The rest of the batch was abandoned.
29239 The return code from Exim is zero only if there were no errors. It is 1 if some
29240 messages were accepted before an error was detected, and 2 if no messages were
29242 .ecindex IIDsmtpproc1
29243 .ecindex IIDsmtpproc2
29247 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29248 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29250 .chapter "Customizing bounce and warning messages" "CHAPemsgcust" &&&
29251 "Customizing messages"
29252 When a message fails to be delivered, or remains on the queue for more than a
29253 configured amount of time, Exim sends a message to the original sender, or
29254 to an alternative configured address. The text of these messages is built into
29255 the code of Exim, but it is possible to change it, either by adding a single
29256 string, or by replacing each of the paragraphs by text supplied in a file.
29258 The &'From:'& and &'To:'& header lines are automatically generated; you can
29259 cause a &'Reply-To:'& line to be added by setting the &%errors_reply_to%&
29260 option. Exim also adds the line
29262 Auto-Submitted: auto-generated
29264 to all warning and bounce messages,
29267 .section "Customizing bounce messages"
29268 .cindex "customizing" "bounce message"
29269 .cindex "bounce message" "customizing"
29270 If &%bounce_message_text%& is set, its contents are included in the default
29271 message immediately after &"This message was created automatically by mail
29272 delivery software."& The string is not expanded. It is not used if
29273 &%bounce_message_file%& is set.
29275 When &%bounce_message_file%& is set, it must point to a template file for
29276 constructing error messages. The file consists of a series of text items,
29277 separated by lines consisting of exactly four asterisks. If the file cannot be
29278 opened, default text is used and a message is written to the main and panic
29279 logs. If any text item in the file is empty, default text is used for that
29282 .cindex "&$bounce_recipient$&"
29283 .cindex "&$bounce_return_size_limit$&"
29284 Each item of text that is read from the file is expanded, and there are two
29285 expansion variables which can be of use here: &$bounce_recipient$& is set to
29286 the recipient of an error message while it is being created, and
29287 &$bounce_return_size_limit$& contains the value of the &%return_size_limit%&
29288 option, rounded to a whole number.
29290 The items must appear in the file in the following order:
29293 The first item is included in the headers, and should include at least a
29294 &'Subject:'& header. Exim does not check the syntax of these headers.
29296 The second item forms the start of the error message. After it, Exim lists the
29297 failing addresses with their error messages.
29299 The third item is used to introduce any text from pipe transports that is to be
29300 returned to the sender. It is omitted if there is no such text.
29302 The fourth item is used to introduce the copy of the message that is returned
29303 as part of the error report.
29305 The fifth item is added after the fourth one if the returned message is
29306 truncated because it is bigger than &%return_size_limit%&.
29308 The sixth item is added after the copy of the original message.
29311 The default state (&%bounce_message_file%& unset) is equivalent to the
29312 following file, in which the sixth item is empty. The &'Subject:'& and some
29313 other lines have been split in order to fit them on the page:
29315 Subject: Mail delivery failed
29316 ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
29317 {: returning message to sender}}
29319 This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.
29321 A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
29322 {that you sent }{sent by
29326 }}could not be delivered to all of its recipients.
29327 The following address(es) failed:
29329 The following text was generated during the delivery attempt(s):
29331 ------ This is a copy of the message, including all the headers.
29334 ------ The body of the message is $message_size characters long;
29336 ------ $bounce_return_size_limit or so are included here.
29339 .section "Customizing warning messages" "SECTcustwarn"
29340 .cindex "customizing" "warning message"
29341 .cindex "warning of delay" "customizing the message"
29342 The option &%warn_message_file%& can be pointed at a template file for use when
29343 warnings about message delays are created. In this case there are only three
29347 The first item is included in the headers, and should include at least a
29348 &'Subject:'& header. Exim does not check the syntax of these headers.
29350 The second item forms the start of the warning message. After it, Exim lists
29351 the delayed addresses.
29353 The third item then ends the message.
29356 The default state is equivalent to the following file, except that some lines
29357 have been split here, in order to fit them on the page:
29359 Subject: Warning: message $message_exim_id delayed
29360 $warn_message_delay
29362 This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.
29364 A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$warn_message_recipients}
29365 {that you sent }{sent by
29369 }}has not been delivered to all of its recipients after
29370 more than $warn_message_delay on the queue on $primary_hostname.
29372 The message identifier is: $message_exim_id
29373 The subject of the message is: $h_subject
29374 The date of the message is: $h_date
29376 The following address(es) have not yet been delivered:
29378 No action is required on your part. Delivery attempts will
29379 continue for some time, and this warning may be repeated at
29380 intervals if the message remains undelivered. Eventually the
29381 mail delivery software will give up, and when that happens,
29382 the message will be returned to you.
29384 .cindex "&$warn_message_delay$&"
29385 .cindex "&$warn_message_recipients$&"
29386 However, in the default state the subject and date lines are omitted if no
29387 appropriate headers exist. During the expansion of this file,
29388 &$warn_message_delay$& is set to the delay time in one of the forms &"<&'n'&>
29389 minutes"& or &"<&'n'&> hours"&, and &$warn_message_recipients$& contains a list
29390 of recipients for the warning message. There may be more than one if there are
29391 multiple addresses with different &%errors_to%& settings on the routers that
29397 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29398 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29400 .chapter "Some common configuration settings" "CHAPcomconreq"
29401 This chapter discusses some configuration settings that seem to be fairly
29402 common. More examples and discussion can be found in the Exim book.
29406 .section "Sending mail to a smart host"
29407 .cindex "smart host" "example router"
29408 If you want to send all mail for non-local domains to a &"smart host"&, you
29409 should replace the default &(dnslookup)& router with a router which does the
29410 routing explicitly:
29412 send_to_smart_host:
29413 driver = manualroute
29414 route_list = !+local_domains smart.host.name
29415 transport = remote_smtp
29417 You can use the smart host's IP address instead of the name if you wish.
29418 If you are using Exim only to submit messages to a smart host, and not for
29419 receiving incoming messages, you can arrange for it to do the submission
29420 synchronously by setting the &%mua_wrapper%& option (see chapter
29421 &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&).
29426 .section "Using Exim to handle mailing lists" "SECTmailinglists"
29427 .cindex "mailing lists"
29428 Exim can be used to run simple mailing lists, but for large and/or complicated
29429 requirements, the use of additional specialized mailing list software such as
29430 Majordomo or Mailman is recommended.
29432 The &(redirect)& router can be used to handle mailing lists where each list
29433 is maintained in a separate file, which can therefore be managed by an
29434 independent manager. The &%domains%& router option can be used to run these
29435 lists in a separate domain from normal mail. For example:
29439 domains = lists.example
29440 file = /usr/lists/$local_part
29443 errors_to = $local_part-request@lists.example
29446 This router is skipped for domains other than &'lists.example'&. For addresses
29447 in that domain, it looks for a file that matches the local part. If there is no
29448 such file, the router declines, but because &%no_more%& is set, no subsequent
29449 routers are tried, and so the whole delivery fails.
29451 The &%forbid_pipe%& and &%forbid_file%& options prevent a local part from being
29452 expanded into a file name or a pipe delivery, which is usually inappropriate in
29455 .cindex "&%errors_to%&"
29456 The &%errors_to%& option specifies that any delivery errors caused by addresses
29457 taken from a mailing list are to be sent to the given address rather than the
29458 original sender of the message. However, before acting on this, Exim verifies
29459 the error address, and ignores it if verification fails.
29461 For example, using the configuration above, mail sent to
29462 &'dicts@lists.example'& is passed on to those addresses contained in
29463 &_/usr/lists/dicts_&, with error reports directed to
29464 &'dicts-request@lists.example'&, provided that this address can be verified.
29465 There could be a file called &_/usr/lists/dicts-request_& containing
29466 the address(es) of this particular list's manager(s), but other approaches,
29467 such as setting up an earlier router (possibly using the &%local_part_prefix%&
29468 or &%local_part_suffix%& options) to handle addresses of the form
29469 &%owner-%&&'xxx'& or &%xxx-%&&'request'&, are also possible.
29473 .section "Syntax errors in mailing lists"
29474 .cindex "mailing lists" "syntax errors in"
29475 If an entry in redirection data contains a syntax error, Exim normally defers
29476 delivery of the original address. That means that a syntax error in a mailing
29477 list holds up all deliveries to the list. This may not be appropriate when a
29478 list is being maintained automatically from data supplied by users, and the
29479 addresses are not rigorously checked.
29481 If the &%skip_syntax_errors%& option is set, the &(redirect)& router just skips
29482 entries that fail to parse, noting the incident in the log. If in addition
29483 &%syntax_errors_to%& is set to a verifiable address, a message is sent to it
29484 whenever a broken address is skipped. It is usually appropriate to set
29485 &%syntax_errors_to%& to the same address as &%errors_to%&.
29489 .section "Re-expansion of mailing lists"
29490 .cindex "mailing lists" "re-expansion of"
29491 Exim remembers every individual address to which a message has been delivered,
29492 in order to avoid duplication, but it normally stores only the original
29493 recipient addresses with a message. If all the deliveries to a mailing list
29494 cannot be done at the first attempt, the mailing list is re-expanded when the
29495 delivery is next tried. This means that alterations to the list are taken into
29496 account at each delivery attempt, so addresses that have been added to
29497 the list since the message arrived will therefore receive a copy of the
29498 message, even though it pre-dates their subscription.
29500 If this behaviour is felt to be undesirable, the &%one_time%& option can be set
29501 on the &(redirect)& router. If this is done, any addresses generated by the
29502 router that fail to deliver at the first attempt are added to the message as
29503 &"top level"& addresses, and the parent address that generated them is marked
29504 &"delivered"&. Thus, expansion of the mailing list does not happen again at the
29505 subsequent delivery attempts. The disadvantage of this is that if any of the
29506 failing addresses are incorrect, correcting them in the file has no effect on
29507 pre-existing messages.
29509 The original top-level address is remembered with each of the generated
29510 addresses, and is output in any log messages. However, any intermediate parent
29511 addresses are not recorded. This makes a difference to the log only if the
29512 &%all_parents%& selector is set, but for mailing lists there is normally only
29513 one level of expansion anyway.
29517 .section "Closed mailing lists"
29518 .cindex "mailing lists" "closed"
29519 The examples so far have assumed open mailing lists, to which anybody may
29520 send mail. It is also possible to set up closed lists, where mail is accepted
29521 from specified senders only. This is done by making use of the generic
29522 &%senders%& option to restrict the router that handles the list.
29524 The following example uses the same file as a list of recipients and as a list
29525 of permitted senders. It requires three routers:
29529 domains = lists.example
29530 local_part_suffix = -request
29531 file = /usr/lists/$local_part$local_part_suffix
29536 domains = lists.example
29537 senders = ${if exists {/usr/lists/$local_part}\
29538 {lsearch;/usr/lists/$local_part}{*}}
29539 file = /usr/lists/$local_part
29542 errors_to = $local_part-request@lists.example
29547 domains = lists.example
29549 data = :fail: $local_part@lists.example is a closed mailing list
29551 All three routers have the same &%domains%& setting, so for any other domains,
29552 they are all skipped. The first router runs only if the local part ends in
29553 &%-request%&. It handles messages to the list manager(s) by means of an open
29556 The second router runs only if the &%senders%& precondition is satisfied. It
29557 checks for the existence of a list that corresponds to the local part, and then
29558 checks that the sender is on the list by means of a linear search. It is
29559 necessary to check for the existence of the file before trying to search it,
29560 because otherwise Exim thinks there is a configuration error. If the file does
29561 not exist, the expansion of &%senders%& is *, which matches all senders. This
29562 means that the router runs, but because there is no list, declines, and
29563 &%no_more%& ensures that no further routers are run. The address fails with an
29564 &"unrouteable address"& error.
29566 The third router runs only if the second router is skipped, which happens when
29567 a mailing list exists, but the sender is not on it. This router forcibly fails
29568 the address, giving a suitable error message.
29573 .section "Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP)" "SECTverp"
29575 .cindex "Variable Envelope Return Paths"
29576 .cindex "envelope sender"
29577 Variable Envelope Return Paths &-- see &url(http://cr.yp.to/proto/verp.txt) &--
29578 are a way of helping mailing list administrators discover which subscription
29579 address is the cause of a particular delivery failure. The idea is to encode
29580 the original recipient address in the outgoing envelope sender address, so that
29581 if the message is forwarded by another host and then subsequently bounces, the
29582 original recipient can be extracted from the recipient address of the bounce.
29584 .oindex &%errors_to%&
29585 .oindex &%return_path%&
29586 Envelope sender addresses can be modified by Exim using two different
29587 facilities: the &%errors_to%& option on a router (as shown in previous mailing
29588 list examples), or the &%return_path%& option on a transport. The second of
29589 these is effective only if the message is successfully delivered to another
29590 host; it is not used for errors detected on the local host (see the description
29591 of &%return_path%& in chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&). Here is an example
29592 of the use of &%return_path%& to implement VERP on an &(smtp)& transport:
29598 ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}\
29599 {$1-request=$local_part%$domain@your.dom.example}fail}
29601 This has the effect of rewriting the return path (envelope sender) on outgoing
29602 SMTP messages, if the local part of the original return path ends in
29603 &"-request"&, and the domain is &'your.dom.example'&. The rewriting inserts the
29604 local part and domain of the recipient into the return path. Suppose, for
29605 example, that a message whose return path has been set to
29606 &'somelist-request@your.dom.example'& is sent to
29607 &'subscriber@other.dom.example'&. In the transport, the return path is
29610 somelist-request=subscriber%other.dom.example@your.dom.example
29612 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
29613 For this to work, you must also arrange for outgoing messages that have
29614 &"-request"& in their return paths to have just a single recipient. That is
29615 achieved by setting &%max_rcpt%& to 1. Without this, a single copy of a message
29616 might be sent to several different recipients in the same domain, in which case
29617 &$local_part$& is not available in the transport, because it is not unique.
29619 Unless your host is doing nothing but mailing list deliveries, you should
29620 probably use a separate transport for the VERP deliveries, so as not to use
29621 extra resources for the others. This can easily be done by expanding the
29622 &%transport%& option in the router:
29626 domains = ! +local_domains
29628 ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}\
29629 {verp_smtp}{remote_smtp}}
29632 If you want to change the return path using &%errors_to%& in a router instead
29633 of using &%return_path%& in the transport, you need to set &%errors_to%& on all
29634 routers that handle mailing list addresses. This will ensure that all delivery
29635 errors, including those detected on the local host, are sent to the VERP
29638 On a host that does no local deliveries and has no manual routing, only the
29639 &(dnslookup)& router needs to be changed. A special transport is not needed for
29640 SMTP deliveries. Every mailing list recipient has its own return path value,
29641 and so Exim must hand them to the transport one at a time. Here is an example
29642 of a &(dnslookup)& router that implements VERP:
29646 domains = ! +local_domains
29647 transport = remote_smtp
29649 ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}}
29650 {$1-request=$local_part%$domain@your.dom.example}fail}
29653 Before you start sending out messages with VERPed return paths, you must also
29654 configure Exim to accept the bounce messages that come back to those paths.
29655 Typically this is done by setting a &%local_part_suffix%& option for a
29656 router, and using this to route the messages to wherever you want to handle
29659 The overhead incurred in using VERP depends very much on the size of the
29660 message, the number of recipient addresses that resolve to the same remote
29661 host, and the speed of the connection over which the message is being sent. If
29662 a lot of addresses resolve to the same host and the connection is slow, sending
29663 a separate copy of the message for each address may take substantially longer
29664 than sending a single copy with many recipients (for which VERP cannot be
29672 .section "Virtual domains" "SECTvirtualdomains"
29673 .cindex "virtual domains"
29674 .cindex "domain" "virtual"
29675 The phrase &'virtual domain'& is unfortunately used with two rather different
29679 A domain for which there are no real mailboxes; all valid local parts are
29680 aliases for other email addresses. Common examples are organizational
29681 top-level domains and &"vanity"& domains.
29683 One of a number of independent domains that are all handled by the same host,
29684 with mailboxes on that host, but where the mailbox owners do not necessarily
29685 have login accounts on that host.
29688 The first usage is probably more common, and does seem more &"virtual"& than
29689 the second. This kind of domain can be handled in Exim with a straightforward
29690 aliasing router. One approach is to create a separate alias file for each
29691 virtual domain. Exim can test for the existence of the alias file to determine
29692 whether the domain exists. The &(dsearch)& lookup type is useful here, leading
29693 to a router of this form:
29697 domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/virtual
29698 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/mail/virtual/$domain}}
29701 The &%domains%& option specifies that the router is to be skipped, unless there
29702 is a file in the &_/etc/mail/virtual_& directory whose name is the same as the
29703 domain that is being processed. When the router runs, it looks up the local
29704 part in the file to find a new address (or list of addresses). The &%no_more%&
29705 setting ensures that if the lookup fails (leading to &%data%& being an empty
29706 string), Exim gives up on the address without trying any subsequent routers.
29708 This one router can handle all the virtual domains because the alias file names
29709 follow a fixed pattern. Permissions can be arranged so that appropriate people
29710 can edit the different alias files. A successful aliasing operation results in
29711 a new envelope recipient address, which is then routed from scratch.
29713 The other kind of &"virtual"& domain can also be handled in a straightforward
29714 way. One approach is to create a file for each domain containing a list of
29715 valid local parts, and use it in a router like this:
29719 domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/domains
29720 local_parts = lsearch;/etc/mail/domains/$domain
29721 transport = my_mailboxes
29723 The address is accepted if there is a file for the domain, and the local part
29724 can be found in the file. The &%domains%& option is used to check for the
29725 file's existence because &%domains%& is tested before the &%local_parts%&
29726 option (see section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). You cannot use &%require_files%&,
29727 because that option is tested after &%local_parts%&. The transport is as
29731 driver = appendfile
29732 file = /var/mail/$domain/$local_part
29735 This uses a directory of mailboxes for each domain. The &%user%& setting is
29736 required, to specify which uid is to be used for writing to the mailboxes.
29738 The configuration shown here is just one example of how you might support this
29739 requirement. There are many other ways this kind of configuration can be set
29740 up, for example, by using a database instead of separate files to hold all the
29741 information about the domains.
29745 .section "Multiple user mailboxes" "SECTmulbox"
29746 .cindex "multiple mailboxes"
29747 .cindex "mailbox" "multiple"
29748 .cindex "local part" "prefix"
29749 .cindex "local part" "suffix"
29750 Heavy email users often want to operate with multiple mailboxes, into which
29751 incoming mail is automatically sorted. A popular way of handling this is to
29752 allow users to use multiple sender addresses, so that replies can easily be
29753 identified. Users are permitted to add prefixes or suffixes to their local
29754 parts for this purpose. The wildcard facility of the generic router options
29755 &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& can be used for this. For
29756 example, consider this router:
29761 file = $home/.forward
29762 local_part_suffix = -*
29763 local_part_suffix_optional
29766 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
29767 It runs a user's &_.forward_& file for all local parts of the form
29768 &'username-*'&. Within the filter file the user can distinguish different
29769 cases by testing the variable &$local_part_suffix$&. For example:
29771 if $local_part_suffix contains -special then
29772 save /home/$local_part/Mail/special
29775 If the filter file does not exist, or does not deal with such addresses, they
29776 fall through to subsequent routers, and, assuming no subsequent use of the
29777 &%local_part_suffix%& option is made, they presumably fail. Thus, users have
29778 control over which suffixes are valid.
29780 Alternatively, a suffix can be used to trigger the use of a different
29781 &_.forward_& file &-- which is the way a similar facility is implemented in
29787 file = $home/.forward$local_part_suffix
29788 local_part_suffix = -*
29789 local_part_suffix_optional
29792 If there is no suffix, &_.forward_& is used; if the suffix is &'-special'&, for
29793 example, &_.forward-special_& is used. Once again, if the appropriate file
29794 does not exist, or does not deal with the address, it is passed on to
29795 subsequent routers, which could, if required, look for an unqualified
29796 &_.forward_& file to use as a default.
29800 .section "Simplified vacation processing"
29801 .cindex "vacation processing"
29802 The traditional way of running the &'vacation'& program is for a user to set up
29803 a pipe command in a &_.forward_& file
29804 (see section &<<SECTspecitredli>>& for syntax details).
29805 This is prone to error by inexperienced users. There are two features of Exim
29806 that can be used to make this process simpler for users:
29809 A local part prefix such as &"vacation-"& can be specified on a router which
29810 can cause the message to be delivered directly to the &'vacation'& program, or
29811 alternatively can use Exim's &(autoreply)& transport. The contents of a user's
29812 &_.forward_& file are then much simpler. For example:
29814 spqr, vacation-spqr
29817 The &%require_files%& generic router option can be used to trigger a
29818 vacation delivery by checking for the existence of a certain file in the
29819 user's home directory. The &%unseen%& generic option should also be used, to
29820 ensure that the original delivery also proceeds. In this case, all the user has
29821 to do is to create a file called, say, &_.vacation_&, containing a vacation
29825 Another advantage of both these methods is that they both work even when the
29826 use of arbitrary pipes by users is locked out.
29830 .section "Taking copies of mail"
29831 .cindex "message" "copying every"
29832 Some installations have policies that require archive copies of all messages to
29833 be made. A single copy of each message can easily be taken by an appropriate
29834 command in a system filter, which could, for example, use a different file for
29835 each day's messages.
29837 There is also a shadow transport mechanism that can be used to take copies of
29838 messages that are successfully delivered by local transports, one copy per
29839 delivery. This could be used, &'inter alia'&, to implement automatic
29840 notification of delivery by sites that insist on doing such things.
29844 .section "Intermittently connected hosts"
29845 .cindex "intermittently connected hosts"
29846 It has become quite common (because it is cheaper) for hosts to connect to the
29847 Internet periodically rather than remain connected all the time. The normal
29848 arrangement is that mail for such hosts accumulates on a system that is
29849 permanently connected.
29851 Exim was designed for use on permanently connected hosts, and so it is not
29852 particularly well-suited to use in an intermittently connected environment.
29853 Nevertheless there are some features that can be used.
29856 .section "Exim on the upstream server host"
29857 It is tempting to arrange for incoming mail for the intermittently connected
29858 host to remain on Exim's queue until the client connects. However, this
29859 approach does not scale very well. Two different kinds of waiting message are
29860 being mixed up in the same queue &-- those that cannot be delivered because of
29861 some temporary problem, and those that are waiting for their destination host
29862 to connect. This makes it hard to manage the queue, as well as wasting
29863 resources, because each queue runner scans the entire queue.
29865 A better approach is to separate off those messages that are waiting for an
29866 intermittently connected host. This can be done by delivering these messages
29867 into local files in batch SMTP, &"mailstore"&, or other envelope-preserving
29868 format, from where they are transmitted by other software when their
29869 destination connects. This makes it easy to collect all the mail for one host
29870 in a single directory, and to apply local timeout rules on a per-message basis
29873 On a very small scale, leaving the mail on Exim's queue can be made to work. If
29874 you are doing this, you should configure Exim with a long retry period for the
29875 intermittent host. For example:
29877 cheshire.wonderland.fict.example * F,5d,24h
29879 This stops a lot of failed delivery attempts from occurring, but Exim remembers
29880 which messages it has queued up for that host. Once the intermittent host comes
29881 online, forcing delivery of one message (either by using the &%-M%& or &%-R%&
29882 options, or by using the ETRN SMTP command (see section &<<SECTETRN>>&)
29883 causes all the queued up messages to be delivered, often down a single SMTP
29884 connection. While the host remains connected, any new messages get delivered
29887 If the connecting hosts do not have fixed IP addresses, that is, if a host is
29888 issued with a different IP address each time it connects, Exim's retry
29889 mechanisms on the holding host get confused, because the IP address is normally
29890 used as part of the key string for holding retry information. This can be
29891 avoided by unsetting &%retry_include_ip_address%& on the &(smtp)& transport.
29892 Since this has disadvantages for permanently connected hosts, it is best to
29893 arrange a separate transport for the intermittently connected ones.
29897 .section "Exim on the intermittently connected client host"
29898 The value of &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& should probably be
29899 increased, or even set to zero (that is, disabled) on the intermittently
29900 connected host, so that all incoming messages down a single connection get
29901 delivered immediately.
29903 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
29904 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
29905 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
29906 Mail waiting to be sent from an intermittently connected host will probably
29907 not have been routed, because without a connection DNS lookups are not
29908 possible. This means that if a normal queue run is done at connection time,
29909 each message is likely to be sent in a separate SMTP session. This can be
29910 avoided by starting the queue run with a command line option beginning with
29911 &%-qq%& instead of &%-q%&. In this case, the queue is scanned twice. In the
29912 first pass, routing is done but no deliveries take place. The second pass is a
29913 normal queue run; since all the messages have been previously routed, those
29914 destined for the same host are likely to get sent as multiple deliveries in a
29915 single SMTP connection.
29919 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29920 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29922 .chapter "Using Exim as a non-queueing client" "CHAPnonqueueing" &&&
29923 "Exim as a non-queueing client"
29924 .cindex "client" "non-queueing"
29925 .cindex "smart host" "queueing; suppressing"
29926 On a personal computer, it is a common requirement for all
29927 email to be sent to a &"smart host"&. There are plenty of MUAs that can be
29928 configured to operate that way, for all the popular operating systems.
29929 However, there are some MUAs for Unix-like systems that cannot be so
29930 configured: they submit messages using the command line interface of
29931 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&. Furthermore, utility programs such as &'cron'& submit
29934 If the personal computer runs continuously, there is no problem, because it can
29935 run a conventional MTA that handles delivery to the smart host, and deal with
29936 any delays via its queueing mechanism. However, if the computer does not run
29937 continuously or runs different operating systems at different times, queueing
29938 email is not desirable.
29940 There is therefore a requirement for something that can provide the
29941 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& interface but deliver messages to a smart host without
29942 any queueing or retrying facilities. Furthermore, the delivery to the smart
29943 host should be synchronous, so that if it fails, the sending MUA is immediately
29944 informed. In other words, we want something that extends an MUA that submits
29945 to a local MTA via the command line so that it behaves like one that submits
29946 to a remote smart host using TCP/SMTP.
29948 There are a number of applications (for example, there is one called &'ssmtp'&)
29949 that do this job. However, people have found them to be lacking in various
29950 ways. For instance, you might want to allow aliasing and forwarding to be done
29951 before sending a message to the smart host.
29953 Exim already had the necessary infrastructure for doing this job. Just a few
29954 tweaks were needed to make it behave as required, though it is somewhat of an
29955 overkill to use a fully-featured MTA for this purpose.
29957 .cindex "&%mua_wrapper%&"
29958 There is a Boolean global option called &%mua_wrapper%&, defaulting false.
29959 Setting &%mua_wrapper%& true causes Exim to run in a special mode where it
29960 assumes that it is being used to &"wrap"& a command-line MUA in the manner
29961 just described. As well as setting &%mua_wrapper%&, you also need to provide a
29962 compatible router and transport configuration. Typically there will be just one
29963 router and one transport, sending everything to a smart host.
29965 When run in MUA wrapping mode, the behaviour of Exim changes in the
29969 A daemon cannot be run, nor will Exim accept incoming messages from &'inetd'&.
29970 In other words, the only way to submit messages is via the command line.
29972 Each message is synchonously delivered as soon as it is received (&%-odi%& is
29973 assumed). All queueing options (&%queue_only%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&,
29974 &%control%& in an ACL, etc.) are quietly ignored. The Exim reception process
29975 does not finish until the delivery attempt is complete. If the delivery is
29976 successful, a zero return code is given.
29978 Address redirection is permitted, but the final routing for all addresses must
29979 be to the same remote transport, and to the same list of hosts. Furthermore,
29980 the return address (envelope sender) must be the same for all recipients, as
29981 must any added or deleted header lines. In other words, it must be possible to
29982 deliver the message in a single SMTP transaction, however many recipients there
29985 If these conditions are not met, or if routing any address results in a
29986 failure or defer status, or if Exim is unable to deliver all the recipients
29987 successfully to one of the smart hosts, delivery of the entire message fails.
29989 Because no queueing is allowed, all failures are treated as permanent; there
29990 is no distinction between 4&'xx'& and 5&'xx'& SMTP response codes from the
29991 smart host. Furthermore, because only a single yes/no response can be given to
29992 the caller, it is not possible to deliver to some recipients and not others. If
29993 there is an error (temporary or permanent) for any recipient, all are failed.
29995 If more than one smart host is listed, Exim will try another host after a
29996 connection failure or a timeout, in the normal way. However, if this kind of
29997 failure happens for all the hosts, the delivery fails.
29999 When delivery fails, an error message is written to the standard error stream
30000 (as well as to Exim's log), and Exim exits to the caller with a return code
30001 value 1. The message is expunged from Exim's spool files. No bounce messages
30002 are ever generated.
30004 No retry data is maintained, and any retry rules are ignored.
30006 A number of Exim options are overridden: &%deliver_drop_privilege%& is forced
30007 true, &%max_rcpt%& in the smtp transport is forced to &"unlimited"&,
30008 &%remote_max_parallel%& is forced to one, and fallback hosts are ignored.
30011 The overall effect is that Exim makes a single synchronous attempt to deliver
30012 the message, failing if there is any kind of problem. Because no local
30013 deliveries are done and no daemon can be run, Exim does not need root
30014 privilege. It should be possible to run it setuid to &'exim'& instead of setuid
30015 to &'root'&. See section &<<SECTrunexiwitpri>>& for a general discussion about
30016 the advantages and disadvantages of running without root privilege.
30021 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30022 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30024 .chapter "Log files" "CHAPlog"
30025 .scindex IIDloggen "log" "general description"
30026 .cindex "log" "types of"
30027 Exim writes three different logs, referred to as the main log, the reject log,
30032 The main log records the arrival of each message and each delivery in a single
30033 line in each case. The format is as compact as possible, in an attempt to keep
30034 down the size of log files. Two-character flag sequences make it easy to pick
30035 out these lines. A number of other events are recorded in the main log. Some of
30036 them are optional, in which case the &%log_selector%& option controls whether
30037 they are included or not. A Perl script called &'eximstats'&, which does simple
30038 analysis of main log files, is provided in the Exim distribution (see section
30039 &<<SECTmailstat>>&).
30041 .cindex "reject log"
30042 The reject log records information from messages that are rejected as a result
30043 of a configuration option (that is, for policy reasons).
30044 The first line of each rejection is a copy of the line that is also written to
30045 the main log. Then, if the message's header has been read at the time the log
30046 is written, its contents are written to this log. Only the original header
30047 lines are available; header lines added by ACLs are not logged. You can use the
30048 reject log to check that your policy controls are working correctly; on a busy
30049 host this may be easier than scanning the main log for rejection messages. You
30050 can suppress the writing of the reject log by setting &%write_rejectlog%&
30053 .cindex "panic log"
30054 .cindex "system log"
30055 When certain serious errors occur, Exim writes entries to its panic log. If the
30056 error is sufficiently disastrous, Exim bombs out afterwards. Panic log entries
30057 are usually written to the main log as well, but can get lost amid the mass of
30058 other entries. The panic log should be empty under normal circumstances. It is
30059 therefore a good idea to check it (or to have a &'cron'& script check it)
30060 regularly, in order to become aware of any problems. When Exim cannot open its
30061 panic log, it tries as a last resort to write to the system log (syslog). This
30062 is opened with LOG_PID+LOG_CONS and the facility code of LOG_MAIL. The
30063 message itself is written at priority LOG_CRIT.
30066 Every log line starts with a timestamp, in the format shown in the following
30067 example. Note that many of the examples shown in this chapter are line-wrapped.
30068 In the log file, this would be all on one line:
30070 2001-09-16 16:09:47 SMTP connection from [127.0.0.1] closed
30073 By default, the timestamps are in the local timezone. There are two
30074 ways of changing this:
30077 You can set the &%timezone%& option to a different time zone; in particular, if
30082 the timestamps will be in UTC (aka GMT).
30084 If you set &%log_timezone%& true, the time zone is added to the timestamp, for
30087 2003-04-25 11:17:07 +0100 Start queue run: pid=12762
30094 .section "Where the logs are written" "SECTwhelogwri"
30095 .cindex "log" "destination"
30096 .cindex "log" "to file"
30097 .cindex "log" "to syslog"
30099 The logs may be written to local files, or to syslog, or both. However, it
30100 should be noted that many syslog implementations use UDP as a transport, and
30101 are therefore unreliable in the sense that messages are not guaranteed to
30102 arrive at the loghost, nor is the ordering of messages necessarily maintained.
30103 It has also been reported that on large log files (tens of megabytes) you may
30104 need to tweak syslog to prevent it syncing the file with each write &-- on
30105 Linux this has been seen to make syslog take 90% plus of CPU time.
30107 The destination for Exim's logs is configured by setting LOG_FILE_PATH in
30108 &_Local/Makefile_& or by setting &%log_file_path%& in the run time
30109 configuration. This latter string is expanded, so it can contain, for example,
30110 references to the host name:
30112 log_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim_%slog
30114 It is generally advisable, however, to set the string in &_Local/Makefile_&
30115 rather than at run time, because then the setting is available right from the
30116 start of Exim's execution. Otherwise, if there's something it wants to log
30117 before it has read the configuration file (for example, an error in the
30118 configuration file) it will not use the path you want, and may not be able to
30121 The value of LOG_FILE_PATH or &%log_file_path%& is a colon-separated
30122 list, currently limited to at most two items. This is one option where the
30123 facility for changing a list separator may not be used. The list must always be
30124 colon-separated. If an item in the list is &"syslog"& then syslog is used;
30125 otherwise the item must either be an absolute path, containing &`%s`& at the
30126 point where &"main"&, &"reject"&, or &"panic"& is to be inserted, or be empty,
30127 implying the use of a default path.
30129 When Exim encounters an empty item in the list, it searches the list defined by
30130 LOG_FILE_PATH, and uses the first item it finds that is neither empty nor
30131 &"syslog"&. This means that an empty item in &%log_file_path%& can be used to
30132 mean &"use the path specified at build time"&. It no such item exists, log
30133 files are written in the &_log_& subdirectory of the spool directory. This is
30134 equivalent to the setting:
30136 log_file_path = $spool_directory/log/%slog
30138 If you do not specify anything at build time or run time, that is where the
30141 A log file path may also contain &`%D`& if datestamped log file names are in
30142 use &-- see section &<<SECTdatlogfil>>& below.
30144 Here are some examples of possible settings:
30146 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog `& syslog only
30147 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=:syslog `& syslog and default path
30148 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog : /usr/log/exim_%s `& syslog and specified path
30149 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=/usr/log/exim_%s `& specified path only
30151 If there are more than two paths in the list, the first is used and a panic
30156 .section "Logging to local files that are periodically &""cycled""&"
30157 .cindex "log" "cycling local files"
30158 .cindex "cycling logs"
30159 .cindex "&'exicyclog'&"
30160 .cindex "log" "local files; writing to"
30161 Some operating systems provide centralized and standardised methods for cycling
30162 log files. For those that do not, a utility script called &'exicyclog'& is
30163 provided (see section &<<SECTcyclogfil>>&). This renames and compresses the
30164 main and reject logs each time it is called. The maximum number of old logs to
30165 keep can be set. It is suggested this script is run as a daily &'cron'& job.
30167 An Exim delivery process opens the main log when it first needs to write to it,
30168 and it keeps the file open in case subsequent entries are required &-- for
30169 example, if a number of different deliveries are being done for the same
30170 message. However, remote SMTP deliveries can take a long time, and this means
30171 that the file may be kept open long after it is renamed if &'exicyclog'& or
30172 something similar is being used to rename log files on a regular basis. To
30173 ensure that a switch of log files is noticed as soon as possible, Exim calls
30174 &[stat()]& on the main log's name before reusing an open file, and if the file
30175 does not exist, or its inode has changed, the old file is closed and Exim
30176 tries to open the main log from scratch. Thus, an old log file may remain open
30177 for quite some time, but no Exim processes should write to it once it has been
30182 .section "Datestamped log files" "SECTdatlogfil"
30183 .cindex "log" "datestamped files"
30184 Instead of cycling the main and reject log files by renaming them
30185 periodically, some sites like to use files whose names contain a datestamp,
30186 for example, &_mainlog-20031225_&. The datestamp is in the form &_yyyymmdd_&.
30187 Exim has support for this way of working. It is enabled by setting the
30188 &%log_file_path%& option to a path that includes &`%D`& at the point where the
30189 datestamp is required. For example:
30191 log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%slog-%D
30192 log_file_path = /var/log/exim-%s-%D.log
30193 log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%D-%slog
30195 As before, &`%s`& is replaced by &"main"& or &"reject"&; the following are
30196 examples of names generated by the above examples:
30198 /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog-20021225
30199 /var/log/exim-reject-20021225.log
30200 /var/spool/exim/log/20021225-mainlog
30202 When this form of log file is specified, Exim automatically switches to new
30203 files at midnight. It does not make any attempt to compress old logs; you
30204 will need to write your own script if you require this. You should not
30205 run &'exicyclog'& with this form of logging.
30207 The location of the panic log is also determined by &%log_file_path%&, but it
30208 is not datestamped, because rotation of the panic log does not make sense.
30209 When generating the name of the panic log, &`%D`& is removed from the string.
30210 In addition, if it immediately follows a slash, a following non-alphanumeric
30211 character is removed; otherwise a preceding non-alphanumeric character is
30212 removed. Thus, the three examples above would give these panic log names:
30214 /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
30215 /var/log/exim-panic.log
30216 /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
30220 .section "Logging to syslog"
30221 .cindex "log" "syslog; writing to"
30222 The use of syslog does not change what Exim logs or the format of its messages,
30223 except in one respect. If &%syslog_timestamp%& is set false, the timestamps on
30224 Exim's log lines are omitted when these lines are sent to syslog. Apart from
30225 that, the same strings are written to syslog as to log files. The syslog
30226 &"facility"& is set to LOG_MAIL, and the program name to &"exim"&
30227 by default, but you can change these by setting the &%syslog_facility%& and
30228 &%syslog_processname%& options, respectively. If Exim was compiled with
30229 SYSLOG_LOG_PID set in &_Local/Makefile_& (this is the default in
30230 &_src/EDITME_&), then, on systems that permit it (all except ULTRIX), the
30231 LOG_PID flag is set so that the &[syslog()]& call adds the pid as well as
30232 the time and host name to each line.
30233 The three log streams are mapped onto syslog priorities as follows:
30236 &'mainlog'& is mapped to LOG_INFO
30238 &'rejectlog'& is mapped to LOG_NOTICE
30240 &'paniclog'& is mapped to LOG_ALERT
30243 Many log lines are written to both &'mainlog'& and &'rejectlog'&, and some are
30244 written to both &'mainlog'& and &'paniclog'&, so there will be duplicates if
30245 these are routed by syslog to the same place. You can suppress this duplication
30246 by setting &%syslog_duplication%& false.
30248 Exim's log lines can sometimes be very long, and some of its &'rejectlog'&
30249 entries contain multiple lines when headers are included. To cope with both
30250 these cases, entries written to syslog are split into separate &[syslog()]&
30251 calls at each internal newline, and also after a maximum of
30252 870 data characters. (This allows for a total syslog line length of 1024, when
30253 additions such as timestamps are added.) If you are running a syslog
30254 replacement that can handle lines longer than the 1024 characters allowed by
30255 RFC 3164, you should set
30257 SYSLOG_LONG_LINES=yes
30259 in &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim. That stops Exim from splitting long
30260 lines, but it still splits at internal newlines in &'reject'& log entries.
30262 To make it easy to re-assemble split lines later, each component of a split
30263 entry starts with a string of the form [<&'n'&>/<&'m'&>] or [<&'n'&>\<&'m'&>]
30264 where <&'n'&> is the component number and <&'m'&> is the total number of
30265 components in the entry. The / delimiter is used when the line was split
30266 because it was too long; if it was split because of an internal newline, the \
30267 delimiter is used. For example, supposing the length limit to be 50 instead of
30268 870, the following would be the result of a typical rejection message to
30269 &'mainlog'& (LOG_INFO), each line in addition being preceded by the time, host
30270 name, and pid as added by syslog:
30272 [1/5] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected from
30273 [2/5] [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' header
30274 [3/5] when scanning for sender: missing or malformed lo
30275 [4/5] cal part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam.exa
30278 The same error might cause the following lines to be written to &"rejectlog"&
30281 [1/18] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected fro
30282 [2/18] m [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' head
30283 [3/18] er when scanning for sender: missing or malformed
30284 [4/18] local part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam
30286 [6\18] Recipients: ph10@some.domain.cam.example
30287 [7\18] P Received: from [127.0.0.1] (ident=ph10)
30288 [8\18] by xxxxx.cam.example with smtp (Exim 4.00)
30289 [9\18] id 16RdAL-0006pc-00
30290 [10/18] for ph10@cam.example; Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:
30291 [11\18] 09:43 +0100
30293 [13\18] Subject: this is a test header
30294 [18\18] X-something: this is another header
30295 [15/18] I Message-Id: <E16RdAL-0006pc-00@xxxxx.cam.examp
30298 [18/18] Date: Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:09:43 +0100
30300 Log lines that are neither too long nor contain newlines are written to syslog
30301 without modification.
30303 If only syslog is being used, the Exim monitor is unable to provide a log tail
30304 display, unless syslog is routing &'mainlog'& to a file on the local host and
30305 the environment variable EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set to tell the monitor
30310 .section "Log line flags"
30311 One line is written to the main log for each message received, and for each
30312 successful, unsuccessful, and delayed delivery. These lines can readily be
30313 picked out by the distinctive two-character flags that immediately follow the
30314 timestamp. The flags are:
30316 &`<=`& message arrival
30317 &`=>`& normal message delivery
30318 &`->`& additional address in same delivery
30319 &`*>`& delivery suppressed by &%-N%&
30320 &`**`& delivery failed; address bounced
30321 &`==`& delivery deferred; temporary problem
30325 .section "Logging message reception"
30326 .cindex "log" "reception line"
30327 The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for every
30328 message received is shown in the basic example below, which is split over
30329 several lines in order to fit it on the page:
30331 2002-10-31 08:57:53 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 <= kryten@dwarf.fict.example
30332 H=mailer.fict.example [192.168.123.123] U=exim
30333 P=smtp S=5678 id=<incoming message id>
30335 The address immediately following &"<="& is the envelope sender address. A
30336 bounce message is shown with the sender address &"<>"&, and if it is locally
30337 generated, this is followed by an item of the form
30341 which is a reference to the message that caused the bounce to be sent.
30345 For messages from other hosts, the H and U fields identify the remote host and
30346 record the RFC 1413 identity of the user that sent the message, if one was
30347 received. The number given in square brackets is the IP address of the sending
30348 host. If there is a single, unparenthesized host name in the H field, as
30349 above, it has been verified to correspond to the IP address (see the
30350 &%host_lookup%& option). If the name is in parentheses, it was the name quoted
30351 by the remote host in the SMTP HELO or EHLO command, and has not been
30352 verified. If verification yields a different name to that given for HELO or
30353 EHLO, the verified name appears first, followed by the HELO or EHLO
30354 name in parentheses.
30356 Misconfigured hosts (and mail forgers) sometimes put an IP address, with or
30357 without brackets, in the HELO or EHLO command, leading to entries in
30358 the log containing text like these examples:
30360 H=(10.21.32.43) [192.168.8.34]
30361 H=([10.21.32.43]) [192.168.8.34]
30363 This can be confusing. Only the final address in square brackets can be relied
30366 For locally generated messages (that is, messages not received over TCP/IP),
30367 the H field is omitted, and the U field contains the login name of the caller
30370 .cindex "authentication" "logging"
30371 .cindex "AUTH" "logging"
30372 For all messages, the P field specifies the protocol used to receive the
30373 message. This is the value that is stored in &$received_protocol$&. In the case
30374 of incoming SMTP messages, the value indicates whether or not any SMTP
30375 extensions (ESMTP), encryption, or authentication were used. If the SMTP
30376 session was encrypted, there is an additional X field that records the cipher
30377 suite that was used.
30379 The protocol is set to &"esmptsa"& or &"esmtpa"& for messages received from
30380 hosts that have authenticated themselves using the SMTP AUTH command. The first
30381 value is used when the SMTP connection was encrypted (&"secure"&). In this case
30382 there is an additional item A= followed by the name of the authenticator that
30383 was used. If an authenticated identification was set up by the authenticator's
30384 &%server_set_id%& option, this is logged too, separated by a colon from the
30385 authenticator name.
30387 .cindex "size" "of message"
30388 The id field records the existing message id, if present. The size of the
30389 received message is given by the S field. When the message is delivered,
30390 headers may be removed or added, so that the size of delivered copies of the
30391 message may not correspond with this value (and indeed may be different to each
30394 The &%log_selector%& option can be used to request the logging of additional
30395 data when a message is received. See section &<<SECTlogselector>>& below.
30399 .section "Logging deliveries"
30400 .cindex "log" "delivery line"
30401 The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for every
30402 delivery is shown in one of the examples below, for local and remote
30403 deliveries, respectively. Each example has been split into two lines in order
30404 to fit it on the page:
30406 2002-10-31 08:59:13 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 => marv
30407 <marv@hitch.fict.example> R=localuser T=local_delivery
30408 2002-10-31 09:00:10 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 =>
30409 monk@holistic.fict.example R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp
30410 H=holistic.fict.example [192.168.234.234]
30412 For ordinary local deliveries, the original address is given in angle brackets
30413 after the final delivery address, which might be a pipe or a file. If
30414 intermediate address(es) exist between the original and the final address, the
30415 last of these is given in parentheses after the final address. The R and T
30416 fields record the router and transport that were used to process the address.
30418 If a shadow transport was run after a successful local delivery, the log line
30419 for the successful delivery has an item added on the end, of the form
30421 &`ST=<`&&'shadow transport name'&&`>`&
30423 If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
30424 parentheses afterwards.
30426 .cindex "asterisk" "after IP address"
30427 When more than one address is included in a single delivery (for example, two
30428 SMTP RCPT commands in one transaction) the second and subsequent addresses are
30429 flagged with &`->`& instead of &`=>`&. When two or more messages are delivered
30430 down a single SMTP connection, an asterisk follows the IP address in the log
30431 lines for the second and subsequent messages.
30433 The generation of a reply message by a filter file gets logged as a
30434 &"delivery"& to the addressee, preceded by &">"&.
30436 The &%log_selector%& option can be used to request the logging of additional
30437 data when a message is delivered. See section &<<SECTlogselector>>& below.
30440 .section "Discarded deliveries"
30441 .cindex "discarded messages"
30442 .cindex "message" "discarded"
30443 .cindex "delivery" "discarded; logging"
30444 When a message is discarded as a result of the command &"seen finish"& being
30445 obeyed in a filter file which generates no deliveries, a log entry of the form
30447 2002-12-10 00:50:49 16auJc-0001UB-00 => discarded
30448 <low.club@bridge.example> R=userforward
30450 is written, to record why no deliveries are logged. When a message is discarded
30451 because it is aliased to &":blackhole:"& the log line is like this:
30453 1999-03-02 09:44:33 10HmaX-0005vi-00 => :blackhole:
30454 <hole@nowhere.example> R=blackhole_router
30458 .section "Deferred deliveries"
30459 When a delivery is deferred, a line of the following form is logged:
30461 2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 == marvin@endrest.example
30462 R=dnslookup T=smtp defer (146): Connection refused
30464 In the case of remote deliveries, the error is the one that was given for the
30465 last IP address that was tried. Details of individual SMTP failures are also
30466 written to the log, so the above line would be preceded by something like
30468 2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 Failed to connect to
30469 mail1.endrest.example [192.168.239.239]: Connection refused
30471 When a deferred address is skipped because its retry time has not been reached,
30472 a message is written to the log, but this can be suppressed by setting an
30473 appropriate value in &%log_selector%&.
30477 .section "Delivery failures"
30478 .cindex "delivery" "failure; logging"
30479 If a delivery fails because an address cannot be routed, a line of the
30480 following form is logged:
30482 1995-12-19 16:20:23 0tRiQz-0002Q5-00 ** jim@trek99.example
30483 <jim@trek99.example>: unknown mail domain
30485 If a delivery fails at transport time, the router and transport are shown, and
30486 the response from the remote host is included, as in this example:
30488 2002-07-11 07:14:17 17SXDU-000189-00 ** ace400@pb.example
30489 R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp: SMTP error from remote mailer
30490 after pipelined RCPT TO:<ace400@pb.example>: host
30491 pbmail3.py.example [192.168.63.111]: 553 5.3.0
30492 <ace400@pb.example>...Addressee unknown
30494 The word &"pipelined"& indicates that the SMTP PIPELINING extension was being
30495 used. See &%hosts_avoid_esmtp%& in the &(smtp)& transport for a way of
30496 disabling PIPELINING. The log lines for all forms of delivery failure are
30497 flagged with &`**`&.
30501 .section "Fake deliveries"
30502 .cindex "delivery" "fake; logging"
30503 If a delivery does not actually take place because the &%-N%& option has been
30504 used to suppress it, a normal delivery line is written to the log, except that
30505 &"=>"& is replaced by &"*>"&.
30509 .section "Completion"
30512 2002-10-31 09:00:11 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 Completed
30514 is written to the main log when a message is about to be removed from the spool
30515 at the end of its processing.
30520 .section "Summary of Fields in Log Lines"
30521 .cindex "log" "summary of fields"
30522 A summary of the field identifiers that are used in log lines is shown in
30523 the following table:
30525 &`A `& authenticator name (and optional id)
30526 &`C `& SMTP confirmation on delivery
30527 &`CV `& certificate verification status
30528 &`DN `& distinguished name from peer certificate
30529 &`DT `& on &`=>`& lines: time taken for a delivery
30530 &`F `& sender address (on delivery lines)
30531 &`H `& host name and IP address
30532 &`I `& local interface used
30533 &`id `& message id for incoming message
30534 &`P `& on &`<=`& lines: protocol used
30535 &` `& on &`=>`& and &`**`& lines: return path
30536 &`QT `& on &`=>`& lines: time spent on queue so far
30537 &` `& on &"Completed"& lines: time spent on queue
30538 &`R `& on &`<=`& lines: reference for local bounce
30539 &` `& on &`=>`& &`**`& and &`==`& lines: router name
30540 &`S `& size of message
30541 &`ST `& shadow transport name
30542 &`T `& on &`<=`& lines: message subject (topic)
30543 &` `& on &`=>`& &`**`& and &`==`& lines: transport name
30544 &`U `& local user or RFC 1413 identity
30545 &`X `& TLS cipher suite
30549 .section "Other log entries"
30550 Various other types of log entry are written from time to time. Most should be
30551 self-explanatory. Among the more common are:
30554 .cindex "retry" "time not reached"
30555 &'retry time not reached'&&~&~An address previously suffered a temporary error
30556 during routing or local delivery, and the time to retry has not yet arrived.
30557 This message is not written to an individual message log file unless it happens
30558 during the first delivery attempt.
30560 &'retry time not reached for any host'&&~&~An address previously suffered
30561 temporary errors during remote delivery, and the retry time has not yet arrived
30562 for any of the hosts to which it is routed.
30564 .cindex "spool directory" "file locked"
30565 &'spool file locked'&&~&~An attempt to deliver a message cannot proceed because
30566 some other Exim process is already working on the message. This can be quite
30567 common if queue running processes are started at frequent intervals. The
30568 &'exiwhat'& utility script can be used to find out what Exim processes are
30571 .cindex "error" "ignored"
30572 &'error ignored'&&~&~There are several circumstances that give rise to this
30575 Exim failed to deliver a bounce message whose age was greater than
30576 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&. The bounce was discarded.
30578 A filter file set up a delivery using the &"noerror"& option, and the delivery
30579 failed. The delivery was discarded.
30581 A delivery set up by a router configured with
30582 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
30583 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
30587 failed. The delivery was discarded.
30595 .section "Reducing or increasing what is logged" "SECTlogselector"
30596 .cindex "log" "selectors"
30597 By setting the &%log_selector%& global option, you can disable some of Exim's
30598 default logging, or you can request additional logging. The value of
30599 &%log_selector%& is made up of names preceded by plus or minus characters. For
30602 log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer
30604 The list of optional log items is in the following table, with the default
30605 selection marked by asterisks:
30607 &`*acl_warn_skipped `& skipped &%warn%& statement in ACL
30608 &` address_rewrite `& address rewriting
30609 &` all_parents `& all parents in => lines
30610 &` arguments `& command line arguments
30611 &`*connection_reject `& connection rejections
30612 &`*delay_delivery `& immediate delivery delayed
30613 &` deliver_time `& time taken to perform delivery
30614 &` delivery_size `& add &`S=`&&'nnn'& to => lines
30615 &`*dnslist_defer `& defers of DNS list (aka RBL) lookups
30616 &`*etrn `& ETRN commands
30617 &`*host_lookup_failed `& as it says
30618 &` ident_timeout `& timeout for ident connection
30619 &` incoming_interface `& incoming interface on <= lines
30620 &` incoming_port `& incoming port on <= lines
30621 &`*lost_incoming_connection `& as it says (includes timeouts)
30622 &` outgoing_port `& add remote port to => lines
30623 &`*queue_run `& start and end queue runs
30624 &` queue_time `& time on queue for one recipient
30625 &` queue_time_overall `& time on queue for whole message
30626 &` received_recipients `& recipients on <= lines
30627 &` received_sender `& sender on <= lines
30628 &`*rejected_header `& header contents on reject log
30629 &`*retry_defer `& &"retry time not reached"&
30630 &` return_path_on_delivery `& put return path on => and *\ lines
30631 &` sender_on_delivery `& add sender to => lines
30632 &`*sender_verify_fail `& sender verification failures
30633 &`*size_reject `& rejection because too big
30634 &`*skip_delivery `& delivery skipped in a queue run
30635 &` smtp_confirmation `& SMTP confirmation on => lines
30636 &` smtp_connection `& SMTP connections
30637 &` smtp_incomplete_transaction`& incomplete SMTP transactions
30638 &` smtp_protocol_error `& SMTP protocol errors
30639 &` smtp_syntax_error `& SMTP syntax errors
30640 &` subject `& contents of &'Subject:'& on <= lines
30641 &` tls_certificate_verified `& certificate verification status
30642 &`*tls_cipher `& TLS cipher suite on <= and => lines
30643 &` tls_peerdn `& TLS peer DN on <= and => lines
30644 &` unknown_in_list `& DNS lookup failed in list match
30646 &` all `& all of the above
30648 More details on each of these items follows:
30651 .cindex "&%warn%& statement" "log when skipping"
30652 &%acl_warn_skipped%&: When an ACL &%warn%& statement is skipped because one of
30653 its conditions cannot be evaluated, a log line to this effect is written if
30654 this log selector is set.
30656 .cindex "log" "rewriting"
30657 .cindex "rewriting" "logging"
30658 &%address_rewrite%&: This applies both to global rewrites and per-transport
30659 rewrites, but not to rewrites in filters run as an unprivileged user (because
30660 such users cannot access the log).
30662 .cindex "log" "full parentage"
30663 &%all_parents%&: Normally only the original and final addresses are logged on
30664 delivery lines; with this selector, intermediate parents are given in
30665 parentheses between them.
30667 .cindex "log" "Exim arguments"
30668 .cindex "Exim arguments" "logging"
30669 &%arguments%&: This causes Exim to write the arguments with which it was called
30670 to the main log, preceded by the current working directory. This is a debugging
30671 feature, added to make it easier to find out how certain MUAs call
30672 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&. The logging does not happen if Exim has given up root
30673 privilege because it was called with the &%-C%& or &%-D%& options. Arguments
30674 that are empty or that contain white space are quoted. Non-printing characters
30675 are shown as escape sequences. This facility cannot log unrecognized arguments,
30676 because the arguments are checked before the configuration file is read. The
30677 only way to log such cases is to interpose a script such as &_util/logargs.sh_&
30678 between the caller and Exim.
30680 .cindex "log" "connection rejections"
30681 &%connection_reject%&: A log entry is written whenever an incoming SMTP
30682 connection is rejected, for whatever reason.
30684 .cindex "log" "delayed delivery"
30685 .cindex "delayed delivery" "logging"
30686 &%delay_delivery%&: A log entry is written whenever a delivery process is not
30687 started for an incoming message because the load is too high or too many
30688 messages were received on one connection. Logging does not occur if no delivery
30689 process is started because &%queue_only%& is set or &%-odq%& was used.
30691 .cindex "log" "delivery duration"
30692 &%deliver_time%&: For each delivery, the amount of real time it has taken to
30693 perform the actual delivery is logged as DT=<&'time'&>, for example, &`DT=1s`&.
30695 .cindex "log" "message size on delivery"
30696 .cindex "size" "of message"
30697 &%delivery_size%&: For each delivery, the size of message delivered is added to
30698 the &"=>"& line, tagged with S=.
30700 .cindex "log" "dnslist defer"
30701 .cindex "DNS list" "logging defer"
30702 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
30703 &%dnslist_defer%&: A log entry is written if an attempt to look up a host in a
30704 DNS black list suffers a temporary error.
30706 .cindex "log" "ETRN commands"
30707 .cindex "ETRN" "logging"
30708 &%etrn%&: Every legal ETRN command that is received is logged, before the ACL
30709 is run to determine whether or not it is actually accepted. An invalid ETRN
30710 command, or one received within a message transaction is not logged by this
30711 selector (see &%smtp_syntax_error%& and &%smtp_protocol_error%&).
30713 .cindex "log" "host lookup failure"
30714 &%host_lookup_failed%&: When a lookup of a host's IP addresses fails to find
30715 any addresses, or when a lookup of an IP address fails to find a host name, a
30716 log line is written. This logging does not apply to direct DNS lookups when
30717 routing email addresses, but it does apply to &"byname"& lookups.
30719 .cindex "log" "ident timeout"
30720 .cindex "RFC 1413" "logging timeout"
30721 &%ident_timeout%&: A log line is written whenever an attempt to connect to a
30722 client's ident port times out.
30724 .cindex "log" "incoming interface"
30725 .cindex "interface" "logging"
30726 &%incoming_interface%&: The interface on which a message was received is added
30727 to the &"<="& line as an IP address in square brackets, tagged by I= and
30728 followed by a colon and the port number. The local interface and port are also
30729 added to other SMTP log lines, for example &"SMTP connection from"&, and to
30732 .cindex "log" "incoming remote port"
30733 .cindex "port" "logging remote"
30734 .cindex "TCP/IP" "logging incoming remote port"
30735 .cindex "&$sender_fullhost$&"
30736 .cindex "&$sender_rcvhost$&"
30737 &%incoming_port%&: The remote port number from which a message was received is
30738 added to log entries and &'Received:'& header lines, following the IP address
30739 in square brackets, and separated from it by a colon. This is implemented by
30740 changing the value that is put in the &$sender_fullhost$& and
30741 &$sender_rcvhost$& variables. Recording the remote port number has become more
30742 important with the widening use of NAT (see RFC 2505).
30744 .cindex "log" "dropped connection"
30745 &%lost_incoming_connection%&: A log line is written when an incoming SMTP
30746 connection is unexpectedly dropped.
30748 .cindex "log" "outgoing remote port"
30749 .cindex "port" "logging outgoint remote"
30750 .cindex "TCP/IP" "logging ougtoing remote port"
30751 &%outgoing_port%&: The remote port number is added to delivery log lines (those
30752 containing => tags) following the IP address. This option is not included in
30753 the default setting, because for most ordinary configurations, the remote port
30754 number is always 25 (the SMTP port).
30756 .cindex "log" "queue run"
30757 .cindex "queue runner" "logging"
30758 &%queue_run%&: The start and end of every queue run are logged.
30760 .cindex "log" "queue time"
30761 &%queue_time%&: The amount of time the message has been in the queue on the
30762 local host is logged as QT=<&'time'&> on delivery (&`=>`&) lines, for example,
30763 &`QT=3m45s`&. The clock starts when Exim starts to receive the message, so it
30764 includes reception time as well as the delivery time for the current address.
30765 This means that it may be longer than the difference between the arrival and
30766 delivery log line times, because the arrival log line is not written until the
30767 message has been successfully received.
30769 &%queue_time_overall%&: The amount of time the message has been in the queue on
30770 the local host is logged as QT=<&'time'&> on &"Completed"& lines, for
30771 example, &`QT=3m45s`&. The clock starts when Exim starts to receive the
30772 message, so it includes reception time as well as the total delivery time.
30774 .cindex "log" "recipients"
30775 &%received_recipients%&: The recipients of a message are listed in the main log
30776 as soon as the message is received. The list appears at the end of the log line
30777 that is written when a message is received, preceded by the word &"for"&. The
30778 addresses are listed after they have been qualified, but before any rewriting
30780 Recipients that were discarded by an ACL for MAIL or RCPT do not appear
30783 .cindex "log" "sender reception"
30784 &%received_sender%&: The unrewritten original sender of a message is added to
30785 the end of the log line that records the message's arrival, after the word
30786 &"from"& (before the recipients if &%received_recipients%& is also set).
30788 .cindex "log" "header lines for rejection"
30789 &%rejected_header%&: If a message's header has been received at the time a
30790 rejection is written to the reject log, the complete header is added to the
30791 log. Header logging can be turned off individually for messages that are
30792 rejected by the &[local_scan()]& function (see section &<<SECTapiforloc>>&).
30794 .cindex "log" "retry defer"
30795 &%retry_defer%&: A log line is written if a delivery is deferred because a
30796 retry time has not yet been reached. However, this &"retry time not reached"&
30797 message is always omitted from individual message logs after the first delivery
30800 .cindex "log" "return path"
30801 &%return_path_on_delivery%&: The return path that is being transmitted with
30802 the message is included in delivery and bounce lines, using the tag P=.
30803 This is omitted if no delivery actually happens, for example, if routing fails,
30804 or if delivery is to &_/dev/null_& or to &`:blackhole:`&.
30806 .cindex "log" "sender on delivery"
30807 &%sender_on_delivery%&: The message's sender address is added to every delivery
30808 and bounce line, tagged by F= (for &"from"&).
30809 This is the original sender that was received with the message; it is not
30810 necessarily the same as the outgoing return path.
30812 .cindex "log" "sender verify failure"
30813 &%sender_verify_failure%&: If this selector is unset, the separate log line
30814 that gives details of a sender verification failure is not written. Log lines
30815 for the rejection of SMTP commands contain just &"sender verify failed"&, so
30816 some detail is lost.
30818 .cindex "log" "size rejection"
30819 &%size_reject%&: A log line is written whenever a message is rejected because
30822 .cindex "log" "frozen messages; skipped"
30823 .cindex "frozen messages" "logging skipping"
30824 &%skip_delivery%&: A log line is written whenever a message is skipped during a
30825 queue run because it is frozen or because another process is already delivering
30827 .cindex "&""spool file is locked""&"
30828 The message that is written is &"spool file is locked"&.
30830 .cindex "log" "smtp confirmation"
30831 .cindex "SMTP" "logging confirmation"
30832 &%smtp_confirmation%&: The response to the final &"."& in the SMTP dialogue for
30833 outgoing messages is added to delivery log lines in the form &`C=`&<&'text'&>.
30834 A number of MTAs (including Exim) return an identifying string in this
30837 .cindex "log" "SMTP connections"
30838 .cindex "SMTP" "logging connections"
30839 &%smtp_connection%&: A log line is written whenever an SMTP connection is
30840 established or closed, unless the connection is from a host that matches
30841 &%hosts_connection_nolog%&. (In contrast, &%lost_incoming_connection%& applies
30842 only when the closure is unexpected.) This applies to connections from local
30843 processes that use &%-bs%& as well as to TCP/IP connections. If a connection is
30844 dropped in the middle of a message, a log line is always written, whether or
30845 not this selector is set, but otherwise nothing is written at the start and end
30846 of connections unless this selector is enabled.
30848 For TCP/IP connections to an Exim daemon, the current number of connections is
30849 included in the log message for each new connection, but note that the count is
30850 reset if the daemon is restarted.
30851 Also, because connections are closed (and the closure is logged) in
30852 subprocesses, the count may not include connections that have been closed but
30853 whose termination the daemon has not yet noticed. Thus, while it is possible to
30854 match up the opening and closing of connections in the log, the value of the
30855 logged counts may not be entirely accurate.
30857 .cindex "log" "SMTP transaction; incomplete"
30858 .cindex "SMTP" "logging incomplete transactions"
30859 &%smtp_incomplete_transaction%&: When a mail transaction is aborted by
30860 RSET, QUIT, loss of connection, or otherwise, the incident is logged,
30861 and the message sender plus any accepted recipients are included in the log
30862 line. This can provide evidence of dictionary attacks.
30864 .cindex "log" "SMTP protocol error"
30865 .cindex "SMTP" "logging protocol error"
30866 &%smtp_protocol_error%&: A log line is written for every SMTP protocol error
30867 encountered. Exim does not have perfect detection of all protocol errors
30868 because of transmission delays and the use of pipelining. If PIPELINING has
30869 been advertised to a client, an Exim server assumes that the client will use
30870 it, and therefore it does not count &"expected"& errors (for example, RCPT
30871 received after rejecting MAIL) as protocol errors.
30873 .cindex "SMTP" "logging syntax errors"
30874 .cindex "SMTP" "syntax errors; logging"
30875 .cindex "SMTP" "unknown command; logging"
30876 .cindex "log" "unknown SMTP command"
30877 .cindex "log" "SMTP syntax error"
30878 &%smtp_syntax_error%&: A log line is written for every SMTP syntax error
30879 encountered. An unrecognized command is treated as a syntax error. For an
30880 external connection, the host identity is given; for an internal connection
30881 using &%-bs%& the sender identification (normally the calling user) is given.
30883 .cindex "log" "subject"
30884 .cindex "subject" "logging"
30885 &%subject%&: The subject of the message is added to the arrival log line,
30886 preceded by &"T="& (T for &"topic"&, since S is already used for &"size"&).
30887 Any MIME &"words"& in the subject are decoded. The &%print_topbitchars%& option
30888 specifies whether characters with values greater than 127 should be logged
30889 unchanged, or whether they should be rendered as escape sequences.
30891 .cindex "log" "certificate verification"
30892 &%tls_certificate_verified%&: An extra item is added to <= and => log lines
30893 when TLS is in use. The item is &`CV=yes`& if the peer's certificate was
30894 verified, and &`CV=no`& if not.
30896 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
30897 .cindex "TLS" "logging cipher"
30898 &%tls_cipher%&: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
30899 connection, the cipher suite used is added to the log line, preceded by X=.
30901 .cindex "log" "TLS peer DN"
30902 .cindex "TLS" "logging peer DN"
30903 &%tls_peerdn%&: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
30904 connection, and a certificate is supplied by the remote host, the peer DN is
30905 added to the log line, preceded by DN=.
30907 .cindex "log" "DNS failure in list"
30908 &%unknown_in_list%&: This setting causes a log entry to be written when the
30909 result of a list match is failure because a DNS lookup failed.
30913 .section "Message log"
30914 .cindex "message" "log file for"
30915 .cindex "log" "message log; description of"
30916 .cindex "&_msglog_& directory"
30917 .cindex "&%preserve_message_logs%&"
30918 In addition to the general log files, Exim writes a log file for each message
30919 that it handles. The names of these per-message logs are the message ids, and
30920 they are kept in the &_msglog_& sub-directory of the spool directory. Each
30921 message log contains copies of the log lines that apply to the message. This
30922 makes it easier to inspect the status of an individual message without having
30923 to search the main log. A message log is deleted when processing of the message
30924 is complete, unless &%preserve_message_logs%& is set, but this should be used
30925 only with great care because they can fill up your disk very quickly.
30927 On a heavily loaded system, it may be desirable to disable the use of
30928 per-message logs, in order to reduce disk I/O. This can be done by setting the
30929 &%message_logs%& option false.
30933 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30934 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30936 .chapter "Exim utilities" "CHAPutils"
30937 .scindex IIDutils "utilities"
30938 A number of utility scripts and programs are supplied with Exim and are
30939 described in this chapter. There is also the Exim Monitor, which is covered in
30940 the next chapter. The utilities described here are:
30942 .itable none 0 0 4 2* left 8* left 30* left 40* left
30943 .row "" &<<SECTfinoutwha>>& &'exiwhat'& &&&
30944 "list what Exim processes are doing"
30945 .row "" &<<SECTgreptheque>>& &'exiqgrep'& "grep the queue"
30946 .row "" &<<SECTsumtheque>>& &'exiqsumm'& "summarize the queue"
30947 .row "" &<<SECTextspeinf>>& &'exigrep'& "search the main log"
30948 .row "" &<<SECTexipick>>& &'exipick'& "select messages on &&&
30950 .row "" &<<SECTcyclogfil>>& &'exicyclog'& "cycle (rotate) log files"
30951 .row "" &<<SECTmailstat>>& &'eximstats'& &&&
30952 "extract statistics from the log"
30953 .row "" &<<SECTcheckaccess>>& &'exim_checkaccess'& &&&
30954 "check address acceptance from given IP"
30955 .row "" &<<SECTdbmbuild>>& &'exim_dbmbuild'& "build a DBM file"
30956 .row "" &<<SECTfinindret>>& &'exinext'& "extract retry information"
30957 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_dumpdb'& "dump a hints database"
30958 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_tidydb'& "clean up a hints database"
30959 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_fixdb'& "patch a hints database"
30960 .row "" &<<SECTmailboxmaint>>& &'exim_lock'& "lock a mailbox file"
30963 Another utility that might be of use to sites with many MTAs is Tom Kistner's
30964 &'exilog'&. It provides log visualizations across multiple Exim servers. See
30965 &url(http://duncanthrax.net/exilog/) for details.
30970 .section "Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat)" "SECTfinoutwha"
30971 .cindex "&'exiwhat'&"
30972 .cindex "process" "querying"
30974 On operating systems that can restart a system call after receiving a signal
30975 (most modern OS), an Exim process responds to the SIGUSR1 signal by writing
30976 a line describing what it is doing to the file &_exim-process.info_& in the
30977 Exim spool directory. The &'exiwhat'& script sends the signal to all Exim
30978 processes it can find, having first emptied the file. It then waits for one
30979 second to allow the Exim processes to react before displaying the results. In
30980 order to run &'exiwhat'& successfully you have to have sufficient privilege to
30981 send the signal to the Exim processes, so it is normally run as root.
30983 &*Warning*&: This is not an efficient process. It is intended for occasional
30984 use by system administrators. It is not sensible, for example, to set up a
30985 script that sends SIGUSR1 signals to Exim processes at short intervals.
30988 Unfortunately, the &'ps'& command that &'exiwhat'& uses to find Exim processes
30989 varies in different operating systems. Not only are different options used,
30990 but the format of the output is different. For this reason, there are some
30991 system configuration options that configure exactly how &'exiwhat'& works. If
30992 it doesn't seem to be working for you, check the following compile-time
30995 &`EXIWHAT_PS_CMD `& the command for running &'ps'&
30996 &`EXIWHAT_PS_ARG `& the argument for &'ps'&
30997 &`EXIWHAT_EGREP_ARG `& the argument for &'egrep'& to select from &'ps'& output
30998 &`EXIWHAT_KILL_ARG `& the argument for the &'kill'& command
31000 An example of typical output from &'exiwhat'& is
31002 164 daemon: -q1h, listening on port 25
31003 10483 running queue: waiting for 0tAycK-0002ij-00 (10492)
31004 10492 delivering 0tAycK-0002ij-00 to mail.ref.example
31005 [10.19.42.42] (editor@ref.example)
31006 10592 handling incoming call from [192.168.243.242]
31007 10628 accepting a local non-SMTP message
31009 The first number in the output line is the process number. The third line has
31010 been split here, in order to fit it on the page.
31014 .section "Selective queue listing (exiqgrep)" "SECTgreptheque"
31015 .cindex "&'exiqgrep'&"
31016 .cindex "queue" "grepping"
31017 This utility is a Perl script contributed by Matt Hubbard. It runs
31021 to obtain a queue listing with undelivered recipients only, and then greps the
31022 output to select messages that match given criteria. The following selection
31023 options are available:
31026 .vitem &*-f*&&~<&'regex'&>
31027 Match the sender address. The field that is tested is enclosed in angle
31028 brackets, so you can test for bounce messages with
31032 .vitem &*-r*&&~<&'regex'&>
31033 Match a recipient address. The field that is tested is not enclosed in angle
31036 .vitem &*-s*&&~<&'regex'&>
31037 Match against the size field.
31039 .vitem &*-y*&&~<&'seconds'&>
31040 Match messages that are younger than the given time.
31042 .vitem &*-o*&&~<&'seconds'&>
31043 Match messages that are older than the given time.
31046 Match only frozen messages.
31049 Match only non-frozen messages.
31052 The following options control the format of the output:
31056 Display only the count of matching messages.
31059 Long format &-- display the full message information as output by Exim. This is
31063 Display message ids only.
31066 Brief format &-- one line per message.
31069 Display messages in reverse order.
31072 There is one more option, &%-h%&, which outputs a list of options.
31076 .section "Summarising the queue (exiqsumm)" "SECTsumtheque"
31077 .cindex "&'exiqsumm'&"
31078 .cindex "queue" "summary"
31079 The &'exiqsumm'& utility is a Perl script which reads the output of &`exim
31080 -bp`& and produces a summary of the messages on the queue. Thus, you use it by
31081 running a command such as
31083 exim -bp | exiqsumm
31085 The output consists of one line for each domain that has messages waiting for
31086 it, as in the following example:
31088 3 2322 74m 66m msn.com.example
31090 Each line lists the number of
31091 pending deliveries for a domain, their total volume, and the length of time
31092 that the oldest and the newest messages have been waiting. Note that the number
31093 of pending deliveries is greater than the number of messages when messages
31094 have more than one recipient.
31096 A summary line is output at the end. By default the output is sorted on the
31097 domain name, but &'exiqsumm'& has the options &%-a%& and &%-c%&, which cause
31098 the output to be sorted by oldest message and by count of messages,
31101 The output of &'exim -bp'& contains the original addresses in the message, so
31102 this also applies to the output from &'exiqsumm'&. No domains from addresses
31103 generated by aliasing or forwarding are included (unless the &%one_time%&
31104 option of the &(redirect)& router has been used to convert them into &"top
31105 level"& addresses).
31110 .section "Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep)" &&&
31112 .cindex "&'exigrep'&"
31113 .cindex "log" "extracts; grepping for"
31114 The &'exigrep'& utility is a Perl script that searches one or more main log
31115 files for entries that match a given pattern. When it finds a match, it
31116 extracts all the log entries for the relevant message, not just those that
31117 match the pattern. Thus, &'exigrep'& can extract complete log entries for a
31118 given message, or all mail for a given user, or for a given host, for example.
31119 The input files can be in Exim log format or syslog format.
31121 If a matching log line is not associated with a specific message, it is always
31122 included in &'exigrep'&'s output. The usage is:
31124 &`exigrep [-l] [-t<`&&'n'&&`>] <`&&'pattern'&&`> [<`&&'log file'&&`>] ...`&
31126 The &%-t%& argument specifies a number of seconds. It adds an additional
31127 condition for message selection. Messages that are complete are shown only if
31128 they spent more than <&'n'&> seconds on the queue.
31130 The &%-l%& flag means &"literal"&, that is, treat all characters in the
31131 pattern as standing for themselves. Otherwise the pattern must be a Perl
31132 regular expression. The pattern match is case-insensitive. If no file names are
31133 given on the command line, the standard input is read.
31135 If the location of a &'zcat'& command is known from the definition of
31136 ZCAT_COMMAND in &_Local/Makefile_&, &'exigrep'& automatically passes any file
31137 whose name ends in COMPRESS_SUFFIX through &'zcat'& as it searches it.
31140 .section "Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick)" "SECTexipick"
31141 .cindex "&'exipick'&"
31142 John Jetmore's &'exipick'& utility is included in the Exim distribution. It
31143 lists messages from the queue according to a variety of criteria. For details,
31150 .section "Cycling log files (exicyclog)" "SECTcyclogfil"
31151 .cindex "log" "cycling local files"
31152 .cindex "cycling logs"
31153 .cindex "&'exicyclog'&"
31154 The &'exicyclog'& script can be used to cycle (rotate) &'mainlog'& and
31155 &'rejectlog'& files. This is not necessary if only syslog is being used, or if
31156 you are using log files with datestamps in their names (see section
31157 &<<SECTdatlogfil>>&). Some operating systems have their own standard mechanisms
31158 for log cycling, and these can be used instead of &'exicyclog'& if preferred.
31159 There are two command line options for &'exicyclog'&:
31161 &%-k%& <&'count'&> specifies the number of log files to keep, overriding the
31162 default that is set when Exim is built. The default default is 10.
31164 &%-l%& <&'path'&> specifies the log file path, in the same format as Exim's
31165 &%log_file_path%& option (for example, &`/var/log/exim_%slog`&), again
31166 overriding the script's default, which is to find the setting from Exim's
31170 Each time &'exicyclog'& is run the file names get &"shuffled down"& by one. If
31171 the main log file name is &_mainlog_& (the default) then when &'exicyclog'& is
31172 run &_mainlog_& becomes &_mainlog.01_&, the previous &_mainlog.01_& becomes
31173 &_mainlog.02_& and so on, up to the limit that is set in the script or by the
31174 &%-k%& option. Log files whose numbers exceed the limit are discarded. Reject
31175 logs are handled similarly.
31177 If the limit is greater than 99, the script uses 3-digit numbers such as
31178 &_mainlog.001_&, &_mainlog.002_&, etc. If you change from a number less than 99
31179 to one that is greater, or &'vice versa'&, you will have to fix the names of
31180 any existing log files.
31182 If no &_mainlog_& file exists, the script does nothing. Files that &"drop off"&
31183 the end are deleted. All files with numbers greater than 01 are compressed,
31184 using a compression command which is configured by the COMPRESS_COMMAND
31185 setting in &_Local/Makefile_&. It is usual to run &'exicyclog'& daily from a
31186 root &%crontab%& entry of the form
31188 1 0 * * * su exim -c /usr/exim/bin/exicyclog
31190 assuming you have used the name &"exim"& for the Exim user. You can run
31191 &'exicyclog'& as root if you wish, but there is no need.
31195 .section "Mail statistics (eximstats)" "SECTmailstat"
31196 .cindex "statistics"
31197 .cindex "&'eximstats'&"
31198 A Perl script called &'eximstats'& is provided for extracting statistical
31199 information from log files. The output is either plain text, or HTML.
31200 Exim log files are also suported by the &'Lire'& system produced by the
31201 LogReport Foundation &url(http://www.logreport.org).
31203 The &'eximstats'& script has been hacked about quite a bit over time. The
31204 latest version is the result of some extensive revision by Steve Campbell. A
31205 lot of information is given by default, but there are options for suppressing
31206 various parts of it. Following any options, the arguments to the script are a
31207 list of files, which should be main log files. For example:
31209 eximstats -nr /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog.01
31211 By default, &'eximstats'& extracts information about the number and volume of
31212 messages received from or delivered to various hosts. The information is sorted
31213 both by message count and by volume, and the top fifty hosts in each category
31214 are listed on the standard output. Similar information, based on email
31215 addresses or domains instead of hosts can be requested by means of various
31216 options. For messages delivered and received locally, similar statistics are
31217 also produced per user.
31219 The output also includes total counts and statistics about delivery errors, and
31220 histograms showing the number of messages received and deliveries made in each
31221 hour of the day. A delivery with more than one address in its envelope (for
31222 example, an SMTP transaction with more than one RCPT command) is counted
31223 as a single delivery by &'eximstats'&.
31225 Though normally more deliveries than receipts are reported (as messages may
31226 have multiple recipients), it is possible for &'eximstats'& to report more
31227 messages received than delivered, even though the queue is empty at the start
31228 and end of the period in question. If an incoming message contains no valid
31229 recipients, no deliveries are recorded for it. A bounce message is handled as
31230 an entirely separate message.
31232 &'eximstats'& always outputs a grand total summary giving the volume and number
31233 of messages received and deliveries made, and the number of hosts involved in
31234 each case. It also outputs the number of messages that were delayed (that is,
31235 not completely delivered at the first attempt), and the number that had at
31236 least one address that failed.
31238 The remainder of the output is in sections that can be independently disabled
31239 or modified by various options. It consists of a summary of deliveries by
31240 transport, histograms of messages received and delivered per time interval
31241 (default per hour), information about the time messages spent on the queue,
31242 a list of relayed messages, lists of the top fifty sending hosts, local
31243 senders, destination hosts, and destination local users by count and by volume,
31244 and a list of delivery errors that occurred.
31246 The relay information lists messages that were actually relayed, that is, they
31247 came from a remote host and were directly delivered to some other remote host,
31248 without being processed (for example, for aliasing or forwarding) locally.
31250 There are quite a few options for &'eximstats'& to control exactly what it
31251 outputs. These are documented in the Perl script itself, and can be extracted
31252 by running the command &(perldoc)& on the script. For example:
31254 perldoc /usr/exim/bin/eximstats
31257 .section "Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess)" "SECTcheckaccess"
31258 .cindex "&'exim_checkaccess'&"
31259 .cindex "policy control" "checking access"
31260 .cindex "checking access"
31261 The &%-bh%& command line argument allows you to run a fake SMTP session with
31262 debugging output, in order to check what Exim is doing when it is applying
31263 policy controls to incoming SMTP mail. However, not everybody is sufficiently
31264 familiar with the SMTP protocol to be able to make full use of &%-bh%&, and
31265 sometimes you just want to answer the question &"Does this address have
31266 access?"& without bothering with any further details.
31268 The &'exim_checkaccess'& utility is a &"packaged"& version of &%-bh%&. It takes
31269 two arguments, an IP address and an email address:
31271 exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example
31273 The utility runs a call to Exim with the &%-bh%& option, to test whether the
31274 given email address would be accepted in a RCPT command in a TCP/IP
31275 connection from the host with the given IP address. The output of the utility
31276 is either the word &"accepted"&, or the SMTP error response, for example:
31279 550 Relay not permitted
31281 When running this test, the utility uses &`<>`& as the envelope sender address
31282 for the MAIL command, but you can change this by providing additional
31283 options. These are passed directly to the Exim command. For example, to specify
31284 that the test is to be run with the sender address &'himself@there.example'&
31287 exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example \
31288 -f himself@there.example
31290 Note that these additional Exim command line items must be given after the two
31291 mandatory arguments.
31293 Because the &%exim_checkaccess%& uses &%-bh%&, it does not perform callouts
31294 while running its checks. You can run checks that include callouts by using
31295 &%-bhc%&, but this is not yet available in a &"packaged"& form.
31299 .section "Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild)" "SECTdbmbuild"
31300 .cindex "DBM" "building dbm files"
31301 .cindex "building DBM files"
31302 .cindex "&'exim_dbmbuild'&"
31303 .cindex "lower casing"
31304 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
31305 The &'exim_dbmbuild'& program reads an input file containing keys and data in
31306 the format used by the &(lsearch)& lookup (see section
31307 &<<SECTsinglekeylookups>>&). It writes a DBM file using the lower-cased alias
31308 names as keys and the remainder of the information as data. The lower-casing
31309 can be prevented by calling the program with the &%-nolc%& option.
31311 A terminating zero is included as part of the key string. This is expected by
31312 the &(dbm)& lookup type. However, if the option &%-nozero%& is given,
31313 &'exim_dbmbuild'& creates files without terminating zeroes in either the key
31314 strings or the data strings. The &(dbmnz)& lookup type can be used with such
31317 The program requires two arguments: the name of the input file (which can be a
31318 single hyphen to indicate the standard input), and the name of the output file.
31319 It creates the output under a temporary name, and then renames it if all went
31323 If the native DB interface is in use (USE_DB is set in a compile-time
31324 configuration file &-- this is common in free versions of Unix) the two file
31325 names must be different, because in this mode the Berkeley DB functions create
31326 a single output file using exactly the name given. For example,
31328 exim_dbmbuild /etc/aliases /etc/aliases.db
31330 reads the system alias file and creates a DBM version of it in
31331 &_/etc/aliases.db_&.
31333 In systems that use the &'ndbm'& routines (mostly proprietary versions of
31334 Unix), two files are used, with the suffixes &_.dir_& and &_.pag_&. In this
31335 environment, the suffixes are added to the second argument of
31336 &'exim_dbmbuild'&, so it can be the same as the first. This is also the case
31337 when the Berkeley functions are used in compatibility mode (though this is not
31338 recommended), because in that case it adds a &_.db_& suffix to the file name.
31340 If a duplicate key is encountered, the program outputs a warning, and when it
31341 finishes, its return code is 1 rather than zero, unless the &%-noduperr%&
31342 option is used. By default, only the first of a set of duplicates is used &--
31343 this makes it compatible with &(lsearch)& lookups. There is an option
31344 &%-lastdup%& which causes it to use the data for the last duplicate instead.
31345 There is also an option &%-nowarn%&, which stops it listing duplicate keys to
31346 &%stderr%&. For other errors, where it doesn't actually make a new file, the
31352 .section "Finding individual retry times (exinext)" "SECTfinindret"
31353 .cindex "retry" "times"
31354 .cindex "&'exinext'&"
31355 A utility called &'exinext'& (mostly a Perl script) provides the ability to
31356 fish specific information out of the retry database. Given a mail domain (or a
31357 complete address), it looks up the hosts for that domain, and outputs any retry
31358 information for the hosts or for the domain. At present, the retry information
31359 is obtained by running &'exim_dumpdb'& (see below) and post-processing the
31360 output. For example:
31362 $ exinext piglet@milne.fict.example
31363 kanga.milne.example:192.168.8.1 error 146: Connection refused
31364 first failed: 21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
31365 last tried: 21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
31366 next try at: 21-Feb-1996 15:02:34
31367 roo.milne.example:192.168.8.3 error 146: Connection refused
31368 first failed: 20-Jan-1996 13:12:08
31369 last tried: 21-Feb-1996 11:42:03
31370 next try at: 21-Feb-1996 19:42:03
31371 past final cutoff time
31373 You can also give &'exinext'& a local part, without a domain, and it
31374 will give any retry information for that local part in your default domain.
31375 A message id can be used to obtain retry information pertaining to a specific
31376 message. This exists only when an attempt to deliver a message to a remote host
31377 suffers a message-specific error (see section &<<SECToutSMTPerr>>&).
31378 &'exinext'& is not particularly efficient, but then it is not expected to be
31381 The &'exinext'& utility calls Exim to find out information such as the location
31382 of the spool directory. The utility has &%-C%& and &%-D%& options, which are
31383 passed on to the &'exim'& commands. The first specifies an alternate Exim
31384 configuration file, and the second sets macros for use within the configuration
31385 file. These features are mainly to help in testing, but might also be useful in
31386 environments where more than one configuration file is in use.
31390 .section "Hints database maintenance" "SECThindatmai"
31391 .cindex "hints database" "maintenance"
31392 .cindex "maintaining Exim's hints database"
31393 Three utility programs are provided for maintaining the DBM files that Exim
31394 uses to contain its delivery hint information. Each program requires two
31395 arguments. The first specifies the name of Exim's spool directory, and the
31396 second is the name of the database it is to operate on. These are as follows:
31399 &'retry'&: the database of retry information
31401 &'wait-'&<&'transport name'&>: databases of information about messages waiting
31404 &'callout'&: the callout cache
31406 &'ratelimit'&: the data for implementing the ratelimit ACL condition
31408 &'misc'&: other hints data
31411 The &'misc'& database is used for
31414 Serializing ETRN runs (when &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& is set)
31416 Serializing delivery to a specific host (when &%serialize_hosts%& is set in an
31417 &(smtp)& transport)
31422 .section "exim_dumpdb"
31423 .cindex "&'exim_dumpdb'&"
31424 The entire contents of a database are written to the standard output by the
31425 &'exim_dumpdb'& program, which has no options or arguments other than the
31426 spool and database names. For example, to dump the retry database:
31428 exim_dumpdb /var/spool/exim retry
31430 Two lines of output are produced for each entry:
31432 T:mail.ref.example:192.168.242.242 146 77 Connection refused
31433 31-Oct-1995 12:00:12 02-Nov-1995 12:21:39 02-Nov-1995 20:21:39 *
31435 The first item on the first line is the key of the record. It starts with one
31436 of the letters R, or T, depending on whether it refers to a routing or
31437 transport retry. For a local delivery, the next part is the local address; for
31438 a remote delivery it is the name of the remote host, followed by its failing IP
31439 address (unless &%no_retry_include_ip_address%& is set on the &(smtp)&
31440 transport). If the remote port is not the standard one (port 25), it is added
31441 to the IP address. Then there follows an error code, an additional error code,
31442 and a textual description of the error.
31444 The three times on the second line are the time of first failure, the time of
31445 the last delivery attempt, and the computed time for the next attempt. The line
31446 ends with an asterisk if the cutoff time for the last retry rule has been
31449 Each output line from &'exim_dumpdb'& for the &'wait-xxx'& databases
31450 consists of a host name followed by a list of ids for messages that are or were
31451 waiting to be delivered to that host. If there are a very large number for any
31452 one host, continuation records, with a sequence number added to the host name,
31453 may be seen. The data in these records is often out of date, because a message
31454 may be routed to several alternative hosts, and Exim makes no effort to keep
31459 .section "exim_tidydb"
31460 .cindex "&'exim_tidydb'&"
31461 The &'exim_tidydb'& utility program is used to tidy up the contents of a hints
31462 database. If run with no options, it removes all records that are more than 30
31463 days old. The age is calculated from the date and time that the record was last
31464 updated. Note that, in the case of the retry database, it is &'not'& the time
31465 since the first delivery failure. Information about a host that has been down
31466 for more than 30 days will remain in the database, provided that the record is
31467 updated sufficiently often.
31469 The cutoff date can be altered by means of the &%-t%& option, which must be
31470 followed by a time. For example, to remove all records older than a week from
31471 the retry database:
31473 exim_tidydb -t 7d /var/spool/exim retry
31475 Both the &'wait-xxx'& and &'retry'& databases contain items that involve
31476 message ids. In the former these appear as data in records keyed by host &--
31477 they were messages that were waiting for that host &-- and in the latter they
31478 are the keys for retry information for messages that have suffered certain
31479 types of error. When &'exim_tidydb'& is run, a check is made to ensure that
31480 message ids in database records are those of messages that are still on the
31481 queue. Message ids for messages that no longer exist are removed from
31482 &'wait-xxx'& records, and if this leaves any records empty, they are deleted.
31483 For the &'retry'& database, records whose keys are non-existent message ids are
31484 removed. The &'exim_tidydb'& utility outputs comments on the standard output
31485 whenever it removes information from the database.
31487 Certain records are automatically removed by Exim when they are no longer
31488 needed, but others are not. For example, if all the MX hosts for a domain are
31489 down, a retry record is created for each one. If the primary MX host comes back
31490 first, its record is removed when Exim successfully delivers to it, but the
31491 records for the others remain because Exim has not tried to use those hosts.
31493 It is important, therefore, to run &'exim_tidydb'& periodically on all the
31494 hints databases. You should do this at a quiet time of day, because it requires
31495 a database to be locked (and therefore inaccessible to Exim) while it does its
31496 work. Removing records from a DBM file does not normally make the file smaller,
31497 but all the common DBM libraries are able to re-use the space that is released.
31498 After an initial phase of increasing in size, the databases normally reach a
31499 point at which they no longer get any bigger, as long as they are regularly
31502 &*Warning*&: If you never run &'exim_tidydb'&, the space used by the hints
31503 databases is likely to keep on increasing.
31508 .section "exim_fixdb"
31509 .cindex "&'exim_fixdb'&"
31510 The &'exim_fixdb'& program is a utility for interactively modifying databases.
31511 Its main use is for testing Exim, but it might also be occasionally useful for
31512 getting round problems in a live system. It has no options, and its interface
31513 is somewhat crude. On entry, it prompts for input with a right angle-bracket. A
31514 key of a database record can then be entered, and the data for that record is
31517 If &"d"& is typed at the next prompt, the entire record is deleted. For all
31518 except the &'retry'& database, that is the only operation that can be carried
31519 out. For the &'retry'& database, each field is output preceded by a number, and
31520 data for individual fields can be changed by typing the field number followed
31521 by new data, for example:
31525 resets the time of the next delivery attempt. Time values are given as a
31526 sequence of digit pairs for year, month, day, hour, and minute. Colons can be
31527 used as optional separators.
31532 .section "Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock)" "SECTmailboxmaint"
31533 .cindex "mailbox" "maintenance"
31534 .cindex "&'exim_lock'&"
31535 .cindex "locking mailboxes"
31536 The &'exim_lock'& utility locks a mailbox file using the same algorithm as
31537 Exim. For a discussion of locking issues, see section &<<SECTopappend>>&.
31538 &'Exim_lock'& can be used to prevent any modification of a mailbox by Exim or
31539 a user agent while investigating a problem. The utility requires the name of
31540 the file as its first argument. If the locking is successful, the second
31541 argument is run as a command (using C's &[system()]& function); if there is no
31542 second argument, the value of the SHELL environment variable is used; if this
31543 is unset or empty, &_/bin/sh_& is run. When the command finishes, the mailbox
31544 is unlocked and the utility ends. The following options are available:
31548 Use &[fcntl()]& locking on the open mailbox.
31551 Use &[flock()]& locking on the open mailbox, provided the operating system
31554 .vitem &%-interval%&
31555 This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it sets the
31556 interval to sleep between retries (default 3).
31558 .vitem &%-lockfile%&
31559 Create a lock file before opening the mailbox.
31562 Lock the mailbox using MBX rules.
31565 Suppress verification output.
31567 .vitem &%-retries%&
31568 This must be followed by a number; it sets the number of times to try to get
31569 the lock (default 10).
31571 .vitem &%-restore_time%&
31572 This option causes &%exim_lock%& to restore the modified and read times to the
31573 locked file before exiting. This allows you to access a locked mailbox (for
31574 example, to take a backup copy) without disturbing the times that the user
31577 .vitem &%-timeout%&
31578 This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it sets a
31579 timeout to be used with a blocking &[fcntl()]& lock. If it is not set (the
31580 default), a non-blocking call is used.
31583 Generate verbose output.
31586 If none of &%-fcntl%&, &%-flock%&, &%-lockfile%& or &%-mbx%& are given, the
31587 default is to create a lock file and also to use &[fcntl()]& locking on the
31588 mailbox, which is the same as Exim's default. The use of &%-flock%& or
31589 &%-fcntl%& requires that the file be writeable; the use of &%-lockfile%&
31590 requires that the directory containing the file be writeable. Locking by lock
31591 file does not last for ever; Exim assumes that a lock file is expired if it is
31592 more than 30 minutes old.
31594 The &%-mbx%& option can be used with either or both of &%-fcntl%& or
31595 &%-flock%&. It assumes &%-fcntl%& by default. MBX locking causes a shared lock
31596 to be taken out on the open mailbox, and an exclusive lock on the file
31597 &_/tmp/.n.m_& where &'n'& and &'m'& are the device number and inode
31598 number of the mailbox file. When the locking is released, if an exclusive lock
31599 can be obtained for the mailbox, the file in &_/tmp_& is deleted.
31601 The default output contains verification of the locking that takes place. The
31602 &%-v%& option causes some additional information to be given. The &%-q%& option
31603 suppresses all output except error messages.
31607 exim_lock /var/spool/mail/spqr
31609 runs an interactive shell while the file is locked, whereas
31611 &`exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr <<End`&
31612 <&'some commands'&>
31615 runs a specific non-interactive sequence of commands while the file is locked,
31616 suppressing all verification output. A single command can be run by a command
31619 exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr \
31620 "cp /var/spool/mail/spqr /some/where"
31622 Note that if a command is supplied, it must be entirely contained within the
31623 second argument &-- hence the quotes.
31627 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31628 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31630 .chapter "The Exim monitor" "CHAPeximon"
31631 .scindex IIDeximon "Exim monitor" "description"
31632 .cindex "X-windows"
31633 .cindex "&'eximon'&"
31634 .cindex "Local/eximon.conf"
31635 .cindex "_exim_monitor/EDITME_"
31636 The Exim monitor is an application which displays in an X window information
31637 about the state of Exim's queue and what Exim is doing. An admin user can
31638 perform certain operations on messages from this GUI interface; however all
31639 such facilities are also available from the command line, and indeed, the
31640 monitor itself makes use of the command line to perform any actions requested.
31644 .section "Running the monitor"
31645 The monitor is started by running the script called &'eximon'&. This is a shell
31646 script that sets up a number of environment variables, and then runs the
31647 binary called &_eximon.bin_&. The default appearance of the monitor window can
31648 be changed by editing the &_Local/eximon.conf_& file created by editing
31649 &_exim_monitor/EDITME_&. Comments in that file describe what the various
31650 parameters are for.
31652 The parameters that get built into the &'eximon'& script can be overridden for
31653 a particular invocation by setting up environment variables of the same names,
31654 preceded by &`EXIMON_`&. For example, a shell command such as
31656 EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH=400 eximon
31658 (in a Bourne-compatible shell) runs &'eximon'& with an overriding setting of
31659 the LOG_DEPTH parameter. If EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set in the environment, it
31660 overrides the Exim log file configuration. This makes it possible to have
31661 &'eximon'& tailing log data that is written to syslog, provided that MAIL.INFO
31662 syslog messages are routed to a file on the local host.
31664 X resources can be used to change the appearance of the window in the normal
31665 way. For example, a resource setting of the form
31667 Eximon*background: gray94
31669 changes the colour of the background to light grey rather than white. The
31670 stripcharts are drawn with both the data lines and the reference lines in
31671 black. This means that the reference lines are not visible when on top of the
31672 data. However, their colour can be changed by setting a resource called
31673 &"highlight"& (an odd name, but that's what the Athena stripchart widget uses).
31674 For example, if your X server is running Unix, you could set up lighter
31675 reference lines in the stripcharts by obeying
31678 Eximon*highlight: gray
31681 .cindex "admin user"
31682 In order to see the contents of messages on the queue, and to operate on them,
31683 &'eximon'& must either be run as root or by an admin user.
31685 The monitor's window is divided into three parts. The first contains one or
31686 more stripcharts and two action buttons, the second contains a &"tail"& of the
31687 main log file, and the third is a display of the queue of messages awaiting
31688 delivery, with two more action buttons. The following sections describe these
31689 different parts of the display.
31694 .section "The stripcharts"
31695 .cindex "stripchart"
31696 The first stripchart is always a count of messages on the queue. Its name can
31697 be configured by setting QUEUE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the
31698 &_Local/eximon.conf_& file. The remaining stripcharts are defined in the
31699 configuration script by regular expression matches on log file entries, making
31700 it possible to display, for example, counts of messages delivered to certain
31701 hosts or using certain transports. The supplied defaults display counts of
31702 received and delivered messages, and of local and SMTP deliveries. The default
31703 period between stripchart updates is one minute; this can be adjusted by a
31704 parameter in the &_Local/eximon.conf_& file.
31706 The stripchart displays rescale themselves automatically as the value they are
31707 displaying changes. There are always 10 horizontal lines in each chart; the
31708 title string indicates the value of each division when it is greater than one.
31709 For example, &"x2"& means that each division represents a value of 2.
31711 It is also possible to have a stripchart which shows the percentage fullness of
31712 a particular disk partition, which is useful when local deliveries are confined
31713 to a single partition.
31715 .cindex "&%statvfs%& function"
31716 This relies on the availability of the &[statvfs()]& function or equivalent in
31717 the operating system. Most, but not all versions of Unix that support Exim have
31718 this. For this particular stripchart, the top of the chart always represents
31719 100%, and the scale is given as &"x10%"&. This chart is configured by setting
31720 SIZE_STRIPCHART and (optionally) SIZE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the
31721 &_Local/eximon.conf_& file.
31726 .section "Main action buttons"
31727 .cindex "size" "of monitor window"
31728 .cindex "Exim monitor" "window size"
31729 .cindex "window size"
31730 Below the stripcharts there is an action button for quitting the monitor. Next
31731 to this is another button marked &"Size"&. They are placed here so that
31732 shrinking the window to its default minimum size leaves just the queue count
31733 stripchart and these two buttons visible. Pressing the &"Size"& button causes
31734 the window to expand to its maximum size, unless it is already at the maximum,
31735 in which case it is reduced to its minimum.
31737 When expanding to the maximum, if the window cannot be fully seen where it
31738 currently is, it is moved back to where it was the last time it was at full
31739 size. When it is expanding from its minimum size, the old position is
31740 remembered, and next time it is reduced to the minimum it is moved back there.
31742 The idea is that you can keep a reduced window just showing one or two
31743 stripcharts at a convenient place on your screen, easily expand it to show
31744 the full window when required, and just as easily put it back to what it was.
31745 The idea is copied from what the &'twm'& window manager does for its
31746 &'f.fullzoom'& action. The minimum size of the window can be changed by setting
31747 the MIN_HEIGHT and MIN_WIDTH values in &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31749 Normally, the monitor starts up with the window at its full size, but it can be
31750 built so that it starts up with the window at its smallest size, by setting
31751 START_SMALL=yes in &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31755 .section "The log display"
31756 .cindex "log" "tail of; in monitor"
31757 The second section of the window is an area in which a display of the tail of
31758 the main log is maintained.
31759 To save space on the screen, the timestamp on each log line is shortened by
31760 removing the date and, if &%log_timezone%& is set, the timezone.
31761 The log tail is not available when the only destination for logging data is
31762 syslog, unless the syslog lines are routed to a local file whose name is passed
31763 to &'eximon'& via the EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH environment variable.
31765 The log sub-window has a scroll bar at its lefthand side which can be used to
31766 move back to look at earlier text, and the up and down arrow keys also have a
31767 scrolling effect. The amount of log that is kept depends on the setting of
31768 LOG_BUFFER in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, which specifies the amount of memory
31769 to use. When this is full, the earlier 50% of data is discarded &-- this is
31770 much more efficient than throwing it away line by line. The sub-window also has
31771 a horizontal scroll bar for accessing the ends of long log lines. This is the
31772 only means of horizontal scrolling; the right and left arrow keys are not
31773 available. Text can be cut from this part of the window using the mouse in the
31774 normal way. The size of this subwindow is controlled by parameters in the
31775 configuration file &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31777 Searches of the text in the log window can be carried out by means of the ^R
31778 and ^S keystrokes, which default to a reverse and a forward search,
31779 respectively. The search covers only the text that is displayed in the window.
31780 It cannot go further back up the log.
31782 The point from which the search starts is indicated by a caret marker. This is
31783 normally at the end of the text in the window, but can be positioned explicitly
31784 by pointing and clicking with the left mouse button, and is moved automatically
31785 by a successful search. If new text arrives in the window when it is scrolled
31786 back, the caret remains where it is, but if the window is not scrolled back,
31787 the caret is moved to the end of the new text.
31789 Pressing ^R or ^S pops up a window into which the search text can be typed.
31790 There are buttons for selecting forward or reverse searching, for carrying out
31791 the search, and for cancelling. If the &"Search"& button is pressed, the search
31792 happens and the window remains so that further searches can be done. If the
31793 &"Return"& key is pressed, a single search is done and the window is closed. If
31794 ^C is typed the search is cancelled.
31796 The searching facility is implemented using the facilities of the Athena text
31797 widget. By default this pops up a window containing both &"search"& and
31798 &"replace"& options. In order to suppress the unwanted &"replace"& portion for
31799 eximon, a modified version of the &%TextPop%& widget is distributed with Exim.
31800 However, the linkers in BSDI and HP-UX seem unable to handle an externally
31801 provided version of &%TextPop%& when the remaining parts of the text widget
31802 come from the standard libraries. The compile-time option EXIMON_TEXTPOP can be
31803 unset to cut out the modified &%TextPop%&, making it possible to build Eximon
31804 on these systems, at the expense of having unwanted items in the search popup
31809 .section "The queue display"
31810 .cindex "queue" "display in monitor"
31811 The bottom section of the monitor window contains a list of all messages that
31812 are on the queue, which includes those currently being received or delivered,
31813 as well as those awaiting delivery. The size of this subwindow is controlled by
31814 parameters in the configuration file &_Local/eximon.conf_&, and the frequency
31815 at which it is updated is controlled by another parameter in the same file &--
31816 the default is 5 minutes, since queue scans can be quite expensive. However,
31817 there is an &"Update"& action button just above the display which can be used
31818 to force an update of the queue display at any time.
31820 When a host is down for some time, a lot of pending mail can build up for it,
31821 and this can make it hard to deal with other messages on the queue. To help
31822 with this situation there is a button next to &"Update"& called &"Hide"&. If
31823 pressed, a dialogue box called &"Hide addresses ending with"& is put up. If you
31824 type anything in here and press &"Return"&, the text is added to a chain of
31825 such texts, and if every undelivered address in a message matches at least one
31826 of the texts, the message is not displayed.
31828 If there is an address that does not match any of the texts, all the addresses
31829 are displayed as normal. The matching happens on the ends of addresses so, for
31830 example, &'cam.ac.uk'& specifies all addresses in Cambridge, while
31831 &'xxx@foo.com.example'& specifies just one specific address. When any hiding
31832 has been set up, a button called &"Unhide"& is displayed. If pressed, it
31833 cancels all hiding. Also, to ensure that hidden messages do not get forgotten,
31834 a hide request is automatically cancelled after one hour.
31836 While the dialogue box is displayed, you can't press any buttons or do anything
31837 else to the monitor window. For this reason, if you want to cut text from the
31838 queue display to use in the dialogue box, you have to do the cutting before
31839 pressing the &"Hide"& button.
31841 The queue display contains, for each unhidden queued message, the length of
31842 time it has been on the queue, the size of the message, the message id, the
31843 message sender, and the first undelivered recipient, all on one line. If it is
31844 a bounce message, the sender is shown as &"<>"&. If there is more than one
31845 recipient to which the message has not yet been delivered, subsequent ones are
31846 listed on additional lines, up to a maximum configured number, following which
31847 an ellipsis is displayed. Recipients that have already received the message are
31850 .cindex "frozen messages" "display"
31851 If a message is frozen, an asterisk is displayed at the left-hand side.
31853 The queue display has a vertical scroll bar, and can also be scrolled by means
31854 of the arrow keys. Text can be cut from it using the mouse in the normal way.
31855 The text searching facilities, as described above for the log window, are also
31856 available, but the caret is always moved to the end of the text when the queue
31857 display is updated.
31861 .section "The queue menu"
31862 .cindex "queue" "menu in monitor"
31863 If the &%shift%& key is held down and the left button is clicked when the mouse
31864 pointer is over the text for any message, an action menu pops up, and the first
31865 line of the queue display for the message is highlighted. This does not affect
31868 If you want to use some other event for popping up the menu, you can set the
31869 MENU_EVENT parameter in &_Local/eximon.conf_& to change the default, or
31870 set EXIMON_MENU_EVENT in the environment before starting the monitor. The
31871 value set in this parameter is a standard X event description. For example, to
31872 run eximon using &%ctrl%& rather than &%shift%& you could use
31874 EXIMON_MENU_EVENT='Ctrl<Btn1Down>' eximon
31876 The title of the menu is the message id, and it contains entries which act as
31880 &'message log'&: The contents of the message log for the message are displayed
31881 in a new text window.
31883 &'headers'&: Information from the spool file that contains the envelope
31884 information and headers is displayed in a new text window. See chapter
31885 &<<CHAPspool>>& for a description of the format of spool files.
31887 &'body'&: The contents of the spool file containing the body of the message are
31888 displayed in a new text window. There is a default limit of 20,000 bytes to the
31889 amount of data displayed. This can be changed by setting the BODY_MAX
31890 option at compile time, or the EXIMON_BODY_MAX option at run time.
31892 &'deliver message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-M%& option to request
31893 delivery of the message. This causes an automatic thaw if the message is
31894 frozen. The &%-v%& option is also set, and the output from Exim is displayed in
31895 a new text window. The delivery is run in a separate process, to avoid holding
31896 up the monitor while the delivery proceeds.
31898 &'freeze message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mf%& option to request
31899 that the message be frozen.
31901 .cindex "thawing messages"
31902 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
31903 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
31904 &'thaw message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mt%& option to request
31905 that the message be thawed.
31907 .cindex "delivery" "forcing failure"
31908 &'give up on msg'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mg%& option to request
31909 that Exim gives up trying to deliver the message. A bounce message is generated
31910 for any remaining undelivered addresses.
31912 &'remove message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mrm%& option to request
31913 that the message be deleted from the system without generating a bounce
31916 &'add recipient'&: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient address can
31917 be typed. If the address is not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter
31918 is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, the address is qualified with that domain.
31919 Otherwise it must be entered as a fully qualified address. Pressing RETURN
31920 causes a call to Exim to be made using the &%-Mar%& option to request that an
31921 additional recipient be added to the message, unless the entry box is empty, in
31922 which case no action is taken.
31924 &'mark delivered'&: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient address
31925 can be typed. If the address is not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter
31926 is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, the address is qualified with that domain.
31927 Otherwise it must be entered as a fully qualified address. Pressing RETURN
31928 causes a call to Exim to be made using the &%-Mmd%& option to mark the given
31929 recipient address as already delivered, unless the entry box is empty, in which
31930 case no action is taken.
31932 &'mark all delivered'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mmad%& option to
31933 mark all recipient addresses as already delivered.
31935 &'edit sender'&: A dialog box is displayed initialized with the current
31936 sender's address. Pressing RETURN causes a call to Exim to be made using the
31937 &%-Mes%& option to replace the sender address, unless the entry box is empty,
31938 in which case no action is taken. If you want to set an empty sender (as in
31939 bounce messages), you must specify it as &"<>"&. Otherwise, if the address is
31940 not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&,
31941 the address is qualified with that domain.
31944 When a delivery is forced, a window showing the &%-v%& output is displayed. In
31945 other cases when a call to Exim is made, if there is any output from Exim (in
31946 particular, if the command fails) a window containing the command and the
31947 output is displayed. Otherwise, the results of the action are normally apparent
31948 from the log and queue displays. However, if you set ACTION_OUTPUT=yes in
31949 &_Local/eximon.conf_&, a window showing the Exim command is always opened, even
31950 if no output is generated.
31952 The queue display is automatically updated for actions such as freezing and
31953 thawing, unless ACTION_QUEUE_UPDATE=no has been set in
31954 &_Local/eximon.conf_&. In this case the &"Update"& button has to be used to
31955 force an update of the display after one of these actions.
31957 In any text window that is displayed as result of a menu action, the normal
31958 cut-and-paste facility is available, and searching can be carried out using ^R
31959 and ^S, as described above for the log tail window.
31966 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31967 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31969 .chapter "Security considerations" "CHAPsecurity"
31970 .scindex IIDsecurcon "security" "discussion of"
31971 This chapter discusses a number of issues concerned with security, some of
31972 which are also covered in other parts of this manual.
31974 For reasons that this author does not understand, some people have promoted
31975 Exim as a &"particularly secure"& mailer. Perhaps it is because of the
31976 existence of this chapter in the documentation. However, the intent of the
31977 chapter is simply to describe the way Exim works in relation to certain
31978 security concerns, not to make any specific claims about the effectiveness of
31979 its security as compared with other MTAs.
31981 What follows is a description of the way Exim is supposed to be. Best efforts
31982 have been made to try to ensure that the code agrees with the theory, but an
31983 absence of bugs can never be guaranteed. Any that are reported will get fixed
31984 as soon as possible.
31987 .section "Building a more &""hardened""& Exim"
31988 .cindex "security" "build-time features"
31989 There are a number of build-time options that can be set in &_Local/Makefile_&
31990 to create Exim binaries that are &"harder"& to attack, in particular by a rogue
31991 Exim administrator who does not have the root password, or by someone who has
31992 penetrated the Exim (but not the root) account. These options are as follows:
31995 ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be set to a string that is required to match the
31996 start of any file names used with the &%-C%& option. When it is set, these file
31997 names are also not allowed to contain the sequence &"/../"&. (However, if the
31998 value of the &%-C%& option is identical to the value of CONFIGURE_FILE in
31999 &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim ignores &%-C%& and proceeds as usual.) There is no
32000 default setting for &%ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX%&.
32002 If the permitted configuration files are confined to a directory to
32003 which only root has access, this guards against someone who has broken
32004 into the Exim account from running a privileged Exim with an arbitrary
32005 configuration file, and using it to break into other accounts.
32007 If ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined, root privilege is retained for &%-C%&
32008 and &%-D%& only if the caller of Exim is root. Without it, the Exim user may
32009 also use &%-C%& and &%-D%& and retain privilege. Setting this option locks out
32010 the possibility of testing a configuration using &%-C%& right through message
32011 reception and delivery, even if the caller is root. The reception works, but by
32012 that time, Exim is running as the Exim user, so when it re-execs to regain
32013 privilege for the delivery, the use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost.
32014 However, root can test reception and delivery using two separate commands.
32015 ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is not set by default.
32017 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined, the use of the &%-D%& command line option
32020 FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to a colon-separated list of users that are
32021 never to be used for any deliveries. This is like the &%never_users%& runtime
32022 option, but it cannot be overridden; the runtime option adds additional users
32023 to the list. The default setting is &"root"&; this prevents a non-root user who
32024 is permitted to modify the runtime file from using Exim as a way to get root.
32030 .section "Root privilege"
32032 .cindex "root privilege"
32033 The Exim binary is normally setuid to root, which means that it gains root
32034 privilege (runs as root) when it starts execution. In some special cases (for
32035 example, when the daemon is not in use and there are no local deliveries), it
32036 may be possible to run Exim setuid to some user other than root. This is
32037 discussed in the next section. However, in most installations, root privilege
32038 is required for two things:
32041 To set up a socket connected to the standard SMTP port (25) when initialising
32042 the listening daemon. If Exim is run from &'inetd'&, this privileged action is
32045 To be able to change uid and gid in order to read users' &_.forward_& files and
32046 perform local deliveries as the receiving user or as specified in the
32050 It is not necessary to be root to do any of the other things Exim does, such as
32051 receiving messages and delivering them externally over SMTP, and it is
32052 obviously more secure if Exim does not run as root except when necessary.
32053 For this reason, a user and group for Exim to use must be defined in
32054 &_Local/Makefile_&. These are known as &"the Exim user"& and &"the Exim
32055 group"&. Their values can be changed by the run time configuration, though this
32056 is not recommended. Often a user called &'exim'& is used, but some sites use
32057 &'mail'& or another user name altogether.
32059 Exim uses &[setuid()]& whenever it gives up root privilege. This is a permanent
32060 abdication; the process cannot regain root afterwards. Prior to release 4.00,
32061 &[seteuid()]& was used in some circumstances, but this is no longer the case.
32063 After a new Exim process has interpreted its command line options, it changes
32064 uid and gid in the following cases:
32067 .cindex "&%-C%& option"
32068 .cindex "&%-D%& option"
32069 If the &%-C%& option is used to specify an alternate configuration file, or if
32070 the &%-D%& option is used to define macro values for the configuration, and the
32071 calling process is not running as root or the Exim user, the uid and gid are
32072 changed to those of the calling process.
32073 However, if ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, only
32074 root callers may use &%-C%& and &%-D%& without losing privilege, and if
32075 DISABLE_D_OPTION is set, the &%-D%& option may not be used at all.
32077 .cindex "&%-be%& option"
32078 .cindex "&%-bf%& option"
32079 .cindex "&%-bF%& option"
32080 If the expansion test option (&%-be%&) or one of the filter testing options
32081 (&%-bf%& or &%-bF%&) are used, the uid and gid are changed to those of the
32084 If the process is not a daemon process or a queue runner process or a delivery
32085 process or a process for testing address routing (started with &%-bt%&), the
32086 uid and gid are changed to the Exim user and group. This means that Exim always
32087 runs under its own uid and gid when receiving messages. This also applies when
32088 testing address verification
32089 .cindex "&%-bv%& option"
32090 .cindex "&%-bh%& option"
32091 (the &%-bv%& option) and testing incoming message policy controls (the &%-bh%&
32094 For a daemon, queue runner, delivery, or address testing process, the uid
32095 remains as root at this stage, but the gid is changed to the Exim group.
32098 The processes that initially retain root privilege behave as follows:
32101 A daemon process changes the gid to the Exim group and the uid to the Exim
32102 user after setting up one or more listening sockets. The &[initgroups()]&
32103 function is called, so that if the Exim user is in any additional groups, they
32104 will be used during message reception.
32106 A queue runner process retains root privilege throughout its execution. Its
32107 job is to fork a controlled sequence of delivery processes.
32109 A delivery process retains root privilege throughout most of its execution,
32110 but any actual deliveries (that is, the transports themselves) are run in
32111 subprocesses which always change to a non-root uid and gid. For local
32112 deliveries this is typically the uid and gid of the owner of the mailbox; for
32113 remote deliveries, the Exim uid and gid are used. Once all the delivery
32114 subprocesses have been run, a delivery process changes to the Exim uid and gid
32115 while doing post-delivery tidying up such as updating the retry database and
32116 generating bounce and warning messages.
32118 While the recipient addresses in a message are being routed, the delivery
32119 process runs as root. However, if a user's filter file has to be processed,
32120 this is done in a subprocess that runs under the individual user's uid and
32121 gid. A system filter is run as root unless &%system_filter_user%& is set.
32123 A process that is testing addresses (the &%-bt%& option) runs as root so that
32124 the routing is done in the same environment as a message delivery.
32130 .section "Running Exim without privilege" "SECTrunexiwitpri"
32131 .cindex "privilege" "running without"
32132 .cindex "unprivileged running"
32133 .cindex "root privilege" "running without"
32134 Some installations like to run Exim in an unprivileged state for more of its
32135 operation, for added security. Support for this mode of operation is provided
32136 by the global option &%deliver_drop_privilege%&. When this is set, the uid and
32137 gid are changed to the Exim user and group at the start of a delivery process
32138 (and also queue runner and address testing processes). This means that address
32139 routing is no longer run as root, and the deliveries themselves cannot change
32142 Leaving the binary setuid to root, but setting &%deliver_drop_privilege%& means
32143 that the daemon can still be started in the usual way, and it can respond
32144 correctly to SIGHUP because the re-invocation regains root privilege.
32146 An alternative approach is to make Exim setuid to the Exim user and also setgid
32148 If you do this, the daemon must be started from a root process. (Calling
32149 Exim from a root process makes it behave in the way it does when it is setuid
32150 root.) However, the daemon cannot restart itself after a SIGHUP signal because
32151 it cannot regain privilege.
32153 It is still useful to set &%deliver_drop_privilege%& in this case, because it
32154 stops Exim from trying to re-invoke itself to do a delivery after a message has
32155 been received. Such a re-invocation is a waste of resources because it has no
32158 If restarting the daemon is not an issue (for example, if &%mua_wrapper%& is
32159 set, or &'inetd'& is being used instead of a daemon), having the binary setuid
32160 to the Exim user seems a clean approach, but there is one complication:
32162 In this style of operation, Exim is running with the real uid and gid set to
32163 those of the calling process, and the effective uid/gid set to Exim's values.
32164 Ideally, any association with the calling process' uid/gid should be dropped,
32165 that is, the real uid/gid should be reset to the effective values so as to
32166 discard any privileges that the caller may have. While some operating systems
32167 have a function that permits this action for a non-root effective uid, quite a
32168 number of them do not. Because of this lack of standardization, Exim does not
32169 address this problem at this time.
32171 For this reason, the recommended approach for &"mostly unprivileged"& running
32172 is to keep the Exim binary setuid to root, and to set
32173 &%deliver_drop_privilege%&. This also has the advantage of allowing a daemon to
32174 be used in the most straightforward way.
32176 If you configure Exim not to run delivery processes as root, there are a
32177 number of restrictions on what you can do:
32180 You can deliver only as the Exim user/group. You should explicitly use the
32181 &%user%& and &%group%& options to override routers or local transports that
32182 normally deliver as the recipient. This makes sure that configurations that
32183 work in this mode function the same way in normal mode. Any implicit or
32184 explicit specification of another user causes an error.
32186 Use of &_.forward_& files is severely restricted, such that it is usually
32187 not worthwhile to include them in the configuration.
32189 Users who wish to use &_.forward_& would have to make their home directory and
32190 the file itself accessible to the Exim user. Pipe and append-to-file entries,
32191 and their equivalents in Exim filters, cannot be used. While they could be
32192 enabled in the Exim user's name, that would be insecure and not very useful.
32194 Unless the local user mailboxes are all owned by the Exim user (possible in
32195 some POP3 or IMAP-only environments):
32198 They must be owned by the Exim group and be writable by that group. This
32199 implies you must set &%mode%& in the appendfile configuration, as well as the
32200 mode of the mailbox files themselves.
32202 You must set &%no_check_owner%&, since most or all of the files will not be
32203 owned by the Exim user.
32205 You must set &%file_must_exist%&, because Exim cannot set the owner correctly
32206 on a newly created mailbox when unprivileged. This also implies that new
32207 mailboxes need to be created manually.
32212 These restrictions severely restrict what can be done in local deliveries.
32213 However, there are no restrictions on remote deliveries. If you are running a
32214 gateway host that does no local deliveries, setting &%deliver_drop_privilege%&
32215 gives more security at essentially no cost.
32217 If you are using the &%mua_wrapper%& facility (see chapter
32218 &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&), &%deliver_drop_privilege%& is forced to be true.
32223 .section "Delivering to local files"
32224 Full details of the checks applied by &(appendfile)& before it writes to a file
32225 are given in chapter &<<CHAPappendfile>>&.
32229 .section "IPv4 source routing"
32230 .cindex "source routing" "in IP packets"
32231 .cindex "IP source routing"
32232 Many operating systems suppress IP source-routed packets in the kernel, but
32233 some cannot be made to do this, so Exim does its own check. It logs incoming
32234 IPv4 source-routed TCP calls, and then drops them. Things are all different in
32235 IPv6. No special checking is currently done.
32239 .section "The VRFY, EXPN, and ETRN commands in SMTP"
32240 Support for these SMTP commands is disabled by default. If required, they can
32241 be enabled by defining suitable ACLs.
32246 .section "Privileged users"
32247 .cindex "trusted user"
32248 .cindex "admin user"
32249 .cindex "privileged user"
32250 .cindex "user" "trusted"
32251 .cindex "user" "admin"
32252 Exim recognises two sets of users with special privileges. Trusted users are
32253 able to submit new messages to Exim locally, but supply their own sender
32254 addresses and information about a sending host. For other users submitting
32255 local messages, Exim sets up the sender address from the uid, and doesn't
32256 permit a remote host to be specified.
32258 .cindex "&%-f%& option"
32259 However, an untrusted user is permitted to use the &%-f%& command line option
32260 in the special form &%-f <>%& to indicate that a delivery failure for the
32261 message should not cause an error report. This affects the message's envelope,
32262 but it does not affect the &'Sender:'& header. Untrusted users may also be
32263 permitted to use specific forms of address with the &%-f%& option by setting
32264 the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option.
32266 Trusted users are used to run processes that receive mail messages from some
32267 other mail domain and pass them on to Exim for delivery either locally, or over
32268 the Internet. Exim trusts a caller that is running as root, as the Exim user,
32269 as any user listed in the &%trusted_users%& configuration option, or under any
32270 group listed in the &%trusted_groups%& option.
32272 Admin users are permitted to do things to the messages on Exim's queue. They
32273 can freeze or thaw messages, cause them to be returned to their senders, remove
32274 them entirely, or modify them in various ways. In addition, admin users can run
32275 the Exim monitor and see all the information it is capable of providing, which
32276 includes the contents of files on the spool.
32278 .cindex "&%-M%& option"
32279 .cindex "&%-q%& option"
32280 By default, the use of the &%-M%& and &%-q%& options to cause Exim to attempt
32281 delivery of messages on its queue is restricted to admin users. This
32282 restriction can be relaxed by setting the &%no_prod_requires_admin%& option.
32283 Similarly, the use of &%-bp%& (and its variants) to list the contents of the
32284 queue is also restricted to admin users. This restriction can be relaxed by
32285 setting &%no_queue_list_requires_admin%&.
32287 Exim recognises an admin user if the calling process is running as root or as
32288 the Exim user or if any of the groups associated with the calling process is
32289 the Exim group. It is not necessary actually to be running under the Exim
32290 group. However, if admin users who are not root or the Exim user are to access
32291 the contents of files on the spool via the Exim monitor (which runs
32292 unprivileged), Exim must be built to allow group read access to its spool
32297 .section "Spool files"
32298 .cindex "spool directory" "files"
32299 Exim's spool directory and everything it contains is owned by the Exim user and
32300 set to the Exim group. The mode for spool files is defined in the
32301 &_Local/Makefile_& configuration file, and defaults to 0640. This means that
32302 any user who is a member of the Exim group can access these files.
32306 .section "Use of argv[0]"
32307 Exim examines the last component of &%argv[0]%&, and if it matches one of a set
32308 of specific strings, Exim assumes certain options. For example, calling Exim
32309 with the last component of &%argv[0]%& set to &"rsmtp"& is exactly equivalent
32310 to calling it with the option &%-bS%&. There are no security implications in
32315 .section "Use of %f formatting"
32316 The only use made of &"%f"& by Exim is in formatting load average values. These
32317 are actually stored in integer variables as 1000 times the load average.
32318 Consequently, their range is limited and so therefore is the length of the
32323 .section "Embedded Exim path"
32324 Exim uses its own path name, which is embedded in the code, only when it needs
32325 to re-exec in order to regain root privilege. Therefore, it is not root when it
32326 does so. If some bug allowed the path to get overwritten, it would lead to an
32327 arbitrary program's being run as exim, not as root.
32331 .section "Use of sprintf()"
32332 .cindex "&[sprintf()]&"
32333 A large number of occurrences of &"sprintf"& in the code are actually calls to
32334 &'string_sprintf()'&, a function that returns the result in malloc'd store.
32335 The intermediate formatting is done into a large fixed buffer by a function
32336 that runs through the format string itself, and checks the length of each
32337 conversion before performing it, thus preventing buffer overruns.
32339 The remaining uses of &[sprintf()]& happen in controlled circumstances where
32340 the output buffer is known to be sufficiently long to contain the converted
32345 .section "Use of debug_printf() and log_write()"
32346 Arbitrary strings are passed to both these functions, but they do their
32347 formatting by calling the function &'string_vformat()'&, which runs through
32348 the format string itself, and checks the length of each conversion.
32352 .section "Use of strcat() and strcpy()"
32353 These are used only in cases where the output buffer is known to be large
32354 enough to hold the result.
32355 .ecindex IIDsecurcon
32360 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32361 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32363 .chapter "Format of spool files" "CHAPspool"
32364 .scindex IIDforspo1 "format" "spool files"
32365 .scindex IIDforspo2 "spool directory" "format of files"
32366 .scindex IIDforspo3 "spool files" "format of"
32367 .cindex "spool files" "editing"
32368 A message on Exim's queue consists of two files, whose names are the message id
32369 followed by -D and -H, respectively. The data portion of the message is kept in
32370 the -D file on its own. The message's envelope, status, and headers are all
32371 kept in the -H file, whose format is described in this chapter. Each of these
32372 two files contains the final component of its own name as its first line. This
32373 is insurance against disk crashes where the directory is lost but the files
32374 themselves are recoverable.
32376 Some people are tempted into editing -D files in order to modify messages. You
32377 need to be extremely careful if you do this; it is not recommended and you are
32378 on your own if you do it. Here are some of the pitfalls:
32381 You must ensure that Exim does not try to deliver the message while you are
32382 fiddling with it. The safest way is to take out a write lock on the -D file,
32383 which is what Exim itself does, using &[fcntl()]&. If you update the file in
32384 place, the lock will be retained. If you write a new file and rename it, the
32385 lock will be lost at the instant of rename.
32387 .cindex "&$body_linecount$&"
32388 If you change the number of lines in the file, the value of
32389 &$body_linecount$&, which is stored in the -H file, will be incorrect. At
32390 present, this value is not used by Exim, but there is no guarantee that this
32391 will always be the case.
32393 If the message is in MIME format, you must take care not to break it.
32395 If the message is cryptographically signed, any change will invalidate the
32400 Files whose names end with -J may also be seen in the &_input_& directory (or
32401 its subdirectories when &%split_spool_directory%& is set). These are journal
32402 files, used to record addresses to which the message has been delivered during
32403 the course of a delivery run. At the end of the run, the -H file is updated,
32404 and the -J file is deleted.
32407 .section "Format of the -H file"
32408 .cindex "uid (user id)" "in spool file"
32409 .cindex "gid (group id)" "in spool file"
32410 The second line of the -H file contains the login name for the uid of the
32411 process that called Exim to read the message, followed by the numerical uid and
32412 gid. For a locally generated message, this is normally the user who sent the
32413 message. For a message received over TCP/IP, it is normally the Exim user.
32415 The third line of the file contains the address of the message's sender as
32416 transmitted in the envelope, contained in angle brackets. The sender address is
32417 empty for bounce messages. For incoming SMTP mail, the sender address is given
32418 in the MAIL command. For locally generated mail, the sender address is
32419 created by Exim from the login name of the current user and the configured
32420 &%qualify_domain%&. However, this can be overridden by the &%-f%& option or a
32421 leading &"From&~"& line if the caller is trusted, or if the supplied address is
32422 &"<>"& or an address that matches &%untrusted_set_senders%&.
32424 The fourth line contains two numbers. The first is the time that the message
32425 was received, in the conventional Unix form &-- the number of seconds since the
32426 start of the epoch. The second number is a count of the number of messages
32427 warning of delayed delivery that have been sent to the sender.
32429 There follow a number of lines starting with a hyphen. These can appear in any
32430 order, and are omitted when not relevant:
32433 .vitem "&%-acl%& <&'number'&> <&'length'&>"
32434 This item is obsolete, and is not generated from Exim release 4.61 onwards;
32435 &%-aclc%& and &%-aclm%& are used instead. However, &%-acl%& is still
32436 recognized, to provide backward compatibility. In the old format, a line of
32437 this form is present for every ACL variable that is not empty. The number
32438 identifies the variable; the &%acl_c%&&*x*& variables are numbered 0&--9 and
32439 the &%acl_m%&&*x*& variables are numbered 10&--19. The length is the length of
32440 the data string for the variable. The string itself starts at the beginning of
32441 the next line, and is followed by a newline character. It may contain internal
32444 .vitem "&%-aclc%& <&'number'&> <&'length'&>"
32445 A line of this form is present for every ACL connection variable that is not
32446 empty. The number identifies the variable. The length is the length of the data
32447 string for the variable. The string itself starts at the beginning of the next
32448 line, and is followed by a newline character. It may contain internal newlines.
32450 .vitem "&%-aclm%& <&'number'&> <&'length'&>"
32451 A line of this form is present for every ACL message variable that is not
32452 empty. The number identifies the variable. The length is the length of the data
32453 string for the variable. The string itself starts at the beginning of the next
32454 line, and is followed by a newline character. It may contain internal newlines.
32456 .vitem "&%-active_hostname%& <&'hostname'&>"
32457 This is present if, when the message was received over SMTP, the value of
32458 &$smtp_active_hostname$& was different to the value of &$primary_hostname$&.
32460 .vitem &%-allow_unqualified_recipient%&
32461 This is present if unqualified recipient addresses are permitted in header
32462 lines (to stop such addresses from being qualified if rewriting occurs at
32463 transport time). Local messages that were input using &%-bnq%& and remote
32464 messages from hosts that match &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& set this flag.
32466 .vitem &%-allow_unqualified_sender%&
32467 This is present if unqualified sender addresses are permitted in header lines
32468 (to stop such addresses from being qualified if rewriting occurs at transport
32469 time). Local messages that were input using &%-bnq%& and remote messages from
32470 hosts that match &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& set this flag.
32472 .vitem "&%-auth_id%& <&'text'&>"
32473 The id information for a message received on an authenticated SMTP connection
32474 &-- the value of the &$authenticated_id$& variable.
32476 .vitem "&%-auth_sender%& <&'address'&>"
32477 The address of an authenticated sender &-- the value of the
32478 &$authenticated_sender$& variable.
32480 .vitem "&%-body_linecount%& <&'number'&>"
32481 This records the number of lines in the body of the message, and is always
32484 .vitem "&%-body_zerocount%& <&'number'&>"
32485 This records the number of binary zero bytes in the body of the message, and is
32486 present if the number is greater than zero.
32488 .vitem &%-deliver_firsttime%&
32489 This is written when a new message is first added to the spool. When the spool
32490 file is updated after a deferral, it is omitted.
32492 .vitem "&%-frozen%& <&'time'&>"
32493 .cindex "frozen messages" "spool data"
32494 The message is frozen, and the freezing happened at <&'time'&>.
32496 .vitem "&%-helo_name%& <&'text'&>"
32497 This records the host name as specified by a remote host in a HELO or EHLO
32500 .vitem "&%-host_address%& <&'address'&>.<&'port'&>"
32501 This records the IP address of the host from which the message was received and
32502 the remote port number that was used. It is omitted for locally generated
32505 .vitem "&%-host_auth%& <&'text'&>"
32506 If the message was received on an authenticated SMTP connection, this records
32507 the name of the authenticator &-- the value of the
32508 &$sender_host_authenticated$& variable.
32510 .vitem &%-host_lookup_failed%&
32511 This is present if an attempt to look up the sending host's name from its IP
32512 address failed. It corresponds to the &$host_lookup_failed$& variable.
32514 .vitem "&%-host_name%& <&'text'&>"
32515 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
32516 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
32517 This records the name of the remote host from which the message was received,
32518 if the host name was looked up from the IP address when the message was being
32519 received. It is not present if no reverse lookup was done.
32521 .vitem "&%-ident%& <&'text'&>"
32522 For locally submitted messages, this records the login of the originating user,
32523 unless it was a trusted user and the &%-oMt%& option was used to specify an
32524 ident value. For messages received over TCP/IP, this records the ident string
32525 supplied by the remote host, if any.
32527 .vitem "&%-interface_address%& <&'address'&>.<&'port'&>"
32528 This records the IP address of the local interface and the port number through
32529 which a message was received from a remote host. It is omitted for locally
32530 generated messages.
32533 The message is from a local sender.
32535 .vitem &%-localerror%&
32536 The message is a locally-generated bounce message.
32538 .vitem "&%-local_scan%& <&'string'&>"
32539 This records the data string that was returned by the &[local_scan()]& function
32540 when the message was received &-- the value of the &$local_scan_data$&
32541 variable. It is omitted if no data was returned.
32543 .vitem &%-manual_thaw%&
32544 The message was frozen but has been thawed manually, that is, by an explicit
32545 Exim command rather than via the auto-thaw process.
32548 A testing delivery process was started using the &%-N%& option to suppress any
32549 actual deliveries, but delivery was deferred. At any further delivery attempts,
32552 .vitem &%-received_protocol%&
32553 This records the value of the &$received_protocol$& variable, which contains
32554 the name of the protocol by which the message was received.
32556 .vitem &%-sender_set_untrusted%&
32557 The envelope sender of this message was set by an untrusted local caller (used
32558 to ensure that the caller is displayed in queue listings).
32560 .vitem "&%-spam_score_int%& <&'number'&>"
32561 If a message was scanned by SpamAssassin, this is present. It records the value
32562 of &$spam_score_int$&.
32564 .vitem &%-tls_certificate_verified%&
32565 A TLS certificate was received from the client that sent this message, and the
32566 certificate was verified by the server.
32568 .vitem "&%-tls_cipher%& <&'cipher name'&>"
32569 When the message was received over an encrypted connection, this records the
32570 name of the cipher suite that was used.
32572 .vitem "&%-tls_peerdn%& <&'peer DN'&>"
32573 When the message was received over an encrypted connection, and a certificate
32574 was received from the client, this records the Distinguished Name from that
32578 Following the options there is a list of those addresses to which the message
32579 is not to be delivered. This set of addresses is initialized from the command
32580 line when the &%-t%& option is used and &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%&
32581 is set; otherwise it starts out empty. Whenever a successful delivery is made,
32582 the address is added to this set. The addresses are kept internally as a
32583 balanced binary tree, and it is a representation of that tree which is written
32584 to the spool file. If an address is expanded via an alias or forward file, the
32585 original address is added to the tree when deliveries to all its child
32586 addresses are complete.
32588 If the tree is empty, there is a single line in the spool file containing just
32589 the text &"XX"&. Otherwise, each line consists of two letters, which are either
32590 Y or N, followed by an address. The address is the value for the node of the
32591 tree, and the letters indicate whether the node has a left branch and/or a
32592 right branch attached to it, respectively. If branches exist, they immediately
32593 follow. Here is an example of a three-node tree:
32595 YY darcy@austen.fict.example
32596 NN alice@wonderland.fict.example
32597 NN editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32599 After the non-recipients tree, there is a list of the message's recipients.
32600 This is a simple list, preceded by a count. It includes all the original
32601 recipients of the message, including those to whom the message has already been
32602 delivered. In the simplest case, the list contains one address per line. For
32606 editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32607 darcy@austen.fict.example
32609 alice@wonderland.fict.example
32611 However, when a child address has been added to the top-level addresses as a
32612 result of the use of the &%one_time%& option on a &(redirect)& router, each
32613 line is of the following form:
32615 <&'top-level address'&> <&'errors_to address'&> &&&
32616 <&'length'&>,<&'parent number'&>#<&'flag bits'&>
32618 The 01 flag bit indicates the presence of the three other fields that follow
32619 the top-level address. Other bits may be used in future to support additional
32620 fields. The <&'parent number'&> is the offset in the recipients list of the
32621 original parent of the &"one time"& address. The first two fields are the
32622 envelope sender that is associated with this address and its length. If the
32623 length is zero, there is no special envelope sender (there are then two space
32624 characters in the line). A non-empty field can arise from a &(redirect)& router
32625 that has an &%errors_to%& setting.
32628 A blank line separates the envelope and status information from the headers
32629 which follow. A header may occupy several lines of the file, and to save effort
32630 when reading it in, each header is preceded by a number and an identifying
32631 character. The number is the number of characters in the header, including any
32632 embedded newlines and the terminating newline. The character is one of the
32636 .row <&'blank'&> "header in which Exim has no special interest"
32637 .row &`B`& "&'Bcc:'& header"
32638 .row &`C`& "&'Cc:'& header"
32639 .row &`F`& "&'From:'& header"
32640 .row &`I`& "&'Message-id:'& header"
32641 .row &`P`& "&'Received:'& header &-- P for &""postmark""&"
32642 .row &`R`& "&'Reply-To:'& header"
32643 .row &`S`& "&'Sender:'& header"
32644 .row &`T`& "&'To:'& header"
32645 .row &`*`& "replaced or deleted header"
32648 Deleted or replaced (rewritten) headers remain in the spool file for debugging
32649 purposes. They are not transmitted when the message is delivered. Here is a
32650 typical set of headers:
32652 111P Received: by hobbit.fict.example with local (Exim 4.00)
32653 id 14y9EI-00026G-00; Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100
32654 049 Message-Id: <E14y9EI-00026G-00@hobbit.fict.example>
32655 038* X-rewrote-sender: bb@hobbit.fict.example
32656 042* From: Bilbo Baggins <bb@hobbit.fict.example>
32657 049F From: Bilbo Baggins <B.Baggins@hobbit.fict.example>
32658 099* To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation,
32659 darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32660 104T To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation.example,
32661 darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32662 038 Date: Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100
32664 The asterisked headers indicate that the envelope sender, &'From:'& header, and
32665 &'To:'& header have been rewritten, the last one because routing expanded the
32666 unqualified domain &'foundation'&.
32667 .ecindex IIDforspo1
32668 .ecindex IIDforspo2
32669 .ecindex IIDforspo3
32674 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32675 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32677 .chapter "Adding new drivers or lookup types" "" &&&
32678 "Adding drivers or lookups"
32679 .cindex "adding drivers"
32680 .cindex "new drivers" "adding"
32681 .cindex "drivers" "adding new"
32682 The following actions have to be taken in order to add a new router, transport,
32683 authenticator, or lookup type to Exim:
32686 Choose a name for the driver or lookup type that does not conflict with any
32687 existing name; I will use &"newdriver"& in what follows.
32689 Add to &_src/EDITME_& the line:
32691 <&'type'&>&`_NEWDRIVER=yes`&
32693 where <&'type'&> is ROUTER, TRANSPORT, AUTH, or LOOKUP. If the
32694 code is not to be included in the binary by default, comment this line out. You
32695 should also add any relevant comments about the driver or lookup type.
32697 Add to &_src/config.h.defaults_& the line:
32699 #define <type>_NEWDRIVER
32702 Edit &_src/drtables.c_&, adding conditional code to pull in the private header
32703 and create a table entry as is done for all the other drivers and lookup types.
32705 Edit &_Makefile_& in the appropriate sub-directory (&_src/routers_&,
32706 &_src/transports_&, &_src/auths_&, or &_src/lookups_&); add a line for the new
32707 driver or lookup type and add it to the definition of OBJ.
32709 Create &_newdriver.h_& and &_newdriver.c_& in the appropriate sub-directory of
32712 Edit &_scripts/MakeLinks_& and add commands to link the &_.h_& and &_.c_& files
32713 as for other drivers and lookups.
32716 Then all you need to do is write the code! A good way to start is to make a
32717 proforma by copying an existing module of the same type, globally changing all
32718 occurrences of the name, and cutting out most of the code. Note that any
32719 options you create must be listed in alphabetical order, because the tables are
32720 searched using a binary chop procedure.
32722 There is a &_README_& file in each of the sub-directories of &_src_& describing
32723 the interface that is expected.
32728 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32729 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32731 .makeindex "Option index" "option"
32733 .makeindex "Concept index" "concept"
32736 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32737 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////